IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 .%, 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 :/ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 :^ 1^ 12.0 
 
 ys II 1.4 
 
 i.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 rtV 
 
 iV 
 
 4^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 4ti 
 
 w^ °:*% 
 
 %' 
 
 
 % 
 
'o 
 
 ^.< 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHIVI/iCIVIH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historfcal Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Nottfs techniques et bibiiographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 D 
 
 C2i]oured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommag^e 
 
 □ Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur^e et/ou peliicul^e 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couvertjre manque 
 
 I I Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cart< s g^ographiques en couleur 
 
 □ Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 □ Coloured plates and/or iliustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 □ Bound with other material/ 
 Reili avec d'autres documents 
 
 □ 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 Lareliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion le long de la marge int6rieure 
 
 Blank leaves added du.ing restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties 
 lors dune restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas iti filmdes. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentairss suppl^mentaires; 
 
 L'Institut a microfilmd le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il tui a et« possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una 
 modification dans la m^thode normale de filmage 
 sont indequis ci-dessous. 
 
 I I Coloured pages/ 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagdes 
 
 □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaur^es et/ou pellicul^es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxeo/ 
 Pages ddcolorees, tachet^es ou piquees 
 
 □ Pages detached/ 
 Pages ddtachees 
 
 □ Showthruugh/ 
 Transparence 
 
 □ Quality of print varies/ 
 Quality indgale de I'impression 
 
 □ Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comorend du material sunniaman 
 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 n 
 
 Pages wholly or oartially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., nave been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 4t6 fi!m*es i nouveau de facon a 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu* ci-dessous, 
 ^°X 14X 18X 
 
 22X 
 
 J 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grfice i la 
 g6n6rositd de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover whan appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed o;- illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last prge with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol -^(meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 differsnt reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les Images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettetd de l'exemplaire filmd. et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprim6e sont film^s en commenpant 
 par le prem.'dr plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'iilustration. soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont film^s en commenpant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un de» symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole — »► signifie "A SUIVRE". le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul cliche, il est film6 d partir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammcs suivants 
 illustrent la m6thode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
^i^wnpnnippifi 
 
 ^C" 
 
 -i- .JUWwA- 
 
 I 
 
 li^ r 
 
 A COI 
 
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 liVrRODUCTORY LESSONS AND EXERCISES 
 IN LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, 
 
 BASED ON Cesar's commentaedss on the 
 
 GALLIC WAR I 
 
 WITH 
 
 A COMPLETE SYNOPSIS OF ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX 
 
 BT 
 
 ADAM CARRUTHERS, B.A, 
 
 Lecturer on Greek. University College. Torrnvto; 
 
 AND 
 
 J. C, ROBERTSON, B.A, 
 
 Lecturer on Greek. Victoria Unimr^ity. Toronto. 
 
 TORONTO. 
 
 VVILI^IAM BRIQOS. 
 
 TaE W. J. GAGE COMPANY (limited). 
 
7 
 
 ^3f 
 
 Entered, according to the Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand 
 eight hundred and ninety-two, by William Bkigos, Toronto, in tne OfBce of the 
 Minister of Agriculture, at Ottawa. 
 
 f' 
 
F^REKACE. 
 
 ,^ 
 
 «i 
 
 -,v> 
 
 '^s BOOK, it is hoped, y^ms^All^S^i^e the widespread 
 detnand in Ontario for a more suitable text-book in Latin than 
 those which have hitherto been used in oyr schools, and will fur- 
 nish the pupil with a better means of\cqairing early a reading 
 power m that language, as a necessary foundation for all sub- 
 sequent scholarship. 
 
 In any instance .vhere some departure has been made from the 
 usual methods, the one motive has been to make the work a more 
 practical instrument of training in the hands of the teacher. 
 
 The scope of the book is more extended than is usual in Latir 
 text-books, but there are many advantages in having a work which 
 shall contain all that will be required in the ordinary High School 
 course, with the exception of the authors prescribed from year to 
 year. 
 
 The order of the lessons has been caref uUy considered, and the 
 exercses have been so graded that a continuous progress ia pos- 
 ^ble wtn no sudden increase of difficulty at any one part 
 Scarcely any words or phrases are employed which are not 
 found in C»sar, so that the vocabulary the pupU acquires in 
 these lessons is of the same nature as that which he meets in 
 the prose author he reads first in his course. 
 
 In the method adopted in Part I., a working compromise be- 
 tween he older system and the so-caUed inductive method ha. 
 Oeea followed, avoiding, on the one hand, the mouotonon, tt..^.-. 
 
 «, 
 
 - iu-iiiwrj 
 
•KMiibm 
 
 IV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 work and almost total absence of inference drawing of the former, 
 and, on the other hand, the very groat indctiniteneHs and the con- 
 tinually and unexpectedly recurring difticultios of the latter ; but 
 the arrangement is such that the teacher is left to do all the real 
 teaching himself, and is free to adopt his own method of reaching 
 the desired goal. 
 
 Under the heading Observation, all the various points are 
 referred to which are required for the intelligent translation of 
 the exercise which f<jllow8, and sufticient help and illustration are 
 given to enable the pupil, under the teacher's guidance, to learn 
 by observation and inference the new usages, etc., which are 
 treated of in the exercise. For instance, in Lesson XXV. 
 examples are giveri of the ablative and the accusative of time — 
 from such examples the pupil can readily, under the direction 
 of the teacher, gain for himself the knowledge requii-ed to use 
 these constructions in the accompanying exercise. But if any 
 teacher prefers simply to tell his pupils the rule, and set them 
 to work to memorize and then apply it, he may do so as readily 
 with this work as with any other. It need not be said, however, 
 that the book is intended to suggest and make possible a better 
 vay than this. 
 
 Many more sentences are given in each exercise than may be 
 found advisable for a single lesson. There will thus be abundance 
 of material for review, for additional practice at difficult points, 
 and for a change in the routine of exercises from year to year. 
 By such a change new work is secured for the teacher, and fresh 
 practice for pupils who are not promoted, while the exercise can 
 be readily suited to the capacity of the students. 
 
 The supplementary exercises beginning on page 106 will, it is 
 believed, lend additional interest to the study of the language, 
 and, if introduced at the points suggested, will materially aid in 
 the progress of the pupil in reading connected sentences. 
 
I 
 
 PREFACE. ^ 
 
 In Part II., which is intended to accompany the reading of 
 tWir, the n.o8t important idioms in Latin are dealt with an far an 
 possible in what is thought to be the order of their importance, 
 this order being varied at times through due regard to the diffi- 
 culties of the points to be discussed. In the illustrative examples 
 the English sentence is given first, as the student in Latin prose is 
 not chiefly observing Latin usage, but endeavoring to find some 
 equivalent for the English which he is given to translate; and 
 moreover, by having his attention rest first on the English he is 
 more likely to catch the exact meaning of the sentence in that 
 tongue, the ignorance of which meaning is often a great draw- 
 back to the pupil's progress in writing correct Latin. The lessons 
 dealing with special usages are supplemented by a few exercises 
 in the writing of continuous prose Latin. As these exercises also 
 have for their basis the style and vocabulary of Caesar, the pupil 
 has the same model constantly before him throughout the book 
 and IS more likely to have developed a correct style of writing 
 narrative Latin after the manner of this model than if the 
 vocabulary and sentences had been taken at random from dif- 
 ferent authors. 
 
 Part III. is for reference mainly. The grouping of all the 
 p...ad,g„,» ,„ one plaee will be found a groat convenience, and 
 
 adapted for the purpose of comparison. 
 
 In the paradigms of the verb, no translations of the various 
 forms h,we been given. These should be learned in the intro 
 ductory les.sons of Part I., .and for use as a book of referene^tre 
 names of the tenses and moods should be sufflcient. Zl ^^ 
 djscourage the pernicious habit many students have of beta! 
 bhndly gu,ded, in their translations from or into Latin, by Z 
 —on. often necessarily inadequate, given side by id' Jth 
 the coujugafon in „.o.,t Latin gr,ammars and introduc^^ borks 
 
s:x 
 
 ▼i 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 r 
 
 w 
 
 i 
 
 The ordinary translations given for the subjunctive (e.g., amem, 
 I may or can love, mruirem, I might, could or would love) and 
 for the fmrticiples are much more misleading than helpful. 
 
 The synopsis of accidence and compendium of syntax are suffi- 
 ciently complete to cover the forms and usages met with in the 
 authors (in both prose and poetry) ordinarily read in High Schools 
 and Collegiate Institutes. Throughout Parts II. and III., the 
 more essential matter is as a rule distinguished from the less 
 essential by the use of different types. 
 
 In the exercises, examples and vocabularies, the quantity of all 
 vowels long by nature has been marked. This will be found 
 especially convenient in using the Roman method of pronunci- 
 ation. 
 
 'I 
 
 In order to make the book a complete manual of reference 
 for High School work in Latin, a few sections have been added 
 on the metre of Virgil. 
 
 Thanks are due for valuable hints and suggestions which have 
 been received from Mr. L. E. Embree, M.A., Principal of Jame- 
 son Avenue Collegiate Institute, Toronto, and from Mr. I. M. 
 Levan, B.A., Principal of Owen Sound Collegiate Institute. 
 
 J. C. Robertson. 
 Toronto, 1892. a. Cakruthers. 
 
 ' *. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 1 
 
 Part I— Introductory Lessons and Exorcises . 
 Part II.— Rules of Syntax and Exercises in Prose Composi- 
 
 *^"" .115 
 
 Part III.— Accidem;e, Compendium of Syntax and Vocabu- 
 
 ^^"•^^ 218 
 
 PART I. 
 
 Introductory Lessons and Exercises 
 
 LESSON 
 
 Introductory.— Pronunciation, K.yllabication, Accent. 
 
 I. Present Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and 11. . 
 II. Nominative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and 
 
 • • • • . 
 
 " • • 
 
 III. Accusative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and 
 
 IV. Genitive Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II. 
 
 V. Dative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II 
 Ad with Accusative 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 VI. Imperfect Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and IL 10 
 
 VII. Ablative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II. 
 
 Cum, m, a, ab, with Ablative . . . . n 
 
 VEIL Vocative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II. 
 
 Nouns m er and ir of Declension II. Use of -que. 13 
 
 IX. Nouns in uia o! Declension II. Gender . . . 16 
 
 X. Adjectives of Declensions I. and IL . . . .16 
 
»..jm , '■" "^" f 
 
 33 
 
 'H 
 
 • •• 
 Vlll 
 
 LESSON 
 
 XI. 
 XII. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 XV. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 x^^I. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 XIX. 
 XX. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 XXIV. 
 XXV. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Future Indicative Active of Conjugations I. nnd II 
 
 Masculine nml Feminine Nouns of Declension III. 
 
 Perfect Indicative Active of all C<^njugationH 
 
 Neuter Nouns of Declension III. 
 
 Pluperfect Indicative Active of aU Conjugations . 
 
 Prepositions <?, ah ad, cum, de, ex, in, inter, per, 
 post, jmyptcr, S9ne, trann 
 
 Future Perfect Indicative Active of all Coniuw- 
 tiens •' ^ 
 
 Adjectives of Declension III 
 
 Coniplenientary Infinitive (Active Voice) 
 
 Nouns of Declension IV. . 
 
 • • • • 
 
 Perfect Indicative Passive of all Conjugations 
 Ablative of Agent with a, ab 
 
 Pluperfect and Future Perfect Indicative Passive 
 of all Conjugations 
 
 Nouns of Declension V. Ordinal NunieraLs 
 
 iblative of Point of Tirae. 
 tion of Time . 
 
 PAOB 
 
 . 18 
 
 , 19 
 
 20 
 
 22 
 
 24 
 
 Accusative of Dura- 
 
 XXVI. 
 XXVII. 
 
 {I 
 
 XXVIII. 
 XXIX. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 XXXIV. 
 
 XXXV. 
 XXXVI. 
 
 Nouns of Declension III. with J-stems 
 
 Present, Imperfect and Future Indicative Passive 
 of Conjugations I. and II. 
 
 Regular Comparison of Adjectives 
 
 Indicative and Present Infinitive of sum. Predi- 
 cate Adjectives 
 
 Dative with Adjectives • . . . 
 
 Irregular Compariaon of Adjectives 
 
 Present Indicative Active and Passive of Coniu- 
 gations III. and IV. . "' 
 
 ■ • • • 
 
 Adjectives witli Genitive in -his . 
 
 • • • 
 
 Imperfect and Future Indicative Active and Pas- 
 sive of Conjugations III. and IV. . 
 
 Cardinal Numerals 
 
 • • • • » 
 
 Active Periphrastic Conjugation ... 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 28 
 29 
 30 
 82 
 34 
 
 36 
 38 
 
 39 
 40 
 
 42 
 43 
 
 44 
 46 
 46 
 
 48 
 49 
 
 6G 
 61 
 62 
 
LE880N 
 
 XXXVII. 
 XXXVIII. 
 XXXIX. 
 XL. 
 
 u^ 
 
 ::li. 
 
 CONTBNTa 
 
 U»oofMfc. Aco„„tive of Extent of Space 
 D» .v„ with Special Intransitive Verbs 
 iCeJutive Pronoun. 
 
 Passive PenphrH«tic Conjugation.' 
 
 XLII. 
 
 XLIII. 
 
 XLIV. 
 
 XLV. 
 
 XL VI. 
 XLVII 
 XL VIII, 
 
 Conjunctions «,«<,,/, ^„„, „. • 
 
 ^^Y''^ 'i^, with fie Imlicalive ^'^^''«^' **'^"' 
 
 XLIX. 
 
 L. 
 
 LI. 
 
 PerHonuI Pronouns, e^/o, ^,7, ,-, 
 
 Dative of Agent with Gerundives 
 Reflexive Pronoun sii7 P, • ^ ' 
 
 i-erfect Participle Passive 
 
 Verb8in-^5ofCo.ijt nation -I ' 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns, hlc, Ule, is 
 
 P-ent Participle Active. Present Iniu^tiv; Pas-' 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns, .^e,,,;^ 
 Ablative Abeoxute 
 
 Interrogative Prorouns 
 
 LHL 
 LIV. 
 LV. 
 LVI. 
 VII. 
 
 LVTU. 
 
 LIX. 
 
 LX. 
 
 LXI. 
 LXII, 
 
 Deponent Verbs . 
 
 Quam with 
 
 PAOB 
 
 . 53 
 . 66 
 . 66 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 65 
 
 67 
 
 ea 
 
 69 
 71 
 72 
 74 
 
 ?6 
 
 78 
 
 Ablative of Specification. Quau^ithr * • ' ^® 
 Accusative and Infinitive ^"'^^ "'^^ ^-P-^^ivo 79 
 
 Accusative and Infinitive 
 
 Genitive and Ablative of Characteristic 
 
 Present and Perfect Infinitive Passive T fl 'v ' 
 of Deponents. Dative of Purpoi "^''''^ 
 
 ^'ilr'.''™- -^ Accompanying Circuin: 
 
 ^'l:f ^*^«"bi"netive Active. 
 ^»^. C-wm with Subjunctive 
 "ossum 
 
 * • • 
 
 e Active. Sub- 
 Subjunctive of 
 
 81 
 
 84 
 
 85 
 
 87 
 
 88 
 
 89 
 91 
 
 92 
 
i ' 
 
 X CONTEIITS. 
 
 LESSON 
 
 LXIII. Vdo, nald, malo 
 
 LXIV. Subordinate Clauses in Indirect Narration 
 
 LXV. Fero. 
 
 LXVI. Subjunctive of Purpose 
 LXVII. Edjw . 
 LXVIII. Gerund . 
 
 LXIX. Gerundive Construction 
 TjXX. Indefinite Pronouns. 
 Supplementary Exercises 
 Review Exercises in Accidence. 
 
 PA<2BJ 
 
 . ,94 
 • 95 
 . 97 
 . 98 
 . 100 
 . 101 
 . 102 
 . 104 
 . 106 
 . 110 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Rules of Svntax and Exercises in Prose Composition. 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 I Order of words ; concords ; aecusative and Inflnltive ; 
 
 verbs oi m-<miising, etc. ; verbs of saymg s.nd thmkiiu, 
 used personally in the passive ; phrases such as 
 certior fieri, spem habere, etc.; complementary mtini- 
 tive ; coepl, void, jubeo, etc 
 
 II. Final clauses with ut (utl), m, qm, quo; verbs of^W^ 
 exhorting, peYsuading, etc.': sequence of tenses t/ at 
 nobody, that nothing, etc. ; connectives with negative 
 final clauses ; verbs with two constructions 
 
 III Consecutive clauses with nt {utl) and nt non ; rela- 
 Uve clauoes of characteristic ; clauses of characteristic 
 after dlgnm, etc.; clauses with qum; sequence of 
 tenses 
 
 115 
 
 123 
 
 126 
 
 IV. Questions direct and Indirect or d^P^'^^d^^J ' .^^"I 
 introduced ; uses of nonne, num and -ne ; indirect 
 question found with verbs meaning ieorn, <^«. «««', 
 etc.; use of the tenses in dependent qu?stion«, 
 
 English abstract nouns frequeudy cj^pxcSoC.. .»- 
 
 by dependent clauses .••••' 
 
 129 
 
PAdB 
 
 . 94 
 • 96 
 . 97 
 . 98 
 . 100 
 . 101 
 . 102 
 . 104 
 . 106 
 . 110 
 
 OSITION. 
 
 ;ive; 
 
 ikhuj 
 h as 
 ifini- 
 
 115 
 
 that 
 ;ative 
 
 rela- 
 sristic 
 iCe of 
 
 how 
 
 direct 
 ',, see, 
 dons ; 
 T .o>.ir« 
 
 123 
 
 126 
 
 129 
 
 1 
 
 CONTENTS ^. 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 V. Ablative absolute ««h «* ^^®* 
 
 how best transited !hrr"*'*r^^ equivalents, 
 
 when ab atTve absoluto^ n^ ^^'"^"*" ^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 . ablative ab solute ; l^J^^^wM^^^^^ ' T''^^^^ '^ '^' 
 
 the accusative Tverb^ with fr ^""^ '^'^'''' "^'^^ 
 fr^wr, etc.: verbs of «/.^^ 5 ablative; ^.^or, 
 
 131 
 
 1.35 
 
 138 
 
 140 
 
 ""'"• ^rccusaC\*Iltre^-,/-^^^^^^ ^^^ genitive j 
 and ablative two dlu^est^'r?-^'"^"'.' ^««"«ative 
 with accusative ^^^fotS;J:^^^*^-« - -nnection 
 
 IX. Conditional clauses; distinction of conrlif,'.. ' • / 
 (1) present or past, (2) future - i J .'''^- '"*« 
 contrary to the f„c and otherwis? r? ^^^Jtfons 
 contrary to the fact and otW^e hT "^" J* «"« 
 in the more vivid and in fT ' , """^ ^''"^^^^j^'ns 
 English present represents ^nH ^'''. ^^^^^ ^'^"n ; 
 
 in Latin!' -reguLSr^^th^tgard o'"" ^'^^^^ 
 tense ; possum, debeo eto «lf ^ ? ^ "^°°'^ and 
 
 conditional se,;te„oe:i„tdir:^r„rS„'™'''™"" S,, 
 X. Clauses of concession ; efv? etmm.7 * *- * 
 
 accusative with verbs n? f h ^^^ ""'^^ ^^^ ^erb ; 
 intransitive vel'tm Lntd" wTh^n ' '^^^^^^«^ 
 cognate accusative; accusativp of . P^^^Positions ; 
 
 sative in exclamations? verilw^b 7 '''""" ' ^^^"■ 
 IT ^ , ' ^^ ^'^^ <^^o accusatives. U8 
 
Xll 
 
 CONTENTS, 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 PAGE 
 
 with nomen ed; dative with compounds of mm; 
 dative of apparent agent; dative of reference, 
 ethical dative ; dative with verbs 
 
 151 
 
 i 
 
 Xni Uses of the genitive ; possessive genitive ; subjective 
 genitive ; objective genitive ; partitive genitive ; when 
 mrtitive genitive not used ; genitive of character- 
 Sic ; genLve of definition ; objective genitive with 
 adjectives ; genitive of respect ; predicate genuive ; 
 omission of governing word ; extensive use of object- 
 ive genitive ; verbs with genitive . • • • ■»-'^* 
 XIY Uses of the ablative; ablative proper; source, separa- 
 tTon and cause; place from which; ablative with 
 comparatives ; use of plus, mmns, etc. ; instrumental 
 ahlatire; means, manner, accompaniment and char- . 
 acteristic ; difference between the genitive and the 
 ablative of characteristic ; price and value ; degree 
 of difference ; ablative of specification ; locattve abla- 
 tive; place in which; pregnant constx action ; time 
 when ; ablative absolute ; ablative wita dicimis, etc 
 and with adjectives of plenty and want ; verbs with 
 the ablative •, agency, how expressed ; m expres^ng 
 place from ^vliich, several phrases taken closely with ^^^ 
 the verb ...•••'** 
 
 XV Verbal nouns ; Infinitive ; historical infinitive ; verb 
 ^^' "^peculiarities of infinitive ; gerund, ho^ ^f jT^h 
 
 prcmouns, sometimes used as a pure substantive , 
 supine in -urn, how used ; supine m -S, how used . 
 
 XVI Verbal adjectives; the gerundive ; general distinc- 
 
 don as regards use between gerund and gerundive ; 
 eerundive of deponents ; passive periphrastic c(mju- 
 Sation ; intransitive verbs used impersonally ; pre- 
 dicative usb of gerundive with do, trado, etc., 
 participles ; present ; perfect ; future ; chief uses of 
 participles 
 
 XVII. Expressions of connnand ; imperative and substi- 
 
 tutes ; prohibition, how expressed; Independent 
 „«es of the subjunctive ; hortative or JUBSive sub- 
 iunctive; potential subjunctive; subjunctive ni dubi- 
 tative and rhetorical questi(ms ; ne the proper nega- 
 tive ; neve or nen the usual connective ; indicative 
 in certain expressions 
 
 XVIII. Verbs of fearing, hindering, doubting^ objecting 5 
 construction with verbs of Jeanng ; u4icu v, {ne no,i, 
 used, when ne ; vereor as a modal verb ; construction 
 
 163 
 
 161 
 
 i:o 
 
CONTEND. 
 
 • t 4 
 
 XUl 
 
 EXEECISB 
 
 witL™^;'? lift*""''' etc.; common expressionj 
 stmcC'. «»»"»""*; verbs with different con- 
 
 XX. Uses of quod, quonlan, „„d euin, mmrf with indint 
 
 ui concessive ; cwm (w^Z/en, wJienever) with nrii.i-.rv 
 tenses ; cum {n^,en\ with historical tinles ; cnsi In 
 which cum (when) takes the indicative of historical 
 tenses; cum . . . turn "istoncai 
 
 ^n-rZLrdeno?,;''' "^^^""?g;'^^^-^; an^e^^m and 
 pnasquam aenotiiiij mere rmorifv t^f fi*«^^ . ^ j.- 
 
 purpose or a resultVevenS ^ ' ' ^'"^*'"^ 
 
 ^^"" fin«^l '■^i''***'^ "*' *'«"J»netlve prono n • used in 
 
 PAGE 
 
 172 
 
 174 
 
 176 
 
 180 
 
 182 
 
 187 
 
XIV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 m 
 
 KXEBGI^^E 
 
 PAOX 
 
 iect, object, appositive ; of result, subject, object, 
 apm)8itive ; quod clauses, subject, object, appositive ; 
 dependent questions, subject, object, appositive; 
 verbs with more than one construction . • •■«-»* 
 
 XXVI Indirect narration — 5ratl6 obliqua ; difference 
 ' between direct and indirect discourse ; rules for 
 changing direct into indirect narration ; verbs ; pro- 
 nouns ; adverbs ; exceptions to these rules ; informal 
 indirect narration ; indirect statement ; indirect com- 
 mand; indirect question : examples illustrating rules ; 
 subjunctive due to attraction 
 
 XXVII. Roman mode of reckoning time; Cal?n<is ; Ides ; 
 Nones; contracted forms; leap year; dates in the 
 Christian era - - . . 
 
 199 
 
 207 
 
 XXVIII. Exercises for continuous translation; figurative 
 language; examples illustrating different modes of 
 expression ; quasi-idiomH ; different modes of viewing 
 the action ; in Latin the verb the significant word, in 
 English the i^oun, examples illustratmg this; use ot 
 abstract nouns not so common in Latin as in linglish ; 
 a clause often used instead ; precise meaning of the 
 English word should be noted ; periodic construction 
 in Latin; connection of clauses and sentences m 
 Latin ; Exercises 28, 29, 30, 31, 32 and 33 . • 
 
 210 
 
 PART IIL 
 
 Accidence, Compendium of Syntax, and Vocabularies. 
 
 H i 
 
 I. Paradigms of Inflection. 
 
 SECtlON 
 
 1- 9. The Noun 
 
 27-40 
 
 (R€ 
 
 41-46. The Verb (Irregular Conjugation) 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 218 
 
 10-16. The Adjective (Declension, Comparison, Numerals) . 223 
 
 17. The Adverb ^^g 
 
 18-26. The Fronoun . • • • • ' * ' ^^^ 
 
 lar Conjugation). 
 
 246 
 
PAOX 
 
 ect, 
 ve ; 
 ive ; 
 . 194 
 
 mce 
 for 
 pro- 
 'mal 
 !om- 
 iles; 
 . 199 
 
 des ; 
 the 
 
 itive 
 }8 of 
 wing 
 d, in 
 se of 
 ;lish ; 
 E the 
 ction 
 38 in 
 
 207 
 
 210 
 
 lULAfilES. 
 
 Ob) 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 218 
 . 223 
 . 229 
 , 229 
 . 234 
 . 246 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 SECTION "■ '^""^^^^^^ o^ Accidence. 
 
 47-54. Nouns. 
 55-58. Adjectives 
 
 59. Adverbs 
 60-63. Pronouns 
 64-72. Verbs . 
 
 73. Prepositions 
 
 74. Conjunctions 
 75-76. Derivatives and Compounds 
 
 III. CojipENDiuM OF Syntax. 
 
 77. Apposition . 
 
 78. Attributive Words 
 
 79. The Predicate . 
 80-86. The use of the Cases 
 
 87. The use of the Prepositions. 
 
 88. The use of Adjectives . 
 89- 95. The use of the Pronouns . 
 
 ^ 96. The Active and Passive Voices 
 9/ -j^9. The Indicative and Subjunctive 
 
 100. The Imperative 
 
 101. The Infinitive 
 
 102. The Participle 
 
 103. The Gerund 
 
 104. The Gerundive 
 
 105. The Supine . . . , 
 
 106. General Rules of Oratio Obllqua 
 
 107. Sequence of Tenses 
 
 108. Adverbs 
 
 109. Conjunctions 
 
 110. Order of Words . 
 111-119. Metre. DactyHc Hexameter 
 
 [Latin-English Vocabulary 
 lEnglish-Latin Vocabulary 
 llnde? , 
 
 XV 
 
 page 
 
 . 252 
 
 . 258 
 
 . 261 
 
 . 262 
 
 265 
 
 272 
 
 272 
 
 273 
 
 . 376 
 . 276 
 . 276 
 . 277 
 . 286 
 . 288 
 . 288 
 . 292 
 . 293 
 . 297 
 . 298 
 . 299 
 
 . 300 
 
 . 300 
 
 . 301 
 
 . 301 
 
 . 302 
 
 . 303 
 
 . 303 
 304 
 305 
 
 313 
 
 324 
 
 344 
 
t\ 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ■ i 
 
 SI 
 
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 INTRODUCTOKY LESSONS AND EXERCISES. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN. 
 I. Sounds of the Letters.^ 
 
 Vowels.^ 
 
 a is sounded like the first a in aha, papa. 
 
 second a in aha, papa. 
 
 e in met. 
 
 e in theij. 
 
 i in sit. 
 
 i in machine. 
 
 o in obey, or the first o in oho. 
 
 o in Iwly, or the second o in oTio. 
 
 w in^tf^, or 00 in foot. 
 
 00 in 600^. 
 
 & 
 
 ir 
 
 II 
 
 3 
 
 rt 
 
 II 
 
 S 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 ir 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 If 
 
 M 
 
 6 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 tt 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 Q 
 
 II 
 
 11 
 
1 I 
 
 2 
 
 PUIMAUY F<ATIN HOOK. 
 
 Dlphthoiiffii. 
 
 In (lipluhon^s both vowels shoukl l)c sounded in ihcii 
 proper t)rder. 
 
 lio is Houndoil nmcli liko tluwii' in /xrni. 
 
 I 
 
 au 
 
 oe 
 
 ei 
 
 eu 
 
 ui 
 
 M 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 II 
 11 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 
 Oil, ill <HU', house. 
 itHi in tnidc.^ 
 ci in iv'»)i. 
 ar in hlnr, 
 nr in urvp. 
 
 ronnoniiDtn. 
 
 Consonnnls are for ll)e luost i)art pronounced as in English, 
 widi the lollowing exceptions : 
 
 c is -ilwjiys soinukul as m couif, novor m u\ cent. 
 
 g 
 
 B 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 in ijKmi', 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 (jnn. 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 in thin, 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 his. 
 
 t 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 in uativv, 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 ncttim 
 
 X 
 
 II 
 
 It 
 
 in (WT, 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 exact. 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 y in yet. 
 ir in trivit. 
 
 
 
 
 n before c, <h '/"> ••'» '^ sounded iis mj, or as n in ankle. 
 II. Syllabication. 
 
 In the following list the words in parentheses are English 
 words to he contrasted with tl>e Latin; in other cases the 
 Tallin and the English words to be contrasted have the same 
 spelling, the quantity of the Latin words being marked.*^ 
 
 Die, salve, miles, pares, mrnie, care, honor, comes, cdnsilmSSy 
 jxthiM (|xt/hO, alien »s (alien), resisto (resist), poss?ssio {possi^ss, pos^ 
 session), coHdemno {condemn), Icirifmis {legion), festhw {hasten), 
 nfiptialis {nJiptia,), auHiH {auction), dPsertor {deserter), scena {scene), 
 regnnm {rcitjnimj). 
 
 1. It is held by some that ae is sounded like ai in aisle, and oe like oi in coin. 
 t! Throughout this oook, all Iomr voweis arc indicjvtctl, except in footnotes; 
 vowels not marked are acconlingly to he rcgartii -.1 as short. 
 
 
PAIIT I.— INTnomrcTOKY LESSONS. 8 
 
 01,..,v..«„. Wl,„t, „„„ ),„ ,„„„,„,, ,„,„, „ f„ . 
 
 ..„, W of „,|.,„t K,tu,r„ i,. Ut,n, (/,) „f tl.„ „„mh..r!,f * , :, 
 
 III. Accent. 
 te'-io 
 
 ««"• ««r.vo c«n'„ul 
 
 Oh«,rvutl«„. -How an, wor<l« of two syllul^leH Hccor.tod ? 
 
 coii-HiM,' HUH |»«t«n't.-.H .- ' ^♦•"-no-UB 
 
 LESSON I. 
 ('0 Oppa«:na.n«H, we attack. j„,;,„.„,, ,,, ^,^^^,._ 
 
 VuIneramuH. i/;e t.onnd lien.oven.uH, we remove 
 
 W Opp„«:„a„t ^/.,, attack, j„„«„,. ,;,,,,, ,,^^^^. ^ ^^ 
 
 Vulnerant, </i«t/ wound, 
 ('■) Vulnemt, Ac, s/^e or tY, 
 
 ivinmds. 
 
 Convooajs, yon call toyether 
 
 Roinovc^lfc, they remove. 
 Obtlnot, he, she or it, occupies. 
 
 (When speakintr to one person.) 
 
 Keniove^, you remove. 
 
 (Xh, «co„a ,«t .,„.Me u cued th.^„„„, .h, thW ,„, ,^ «^„^,,, ' ■■"■• 
 
mmmmmmw 
 
 
 \ 
 
 4 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Convooatlii, yon call together. Beinov^tls, you remove, 
 (When speaking to more than one person.) 
 (d) Ynlnorb, I vH)und. J abco, I order. 
 
 Oppuffno, / attack. Obtlneo, / occvpy. 
 
 Obsorvtitlon. — How does IiHtin oxprcHs the persons ive, they, 
 he, she, it, yon and /, us subjects of the verb I What two classes 
 of verb are represented i What irregularity is there in joining 
 the personal endings to the first part i^ 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 Vocrtbulary, 
 
 (aro and ere are used to indicate -a and -e- verbs respectively.) 
 
 Adequito, are, ride up. 
 Convoco, are, silmmon, call 
 
 together. 
 Haboo, ere, have. 
 Imperd, a^e, give orders. 
 Jubeo, ere, order. 
 Navlgo, are, sail. 
 Obtlneo, ere, occupy. 
 
 Oppugno, are, attack. 
 Pared ere, be obedient. 
 I*ar6, are, jyfepare, procure. 
 Perinoveo, ere, idarm. 
 Propero, are, hasten. 
 Removed, ere, remove. 
 Teneo, ere, hold. 
 Vulnero, are, loound. 
 
 I.— 1. Permoves. 2. Tenemus. 3. Convocant. 4. Paratis. 6. 
 Imperamus. 6. Jubet. 7. Parenius. 8. Vulnerant. 9. Habeo. 
 10. Jubetis. 11. Tenet. 12. Adequitant. 13. Removet. 14. 
 Propero. 15. Oppugnatis. 16. Obtines. 
 
 II.— 1. They hasten.^ 2. He sails. 3. I hold. 4. You (stngrw- 
 lar) order. 5. You (plural) have. 6. We prepare. 7. She has. 
 8. I occupy. 9. He wounds. 10. It alarms. 11. They remove. 
 12. She is obedient. 13. We give orders. 14. You (plural) 
 alarm. 15. They attack. 16. You (singular) ride up. 
 
 1. Caution.— It roust not be supposed that the ending ia -amtis or -ant, -emus 
 or -ent. Instead, the same endinp, -r.ms, -nt, etc., are added to forms (representing 
 verbal ideas) which differ in that in some cases the final letter is a, in others e. (It 
 will be seen later that other final letters are found in the first part.) The only 
 difference between these a and e verbs is that, before the personal ending o, a final 
 a is dropped, while a final e is retained. 
 
 2. These -a and -e verbs are generally called verbs of the first and second conjuga- 
 tions respectively. There are in all four oonjuiratinns. or divisions "f verba a"""'^'"" 
 to form." ' ----- s 
 
 :.li 
 
 •'>»,, V 
 
PAKT I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 (a) Vulneramn-. ,,^ wound or u^ are woundinq 
 ^"bent. they order uv they are orderil 
 
 Oppu«:„at. he attacks or he is attuckiny. 
 
 RomanI, the Romana. 
 
 Nuutuo, the sailors. 
 a lienteiMut cnlls toyether. 
 the lieutenants order, 
 the victory alarms, 
 victories alarm. 
 
 (/^) Romrinns, a Roman 
 Nautu, tlie sailor. 
 l^t'ffutuN oonvocat» 
 Ltiffjitljubont, 
 V'lc-fcorlrt porniovvt, 
 Vlotorlae porniovoiit. 
 
 foZ "C'l^e 7,:V7 """•"' "'r™-"<l™g in ,„ and „ 
 
 .hen K;.,H„al::'.::r:::i:r4:'' - "™" '» «■« -"j-*. »<• 
 
 KXERCISE II. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 Bapbarus, I, m., barbarian. r„ii , /v , , 
 
 Belga. ae, m., ^.^..a,, („ , ,f '^""";' '* "^•; ^-'^ (* native of 
 
 a tribe in Gaul). ^ , - '^'' "^"^^'^^ ^^"^^ Gaul). 
 
 Copla, ao, f. (in singular) sur. ^'""T^^ '' "'" ^^^^^^'*«^^- 
 
 ply, abundance, pknii, ; (in K,-.„.i- - '' '™°'^- 
 
 «e""an„„ ,. „,, Gern^u. v^r.;"! r"^™"- 
 
 wiecoria, ae, t., victory. 
 
 I.~l. Legatus adequitat. 2. Fusa nermnv«f ^ r,- 
 spectant. 4. Nautae properant T K ? .^- Roman ^ • 
 
 nent. 7. Barbarl adequitTt g P ^.''"'^^T' ^^ ^'^"^ 
 oppagnant. 10. BelgTobtin^^^^^^^ '• ^-- 
 
 13. German! habent 14 rv^"- "• ^^P^^^^atis. 12. Jubes. 
 
 movent 16 iNf«T->V~- P'"" ^^P^^"^"*- 15. Victoriae per. 
 
6 
 
 PIUMAHY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I 
 
 IT.— 1. Wo are awaiting. 2. Tlioy are removing. 3. He is 
 holding. 4. Tho Hciujulnuis rido u[>. 5. The victory abiruiH. ft. 
 The uUit'H Hunimon. 7- Tlio liuu^unnnt in Huiliiig. 8. Tlio wiilor 
 re'uoveH. 0. You are preparing. 10. Thi' Belgians have. H. 
 Tho forces occupy. 12. The Roman is ordering. 13. We are 
 obedient. 14, Tho lieutenant is giving orders. 15. The Gauls 
 occupy. 16. The barbarians are attacking. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 victoria RoiiianoH perinovjt, the vidorij alarms the Pomnns. 
 LegatuH victorliiin nuntlut, the lieutenant amtounces the victory. 
 Cupiue li'satuin exspectunt, the farcen are aitxiitiny the lieutenant. 
 RoinanI vupliiH exspectiint, the Unmans arz awaitimj the forces. 
 
 ObHervatlon. — What different forms have nouns in us and a, in 
 tho singular antli the plural, when they are used as the subject, and 
 when they are used as the object of the verb ?^ How does the 
 order of tho Latin sentences differ from that of the English 1"^ 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Animus. I, m., spirit, mind, Nuntlus, I, m., mess>inger, mes- 
 
 heart. 
 Captlvus, I, m., captive. 
 Comporto, are, bring in. 
 Conflriud, are, enco^irage, estah- 
 
 liah, arouse. 
 Equu8, 1, m., horse. 
 Et, and. 
 
 sage. 
 
 Perturbo, are, throw into con- 
 fusion, disturb. 
 
 Praecia, ae, f., plunder. 
 
 Provlncla, ae, f., province. 
 
 Ifugfuo, hre, fight. 
 
 Servus, I, m., slave. 
 
 Lablenus, I, m., Labienns (a Snpero, are, conquer, prexa^l.' 
 
 Roman's name). 
 Locus, I, m., place, poaition, 
 
 nround. 
 
 Tribunus, I, ro , i'-',hu'> (a 
 military officer among tho 
 Romans). 
 
 1. The fonu used as the subject is called the Nominative Case, ihat used as the 
 object the Ammtive Cane. 
 
 2. It must ,■ ' :>l n, apposed that this order is invariable in Latin, but it should be 
 retained ty r • - oipner ^ntil he has learned something of the causes (or at least, 
 some of the t !?,: »• - : v . ; .tion from the general rule. This applies to all other general 
 rules of orics lo <'ij;ich attention may be directed. 
 
t»ART t— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. ^ 
 
 T. -J. 0^1)1349 superat. 2. Prnodfttn cotnportftnms. 3. Romftnl 
 locum obtiuent. 4. Lriibiotuis iuiuoh luuuivct. 5. Lpgatos ot 
 tribQnoH convocaH. 6. Victurino aniiuOw <:oufirmant, 7. Hervl 
 pttgnuat. 8. NnutiumexHpectat. 9. Oaptlvoi ImbCtw. 10. Btlgao 
 GalloH superuiit. 11. B vrburl Romanoa at HocioH perturbant. 12. 
 BelgftH permovet^^. Hi. Cdpiaiii Imbed. 14. Tunna copiftw pertur- 
 bat. 15. Victoriaui nantifiH. 10. Nautao Ic-giltum exspectant. 
 
 n. — 1. The slav ; are wounding the niossengor. 2. The forces 
 occupy the province. 3. The Gonnans concpiur tlio GhuIh. 4. 
 The lieutenant concjuers the GennanH and the Belgians. 5. The 
 tribunes await the allies. 0. You attack the \ lace. 7. It arouses 
 the spirit. 8. The flight alarms the barbarians. 9. The; sailor 
 announces the flight. 10. I am summoning the lieutenants. 11. 
 The forces are awaiting the s(|uadrons. 12. They have plenty. 
 13. It disturbs the hearts. 14. You {plural) are fighting. 15. 
 The sailors prevail. 16. The captive is obedient. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Eqnos legatorum removet, he removes the horses of the lieu- 
 tenants. 
 SocloH Belffarum exspectat, he avnits the allies of the Belgians. 
 Fuga turiiiae aniinuiii legratl the flicjht of the squadron alarms 
 
 perinovet, the mind of the lieutenant. 
 
 Equuiii legatl removet, he removes the lieutenant's horse. 
 
 Observation.— How is of expressed in Latin ? What is the 
 position of the word translated by means of of, or by the English 
 possessive ?^ 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 Aeduns. I, m., an Aeduan; in Contlneo, ere, hem in, restrain. 
 
 plural, the Aedui (a tribe in Cotta, ae, m., Cotta (a Roman's 
 
 Gaul). name). 
 
 Clbus, 1, m., food. Do, are, give, grant. 
 
 Coucllio, are, win over. FIllus, I, m., son. 
 
 1. This form ia known as the Genitive Case. 
 
_JiJ!U!rTJJH i - 
 
 i 
 
 8 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■1 ! 
 
 Oalba, ae, m., Galba (a Ro- Occnpo, are, seize. 
 
 mail's name). 
 Inopia, ae, f., wantf scarcity. 
 Natura, am, f., nature. • 
 Obsldeo, ere, blockade, beset. 
 
 Porta, ae, f., gate. 
 Probo, are, favor. 
 Sententla, ae, f., opinion. 
 Via, ae, f., road. 
 
 I.— 1. RomanI copias Germanorum superant. 2. Sententiam 
 Cottae p.robamus. 3. Sententia Labieni superat. 4. Inopia cibi 
 Belgas perturbat. 5. Equum Galbae vulnerat. 6. Socii 3elga- 
 rum locum oppugnant. 7. Natiira loci Aeduos continet. 8. At \m 
 portas occupant. 9. Victoriae copiarum animos sociorum confir- 
 mant. 10. Barbari copias parant. 11. Copiae Belgarum locum 
 obsident. 12. Labienus copiam captlvorum habet. 13. Fuga 
 turmarum Belgas permovet. 14. Equos legatorum removet. 15. 
 Victorian! legatl nuntiat. 
 
 II.— 1. We are removing the horse of the lieutenant. 2. The 
 allies of the Aedui give food. 3. Galba's sons procure horses. 4. 
 The victory of Ga^^a arouses the Belgians' spirit. 5. The forces 
 of the allies beset 'the roads. C. The tribune's son has plenty of 
 horses. 7. You are wounding the sons of Cotta and Labienus. 8. 
 The lieutenant wins over the Belgians. 9. The Belgians are 
 awaiting the forces of the Gauls. 10. A squadron rides up. 11. 
 They favor the place. x2. The tribunes and the lieutenants 
 restrain the forces. 13. We favor the opinions of the lieutenants 
 and the tribunes. 14. Galba procures forces. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 (a) Legato vlctoriam nuntiat, he announces the victory to the 
 
 ^ lieutenant. 
 
 Provlnclae Imperat, he gives orders to the province. 
 
 CopiXs Imperat. h^ gives orders to the forces. 
 
 Soclls praedam donat, he presents the plunder to the allies. 
 
 Observation. -How is to before a noun expressed in Latin? 
 What is the position of the word translated by means of to?^ 
 
 r.^J,^.7l!^J"^^!2'^^ ^^^^^^ ^^•^•' ^^^ wo'fl translated by means of to) is more freaupntlv 
 
 Suow eSer oXl^fv h %'*ir* f^'^i^'}''' '^'^ '» >"«'* S theTentencerwS 
 rouow, either order may be followed. This form is known as the Dative Case. 
 
PABT I—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 (i) Ad prdvlnclom nroDerat 1 i ^ 
 
 At lega.6, „de,„,L; f *■!*" '* '» "" /"«• 
 
 Ad l„„„,„ „g4,;, J- Y "*' "P '" "'' ««,tena„«,. 
 
 Obgervatlon How is /« h«f 
 
 when it is used in a phrase imZn^ "''? """^'''''^ '*" ^^^in, 
 P8) .on ? *^"'^^''' impjying motion towards a place or 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Agrlcaltura. ae, f., a^WcnZ^r., Pertln.- - 
 
 farming. ''ertlneo, ere, extend. 
 
 9 
 
 farming. 
 Dono, arerpresent 
 Evoeo, are, challenge. 
 f nia, ae. f., (?a7t(/Aie^. 
 'talla, ae, f., Italy. 
 I^^8ratu8, I, m., ambassador 
 
 Praestd, are, 6e superior. 
 
 l^Sna,ae,$., battle, Jighting. 
 Responded, t.-e, repZy. 
 Rhenus, I, m., the Mine. 
 Blpa, ae, f., bank. 
 
 ^^^^^'fi^^f., wood, forest. 
 
 Materia, ae f // j, SUva, a 
 
 ^' a«. I., timber, mate- Sf.wi - - 
 
 rials. "*'" ®*"^«"' «re, pay a«en^ion. 
 
 Murus, I, m., loall. "^^nla, ae, f., pardo7i. 
 
 J ^*'"*"«' are, come o/fen. 
 
 GalhRr.manosadpfign,^^:',,^, ^^ Cop.„ praedam donat. 6. 
 
 student 9. Aedu« i„,pU. lo Id b^,"?*""™ "" "^''^'W''^ 
 Silva ad locum pertinet 12 B„; '^''/'f»« a'lequitamus. 11 
 
 Roma^b conciliat. """ '''8"'"' "J"'- W. LegMus Belg^ 
 
 II.— 1. Labienus hastenti fo fin^ * 
 'he forces of the Beigiai 3" w ZT H '^ ''''" "" ™P»- *« 
 They grant pardon to the captive^ 6 -^f'" *° *^ P--''"''"^^- *■ 
 the alhes of the Germans to the Ro„ """ha^vdors win over 
 
 I 'he walls. 7. Thewoodse tetjfoTRh'- '^"^^ — ''»»„ to 
 to the province. 9. He announces the )""'■ *• ^ ^ive orders 
 O-™'-.!"- you are obedi nt''^;*?^.'","-"- to the 
 i-qja„™„s riue up to the barbariaiis "'.oTT'" ""'• "' '^e 
 I -''• I^hienus replies to ths 
 

 10 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ■'' ; 
 
 
 ambassadors. 13. He challenges the Gaul to battle. 14 The 
 forces of the Germans ride up to the banks of the Rhme. 15. He 
 summons the lieutenants to the province. ^ 
 
 If! 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 (a) Oppugnabat, he was attacking, or he used to attack. ^ 
 
 Jubebamus, we were ordering, or we used to order. 
 
 con vocabant, they were summoning, or they used to mmm,on. 
 
 Permovebatls. you {^\nv.) were alarming, or yon used to alarm. 
 
 , , Vulneraba«, you (sing.) were wounding, or yon used to wound. 
 
 ' \h) Jubebam, I was ordenng, or I used to oi'der. 
 
 Convocabam. Ucas summoning, or I used to summon. 
 
 Observatlon.-The new element in the Latin verbs. What 
 idea does this new element express? What new personal ending 
 is used? What^point of time is referred to ?i 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Comvle6,^re, fill up, f II. Hiemo. are, pass the .vinter, 
 
 ¥lrm6, are, strengthen. winter. _ 
 
 Fo«sa, ae. f., trench, moat. In.petro. are. oUam one s re- 
 
 Funda, ae, f., sling. T^^^^- ^h^.iu^np 
 
 Gallia, ae, f., Gaul (the country Pr6voe5, are, call out, challenge. 
 
 now called France). Remaneo, ere, remain. 
 
 Gladius, I. m., sword. Revoco, are, recall. 
 
 I -1. Exspectabavius. 2. Oppugnabant. 3. Complebat. 4. 
 Habetis. 5. Studebam. 6. Perturbant. 7.Kemovebat. 8. 
 Hiemabant. 9. Fosses compl.bant. 10. Gladmm nautee da- 
 batis. 11. Ad Galliam ventitabatis. 12. Remanemus. 13. Ro- 
 manos ad pugnam evocabant. 14. Impetratis. lo. Fundam 
 habeo. 16. Locum firmabant. 
 
 2. Put his, her. their, my, our, your, in place of oM% as the eon.c.. =»b.- .-- 
 
PABT t.— iNTRODUCTOtiy LESSONS. H 
 
 «. We are mi f P the L:: "^ T' /; '^ "^^ '" ''"«• 
 10. 1 was hastening to Italv It w '"'»*"'g the wall. 
 
 .seat ,_. la Ve/rfd to"hafen:. rZS- ^f i' 
 obtains her reouest- lA T^i,^ , remain. 15. bhe 
 
 request. 16. They were strengthening the waUs. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 (a) Legatum funda vulnerat. 
 
 he wounds the lieutenant with a 
 sling. 
 
 he hastens with a squadron. 
 
 he wounds the lieutenant ivith a 
 
 sword, 
 he rides up with the lieutenant. 
 F „« " • '^« tvinters tvith the forces 
 
 f,„,„ „ „. "ltd trenches. 
 
 Can. Ga„„ p„g„„„,. they Ji,jU ^Mh the Gmds. ' 
 
 wCtTorelpr^aT': d^ffir "f! '^ "'^ -P--d in Latin?. 
 English P '^ ^ '^'"'"™ '^ ">"•" 'n 'he meaning of toW in 
 
 Oum turma p rope rat, 
 Legatum gladio vulnerat. 
 
 Cum legato adequltat. 
 Cum coplis hlemat. 
 
 (^) In Gallia hlemat. 
 In loeo remanent, 
 Coplas a pugna revocat. 
 Ab Italia properat, 
 Ab legato et Romanis Im. 
 petrat. 
 
 he winters in Gaid. 
 they remain in the place, 
 he recalls the forces from battle, 
 he hastens from Italy, 
 he obtains his request from the 
 lieutenant and the Romans. 
 
 wv.wvv i/ft/o •M.iiUlltiJi'ttS 
 
 is 7ZIT;{~^:T '- --'^-^ -P--d in Latin ? When 
 
 inakea„„„"!?;^.^^'0''"'^ means <o,9,(/,eV J/" v' ..1„^?''^*% co«<e«dm<7. waail^ 
 
 .,,., , o,n^ayunih. (-It takes two tS 
 
 3. A IS never used before vowels 
 
IS 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 II 
 
 Ifli 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 Vocabulary. \ 
 
 ClrcuiiMlo. are, sun'ouml. Peounla, ae, f., money. 
 
 Colloeo. are, station, place. Pcnnaiieo, i-re, pemst. 
 
 Co.nparo. arc, raise, collect. Prohlbco, i-ro, restrain. 
 
 Contlneo. ero, keep, hem in. HamuH, I. m., branch. 
 
 Ii^Iurla, acs f., wromj-doimj, in- Sagltta. a«, f., arrow. 
 
 jurii, nronr,. • Solllclt.-,, arts fry to influence. 
 
 insldlae, arum. f. (usod in pin- Sub.uoveo. ero, drive off. 
 
 ral only), ambush. 
 
 I.-l. Legatus Acduos ab injuria prohibcbat 2. Cum copiis n. 
 lUvlia hiouu-ibaiium. 3. Galli nnnos, cOpiLs coniplcbant. 4. Belaai 
 locum uu-iro ot fossa firmant. 5. Silva ab Aoduls a«l Belfras perti- 
 net. (5. Labionus copias in insidils collocabat. 7. Barl)arT fossib: 
 ramis complont. ' 8. Cum turma ail locuni properabam. 9. Tribfl- 
 num sagitta vulneras. 10. Captiv! in sontontia pernument. 11. 
 Copias a pflgna revocftbrunus. 12. Sagittis et fundis Aeduos a 
 muro submovebant. 13. Cum filid legatl ad Italian^ uavigabatis. 
 14 Barbarl in loco remanobant. 15. Legatl Aoduorum a socuf. 
 Gennanorum impetrant. KJ. Gormanl cum BelgTa pugnabant, 
 17. Animos copiavum pecunia soUicitatis. 
 
 II.— 1. Forests used to extend from Gaul to Italy. 2. The 
 tribunes were keeping the forces in the woods. JJ. He was re- 
 straining the allies from battle. 4. The barbarians used to fight 
 with slin<rs. 5. They remahi with the lieutenant, fi. The allies 
 were raising forces in Gaul. 7. ^ye were surrounding the place 
 with trenches. 8. Labienus used to winter with the allies. 9. 
 We were sailing from Italy to the province with the lieutenant. 
 10. The barbarians used to station ambushes in the woods. 11. 
 You were wounding the tribune's son with a sling. 12. She 
 obt^iins her request from Labienus. 13. You are driving off the 
 Gauls from the place. 14. I was passing the winter with the 
 lieutenant and tribunes in the province. 15. They were trying to 
 influence the allies with money. 10. The slave was fighting wit« 
 the suilur. 
 
PART I. — 
 
 INTUODUCTOUY LESSONS.' 
 
 LKSSON viir. 
 
 <«) In ftentontla. I.ii.i>i<-.n<. , 
 
 "' • '"•- """ f :'«' ••» (!^w) opinion, La. 
 roni • - fnenna. 
 
 ('•) Tho student „h„„l,l „„^ t„t.,; t„ ,, .^' *-«•• 
 who,,, 0M,„,,1„„ „r„ „i,,„„ . , ' " ' '"•- -«»'""« 1 and 2, 
 
 {') On tho Haino page, Hcctiou ;i, are declin .fl fl, 
 ««ror and vir. "tciinod tho words puor, 
 
 f :Tr„?;-,«;r::'r wjr;ei r; """™ •'"^- '- 
 
 .■ooIe„„i„„ „f „„„, „,t, „,„: , ,^ ■ '»; ;».*ff«-™co botwoen tho 
 by always giving the .a-nitivn ,..,1 / " "'" """•''ulary, 
 
 -n ending in :,, ix:: r ;::/:;■;;: tr-^^^^^^^^ 
 
 _Ob,ervaM,^^K_Th^u«e and ,,„siti„„ „f .,„„ , 
 
 deoL'll" r'l-uWic, the „.„i„v. „, .^, „„„„ , . ' "' '" •»""■ 
 
 "oun-SSi;:"'-- '°« »."« eonitlvo.lhl, ^Jvri'SSit't" ."Vr,"' "■• <"" 
 
 ■ <-»'lien.™,|,,jd„.,„ , "^'"« "> """t decloMlon tt, 
 
 «*./<..M„,Lt/rC..'' '^°"'' ""^ •«"' " •"!'« lo -he .„,.„. ,,„„ .,^_. 
 
iMWtm mm^mxMi, 
 
 ■'-•<,'. 
 
 • In 
 
 > «i 
 
 14 
 
 IMIIMAUY LATIN IIOOK. 
 
 EXERClSFi VI 11. 
 Vooiiluilii. V, 
 
 ^Agcr, ttffrl, m., londjidd, U'vrl Nco». Aims kill. 
 
 ttmj. 
 Ainlrltln. ftp, L, frlviulshlp. 
 Anilcupi. I. m.,fri('u<i- 
 -Ai-i»H<«r. ti'l, in., orhifvdtor. 
 
 NOii, not. 
 Oooulto. Ai'P, coMCfrtL 
 IMior, cvl, vn., '»'»!/. 
 Ho«MM>. ci-1. 111., /"""•'*- '''^-^'*^"' 
 x\'i«M». ftro, /'«! unoccupied, lie 
 ironic. 
 
 LHum-i, o.-«n.. .n. (in i.lural\VH.to.Aro,/.ij/im«f.. 
 
 only), WnYc/rrwr. ' Vlou.. l. t.i., n^/.rjr. 
 
 MAroiiH. 1. in., 7l/.rrci(« (u man's Vlr. virl. in., m<tn. 
 name). 
 I_-1 A>Tm»'vT,.,«,.io, Ao.luI, ImbCtiN. 2. UbifmuB W;raB 
 „a«W.s,,uo H,l <lalli,un convocat., X 0,,u, lIl.ort» ud HhO.mn. ,.ro. 
 
 ,„lH.tr.1".u«. (I. (i.M-".ill.I a«™ IMgan.n. va»ml.a..t. 7. Ou.u 
 A«U,t,, Labiouo, atnlciliam .,,„«v,„a». «. lu agrt» Aoauon.m 
 ,,i„„,a.*nms. ... l'.u.n-.s m mUT» occU.mt,. W- «'7""" ';;^ 
 in,o™,mM,«ant. 11. Viruu. slaaiC. N-ulucnrnt. 12. Cun. gouorta 
 
 ad c6itia« ttdoiiuiUt. 
 
 II -1, Ho Kivmts UuU t<. tho «on-ii.-law of tlio tribune. 2. 
 
 iro granU ,«,„..„ to .lu, boys. X The workuum UHcd t., come 
 
 ofloutolluMvall. 4. You u».d to Imvo fruMuK M«vc„«. 6. The 
 
 ,a„d» of .ho UelgiauH a,-o un.^cuviod. .i. The Oaul« were o»Ub- 
 
 f,shh,« frioudship wit\ .ho Belgian.. 7. The foreos we™ hghtmg 
 
 „ th^land of .ho Uolgians. 8. The fathev-iu-Iaw of the heut^nant 
 
 wl ^ivh* money to .he ehildven of (hi») friend. ... They are 
 
 Tin" lands to .1,;. <5enuans, lieutenant. 10. The num were hght- 
 
 f„g w'th Mvonl,. the boys with slinks and an.,.w« 1 . The fo^ea 
 
 of the IWpans are laying waste the land of the (JauU. 12. They 
 
 were concealing an ambush. 
 
PART l.-INniul,UCT01iy LEHmm 
 
 u 
 
 I-RSSON IX. 
 
 .ii"w n::;:;;:. ;:;::';;:;:: ;;;tr"'^^ -....<.. i.,..„ 
 
 ^ik!';!,!':,:;:'!;:!,:;'':''' ' ; ':•."■ " »'"■' < <^^i^ -n,. 
 
 ■••'"M;":i"/.ii:;;;':f :'''■■; t". "" '"- '- '- 
 
 -•■' in „» 1.;, I, , "" "'"'"'« '" '•'! '" -•« in IrV in 
 
 i^:XKUOLSj^^ IX. 
 
 VofutlMilury. 
 nelluiif, I, n., vnr. , 
 
 Cnntrn, «r«.„, „ (u]uv„i f ""»'*"•'""'♦ ». n., crmmand. 
 
 "-— - ..., .,;:,■,:„. ,t' ; : :"■• '• ■■; """-; 
 
 te- 'tuurhn. n«nov„, arc. „«,;«,. 
 
 1—1. Fifuiioiituin coiiitH)rtal»iiif '/ T - ,. 
 
 ooniplenfc. 8 Ad r.,>,.,- 1 ^^vot'Ht. 7. Milium oi)T)idl viris 
 
 V"" '. 10. Go™ „r ^'™. ™'''«;«i"- »• no.n««r ILtrl T 
 
 tenemus. 12. Bellu„.„"f -""'"'""■ "• P^sidifl 1«=,™ 
 IwhBH. ,^ r , ""'" K"""!'"" ronovalmnL 1.1 v . 
 
 "• in ciwt™ Helvehoruin manent, 
 
f 5 
 
 I- 
 
 16 
 
 PR.MARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 II. _1. They are Htjvtioning grtrrisons in the towns. 2. We 
 wore bringing in plenty of corn. :V. The forceH of the Belgians 
 were renewuig war with Labienns. 4. The ClornmnH continue in 
 (their) allegiance. 5. The nllies of the Romans kill the garrisons 
 of the towns. (}. He was arousing the spirit of the boy with 
 examples and rewards. 7. The children have an example. 8. 
 The Helvetians were laying waste the lands of the Aedui, and 
 taking by storm (their) towns and villages. 9. The forces were 
 renewing the battle. 10. They are attjicking the camp. 11. 
 He was stjvtioning a garrison in the tt)wn. 12. They used to 
 come often with the barbarians to the winter tpiarters of the forces. 
 13. You were surrounding the camp with a trench: 14. He gives 
 orders to the garrison. 15. The Gauls attack the camp and fill up 
 the trench. 
 
 ' LESSON X. 
 
 (a) I. I.eght\^ ' clsirna, a famous lieutenant. 
 
 2. Victoria Clara, a famous victory. 
 
 3. F.xomplnm cl&rum, a famous example. 
 
 4. luegsLtl cla,rh of a famous lieutenant. 
 
 5. Vlctorlao clarae, famous victories, 
 (h) 6. \lr clhrua, a fammis man. 
 
 7. Belgao clarl, the famous Belgians. 
 
 8. Ager publlcus, public land. 
 
 9. Locus asper, a rough place. 
 
 10. Nauta perltus, a skilful sailoi'. 
 
 11. Nautarum perltdruiu, of skilful sailors. 
 (c) 12. Malta oxempltt. many examples. 
 
 13. Cum paucis Belgis, xvith a few Belgians. 
 
 14. Rellqul Belgae, the remaining Belgians. 
 
 15. Ma gnae cdplae, iarr/e/orces. 
 
 Ob8ervatlon.-(a) Does the Latin adjective remain unchanged, 
 like the English? Is there a change in the gender, the number, 
 or the case of the nouns accompanying the adjectives, comparing 
 (i.) 1, 2 and 3 ; (ii.) 2 and 5 ; (iii.) 1 and 4 ? 
 
 (6) Are the endings of nouns and adjectives always alike ? How 
 does the form of the noun affect the form of the adjective ? 
 
I 
 
 18. 2. We 
 
 le Belgians 
 c(jiitiixuo in 
 lo garrisons 
 a boy with 
 ample. 8. 
 Aedui, and 
 forces were 
 camp. 11. 
 ley used to 
 f the forces. 
 4. He gives 
 ) and fill up 
 
 n unchanged, 
 
 the number, 
 
 BS, comparing 
 
 PART I.~INTROD[;CTORY LESSONa 
 
 alia." r 
 
 )tive ? 
 
 
 17 
 
 (r) What is the position of fhn «ri;« r • . 
 When i» the adjeoL ,.,11 W„:„tt„;.V '^ " ' '» ^^ '» ^^ ' 
 
 In Part TTT., section 10 is trivnn fi i , . 
 who. m.ouIine nonHnati. I^IZ <::tL 1 1^^:/^ ^^'^^^^^^ 
 
 f t^^o -"-Miv.nl:T:L t^^^^^^^^^^ ^'- declension 
 
 ''•"•y indicate whether un adjec ivo e If .««^ ^^"^'« the vocabu- 
 "bor or like «o^.„r ? *' "'^"'^' "^ *" ^« ^^^clined like 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 yocahulary, 
 Advorsus, n, „m, nnsncccssfnl i - * 
 
 AHper. er„. oru.„. n,,,.^, ,,,,^,, J;"';:;,^"' ^'"•"' >-' 
 
 Creber, bra br.,.. ^>i' on the sea. 
 
 Exeito, are. s^m^fin^e ******* "^* ^•' '*'*''^^' ^^as^/ Ora 
 
 c^djacent. '''9^f>onnrj, Panel, ae. a (plural), /e,^. 
 
 Helvetian, a. „„.. Helvetian of Ken"'"'* '' '"*' ''"^'■'^' ^^''^^^«- 
 We Helvetians. ' *^ «e"qu««. a, un,. remaining.^ 
 
 W6„ous. a. «.„. ,,„Ya6Ze. T'T^l '' "' '^"^'• 
 
 Iticlto. are. arouse, stir vn **""*«""; are. ^ew/.^ 6n6e, % 
 
 ^ to toxn over. 
 
 \l Magnum numerum servo^um ef " '^^'° '""'^^ »""»»*• 
 
 P«^i;««. the remaZiZZSlf^ translating reK^„„« {3 ^v I Z Z.. ., 
 
 - Here, a, often, Latin"in [g'to hl'r' '"'f' "■'' '''" ^^'^»«^-"" "'"'^' ^^ ' "'^•' ''''^«* 
 """'"''*"*'« translated by English on 
 
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I 
 
 locum idc-Houm convocaiit. 10. Ad . prCvinciam finitiraam ven~ 
 titabjit. 
 
 II.— 1. A few tiibunoH wero stirring up the allies by frcquen. 
 meHsagoH. 2. Thoy aro wintering in the provinceH on the sea with 
 the remaining forces. 'A. You were Htiniulating a few (iauls witli 
 large rewards. 4. Rugged forests extend fronv tlie sea coast t.. the 
 neigliboring provinces. 5. The Helvetians are supei'i.- to the rest 
 of the {litcraUy, remainhuj) (Jauls. (5. We are laying waste the 
 Helvetian territory with large forces. 7. 'I .oy used to strengthen 
 the camp with wide tren.>hes. 8. The neighboring provnxce is 
 unoccupied. 9. He was raising large forces in the Helvetian 
 territory. 10. The defeats (Literally, nnmccessfnl battlcn) alarm 
 the rest of the Belgians. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 (a) Impetrabls, yon will (lain your request. 
 Stiporabitls, yon will con<iuer. 
 Reinoveblt. he will remove. 
 Compleblmus, we shall fill vp. 
 Observation.— What new element is found in the Latin verbal 
 What idea does it express ? What point of time is referred to ? 
 (6) Impetrabd, I shall gain my request. 
 Snperabunt, they will conquer. 
 Bemovebo, I shall remove. 
 Complebunt, they ivillfiU up. 
 Observation.- What variations occur in that part of the Latin 
 verb which expresses shall or ivillj 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 Vocabulary. 
 Castellum, I, n., /or<. Lacrlma, ae. f., «ear. 
 
 Certns, a, urn, certain, fixed, spe- Multus, a, urn, much, (m plu- 
 
 cified. r^l) ^«'"^- 
 
 Conddno. are, overlook. Obsecro. are, beseech, implore. 
 
 Flrmus, a, urn, powerful, strong. Pecunla, ae, f., sum of money. 
 
 Impero. are, require, demand. Perlculum, I, n., danger. 
 
 Integer, gva, gram, fresh. Privatus, a, nm, private. 
 
 m 
 
ftin ven- 
 
 f rcqucn j 
 HCtt with 
 nils with 
 iHt to the 
 ) tho rost 
 niste the 
 rongthon 
 Dviuce ia 
 lulvetian 
 ^.») uluriit 
 
 PART I—INTHODUCIORr LESSONS. 19 
 
 finuo tonchit. (j (v,„i,,n i,.* """ '^'>"- 5. Locum pmeHidio 
 
 ; fn « CO,.:::'":: S, ;;"'■; '-■•-•;-• 7- M%- 
 
 l'W«u,„ oLwcmt II c,„.,,,.. . , "^"'""''■■""1 )«criml» 
 
 c.-.,.i«, i., i>,.siaii;e„u;.«":i! """■"■" '"'"*"■■' "■"-■'"■i'- w. 
 
 f 
 
 »'• 1. Ho will wiiit«>r wifii *i 
 -i.M^oH„, p.,wnce/^:^^ ^^^^^^ - the 
 
 mnnorous fort.. U4. PoJerfu 2 n^ "'" ""''^ '^ ^^-" ""' 
 
 not Imvo privnto lands. 7 Thev wi 1 GerrunnH do^ 
 
 "-n«y. H. I shall co.ne often i^, st '"'""'•'; '^""^'^"^ «"'" ^^ 
 of tho barbarianH. 9. Thov w 1 ' .?"''' '"'^^ '' ^'"'^'^ """^^'^r 
 
 with largo garrisons. 10 Tire p t' f ^''^ ^"^'^^ ^'^ ^'- ^-ns 
 will prevail. ^'""''" "^ ^^" rest of the tribunes 
 
 in verbal 
 3d to? 
 
 the Latin 
 
 I, (in plu- 
 
 implore. 
 / money, 
 ger. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 n. 
 
 / (^ 
 
 m 
 
 -^ *■ -A. X » 
 
 (a) The student should pvflmir,^ i 1 
 noun. o. U.e eH.a .eej.;— r^X teltf " ""' 
 
 nommafva to the genitive „lw„y» made in „„ ""*"' '"'" ""> 
 which of the tv .ases given in th^: T , "^""^ ''"^ ^ ^^°<" 
 formed ? ^ "' ** ™oabuIary are tlie other cases 
 
 (b) Consul Ronianua « p„ 
 
 C«ns„,„R5man' "/^^'^ ^«"^^^'^- 
 
 A. re.,one n„,U.a, ,Vo. « ,..,1.,.;^^^^^^^^^^ 
 wi* a noun orano^hlr^^"™' "' "" ^^J^"™ <" ""e deoiensio.. 
 
 attackinn. i« -^ff^^, * ""'^? ""^- The saniP f«,.,v, *u.x 
 
20 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 * # 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 Voeiibuliiry. 
 r«o«-ar. -an-, ni., 0«..sar. MIIo-, ".iHtlH. ni., W<?»Vr 
 
 C«nturl-«. -onU, m., centurion. MultIt.u-.lo. -dlaU f.,muihtudc. 
 rivl-t.iH, -tiitlH. f., date. great number. 
 
 CO-I.O.-K, -hortlH. f., cohort, com- 01.«c.. obnldlM, m.. /.o«<af/e. 
 
 |MUi./ (ouo-tonth of a legion). Or-.lo. -dlui«. m., ranA;. 
 EqucH, oqultlH, m., /H>m' .soi(/(Vr, Pax. paoln, f., pcdce. 
 
 (in plunil) (^ara/r./. Petl«-. pcMlltlH. m., /oof aoWier, 
 
 L«Kl-«. -»..m, f., ^';/'oH. (in l.luml) infantry. 
 
 Merca-tor, -t6rl«, in., trader. Sopvo. arc, keep. 
 
 I.-l. ObsiclGa CHOsarl (iHl.itnus. 2. MorcatorCa ad logionem 
 vontitabaut. 3. Paconi et amlcitiam cum CaoHaro confirmabit. 4. 
 Militos ordines nou sorvabant.^ 5. Panel poditCs infiguam rnulh- 
 ^.adinem equitum ^uporant. 6. Cum reli<,uTs IcgiouibuH m Callia 
 hiomabo. 7.-^CneHar magnum obsidum numerum^ imporat. 8. 
 Tribtlnos mllitum et centAirionus convocabafc. 9. M^litSs roh- 
 quarum legionum civitatem in olticio cuntinobunt. 10. Paucas 
 cohortes in insidils collocat. 
 
 11 -1 Ho rides up to Ciesar. 2. Cresar will hasten with the 
 rest of the legion to the town. 3. Y<.u will grant p^vrdon to the 
 centurion. 4. The rest of the cohorts will lay waste the neighbor- 
 ina territory. 5. We were restraining the legions from battle. 6. 
 The opini..n of tlie centurion will prevail. 7. He tills the camp 
 with a multitude of soldiers. 8. Caesar estiiblishes peace with the 
 nei-hborincr states. 9. He will winter hi Gaul with the rest of the 
 legron and the cavalry. 10. They tr;^ to win over the rest of the 
 states. 11. With a few soldiers we shall hasten to the camp. 
 
 I 
 
 (a) Bxpugnavt. 
 Expugnav'lstl, 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 I have taken by storm, or I took by storm, 
 you (sing.) have taken by storm, or you took 
 by stoi-m. 
 
 1. See, footnote 2, page 19. 
 
 2. See , wtaoLe i. page 17 
 
liar. 
 
 itdfje. 
 
 H>t soldier f 
 
 legionom 
 nabit. 4. 
 am inulti- 
 i iti Gallia 
 porat. 8. 
 !lit§8 roli- 
 .0. Paucas 
 
 1 with the 
 Ion U) the 
 I neighbor- 
 battle. 6. 
 I the camp 
 e with the 
 rest of the 
 [•est of the 
 lamp. 
 
 1/ storm. 
 ar you took 
 
 Lgei? 
 
 PART t.-INTItODlICTOKY LESSONS. 21 
 
 1V..f,.I,l tn„„),.. •.,„ • """"'"W""™ t,. reg„l,.,. ,,„,„„„„, ^„j.;_^^ 
 
 fou'::;i::;"z:vtir ™""'^'^ '"""" ■•" <>^.--"»v., etc., 
 
 ('•) First Coy.rtroATioN, 
 
 I recent Tenne. Perfe-fc Tcnne. 
 
 **•"" anmvl 
 
 "*« 8tt,tl 
 
 Third Con.ju<jation 
 
 Preeent Tense. Perfect Te .e. 
 
 regro 
 lego 
 811 in o 
 intttd 
 pared 
 
 misl 
 poporcl 
 
 -.•:rv)vn Cinjuoation. 
 
 Present Tense. Perfect Ten«e. 
 
 inonoo „,„„^, 
 
 remaned re.nansl 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 Present Tense. Perfect Tense. 
 
 nudlo 
 
 vonlo 
 
 vincid 
 sentld 
 comperlo 
 
 nudlvl 
 
 voni 
 
 vinxl 
 
 sensi 
 
 coinperX 
 
 Notice thut, i„ the v,,c,.butoe"t.'rf:n '":;;"'"'"'"''«-«' 
 
 always clearly indicated. » """"'• ""' !"«■'««' tema k 
 «, »' ™° "« B^^SiT^J^ — 
 
 «tii^«„* .-. . . pwrect tense nf v£.»h" -^- 
 -- ". . ..«« .„ .He .one:.; .:;i;e-M£ eh. p^^^^,^ ,^,^^ ^^ 
 
22 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Iif 
 
 i t 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 Vocabulary. ^ 
 
 4celpl6, accepi, reccu'e. Munlo, nmnTvT. /ortt/i/, prober.: 
 
 Anna, ar.norum, n. (in plural Per-maneo. ere, -mansi, remain. 
 
 only), arms. !*«*«' P«"^''' ^'■"^'^•' '"^- , , 
 
 Do, dare, dccl^ f>e. P6n5, po«uI, i>.acc, pitch (camp), 
 
 Faelo, feci, cZo, make. 1<HI '''^^'''^- . 
 
 Facul-tas, -tails, f., opporhmity. Tra-d«, -dldl, give up. 
 
 Gero, gessl. carrj/ on, wage. Vallu.n, I, u., wall, rampart (of 
 
 Juvo, are, juvl, aid, assist. camp). 
 
 Moveo, ere, niovl, move. Venlo, venl, come. 
 
 1-1. Gessimus. 2. Acceperunt. 3. Tradklit. 4. Caesar 
 (»stra movit. 5. Helvetii pacem a Caesare petiverunt. fi. Facul- 
 tatem fugae captlvis dedisti. 7. Magna praesidia in oppidls posui. 
 8 Reliquae cohortes castra vallo fossaquo muniverunt. 3. Oaesar 
 nwmam injuriam fecit. 10. Socii legiones frumento juverunt. 
 11 Caesar legionibus veniam dedit. 12. In officio permansunus. 
 IS. Cum multls equitibus ad castra venit. 14. Anna posuisLis et 
 obsides dedistis. 15. Agros liabemus. 
 
 II _i. He has aided. 2. We gave. 3. She has sought. 4. 
 You have moved. 5. We came. 6. We received the hostages 
 7 The Gauls waged war with Ci^sar. 8. They gave up (their) 
 arms, captives (and) hostages to C.esar. 9. You fortified the camp 
 with high walls. 10. Caesar has made peace with the neighbormg 
 states. 11. The Gauls gave lands to the Germans. 12. I have 
 received many injuries from the Romans. 13. He placed a garri- 
 son in the camp. ^ 14. You gave the legion to the lieutenant, lo. 
 They came with a few h\)rsemen to C«esar. 16. The rest of .he 
 legion pitched the camp. 17. The soldiers move the camp. 18. 
 You received great injury from C^Bsar. 19. They have villages. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 The student should turn to the novns of the third declensioa, 
 "iven in Part ITT., section 5. 
 ° Observutlon.-Compare ^he endings o: the nouns in section 5 
 
PART I.-INTRODt7CTORY LESSONS. gg 
 
 with those of the nouns in section 4 Wh.t diiT. 
 m the endings ? What is the gender of the no '' ''' '^^^^ 
 
 m section 4 ? Li what re.npof T . """""^ '"^ ^^^tion 5 ? 
 
 third declensions I^ r^"' '" "*^"'^^ -"-« ^^ the second and 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ^S-men,-mlnifi,n., line of marph r 
 
 "'■'»;/ (o„ the „„„ch) .Zr:l?_°: _?'• """''': 
 
 Ainltto. ainlsi, /o.>e. 
 Avert-6, -I, turn aside. 
 Contenrt-6, -I, hasten. 
 
 draw. ^ 
 
 Flu-men. -minis, n., river. 
 J ' ""I-U8, -eris, n., wound. 
 
 •- 1. Iter a flilmine avertimus '> Mriif- 
 •^- Pauci equites vuhiera acceperu"; ^ M "P"' P^rfecerunt. 
 
 '^d flumen coatendit. 5 ZZ'^^^^T''^'''''^'''^^'^^ 
 ^-Itl pedit.s ab agmine difcCrunt t" T" ^'^'"^ '^^^^- «' 
 c^vit. 8. Silvaperket.fl;:::: r;^^^^^^ -o- 
 
 r u .n3 _.tmere v.n.runt. 10. Cohort " .Z' ^.T'! '^ ^^^ 
 
 Iter, Itinerls, n., mnrc/i, road 
 ^^t-u^^-evlH,n., side, Jf auk. 
 Op-US, -oris, n., work, fortijica- 
 tion. 
 
 Per-flcl6, -feci, finish. 
 Siffnum. I, n., .^a>^a^,i, ,,-^,,^; ^ 
 
 Vuln-U8, -erls, n., t/wmrf." 
 
 11. 
 
 rem in3 itinere venerunt on, .' ^' ^^^^^' ^^ ( 
 ^-ag.inisnnped..r: ^-^Ht^^^^^^^^ 
 
 11- 1. You have received a wound 9 n 
 soldiers from work. 3. Broad riZ" u • **'"' "''"=''««<' the 
 
 W fi„i.s„ed the fortifloat of he c™: 'V";"t''"- *' ^^ 
 a«fer«;Zj,, „„,i, „ ™ «>•"?• ». They have marched 
 
 (lit«-M,j, ,jr,at) „.arch 1 c;,, e " n ""'"'""''■ «' ^y a forced 
 
 9- A few soldiers have Jeft (liflj, f' """^ ^""^ " standard. 
 10. The river has proteetV a ttCf ""''"'''^ '"" *'"'^»"^»- 
 ,P -r with .he res. of .he coTj. ""— ^^ rej^ive^ar 
 
•24 
 
 .^' 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .^ 
 
 VO 
 
 .i^ 
 
 ^ v^r' ' i-^- ■ 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 li 
 
 Dederam, I had given. 
 MIseras, ymt (sing.) had sent. 
 Jusserat, he had oi'dered. 
 
 \eneraiiiu8, we had come. 
 
 Jusseratls, \jon, (plural) had 
 
 ordered. 
 Deder:int, they had given. 
 
 Observation.— Personal endings. What letters are found in 
 each Latin word ? What word occurs in the translation of each of 
 these Latin words? Referring to Lesson XIII. (c), are these 
 forms obtained from the present or the perfect tense ? T . /Ot. > 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Cognosod, cognovl, lear)i, find Mltto, mlsl, send. 
 
 out. Ob-tlned, ere, -tlnul, hold, pos- 
 Con-fuglo, 'tugtjlee. sess. 
 
 Con-8ldo, -sedf, encamp. Oceup-d, are, -avi, seize. 
 
 Con-venlo, -veni, come together, Re-duoo, -duxl, lead back. 
 
 assemble. Regnuiu, I, n., royal power. 
 
 Srupti-o, -onls, f., sally. Rhenus, 1, m., Rhine. 
 
 Explora-tor, -torls, m., scout. Tlni-eo, ere, -ul, /mr, be afraid. 
 
 Impedimenta, drum, n. (in plu- Trans-duco, -duxl, lead across. 
 
 ral), baggage, baggage-ani- 
 
 mals. 
 
 I.— 1. Copias reduxeras. 2. Ad Rhenum contenderat. 3. 
 Legatos misimus. 4. Exploratores iter cognoverant. 5. Barbaros 
 
 timent. 6. Eruptionem fecerant. 7. Copiae consederant. 8. 
 
 Regnum obtinuerat. *9. jAcceperamus. 10. Discessorant. 11. 
 
 Gesserunt. 12. Feceram; 13. Vulnerant. 14, Dedimus. 15. 
 
 Juvistis. 16. Posueratis. 17. Petlvimus. 18. Discessit. 19. 
 Cdnfugeramus. 20. Properat. 21. Imperaverat. 
 
 XL— 1. He had led the soldiers across. - 2. They came together 
 to Caesar. 3. I shall seize the royal power. ^A. We had sent 
 scouts. ,6. They had fled to the baggage.-' 6. Ciesar encamped 
 with the rest of the forces.!-' 7. Ambassadors had come to the 
 camp. 8. We led a large nuuiber of baggage-auimais across," 9. 
 
/ \/ 
 
 PART L^iN, .ODUCTORY LESSONS. 25 
 
 The forces had encamped Ko TKo, 
 
 .He has sought peace ^2. We had .'''''"I" ''^ ^°""^«- '"^1- 
 
 the legion, u/l had finished 15 "w"* '"• ^^ ^-^ led back 
 
 Bent. 17. We were haste W ^'^^'^^'^^-Ved. 16. She had 
 
 wound. 20. I received ^" ^"" '^"^- l^. They will 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 Ab Italia pertlnet. 
 Ad Caesapem venerunt. 
 Cum Gallls pacein fecit. 
 De pace legatos mlserunt, 
 
 it extends from Italy, 
 they came to Coisar. 
 
 ^^ '^<^e peace with the Gauls, 
 they sent ambassadors coiicerning 
 
 tant. *''"'*"^- ^'^^^^^-^^r/ m corn out of (or from) 
 
 In provlncla hlemat. ,, ^''!^* 
 
 •»Plas l„ Gallium .nl«it / ''" ''' *^' P^^^^r.ce. 
 
 Inter fl«.„en et .HvL Iter !' T^ f /r^" "^^^ (^^ #.) (?a^;. 
 
 fecit. "^' ^^^ ^'^^^^^^^ 6e<t.e..>. the river arid 
 
 fecit. 
 Inter Belgras valet, 
 
 Per provlnclam Iter fecerunt. 
 Per Helvetlos cogaovlt, 
 
 Lltterls cogrncvlt. 
 
 Post pugncMn cognovit 
 
 Propter multltucll„c,* Oer .T'^"''''^^ ^''^ ^^^^^ ^^^« ^««/e. " 
 
 inanoruui tl,„e„t. " "^ "'" ''•^'"'"^ ^'^ ^^-^omit of the 
 
 Sine causa tl.nent. ,, ^'"^'^^ »tnm&er o/ Germans 
 
 Trans Rhenu.u consederunt .T'-^-^'^'" "^^^^^'^t cause. 
 OK "^ ''^'«^^^^ '^<^ross the Hhine 
 
 Observatlon.-The meaning of th. n • ■ 
 
 case which follows each of them T ! j^^^^^^^^^^^ "sou, and the 
 accusative and ,„ ^ith ,blativ"e • 1 f'""' ^^^^^^^^ *« with 
 
 accusative; the ablative of mea:i Inu, ."with" "' ''■' '" ^^^^"^ 
 
 - p**/*- with accusative. 
 
 the woods. 
 
 ^ is influential among the Bel- 
 gians. 
 
 A«/o.nc^.Hmrou,/.(or6,/.,.an. 
 of) the Helvetians. 
 
 ff^^^^^d out by means of letters. 
 ['^Mnd out after the battle 
 
26 
 
 , PRIMARY Latin book. 
 
 .) 
 
 -1?1 
 
 iffi r 
 
 ' m il 
 
 » ii 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Auctorl-tas, -t^tls, f., influence. Mors, mortis, f., death. 
 Dedlti-6, -uiils, f., snrrcnder. 
 Incol-6, -ul, dwell, inhabit. 
 Inopla, ae, f., vmnt, scarcity, 
 Judlc-u, are, -avi, decide. 
 
 Pater, patris, m., father. 
 Tliu-or, -oris, m., fear. 
 Val-eo, ere, -ul, be i)ifluential. 
 Vlr-tu8, -tutls, f., valor, bravery. 
 
 I. — 1. Sine injuria per pruvinciam iter fecimus. 2. Frfimentum 
 ex agri!^ in castra com porta) )ant. 3. Post proelium legatl ad 
 Caesareni de deditidne venerunt. 4. Trans Rhenum in loco idoneo 
 consederat. 5. Magnam inter Belgas auctoritateni propter vir- 
 tutem habebat. 6. Milites ex hibernis et a Caesare convenerant. 
 7. Ex captivlH cognoverat. 8. In certuni locuu? conveneranaus. 
 9. Arbitrds inter civitates dedit. 10. Gernianos sine causa tinient. 
 II. Cum reliquis legionibus in Galliam contendit. 12. Ex castrls 
 discessistis. 1:3. Iter in provinciam averterant. 14. Arma ex 
 oppido tradiderunt. 15. Sine causa bellum gesseratis. 
 
 II. —1. He had sent the forces across the river into Gaul. 27 
 He found out through scouts. 3. After the death of (his) father 
 he had held the royal power. 4. They had made numerous sallies 
 rat of the woods. 5. The rest of the Belgians had sent ambassa- 
 dors concerning peace. 6. He used to be influential among the 
 Gauls. 7. They remain in the camp not without great danger, on 
 account of the scarcity of corn. 8. They had placed the baggage 
 between the river and the cavalry. 9. He led back the forces into 
 winter quarters. 10. We shall not decide about the road. 11. 
 They had dwelt across the Rhine. 12. On account of (their) fear* 
 they had fled into the woods. 13. Ciesar had led across the forces 
 without baggage. 14. ^e used to have lands across the Rhin-e in 
 the province. 15. Out of a large number few received wounds. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 (a) Dederls, you (sing.) will have Venerlnms, we shall have come, 
 
 given. Jusserltls, you (plur.) tvill have 
 Mlserlt, he ivill have sent. ordered. 
 
 tTusserii^. he wiU have ordered. Dederlnt^ theu '>i^ll have aiv^n 
 
PART I.-TNT«OD(7CTOBy LESSONS. 
 
 27 
 
 Ob«ervotlon — Personal endin^i wi, i i 
 0"ch Latin word in the transkti,.,?' '. T . '""^ '"'<' '""•><* '« 
 »/m«;„„.e or „,■«,,„,,, ^."1; ' !, ' "'f' ""■" f"""" «>" "ords 
 or the perfect tense 1 '"""'' "•""'"«' f™" «« present 
 
 ve^hre':;-:!™:::? -^^-^ ^" «- -- - «>» !«-<« 
 
 (c) In Part III., secfmn 9*7 
 "-tenses Of the £ati::rrbI;Z„™.'°""' *^ ""'»- "^ ^^-^ 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 De-pono. -posul. i.iy aside t ' ^*'*'' ^ "^^'' ^'•^«^- 
 
 l>e-torre5. ere, -terra,, rfj^er. ^^JT^.' "^' ^•' ^^--^• 
 Dublt-6, are, -avi, hesitate, have Rel. "'"' "*'"f ' ''''''^' ^""^^• 
 
 i'u.g:-6. are. -avI, ror.^, «,,^ f^ vl^-"^"' ^''"' """"'' ^^^^^'•^«- 
 Jlujht. ^ ^*^*-«'are, -uI,/or6td 
 
 Video, ere, vidl, see. 
 
 torn non tenebit. 6. vtjeto T r T™'"- «■ ^egio mon- 
 Judicavere. 10. DubitaS J- n''"Lt"\ '■ "'''"^^»''- «' 
 l.i. Ge.ssera,„us. 14. Disces^rit ll' o T'' ^^- "^"^^'^a. 
 
 ^naverunt. 17. Oeoupav a 18 v-, "P'*""'- !«• Expflg. 
 
 i^O. Consederat. 21. wL. '""• ^'■*- MamWnnf, 
 
 , WedT^L ";'™^^^^^^^^^ 2. T„u had remom- 
 
 '*■ I rfmll have learned. 6 w7 i, . ■ ^'^ "'" ''"« ■'•'"ted. 
 7; I «hall order. 8. We iLe^on f »" w""' *• ''"'^ <=■>"-• 
 It used to deter. 11 Y„n I ? ^' *'''™ ''"Wi-'g. 10 
 
 ufluential. 13. They Im Z: nT'?!' , ^^- «"" "-^ to be 
 ^ I^rbade. 18. /heyLt.^ l".^' v„ te'^^"-'"" ""« -'• 
 
28 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 r:^ 
 
 , 
 
 I 
 
 (^ 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 Turn to the adjectives of the third declension, as given in Part 
 III., section 11. 
 
 Observation.— How far do the endings of the adjective agree 
 with those of the noun, as given in sections 4 and 5 (comparing 
 forms of the same gender always)? Is there always a separate 
 form for the feminine nominative? f r the neucer nominative? 
 Examine the vocabulary, to see ho genitive case and the 
 
 different genders of adjectives of the tj. . declension are marked. ^ 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Decllvls, e, sloping. Levis, e, slight^ trifling. 
 
 — Duplex, dupllpls, double. Omuls, e, all. 
 
 ^ Eques-ter, -trls, tre, of cavalry, » Pot-ens, -entls, powerful, 
 cavalry- (adjective). Prae-ceps, -cipltls, steep. 
 
 Fertllls, e, fertile. , Bee-ens, -entls, recent, unex- 
 
 Fortls, e, hrave. hausted. 
 
 Humllls, e. If lowly. Sllvestrls, e, wooded. 
 
 Incend-6, -I, burn. - Vel-dx, -dels, swift, active. 
 
 I.— 1. Praesidia in omnibus oppidls collocabit. 2. Proelium 
 equestre fecimus.2 3. Filiam legato, viro forti et potent!, dedit. 
 4. In loco silvestrl consederant. 5. Copiae recentes et integrae 
 proelium renovabant. 6. Animos omnium sociorum confirmat. 
 7. Pedites veloces et fortes delegeram. 8. Duplicem fossam a 
 castrls ad flflmen p^rduxit. 9. Omnia anna tradiderunt. 10. 
 Levia equestria proelia fecerant.^ 11. Per regionem fertilem iter 
 fecerant. 12. Ex huinili loco ad maguam auctoritatem Marcum 
 perduxerat. 
 
 1. All adjectives not ending in us (or er), a, um, are of the third declension. 
 Adjectives of this declension end generally in (a) masculine and feminine, -is, neuter. 
 ■e, the genitive of each being the same as the masculine nominative ; (b) masculine. 
 -er, feminine, -m, neuter, -re, the genitive of each being the same as the feminine 
 nominative ; (c) masculine, feminine and neuter, -ns, the genitive having -ntis in place 
 ot -tis; {d) masculine, feminine and neuter, -x, the genitive having -cis in place of -x 
 (but -tci8 in place of -ex). o f " 
 
 2. Proelium /ado = I fight a battle, literally, / tnake a battle. 
 
givTBn in Part 
 
 djective agree 
 i 6 (comparing 
 ys a separate 
 p nominative? 
 case and the 
 1 are marked.^ 
 
 PART I-INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. gg 
 
 %n^g waste all the lands. 4 T^^eB^T'T' ^' ^^''y ^^re 
 towns, all the rest of the vilh^e ^^ n T' ^''^ ^"""^^ «" the 
 not laid aside the memo^'Tih^ '" /"/^^ ^^"^^ ^- »« had 
 granted pardon to all the c^tives 7 V l ™"^^- ^- »« h- 
 m a sloping and steep pMee. 8 He wHl r ^"'"'^'^^ ''^^ ^^"^P 
 unexhausted cavalry. 9 I h.«fo ' 7 , '"''^ ^*^^"^ ^^^sh and 
 f er. 10. We mLhed hr^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^o the 
 
 deter the Gauls by (our) rec t vie t ' i^ „ ''' ""^ ^^^^^ 
 centurions of all ranks. ^* ■^^- ^^ -^"^^mons the 
 
 werful. 
 if steep. 
 recent, wwex- 
 
 'ed. 
 
 ', active. 
 
 2. Proelium 
 otenti, dedit. 
 IS et integrae 
 m confirmat. 
 em fossam a 
 iderunt. 10. 
 
 fertilem iter 
 tem Marcum 
 
 ;hird declension, 
 nine, -is, neuter, 
 3 ; (b) masculine, 
 as the feminine 
 ing -ntis in place 
 is in place of -z 
 
 Bellnm renovaro dubitant, 
 Coplan m provlnela Jus.lt 
 hleniare, 
 
 I^abienum locum tenere Jus 
 
 serat, 
 I^egratos dlscedere vetult. 
 
 Venire dubli^,'^ 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 they hesitate to renew the tvar 
 he ordered the forces to winter in 
 
 the province, 
 he had ordered Lahienus to hold 
 
 the place. 
 
 he forbade the lieutenants to de- 
 part. 
 
 he hesitates to come. 
 
 — --^v^o (,u cume. 
 
 the m::~-;i:: ^itr^:;::::^ f^:;^"^ ^-^ --p^^^- 
 
 conjugation. Wliat is generallv ft l^^ '"^"^'^^^ ^^ «^oh 
 
 p^oticethatinthevocabulZl^^^^^^^^^ '''' ^"^-t-e? 
 
 pven, as a means of indica II thl ' ^' ^"^"^'^^^ ^^ ^^^^ys 
 
 jbelongs.i naicating the conjugation to which a verl 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 Indeo, ere, venture. 
 
 ^oepr (used in the perfect tenses cZl'tuT- "''^'' '1^^^' ^''^^ 
 
 only) began. ^onstitu-o, ere. -I, determine. 
 
 ~ Desll-io, Ire, -ul, leav dmmr 
 

 1 
 
 
 r^H 
 
 
 - Ifl 
 
 ^M 
 
 ^B 1 
 
 30 
 
 PRIMARY LATiN BOOK. 
 
 I. — 1. Belhim cum Oennanls gerero cdnstitiiit. 2. MilitOs 
 vctuit ab Blgiiis di.soedoro. (l^. Ex finitiiuls rugiduibua nulitos 
 jubot conveiilro. 4. Opiaduin opi)ngnrire et portaH incondcro 
 coeperunt. 5. Legfiti ad castra vonTro dubitavorant. (J. Magna 
 prae.sidia in onniibus oj»i)idis couHtituit collocaro, et cum reliipilH 
 coi)iia in vico Aeibiurum hiLMuaro. 7. Copias in hibiuna roduccre 
 constituorafc. 8. Onuu's legatds coegit o(juus roniovoro. 9. Multls 
 cum lacrinils Caosarom olweciaro coopinnis. 10. P'-)L'lium ronovaro 
 nun audCl)unt. 11. (hnnia »>])pida incendcro ednstituoriimuH. 12. 
 Labienum cum onniibus ecpiitibus locum tonOro jussit. 13. Pa- 
 trem imperium depdnoro coegit. 
 
 II. — 1. Ciosar liad oruorod all the Aodui to give up (their) arms. 
 2. Tliey determined to send and)asHadors to Csesar concerning 
 peace. 3. They had begun to lay waste the lands of the allies. 
 4. Cjesar forbade the legions to leave (their) work. 5. They have 
 begun to collect forces. 6. Ho ordered all the soldiers to leap 
 down. 7. Tliiey l)egan to fill up tlie trenches with branches. 8. 
 He had ordered the soldiers to fortify the camp with a double 
 trench. 9. We determined to collect forces and wage war with 
 Caesar. 10. They do not venture to send ambassadors. 11. He 
 had compelled the Aedui to give hostages. 12. They hesitate to 
 winter in Gaul. 13. The Gauls began to assemble out of all the 
 towns. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 Turn to the nouns of the fourth declension given in Part III. , 
 section 7. 
 
 Observation. — The case-endings of the declension. The gender 
 of the nouns in us and in u.^ How does the vocabulary indicate 
 that a noun is of the fourth declension ? 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 AdventnSi us, m., arrival. Com-mltto, ere, -mlsl, etitnist ; 
 
 Comineatus, us, m., supplies.'^ (with proelium) jom, be(jin. 
 
 1. See Part III., section 50, b. 
 
 2. See footnote 1, page 31. 
 
 
PART I.— T 
 
 . 2. MilitOs 
 )uil)us nulitos 
 tiiH incondcro 
 it. (). Milgim 
 ; cum reli({ulH 
 loriia roduccre 
 •0. 9. Multls 
 liuiu rouovaro 
 leriimuH. 12. 
 ssit. 13. Pa- 
 
 (tlieir) anus. 
 ir concerning 
 
 of the allies. 
 5. They have 
 idiers to leap 
 1) ranches. 8. 
 fith. a double 
 age war with 
 lors. 11. He 
 3y hesitate to 
 )ut of all the 
 
 NTRODUCTORY LKSSONS. 
 
 tin Part TIL, 
 
 The gender 
 ilary indicate 
 
 nisi, entrust; 
 ) join, be(jin. 
 
 r- ~ 31 
 
 I>o.vtc... tra, tr„.... ri,,H. ^^' ^'"«';:^ --*»«. uh. rn., magistrate, 
 
 K«|nItatuH. u„, ,n., roraln, ' I «♦"*"*««, U8. ni., infnntry.t 
 
 Kxerc-ltus. ,,„. „»., ,,,,,,,, ''• ^"»-"«' -"*!«. f., .sv,/.^,/. 
 Hou.6, ao...,„,«. „,, ^, "-^'«->. ere, -t,„„,, ,,.^;^. 
 
 plural) />f;opZe. ^ _ *'^<«'"<> endnre. 
 
 ^' Post advonfiim n.w> 
 ""'tfirtrstuun, „„„ittt,„ ..,.;...^:!"'"5"j"."''«»'=l'"t- 7. Sainton. 
 
 z;r!;'""!""*'r~it 
 
 equ.tatu,,, cJIocSvit. <J „„„i,,;„ "■ '"' ''"'"■■" ">™u -mmeu, 
 coeperunt. 10. E,,„itat^^,i„l'^o,,' ';':'^'''' ""I'*' "W'flgnare 
 «tatn» .nultitncli„„,„ h„,„i„„,„ ;; :' "f '■'» ™»«™m. 11. Magi. 
 
 exerctum LabienO .Ure eons itui;* rrr""'; ''• ''^"'"•'■" 
 citibus convenire jrissit, i>egatoa ab omnibus exer- 
 
 H "-.^iefz n::;ra:etr„vtrr ,t "•'^ -™'^^ ^• 
 
 he soldiers. 3. He determined to wt„, '■ "« '* ""> '><>''"'» "f all 
 the cavalry. 4, After the departure"^';." "^^ P"'"™"" -«■ »" 
 begun to renew the war. 6 The„. . u ' ^^«'^'" 'W h^'d 
 to present to the caval.^ IhIZ!' I °"'"^ '■'" "»•"«"»' 
 have determined to await LabienuV arH ? «° ""' '"''<'• ?• ^e 
 »ag.strates to assemble. 9. He hIdZ S ' ,"' ""'-^ "" 'he 
 ^upphes. 10. Tbe, „re s„™ ^'it ^ ."^ ""'^-^ '^ -""^ 
 11. He ordered Labienus with the re,t „f 1 "^ *'"> """'O' 
 he nght wing. 12. They hat exoeri °'™''^ '° '"""^'' '« 
 
 fo^nd out through scouts about the d^T '" "^'"P"' «. He 
 f^'tates to entrust all the plu ^dlr 1" "' ''^ '''"^^- "• 
 ^^r _^^j^naer to the magistrates. 
 
 their S^l^i^T'' ""^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ~ — 
 
 2. With ,W.,,.^ ._ . . ^'*'' "''* '" the plural. i„ sp,-*„ .. 
 
 4- Translate tn here by rn. not tn^o. 
 
82 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (a) MinRUA sara« 
 Suporatus os, 
 
 Autlltus est. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 / have been sent, or I was sent. 
 
 y(ni, (sing.) have been conquered^ or you were 
 
 conquered, 
 he has been heard, or he was heard. 
 RovocatI 8uinu8, we have been re- died, or we were recalled. 
 Ju88l o8tl8, yon (plural) have been ordered, or yon were 
 
 ordered. 
 CoactI sunt, they have been canipelkd, or they ivere compelled. 
 
 Observation.— Twofold translation. Voice. Number of words 
 in each Latir. phrase. Which indicates the per&on ? What does 
 the change of ending in the other indicate ? 
 
 (b) Jussa est, she was ordered. 
 
 Audltum est, it has been heard. 
 
 Locus munl^us est, the place was fortified. 
 
 Castra munlta sunt, the camp was fortified. 
 
 Legiones inlssae sunt, the legions \ave been sent. 
 
 Mllltes jussi sunt, the soldier^ have been ordered. 
 
 Observation.— What new endings are found in these verbs? 
 What do the different endings indicate ? 
 
 (c) 
 
 Present. 
 anio 
 do 
 veto 
 
 moneo 
 Jubed 
 comnioved 
 conipleo 
 
 regd 
 cogo 
 cognosce 
 mitto 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 Perfect Active. 
 aniavl 
 dedl 
 vetuT 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 nionul 
 jussI 
 commovl 
 complevl 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 kexl 
 coegl 
 cogndvl 
 niisl 
 
 Perfect Passive. 
 aniatus sum 
 dati«s sum 
 vetltus sum 
 
 monltus sum 
 Jussus sum 
 comm5tus sum 
 oompletus sum 
 
 rectus sum 
 coac*u8 sum 
 cdgnllus sum 
 
 ulzasUa suixx 
 
t 
 
 -<*fc 
 
 8T I-INTHODOCTORy ,.essoNS. 
 
 Present. 
 nucllo 
 sentio 
 vlncJd 
 
 Perfect Passive. 
 "MrtXtuH sunt 
 sensus nu,„ 
 vlnoCuH sum 
 
 sive. 
 
 
 sum 
 
 
 in 
 
 
 lum 
 
 
 sum 
 
 
 um 
 
 
 as sum 
 
 
 us sum 
 
 
 nm 
 
 
 sum 
 
 
 s sum 
 
 '-^bHHk 
 
 ^ovnm Conjugation. 
 
 Perfect Active, 
 Hudlvl 
 sensi 
 vluxl 
 
 Observation Ts fho . i l- ^'notus sum 
 
 P«H«ive and thono of H, '^" ^"^^«^'» ^^e forms of f h 
 
 perfect nassivp f ^ ^"»J"gation ? I„ ^u,,. '"^"V« the same ? 
 passive forms agree ? ^^""^ ^««Pect do all the 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 *«-'Pl6. ere. .,.„, ^~»''"'»'-3. 
 
 ««ft^. *""""'"•"•■"'*. ire. -,v, „„ , ,.. 
 
 --ri-:; ..;:"■ ""^ •- ■"• -"■- "■ 
 
 twi.alann. ' '""' ""•""«*• ore, -du„ ^ 
 
 f ""voe-^. are. .^v,. .a,„ „ ''«<^ ^^o^ "-'• -0«e.„„., 
 
 «<Wrf/„. •""■"•™" ""-ov-o. are. .4v, -, 
 
 W-«g6. ere. .„„, ,. . '«">. "■""""• '«■ 
 
 cA«,«. * • -'»<'«""•. Tra-do. ere. -did, ^„ 
 
 h^-Pa«n-6. are. -av, -» "i'- ""• "^^ 
 
 1^ fa«%*m. • """"'• '•-»«-dueo. ere. .«.,, . 
 
 "•-endo. ere. -.e„d, „. «-*• ' " """"" ^"^ 
 
 hum. "■"• ■-"-■". V„.„er-a. .re. .,,, ., 
 
 33 
 
^Mmr^-**'' : 
 
 I 
 
 hi 
 
 (If 
 
 84 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I. — 1. Agrl vastatl sunt. 2. Cdpiao cojlctiie aunt. 3. DSlSctl 
 BuinuH. 4. Cognituui est. 5. Oppida iucOnsa Hunt. 0. EcpiitatuH 
 niiHHUM cHt. 7. JilHHUH Huu». 8. Votitft t'M. ». Lf ouH oHt' nianitus. 
 10. OpuH porfectuin est. 11. E(iul ronioti Hunt. 1^. Fossa coiu- 
 pleta est. 13. lleducti buiuuh. 14. Convocatl Hunt. 15. Pro- 
 hibita, oHt. 1(». Prohibitao Hunt. 17. Vulnus acceptuni est. 18. 
 Prooliuni factum ost. 10. ExorcituH trausductus ust. 20. Cuosar 
 cunnuotUH uHt. 
 
 II. — 1. The Holdiers were ordered. 2. A largo number of men 
 has been collected, li. Wounds we"o received. 4. Wo have been 
 sent. 5. She has been wounded. (5. The camp was fortified. 7. 
 I was ordered. 8. The war was renewed. S. The arms have been 
 given up. 10. The forces were led back. 11. The cavalry has 
 been led across. 12. Garrisons were stationed. l.'J. A legion was 
 stiitioned. 14. Hostages have been given. 15. We have been 
 alarmed. 10. You have been ordered. 17. The signal was given. 
 18. The battlo has been begun. IS). The camp was taken by 
 storm. 20. The magistrates were called together. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 Funda vulnoratus est, 
 Agprl a euplls vastati sunt, 
 
 lie iras wounded Inj <i sling, 
 tlie fields ham been laid waste by 
 the fvrces. 
 liocns vallo fossaque munltus the place was foi'tified l^j a tvall 
 
 est, ^ and trench. 
 
 EquI a Caesare remotl sunt, the horses were removed bij Ccesar. 
 
 Observatlun. — Two ways of translating by. Which is used in 
 conn faction with the passive voice to denote the person by whom 
 p_»mething is done V^ 
 
 1. Est munituf, has the same meaning as munitus est. Not only may the order he 
 changed in these perfe ;t passive fonns, but the two parts are sometimes separated by 
 other words. 
 
 2. With the active voice a and ah will mean from ; with the passive, from or by, 
 whichever the fust of the sentcriet requires. 
 
PABT I.— 
 
 unt. 3. Delfictl 
 it. 6. E(iuitd,tu8 
 !UH uHt^ intlnltUH. 
 1^. FOHHH coin- 
 Hunt. 15. Pro- 
 it'ptum est. IH. 
 uut. 20. Cuusar 
 
 nvimbor of men 
 . Wo hiive boon 
 nis fortitied. 7. 
 • nniiH have been 
 rho caviUry has 
 l.'i. A legion was 
 We have been 
 lignal was given. 
 [) was taken by 
 
 INTHODITOTORY LESSONS. 
 
 do 
 
 hij (I sling. 
 
 •ieti laid wade by 
 
 rtijied (>[, a wall 
 
 zmoved by Ccesar. 
 
 ^hich is used in 
 jerson by whom 
 
 )nly may the order be 
 netimes separated by 
 
 passive, from or by, 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 i 
 
 Onnn,on^rl.,n., burden. ^ 
 
 <>P-Pr..n6. ere. -pre„,. .^^^^^ "^""^'^^''^^ ^-^ av,. -atan,. 
 •um. overwhelm. '"" '^*'' confusion 
 
 J __ ^*^»M m advance. 
 
 esf r V. "^ '"''»'«truta multitilclo I. """^ "- ^"««Hro con- 
 
 juti estis. 14 i„,„,,. _ , ^*^- ^lumonto coinmeatnnno - 
 
 Tj- - ^iwpetus ji barhiT-To ;. i '""t-acuque a socifs 
 
 ^^. The w^'^'rzor r :'„r™- ^^ °- *.- «.„, 
 
 barbarians s tj, confusion by H,o n^^ , 
 
 «"a. J. lily camn J. .u k ^ •'^ "^ attack of flio 
 
 trench. 4 y,,,, , " ^ "'^*' "een fortified hv « ® 
 
 «Ued „it; I™ '7 ^7" -»I,ed ,r„,„ wol.^" ™''« ""<• 
 remove th,. I '""y «« '"■(lered l,v tl . ™" "'*"' 
 
 '-,;;:;" r^r «''•/■"•'-*- we'e «, ivr'^"™',r 
 
 solchers were overwhelmed bv Lr f '™ """"W"- W The 
 
 E,r '^''"'^' ^^ere given nn J. n ""^ bounded by an 
 
 forces were alarmed by tiL ^ ^^ ""^^ ^^^ ^^^^i^ns. 16 TJ 
 
 1- See footnote 2, pa^e^ 
 
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 (a) MUsnaeram, I had been sent. RevocatI eramus, we had been 
 
 recalled. 
 
 Commotas eras, you (sing.) JussI eratls, yon (plural) Imd 
 
 had been alarmed. been ordered. 
 
 Audltus erat, he had been CoactI erant, they had been corn- 
 heard, pelled. 
 
 Audltum erat, it had been Castra inunlta erant, the camp 
 
 heard. had been fortified. 
 
 Jussa erat, she had been or- Coplae mlssae erant, the forces 
 
 dered. had been sent. 
 
 Observation. — Compare these phrases with those given in Les- 
 son XXI. (a) and (b). What diflferences in form and meaning do 
 you find ? 
 
 r 
 
 (b) Missus ero, I shall have been BevocatI erlmus, we shall have 
 sent. been recallea. 
 
 Commotus erls, you (sing.) JussI erltls, |/ow (plural) will 
 will have been alarmed. have been ordered. 
 
 Audltum erlt, it will have Castra inunlta erunt, the camp 
 ' beenheard. will have been foiiifi^d. 
 
 Jussa erlt, she will have been Coplae mlssae erunt, the forces 
 ordered. will have been sent. 
 
 Observation. — Compare these phrases with those in (a) What 
 differences in form and meaning do you find ? 
 
 (c) Mlseram, Ilhod^ent. 
 
 >■ Jusseratls, you (plural) had or- 
 dered. 
 
 Audlverat, he had heard. Coegerant, they had compelled. 
 
 Mlsero, I shall have sent. Munlverlnt, they will have for-, 
 
 tified. 
 
 Observation. — Compare these forms with the phrases in (a) and 
 (b). What is the difference between the corresponding active and 
 passive forms in Latin ? 
 
PART I.—. 
 
 INTRODUCTOlir LESSONS. 
 
 37 
 
 we had been 
 
 (plural) liad 
 
 had been com- 
 
 int, the camp 
 
 ed. 
 
 mt, the forces 
 
 given in Les- 
 1 meaning do 
 
 we shall have 
 
 (plural) luill 
 "ed. 
 
 unt, the camp 
 fortified. 
 lint, the forces 
 sent. 
 
 in (a). What 
 
 lural) had or- 
 
 ad compelled, 
 will have f&r- , 
 
 ises in (a) and 
 ing active and 
 
 EXEKCISE XXIII. 
 
 "*'"» 61*©, -cIAtT 1 
 
 fo-'Pur-a. are. -av, -, «"■'.. *a«, „„ ' "'"'"■ 
 
 6. Co]locatr sunt -7 n '^'''^^"'^ ^ro. 6 Pnn,. -. 
 
 eram 1*7 t ^"^veratis. jp; q /, ^- ^«mmovet 
 
 ^'"- ^^- Instrcctl sunt m v ^"^^"Jinius. 16 4^^? 
 
 rant. 22 PmJ -^'''"^'^"ctl erinms 2T P ;. " ^"^"era 
 
 9ft n- . ^"stinueramus 9ft T^-^ '^"bebat. 24 Pom 
 
 28. Cognitum erit 29 ^^^' * ^^^^geras. 27 DpIs 7' 
 
 "^- ^J. SubJatum erat %o v t ""^^ectus eras. 
 II.-l Tj, "• ^"ineratis. 
 
 We were nn! '''''1 ^""^ ^®®" renewed 2 iv , , 
 Thev3,'r' '^^" "^^^^ ready 6 tTu'''^ '^^ ^--n up 
 
 >een compelled. Tfi tj , ^^^ "^^^ ^«»nfl out if; Tu ^* 
 
 '^^ »^-n led aero s ^^3 ^^ ™ ^ed bacr 17 The ^-^'^^ 
 
 U b;tor^^-7f^,^-nUS: fs Tw" ^^ ^^^en 
 6- She Jnd J. -^ '^'^" remove 9n 'r^^ ^ "^'^ *^^l^e the 
 
 •ven si'V" ""^""^^d. 27 Th v ^^'"^ ^^'"^^ ^vounded 
 
 ^^"- ^y. I gave. 30 T «.„ • ^^ ^^""J- 28 If l,.^ i 
 
 »>". I was giving. "^^ ^^^ been 
 
.*r 
 
 asdnmncRrssm 
 
 ( 
 
 38 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 (a) Turn to the nouns of the fifth declension, given in Part III., 
 section 8. 
 
 Observation. — The case-endings of the declension. How does 
 the vocabulary indicate that a noun is of the fifth declension ? Of 
 what gender are most nouns of this declension ? ^ 
 
 (h) Turn to the list of ordinal numerals, given in Part III., 
 section 15. 
 
 Observation. — Forms and translation. Notice the way in which 
 thirteenth, fourteenth, twenty-first, etc., are expressed. 
 
 In the general Vocabulary all ordinal numerals are given as 
 follows : primus, a, uin, fird ; sccundus, a, uin, second .* dcci- 
 nius, a, um, tenth. What is indicated by the letters a, uin ? 
 \ 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Acles, el, f., line of battle, line. Oceasns, iis, m., setting. 
 
 Dies, el, m., day. Pars, partis, f., jxtrt. 
 
 Egreglus, a, uni, remarkable. Res, rel, f., thing, matter, affair. 
 
 Fides, el, f., honor, word, fidelity. Sclentla, ae, f., knowledge. 
 
 Hora, ae, f., horir. Sol, soils, m., s?t?i. 
 
 Mllltarls, e, military. Spes, el, f., hope. 
 
 I. — 1. Spem fugae sustulerat. 2. Milites in acie instructl sunt. 
 3. Cum tertiil legione in provincia hiemaro constituit. 4. Fidem 
 servavit de numei;o dierum. 5. Scientiam rcI- mllitaris habet. 
 6. Ab hora septima ad occasum solis piignaverant. 7. Multls 
 rebus adducti erant. 8. Egregiam fidem legati cognoverat. 9. 
 Tertia pars exercitus interfecta est. 10. Omnes centuriones 
 quartae cohortis interfecti erant. 11. Do fide Gallorum dubita- 
 verant. 12. Propter inopiam omnium rerum milites nonae legionis 
 in provinciam reducere constituerat. 13. Omnem spem saliitis in 
 virtute posueramus. 
 
 1. See Part III., section 51. b. 
 
 2. Res militaris (the singular) = military affairs, tha art of warfare. 
 
ti in Part III., 
 
 in Part III., 
 
 %"„ o„.th;tt,w '"2%::';''^ '^ ^"'"'-^ "f "« fifth 
 
 hope of plunder. 3. The fnt T. "'" *""•'" influenced by Z 
 «fte. the f„„.,h da,. 4." 1 7 Lt' ^^ ""^ l^' '" '"X 
 
 They had come into Gaul notw'tl "" °"' ""■""«'' »outs. 12 
 He had ^tationod the tent^'LZZZll"'' "' '"""-■ " 
 
 LESSON XXV 
 
 Tertlo aie ad Oac«are.„ ve- o.. /A. '.. • . 
 
 «er„„t. «^ ^A« thtrd day tl^y ,„^ ^^ 
 
 Oecasu soils l« «„ -l ''^^'**'' 
 
 -^nset (literally, at the set- 
 Mult6« dies Iter fecerant .7 ^^ ''^ *^'^ '^"n). 
 
 ^^asrnatn „arte.n die/ pu' „^ f^ 'j^^^ marcAecZ ,nany days. 
 
 verant. ^"^^ ^'-1/ - j fougU a larye part of 
 
 '*"«'•«"*. '^''^'l''''''''^^^^y withstood the 
 
 attach. 
 
 Observation — Tli f 
 «.ese sentence.: The nZe'c-'^ """"""'"' "* «">e found i„ 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 (Fo th' -^^Jii AAV. 
 
40 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 I. — 1. Posfcero diS castra Labienl opptignare decreverant. 2. 
 Complures horas pilgnaverunt. 3. Nocto ad Rhenum contendit. 
 4. Soils occasa coplae in castra reductae sunt. 5. Multos annos 
 rggnum obtinuerat. 6. HOra circiter decima dlei nuntlum ad 
 Lablenum misimus, 7. Perniultos dies iter per provlnclam fece- 
 rant. 8. Contlnuos complures dies Caesar aclem instruxlt. 9. 
 Prima luce res ab exploratoribus confirmata est. 10. Certo annl 
 tempore maglstratus a Caesare convenire jussi erant 11. Tertlam 
 partem Galllae paucos annos incolueramus. 12. Adventu Caesaris 
 barbari constiterunt. 
 
 II. — 1. The Helvetians moved their camp the next day at day- 
 break. 2. In the third watch they made a sally out of the towp 
 with all their forces. 3. For several hours they withstood tho 
 articles of the cavalry. 4. On the first arrival of the army numer- 
 ous sallies had been made by the Gauls. 5. He decided to attack 
 the town on the seventh day. 6. They had for many days laid 
 waste the lands of the Aedui. 7. On the following day an attack 
 wa3 made by th^ Gauls on the cavalry. 8. The camp was moved 
 in the fourth watch with^ great noise and confusion. 9. After his 
 fr.ther's death he had possessed the royal power for several years. 
 '^.0. At daybreak on the remaining days a double line of battle had 
 been drawn up by Cfesar. 11. They had waged war with the 
 Romans for many years. 12. We reached the camp the third hour 
 of the day. 
 
 li 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 Turn to the nouns of the third declension, given in Part III., 
 section 6. 
 
 Observation. — Ho^ do the case-iendings differ from those given 
 in sections 4 and 5 (comparing always nouns of the same gender) ? 
 Do the same differences occur in all the words P Compare the 
 adjectives of the third declension given in Part III., section 11. 
 
 Notice also the irregular declension of the nouns given in Part 
 III., section 9. 
 
 1. Use cum, 
 
 2. Most nouns having these endings will be found to belong to one of the followinjr 
 classes : " 
 
•everant. 2. 
 na contendit. 
 lultoa annos 
 nuntium ad 
 '^inciam fece- 
 istruxit. 9. 
 . Certo annl 
 11. Tertiam 
 ntu Caesaris 
 
 day at day- 
 of the towp 
 ithstood tho 
 irmy numer- 
 ed to attack 
 ny days laid 
 ay an attaci 
 
 was moved 
 9. After his 
 jveral years. 
 )f battle had 
 ar with the 
 e third hour 
 
 PART I. — 
 
 INTKODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 41 
 
 n Part III., 
 
 those given 
 ne gender)? 
 Compare the 
 ction 11. 
 
 ven in Part 
 
 >f the following 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI, 
 
 rSmoiuin tii.-.tii V i * >'astati sunt. 3. Niiv/i..,., <: - 
 host, bus occupata erant. 6. A„i,!«," . "'""™ ^Ipium ab 
 ^rvorum et olientium Gall 1,^. k^"" "*«"'"" »-»«um 
 
 I-b:S„umeumo„„,re,„itataZtert" "'•• "• P-'-" *« 
 hostium .„_cursio„em Want 8 m ™ ^*'™'- ^- I" ^Ms 
 
 per vim ftoerunt. 10. In Lb,! I'T™ "' ^"''^ Aedu,3rum iter 
 ter alttMinem mo„ti„,„^tt „-!„■" ''™*^^'^'- "" ?-" 
 oxfrmtimlsregifinibus jubetconvln;:"' ''""* '""'• ^^- ^«v5s 
 
 oftbrwar.''^ He'riandeZ;™"- "' ''^^ » '"« *ird ,ear 
 attack was made at d-^b" elk btT '"""""' °' ""^'^Ses. sUn 
 f, All the towns of the LnellT7VV'''' «- "^ battle 
 through the province by (liZZ « i ^^ ^'"^^ '««• »arched 
 ^a™ed by the violence^ the:^;r7*> '""' «' "^^ -»« 
 
 from the mountain to the territories J' J ?""'*■ """^ '<> «tend 
 
 the enemy's cavalry from inroads 8 On ^'^'''' '""' '-"■-"' 
 the sea, the soldiers hesitated to lean d '"""""'' "' '^'"^"P^i' of ■ 
 The forces of the enemv h,d », ''*P,^°™ ""t of the shin in 
 
 ;hips Of war. n. ror7ur^^ZfZT\^' *« ^™ °* ">^ 
 the fields with fire„and sword i1 '^"""^ ">ey had laid waste 
 
 !!!!!:^'^^!i!ll^^venuesof I'lldr"' ^"" ''^ '"«1 
 
 l-'ileZ^aZ''"^^'^^^^^^^^^^^:^^ — 
 
 (2) M<...o,,],ab,es ending i„.„^,„ , ' *"" "»"' """unativ. .„<, 
 
 'ollowlng Sr /h '" '•"""'"e plural ; ,erv ,.„ v . . 
 
 ».n«„.„'.„rS!i5».».one« >„ C^r^VS,''r.V»L^a''Sr« ■'"^'«-. the 
 EnJii.Kir? '» <■""■<•'•>■ All ,i,„il„ ,„■ ' • ""»"»«"» the 
 
 1 / 
 
42 
 
 PKIMAliV LATIN BOOK. 
 
 m 
 
 I.ESSON XXVII. 
 I-nvO of .. ^.t ana socond conjugations, us given in l>a.t III., 
 
 01>HorvHtI«„.---Fro„x which of the j,rincii.nl parts arc these 
 the ditferonco between the voices indicated in Latin i^ 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 I.-l. Ilelvetii loci natfirn continentur. 2. Mngnao cdni.ve nb 
 
 nut.,,, l,Hl„o v,d.,.,„. a Vrc„» ,„„„til„„ c„„ti„ebatur. 9, 
 E.,n^ua ,,o,l,t,„,. v„i,-,t„ „„,.v,.„t„,.. i,, ,„ «,,„it,-,t„ t„„,,, J' 
 
 1 ,;.tur'rrH "'-""-'"'*'"""■• •-• ""'^'^ '-i-mti.,,,, d«,i.,.; 
 
 aZ V- 7, " '"'«'""' """l'o»Wtil„,s c„„t.i„51,„ntur. 14 
 
 ab ho»t,b„,, „,cu,.siouib„. vusmb,Tt„r. 18. M„ltitadi„o I,o„rum 
 castra coniplebuntur. ""lumuui 
 
 IL-l. The forces of the enemy arc being increased. 2. Stones 
 - were benig j.laced on the wall 3 Tho K.,ffi^ -i i ? 
 
 4 Yon .V 11 1 . •. ,1 ; '^^^^® ^^^^ ^^"^ renewed. 
 
 incW V t " '^.^^'-^-V'y the consul. 5. The Helvetians are 
 Rhone f w "y";/'^''"^; '''- '^•- mountains,^ and the river 
 al les 7 Tlo' • V".' " ''^'""""^ '^ ^''^ ^^^l^^-e of the 
 cituens. 8. For several successive days the enen»y's forces are 
 kept n. camp by stonns. 9. The lands of tlio Aedui used To be 
 Lud waste by the Gennans. 10. It is announced to C Jlr 11 
 shall be held m subjection. 12. They seem to fear without cL 
 
 po^rS^nSriXt'u^^tl /^^JST^e^tS^-t^^"? »-*. tha. precedes the 
 the same sound as ir, b„t beinj? easier to pronoumv) '^ ''* ^'''' ''''^'"S *'™o«t 
 
 as of a'2'„gre^SfcoS' '^'^"^ '"" '''^ '"^'^"'"«f °' * »«««"<«»» '^Aam. as well 
 
 '..<^' 
 
 i.^ — >■-■*>-» 
 
PAET I.-mTKODtJCTORV LESSONa 43 
 
 J;'. They wore removed. 74 w„ ,.„ 
 
 «• '''),ey will ,,e recalled. 1 I ',";, ,^'- ^"" »"" '» ■■^dleu. 
 l" mstiviined. ' "'' *" restmin. 20. I u,,ed to 
 
 MiSSON X.XVIII. 
 
 chain, as well 
 
 (^OLatuH. 7,ro«rf; latlor, broader ' ,.-.„ . 
 
 "<<^^ . UiU^Hlmnn, broadest or t^ei-^ 
 
 , w«ifi, fortlor, braver ; forM. • ; 
 
 ' fortl8Hi,„„H, bravest or ?;my 
 
 Potions. ;>o?fv.r/„i • ,,of««f . """''"'^ ''^''*^'^- 
 
 / 'J '"'> potontlor, more i,ot«.n*i. t 
 
 i"™-«ve.. Wold tmnslatlo.rt:,,;:!™^;:'-'''"™ '""" '"« 
 (?>) VIrl fortloi.fs ^ i 
 
 Fluinen latins, „ bvnr,,/. 
 
 Oliscrvntlon.— Declension „„1 „ 
 
 «.r,„ri,.tive adjectives. ' "«'■"'""="» "' e„mp„,tivo .-.nd 
 
 (c) Turn to the declpn«m„ e 
 P-tm., section 12 '"' "' """T^-'tive ..djeetives, as given i„ 
 
 Observation.— How do f],« 
 ffefronUlK,.,e,,f ,>djcct;*V::r"''r " "'^ """'P^-'-e 
 Sesame declension? '(See "Luon 11.)°" ''"' ''^W'ing <„ 
 
44 
 
 PttlMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII 
 
 delecti sunt. 5 Hnn„l,r.,.- - ^"^^^^"^ velocissiini et fortissiml 
 
 Le.ic..» ,.,„,;,,« twe'':!::,,,^:"!''";. t-™"' ."™^- «• 
 
 confugerunt. 8. Castm Jofi- ^ 1 " dou.si.s.si,nas silvas 
 
 Crebriores exploratoro, in 'Lf ir """" "^"'^^- l^" 
 
 mum ag„.en hupetun. fecerunt " ""'''' ^^' ^" '^^^i" 
 
 theL~!;, w;f ^:^^^^^^ "^L'e"" ^"^--<^ «^ (^^-^-^ «^o.O 
 He gives Ins daughter to the ot . '"^ ''"^^^' ^^"^^^ ^^^ests. 3 
 n-n. 4. He came r^ Is t'T' ' '"^ '"'^ '^"' ^^^^-^"^' 
 the noblest (men) oi^C^^'tT^'' ^ '^^-^ ^ad sent 
 appearance of the wider vessels V TT f '"? """"'"^ ^-^ ^^o 
 the vessels lower, and wider 8 T,; """f"""'^ ^'^^^^""^ ^« "•''^ke 
 l-ds. 9. The rear was beinf "tlfro''^ ""f '" ^""^^^ "^^^^ ^-^^^^ 
 encamped in a very fert^r^ ,T Th! ^"'"f^" '^^ '^'-^ 
 m by higher mountains and . W.] ^ "''^ *" ^" ^^^"^'"^^'' 
 
 hems in tlie Helvetians 13 ct? r^""^''' '"' ^ ^^'^^^^ ^'^^^^ 
 frequent messages. U Hp i, ?"" f ^^" "^formed by more 
 
 hostages to the bravest soldiers. "''^ '^^ '^'^'^ ^^ ^he 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 (a) Missus est. he was (or has r;^^.- 
 
 6^e,t) sen^. Romanus est. Ae ,'. a Homan. 
 
 C6^n,tu.„ erat. it had ll f;;*^^ -«*'%«- &m... 
 
 /ov^nc; 01.^. ' ^'''^''' ^'•^*' ^'^ ^as powerful. 
 
 6«m led back. '^""*' ^^^^ ^^"^^^ ^efree. 
 
itinentur. 2. 
 3. Urbs in 
 
 et fortissimi 
 •I erant. 6. 
 «'Simas silvas 
 int. 9. Ad 
 iccidit. 11. 
 
 In novissi- 
 
 'alhj, about) 
 forests. 3. 
 djjowerful' 
 ey had sent 
 led by tlie 
 lus to make 
 Host fertile 
 10. Tliey 
 e hemnibd 
 3eper river 
 i by more 
 ty of the 
 
 ioman. 
 
 mve. 
 verfid. 
 
 ^efree, 
 
 hen est, 
 
 the parfr 
 
 PART I.-INTROI,„cro„r IJJSS01,S. 4. 
 
 of the verb used in f * 
 
 jrr " '"^ '-"-- <" ".e v.b ,..„.. ,,,,„ ,„ p„^ „^^ 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 iertia nocte la,m erat pl6„a -, j ""• *' I" """ta m,nm. 5 
 
 »;«'ra erant. 10. Sp5« 1 ^tta T ? ^""'- «' Caatra a^gu 
 
 est mter Se,ua„Os et Helv.tias 14 t ^ ''■ *"*" "'«-»"» 
 ter fagora fra,„e„ta in agrfe mjtfli „ ""■" "■*""• 16. Pr„^. 
 
 tern tenebant. 17. AdventLht 1 " ''™"'- ^«- MUitSs mon- 
 
 fortisrimua et n6bii«i„!/Ct "If p'V"^ ""■'■«'• 20.'™: 
 er^t ante oppidu„. 23. HomoLm °" ™"'- ^2. Fossa 
 
 fi^^'tp:r.^t:^^^^^^^^^^^ 2. neroad 
 
 T. '• '^'' ''-« awafti„r 9 The T " '^"''™'^ »' «« 
 10 The vessels are low and wide ,T t,"'*'" ™ '^'J- »hort. 
 advance. 12. The allies usedtlL / '"' ''"""' «■'■■« «ent in 
 hostUe. 14. ThereM,ad been ,,: f:- ^3. They began to be 
 
 useful friends. IS ti, T"""^" '"to confusion. 17 v,„ 
 
 h- been influenced. 2^ T^ '"" '" ^^^'^ -"y W hI 
 It is uncertain. "^ ^''"^ ""' "'"ki-g ready all things 2 
 
 tm Latin. See footnote 1. 
 
46 
 
 PllIMAUY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 er«t, "' ""•' '/""r/nvH,.v to the Rnnan 
 
 Hol»,.tirH,:p„t|„|„,i,.„H I. i»'"f>l<: 
 
 """• f^'-y ^tre nUjacnit to Ganl 
 
 .t refurH to P *■ '"-'""^ ''■■'•'"^■'''' "'• '""»»• tl.o Hdjoctivo 
 
 KXKUCISK XXX. 
 I — 1. Amicus humt HoIviitiiH o n 
 
 ""'fr '""""■" "■■'"'™-- -■" .-•'- r ™ t • '■ ',"- 
 
 i3Illtdi.Hc6.smw. r, T„,.„,„„:„„„, !'>-"""""• 4- l "g«o Himilis 
 
 «■ <i.-.iii f,„iti„.r ]...,,: 0, :„'"';. "'"-''"'■' ""='«"■'■"■' »"• 
 
 cart f„f.,.„„t d,., iuMiKuhllil, " II vnir"'' "I-" '"'"""'"• W- 
 
 A..d;,u;„!;i:::;v::^;:;:;.,,;.';,,r e..^. _,,. , „.: 
 
 graceful t„ tl,„ ,)„,„„„,„. '^ Tl o »L„1 ; ^ *=' ""■" ""'™ '''»- 
 6- Shu i« dual- to nil i: \V ' , . '''■"'*.""■""» t" tllo nnny. 
 
 faithful to tho Eo„„.„ ; ,, "; r^T- ,*■ *" ""^ '"^■™ 
 
 t.> the nou„„, people 11 T „. „ n , "™"' ''' '"■■ ''o^'^" 
 
 12.I.ehaH,o^Jereur^^:T: ir^^^^^^^^ 
 
 tho Gallic wiir. ^ •'^*^- ^^ ^'^ snnilHr to 
 
 LESSON XXXL 
 Turn to the list of irreguLirifio^ i,, fi, 
 
 given i„ p„,.t i„., seetiori;";:r;* ; -n:;:" "" "'^"""™^' 
 
" t/ie Rman 
 lldntiana. 
 
 "I "'f n iioiui 
 
 K t.lu( pOlHOll 
 
 I. DoLirt tJio 
 lie Hcljoctive 
 
 ■'lis. a In- 
 ^'gHo Hiniilis 
 '• Nihil est 
 iiitiiin omt. 
 
 IICUN. 10. 
 
 •nlCmi sunt. 
 nt gmtuin. 
 
 • 2. TJio 
 more tlis- 
 tlio urniy. 
 ' Konmn.s. 
 liHtl boon 
 Hre more 
 l)o hostile 
 the state. 
 siiuiJnr to 
 
 Ijcctives, 
 
 PART l.-rNTRODCCTO«r J,ESSONa 47 
 
 'I""iNoii, given m Lesson XXVIIJ. 
 EXICRCISK XXXI. 
 
 n'..t. f.. r..c.|,er..i„ ,.,11,(1 v .-'"" '""*"''"' ''""'"" «-"""■ 
 
 -.".",. „,,.t ,„mcuiw». 7 ooh,r "";""■ "■ ''■■•«""«»..* 
 
 coiwcrI,„c.,„t. l.t. .S„,„ ,.ior„ .„„',- ""'""''■'' «""""' logirtnC, 
 
 f , '-•»"'■" cm..!,.,,,!:;::;;'"" V""'. '"'r ""-^ ^'*«i'- 1*„,: 
 
 rtmoctl sunt. ],i. S„p„,.i,-„.ll„;.s ,1 cl„„ ','"--'■ ""'""""" "'■'«'-•■" 
 
 They .i..-.de « „ttHck f,.,„„ (,Z. ;' ""f'l «■■■"■ ... Llthur G„ul. 7 
 They wo,.e -.ttackl,,,, the „t ,rtifi"" "■'^ "" '"■*-"'" 8-....cl. 8 
 
 foot-«„ldl„„. 10. Tho <,o tf "7 '■' ''"■«^'' ""■■"- »' 
 Gonev. « tho f,.rtho.st town of t„ A L "' " "''^ t'™"'- U. 
 «.e ton.,torio« „f tho Holvotl^^ ^'f J"' .'""•."- ■— t to 
 They fled to the nearest wood« 14 t,] *,'"""« « ^^i"'- 13. 
 
 ,« r • .''• ^' '« •">=' *° hasten tt tf T "'"' "'" «""'^' -ty 
 16. They had ooUeoted very Cfel' "" ^'"^ "* '"^ «'-« 
 
 ves (traiiR- 
 
48 
 
 PHIMAKV LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESiJON XXXII. 
 
 conjugatii.us P ' *"' ""i ""Mnd 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII. 
 
 *ii parte. G!>.LT„i:''rt:;rti:'t''\ "• "';'■ 
 
 vallo alti.simO mflniulr /^^h '"■"-" "™":™""''»- «• Castm 
 rescindunt 11 Rh,r '*• 7 """»■■" ^ v.ncnaim. 10. Po.,te,n 
 
 omma „.„e„d„„t. 19. I„ fl„etas dfeilit. 2a Cum eoiLflXt 
 vehorum proeliuin coinmittunt. «iuitatu Hel- 
 
 Kuers Mil. 5, We are being surrounded by the Gauls 6 W„ 
 are wagu.g war with the Romans 7 Th f, 
 
 seventh dav S Tl,„ «<"n»ns. 7. They assemble on the 
 
 9. The wL t They send ambassadors to Oa,s.r about peace. 
 
 bindin. 11 wL * ""° ™'<"' l™-*""^- 10- You are 
 
 ^^^^lllgli^l^^^^^^l-iquer m^ 12. The bridge is broke n down. 
 
 •o-called thematic vowel .. will onWeSmni^lZ^'' '^"'' '"■■ ^'> '"''"Iiice th. 
 2. See footnote 1, page 42. 
 
PART l—INTHODUCTORY LE380NS. 4ft 
 
 i«- The o«„.p i, piJhJ^^"; 1?lT "" "'" ™"^- 
 
 advance with the scouts 11; T .. t- , ,^''"'""'» '» «ont i„ 
 
 "'• -^^ "IS announced. 
 
 LE.SSON XXXIII. 
 J;ri4. ""' '"'^""™'* "'«'- •>-'"»-- i" given in P«rt m.. 
 
 The most peculiar nf f ha «^^ 
 
 *He list .„„, re oCLt r ,2.^: ::r„ct^-- -™ ^" 
 
 Alia looa fo88l8. alia v/iiit.. e 
 
 Altera lejld In OalllA k. . ^ "f""-' with towers. 
 
 me o^Aer tn Italy. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 
 I— 1. Alterum iter facilius erat 9 t - -.- . 
 Caesarem veniunt. 3 Cum JTa t^^^' *°""^ ^^^^i^e ad 
 
 mittit. 4. Aliud iter hab ".uri^alW%^^^^^^^ -- 
 
 Sequanos via. 6. In utram n^rf. « - ^^Imquitur^ ana per 
 
 derat. 8. Neuter p/oetrcoCl'"^ ?: Nolllaod- 
 
 de adventa equitatis et dTlTbig^^^^^^^^^ '• Uno tempore 
 
 Alteram partem vici Gait t'^d ^ r '"'"' '^^'"« ^^^- l^' 
 alils audiunt. 12. Alia in Z^ / " °^'''^^^^^^ ^^- ^^ 
 
 num alterius pr^^^um te ent 1"^ 'f ''''''''' ''■ ^-^- 
 Sine 0115 perlcula cLrmarn, fr/''"r ^'^"^"^" l^" 
 est totius Galliae. "^^^^"nt. 15. Ager Sequanus optimus 
 
 ^?^^^^^^^^ • 
 
 corresponding woSSJrd^?L'^L« of the introductory ^L« Tn tl,^. .. 
 »• see lootnote ?, page 19. ' ' "^ '"°*'" See footnote r.^«t'45:" 
 
 4 
 
 no 
 
 'uore 
 
50 
 
 PfilMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 !=,i 
 
 n.-l He gives orders to the whole province 2 An o^^ i 
 miscliief. 6. The Sequani alone do^ not venture to ask aid T 
 
 15. He wUl not be detened by tl.! mnenoooLt^Z *"• 
 
 LESSON XXXTV. 
 
 «me way as m the first and second conjugations P 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 
 10. BeUum g^* "ll. VenZrTa '. ^."'-"'"O*--'- 
 13. Praen,iUu„t„r. 14. CaZ raniftanturt 'T'*™^ 
 
 ^. 17. ProH.... IS. x4e:sr --^— - 
 
 1. See footnote 2, page 19. 2. See footw. o „ „ . " " 
 
 -; x-^- ao. o. see rootnote 1, page 42. 
 
2. An attack 
 'ome fill the 
 • neither. 5. 
 (doing) any 
 ask aid. 7. 
 le place. 8. 
 made a sally 
 bank of the 
 le. 12. He 
 to give up 
 aid neither, 
 te. 
 
 fcive of the 
 n27. 
 
 g forms in 
 
 from the 
 
 sating was, 
 
 e given in 
 
 lie passive 
 ions ?3 
 
 Bsiliemus. 
 a munie- 
 ludeminJ. 
 Jebantur. 
 >iar. 16. 
 sris. 20. 
 
 > pa^re 42. 
 
 PART I.-INTR0DUCT0K7 LESSONS. 51 
 
 H.— 1. They were assemblinff 9 w^ u n ■, 
 r leading back. 4. I shal Ibt led bT^k 6 h"*^- '^ ^' 
 down. 6. The camp i. being fortified 7 h!' n ™ '""^"8 
 They wUl move the camp 9 T T ,, K ^^ /^° '"" *"'»">?• »• 
 to divide. 11. u wa« b ing JrS "^rw""'- ''■ '* ""<• 
 13. A legion will be enrolled 14 Y™. „ Y T"''' ""«'"« ™''- 
 will be conquered. 16 You „in t '""'°""'^- ^S. You 
 
 being got ready. 18 You Tl b^ ,™ rT'''''- '^- -'^™- -ere 
 20. We shall not begin batte ''"'"*• ''• ^ """^ *» eome. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 Ju™ to the li«t of cardinal „ume..s given in Part III., ^ec- 
 
 twenty; the manner of —ilL^ """^' '""^ '''''™ t" 
 bers ; -the various expreslnWn^*^ 'wenty-one and similar num- 
 JW the declension of Zo^l^^f *«»;"'• -■»"» -u-bers. 
 tion 16.1 ""^ '^'^n^' numerals, see Part III., sec 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV. 
 
 hostium pr^pulerant l''Xf"T"'""' "*«"'"" ""J^'Minem 
 4. Ad Caesarem eum L^^r, . 1.''""'*'"™ '*'' "''^«'"-- 
 ootadecim ex superi™ portasoTvent 6 «- ^'"^''"'- ^- ""'^^ 
 et septuaginta ad Caesarem retulerlt 7 T T "''^ ^"""'"°^ 
 que pagos habent. 8 En,,;*! . ""'"" "'S'"*' l"''^- 
 
 9. Quattuordecim ann5s1ll ^^ ^a:!'^ to ^ ''°''*-™'- 
 equitibus eruptionem fecerunt I1 n- .. "" ^escentis 
 
 Bhenum consflmemus. 12 nLs .ct?". "'" '*' """' "^^ 
 Legionem quartam decimam h^T- *^ ""*"'*« «''""'• W- 
 ginta cohoLs coacteTsun" " f™™" "^a-t. 14. Quad«- 
 in aci« instrtait ^^ ""'' ~"'»'^^ ^"toque copigs 
 
 '• "" '"''""°" ""^ ™ »' »•••«« •'e t^«. up ta U„o„ "x^^ 
 
52 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 eroat wars had been finished 4 Th H !",""""• '*" ^^'^ 
 towns and about two hnnd rf tukges T ^Zf ""^""'" 
 four hundred cavalry 6 H« rH % r J^ ^ *"" '"'"'■' "^ 
 
 ">.<I one hundred and fiWv f ""'! ^'"™"' *'"' '"" '"'gio™ 
 
 The, wer. ^ouitu::^ tX^^i ^i^rT ^^r'''-'.- '■ 
 
 «ll be ehosen fr„,„ the whole army T' t!' ^^'^^-^"f *'°W»™ 
 ^ade. 10. The yiUage is dividrd il tw„^;:X7ir T 
 
 the remaining! mareld for nl d "T '" *"'' "=*"'P' """^ -'" 
 the Belgians 14 iv" wl" T. T """"«'' *" "'™'»"''' <" 
 will be fefton the otLr S' 15 On 7"; """ ''"' "'^'^^""■' 
 
 hundred and «ft, horse„t"td"ctotrif Tl^ '7, 
 give up the two sons of a«lv.o ^ "-""ectea. lb. They will 
 
 hosuges. 17. The/hTyelt mltWot:" """'^^ »''• ^"^ 
 
 Ml88uru8 est, 
 Vastaturl sumus. 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 he is going to send, 1^ is about to send, 
 
 he intends to send, 
 we are going to lay waste, we are mi the 
 
 Cop. .e munlturae erant. the Mees were on the point of fortify. 
 
 Ju88ur«8eram r '""^^ '!'''' ""^'^^^^ *<> f^tify. 
 
 i«^i- - I wm going to order. 
 
 Le^lo non ventara erlt. th. legion.will not he likely to corr^e. 
 
 Bible for each form To whinh i J "' translations pos^ 
 
 ence in meaning and fit re^e ^ 1 L^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^-.^ 
 est. etc. u«tween missus est and mlssurus 
 
 Literallj', Iwo partisa 
 
 roere. 
 
 Sep fnntnnf A i .«. 
 
2. He was 
 ' two very 
 forty-three 
 18 mad*^ by 
 wo legions 
 ntain. 7. 
 e soldiers 
 foits were 
 iver. 11. 
 id villages 
 and with 
 itories of 
 ixteenth, 
 day two 
 'hey will 
 ind fifty 
 
 to send, 
 *e on the 
 fortify- 
 
 ne. 
 
 hanges 
 :t8 are 
 8 pos^ 
 Differ:^ 
 
 suras 
 
 PART I.~INTRODUCTOKY LESSONS. 
 EXERCISE XXXVI. 
 
 53 
 
 L-l. Duodecim cohortes coactilrl sumus 2 Omni ^-^ • 
 mcensQrl erant pf if«». . ... "'""^- -'• <Jmnia aedificia 
 
 Sine '^v>i>^^^e:t:jzz:"TZi!:zr'^'- '■ 
 
 - intents to aM U ."t ^ t L'" T^ ""' """T'- '^ ^^ 
 across three-fourths (UteraUy Z^'pal^lZn "'""'' 1° '^^'' 
 « not Jikely «, gain her request 8 Th. t -. v' '■™'- '• ®'"' 
 of giving up their am» Q H T^ """* '"'«" »" ""> P^nt 
 
 thrte hundredllvr 10 ^h "" "' '," ""''"' -^ '"'^'='' -"> 
 next day. 11. WeZ'o lZ7^7""^ ^ ^"^ ""' "' """ «"»? ">» 
 
 12. They are not likeTv ^ 'ff / ""^ "'"""" ""^ danger. 
 
 13. I i„ti,d to say" Ll;;trLT ™^''™"^ ""O ""-»''''• 
 «m be likely to be^ Se ,6 W ""f T"'""' "' ^«"'- 
 the province. ' *" '''"" "P^nd three days in 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 Cum m..,. .-!.!'""„"'"• ''?'"«^°/««o«,„dW«,««„. 
 
 ' W€M. 
 
 \.i. 
 
54 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 norsemen. 
 declension, see Part III rectl^„ i«" '"''^ "' *•>« sentence. For 
 
 miles, distant. 
 o2Zl:"ZTr''' """" °"^ ""'^ ^''«" ■"•J-'e distance or the 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII. 
 
 i- Surnma omnium erat ^t I ^ ""'"«'""« <'«'5'''<' «""*• 
 -Bcentos passus abes? 5 f h oT "^'^1"'' •"'°- ^- I"'™" 
 miUia passnum decern nove„r„ T "'' """"'" RManum 
 
 noctis iter inte^rsLnT 7 Mmi! " ' '• ^'"^ l"-*"" 
 -Ilibns trrgint. tertia pars , iterfe t e^^, '^7'{T'- «' .^^ 
 paucorum dierum aberant 10 Milit- Germanis iter 
 
 centos triginta, altum pedes If- - "*^'"''"" '«'»'» P^des tre- 
 
 tria superfuerun > 13 mJ'^^T """'» '«'™'>"» triginta 
 
 Silvanovem dierum iter nate T. « '"^'r,™ "«'■■' ™''"'- "• 
 
 patet. 16. Sex m.Uia peditum rellqnit. 
 
 II- 1. They are six miles distant 9 u ,. , . 
 thousand captives to thj Aedui s *!. ^'"■'^'"■■''d *out twenty 
 miles from Cesar's camp 4 Out t "T^ ™' ^'^"^"^ *"'■■'"' 
 
 -nd scarcely a fourth part is left s Td" T °?"^-'-" thou- 
 
 3. From -u^rnL; ""e ^ootnofe ^ ^'^ ^"'"" °' "^^'^ '« "««^- 
 
icn will be 
 > thotisand 
 
 1 of mllle 
 nee. For 
 
 aces, or a 
 s, or three 
 
 ^ce or the 
 
 I octo a 
 ta sunt, 
 t. Locus 
 odanum 
 partem 
 8. Ex 
 nls iter 
 ies tre- 
 •patium 
 triginta 
 t. 14. 
 quit. 
 
 iipound 
 milarly 
 
 PAHT I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 55 
 
 rJr„d JlT'Ltrr -^/"^Helvetians used to extend 
 
 ..bout six hundred „Js " „ ' th^Ge™! "T^ TT, """,: 
 ■send twenty-flva thousand, the BeWanTten thV^' «*"1'; «U 
 13. We shall advanee a jou'rney ,^ en n ilt' 14 pTT "''«^- 
 men had been slain 7^ it /., „ "• J'"'"' thousand 
 
 from the camp. " " ^'''«''"'' '"'« '^«'" »■"«» 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 Caesarl parent. *i ? / 
 
 E,u.t..„, K....... p,».,»„„, :;^tl:'T:*'r''''^^T; 
 
 "t«;(/ {surpass ^^or are superior to) 
 Loffloni «ubve„lunt ,/ ^'^^^ f ^^«^ ««^'«^^y. 
 
 iniperat, /.^ command, (or gives orders to) 
 
 „-,,._ the province. 
 
 suadet, ,,, i>er.nade. (literally, makes it 
 
 agreeable to) the soldier. 
 Observatlon.-What case is used with these Tnfm i. . 
 
 ::S:er ^'"''^ " -" — r;rrmr„:" 
 
 ,.m?-Tk'',""' '^' \'°'™' vocabulary indicavos when a verb (e a 
 resI,to) belongs to the same class as those given ,>bove. ^ "" 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 
 n,™~^'- ^'" '"■"P"™"'"'' resistunt, alii equitibus subveniunt 9 
 Dumnorigi magnis praemils porsuadet 'i Fv °,. '^l""""; 2. 
 numero nflnnuU, Gallicis rebus fa^bant 4 IT?"" "''"'""' 
 Cae^r induW. 6. Caesar m£:^, TgnOvIt °e"Lrir" 
 
 1. For praesum, see footnote 1, page 54. 
 
5Q 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 saluti deerat ^ ft n^ i. ^ 
 
 Caesans parent. 12. Q^^a MWbr ^ "'"'""' """"' '"'P^"« 
 
 legionSsCaesarlsatWecerant. 
 
 ■I'Hv' 
 
 11— 1. They will aid the allies 9 w 
 the government. 3. They decided fn ?" '"^""'"8 ^-esar and 
 ■•"le "f the Roman people 4 1 ^"" ""^^"^ »"'' "^ey the 
 
 relafonship. 6. fesar hadldlfd 1?''^ T ''"°'"" »' 'he 
 t° trust (it) on account of (its) vrr^'"'';'", tenth legion, and used 
 legions were resisting the euLy g The ""'"''' '"'^««°" two 
 nor mfants. 9. The Gennans used to '' "'""""^ "'*'"'«■■ """"en 
 
 They had given satisfaction to Z .4 , T" ""* ^"'s'''"^- W. 
 
 One things was lacking to O^^,^'''"' *"'"•" *« '"iuries. u. 
 
 oP-n. 13. Thei„fant?ywasXth?oavX'''- ^^-u^ 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 
 ^ '' 
 
 I^egratus qui missus erat fh 
 
 I^esrlo. quae m,ssa erat. ' IZ 7^«^^«f «** ^^o W been sent 
 
 Oppldum quod erat expu^na- 1 f'"" f '^^ ^«^ *-^ "'^n^. 
 
 '^^^^^ ^^« W which had been taken by 
 
 I-esratus quem ,„,8era„t „ T" 
 
 Adveutus legatorum quos mi fh. , 
 
 Herant. '"'" ^'^« -^nval of the an^bassadors 
 
 Ab oppido quod erat exDu^ f "^T"" ^^'^ ^'"""^ ''^*- 
 
 natum. ^"^"^- /-^^ f « ^o... ,^,,, ,^^ ,^^^ 
 
 Germani qulbuseum ,bellnt« /; .r""^'' ^y^orm. 
 
 gesserant. ^'^'""" ^'^^ ^^^«^^^ ^'^A t.;.om they had 
 
 ■^'agedn-ar. 
 
 1- For desum, see fnnf„«f„ , J^ ~ ueter- 
 
 l' f •''^^«^««»». see footnote 1, page 54 — — __ 
 
PART I.~INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 57 
 
 mines the number, the aenrla,. t-u 
 with the relative. The poITo' . T' "' '^' P^«»«""? «„.„ 
 relative pronoun. ^ ''^'^^ ^^*"«« introduced by the 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX. > 
 
 T t "n 
 
 discedere coepe™t.'""'2° JMiJUT *'''"'" """""^o™*- omnSs 
 poatcTfl die legatum, cum Wi"Zl ' 'l'"'"^'"-"' «»'• 4. Cesar 
 fines Aeduorum, q„i ,„, ' f J" ' """ '"•"''*'«". ■»««'• e! I„ 
 
 Ab om„ib„. „aHLb':, : e :ir Kr' "^^""™' "«■'''• >■ 
 
 Caesarem „,i^, sum « Naves hi . T'"' '"■*'""'• '«g«« "d 
 tanniam nSvigant. 9. Ad onnid!! ''f''™*'' ''""""< '« »"■'- 
 aberafc, confagerunfc. 10 O ulr'/"^ v "'"'""'' "•"'" P^^^O' 
 summam habet auctoritatem. *""l'bu8 praeest Onus, qui 
 
 «LS.l^t1rX:„T"' *° *^ ''™''-- -ho "well 
 
 province to hasten to the W S ) *"" ^'^''^^^ '" *"« 
 They did what they had bl:„' JrS ^d / K ""'^ '''^'»"'- «• 
 suade Casticus, whose fath... 1 ™''"'*'- *• He is likely to per- 
 Sequani for many ^t " TTt"^"' ""^^ "-»/"- 
 who„ he has a greaf number' 1 He "I"" ""^ '»'*"-™. »' 
 through the forest (of) Ardennes 3 »4° ?"*''"' <^''™l'-y in advance 
 -i^) aU Gaul. ?. kLtytu^ou! /'r.''''^ '"'■«'^^' '» ('•'-«''l/. 
 ™tus, who had settled fn the counr ^'J^"™' """^ '" ^""- 
 legions. which he had enro JedTn b7h ^^'"' ^''''"'"'- «' Two 
 whole line of „arch. 9. Zlequanf H ''""'.'' '"""«'" "P tl"^ 
 esequam, through whose territories 
 
 Rorai'""r\j!!l'^.«« <« the city of Ro^ie the nrr • 
 
 a 
 
U: 
 
 \ 
 
 58 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 had been sent. """""'"'' " '=''"""'">d "f the cavalry which 
 
 ' EI 
 
 I 
 
 Exspectandas est, 
 Equus removendus est, 
 I^egatus mlttendus erat, 
 Locus munlendus erit, 
 Castra munlenda erant, 
 Bellum firerendum est, 
 I^egatl mlttendl sunt, 
 I^eglo exspfectanda erIt, 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 he should be awaited. 
 
 tlie horse mmt be removed. 
 
 an ambassador ought to have been sent. 
 
 the place will have to be fortified. 
 
 the camp had to be fortified. 
 
 war is to be waged. 
 
 ambassadors oiujht to be sent. 
 
 the legion will have to be awaited. 
 
 riA^* — "^w^'o "^ttfr nave lo oe aioaitpd 
 
 C.p.aee«peeta„a„e e™„t. <,..^„„« ,,„^, ^^ UeZZL 
 
 four examples) Chants /T, }■ ""= ™'' '""' (»<"> *•"> ^^ 
 
 various .2^^^^^. tTntf "' ''" ^^^'""''- ''" 
 
 EXERCISE XL. 
 
 .santr\ Atrlprvtrotr '• ^;8*'-" ^-sarem ™ttendl 
 
 mittend„,„ est. 6. Ab injari/pSenS, '^ /^ ot"" °-"'-" 
 tempore agenda erant. 8. In hiberna r^^i !^-' '^^ *^'»'«' ""« 
 oenduB atque deterrendus eraa To ffi """"'• "' °"'"- 
 
 veteresque reflciendae sunt U L^u""r'' ^^^'fi-nd-, 
 12. LegatI audiendl era,™ 13 lfos«° f ''™P»''«'>'1"« -t. 
 
 ^^ ab i,.ri. d«end;. i.'^:x:z:T:mt 
 
 2. See footnote 2, page 56. 
 
vhich had 
 Iry which 
 
 been sent, 
 fied. 
 
 PART L—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. Hg 
 
 3. The opportunity is not to be lost 4 Th. 
 fortified with a double wall 5 The t . T?. '"^^' "" ^' 
 drawn up. 6. The hosC wiH We to b 'f ^*'l ^« ^« 
 cohorts should have been sent to IT n '''*''"'^- ^- '^^ 
 three miles distant 8 pll . . '"'*'""" "'^"^P' ^^^<^h was 
 
 est states. 9. The ^tolZTV" "^'^'^^^'^^ "^^^ *^« --- 
 
 should have beenl^r/ I'^r^f, Z'" '\^ ^^^^^ 
 raised. 12. The rest of tl, """.P"*™- "• Forces had to te 
 
 of the Morini 13 tl " !,"""\"' '" '«' '»'' ■"'<' 'he country 
 
 14. You should 1 ave been ir T '" ''"*"''' '""■ ""■'■^ 
 be defended. '"' '" '"'™"«''- l^. The camp must 
 
 ited.. 
 aited, 
 
 s of the 
 the first 
 e. The 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 (littendi 
 irtibus. 
 m com- 
 iu^ uno 
 . Coer- 
 Jandae, 
 us est. 
 l. 14. 
 v^endae 
 
 sight, 
 raited. 
 
 1 always 
 
 epttt, ^ ^ ^-^ ''^^ ^^^y had been 
 
 n n slain. 
 
 ' legates „.I«er«„t f''''? ^^'^•^^•«^' ^^^^ ^^^^ «^- 
 
 Ohsi,i«« * . ' bassadors. 
 
 had ordered. 
 
 used with a„„. n'' ^:t ::„^ "u ed x «r"''i^ '" ''- '-"- 
 ~ " ■"' "^^^^^^^"^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 f. liatm uses thn Tw>rfo^f +„_ ,, , , . 
 
 couiU use either the past o^ i:^';^^^^^^^^^^^ -"^ «>«„; a^,^. where English 
 
60 
 
 MlMAjiy LATIN BOOK. 
 
 EXERCISE XLl. 
 
 I-l """"» erat difflculUta quod mflitss ms™^ . 
 arn,„run, oppr^s^r sunt 2 171,1 ,. "'.""f "Sgno et gravl onore 
 
 geritur, Sablnus cum conil, n , - ,? """"' ™"' ^™'""' 
 
 norun., ,„„d «0„ auxUiu.nl pl^L r'-dlr'/T"'" ''r"" 
 a^ue m arido constitBrunt i„ . "• "^"P"" "i™"! 
 
 9. BelIu,ngerendl,eraUnT^Tb^'a""Pr-'-r ™"'* ''°^™"'- 
 atque undo alter profteer^t i„ „ T-'- ^''^^""' ""»rf'^<='"'' •"». 
 
 nuniserant, novMunum agn.en iacessere coeperum. 
 
 fort~bikTthTtXTo;rt:'"v''n'^- *^'«'" '^^^ "« 
 
 tie bravest, because thlv were^ *^''"'" "" ^''k'""" '"'"' 
 
 whom they were "nthLuv „ "'""' *" ""^ '^^™^»«- *i*h 
 march through the pror" b * * '""'• ^- '*^* "■•<' S^ng to 
 When the HelvetLrj 7 in Zed 7 aul^ "T' "^ "' 
 arrival, they sent ambassadors 6 it A fl' "^"^ *^"'*«-'» 
 rebuild all the towns which It,/' K ! l "^ """ H«'™tians to 
 
 be led back to the province becaus > tC I """' '"'^ '° 
 
 7- While the ships were as,rrw ™ " ^™''y <>* ™™- 
 
 We part of the Mo^to cra'^'s A ""'*'" "*""' ''""' " 
 
 Because he was eiglteln nT f ' 'f '''«"" '" '=<'"«<'' '""o^- »• 
 he turned (his) T^CXVZ^:'-^ '°™ "' '"^ ^^•'"■' 
 
 2. f'*» means M-Aereaa well as wA«n """^ *" '^'^t of the leading verb. 
 
 3. See footnote 1, page 46. 
 
?ravl onere 
 averterunt, 
 
 Belgaruni 
 luod est in 
 til Venetis 
 'i in fin5s 
 na 8equa- 
 >ia» ' simul 
 It. 7. Vt 
 litus erat. 
 
 fecerunt. 
 'ectus est, 
 5 Romani 
 oeperuni. 
 
 leads his 
 ans were 
 ins, with 
 going to 
 •oad. 4. 
 
 Caesar's 
 Jtians to 
 he place 
 1 ha4 to 
 of corn. 
 
 from a 
 rned of 
 3e8. 9. 
 
 Aedui, 
 lie bar- 
 itorm. 
 
 Jpendent 
 This is 
 
 PABT L—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 H LESSON XLII. 
 
 61 
 
 The declension of the pronouns e»o (/), t« {you), and U, ea Id 
 (/te, she, ^t), is given in Part III., noctions 18, 19 and 22. 
 
 Observation -The translation (. the various iorms of the per- 
 Nonal pronouns. 1 P®^ 
 
 EXERCI«i!] XLII. 
 
 1.-1. Pacem voblscuni^fgceramus. 2. Ao els circuniveniSmu- 
 3. Impetum in nos ficerunt. 4 Ma^twm inf - ""7_"^'""*- 
 habebuf h KTii. -i. ^viagnan. mti eos auctontatem 
 
 habebut. 6. Nihu vobis postulo. 6. Ubi legatos d,! deditione 
 ad euni mT.erun adventuui Caesari. eos exspect J jassi 7 
 Tecum remitton.li sunt. 8. M^rum mibi Hd.tur. ' 9 Duo 
 ratres eis piaeeraut. 10. Jussit eos impedL .nt. in flnum locum 
 ^^^t eum manrre 11. Ego v5bls rOgna concir .^ T 
 iNi^atius a tS luissus erat. l.'j. U ab eo comperit 14 IVTaIt 
 nocebat. 15. Mihi, non 4bi, uidulgebat 16 f!' It- -^^"^ 
 
 deinjuril8<^uasintu] ramus 17 Ta lllv-^nl ^Z ""'"'''" 
 
 1- -IT - . "i.iuo. xi. lu, ijab'"ne, niihi relaue nfib 
 
 hoae uM,s tu.s«. 18. Alteram pa,,te„. vie, concessit ^ 
 
 v-™ '"s^' tT^^ ■ ""' ""'''"'""J"™ t" '"">• 2- They will not .spare 
 >™. 3. Hostages will be given up to us bv vou 4 Pa.„^ ! 
 
 be established with them. 6. Vv/slew a ^i^e part of ^t " 
 
 l-^- We were eight miles from him. 14. fJe i. pot likelv to 
 
 We shaU aid th ^^"V'\^'" ^'"' '" ^^ ^^'^^^^^^ *- ^'"^- ^7. 
 we shaU aid th. Gauls, who are wintering with us neither wifh 
 corn nor (any) ler thina 18 TTo .. ^ ^ ^^t'" us, neithei with 
 oftheMorinVi ^^'"^: ^^- -fie sent a. army into the country 
 
 of the Morini, because nbassadors ,ad not come fi om them. 
 
 .V when the subject of the 
 
 verb-is''?o%"e'rptS,S.^^^^«P-"-"-hould beused 
 
 and-/J!|lfr^^^^^^^^ and generally of ^^• 
 
 The a.;cent, m such cases, ,. n the syllable prece(?in"«"!J; "^""^ °"^ '"^""^ ^*»» ''• 
 the'id^'o/^^r''^'""**'"^'^'- °" *« ^«««"» ^V«ro, with the dative case exprewiag 
 
 .An^ 
 
68 
 
 PBIMAKV LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XI.III. 
 
 non«...^ „o........ ,„.„,„„, „,„:-;;;;;, ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 WW Jimnnns, or </te iioma»w 
 Acle- & V,u.Haro Instruct.. « * n ; -'"'"''^ '""" '""'^"'^ ""»^- 
 
 Otmr, or ticsar mm< draw 
 
 h me, or J mtw^ not lose the 
 oppm-tunity. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIII. 
 
 p/no„];„^r~:»;~'I-^ e^t agenda ; voxiU„™ p^. 
 persuason sumus, vel vl coa<:turI To'- f "1"'°«'1"«' vel 
 
 esrum nun.erus e'ttSsuT V Nan '" T''™"' "'*«""-"" 
 
 2. &ee footnote 2, page 56 ^ **^® passive gerundive, 
 
 a. With each 0, «,. ^n.„-d,ve, .„, („, „,«, „ ^ ^^ „„,^„^ 
 
hy the Ho- 
 
 waged by 
 ic liomaiis 
 unr. 
 
 '>y Cissar. 
 ''»i' lip by 
 mat drav) 
 
 it be lost 
 
 ot be lost 
 t lose the 
 
 in Latin 
 also the 
 
 am prS- 
 ites qui 
 bus vel 
 Sablno 
 bis est 
 3tqu,am 
 nusqua 
 f vobis 
 9. Res 
 ^ipedl- 
 copiae 
 
 PABT I.— INTKODUCTOttY LESSONS. 03 
 
 Z^^ul^ ''''" '' """ ^^^"^^""^- ''' ^-I^^^^« « el« 
 
 II.-l. Ambassmlors should have been sent to him by us 2 
 You must not lead a larger number of mei> across, a. cLar* will 
 have t<> raise large .orocs. 4. When Cesar found it ou ,"n^ 
 ordered them to hasten .■ : ,« to the river. 5. We are not goi « 
 Ui make war on^ the , », . .• e the winters are very early in Ga^ 
 
 li^rTt ' '"" ■ 'r '""' '■ ^'^-- --t'seiri^t 
 
 heights. .8. The armv .y . I ave to be led across without baggage 
 on account of the scaxcny of ships. 9. So.ne had to fill up tt^ 
 tenches, others to tear down the walls. 10. I nxust not n .de 
 the wrongs of the Aedui. 11. He was going to break u, cI.^h 
 
 arrival of tho forces. U. As soon as tliey made an attack on us 
 Caesar had to remove all the horses out of sight. 14. The Morin ' 
 from whom ambassadors have not come, are'going to collect vry 
 large forces and renew the war. ^ 
 
 W^n 
 
 LESSON XLIV. M^'-^irl^^ 
 
 (a) 86 abdldit. j,, j.^^ j^^^^^^ 
 
 Be abdiderunt, they hid themselves. 
 
 Dua« leglones secnm eduxlt. he led out two legions with him. 
 
 Dua8 lefflones cum eo ml^lt, he sent two legions with him. 
 
 distinguished? Two translations (e.g., him and himself) given 
 Difference between se and l«. Position when used with cmn 3 
 
 (6)Me«m adventum exspec he aivaited my arrival. 
 tavit, 
 
 Tunm adventum, Caesar, he aivaited your arrival, CcBsar 
 exspectavit. 
 
 Nostrum adventum exspec- he atvaited our arrival. 
 tavlt. 
 
 1. S( 
 
 -••t'lilVi.C O, pUgC 01. 
 
 2. Literally, to him. 3. See footnote 2, page 61. 
 
■Hi 
 
 Ml 
 
 I :R:. 
 
 rmi 
 
 64 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Vestrnm adventum exgpec- 
 
 tavlt, olves, 
 Nos adventum snum ex- 
 
 spectarejusslt, 
 
 N68 adventum ejus exspec- 
 
 care Jussepunt, 
 Nos adventum 
 
 spoetare Jus- 
 Nos adventum e ,, 
 
 spectare jussit. 
 
 ex- 
 
 '-i ex- 
 
 ^ aimtY^c^ your cwnval, citizens. 
 
 ^^<^redm to atvait his arrival. 
 
 they ordered us to await his ar- 
 rival. 
 
 th^y ordered us to await their 
 arrival. 
 
 he ordered us to await their a/> 
 rival. 
 
 Objervatlon. — Manner of p • 
 
 pronouns, my, your, „,r. hu (kTZTl '" ^*,."" "■" P"^"^'™ 
 of the Latin possessive pronouns ^lArfm "' *° '''"'■^"^»" 
 
 7 -- ~ ve.e. szrr ™; :::r„.r- 
 
 (' ) Arma tradlderunt. 
 
 In officio permaneblmus, 
 Flllnm ml8lt, 
 Flilum 8uum mlslt. 
 
 thsy gave up their arms 
 
 ^'^h<dl remain in our allegiance, 
 tie sent his son. 
 
 fie sent his own son. 
 
 Observation.— When arp fh« ir„ i- u 
 expressed in Latin ?i What is tt^ f Tr""^ P^^^-"« "o* 
 when not needed for clearness' sake ? ' ^'^^^ ^""^ expressed 
 
 EXERCISi; XLIV. 
 
 2. 's^-n.'?u;ns etnf pi:^' rc"r ^-'*" -- 
 
 de n,ea dai,e„tia desneras ? 4 sTsuaot. '"^ "'*''*^ "■" 
 
 ded>deru„t. S. lios suum adventun, T^ ""'""' "'^ ■""■« <* 
 ejus adve„,m Helvetil certot Tr , -Tr""™ J'™*' «' ^W de 
 
 m suis sed etiam in vestris fm'ih.,,' "''"" "3"'" ^«> n«n solum 
 
 S fnn*-nr>f<^ o ._ ' . 
 
 2 AT / • • ^^ ' ■ ■ 
 
PART I.-INTRODUCTOKr LESSONS. QS 
 
 omnia oppida in potestate eius snnf 
 trae salfltis causa suum Li uW "! "'^"P'*^^"^ ««t- 13. Ves- 
 
 conspectti removit. 16 Sg^" '"^^ °"^"^»"^ «q»08 ex 
 
 8U08 recepit. " '"''''*^"^ receperunt. 17. Se ad 
 
 -■ -rrr i^ar -H "- - -^^.^^ 
 
 tWm and sends .11 the cavlv tf t''' '"'• ®- "" '>'«''=''» <» 
 stand the attacks of oTrJ^Z I^ to T' "^ """"^ ""' "»' '''«- 
 then.selves and all their posse Jon,. ,!r T"^ """^ "'""''^'' 
 were waging war with you"^ 1^™ « ^'' ^" ,'°™- »■ ™ey 
 selves to him. 10. For the sake „f fK T"'"^ ^"^"^ "'^"- 
 own danger. 11, They are it! f "'°'\^''''y I neglected my 
 
 12. C«=»«rwaarestrainLTis Zf- f '""I . ' "'"^ °" '"^"•' 
 it through their messengers iTl . "' "^^ '^*™^<' 
 
 which he has with him Icroi i„? "*'" '" ''='«' ">« '"g'^s 
 
 going ,» march through"yourrrC:"irTh"'- ..f' ^^ - 
 themselves to him. "i^ones. 16. They will surrender 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 ""::::. *""""•" ™-"-' ^^^;- *«.. ^ ow. „,. 
 
 I-^gl6 dSleota est, , !^^ *^ "''^^ *^*o ^^ prowwce. 
 m misit, Ae sen^ a chosen le^Um. 
 
66 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Ob«ervation.-The use and force of com„,6tl. eoaotae. delecta. 
 
 when no longer joined with parts of the verb «um.i The different 
 translations given. The voice. The relation in point of time of 
 
 InT/r^ !" ' P""'^^*^ ^""^- T^^ ^«^«^«tion and declen- 
 sion ot the participle. 
 
 EXERCISE XLV. 
 
 o i7 n-^''-*'^ ^f ^""^^^ commotus, Caesar duas legiones in citeri- 
 ore Galha conscribit. 2. NonnuUi pudore adducti remanebunt. 
 3. Vu neribus confecti, barbarl se in fugam contulerunt.^ 4 
 Repentmo ejus adventu prohibitus, copias in fines suos reduxit.' 
 5. In nostros disjectos impetum fecerunt. 6. In omnibus .-ollibus 
 
 adducti, m Galliam contenderunt. 8. Hostes vulneribus confectos 
 ex loco superiore in flumen compulimus. 9. Baibari commoti 
 quod oppidum, et3 nattira loci et manu munitum, expugnatum 
 erat, maj ores ; copias parare coeperunt. 10. Onmes Belgarum 
 copiae, m unum locum c.>actae, ad eum veniebant. 11. iLulsI 
 a pn-ncipibus, a nobis defecturl er^t. 12. Hostes undique cir- 
 cumvent!, fuga salutem petierunt. 13. Celeritato Romanorum 
 commoti, legatos ad eum de deditione mittunt. 14. Alteram 
 partem vici Gallis concessit, alteram vacuam ab eis relict^m cohor- 
 
 tibusattribuit. 15. Helvetii omnium r.rum inopi. adducti Ig'tl 
 aa eum miserunt. ^ 
 
 2 ^r^' vJ*f """T ^"™' ^'^^ "'° '""^ '"^ they made a sally. 
 
 exc^Lllv f IT. k""''™' """' *" **■'" P°---ons into a place 
 excellently fortified by nature. 3. Alarmed by the want of sup- 
 pi es he hastened the next day to the province. 4. The Aedu^ 
 after be.ng called brothers by the' senate, are held in bondTg^by 
 him. 6 Bemg defeated by the first attack of our men, they 
 betook themselves to the camp. 6. Dumnorix on being recaUed 
 had resisted the cavaliy. 7. The Aed.,i, being defeated'bX! 
 had suffered great W 8. The soldiers, weighed down by t"; 
 heavy burden of their armor, had to join battle with the eLmy 
 
 8. #« et here, as often, meana both and. 
 
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 67 
 
 >• deleota, 
 3 different 
 >f time of 
 d declen- 
 
 in citeri- 
 lanebunt. 
 mt.2 4. 
 
 reduxit. 
 I collibus 
 
 praedae 
 jonfectos 
 commoti 
 iignatum 
 telgarum 
 
 Impulsl 
 que cir- 
 lanorum 
 Alteram 
 1 cohor- 
 L legates 
 
 a sally, 
 a place 
 of sup- 
 Aedui, 
 iage by 
 1, they 
 ecalled 
 y him, 
 by the 
 enemy 
 
 at an unfavorable timo. 9. Caesar, on being informed of their 
 approach leads out with him all the cavalry and hastens to them. 
 10. Led by his influence, they detained the ambassadors sent by 
 him. 11. Dismayed by the appearance of the ships, the bar- 
 barians halted. 12. The Aedui, having been crushed by the 
 battles and disasters, had given hostages to him. 13 The Hel 
 vetians alarmed by his sudden approach, are going to send aiobas- 
 sadors o him 14. He has led his forces across into Gaul, having 
 been asked and invited by the Gauls. 15. Driven by madness and 
 tolly, they have made war^ on us. 
 
 /• A-. 
 
 LESSON XLVI 
 
 , »--• 
 
 <9^/;i" 
 
 Turning to Part III., section 39, examine the inflection of th-^ 
 verb caplo. in the indicative (active and passive), the present 
 mhnitive active, and the gerundive passive. 
 
 Ob8ervatlou,-The peculiarities of inflection in verbs Hke 
 capio.^ 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI. 
 
 I.-l. Accipiet. 2. Se recipiunt. 3. Faciendum est. 4 Tela 
 conjiciebant. 5. Nilntiat. 6. Res est suscipienda. 7. Se in 
 '.ppiduin redpere coeperunt. 8. Suscipietur. 9. Superiora loca 
 luultitudine hostium completa conspiciebantur. 10. Perfacile est 
 conata perficere. 11. Mnnltiones perficientur. 12. Legatos inter- 
 hciunt. J.i. Exoppidoprofugerenonaudebunt. 14. Condiciones 
 pacis a<.^.>,^.dae emnt. 15. Ab anilcitia populi Roniani deficie- 
 bant. 1«. JNoii solum vires sed etiam tela nostros deficiunt. 
 
 II.-l. The Roman people makes peace with them. 2 Thev 
 undertake the war. 3. They were marching through the province 
 4. Ihe war shou.d not have been undertaken. 5. We fortify 6 
 Supplies will fail us. 7. He will b. put to death by them.' 8 
 They were ordered to hurl their darts. 9. The fortifications musi 
 
 A 7 ^^.7 ,/''"'*""'^- ^^- '^^'^y ^^«'^^^ t« revolt from the 
 Aedui 14. He undertakes the matter. 15. They perceive him. 
 Id. Iney were fleeing. 
 
 1. Se« footnote 3, page 61. 
 
 2. See P»rt III., section 67. 
 
6a 
 
 lafl' 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 (a) Turn to Part III., section 23. 
 Ob«ervution.~Tho declension of hio nndjUje. 
 (10 Provlnein .ne« h„ec o«t. Ula (ki. is n^yj^rovince, that (is) yours. 
 
 Eu,n I«c,„n, n.f.nlvernnt. tlu-y fortijied that jdacr. 
 
 m eoH qui l.H«c, f,„.|,„„„t they vuuie an attack on those ,rho 
 
 iiiiputuiii feoerunt, 
 
 Lesrat pacoiii a Cuvsuro po- 
 tloriint. lllw iiaeo re- 
 Npon<llt» 
 
 ^/*< 
 
 'irere doiny thin (litumlly, 
 these thing!s).i 
 
 aml)assadors ashed peace of 
 (h'sar. He answered as fol- 
 lows (literjilly, these tilings). 
 ObHorvHtlon.-The various tr.insktions of hie ,„o aud i 
 What word is used for that (those) when en.ph t( .^ J 1 ^ 
 when the antecedent of a relative ? When is in , V . T/ 
 
 he (they, etc.) ?-' ""^ '" "**'' "^'^ *"' "««^ ^^r 
 
 EXERCISE XLVII. 
 
 I.-l. Haee omnia' Gallls erant incognita. 2. Gallos onT p« 
 oca nu.oluerant, expulOrunt. a HOs GennanOs He ^^i? L^ 
 ohnn „. s„Ls, sed etiam in illr.run. flnibus, superave'uS 4 
 Kaec consu.^ado victus cum ilia non comparand, est 5 Hi in 
 Hi-iiiis sunt, illl diiiiil reiiuin,.iit i! i i . " 
 
 .1. ,lux.t. , Dum l,,-,oc .n l,Is 1„™ ycn.ntur, ,„1 maritiiufw roriones 
 I u bus quuttuor rcgos ,„,.o„™„t, „„„(.,,-,» .nittit, 8. No^mla 
 
 ...- ».!«« „ot,,eru„t. .9. Hc« kt.,,^n,.,„l,,e pertinut ci ZL 
 
 passuum quinirenta 10 AK ,tu, - - -"^-iici miiiu 
 
 cognovit 11 Hn - ' i"^"^'' '"''''^^' ^^^I>l^>ratoril,us haec 
 
 cogmnit. 11. Hun_c ilh comprehenderant. 12. Hujus loci h-io. 
 erat natiira. 1.3. (T,ij ^,^ oninn.,.. «- - •, ■! '' ^^^ 
 
 fa„-i ^ - oJiinibus, Se(pmni nihil earum rerun, 
 
 faciebant, quas ceterl fecerant 14 Tii.. - '*^"'" reium 
 
 habebo. i^rtceiant. 14. Illum.pro amico, te pro hoste 
 
 1. See footnote 2, pag-e f)6. 
 last exampla. ^ "-^^^ ^^"^"^^ ^"^'e m a t;haiiae of suhjeot, as in the 
 
{is) yours. 
 
 [hose who 
 literally, 
 
 peace of 
 'd as fol- 
 ' tilings). 
 
 Hlld l8. 
 
 mtmst) ? 
 ased for 
 
 PART I.--INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 69 
 
 ^^^^^^^tt:ii:^^ r r ^-- 
 
 them to give up nil their nrnfs Tl I'T ""^''' ^^ ""'^^'^ 
 
 a We HhHll defend tl":; ^Zl!::^' '' ^"^ '''''''''^''''' 
 this army. 4 Alarm pd h, j" f • ^''''''■' ^'*^«'^^ !»"« ««"fc 
 
 to him. "^5. Tlic^eXt^ '!,''"^'^ ^hoy Hend ambassadors 
 
 u. incse do not agree with those, 6 Th« w,Mfl, f .i • 
 forest extends a nine days' iournev 7 Of ii .. T *'^"*' 
 
 Hre the bravest, because tlJyrL.rL 1 T "" ''^^^'"" 
 this spoeeh he persuades the ,(,,;' '''' "^T?"" '^ ^^ 
 
 forces into the country of tlMonniT ";"""' ''' '''^''^ '"^ 
 and swamps. 10 This 1.., ^"'""- They flee into the w<.ods 
 f,- 1 , ,, ^ ^"'" H'lon Caisar had induWd 11 Af fu ^ 
 
 ™a c... i^rLzt iter: ;r::'^"" *- '--'^ '^'™^»' 
 
 qui ea 
 ii, ncln 
 nt. 4. 
 . Hi in 
 ic ratio 
 gioiies, 
 ;ri plla 
 
 proxi- 
 
 millia 
 IS haec 
 :i haec 
 rerum 
 
 hoste 
 
 ed, file 
 n ill the 
 
 LESSON XI.VIII. 
 (a) Turn to Part III., section 33. 
 
 Ol«erv»tlon.-The fonnation in each ooniusati,,,, „f ,. 
 partioijile active. ">"Jugation of the present 
 
 :r '"" '■■"■'■ '**'«/"'"/i'«e«~ 
 
 (or i^jA,iZe or ^//ioi) they xoere 
 fleeing. 
 
 1. See footnote 2, paj;e 19. 
 

 m»i 
 
 70 
 
 pnrMAiiY T.ATm hook. 
 
 I «»f tunu <,f (lu, particpU. u.ul „f Iho ,„i„oi,,al vurh. 
 
 fi*'<>rdrrr,U/,rh'rnrhvH to h' filled. 
 f''''*r,lnrd.'</iifK,tnlw.roUv,'ti.,L 
 hr ovitvml o vomi> '<> l>e fortijied. 
 
 l'ONKriH,.OIIl|»|,-.,lJn„|t. 
 
 KX|.;ii(!lSK Xt.Vlll. 
 
 ju»«i... (1. .s„«M,ni • V , ■ .'" "'"■'""" '"■"'""" ""-t'i"" 
 
 i:'. ii..«tvs, i,T.s ,..-.i,„ ,.;,o„ !,'"'■ I"""'?" ""-■f«^t'""««t. 
 t..o. w,.,. ^o...^„,;;;l,:;j.. :;;;;■■ --J ■;■; ''■... y .. 
 
 ivxixtin^ l.mvolv w,.i-., « "•'■'•"|>. <>. Om- nion, ivhilo 
 
 '."Ko p„..,i„„ ,.':„':,„■:: : ':':,:t";!";\'\f™' :'"■ ■> -■■> 
 
 1. Transltttu ad here by ojj. 
 
 
rv- 
 
 PAUT I.—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 71 
 
 TufluoiuHMl hy ilu,ir nUxUnmnMH, ho onloml the Imttlo to bo bogun. 
 11. Ili(» mu.iny, boamm, Mu,y Inul u lurgtu- iminbor c.f mon, sur- 
 roundcHl our niou hh thoy woro fighting. 12. Wo Huizod him a« 
 ho wiiH fiooing. 
 
 LESSON XIJX. tC.^)^^ OcXc-(i 
 
 lHdA;a^ 
 
 (a) Turn to P/irt Til., Hoction 2,^. 
 Ol.norviitloii. Tho (WlojiHion of !,,«« unci IiltMii. 
 {h) Liihlon...,, ,.,„„ ,|„ab„« h,. /,« o,v/*-r.s /:r»/nt.nM.s tnth two le- 
 ffloiiibuH oaHti-H in.niiro j//o„.s /,o /o/i,/,/ /,/,« cimp, he 
 
 Jiibot, IpNu 1.1 (Jaiilutu himsd/ hasUm to Gaul. 
 
 <U>nt<MHllt, 
 
 AbAcdiilHlpMlNoortlorfHr- ho. was mformcd by the Acdni 
 
 ♦"" «"^<- themndiuiH. 
 
 St' iKi i-nHtvn i'«co|>»-'runt, the,, hrtnok themsdveH to the camp. 
 
 KamhMii coi.laH rcllqult, A« Ivft the name fotceH. 
 
 ObHiu'VHt,loii.~Tho tnuiHhition of !„«« unci nie,„. Tlio diffor- 
 oiico butwoon ni' uiid IpHc' 
 
 EXERCISE XLTX. 
 
 I.— 1. Eddoiu toinjxuo Cunsuroni ccrtidroni faciuut do ojuB 
 advontu. 2. Omnibus (Jallm idon.-' ost fuoionduni, <iuod Holvotil 
 h>oorunt. :i. A(,uilani intra vnlhnn i.roJGcit, ipno pro castrlH 
 l.n^Ml^lns occlditur. 4. Postul^t m.loni.'^ 5. Huec ipHl ab alilH 
 au.lTv(M-ant. ({. h:ddoni dio hostCs nub nionto conHoderant rnillia 
 l«UHUuni ab CuusariH cantrlH octo. 7. No<,uo CaoHaris ipshm 
 Hdvontus nocpio LabiGnl cdgniius erat. 8. Ab olsdoni nostra con- 
 sdia hostd.us onuntiantur. ». Constituit coh.,rtoH duas in provincia 
 collocaro, ot ipso cum ruli<,uls ejus logidnis cohortibus hiouiaro. 
 
 10. Horum auctoritato acbb.ctl, omUmi do causa Idgatos rotinont. 
 
 11. Eadom nocto so interficiunt. 12. Eidom principos qui" anto 
 vonorant ad ouni rov ortorunt. 1.']. Ipso in Aoduds, quae clvitas 
 
 and nS be u^od K;; Cr^" '""* '""*"' ' '^" ^^^^y for emphaaiH. 
 
 2. See fooiiiote 2, jjage m. 
 
 3. Notice that, after idem, qui may be translated a», hifiteud of who. 
 
 
 
72 
 
 m 
 
 mm 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 tow ''rH:r::J;Y"''''""'''"rr'' '-^ ""^ --^ °""o 
 
 before I,i,„. 4 He ,L """;"':"""' '""' -«•■■"'» «» the c„v„hy 
 
 through the ™;,e":!; .rr'V'";, ::i ""•, ':;""»- "■---v™ 
 
 ""»• «. The «.,„e night U.e-c,™„":r::^ Tt "" """'.'" 
 Name enemios with whom tl,„ H 1 ". "^^ ^- These are tile 
 
 They the,..„„,.„, -o^;!:! it.::"". '''n,;"''"'' t •*• 
 f;^m thatpw ; c,:r ,„„ ' „; :,rv'"s"'T''T "'"■''""" 
 
 the enemy theni„„lves V2 H Supphes bog,,,, to f„il 
 
 two ™„/of the ;,; hi,, self 1-;*^'; *"'■" *''™" ""■ '""• "■" 
 
 the„..sdve, up to hi.^ U The s' ' ™'" ""^"'"'^ '" «''" 
 
 nature ,itera%y, «. L.t»I^") 171;^;:*"'^'' "^ '"" ^^^ 
 
 LESSON L. 
 W C»-t- -n,.,.. e.p.., ,„. ,,, ,„„,^ ^^^ ^^.^^ -^ 
 
 Ob.,^.u« accept,, pace... (lite.Ul,, h.^, ,,,,,^ ,^^„ 
 
 recoived) /iarfnj/ receiW 
 /'o,s/a;/fs (or ajter receiving 
 
 Arn.i8tra.ii«« «- ,- .,. ^^''''^'"'"''')' f>^ »^f'de peace. 
 
 tradltls. pace... fecit. (literally, Hrm,s having been given 
 
 ,ui)) ^vhen (or m) the arms 
 
 turba verunt ^i^terally, an attack having been 
 
 iiuule) making an attack, they 
 
 Cognlto €ae«arl. adventu (liJ^lir T' '''T' '''*" '^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^««n learned) on learning of 
 Co'sar's arrival, ihey send 
 '^nihassadors. 
 
 M 
 
 saw 
 
 i 
 
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 73 
 
 vari- 
 
 i->i 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 Observation.— The niituro of the ftlilntivo nhsoluto.' T 
 OU8 tmnslitioiiH for the Hblativo Hbsoluty iu the porfect pAiticiple 
 piiHsive. Th^ absence of a i)oifect participle active in Latin. 
 
 (b) Nostril oiigtra oppiiffniintl- xvhile (or as) our men were assault- 
 bus, uruptldnoni hoHtes iiig the camp, the enemy made 
 
 feoerant. « sally. 
 
 Observation.— The translation of the ab.ative absolute in the 
 present participle active. The position of the ablative absolute 
 clause. 
 
 EXERCISE L. 
 
 I'— 1- H<^c proelio facto, exercitum traddcit. 2. Dato slgno ex 
 castris erumpunt. 3. Vicis aediiiciis(iue eorum incensis, Caesar 
 exercitum reduxit. 4. His rebus expositis, signum dat. 6. His 
 nuntils acceptis, consilium convoca it. 6. CoUe occupato, niillo 
 passus ab nostrls munitionibus considunt. 7. Gei; \ani clamoro 
 audlto, aruils abjectis so ex castris ejecerunt. 8. Hoc facto, 
 dufibus logionibus quas in Italia conscrlpserat in castils relictls, 
 reliquas sex logiones pro castris in acio constituit. 9. His nuntils 
 litterisquo commdtus, re frumentaria conqmrata, castra movet. 10. 
 Nulld hoste prohibente, legidnem in prdvinciam perduxit, ibique 
 hieinavit. 11. His constitiitls rebus, paulum supra eum locum 
 poutem fecerunt. 12. Deditidne facta ob3idibus(iuo acceptis, prae- 
 sidia dedacent. 13. Itinere conversd, novissimum agmea lacessere 
 coeperunt. 14. Multa, ipso praesente, in concilid Galldrum dicta 
 erant. 15 Phalange disjecta e(iuitibusque repulsis, inq>etum iu 
 eds fecerunt. 16. Impedlmentis relictls eruptidne facta, elsdem 
 itineribus quibus pervenerant, ad flumen Rlionum contcnderuut. 
 17. Celeritate nostrdrum pernidti, legatds ad Caesarem de deJitidne 
 mittunt, et petentibus Renils inq)etranb. 18. Itaque re frumen- 
 taria prdvlsa equitatuque compaiatd, in hostium fines exercitum 
 intrddi'ixit. 10. Nihil timentibus nostrls, hostes impetum fecerunt. - 
 20. Instructd exercitfi ut loci natfuvi postulabat, prdelium com- 
 misit. 21. Helvetii impedimenta iu finum locum contuleruut, ipsi 
 rejecto nostrd ecjuitatii, phalange facta, sub primam nostram aciem 
 successerunt, 22. Caesur, primura sud delude omnium ex cdn- 
 spectu remdtis equis, proelium conunlsit. 
 
 1. See more fully Pari III., section 85, o. 
 
 •^ 
 
74 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 to the ioirvTvt!, rL:';:"'"' "-'^ ,'■«'»'' ">-«<"- 
 
 await l,i„„„iv,il S C ni "'"/""'l'- "'"y determined to 
 
 phusaud selected the CHV,J,T he wl ,,. "1 ^T"""^ ""P' 
 
 numher h«d been skin, the rest <-.«f fl, " ''"«« 
 
 9. After capturing a lar^e .lu r : „ r^l^^: 'f" 'T,"™'- 
 waste the fleld-s, he con.pelled then. T;: ' , Ze,"' loT 
 our men were in distress, he ordered the thl- i ?' , ^'' 
 attack on the enemy's forces U W, ""''''"" '" "'"'"' »" 
 
 fought, they sent L.^^ dors ^ aewlrl'""? V ^™ 
 selves to him !'> ()„ i • '"^, '^''"^ *"id surrendered them- 
 
 sendsD^biZinld ^e ™l'"l ^^'^''^"f' ^^^ ^^-^^)> ^^ 
 remaining two haste^J to \Ve ^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 fighting, a few fled to the cann' 14 H ?!^' '^'''' ^^^^ 
 
 of them, our n.en began to aS the town^'^lS^^.V^^^^^ '^'l 
 his arrival, the enemy collecting, U. f \ ^^^"""g "f 
 
 battle with our men fn '^"''^"'^ ^'^^^^^ ^«^«««' ^'-'gan a cavalry 
 
 defeated, tl^ ^^Z ^L^^'f l^'""-' T '''''' ^^^^^^^^ ^^"8 
 stationed in Ibut^^^L T Xl '^ "^'^"^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^-' 
 are likely to take the town by s on l7 7 •^^''"'"^ ^^^^' ^^^^ 
 the forces of the enemv fl, ?", "'"'^' ^^"^ "^"^^d all 
 
 c-np. 18. He hiref^f ^•^'''''^'''^ '^'""^^'^'^^^ ^^ "-irown 
 ^ulvieed to^LXvX'TrThT ^- "7^^ '"^ ^^ '^^^^^^' 
 -" made an attack L t^^^'s bn^^^^^^^ 'r>™' ^"^ 
 •summer finislied two very iumort-uJ n;n ^""'"'^ "' ^"^ 
 
 withdrew the army into W ^ / "f ^'^'^ ^''«^> ^^r>^' C«^«ar 
 hither Gaul. 21 As tte^ w ^ "" ' ^'^ ^"'"^^^^^ ^"^^^^^^ in 
 .hips to be emotd ' "'' ""^'"^^ '^^^^^y' ^^ -^-^^ the 
 
 i 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 Quls tlbl persuaslt ? 
 Quern U8um belli liabent ? 
 Quid venlstls? 
 
 ti'/io has persuaded you ? 
 
 what experience of war have they? 
 
 "^hy have you come? 
 
PAB'^ I.— INTRODUCTORT LESSONS. 
 
 75 
 
 Quanta est Insnlii ? 
 Uter est oelerlor? 
 €i m6 acouHas? 
 
 •I 
 
 how lanj i th, island? 
 
 which (of the two) in th <tmfterf 
 
 why do you accune me i 
 
 Obsepvatlon.— The difference between the Englisli and the 
 Latin verb in aHkmg a .p'OHtion.^ The declension of the in orrog, 
 "ve pronouns. For nl* ' qui, see Part HI., section 25; for 
 uter, section 14.) 
 
 fiXERCISE LI. 
 
 I.— 1. Q ita est Insulae magnitado? 2. In utram partem^ 
 fltlmr 1 flui 3. Quia ejus consilil auctor fuit ? 4. Qua de causa"* 
 discedunt ? 5. Cognito Caesaris adventii, belluni parare coeperunt. 
 6. Quae et quantae nationes Britanniani incolunt ? 7. Quid niihi 
 faciendum est ? 8. Prima hice productLs onniibus copiis, dupliel 
 acie instructa, hostes spectabat. 9. His rebus cognitis, eum 
 ad se vocari jubet. 1 Oiir ab officio discessurus es ? 11. Qui- 
 bus ex regionibus^ venistis, quasque \h\ res cogndvistis ? 12. 
 Quid dubitas? 13. Quid petunt a^ id RomanI? 14. Quid illo 
 bello simile fuit ? 15. Cur de vestra virtute aut de mea diligentia 
 desperatia ? 16. Hac oratione habita, concilium dimisit. 
 
 II. — 1. What states are in arms ? 2. Why have they led their 
 forces across into cur territories? 3. What* was said in the 
 council of the Gauls about him? 4. Alarmed by the scarcity of 
 corn and supplies, he hastened the next day into the province, 
 after burning all the buildings of that village. 5. What* is being 
 done in the enemy's camp ? 6. In what'* place have the forces of 
 the enemy encf'^->«d ? 7. How large a number of men are they 
 likely to send to that war ? 8. The enemy, after losing all their 
 baggage, fled. 9. What {litemlly, of what sort) is the nature of 
 the mountain ? 10. On giving this answer ho withdrew. 11. In 
 
 1. In English the order is often different in a statement and in a question, the 
 subject (unless it is itself the interrogative pronoun) coming after either the whole or 
 part of the verb; e.g., he has come, hax he come? No such differed is found in 
 Latin. See also footnote 2, page 1!>. In both Latin and English the interrogative 
 begins the sentence. 
 
 2. In. . . . partem=in .... direction, literally, into .... quarter (or part). 
 
 3. When the interrogative pronoun agrees with a noun which depends on a preoo- 
 • Sli?' ^^^ syllable, the order is pronoun, preposition, noun ; this order is usual 
 
 with the relative pronouns also, and is often found with emphatic atljectives. 
 
 4. The neuter plural, literally, what things, is very commonly rendered by what- 
 See footnote 2, pa^fe 66. 
 
^a5 
 
 %. 
 
 
 0^ 
 
 X. 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 Ma 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 ^1^ i^ 
 
 £ I4S ilO 
 
 11:25 II !.4 
 
 U 
 
 1.6 
 
 Pftotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 '^^ 
 
 
 <1> 
 
 ..>^ 
 

 ^. 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 
76 
 
 V' 1 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 inarching ? 13 With when are they waging war ! 14 What^ 
 have you heard or learned a.K„,t thi. ,„„L^ 16. On ri^cdvil 
 hostages he leave, Labienus with the cavalry in the ZeTiZe 
 he hmself hastens to the nearest town, 16 WhatTal™!' 
 g-efuU 17. Which is the more disgracef „1 deTd " '"" 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 
 L J. fit I'' 
 
 Mbere, freely ; liberlus, wore 
 
 freely. 
 Acrlter, fiercely; acrlus, more 
 
 j^Vroe/i/. 
 Fortlter. bravely; fortius, more 
 
 bravely. 
 milgrenter, care- dlllsentlus. 
 
 fully; 
 
 Ilberrlnie, most, or very 
 
 freely. 
 acerrl.ne, most, or very 
 
 fiercely. 
 
 fortlnstme, most, or very 
 bravely. 
 
 dlUgrentlsslnie, mos^, or 
 
 more carefully. tery carefully. 
 
 Observatlon.-The regular formation of adverbs from adjectives 
 m the positive, comparative and superlative degree8.3 ^""J"'*'^"" 
 
 (6) Turn to Part III., section 17. 
 Observation-Irregular formation and comparison of adverbs. 
 
 (0) QUU.U „.axl.„as capias coe- he collected forces as large as pos- 
 * si.hle. 
 
 Qua... louglssi„.e. as far as possible. 
 
 ^^2^«ervat,o„.-The translation of a superlative modified by 
 
 EXERCISE LII. 
 
 1. See footnote 3, pasre 75 o o I T ^~" — - 
 
 o Tiho „ J ^- ^^^ footnote 4, nacre 7'i 
 
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 77 
 
 pretibua^-emotla, dicit llberius atque audacius. 3. SS in currds 
 citissime recipiunt. 4. Ea res legionl fellciter evenit. 5. Novo 
 genere ptlgnae perterrifcls nostris, ill! per niedios audacissime per- 
 rtiperunt. 6. Qilam maximis itineribus in Galliam tilteriorem 
 contendit. 7. Id quod ipsi aegerrime confecerant, ille uno die 
 fecit. 8. Cupidissime popull Romani amicitiam appetunt. 9. 
 Milites legionis decirnae, cui quam maxime confldebat, acriter 
 pugnaveiunt. 10. Qua minime arduus ascensus erat, ex oppido 
 eruptionem fubito fecerunt. 11. Facillime impetus hostium diu- 
 tius sustinebirnus. 12. Haec cIVitas longe plurimum totlus Galliae 
 valet. 13. Haec civitaa diil plurimum totius Galliae valebat. 
 14. His rebus quam maturrime occurrere constituit. 16. Hulc 
 legion! Caesar indulserat praecipue, et propter virtutem conflde- 
 bat maxime. 16. Omnes acerrime fortissimeque piignaverunt. 
 17. Quam aequissimum locum delept, atque castra quam maxime 
 contraxit. 
 
 II. — 1 They will resist us less easily. 2. They are approaching 
 nearer. 3. After procuring supplies as quickly as possible, he 
 hastens by forced marches towards Ariovisfcus. 4. Our»men were 
 greatly alarmed. 5. They began to resist more boldly and fight 
 more bravely. 6. He persuades them more easily because the 
 Helvetians are hemmed in on all sides by the nature of the coun- 
 try. 7. Our men hesitated to leap down, chiefly on account of the 
 depth of the sea. 8. He forbade the soldiers to depart too far^ 
 from the line of march. 9. Our men, quickly making an attack on 
 them, fought long and vigorously. 10. He ordered as many ships 
 as possible to be collected in that winter. 11. Tlie right of ambas- 
 sadors must be more carefully upheld. 12. Many ships were most 
 seriously shattered. 13. He demanded as large a u aber of 
 soldiers as possible. 14. He stationed the army in winter quarters 
 in those states which had last made war. 15. He himself is slain 
 while fighting bravely. 16. He determined to have an escort as 
 friendly as possible. 17. He has waged many wars with the 
 neighboring states most successfully. 
 
 Translate too far by the comparative ; literally, farther {than they should). 
 
78 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 ^"^ '"'Tmr*'*'' '^''^ '"''' "^^ ^---t^ -rant: they had foll^ved. 
 
 ^y^ng. ^-n^l coeplt, /le began to follow. 
 
 Moratu*, after delayxiuj. Potltur. he gcdm. 
 
 VoretuP. he fears. p„t,t„«, having gained. 
 
 Veritas, fearxng. Progredltur. Ae orfmnce,. 
 
 Observation -To what voice do these verb-forms belong (a) 
 with respect to their form, (6) with respect to the translation ?^ 
 
 (b) Seqnens, while foUoiving. 
 
 Secuturl sunt, they are going to follow. 
 
 Observatlon.-To which voice do these forms belong ? 
 Part m.,rZn 40! "'^ '^^^^^"^ ^^ '' ^" ^^^^^'^^^ - 
 
 EXERCISE LIII. 
 
 e8t^'~2^" HpTV^ ^''' ^T ^''''' '"°'^'"^' '"'"P^^^^ «»bit6 coort^ 
 est 2. Helvetn, oppidls .suls vicisque exustis, cum els proficiscen- 
 tur 3 Legatos conantes dlcere prohibuit. 4. Hostes impedltos 
 nostri consecuti, magnum numerum eorum conclderunt. Tin" 
 piam frmnenti veritus, constituit non progredl longius. 6. Nostrls 
 mihtibus cunctantibus, centurio deos contestatu! desilit. 71! 
 
 coeperunt. 8. Dum civitas jus suum exsequi conatur, Orgetorix 
 mortuus est. 9. Germanos cedentes insequi ausi erant iT 
 Cohortatus suos, hoste^, aggressus est. 11. m in locis quidem / 
 superioribus hostes c5nsistere patiuntur. 12. Repulsl ab equitat" ^ 
 se m silvas abdiderunt, locum nacti egregie et natura et opere 
 mun turn. 13. Hi n<^tros adorti proelium renovant. 14. His 
 constitutis rebus, nactus idoneam tempestatem, tertia vigilia solvit 
 equitesque in ulteriorem portum progredl et se sequl jussit. 15.' 
 
 the inflnltive marking the coniu^atTon l«f ^ ^''^vH^^f/l'i* indicative, the second 
 perfect inUicative.' conjugation (see Lesson XLVIII., c), and the third the 
 
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 79 
 
 Equitata suo pulso &tque Insequentibus nostris, subito pedestrgs 
 copias ostenderunt. 
 
 II. — 1. Csesar, pfter encouraging his men, {^ives the signal. 2. 
 The Aedui had promised com. 3. He did not allow the soldiers 
 to go outside of the fortifications. 4. On the interpreters being 
 removed he converses with him more freely. 5. After advancing 
 seven miles from that place, he drew up the lino of battle. 6. A 
 sudden wai arose in Gaul. 7. When this battle had been reported, 
 those who had come to the Rhine begaii to return ; he himself set 
 out for hither Gaul. 8. He ordered the Helvetians to return to 
 their own territories, from which they had set out. 9. They have 
 not ventured to attack us. 10. They will attempt to seize the/ 
 higher ground. 11. He himself sets out with all his forces. 12. 
 At daybreak, leaving the camp of the Helvetians, they hastened to 
 the territories of the Germans. 13. A great storm having arisen, 
 all the ships were most seriously shattered. 14. Suddenly attack- 
 ing them, they slew a large number. 15. With whom {plural) 
 does he hold converse ? 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 (a) Vlrtute praestant, 
 
 Celerltate omnes praece- 
 
 dunt, 
 Opplda namero duodeclni, 
 Oppidum nomine Bibrax, 
 
 they are superior in valor, 
 they excel all in speed, 
 
 toivns twelve in numher. 
 a town Bibrax by name. 
 
 Observation. — The use of the ablative without a preposition tc 
 specify in what respect a statement or term is to be applied. 
 
 ^6) Fortiores qnam Galll sunt, th^y are braver than the Gauls. 
 
 Hibernla est minor quam Ireland is smaller than Britain. 
 
 Britannia, 
 
 Ampiius octin§rentae naves more than eight hundred vessels 
 
 erant visae, had been seen. 
 
 Mllites minus septlngenti less than seven hundred soldiers 
 
 <!Qnveniont, assemble. 
 
80 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Obgepvtttlon.— The force of quam after a comparative.* The 
 omission of qnani with numerals.'-* 
 
 EXERCISE LIV. ^ 
 
 I.— 1. Haec civitas hominum multitudine praestabat. 2. Magis 
 virt,ute quam dolo contendimus. 3. Venetl scientia atque usQ 
 nauticarum rerum reliquos Gallos antecedunt. 4. Virtute omni- 
 bus praestatis. 5. Uno die amplius viginti urbes incenduntur. 
 
 6. Praestat omnia a populo Romano pati quam ab Gallis interficl. 
 
 7. Flumen ab eastris non amplius millia passuum deeem aberat. 
 
 8. Germanos Galli virtute superabant. 9. Plurimum inter eos 
 Bellovaci et^ virtute et auctoritate et hominum numero valent. 
 10. Haec res Caesarl non minorem quam ipsa victoria voluptatem 
 attulit.* 11. Aquitania et^ regionum latitudine et multitudine 
 hominum tertia pars Galliae est aestimanJa. >2. Gallos disperses 
 adortus, magis ratione et consilio quam virtute vicit. 13. Plus 
 tertia parte interfecta, reliquos in fugam conjiciunt. 
 
 ^^•— 1- The Helvetians surpass in valor all the rest of the Gauls. 
 2. They are strong in infantry. 3. He himself was not farther 
 than a mile and a half from the enemy's camp. 4. Our fleet was 
 superior in swiftness. 5. They themselves have not more than 
 three hundred cavalry. 6. They are going to burn all their own 
 towns, twelve in number. 7. The Gauls do not compare them- 
 selves with them in valor. 8. The lot of the Sequani is more 
 wretched and bitter than (that) of the others. 9. Our men were 
 equal to the enemy both in valor and in number, hi. The nights 
 are shorter than in Gaul. 11. Labienus has collect all the ships, 
 two hundred in number. 12. It is better to be slain in battle (tise 
 acik) than not to regain our liberty. 
 
 th J;k^*^^° *''^^'' ^^""^^ implying comparison, e.g., praestat, it is better. The use of 
 the ablative of comparison is omitted here because of its rarity in Csesar. 
 
 2. So only after amplius, plus, minus and longivs. 
 
 3. See footnote 3, page 66. 
 
 4. From affc/o. 
 
 I 
 
PART L — INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 
 
 81 
 
 LESSON LV.» 
 
 (a) Bespondent Bomanus ve- tliey answer that the Romans wre 
 
 nl'©. coming. 
 
 Exlstlmat Gallos esge In- he thinks that the Ga/uls are hos- 
 
 ImXoos, iOi, 
 
 Certlor factus est Helvetlos he has been informed that the Hel- 
 
 Iter face re, . vetiMns are marching. 
 
 Intellegit nootrds oastra he perceives that &\tr mew a/re 
 
 inovere, breaking up camp. 
 
 Observation.— The Latin equivalent for English clauses intro- 
 duced by that after verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving. 
 Mood. Case of subject. Translation of that. 
 
 (b) Bespondent Bomanos ve- tliey ansiver that the Romans have 
 
 nisse, come. 
 
 Exlstlmat € alios fuisse In- he thinks that the Gauls hoAX been 
 
 ImXeos, ^ hostile. 
 
 Intellegrlt nostros oastra he perceives that oxir men are 
 
 ntoturos (esse), goit^ to move the camp. 
 
 Bespondet se non venturnm he answers that he will not come. 
 
 (esse), 
 
 Bespondent eum non ven- they answer that he wilt not come. 
 
 turnm (esse). 
 
 Observation. — The formation of the various tenses of the infini- 
 tive active, and their transMion after verbs of saying, thinking, 
 etc. (See Part III., section 31, and for the verb sum, section 41.) 
 The changes of form in the future infinitive. ^ Use of se and eum 
 as subject of an infinitive.^ 
 
 1. On account of the len^h and difficulty of this lesson, the exercise is so arranged 
 that sections (o), (6) and (c) may be taken as separate lessons. Soe more fully Part II., 
 sections 12 and 16, and Part III., section 101, 6. 
 
 2. The future infinitive is made up of the future participle in -urus and the 
 infinitive of sum, but eese is generally omitted. The participle in -tirua will, of 
 course, agree in gender, number and case with the person to whom it refers, i.e., 
 its subject. 
 
 3. & regularly la short sentences refers to the subject of the verb on which the 
 infinitive depends. As there Bfe no personal endings with the infinitive, the subject 
 should always be expressed by a noun or pronoun in the accusative case. 
 
82 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (c) Certlor factus orat eos Iter he had been infoi'med that they 
 
 facero, were marching. 
 
 Beoponderunt Rom&nds ve- </w;i/ answered that the Romans 
 
 nlrf^, were com iwj. 
 
 Besponderunt Roni&nos ve- they answered that the Romans 
 
 nl8«e, had come. 
 
 iSxlstlinabat coplas ventu- he thomjht that the forces wovld 
 
 rag (ense), come. 
 
 Observation. — The translation of the various tenses of the 
 infinitive, when the verb of saying, thinking, etc., is in a past 
 tense, i.e., imperfect, perfect ( = English past) or pluperfect. ^ 
 
 EXERCISE l^y.i^o-^^V^rh 1^^^ 
 
 I. — (a) 1. Renuntiant Gallos ex vico discedere. 2. Intellegit 
 
 Nervios belluni parare. 3. Nostros ex navi desilire conspiciunt.''* 
 
 4. Hostem intra portas esse existimant.^ 5. Dicit cfjpias hostium 
 
 fossas complere vallumque scindere. 6. Videtis nihil esse arduum. 
 
 (6) 7. S§ obsides reciperatarum existimat. 8. Cognoscit naves 
 in continentem revertisse. 9. Duas venisse legiones videt. 10. 
 Nos iter facturos cognoscit. 11. Copias temperattiras ab injuria 
 et maleficio existimat. 12. Els sese vel persuasuros vel vi coac- 
 turos existimant. 13. Omnem exercitum discessisse renuntiant. 
 
 (c) 14. Respondit magnam Caesarem injuriam facere. 15. Re- 
 nuntiaverant Gallos adventum Romanorum exspectare constituisse. 
 16. Negavit Aeduls se obsides redditurum esse. 17. Helvetii 
 angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur,^ 18. Helvetlos tempera- 
 turos ab injuria existimabat.^ 19. EjTcaptivIs cognovit flumen ab 
 castrls suis non amplius millia passuum duodecim abesse, trans 
 id flumen omnes Nervios consedisse, adventumque ibi Romanorum 
 exspectare. 20. Hostes simul a^que se ex fuga receperunt, ad 
 Caesarem dg pace legatos miserunt, atque obsides se daturos 
 polliciti sunt. 21. Caesari renuntiatur Helvetios iter in Aeduorum 
 
 1. These tenses are called the sscondary or historical tenses ; the present, future- 
 and perfect (when translated by have) being called the primary tenses. 
 
 2. The verb of saying, thinking, etc., often follows the clause which depends on it- 
 8. With verbs of thinking, feeling and knowing, ths imperfect tense is p-dnerally to 
 
 be translated by the English past tense. .. 
 
 if 
 
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 83 
 
 ftnCs facere. 22. Caesar jiostquam per exploratorSa comperit 
 hoHtgs sesS in silvaH recepisse, inopiam fnlmentl veritus, cSnHtituit 
 ndn progredl longius. 23. Helvetil tiniore perterritos RomanSs 
 discodere a ho existiniSbant.^ 24. BrcvidrSs esse <iuHin in Giillia 
 noctes videbamus.i 
 
 II.— (a) 1. He learns that the Belgians are assembling. 2. 
 They think that Ctesar is waging war without supplies. 3. He 
 sees that the Germans do not venture to begin battle. 4. They 
 bring back word that the enemy's cavalry are riding up and hurl- 
 ing stones and weapons. 5. They undersbind that cavalry, ships 
 (and) provisions are wanting. C. He says that the corn is now 
 ripe in the fields. 
 
 (h) 7. They perceive that Csesar has led across the forces with- 
 'out baggage. 8. He thinks that Labienus will order the Aedui to 
 send ambassadors. 9. He learns that the Britons have seized the 
 ambassador and put (him) in chains. 10. He says that they have 
 rested all hope of safety in valor alone. 11. They bring back word 
 that Ceesar, after leading his army across, has broken down the 
 bridge. 12. All the states promise to send (literally, that they will 
 send) hostages. 
 
 (c) 13. He answered that he would break up camp the next 
 night. 14. On the same day Caesar was informed by scouts that 
 
 I the enemy had encamped at the foot of the mountain, eight miles 
 f-?om his camp. 15. He promised not to neglect^ the wrongs of 
 the Aedui. 16. He was informed that all the neighboring states 
 
 . were revolting. 17. They promised not to revolt. ^ 18. They 
 declare that they will neither send ambassadors nor surrender their 
 arms. 19. He said that for this reason he had been silent. 20. 
 From these he learns that a town,' protected by woods and marshes, 
 is not far distant from that place. 21. They said that, influenced 
 by him, they had revolted from the Aedui. 22, He declares that 
 they have always been hostile to him. 23. Caesar, thinking (litsr- 
 ally, having thought) that this had happened quite opportunely, 
 demands hostages. 24. He promised to finish ^ the war withoit 
 any danger to them (literally, of them). 
 
 1. See footnote 8, page 82. 
 
 2. Compare sentence 12, and avoid using the present infinitive after verbs of 
 promising. 
 
nammttm 
 
 mmmm 
 
 84 
 
 HI 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 
 U^''^ 
 
 VIp milxlmae vlrtutlH, 
 CI&mmIm navluin vlfflntl, 
 Novem tllerum Iter, 
 
 Mons iimffn& ultltudlne, 
 VIr inaxlina virtutis 
 Immi'in) corporuin niagnltu- 
 dlno homines. 
 
 a man of the greatest bravery. 
 
 a Jleft of twenty ship-t. 
 
 a nine days' march (litarally, a 
 
 limrch of nino days). 
 a mountain of great height, 
 a man <^ tlie greatest bravery, 
 men of hnge size (of bodies). 
 
 Observation.- The cases used to describe the (lualities or char- 
 ftcteristics of objects. Which case is used when the description 
 refers to number? which case is preferred when physical charac- 
 teristics are described ?» 'W^aX ar4L 
 
 , EXERCISE LVI. 
 
 I.~l. Reperit Nervios esse homines magnae virtatis. 2. Quod 
 erat civitas magnae inter Belgas auctoritatis, atque hominum 
 multitOdino i)rae8tabat, sescentos obsides poposcit. 3. Volusenus, 
 tribunus mllitum, vir et consilii magni et summae virtutis, ad 
 Galbam accurrit, atque unam esse spem sahltis docefc. 4. Merca- 
 tores ingenti magnitudine corporum Germanos esse praedicabant. 
 6. Nervii vallo pedum novem et fossa qulndecim" hiberna cingunt. 
 
 6. Erat inter Labienum atque hostem difficili transitu fltimen. 
 
 7. Quibus viribus homines tantulae statiirae tanti oneris turrim 
 motflri sunt ? 8. Per exploratores certior factus est silvam esse 
 Infinita magnitfldine. 9. Vercingetorix, summae potentiae adulgs- 
 cens, cajus pater prjncipatum Galliae totlus obtinuerat, clientes 
 convocat. 10. Cgteri ejusdem generis sunt hijmaniores. 
 
 11. —1. He was distant a few days' journey from him. 2. A 
 mountain of great height takes up the rest of the space. 3. It was 
 an enterprise of great danger. 4. A wood of immense extent 
 stretches from the river Rhine to their territories. 5. They 
 
 1. See more fully Part III., sections 81, e, and 85, c. 
 ^^i^c\^r.%^,^^,rA^:i^X^ ^' the trench .<e the ImporUnt measure- 
 
PART L— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 85 
 
 brought back word that the OernmnH wore (men) of incredible 
 bravery fl Thoy are going to fortify the town with a rampart 
 twelve feet high (UteraUy, of tirdve fed). 7. He found that Dum- 
 nonx was (a man) of the utmost boldness, aad of great influence 
 with the Gauls on account of his liberality. 8. He sends to them 
 Valerius a young man of the highest valor and accomplishments. 
 9. He d,d not think that men of an unfnendly dis,>«sition would 
 refrain from wrong-doing and mischief. 10. This state waa power- 
 ful, and WHS of great weight among them. 
 
 LESSON LVII. 
 
 {(() Certlor factus est agrbn he waa inftmned that th^ fields 
 vastarl, ^^g jg/^^^ i^^ waste. 
 
 RespondSrunt a«rp6« va^ta- they anaivered that their JieUh had 
 toH et opplda Incensa been laid waste and their 
 
 *'*"'*'' Unvns burned. 
 
 Polllcltl sunt se seoaturds they prmnised to follow (literally, 
 
 ^^■*®^ • that they would follow). 
 
 Dixit eosloqulconatos esse, he said they had attempted to 
 
 speak. 
 
 Observation.- 1 onnation of present and perfect infinitive pas- 
 sive (see Part III., section 32). Changes in form of the perfect 
 infinitive passive. Infinitive of Deponents (see Part III., section 
 4U>. Coqijiare Lesson LV. 
 
 (b) PraesldlQ castrjs erant. they were a protection (literally, 
 
 for a protection) to the camp. 
 
 Omnia quae «rant usul all things which were of sermee 
 
 "****''*• (literally, for an advantage) 
 
 to oar men. 
 Nostpis erat Impedlmento, it was a hindrance (literally, for 
 
 a hindrance) to cur men. 
 Equltes auxlllo nostris ml- thsy sent the cavalry as aid (liter- 
 *®'"'**' ally, for an aid) to our men, 
 
 or to aid owr men. 
 
86 
 
 riilMAkV I.A'ilN HOOK. 
 
 OliP««rviifloii,— Tho i'txHo uh«kI iw h pttHlionto to ntnto tli« ptir|Mi«o 
 n puinun I)!- tiling nui'vuh.' 
 
 I 
 
 MXKIIOISK LVIl. \ 
 
 t. — 1. n«'N|»oM(lit oiiiiiOm oAnnii ropiilM II h«t |»u1njIm ili* KuiioifllAH 
 orwo. *2. MuKittVliiio iioNtitiiii niNtiu ooinpli'rl (*t iioHtrAH Ic (ioiiOH 
 pri'iiiT vTth'niiit. M. Kilmh'in t'opii\H prui'sidiri oiiMtrlM rulltpiit. 4. 
 Hrnilntiiiiil llt'lv("tir»s iter pi<r proviiu-iain facom t'OmTiI. f». Ilin«c 
 I'Cn niilgu'. ilMUl fiiit. ((. DrinuiiNtnit u\vu\ oiiiniliuN (iulliH t^sNu 
 fiu't-'utluui. 7. K(|uitOH nniitii1vr>runt' H\ipi«rioro n«M"to, inilxiinfl, 
 tHHirtA ti«iiip»'NtAd«, omiH"H uilvOH hIIIioIAn vhhv H. M<|uiir'H hIi 
 hoMtihuM «ii'm"i'T I'oiiHpioAtiiN, «liH'iiimm loKir>iu'in nulmitlirt nostrlH 
 •nisit. \), (lulilH imlgiio i<mt impi'«llnu>ii(r». 10. A'l»itrA,tI oum 
 nr>ji lonj^iuM progn'dt crtnAhHinn, in funs huuh nnt'itr'nint. tl. 
 K(<spi)U(li'ruiit nftn nO hosh'iu vi'iOr! mul inamiiiniliiuun Hilvilnnn. 
 12. (\'rtir»vON fin'tl Nimt. rju'wumn, pnu'sitlio (psTmpu) n»li« iuiii 
 i«u|HuUmoutlM 'i'i>liotr>, iMun it'litpils i-opiTH prlniiX hlou pnifout-uiii 
 1,'wo. VA, Hoc milgiio NJbi n.sul foio Hrl)i(iA,l»untur.* 
 
 IT.— 1. Uo fonntl tlmfr <lu>ir arrival was Ium'uk Hwaitod hy Mio 
 cnomy. '2. Ho wn.s aftorwurds infonno«l that liabiunuH' apjiroaoh 
 had r.ol }>«>on disoovorcd l.y tlu »Mu«niy. .'{. Tho two logions whicli 
 had lu'oii la.st, onrolh'd woro loft, as guard for tho baggago. 4. Ho 
 proiuisod to follow (^vsai. 5. Thoso wlio woro coming to tho 
 aid of the Hdgiati.s Icarni'd ih.-it several towns had been taken by 
 Kt^inii. <J. Ho wa.s informed tiiati n .sudden war had arisen in 
 Oaiil, 7- One thing was a y;reat advantage to our num. H. Tlu^y 
 answered that the frieiulwhip «tf the Roman people was an httnor 
 and a .safeguanl, not a loss. 0., These informed (V"ar that the 
 two anjba.ssado?\s had been put to death. 10. All (things) were 
 wanting which vvern of u.se for (tisf n<l) these purposes. 11. Ho 
 s,'iitl that the Ae«lui luid been compelled t«) give hostnges. 12. Ho 
 .siiid that he woidd .set out for the province the next day. l.'i Ho 
 pcrcoivtHl that our men were being surrounded l*y the enemy. 
 
 1. ThU «»e of the dattvo Is fomid ohiofly with I lie wonU urivon ahovp. It should he 
 ivotiowl that (hopi> xa jriMioraU.v anothor dative telliiitf the person to whoai the thuig 
 •|H>ken of is a henetit or injtivy, and often to 'te translate<l *»y ./'"'• 
 
 ± See foi)ti)ot« .H, i>a^ 82. 
 
PAllT I.— INTUODIK.TOR^ LWWON8. 
 
 87 
 
 MCSSON r.viii. 
 
 MAa:«ft««lerlt&tiMu^«urr*ru..t. they ran cLwn uHfh gtmt m,nft.. 
 Allft n.tl»,H. l,o||„,„ ^,.r„„t. ihn, -nrry r.n the imr in amllm 
 
 innntwr. 
 
 Hun.,„«.tu,lirM..»«»r,im.,„l„„f. (hnj forli/i, thv ramp iHth the 
 
 \irvatvnt xvitl. 
 
 »uAr«,i.UiHu.lI„o.li^.|luOr,,„t, thr^j l.n,,,nl dam,, acnmllny Jo 
 
 thrir nmtom. 
 
 r.»o.nrN v«H.„tAt« prof.Hi thnj sH mit mlh Camr'n cm^vnl. 
 
 o;,«,rv.itl«n.- TI.o UMu uiul MvulHlaticn of tho ablHkivo oxpriw«- 
 n.K M>o n.unm.r ii> whid., nr M.ut in Hocuiilunco with wliici,, m.„u,- 
 thing iH ''oiio. 
 
 KXKUCIHK LVTTI. 
 
 T.-l. E.iuiiil»im ih,n1,.'Th iu.IhIh, ii.c-a.libill ci.K,rit,aio ud flnim'.. 
 <U.'oiiiTnnt. 2. (JhIIIh n.agno omt iiniK.ll.nunto ,,uo(l nndo c<,i,K,ro 
 IMlKnavt-runt. ;j. Ah oIh oognuvifc (JhUoh n.or. huo c<mcilio huhito 
 unnttuH m onuulH puKOH dln.IsiHNu. 4. H.mt.lH nulxi.no chl.noro 
 scalls vHlhnu asoondoro c.uprrunt. 5. ConHuotndino huu Ca««,u 
 cohorti-H oomplnroH pnioHidio cuHtrls rolMumat. ({. Ilopporit id 
 jl'inum per flnfiH Ao.hionua in Jlhchmun, I.dluoro incrCdihill 
 h-iutAtt,. 7. Ad cHHim niugiio curH.l c.u.fctuh-nmt 8. Or.nHCiiHa 
 onmium Oallonnn, paro facta, (icnnanl hunc sihi d..;nicilio locMun 
 <u- OKfrrnt. ». Ad h.u,c Oausar msp,mdit .n nun.pm.n r'ia rationo 
 ..olh.M, goMtnnini. JO. Sununo Ntudio n.IlitoH navoH audificftre 
 votorOHijuo roHcore coopOruiit. 
 
 II.— 1. Ho ordered the camp to U moved with greater noise and 
 oonfuHu.n. 2. Ho Haid this in a h,ud voice. 3. They reported 
 that all tho GaulH with loud weeping began t.. mV aid from Ctesar. 
 4. Having with incredible siieed covered a great distance, they 
 reached tho camp on tho eighth day., 5. According to their cus- 
 tom, they leap down and fight on foot. 6. Tlioy brought back 
 word that thM camp had not boon fortified with the same care on 
 
88 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .^' 
 
 >:}^^ 
 
 
 (use ex) all sides. 7. He answered that he would not come on any 
 other condition. 8. With the same speed they hastened to-^ards 
 our camp. 9. With the approval of aU, they sent ambassadors to 
 him and promised to give hostages. 10. He found out through 
 scouts that, according to the practice of the Roman people, the 
 enemy were fortifying a camp. 
 
 f . LESSON LIX. 
 
 Impetam tam sablto faolunt they make an attack so siidderUy 
 
 ut nemo reslstat, thai no one resists. 
 
 Impetam tam sublto feoernnt they made an attack so siiddenly 
 
 ut nemo resisteret, that no one resisted. 
 
 Tantas timer hostes occnpavit such a panic seized the enemy that 
 
 ut proelinm committere they did not dare to join 
 
 noil auderent, battle. 
 
 Accidit ut ca«tra mllltes mu- it happened that the soldiers were 
 
 nirent, fortifying the camp. 
 
 Observation.— Formation of the subjunctive in the present and 
 imperfect active of all conjugations. (See Part IH., section 29. )» 
 The translation and use of these tenses of the subjunctive in 
 dependent sentences of result. « Position of the clause introduced 
 by ut.3 
 
 EXERCISE LIX. 
 
 I.— 1. Tam subito impetum fecerunt ut hostes terga verterent. 
 2. Non tam barbarus sum ut haec non sciam. 3. Ita Helvetii 
 instituti sunt ut obsides accipere non dare soleant. 4. Tantus fuit 
 timor ut discedere ab signis non auderemus. 6. A.ccidit ut Galll 
 copias compararent. * 6. Ita currus collocant ut expedltum ad 
 suos receptum habeant. 7. Tantum potentia antecesserant ut 
 
 conJuSo*n!*' ^'"'' "'" '^''"°" ^^' '""" ''^^ «"^i»"ctive of the verbs in 4o of the third 
 
 ..r«^;rlnau?^'?^^u^ '' '^*" ^ sufflcieiit to noticB that the tenses of the subjunctive 
 are translated m the same way as the indicative is ; the present like the DreVpn? 
 
PAET I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. .^9 
 
 Galliae tofclus principatum obtinSrent. 8. Tam celeriter 6rup. 
 tionem faciunt ut nemo resistat. 9. Tantam sibi auctoritatem 
 comparaverat ut undique ad eum legationes concurrerent. 30. 
 Tantum exercitatione efficiunt ut in praecipiti loco equos brevl 
 moderari soleant. 11. Sic nostroa contempserunt ut fossas com- 
 plere auderent. 12. Hostes tantam virtutem praestiterunt ut 
 altissimas ripas ascendere auderent. 
 
 ^^—1- The enemy were so 'terrified that they fled to the woods. 
 2. So great was the valor of the soldiers that all fought fiercely 
 and bravely. 3. On their arrival such a change occurred (literally, 
 was made) that our men at once renewed the battle. 4. It hap- 
 pened that the soldiers were leaving the standards. 5 Such was 
 the swiftness of the Germans that they equalled the speed of 
 their horses. 6. So great is the panic that we do not venture to 
 engage battle with them. 7. So great a storm arose that very few 
 of aU the ships reached land. 8. The enemy have been so alarmed 
 by his arrival that they are sending ambassadors about peace. 9. 
 They fought so fiercely that no one dared leave the standards. 10. 
 They display such valor that the neighboring states eagerly seek 
 their friendship. 11. They have such influence among the Bel- 
 gians that no one dares to lay waste their fields. 12. So quick 
 were they (literally, so great teas their quickness) that he with 
 difficulty saved himself from the eneix.y's hands. 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 
 Cum frumentnm nostrl com- 
 portarent, oertlor factum 
 
 est; • • • 9 
 
 Cum haeo vXdlsset, equites 
 
 mlslty 
 Cum agros vastavlssetit, oppl- 
 
 da oppuguavernnt. 
 
 Cum milie passus abesset, oer- 
 tlor fac. as est ...» 
 
 when our riien were bringing in 
 corn, he was informed .... 
 
 when he saw (literally, had seen) 
 this, he sent the cavalry. 
 
 when (or after, or since) they had 
 laid waste the fields (or after 
 laying waste the fields), they 
 attacked the towns. 
 
 when he was a mile distant, he 
 was informed .... 
 
 I 
 
f 
 
 m 
 
 HUM AH V LATIN flonK. 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 i^»uj««»f»l «•*«»" V«'''' l*«t^ IN.. wM>H.»n m.' r\w «ul.|niu>«ifo of mhh 
 ^♦»«*»» VnW m.. BoHioH 4n. Tl»i» umuuui MiMmlM io»» of „«•«» hiuI 
 
 plupoHiVf HMl>jun«'Mvy ,-nhM ,.«m.' Tho |.oHi(iot» of Mui ohuinu 
 
 t. * 1. V\m p.MoAnnu fihiVH .pt^Wfuoi- .lii^Hiioi- focifwof. m) llnmnn 
 ^HMAi\Mi<. y, r.ioHfU' v\\\\\ ,\h ),oM(o utM> «n\j»liuM pttNMUuin Uuo- 
 
 r^v^RAN ,M«up^^hM^<^ M\\ tola ov lo,-o Nup,>vio»^» ronjioovoni, noMtH 
 w^h^h^ ,An«pti,MuMu foooi-uni. 4. Ma^Kmu u,v(,> mvi^iit tn ,>««,.< Iniut 
 pU^^wi. iV Tuiu MppiMptHipirtivnr Uriliuunno. f,MupoH<rt« mU\\\\ 
 xsy^MA »v,«,t. li, (>,,^^ f,j,^,, unpoihnuMUVM <',»,>«(>»> logiAui^M hi\im 
 
 vx^.u««on K,^n\,^. ,p»t pt>>vnn< {\M\usv m\\\, «ul »Mnu l,^Kf^t,\« uiTsOninf. 
 J^. NoRh\« v\u>» x,A u\ ^v,„t,v, ,vo<pi^H*ht. hoMihuH o.vumn<f. U. 
 
 wOv^hli,^ mrs^t, to. iNhu jam \\xM\ hx\U\\\\ \Wh ho»1 o<i(»m tola 
 M^vM<>\'» a<^«^^^lvn^ n<,p«o hoMi\H Aoiium TUHt^vuf, oi, foNHA,<* i»t»«n- 
 p^^«v *s>opisM^t\<, Volus,^nv>f< ml ,nuu .uv^ini^ rtl,pio mm\ x^hx^ 
 
 «.•*« n\fxM>»u,H) thj^t rtU t1\o UoUiirtus \vo«>> *>>MJ«piriuK. i^- Whou .mu* 
 mo« >«*xv WxM tho .Simp xx,^y KMivit fUUnl Nxith H uniU»(uaoof tho 
 xM>o»^VV» »'h> ^ <'M^ thoo^MvluvM to Hijilu. :<. Affor ho luul o»>«Io»hmI 
 ^SMi^ U^ W iMvnvjihtou* Ivo \>ns t^xfovuusl !>> wouts (h,«« i\\\ (ho 
 V^'^nU h>>4a aojv»r<,H\. 4. So jitxv,t .^ Monu ,'U>"vxo that tho n st of tho 
 sh^vs x^xnv \»>vKvvs. o. U h.^pjvus (hr»t tho uights a<v «shor<or. i\. 
 Whxw -So livvu»ans «o\v n\a<vhuvtf <nio our p»>nituv. thoy loft 
 th\\v thouj«i\a u\ou ,"*s .i jiu.«»,>i tov^ tho KijQf.igx^ 7. Whon hV h.-ul 
 
 
I'AUT t.—INTUOlHU "hlUY r.KHHONH. 
 
 01 
 
 ii|t|»i'.»m'luMl \\mny\\ Iim whh ;tnl-<n>il «(. tlimw Hwwy liin nnm, H. Ho 
 «iv(i« Ih Ihn Ht'Hi-.'ity of hII lliinuH tlwtl wo uio in vory gmit, tliuij^nr. 
 U. \Vli«»n ho wim h fow (UyH* iiihioIi fiom (Ii«>if tuiTitinioH, hiiiIihr- 
 HiulutN omno lt» liiin. 10. Wlion tlio (^uiln hhw t.liaf, «iui' loKintm 
 WHiv hoinn i>'^«'«l ptoNHoil, Mioy Iihh(oiio<I tuwaiilH Mio oHtiip. II. 
 On ioHHiliiH; (liii^ CioHiir uiiM Koiiijr to Hot out. «liH« nielli,, tiioy 
 Hliiilouoil nil iiiiihiiHJi ill iho wooiIm. 12. It, hiipiKMiiMJ tjuit tJio 
 oiuii|i wm Hiiiiillor. 
 
 l.liKSON I.X1. f/^ }fxAUj\iy t^ 
 
 ItlKM* rilO«>l'0 IMtMMUIIIi 
 
 / fKM .»/»/«' /») (A> /7u>, or i can do 
 thin, 
 rum liiHM' fitroi'o itAii poHMMit, V'hvii //hi/ u^rviwi «/»/»< fmhthis, 
 
 ut* i«'/if'M //in/ »•(»(//,/ ,1,)/ ,/o 
 
 /;.M. 
 
 Ulxit (»l> |||»«M' rtlO(M><> IIONNO, /if ,yrll(/ //ifl/ /ir ,Om/(/ (/(I //|j'«. 
 
 nuit «0 liiHM» rii<*(M<«» iioltilNMs /if .s.im/ //ifi/ /),. ,-(.!»/(/ hnir <hmi' 
 
 this (litmiilly, liiul bouji nblo 
 
 tiO lltl). 
 
 tlttt»«» rn<«(M>(> iiAit |uiiu(^iMiiit, //i« !/ Mvif. ii»if»/)/f. /„ ,/o //n'a^ or 
 
 //ir'j/ ('<»ll/l/ M«)/ f/c» //),■«. 
 
 NulMiiovOfI It Alt iMtHMiiiit. ihrif cunnol he ilviven off. 
 
 (liiNovviitlnii. Tmimlatioii of iho vhimouh fonim ctf imMNuiii with 
 tlio piiwnl intinitivo of (uiotlior wvh. (For Iho OMtijugut.i«m <if 
 ItoNNitm, Hoo PtiH III., Nootion 42.) Pnmtioii of tho iutiuitivo.' 
 
 EXMUOISE LXI. 
 
 I.— 1. Nallt oTvitAlTl'oriiiiindruni poi*Nua«lOro potostis. 2. VoIiIh 
 p«vsHmmi« ntiloH OMNO .'miiToT. II \h IiTh no .lofondon., trriditTM hiiiHn, 
 nun pivsNuiit. 4. MinuN fiioilo oivni roiii ormsoipiT potoniiit. 5. 
 I'vim oppiaum oxpilgnAro non potumsont, n^mn po|mlni,i Himt. 
 «. N(5 ijwo «|uiiloiu NpOmt nostnmi oxoivituin supoiarT'*poHso. 7. 
 Quid sine ivliipiiH logioniluiM otHooro potostis / 8. Id otticoru 
 
 XIX^ ^'* "iHniUx^ is usvtl with j^msmh in tlio mine way m is llliwtiatwl in lesson 
 
 I 
 
r 
 
 92 
 
 PIUMAUY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 nfln |M.tuorH„t. ». Ou.n iiur i,. pnlvinoi.n, n.mtram Monrenf,, 
 e« unpoannontn, ,,ua« sOcnnn ,,.,rt,ftro „r.„ pot.nu,f, oitnl llfl.non 
 hnnu.n ,l.pnH„On,nf,. 10. Tnnta uh^ (Jm-nwlnonnu virtnH ut nO 
 • I Mm.lo.n .nn.mHalOH pa.OH ohno p„HHint,. II. (!„,„ hI, proxi.nlH 
 < mnwlnlM .n.pntraro non poMNc.t, nitorinmH toinptnnt. 12 No 
 "• '|ui«U..„ (VHHf h1> ho iinpottaiT poNHo .llxifc. IM. N,.HtrlH mib- 
 N.^l.n vuMlro MOM poi,.rann,M. 14. Oppi.hM,, oppn^Maro crmfttT, 
 proper lat..tn,liMOM. fosHHo M.nrup.o HltitQainunl oxpngmlr. ,^„ 
 
 n. 1. Thoy wiMnoi ,lofoM,l MM>lr owm ^orritMric.s. 2 Ilo t.MnkK 
 ♦»»»« lu' oa,. ,lo this without .iHMKor. .T W|,.,m t,l,„y .ouLi" not 
 
 |H«mUH,U.t,|u.HO, tiM.y M.M,1 HM.I.aHS.ulorM to UH. 4. Ilo WHH iMf.M-.nud 
 
 Mm thoy hml Mot, !,,,„ uhlo t„ hoUl out (aMy) loMgor. 5. Thuy 
 
 .-O^m Mot, wthstHMd M.0 Ht,tH0kM of oUr M.OM. O.'llo huH bo u 
 
 •np. 8 Wo oonl.1 not, Uko up nnns .p.iokly. \), Suoh u ntonu 
 H.O.S0 that, w,| woro not uhK, to tl.ush tho work. JO. Thov ai,l 
 
 fii'Ht Httnc^ oouM ho w.thstood. II. VV, ,,„ vory oHMily provont 
 thoM,.^ 12. So «ront whh tho uUntMoas of our n.on that nothinu 
 *''M.hl bo Hcoomplishod. VX Vou oannot bo noon fron. tho onon^y's 
 J'»np. 4. Wo havo boon so alarnuMl by tlioHo things, that wo can 
 loss oasjly n.s.Ht, tho ono.ny. 15. Thoy could not pu,«u« tho 
 onomy, bocauHo tho oavahy had boon ujuiblo tt, sot out. , 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 
 (..) Study tho formation of tlio porfoot Hubjunctivo activo of 
 Hll c<.njugat,ons (l>,uH, JU., soction 2U),. uiid of tho subjunctive 
 imssivo. all tonics (Part HI., section ;«)).-• ^ 
 
 (/') H««r»t quiH tthi ,>or««uHoHt. Iw ads who has per.mmkd you 
 HoRAvlt „ul« tlbl ,.or«ua- he asked who had imrsuuded you 
 
 
PABT I.— INTIIODUOTORY LESSONS. ' 93 
 
 Qa«m A.,nm bolll luibcimt he, hufuire, what experience cf 
 
 ""'*'"••*• war they htve. 
 
 Qumn ,,«„„, 1,011, hab6r*nt he Irnmrd what experience of imr 
 
 Quhl v(v„|„,^tl« nun Intel- / did not n,iderstand why ym 
 
 '«»''»»'"•'• had come. 
 
 Qtinntn fa,.„ltA« darftur thq, pointed out what an oppor- 
 
 aCMiMMi-trftvOrunt, ^„,„;^y ,,^, n/rm/.f/. 
 
 Ob«,rviitIon.-~Tho „H,o,l „h(„1 in .lopoiulcnt Hont.oncoH intro- 
 duood by an u.i.m.gHiiv,,.. Cuutrnnt tho indcpondont «ontoncc,H 
 g.vc,n in LoHHon IJ. Tl.o tranHlution of tlio diiforont tonHen of tho 
 suhjinn.itivu." 
 
 EXERCTHE LXIT. 
 
 I.-l. Ah hTH (luacHlvif, <,uao cIvitiUr^H in armlH OHHenfc. 2. Koirftt 
 quHM^m partoH hoHhls itor faciant. ;{. Ex loco Hnporioro cp.ae L 
 .n noHtrlH caHtrlH gororm.tnr conHpicUuH, docin.an. logimuMu HnbHidio 
 n.mtrlH .niH.t. 4. Uog/lvif, crtr ooh ah olHcio diHcnHHnroH jndica- 
 roimm 5. gnibim'' in luoTs nit (hvmv ox captlvlH ,,uaorunt '^ 
 OHtcmdifc qnao^ in concilio Clallor.un do «o Hint dicbi. 7. Iiitollo- 
 gi^bat ,p,ant,rr^ cum purTclo logioncn, ex hlbornlH 0<h.cfcnruH cHHofc 
 H. Ejus rol ,p,ao cauHa oNHot n.IratuH crat. 1). Cacnar intellugobafc 
 <Iu.V.du cauHa oa diccront. 10. Ibi ox cai-tlvlN cognoHcifc ,p,a«* in 
 hosfcnnn caHtrlH goranfr,ur. 11. Fhln.on osh incrodibill lOnitate, 
 lU ut- oculTH, in ntrani partem fluat, jmlicaiT non ponsit. 12 
 InHi.b,lH vorobatur (luod qaH'^ do cauHa diHcedoront hostgs nondum 
 l)or8[)oxorat. 
 
 II. -1. Ho asked him why they wore coming to him. 2 They 
 a«ked m what-' direction they wore being led. 8. He could din- 
 cover neither what {literally, how c,reat) was the size of tho inland 
 nor what nationn inhabited (it). 4. They know what^ he does' 
 with whom he converHOH. 6. They ask the merchants from what' 
 districts they come, and what things thoy have learned there. 6 
 Although Cassar understood for what-^ reason they bad said this 
 he yet ordere djiim to come t(. h im with two hundred hostages! 
 
 2. See footnote 2. page 88. 8. See footnote 8, page 76. 4. See footnote 4, page 76. 
 
 i 
 
94 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN ROOK. 
 
 7. Wo luid lonrnod liow groat u numbor tlioy had proininod for (me 
 nd) tliat war. 8. Thoy oompol tho tradorH by dociaro what' thoy 
 havo lioard or U>arnod alumt thoHo thiiigH. 1). Ho whows what' in 
 boing doiio in (Jaul. 10. Ilo couhl not diHcovor what' waH boing 
 (h)no in our camp. J I. Whon (^losar hvirnod whoro {litvmlly, in 
 wkat'^ pitur) tho ononiy'H forcoN had onoaiiiiiod, ho k»ft ton cohortH 
 m guanl Un- tho whips. J 2. Thoy aro unabh) to find out what 
 {likraUy, of what kind) is tho naturo of tho mountain. 
 
 Haoo faciM'v vult, 
 Haoo fiiccro n6161»ut« 
 
 Huoo fucoro iiuVliiiit, 
 
 \ 
 
 LESSON lA'TII. 
 
 he ir/.s/ic.s to do thin. 
 
 he did not irixh to do thi», or he tons nn- 
 
 mlliuij to do this, 
 they prefer to do tim, or they hud rather 
 
 do thi^. 
 
 ObHervatloii. TraiiHktion of volo, nolo and nialo, with tho 
 proHont intinitivo. For tht ct)njugation of those vorbs, seo Part 
 III., section 43.'' 
 
 EXERCISE LXIII. 
 
 I.--1. Qujls2 in i>artoH vultis proticisci ? 2. Quao^ vdlet ostendit. 
 3. Sorviro (piam prtgnaro nulhuit ? 4. Quod fortilnam temptjlro 
 nolobat, postoro dio in provinciani rovortl cdnstituit. 6. Mons, 
 quom Ijiibionum oocupilro vohiistis, ab hostibus tonOtur, G. 
 Kespondit hP vollo do ro pilblica cum oo agero. 7. ICos interficiot 
 «pu)d haoo faeoro wohuit. 8. llogfivit (piid vollont. 9. Cum 
 post torgunx hostem rolinquoro ndllot, obsidos .soscontos poposcit. 
 10. Praosidiinn (piani amicissimum habere vol(5bat. 11. Respon- 
 dorunt so mpiihim liostibus prddere noluisse. 12. Pacem noblscum 
 facere vult. 13. Certior factus est eos obaidCs dare nolle. 
 
 II.— 1. He wishes war to be carried on. 2. He did this be- 
 
 1. See footnote 4. page 7fi. 
 
 2. See footnote 3, page "5, 
 
 3. A^^rt from the peculiar principal j^arts, these verbs aro precisely like those of 
 tne thita conjugation, except ui the present cenne and in the imperfect subjunctive. 
 
PAUT I.— INTllODUcroUY LESSONS. 
 
 95 
 
 cnuHo ho did not wish that place to l)o unoccupied. 3. They 
 anHV/crod that they had botai unwilling t<. come to hini. 4. He 
 ankod why wo wore more willing to Huhinit than to fight. 5. The 
 HeivotianH, whom wo woro unwilling to loavo, had turned amdo 
 thou- hno of n.arch from the Arar. 0. Ho said that ho wished to 
 treat with hnn about thoHo things. 7. You wish to settle in their 
 territonoH. 8. Ah ho wished the hmmvm to ho finished, he set 
 out at once. ». They are so ularmed hy his arrival, that they 
 are unwilling to join batth>. JO. Wo had rather he siuin than 
 betray tho eagle to the enemy. IJ. He asked why they were 
 unwdhng to hold the phice. 12. They said that they were un- 
 wdhng to return. Hi. When he had sot out for Britain, because 
 ho wished to become ac(iuahited with those regions, a sudden war 
 aa'oso in (iuul. 
 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 Hostes l^ffatum, qui nilHsus 
 
 orat, rvtlnui'runt, 
 Ronuntlant hostOH lei^atuni, 
 
 qui niigaias esset, rctlnu- 
 
 lS80. 
 
 Legatum quom rotlnent lutcr- 
 flolont, 
 
 Oogndsctt leffatnin quom retl- 
 ncant cos intorfecturos 
 
 OHHO, 
 
 Exlstlinabat legatum quom re- 
 tlneront oos Interfocturos 
 
 C88e, 
 
 Gain commoti sunt quod Ger- 
 man! coplas coegerant, 
 
 Certlor fact us est Gallos com- 
 motuH esse «iuo<t Germanl 
 oopl&g coegissent, 
 
 the enemy have detained the am- 
 bamidor who hud been sent. 
 
 they bring back word that the 
 enemy have detained the am- 
 bassador who had been sent. 
 
 they unit jmt to death the ambas- 
 sador whom they are detain- 
 ing. 
 
 he learns that they will put to 
 death the ambassador whom 
 they are detaining. 
 
 he thought that they would put to 
 death the ambassador tvhom 
 they were detaining. 
 
 the Gaids were alarmed because 
 the Germans had collected 
 forces. 
 
 he was informed that the Gatda 
 were alarmed because the Ger- 
 mans had collected forces. .. 
 
 I 
 
96 
 
 PRIMAHY La'^'IN hook. 
 
 Obnprvntlnn.- Ilio difforonoo botwoon Kn^linli ntul TjAtin imago 
 in roliitivo or othor HubonUimte HentonceN whun put in indiruut 
 
 nnrmtion 
 
 t 
 
 KXKUOISK LXIV. 
 
 T. — t. ToH lor fiicfuR oHt iP^JltilH i\h oninib\iH niliionibuN, (jUfto 
 irftjiN KhOnuii) ini'oK>ron(, ad hO v» nlro. 2. llnHpondrt cum hoIA 
 (bviniil l»>giono, Wo <|(i)l non Uuhitol, sO prooliuiu oonniiiHHaruni. 
 Jl. NnntiilvOrunt ouimOn navt^M alHlctiTH onno (;uml nautno vim tom- 
 piwIAtin put! Hon poluiHNiMit. 4. KoNpondPrunt, impidHOM H huIh 
 pi'Iiu<ipi1)UN, quT dk'oront AiuUiAh hI» C.ioMHro in Horvitntom rudtlotiVi 
 CHHo, hO al» AtululH d«"fOoisHo. 5. IlonantiavOrunt (iuIIoh piH)olium 
 oo dip non oommisHnnw, quod umplifnOH copijlH, (pmo nondum con- 
 vPnismMit, I'XNpootjlront. i\. (Vrtiilrcuj C'lvoNarom fuoiunti VonotOH 
 nAvOs Imbi^ro plaviuias, (piilms in HntnnniHin njlvigilro Holmnt. ?• 
 Aniuuidvi'itit CaowM* SpquanoM nihil ortrum rPrum faooro <pul8 
 cPtorl faooivnt. 8. HoNpondit luisoriorom vt ^raviorom orho fortft- 
 nam Sptpianonnn ipiam'' ivliqiioruui quod hoIt (piorl non audPront. 
 0. Kx oaptTvlH cognovit ounu's Galli^H ad oppidmu (piod circitor 
 niillia )vvsN)nnn tpiTutpto abcsHot confrtgisHO. 10. Por oxploriltOrCH 
 c«>vupi>vit vVriovistxnn ouniCs copiils quits ooCgis.sot trftns RhCnum 
 trildaxisao. 
 
 TI. — 1. Thoso informod Ciwsjvr that tho Oormans who dwell 
 Hoi-oHs tho Khino arc in arms. M. Thoy think that thoy will 
 i\>ct>vor tho hoslagoti which they have given to Crassus. 8. Ho 
 / poixH'ivcd that ou' men wcro being thrown into great confusion, 
 because they were unable to keep their ranks. 4. On the s<imo 
 day CVsitr was informed by scouts that tho enemy had oncampod 
 at tho fv>ot of a minnitain, which wjis eight miles from his camp. 
 6. They pix>misod to do what'' ho had connuandod. (J. Ho waH 
 inf»)rnuHl that all tho Belgians wcix> conspiring, bocauso they did 
 not wish a Kmnan army to winter in Gaul. 7- Ho thought* that 
 thoy would not d«> what-' they wore pn>mi8ing. 8. He had loarnod 
 that the Germans woi'o awaiting tho cavalry which had been sent 
 
 V For tho iriuioring of the vnrious teiisos of the snbjunotive, see footnote 2, 
 p»g« 88. Notice that this svilH>rdin,ite oIau^5o in the subjunotive reguUrly depends on 
 uiother clause whose x-eib is in the inflnitive after a verb of saying, thinking, etc. 
 
 £. In tmnslatinj: this sentence siipv.ly the wot\i that. 
 
 S. S«« footnote 4, pag« 76. 4. See (ootnot* 3, psg* 8S. 
 
PAKT I.— INTRODUCTORY LEH80NK 97 
 
 ftonwH fclio niuno. I>. Thov nnHwornil fl.«f ♦». 1 ^ 
 
 i'i':ss()N J.XV. 
 
 Turn to tl.o co„j,.«ation of the vorh fer«, Part III., section 44. 
 ::ZrTr'''' "•-«""-^^^- - ^'- -^-^lon of ^,^0 and 
 
 itMC<JlU|HJini<lNj 
 
 EXERCISE LXV. 
 
 »ux,l,„,„ fort. 2. (J,.,„, ,u„llvf.rm,t „,1 U,gm» dMorunt 3 Zu 
 «-! l».llum „,t,„l,».s„. 5. F,(„„„„t„,„ „x ,^,.,L i„ „1 „ ^X^ 
 |H..mlI Roman, non ,K.,.f„rO„,„H. 1„. T,.n,lon> vnlneril.u" d/fZ 
 
 -t ut „av.1« nd G«I1„.„, „,fo,™„tur. l;!. Con,mi»H.l „P„diB „,^ 
 tmrun, n,^,„t„,„ h,«t5, ,„,.,„ ,„-„, ^,, Mu „m Tb 
 
 roI,„„TH d.ff„rti». 15. I„,p„dlt.» .,„»tib„« ,,™,.to „,. .irirlnt 
 "nma, n,wW w.biw Oruptiftwn, fiScSrunt. 
 
 u,"„,bl!,'.J'r *"° '"f""""*' """ "" "'•" """•'• ''O" »>•'"» ''ore 
 iissoniblmg to one place. 2. The Aedui uiid t),„t n, 
 
 lK.n« colleotoci 3. AUnned by J: Z^ H^^^^^^^ 
 
 forms is DrecLselv lik« vL™:,'7r!^^'t''f'V« «'»<». the tw;«;mAt•»^ b^^ t,h« nth-r 
 
 vanution,^ronn ofthe principal /mrta^ol'^omSXo^/^^^ ^'""^ •^""^'^ 
 
 2. See footnote 2, p^g^ 88, and footnote 3, page 61. 
 
M 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN ROOK. 
 
 or thoir aIHur. 6. On thin Hn«wer boiHjj brt)ught back to Camar, 
 ho A Hocoiul tiiiio boikIh HiiilMWMiulorH to him. 7. The ro|M»rt » 
 mrriiHl with incn«lihU» Hpoo«l Uy liiihiunuH. 8. Thoy fouiul out 
 what ho hiid mui mu\ rt-portud (it) to Ctvmv. J). Tho iimhiiHHiMh.rH 
 dcnio«! thnt tho GoniuwiH wt^ro inukiMg war on tlio hU'u.h of tho 
 lloiiiun p uplo. 10. All thoMo «lim»r from ono nnothor ' in InnKUHgo 
 »m'. IrtWH. II. IIooxpluinH how {Utnallij, in, irfint) thoMo ntitions 
 differ fn.iu ono nnothor.' 12. GnUm in HJuin aiuI Iuh homl hn.ught 
 iMiok to tho camp. i;{. Ho atUckod thorn whon tho HolvotiimH 
 could not bring aid to thoir frionds.' 14. Such whh tho Htrongth 
 of tho MhipH that thoy oanily withnto(Ml tho storm. 15. Ho 
 onloroil tho Iwiggago to bo collected to {literally, into) ono place, 
 and that (place) to bo f«)rtiHod. 
 
 ^.^c^ cv<u. ate ^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ' ^ 1 *•■,', • 
 
 (a) ProfecfuM c«t nt oppldniii he set out that (or in order that) 
 oppugnArct, he mi(iht attavk the ionn, or 
 
 he set out to attack the tvwn. 
 
 PortAHclnndlJubef, ni In- he orders the gates to he chmd, 
 
 Jurl» acolptAtur, that (or in order that) injury 
 
 may not he received, or led 
 injury be received. 
 
 Ob«erv»tlon.— The nuKnl used to oxpross purpoae. The differ- 
 tJiico botwoou ut and lu.. The various translations. Tho tenses 
 aaol in sentences of purpose.'' The pi>8ition of the clause of 
 purpose. 
 
 (6) h^ghtoB nilH^rnnt qui pA- they sent amf>assadors to seek 
 c«m poterent, fmwe (literally, who wore to 
 
 sook peace, or who should 
 seek peace). 
 
 1. From one anothttr, literally, amotig theimeltms. 
 
 2. See footnote 2, i>ajre 64. 
 
 -wiJEI*^**'"'**'"^ subiunotive Is used where EnKlish would use may, t.«., after the 
 pr»nan, <*"««« (^e fc-otnote 1, jw^ro 82) the iiniH.>r(ec>t where English would use 
 !;.&„^t:' »™f ••he /'^•"'^rtry teiusea. Notice also that in clauses of i>un>ose the 
 '2iy Vi!!l^!:L'S ""*_*".,*^ translated, aa is generally the case, by the En^lisll indicative 
 
 .^ t-..»-t-c i, page OS). 
 
>y 
 
 PART L—INTHODUCTORY H.SSONS. 99 
 
 Ob.erv«*I«„..-Tho UHo ftiul tmnHlation cf tho subjunctivo de- 
 noting purpoHo with thn nOntivt) pronoun. » 
 
 (r) Mlllf,.^. c«l,ortAt„. ««t «6 A« urued thv soldiers not to be 
 IK. r 1 11 r l,H r«. n 1 11 r, ,/,V„t,, ,,,,,;^ 
 
 Potoro c«tM.lt ut in CJ.iIllA /,. hv.jan to ask to he left in GaiU. 
 ruUtiquvretur, 
 
 Oi,«orv«tl«n.-Tho „h», mi.l tmnslHtion of tho Huhjunctivo with 
 nt or ntk nftur verl.H of ru<iuc8ting, urging, otc.» 
 
 EXERCISE LX VI. ^ ^ -^ JlMjunX>. 
 
 I.-l. VmllH roportTs, copiils trflnsdncero con.UI sunt tit oppidum 
 expngnaront et ngroH popuhXruntur. 2. CohortcH longiore itinoro 
 eircunuluct^o sunt nC ex hostiuni cHHtrls couHpicI poHH-nt W 
 Cicerono.n hortatur ut prlntinuin virtntom retinent. 4. TantHo 
 tonipoNt^Xti^H consocnt^w, sunt ut nostrl opuH perfiooro non possent. 
 r>. Loga I H.1 ou,n n.isNl Hunt cp,I obHidds hO (lutnroH p..llicerentur. 
 «. buo8- Ultra cHstra continot nC ea rOs ad hoHtes perferri posHit. 
 7. Cftesar cmin.uni ex conspoctfl roniovit e<pioH ut Hpein fugae 
 t.)l'oret. 8. LegatI ad CaoHarem venerunfc <p,l pacom poterenU 
 .». L(piitCH nionot ut quani latiHHiniC porvaguntur. 10 Ita per- 
 torritl Hunt ut legatl «bitim ad CaeHarem niitterentur. 11. Phalan- 
 goni facienius ut coloritor porrunipere posHlniuH. 12. Nilntios 
 praeniittit ,pii BoioH do huo adventfl docoant, hor^entunme ut 
 hoHtiuni nnpotum sustineant. 13. Ca nar cuui dualms legionibus 
 et niagno nunioro e.piitatns in Britanniam proficiscitur, nS ox his 
 nfttionibuB auxilia in Galliam niittantur. 
 
 « 
 
 II.-l. He left two legions in the camp that the enemy might 
 not be able to nurround our men. 2 The cavalry fought most 
 biavely to wipe out the disgrace of the flight. 3. Tho Holvetians 
 had left their homos to make war on tho whole of Gaul 4 Ho 
 urges the Nervii not to lose the opportunity. 5. Ambassadors 
 were sent to ask aid, fi. They dec ed to return home that they 
 
 1. This In Oaeaar is chiefly used after verbs of sending 
 
 coiL'd ASS^„riil^*il_"i^. J" I^«" •^'t?' veu ,,nK to uw. ask. 
 
 ---^-.. ,„ ^^ •-'■ i-^'=«auc, urifciicrajiy toexprebs i)uriw8e, 
 
 9. Sw footnote 2, paje 64. »^ 1 r 
 
100 
 
 PUIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 might carry on tho wnr in thuir «)wn territ«rio«. 7. Ho in-gwl him 
 fc<» romain in hiH lilhtKinno. H. Tli«y hhU (^u^wr {litemlly, fnm 
 Cnmir) to oomo to (luun. J. Such h Ht<.rm unwo that tho w.»rk 
 ccmhl nut ho tiniHhu.l. Jf,. Ho UmI tho nut of tho forcen iicnwH 
 that lio mi^'.ht purHno tho HoIvotiunH. 11. He <lotonnino«l ti. Icml 
 tho army ncroHH in order to pnniHh tho (JcriuuiiH. 12. Tl-at ho 
 nmy not l>o compoUod to Hpoml tho Nimmior in GhuI, ho ordorM' 
 him tt) ctv'iio to him with two hundrod hoHtngos. 
 
 LESSON !,XV1I. 
 
 Turn to tljo conjugHtion of tho vorliH o« und Ho, [*art III., 
 HOctionH 45 and 40. 
 
 OhNvrvutlon. Tlio irroguhiritioH in flio inflectioiiH of cd and tlo 
 and their conipoiindi-i." 
 
 ' EXKRCISK LXVII. ^t Hi , 
 
 !•— 1- TrfmNount Rhcniun nflvilms ratilmsquo. 2. ExpldratorPs 
 iilMHit (pud Horot cclgnoscoro. ,'J. Vam nationoH adiro volohat. 4. 
 IgnCH tiorr jubot ut NigniHcatid advoutils CaonariH fiat. 5. Quid 
 tiorl volit docot. <>. Ad earn partem i)orvonit <piao -dndum Hnmon 
 transiorat. 7. l|>sT transiro flnnum nCm dubitavorant. 8. Pontem 
 tiorl jilHsit ut miudro cum pcrlculd Hamon trunslrot. 9. HIh 
 robus flebaf^ ut minus facile flnitimls bolhuu Inferro poHsent. 
 10. Eodom itinere, (pid hostes ierant, ad ods contondit. 11. Iter 
 per Alpes patefierl volobat. 12. Cai)tTvos intertici jilssit. 13. 
 Rhodanus vadLs tnluHitur. 14. Hoc idem reliipns tW diebu8. 16.* 
 Locum duplici fossa nulnlvit nS^iuipotus ab hostibus ti en posset. 
 K;. Rogavit num liost^s pahldom tiTinsIront. 17. Milites coliortTi- 
 tus ut fortiter jnlgniirent, (piid tierl volit C lit. 18. Cum 
 sola deciuul logidno ibo. 
 
 1 
 
 BceUSteTSeir """ '"""''*'*^ '" *^'^ '"'"'' "''""^ •"'^•■'■'•" V Meo for order; 
 
 «.hn; ^rf'."r *'"'*.?• T';'"'' """^y irrosmlftr. resembles verbs of the fourth oo.-„iiiiration 
 while no la exactly like a verb of the fourth oonjujfatio... except in t ho %r ru< 
 
PART I.— INTRODUCTOUV LKSSO.VS. IQl 
 
 n.~l. He orrlerH a sally to be made. 2. That rive> the 
 He lyutjauH wore <„.«!„«. 'A. H., a.clnn. that he will go wTth 7e 
 tontU U,g.on Hlono. 4. If. did not winh that colZyl be 
 
 un..ccnp,e<l, K.t the (iennans hI Id croHs i„t<> the HoLuans 
 
 tern <.ne. 5. Thoy will not allow .he HolvotianH to g ot ^h 
 he.r ternt..rn . «. In onler that an attack n.ight bo n.a le o 
 1 e encn.y ..o... all si.loH at <,no tin., he Hont Ubitnus in v u 
 
 ^S:u''T •;"'• "'. "" '''""'y- '■ "" --^--l tlZ 
 »»uck. 8. ilo declams th.it ho knows what in being done » The 
 nver can be crossed by a ford. 10. Ue Hhow.l wha he wisl!d 
 <^^ru.il>teraUytol.Uon.). H. He .us inforn.ed tha rot, 
 
 nXL r ^^f'''"'''' »r" i"^'>rnied about hi., arrival. 
 
 iver t V " ' :V ''"'' *"'"• ''' ^'"^« — i"« the 
 river they aro Hurrounded by our cavalrv IT. Hn fi. w \i ! 
 thiH c<.,dd bo done. 1« AlHmt tiZ.ih "'^^,^'"*"K'^t tliat 
 
 crossed Hw. PI • i^ m " thouf«ind GernianH have 
 
 crossed the Rhuie. 17. The enemy will not cross the river 
 IH. He iH nifonne,! that the Gennans who aro croaning ^nto Gaui 
 have been invited by the Sequaui. ^ 
 
 LESSON LXVIII. 
 
 Oppu^nandl cuuhh' eonvenl- they come together M th. j„,rpose 
 n, . ' *^-^ (tttacking, or to attack 
 
 D.,ulo»uU. .cultate,., .,aT.„„.. ,he,j hure an .^rtuuity of fy/ht. 
 
 ParHt«« Hd proflclscend«.„. ready for setting out, or ready to 
 
 .set out. 
 Naven InatlloH erant ad navl- the ships were meless for sailiny. 
 guuduni, -^ 
 
 Pa?t'rrr"7'~?.rl!''' ,,a translation of the gerund (see 
 
102 
 
 PKIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 be used to express purpose ?i How does the gerund differ from 
 ' the gerundive in its forms 2 
 
 EXERCISE LXVIII. ^ U. J^^ 
 
 I.— 1. Reliquas naves paratas ad navigandum invenit. 2. Omni 
 spe impetrandi adempta, principes Galliae sollicitare coepit. 3. 
 Cognoverat equitatum praedandi' causa trans Rhenum missum 
 esse. 4. Cae lar loquendi^ finem facit. 5. Uloi8cendi2 Romanes 
 occasionem dimittere nolebant. 6. Hunc ad egrediendum^ nequa- 
 quam idoneum locum arbitratur. 7. Cum fInem oppugnandi 
 nox fecisset, legati de pace ad eum venerunt. 8. Ea, quae ad 
 oppugnandum usui erant, comparare coepit. 9. Equites frumen- 
 tandi^ causa praemittendi erant. 10. Nostrl, depositis armis, in 
 muniendo occupati sunt. ,j. ^;^,<^. , , ...^ c.,..l '' . 
 
 V II.— 1. They saw that our men were advancing into unfavorable 
 ground in order to fight. 2. This was the reason for (literally, of) 
 crossing the Rhine. 3. He had got suitable weather for sailing. 
 4. Time for (literally, of) hurling their javelins at the enemy is not 
 given. 5. When they saw that our men had crossed the river, 
 they left the camp in order to pillage. 6. They had made our men 
 more eager for Sghting. 7. Suddenly making a sally, they leave 
 the enemy no opportunity of learning what was being done. 8. 
 They had collected large forces for an attack (literally, for attack- 
 ing). 9. They made an end of pursuing. 10. They made an 
 attack so suddenly, that time for (literally, of) taking up arms 
 was not given. 
 
 » LESSON LXIX. 
 
 Praesldium pontls tuendl cau- 
 sa ponitt 
 
 he stations a garrison for the p^ir- 
 pose of protecting the bridge, 
 or to protect the bridge (liter- 
 ally, for the sake of the 
 bridge to be defended). 
 
 1. Caesar uses ad and the gerund to express with regard to rather than for the 
 
 2. For the gerund of deponent verbs, see Part III., section 68. c. 
 
PART I.—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
 
 103 
 
 ffer from 
 
 2. Omni 
 
 •epit. 3. 
 
 missum 
 
 Romanes 
 
 i^ nequa- 
 
 Dtignandi 
 
 quae ad 
 
 frumen- 
 
 irmis, in 
 
 'avorable 
 mlly, of) 
 [• sailing, 
 tiy is not 
 le river, 
 our men 
 ey leave 
 one. 8. 
 r attack- 
 nade an 
 ip arms 
 
 the p^tr- 
 
 i bridge, 
 
 fe (liter- 
 
 of the 
 
 ^ 
 
 an for the 
 
 iiifflcaltas fadendl pontls. 
 
 the difficulty of building a bridge 
 
 (literally, of, or us regards, ^ 
 
 the bridge which is to be 
 
 built). 
 
 Legratos mlserunt ad paoem they sent ambassadfyrs to seek peace 
 
 '*^*^"*'""»' (literally, for the peace which 
 
 was to be sought). 
 In petenda pace haeo dl- in asking peace, they spoke thus. 
 xernnt» 
 
 Observatlon.-The uge of the gerundive instead of the gerund 
 with an object.2 How may purpose be expressed by the gerundive 
 construction? How is this gerundive construction to be distin- 
 guished from the use of the gerundive ^iven in Lesson XL.? 
 
 EXERCISE LXIX. ^/- ^-c^ 
 
 -niw o I T"^^'' ^'^^*^' ^^ """^ P^«'« P^t^^^dae causa 
 ii^fnr;. . "': f'''' '^"' ^^ multitudinem jumentorum 
 transportandam. 3. In agrls vastendis occupati sunt. 4 Caesa^ 
 navium parandarum causa moratur. 5. Galll in consiliis capiendls 
 mobiles sunt 6 Spe expugnandi oppidi adductus, majores copi 
 oogere coepit. 7. Reditionis spe sublata,3 par^tiores ad omnt 
 subeunda erunt. 8. Haec faciunt reciperandLm suorum cau^ 
 10 M- ''*^ Litayiccum ad sollicitandos Aeduos prof.ctum esse. 
 cLSr '-''' "^^^^^"'^ --' ^" ^^^^-^-^ ^-sitarum 
 
 9 7'7^' ^^.^l """f, ^^^^"^^^'""S from all sides to defend the Remi. 
 2 Influenced by all these things, he set out for the province to ask 
 a^d. , . Orgetonx is chosen to carry out these arrangements. 4 
 
 felnT, I" "^""fJ"" ^^''"'^^^' "-^^ J^^^^S ^^<^*^«- 5- Caesar had 
 nil . r ' '"'"'^- ^' '^^'y P^«"^^««d ^ sufficiently lai^e 
 
 Zar f ^l ""' *' '""'P^^' '^' ''^''^'' 7- They hasLl 
 Caesar for the purpose of lending aid. 8. He sends a lieutenant in 
 
 ratJer'ttay'j/' '' °"'" *° ""' ''""^'''^ ^y '''regards (or an equivalent expre«ion). 
 
 2. See more fnllv Pai^ ttt ^^^h -ini i. ^ . 
 
 preferred to the use oTthVgerund wi^ a^J obJeTin^re"SXe™°"°" '' "^^^'^ 
 o. hublata is from toMo. 
 
 I 
 

 104 
 
 PllIMAUY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 « 
 
 advance to HHCortftin these (things). 9. He answered that the 
 seventh legion had hoen sent to seek Hupi)lio.s. 10. Ciosar runs 
 down to eucouiiigu the soldiers. 
 
 LliSSON I, XX. 
 
 PoiitemrewlntllJunMt m^quU he onhrvd the bridge to be cut 
 flanion translret, ,/„„•,., Ud any one shovld 
 
 vnm the nrer, «)r that no one 
 miijht croHs the river. 
 AIlquAn ox MAvl effrodloutOn therj saw some Icainng the ship. 
 coimpex^ruiit, 
 
 QuUquo 111 coiiBpootu Cacmartn eoch umjightimjin drsar's sight. 
 piiffiinlmt, 
 
 Comprchondnnt utriimquc, they seke each (or both). 
 
 N«qu«turpl»f8.mlcquamhttb^. nor is anything comidered vwre 
 
 *"**♦ disgrace/id. 
 
 QuidniM ocnturlo nd cum nc- a eertain centurim mm up to 
 
 ««*•»•**• him. 
 
 Ob«t.rv«t!on.-tTse and transhition of q„!«. aUqul». q«mquo, 
 utcrquo. quiHquiuii. quMnm. For the declension of the.se pro- 
 nouns, see Part III., section 26. Which of the two words for any 
 IS used after ne ? Which of the two woi-ds for coo/t implies each 
 of two f 
 
 EXERCISE LXX. 
 
 T.-l. PrlncipPs cajusquo cTvitAtis ad sP vocat. 2. Proximo diS 
 Caesar ex custrTs vh,rrs<,uo oopifus dilxit. 3. Aliquem de motfl 
 Crallorum nilntnuu so accoptftms oxistimahant. 4. Idoneum ,.uen- 
 dam honnnem dPlegit ex ils onos sCcum hahelwit. 5. Cuiu Ilo- 
 manls 86 helium gestilms dlxt^runt, neque cfljusquain' imperio 
 obtcmperattlros. 6. Mflitos ex oppido exlre jQ.ssit ne ,,uam' i,.- 
 Jilnam aecii»erent. 7. Ab Ariovisto postulSvit ne quos Rhenum 
 
 w.nLS^.'' *"'**"«"'^ literally, and mf (or uor) aiw ouc niav 
 (i» •irreement with a noun) thM fid: "" "^ "■' """" "^ "="«'^"^ "^ 
 
 often he well 
 thai iio i»ie, or 
 
PART I.— INTRODUCTOllY LESSONS. IQfi 
 
 Quantom quiN,|uo nu.ltitndinem ,uV ill hdlnn, r n- T 
 
 novomiif in i?« *•- "'" , " '" '>«»um pollicifcuH osaot coir- 
 
 2 Hn~!-l ^''^''",* "^ ^''"''"'"■'' '^^'* '^ ^^««« ««»»« to him by night 
 
 «. S,>mo opportunity will b„ «ivo„ „f „.«!„« tho riv™ 7 TI eJ 
 hoptH thHt thoro will 1,0 „„„,e opportunity of fig|,ti„„ o Jl 
 w'Tfl ","";' "' ''""« ""' '"'" """"-''' O— Into Gaul 
 
 Translate (!(/ by /or. 
 
 2. See footnote 1, pa^e 104. 
 
100 
 
 IMIIMAIIY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 SUPPLF.Mr:NTAKY ICXHRCISES. 
 
 I. 
 
 {Thin f.ri»tvf«f mri|/ Ih> iuhvtiutr,f ,f^ff,>r A^'wnii XXffr.) 
 
 All initiniit Hilvilrum Viwhm' porvOnil. oi. oumtm mnuti-o iMHllttiit,. 
 UAmAnI in o|»on* «liHp»>iHi humI. SuhiJo v\ •tnntiliUN |MiriiluiM 
 Hilviio hoMOH Ov.ilrtvonmt ot in mllitOM jin|ii>(uni fOcOnml. IMinflia 
 I'oloiUor M'\m oOpOninl hoHtOHipio in MilvtlM icpnlonint ot, innltnH 
 in««>r»\V(^n>n(. OiuhOh lioHtiutii hkiI a, MomrtnlH vaHliUI Hunt, 
 vti't.pio iiu'OnNl. Civmiv oMiivi'uui iinlaxit ot in fUiiLiuilH crvilA- 
 lilniH in hlboiniN collocavit . 
 
 n. 
 
 (77»M i>.mru^ ♦m?}/ />r VH^fx/Mm/ f^f'/.-j Umu\ WWII.) 
 
 X\\Hm\\\'uw inJiM'ior iwu'h ixh iTs> inrolilnr. qul'^ natl' Hunt, in 
 TusulA, lufuitinu'v \m\vh al> ils, i|uT pniotliio ohuhA, ok lMi^'\(\ trftns- 
 iOrunt* o( ihi ptMiuAnsOrunt fvtipjo amoN ooloro foopOrunt.. Iloini- 
 ninn oM Tnfnwt.-i innl(itn»lo. orOhoniniaipu''^ lU'dificiu. litioa" Nunfc 
 hMupoiAt iom tpiant • in (JuPisl. Tnsnln nAI n«rt " ost I ritpiol m. oiIjuh" 
 nisan latns o,st oonlvA, iJalli.un. Mx his'" oninilxiN lon^iT Hunt 
 hamAnisHiuiT »pn" l^vntinuj imvlnnt. InltMion-H fnlnionlii nrm 
 vsonini, No«l Inoto'i' ct oarno vTy\n»<, pi'llil»UN<pu> 8unt. voHtm.'-' 
 (>u>nOH NO'* Hritann\ vi(n-» Tnlioiuuf. <pioa'%'aonihMnn omrit colO- 
 !vn». at«pio h,v'"' hom,lir>n\s sunt in pHj^nrt. fnA.'' ox parte OHt 
 Hilvornia. tninor «pianr HrifHtnna. ot ooniphUv.s nnnon^s Huhjoetno 
 sunt insulao. Hi\>vion\s sunt «pjan»' in ottntinonll nootOH. 
 
 -~{AiiopU\i from Lhrnr, B. (»\, l\, 12-IJ^.) 
 
 \. - r»«w. ';. - Wh^\ '^ .VfiM" sunt Art»y. Wen twrn. 4. Yrxmx tmti»fio B 
 
 
PAUT L— INTftOnUCTOftY LESSONS. 107 
 
 TIT. 
 
 (77iM exercm may he inirvdmeU after letwn XXXIX,) 
 
 OftllT, ipiT nillKnfts vA\A([n po^li^/l^,fl« oqiiitftlnHquo ociPKomni et 
 I.Hl.innuin ouin nna IokjOuo, .|n»o in finilmH AiMli„in,in hiomftvomfc, 
 a.lniM< purftlMinl, JH,n hI. pu^ ,„j||ja puHMmmi .piTn<|(MHni »ilK,miifc 
 ouiii" lulvMiitum dnaniir. IPKinnimi, .pint, a (Whuio iimmmho omni, 
 «M-.KiinNonnt. (iHHtm pommf, h, Htixilin (JornuT.ionim nxHpcMjfftro 
 (miiHtitmmt. LHhini.uH, .piT l,n«M.im on«nnvomf, rntiMilim,,, p,,io- 
 Hulnmi H«x o..lioriiimi iiiipo.lTniMiiliH^ rnliii.piit. ahpui (miiii vTKinM 
 <|iiatiu<.f cnhnHilHiM ot. iIuoImim inJttihnM o.piitnin o.mtra lioNtOn 
 pi<vp<lif,, nt, vhvMor niiilu prtRHdN a Lu-r, jn ,p,r. (lalli ,uinMr..h)mii^,, 
 mMiTH* idniuMiin l<KMini .KMiwit, Hnduoiiii uuIiortOH in imuU ohho» 
 jClHsit, uutu I'uljipmo odHim cnimnniihint,. 
 
 —U'Japkdfrom CWir, /y. (/., F/., 7, anc/ f., p,) 
 
 IV. 
 
 (TAw f.rcrciW mrt!/ he intrnduced afkr Lvmm XLVT.) 
 
 nm oireitor diOT .piarta (miii. prTtnlH navil.HH nritanniani attigifc 
 ftfr^pio il)i in onniilnm (u.llihuH ,»xp<.HitaH l...Hl,iun, oOpiaH unnafcaH 
 conHpoxii. Kml," ob han^ cauNaH Hunmm .lidioultaH, .p,„(l navf.H 
 propl-or nulgnitn.linoiu uiNi" in alio conHtitnl non p.,tt,mnfc 
 tnlltiilMiH ,i,ikmi,» n.agno of, gravl (»noru annOnnu oppn-HHTN, Cmlmr^ 
 in tluctihuN NorvHudl orant, ; h„HiOH vm-o'" uh lafcoro aporto Loin 
 tMM.j.o.Olmnfc. NoHtrl, Kitmil ut.pio in aridr, ormHt,it-«runf; in lioHtrs 
 iinpotuni fOcP^unt, attp.o ooh in fuga.n <UMlr,nnit." II.mtoH 
 proolio'-^ Hnporatl, Hijnul at.pio hO ux fuga rfcOpOiunl, Htatin. ad 
 taoNaroni lOgatuH tlo [.aco nilHorunt,. 
 
 —{Adapted from Cmar, B. G., IV., '^3-27,) 
 
 I. - 'A) attack. 2. 
 
 Him. 
 
 8. .ViVii . 
 
 ro r^iiuiin nmier arms. (I. 
 
 .tf.)»wiw. 11. ~i'«(, aM<Urttn8lfttoi»by(«. la. -Tn ftS.' 
 
^^^ rillMAUV I.ATIN HOOK. ^ 
 
 V. 
 
 KtH nMniH jfORiiN, liuhionn ill cmfiuonM ouni hiluiH lomTmilum 
 ''t o,|uihnn niitlilMiH ,lu,->hnH ivIioJO. ipHp oiiin ,|uHu|uo loKi'^nilMU. 
 "t on.l»Mu nunuM-^^ c.|uiiuin, <|m>in in cuXinoiUT roU,|,u.m(. h(\\xh 
 tHvAHa lulvOH Holvit. OnmOH iuIvOh lul nHlnmnHu. mvOHHOri.nt, 
 euvUiM' HUMViliom, t»oipu» in mo Iooo hoHlJH (>h( vIhuh. h,mI ut ' puHloa 
 r.-M'HAi' t»x ott|.(T\iH .'.iKunvit. niA^nao o.ipiao. ,p«.io oonvrnvmnl, 
 MUilfiin^lino tulvitMu poHonilrto il litoro .liHi<f^HNomn( ho nO in''' 
 mipoiiaia loort nl><li,lor.n»(. (Vhuv. oxpoNilo oxoivitn «fc loe.1 mw^ 
 MTn" iUAnoo oaptA, oohoitihuN .loooni mP tn.uv roliottH ,>t o.piilihuH 
 frivoontlH, toHiA vi«ilisi jul hoNtOH oonhMulil. Milli.i paHHtmm oir- 
 citcr diUHlooin) ptvgivHHnH. hoN(i\in\ oopi»iH oOnspioatuM oHfc. 
 
 —{Adi^pUd from L\m\\\ II (»\, P., N, .N.) 
 
 \l. 
 
 :? * 
 
 Oacvsav AvarioT^ ootuplnn-^s ,li»\s oonunovr.tUH. Nununan\»pio ilu 
 i^^p^an^ tVrtn»ontT ot ivli,p»T o.MunuvKnH nanotus. oxi>iri1»uu ox" 
 laUoiv at,p»o inopiA ivfioit. .Iain pi\>po hioujo oonfoom, lOgAtt avi 
 imm Aoduoninx voniun«, ,piT haoo I^hmKI .sunt : duo n\agish!itmn 
 ginw ot iitrunupio" oAruia n,^ Irgihus onvltuni onno diooro; 
 honun osso altonun ^^>nviotoliNT^onu Horonttin ot illuslroin adu 
 U\soontinn. altonuu (\>tuni. atttT.pnssinjjl fannli;\ natuni,« at,pic 
 «ps\nn htmunon\ sufttjuao potonllao ot lUilgnao oognAtioniN; olvit^l 
 tomiNNso onnuMU in annTs; ,lrvTsuni" soi\Atuni. drvTsinn popuhun. 
 I'aosar. ot^sl A WA\(S aisoi^ioiv artriniontovsuni osso oxistitujlhat. 
 Umon ijvso in AihIiu\s pivlioisoT stAtuit, sonatujuipjo omnoiu ad 
 »^ (^vtxjavit. 
 
 '■ fl'**" '^ ~ '**■ '"*' Ti-ansUtp i\Mirc h\ f,M\ ♦. ^ K« or rtf. R. r^ At 4mW- 
 .'vw. « •Irtrt-orimrvrallj'i.Avw. 7. - ftWft (</»<>«« mii of ih^ won! nixl <l,>i»« 
 
PAIIT I.-^^lNTIlODUfTOttY LKSSONS. IQD 
 
 VII. 
 
 {Tfm ,ocnou, may h, inlroduvcd nftcr Umn LXII.) 
 
 Kill liHl,o,otif,. lfn,,„o vu,„UT« ml hO un.li.pu, n,orcaf.onh„H cm 
 
 OMT vont... „oIv.^. (^„„ ,.n,vO. Hppn,pln,pmn,nf, MnUnni J! .! 
 
 HOC e Hoonl.^ ut ohh.^ Innu plena, ut* nonnnllHo navOn, huoc -^ 
 
 —{Adapted from Cmar, B. (/., /r., ;^0.;?i/.) 
 
 VIIT. 
 
 (nw excn^i^ may be introduced afkr Umm LXIX.) 
 
 Caosnr, hi. rOhus ml.ni.ustratls, ad colu.rfun.loH .nllitOs d.lcu. 
 uunt, ot ,ul K.K,o,u>,u dociniani .Irvr'uit. MllihlH cohortatUH ut 
 W p,-M ,„,. virtaMs .no.nonH.n ..inOren, h..,iun.,„o in,!::,: 
 
 alh.a.M parhMu; ,fo,n cohortandT onusa pn.f.oh.s est. TcMnporm 
 <'U.Ufu.t,ox,K„,hl^ l.ostiuu..p.o t,un panUns ad dlnucundun. ani- 
 nuKs, „f, ot,,a,n ad galoas indn.mdas UnnpuN dofuerit.H guao" prin.a 
 <nns,luo'<'.srgna oonspcxif, ad"haoc cunstitit, '"^ n6 in quaorondls 
 .sul8,''VpfignandI« to.npus .Unuttorot. quaorondls 
 
 —{Adaptid from dvmr, li. 0., 11., 21.) 
 
 thai. t.^^A.i.'^VTL?n'l'rJ.'^'-. *!„Tran8laU. M„. ahlativc, by wifh. 4. ^.Vo 
 translate by i^^v^' V.x^m\'iH^t u'Z^^^'T^'' u^^^^ '" ■.f'*'''.- *^- *•'•""'" '''•««m,- 
 
no 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 REVIEW EXERCISES ON THE 
 ACCIDENCE.* 
 
 I. Vedine thcfMmmuj comhinations of,, noun vnth an adjective in 
 
 lujreement : 
 
 Duplox foHHJi, commnno coiiHilium, roluiua oohors, ftlia roH, rogia 
 flnituim, <.inniH purs, loiigiim itor, incrudibiliH virtus (».),» miljor 
 IMirn, nmnuH dextm, toU Hcies (.s.), onmiH unnus, Belgao hoII (;>.)," 
 injarirt votuH, illk imvis, pngii.i suporior, navis longa, exorcitu's 
 uoHtor, vir fortis, ros fauiiliaris, idonouH locis, omniH cdpia, utra 
 parH, agor forax, locus suporior, roli.iul Bolgao (/>.), Hcies triplex 
 (.s.), vofcus navis, tdta prdvincia, onmo genus, prooliuni equestro, 
 continens impetus, prlnnis dnl*), coniplflros anni (/>.), caput solum,' 
 homo nd1)ili.< omnia arma (/».), nullus ager, omnis equitatus (s.), 
 uiu-m proeliuni, castra majora (/>.), nullus comnnlnis magistratus] 
 prinunu agmen, altera pars, equitatus noster (.-*.), omnis drdd, silva 
 continens, i)roxima nox, par bellum, tdta civitftH, castra navtllia 
 (p.), latuH apertum, onnu) tempus, altius vallum, res opportuna 
 comnnlno perlculum, silva densior, alia pars, humilior navis,' 
 eques Kdmanus, reliip.a legid, iinuni latus, nfllluH hostia, legid- 
 nanus miles, slguum militare, connnanis salils («.), locus decllvis, 
 comnulne perlculum, major cdpia, aliud tempus, pedestre iter,' 
 nigens magnitudo {s.), continui comphlres dies (p.), magnum iter,' 
 omnis spes («.), alius dies, cdpiao pedestres (p.), superior dies,' 
 miles integer ac recens, summa spes (s.). 
 
 II. Gii'e the ,>ther degrees of comimriH,m of the follounng ,idjectiv€s, 
 in the same o(we, (jender ,md number as ih? fonn ,jiven : 
 
 Facillimd, ftcrem, altissiniae, brevidrum, majdribus, optimarum, 
 
 ly can, further exainpies of the 
 
 •.. iiicBc r;^cnist?s lire inr«nnen to be siiffiresti 
 examples pven to ilh.strate many of the most vahiable kUids of drilT arrTewln 
 number, the teacher beinjf left to add, as he eivsi" " 
 
 same nature. 
 
 „i^!:.,T-L'^.*,*i?!!/lt."^/''>'"«'^" tl^afc the combined phrase is to be declined 
 .-.!.^...«. ^., I'litrRi umj , 113 tiiy case may ^)e, 
 
 in th(> 
 
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. HI 
 
 fortiH, crCbrlH, vetorJH, multoH, dltissiniT, humiliorl, prima, difflcilia 
 dfinHiH8imfl, Huporioro, gmviuni, proximu.n, colorrimaH, uiagime' 
 forociHHunam, i)otont«H, i)l0no, untlfiuain, parvuni. 
 
 III. Change the follmmruj adjectives to agree imth the mmm in 
 
 jMrentheaes ; 
 
 OiniiiH (nlrum), co.nplnroH (annf.ru.n), paucus (<IiGl>UH), mMnxm 
 (copu-w) phlH (Icoa), ingons (nulguitadino), ...nnis (ndbilitatiH) 
 oninw (annoH), iu.vuh (reruni), magnuH (auctoriUtiH), plariniuH 
 v.hmMUo (navoH), noster (man), reli<p,uH (ordinos), maxinius (nml- 
 iitndinl), flmtimuH (partem), inlquior (locum), dexter (cornfl) 
 alter (ca«tra), summus (duce), omnis (hibernls), singulariH (studio). 
 
 TV. Oim the Latin numerals for the folloimng numbers, in agree- 
 ment with the nouns in jmrentlieses : 
 
 90 f 'r ^-'f ^"LT ^"*^«"^^^»")' 2 (legionibuH), 3rd (die), 3 (dierum), 
 
 20 (vIcoH), lOCK) (ecjuites), 1000 (e«iuitibu8), 1500 (Belgas), 1 (proe- 
 
 16), 1 (cohortiH), 10th (legionem), 10 (legionum), 1st (acie), 12 
 
 annus), 1st (impetfl), 4th (nocte), 3 (millia), 2 (millibus), 13th 
 
 (legio), 4th (diem), 1892nd (anno). 
 
 V. Decline the folloxmmj combinations of a pronoun and mnm in 
 
 agreement : 
 
 Nostra castra, utrum-pie latus, ilia pars, hoc proelium, utraque 
 castra, quidam miles, hie l(,cu8, is coUis, hoc ipsum flumen, (luod- 
 que tempus (.s.), idem illud consilium, qui dies, qua legio, meus 
 tliius, haec civitas, eadem res. 
 
 VI. Write tlwse forms o/ hie, is, suun, ille, qui, idem, which vnll 
 
 agree with the following words : 
 
 Legione, consilium, loca, locum, rem, militum, cohorti, diebus 
 annos, die. ' 
 
 VII. Give the other degrees of comparison of the follmmng adverbs: 
 
 Audacins, saepissime. multnm. j»nnus ma— "i-^- f ^-^ - • 
 
 melius, mature, facile, liberrimg, diu, satji?, 
 
\ 
 
 112 
 
 PHIMAIIY r.ATIN HOOK. 
 
 Vin. Oin'univoiiiO, x^nnnnui; colNu-o, sMinn; <lo, ,fivp ; intor- 
 
 lin(|un, /»(iir; vouid, «»»m«'; vi<li>r», m-. 
 
 C«lnor, M//0.././; ox|H>rior, <,•}/; lM.lli.u...r, ;m»w.V; i,r.,tlciHCor, 
 art init ; itto^n'dior, itilvawr. 
 
 !. HViVf i*h/ //),- primifHil fHuts of Ihtsr irrh, 
 
 2. V,„l,'r ,„,./, „/ //„. pnnrifuil fHuts (a) r*' mittrt, (/,) „/ nltior, 
 
 tniVf- ,..,/ //«. „amrM of ihv moinln if mi tninvH wliirhan' formM 
 from it. 
 
 3. iVriim- ond i/ri7. m.7 im, /m// thr f.nxvs of tho indintthr ir/,o,f 
 
 ^/ic.s/ iH'ison ni)i(ftiitu- uii'ons: 
 I Hlmll Hoiui, I huvo giv..n. I am cniuiiiK, I luid IrH, 1 hI.h1» 
 rnlor, 1 roooivu, 1 whh coming, I Hhull l.avo rsoon, I Kt^it,i,m, 
 
 1 NJIW. 
 
 I WHH ..nlor«<l, T nI.hII 1u> sont, 1 havo Iuhmi loft,, 1 hhM t,o bu 
 
 Hont, I am onlorod, I luul luum onh^riMl. 
 I lm<i |»M.mis,Ml, I n1u.II utt.Miipt,, I a.lvuiuHs 1 .uIvhiuhuI, I 
 
 Hh.'iU not out, I havo triod. 
 
 4. Tt^ithslatr thrfolhnHtKj forms: 
 
 Cii-cumvoutl orunt, intcrtidt. Hooipiotur, v.^nonlmuH, dalmnt, 
 
 mittoriN, vidOiiM, oollooantur, JiInsho ostiN, niliii<|iuir. 
 PollioOlMiiitur, pn.grodimur, conatuH owi, oxi.oriomiiiT, pro 
 ticiseifcur. 
 
 f). Tnindatv ihf foUowimj fovmx : 
 
 N^'o Nluill loHvo, thoy will .station, lu^ had sont, (hoy com^ 
 
 thoy wore killed, you nIihII h.ivu soon, wo wiuo giving, it 
 
 h.-is boon rocoivod, you aro hoing wiuToundod, I shall onU,r. 
 
 Wo sh.'.n attompt, ho triod, sho had j.romisod, I was sotting 
 
 ont, thoy advMico. 
 
 6. Tmuslnfi'thcfollowiutj: 
 
 Cum vldissot, no intoifieoromur, cum collocftrent, nfc vonlrot, 
 no aooipintur, ,p.od rollipiorit, quis intorfoctUH osset, cum 
 jiiboat, no di^tur. 
 
 Cum protioiHcorotur, nC conantur, (juod poUicitus hLs, ut ox- 
 porifunur, omn prdgrossT ossont. 
 
 j: Wnf,out(,i) the third ,in<jular imfH'rfet subjunctive jHu^ive, 
 Uic Uivrd jdunil p,t:st'nf subjunctive active, and the first plural pin- 
 
 :'9fi£^^BUIB^.'„ ■ 
 
I'AiiT I.— rNTuonirrTOHY lknhons. 113 
 
 ». TrumliUr: 
 
 (Drd^^H) „.|t.,ro. r.lT.,uiHHo. intorfoCr. ohho. ..,II„cArT. von- 
 
 (D x.t „.1K) voniro. d.^liMnn. <.iro,unv.„.f,oH ohmo, n.itM Hocon- 
 
 tn,oHUHHo. cr,„af,nrr.s csM.,, cnnarr. ,.,.liicito„ 1.,. ^ 
 
 (.inNHt,HOHt)vonlr(s intoHioT, proHdHcI. 
 
 J>«hoo, into, Mu, cllocc, ,„,t,f,r,, circumvoniu, conor n -ouumI or 
 oxponor, pnllicoor, pn.flciHcor. ' I""«'"**""^' 
 
 11. fTr,:/,. out Uw paHiHph; ,nvanhu, whilo cnuuuu after ml 
 t)<,iutimi, tixorcitul. K""iu, logioniH, 
 
 vuloo and rolrn,nr, ; .,., ,// .... ,/^,., ,en.n^ o/profidL. ' 
 
 13. ^'ritcimtthvfollovHtufparlii: 
 
 ni,v;./H,;u/.,.;,^„,,,,;;i.,^ ..fynn.^^.. ..,<i„. ,i/-,,o, „.ifcto. 
 
 ihup!^"' ""'"^'' '"^"''"" ^""'^'^ '^ ^'^^ re- 
 
 First jdnndfHtnn' indicative active o/do, vonio, videO 
 i a/c.< t„^,Ht<u;. active o/vidoo, vonio, intorficio. 
 /;mrnl5 i,ijinitive jHmirc of uccipio, do, „uttd. 
 Future participle active feminine plural aca^ative of vid.6 
 rehnqud. "^ '"^^"» 
 
 Gemndive ablative dngvlar neuter o/accipio, do, jubeo. 
 14. Name fully the following forms : 
 
 Vidersmur. accipi.tis, rollquit, interficiendas, conftti sunt, 
 pruu..«ci, prugroHHl, interfecl, jubentem. data essent, det. 
 
 I 
 
114 
 
 rniMAIlY LATIN lUMlK. 
 
 1ft. IV^ih fhr 
 
 ('*»»•»•,=* 
 
 ♦»•»}/ /if) .{^•^/i,./„//oir»Mf/ 
 
 i/MM./jM,/ .ir/iir ,.,• fHmii'v j,inn (.i* thf aut' 
 
 In.oifOoil, nOii 
 
 i«|imiii, ^«>llt|lliN^4o^, (liUiiiii ,.Mt, viilrt 
 
 Ci'In, mvipoiv, <luluiii i>HM»». 
 
 lir, HtHMpi 
 
 (ll.1 //(•' CilW (Mil)/ /»,.) ,,f' ^/„. /'„//„|( 
 
 »tV 0»' «u/»/MHl/lV( 
 
 J>i»lwU, inTNiNM«>«, vonOniMl, 
 
 <M«/, 
 
 
 «'in'iniiv,.Miaiur, iolU<H mnvui 
 
 M< wiiM «inl(<ivtl Jo con 
 
 ho wiKH HHko,l Jo ouiuo. mi (rmtl.Ml HM (.1 roiiui, i(, In ,|i(li,.,ilt (u 
 
 ooun», ho «li(l tliJM ill otih>r t 
 
 <t OOIMO ; llipy Nuitl I luil lio ||H,| 
 
 wMinpoHnm (Imt h,. hml oom,., h,, ,|i.l Hmm (|ih( ho i„i«hl 
 
 (h»\v »((<u«k I ho HoMioiM wl 
 
 niino, 
 oonin ! 
 
 Hu'v nUm'k thiwo \vl 
 
 III HIM ooiiiiiig, hti hwiriiN who HioniniiiK, 
 
 lonivooniin^, ho h>uniM thut I hoy uiu uUnok 
 
 viijt I ho Nohlioi'M who ai*o ooiiiiii^ 
 
 IX.- I. \V nit' out th(r ftviiwifHtl /nir/.i (»/* 
 
 Voh^, \\(\\k\ ^xHl\ (^('k. 
 
 SI. U'vih ouf ♦»! full thr fttnttnt ♦»j,/,V.i/«iy ,uui .st./.jioi./nr o/ 
 
 Huni, i»oNNuni, lorn, oo, 
 
 «r»A< 
 
 //< 
 
 «.•«' 
 
 3. irS^ 
 
 «' otW //if /(.//, iin'm; ;hi»7.s, 
 
 fVf.'rf .i«Mj/»«/.ir ♦i»/K»/,v/ ,iM»//u/for in<(u(Uit\ .</ 
 
 oA 
 
 MUIU, MOHNUIIl, 
 
 volo, tV>. 
 
 tir 
 
 imfHifiYt liuhjiiurdiY i>f nuiii, | 
 
 ><»sHimi, 
 
 foiMl. 
 
 oo, 
 
 iNrxf'M/ iHviu'if}f,\ n.>m»Mn/f«v hik/ (/, mV 
 
 HUin, nksiiiiK 
 
 oo. 
 
 V»v ai'iufuhi'^ of |H 
 
 »N- 
 
 l\r.^ni nH/H'»>i/My of fon\ oil, iu"jhl. 
 f»V>»«>HV o/j;.'n»N«/ ijr'foiM, i»o. 
 
 ♦. irW/f oil/ //u' /i»IM«'l/Hl/ /HmY.S 0f'//» 
 
 ox, ftl>, lul, ili.s, Nuh 
 <)/'Num inth lib «ni</ |iiv> 
 
 »' I OIII/HMIMl/.S of' fiMO iriV/» in, 
 
 oon, ob ; of oO ici7/i unl oik/ ro ; uurf 
 
 \V( 
 
 so 
 
 yo 
 
 fir 
 
 Wl 
 
 llll 
 
 Olll 
 /»(l|' 
 
 (Hill 
 
 (*i(>n 
 <l«'. 
 
 /fi 
 
 illHtl 
 
 (loiii 
 IniMi 
 with 
 
 d«iM< 
 
 in a 
 
1*AWT 11. 
 
 IIIII.KS W SYNTAX AND IOXKIl(;iHKS IN 
 IMIOSK (M)Mr()SITr()N. 
 
 KXKKCISI': I. 
 (") Okdku (i|. Wok I ).«,.' 
 1. Tlu' Ik'M way (o Iktoiiu. f.unilmr with the order of 
 words in Latin is to Kivc carci..! alL^ntion to the writinKs <,f 
 sonu« K(»)d l-iilin prose author, such as { 'u'sar. The lollowinir 
 Kn.eral remarks, however, may he of some service to the 
 young student : 
 
 -'. As a rule, the suhject, n.Ilo.ved hy its attrihutes, romes 
 hrst m the seMtcmv ; the verh eomes hist, precah-d l,y the 
 Hords that nuKhfy or depend upon it ; as. AU t/„.r .liffn' fnm 
 om- auothvr ,„ hvuju,ujv, cstnm.H ,nul hnrn: III o.i.no,' ||„K„ft, 
 liiHtltiiflN, It^KllMiN InitM* nO (liiroriiiif . 
 
 .•I. Tho iinuhI onUM- of wonlH is ..ft,,,,. chHi.K.Ml. f„r Mm Huko „f 
 .nnphuHm or ot ouphony : as. .1 „.„., Ihr H.lJii h„ far thr . ' J 
 
 • ~ • naptri VU.J1C3 Mio caw8Uoi>Ii« or denouement: 
 
 .^ji^iM^V 
 
116 
 
 PIlIMAllY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 If , if 
 
 AUud ltVr"h "f-'.'"" /"" ^'>*^««*o'-«f . ^^/'^T ron/e had they mme : 
 one /io/>, oy mSetii. Cimiii c^hho Nponi salutlH .loc«iit. 
 
 rl,m.J^f ^"'^ ,^«rb ..S.SC Hlmuld not bo placed ut tho niul of the 
 clau.sc Its us.ml position being before its predicute woro • , h \w 
 
 artts tren. Anwrui them fhtn punishment is very severe • Haee 
 H ena apu.l eos est KravlHK,..a. One si.le is opposite 'a. 7;' On im 
 
 w iiSn::'^^:^ tr- '''' '''''''' ^^'^^ ^^- ^'- "^ ^'^^-- 
 
 ^^.a;l!",mv^\l't;lV'!"^'^'" """^^ "' the Latin, the order of tho 
 \\oiaH nmy l)o varied (for cinphaHis or euphony) to an alnu.st 
 
 ^&r^^ '' variation would pretty cert^iinly lead' to a.nbiguitv 
 
 (1) Consul intcrfectt rej^cin, 
 
 (2) ItOi^ciii Intorfeelt consul, 
 \ (3) Consul rejerein Intcrfeolt, 
 
 (4) Regcni oonHul Intorfeclt, 
 
 witA 
 
 (1) The consul slew the king, 
 
 (2) Tho king slew the consul,' 
 
 (3) The const il tho king slew, 
 
 (4) The king the consul slew. 
 
 in^; i!?r*' ''"'*'V/'''''' '"'^'"'' '^"'"^^^^ *^»^ ^Pm^^^ never come first 
 ma sentence. J^aq^,e usually has tirst placi, and the word or 
 phrase emphasized by ne .... qnickm is inclosed by theni as 
 
 respective tonffues, is not nieant to KuSmH 1 ■ ^^"^^ '.!?"''">' °''<^a>"« '" the 
 general tendency, ' for in both an^^erSelttti^ 0^7^ '"i!' *'»t«"'J:^» 
 depends mainly on its relative iniportaTe in thrthouJht nnH J^' ^'"■'^''*' .°'' ^'^"«« 
 
 eb. x:fv ^''^"'P'^ ^^ the Latin period ,« found in Cx; 
 
 Qaii., ijook II. 
 
id they mme : 
 ) there, is but 
 
 > ond of the 
 rci ; jiH, Oaid 
 iiis divlsa in 
 wverc: Huec 
 iavl: umun 
 s as follows: 
 
 jrder of tlie 
 > an almost 
 whereas in 
 ) ambiguity, 
 ily changed. 
 
 r come first 
 
 le word or 
 
 them ; as, 
 
 FoM also 
 
 ire spared: 
 
 fe reading' the 
 : to get some 
 iiices that led 
 
 !r and genius, 
 btaina in the 
 but only as a 
 ise or clause 
 extent, may 
 BS, producing 
 the subjects, 
 clauses. 
 
 i., iiook II., 
 
 PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION, H; 
 
 cum is written after and a, '.ende.l to T'V' '-;'' I'^-^''<'«ition 
 Tui, qua and quilni.H. Exam ^ V ? ' ^'' '"^''*"' '"'^^^^J •*% 
 
 altervo aderat. WUl 7/o fev^s^' n^ '^T "T ^''''"^^•' Unui 
 i^o;,/. o/ li,,ne have mm/ ^ 11^' 'i' ''^f ^ ^'" r'^^' ^*'^^ </^« 
 "UH hoe <l6crevit. FcTmotsaZZ^ ff 'f '" Popuh,s<,«o Jtdn.a- 
 
 /mn; Omnia sua seLm'porlat; """'' "" '^^* P<->^essions wUh 
 
 u';^:^ is rslr^'iirts '^^"^ n "^ '^ -"^-- ^'- 
 
 have most on.r.hasis win IcS . thoT'^'fl "'" «"'^J^^* ^'" 
 the verb wheJi ph.ced a t^ltnn '.!//'''' "'"n^"^^' '"'^ 
 eonquered the Gauls: GaHds vu. fr ^ ' /> ^^ ^^''^^ ^'*^«"i" ^^'^'o 
 
 Navlffavit Caesarin Gmeei »^^^ 7^'"' ^"'^^^f'' «'"1«^1 ^o (^rm^e; 
 ^/mn; Inipellit eos avarltia. *''^'*'''" ^'"^^ tn«hV/aierf 
 
 the known'io t^u.2lrt^'§JZS:^tc ^^^--^i"^'/-- 
 generally the first words of m «onf ' .' "^ ^'^«'ir we find that 
 between what follow^ d ;^hHt ^2 1 IJii'./''?' f ^!'»»-^^'i%' link 
 sentence with soniething km wn ,1 f v/'^ ^egmning the new 
 He makes haMe to kThis^Z^^Zl^'''"- ^^^ T"""^"^^ ""« ' ««' 
 river there vas a, fewC Flmn a ''"'''' "^^■"'''*- ^^/'"'* «/'^'« 
 
 factusost. iimias. <|„ibus do robua certiop 
 
 (b) Concords. 
 
 .hl'iJl"" '^°"°"'"''' ''""'=''"^''' "' general forms of agreement 
 should be noticed and borne in mind : fcreement, 
 
 
118 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 II!H 
 
 He persHndt'H Dumnonx, the Aeduan, the brother of Divitiacus: 
 Dunmorigl Aoduo fratrl Divifciiu-I poisurwlot. Experience, the 
 bent of nuisterK, luts faiajht m: Uhuh inuiclHtor optiniuH uos Orudlvit. 
 PhilttHophii, the (tent of teachers, will indruct you: Philosophiii 
 niiifflHtru optiiim vos erudiot. 
 
 (/>) A lavdicfito ii<iun, or pronoun, figreuH with its subject in cjiso, 
 and usually in gondor, if cajiablo of distinguishing gender; as, He 
 hid Iteen called friend bij the nemtte: Is a senatfi uiiiIcuh appeUatus 
 ernt. We are olloired to be freemen: Nobis esse IIIkm'Ih licet, 
 Philotiophy is the ynide of life: IMiilosophia inuffiHtm vltjio est. 
 Athrns tv(is victorious: Athenao ei-ant victrloi'N, 
 
 (<•) An adjective, whether attributive, appositive or predicative, 
 agrees with its subst^intive in gendei', number and case. This rule 
 ai)plies to possessive and demonstrative pronominal adjectives. 
 
 (1) An attributive adjective, ipialifying two or more substantives 
 of ditierent genders, agrees with the one nearest it, or is repeated 
 with each; as, Mitny Innis and iromen, trere on the trail: Puerl 
 niulti nudierC'S(pie erant in nnlro. Puerl nmlieresfpie ninltae 
 erant in nnlro. 3IaltI puerl, muituu mulieres erant in nulro. 
 
 (2) A predicate Tidjective, or participle, qualifying two or more 
 nouns representing persons, is masculine and plural, or it may be 
 made to agree with the noun nearest it; as. The tioys and women 
 trere seen on the irall: Puerl nndieresipie in nu'iro vlsi (or vUuu) 
 sunt. Mif brother and iionr sisters hare set ont: Mens frater et 
 tuae sorores sunt profuotl (<>/• profectae). MeuH frater prof«ctu8 
 est et tuae sorores. 
 
 (3) A predicate adjective, or participle, qualifying two or more 
 nouns representing things, is put in the neuter plural, or it may 
 agree with the noun nearest it; as. The city and temple were taken: 
 Ih-bs teuiplumtjue oapta sunt. The task of {constrKctiny) the winter 
 camp and- the fort{fici(tions had been c<mipleted : Opus hibernorum 
 nu"uiItiones(pie erant piirfuctac. 
 
 ((/) A pronoun (relative or other) agrees with its antecedent in 
 gender, number and person. * 
 
 When the relative has several antecedents, it follows the rule 
 for the adjective. Occasionally we find the relative agreeing, not 
 with its antecedent, but with some word in the predicate, especially 
 after the verb esse ; as, He pushed formird to seize Vesontio, which is 
 the largest town of the Sequuni : Ad occupandum Vesontionem <iuod 
 est oppiduiu maximum Sequanorum contendit. 
 
 (e) A finite verb agrees with its subject (which is in the nomina- 
 tive case) in number and person. 
 
 If the verb has two or more subjects, it may be plural, agreeing 
 with all, or it may agree with the one nearest it, being understood 
 
/ v/ 
 
 Divitiacua: 
 
 oerience, tJie. 
 
 108 Gnullvit. 
 
 Philosophia 
 
 •joct in case, 
 tier ; hh, He 
 H HppuUatu.s 
 Ikm'Ih licet, 
 u vltiio est. 
 
 predicntivo, 
 . Tlii-s rule 
 ectives. 
 
 lubstimtives 
 is repented 
 (•(tU : Puerl 
 |ue iiinltao 
 I iiiflro. 
 
 v<> or more 
 r it may be 
 and mmieti 
 I (or vlgiiu) 
 l18 frater et 
 [• profuctus 
 
 wo or more 
 I, or it may 
 ivere taken : 
 f) the winter 
 liiberuorum 
 
 tecedent in 
 
 ws the rule 
 freeing, not 
 J, especially 
 h'o, which is 
 onem quod 
 
 he nomina- 
 
 fil, agreeing 
 understood 
 
 PART II.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 119 
 
 with the .others; n.s, Casar and Lalnmvs were in Gaul: In Gallia 
 ©put Caesar et LahienuH. Caesar et Lji])iC'nijs erant in Gallift. 
 
 The verb is also singular if the subjects form but (.ne notion: 
 as, I he order and arrau,jement of the column was different: Rutld 
 or.I„,,i,o agmuns aliter se liabelmt. A load din and shmtinq ( = a 
 notm oj Hhoutimj) arose: Clamor frcinltuHquo orlebatur. 
 
 N B -It is to })e observed that for the unemphatic introductory 
 word^Aer^S and also for it, when used as an impersonal or repre- 
 sentJitive subject, Latui has no e(iuivalent words ; as, There is no 
 one without some hope: Nen.o ent sine aliqua spe. It is pleasant 
 to be praised: Laudarl est jucundum. It is raining: Plult. 
 
 voJb'iJni?.r!:7""''/VV'^" ""■ 'V"'''' ''"^*J^^^" «^ different persons, the 
 
 verb IS plural, and the second person is preferred to the third, and 
 
 he hrst to both seccmd and third; as, You and I (=-we) f^7e 
 
 .iiJi M '"**;^'"''- )"."' '''''^, fie(-^Vou) have spoken: Tfi et iile 
 illc dixnnus ""'^ ^ ^^"^'^^ '^""^ ^^'^^^^^•- ^«« '' '^ ^fc 
 
 Observe the order of the pronouns in the Latin sentences. 
 11 By a sense construction (synesis, coustrurtid ad sensum) a 
 plural verb, adjective, or pronoun, is <.ften found with a sTngular 
 substantive agreenig with the latter in meaning, but not in orm 
 >2]^f n^nltrtude depart: Mult.t.uir, ul..u„t.^' Some of them are 
 iuid.y. Par« eoruni paratl sunt. He sends forward th cavalry to 
 see in what direction the enemy are pursuing their march: Equlta- 
 tunt praenuttit qui vldeant quas in partes hostes iter faciant 
 
 • 
 
 (c) The Accusative and Infinitive-The Complementary 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 12. One of the most characteristic idioms of the Latin 
 language is the infinitive with its so-called subject accusative 
 after verbs of sai/inr/, thinking, believing, knowing, feeling 
 declaring, and such like {verba sentiendl et decldrandl), where 
 m English we find a noun clause introduced by the conjunc- 
 tion that; as, 
 
 He says that the Gauls are exceedingly brave: Dicit Gallds esse 
 fortl«slnu-.8. Ca^.sar perceived tfuit Dumnorix was^meant: Caesar 
 Duiiinorl^om designarl sentiebat. 
 
 The conjunction that is frequently omitted in English, as is the 
 case with the esse of the compound forms of the LuHni'n^JL,!!^ 
 as, He sags he unll not come: Negut se venturum. " "'""' 
 
120 
 
 
 PBIMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 i 
 
 threaun to ^ear (sperure, pollicSn. promitlere, recipe mi 
 ^n, nn,nmr% j^are), usually take the future iJZZ'^^ 
 subject accusative expressed, while in English we use the 
 present infinitive without a subject ; as, 
 
 Be piomwcd (o come.- PollioitiK. Mf .a 
 >wore to adopt «o «o»u™ „2w <L V'" '"!" ^''"' " ^"^ 
 « contrt S5qu.™os constia louarl *""'"•■ "f*^"*™"' nihil 
 
 wWe ofOard: Totlu. GalUar.elB DotM „ "^^ »«»«« »/ the 
 
 not /.op. (to „,.,. „„„;,, J:: hr:xzrmr.T'\ ^'^^ * 
 
 exercltus eapl posse. "f'u^jjjjea. l>on sperant nostros 
 
 U. When z;er6a sentiendz et declarandl are found in fhe 
 passive, the personal construction is used in LaL 1 "pt in 
 the compound tenses ; as, ^ 
 
 15. When the subject of the infinitive is \ pronoun of the ■ 
 h.rd person standing for the same person as the subie L of 
 the pnncpal verb, .e must be used; but, if it denotes a 
 different person, use the proper form o(is or ille; as 
 
 J'c:^: DWttt:ntruPrs:e''Xl^^,f f -''^-* "' "•"») 
 pei^n) .nil go: Droit ^nn7ormun,)it<:'Z*tl'" <=^'""'' "^'^ 
 
 difflt inltr '""^ "^ '""""'"^ ™'^^ ^°' '"^ - of ">e 
 th^toT'nTintitt': t,""''" "*■""■' "'—^"^ - "- -»o, U.0 
 m^Lf ;S ""' ^'«"- « « "■«« -«-•• Caesarem .«e fortem 
 .n£m awt.'*"' '^"^ •«" " ^"« f *■-•• Caosarem ,«e fortem ' 
 
PAKT a-SYVTAX AND COMPOSITION. : 121 
 
 suL'i^X' ''"^ "^"^^^^ ^-- --'^.- Caesarem ru,««e c5n- 
 C6^ult ^L'r' ''"' ^^""^ ^- ^-- --^.- Caesarem r„i„e 
 
 (1) |e .«,. ,,e leader ..ill eorne: Ducem vent.ru. a,c,e. 
 2 ^e .a.c^ ,,e leader u^uU come: Ducem ventaru.n ai.,t. . 
 ^^(3) ife ... .«, tJu^t the leader nnll come: Ducem ventarun. 
 
 imSn^hTirr^th^^^^^^^^^^^ up thus:-Let the pupil 
 
 the tense employedl^ ^itt\vLh T,^^"^ .'^^^*^«^ ^"d discover 
 the CO po44 inl^v ;"C e'il^^^^^^ -<^ "- 
 
 m.d jAe boy was his brother, the word7of' Ih '"'' ''^'"' ^' 
 
 would be, The boy is my brother' TJ ■ V^^ .anginal speaker 
 e8«e suum fratrem. ^o T^' JT^' '"iJ^^^"' ^^"^^* P'^^rum 
 come, his exact words woild be r- ^'*^" v1' "^^ '^'^ ^^«^ ^^^^^^ 
 Caesarem venturumele dixit. '"'' '"^^^ ''^^^' ^^"^^' ^^ Latin,, 
 
 forld!^i%retyr::,Tja w^^^^ i"-*r ^'^-^^ ^^v^^- 
 
 tion of words having the loS vail .f""^ ^^^'^^^ ^^ ^'^"^bina- 
 may have the constfuction Tlf vT^b .' ^^ 7^''^'"'^^ "^^^' 
 ( = *i^y say) tnat the enemy is at Iwnd- J^-' ' '''■' "^ '' ^^Z'^'''' 
 -He 6e(/a»i to have areat hnLlth i ^ f.^"*" *'«* hostem adeese 
 
 /m o6kna^e poX: Z'^n H ""'"^^ '""^' ^'' '^^ aia.u^on":^ 
 fore uti pertinacia desisteret ir^ ZTAT'^"".^' ( = «pepabat) 
 
 (=made them swear) thTttv^^'ddZ ^ -I^^T'' ^^ ^'' ««^/^ 
 
 Romano impioratuPos. •*»»«*'*»*** «e non auxihum a populo 
 
 .fTcZtT^::^%i:^^^^^^^^ ^^^ est, testis est, oertior 
 
 fi^ere, conscin/esse ; J,cJZZa^t7'"'^}''^r^ ratio^iem con- 
 emam.ped at the foot of ttmLTaV^tT"^ '^"^ '^' '^^^V had 
 liostes sub moute consedlsse. «-°»' ccrwor factus eat 
 
If 
 
 122 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 18. With the exception of inquit, and credo, used ironically ( = 1 
 suppose), verbs of saying and thinking are not used parenthetically 
 as in English; for example, ''The euemij," he answered, ''are close 
 at hand,'' is. in Latin, Bespondit hosteH adcsHe. 
 
 19. Several verbs, as in English, are followed by a comple- 
 mentary infinitive without a subject intervening. These are 
 called modal verbs, and are chiefly the following : possum, void, 
 nolo, tnala, desin'j, coepi, cJnor, nequeJ ; also, cdnsuescU, debed, 
 contendd, duhito, mafurd, '"'f-u^d, decerno and jwaro. 
 
 Examples.— ife wishes tt ^tesar's friend: Vult esse amicus 
 Caesaris. He preferred to remain at home: Domi reiimnere 
 malult. He prepares to complete the fortifeations that were begun : 
 Miinltiones Institutas parat perflccre. He hastens to set out far 
 Britain : In Britanniam proflclsci contciidlt. He makes haste to 
 leave the city: Maturat ab urbe profloisel. 
 
 Polliceor is also exceptionally used as a modal verb; as, TJiey 
 promise to give hostages: Obsides daro pollicentur. 
 
 20. When the infinitive, after a modal verb, is followed by a 
 predicate word, this agrees with the subject of the principal (i.e., 
 the modal) verb; as, Coisar determined to become consul: Caesar 
 consul fieri constituit. 
 
 21 Coepi is used with an active or deponent infinitive, but 
 where the complementary infinitive is passivG, coeptns sum is used ; 
 as, Ctesar began to advance the battering ram: Caesar arieteni 
 ag'ere cooplt. The battering ram began to be advanced: Aries 
 agri coeptus est. Javelins began to be hurled: Tela conjici 
 coepta sunt. 
 
 22. Some of these verbs, especially void, nolo and mdlo, take an 
 infinitive with subject accusative if the subject of the infinitive is- 
 different from that of the principal verb, and occasionally (chiefly 
 with esse or a passive infinitive), even when the subjects are the 
 same ; as. He rvishes Hii-s friends to grow in honor : Amicos honore 
 auctiores vult esse. He did not wish that place to be unoccupied : 
 Nolult eum locum vacare. He wishes to be consul himself: Se 
 consulem esse vult. 
 
 This is the regular construction with simnlo : as. They make a 
 pretence of returning home : Domum revert! se simulant. 
 
 23. The acciisative and infinitive is also found after the verbs 
 pibeo, veto, patior, sino, prohibeO, and some others ; as. He orders 
 the lieutenant to storm the town : Legatum oppidum oppu^nare 
 jU.ie.,, .,p. .in(..j{yi-hwr(^n Jie soldiers to aepo/vt : Mliites diseedere 
 vetuerat. They suffer no wine to be brought in : Nihil vini Inferri 
 
 ) 
 
TJiey 
 
 a 
 
 PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 123 
 
 patiuntur. TJiey do not allmv ivine to be brought to them at all: 
 VInuin ad se oninind l.nportarl non «lnunt. They prevented the 
 (rermansfrom crossing: Cierinanos tranHlre prohlbebant. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 1. He replied that C.nesar had conquered Gaul. 2. He thinks 
 that tile Roman kwler will easily vanciuish the Belgians. 3. We 
 saw that the nights were shorter in Britain than on the continent. 
 4. The enemy sent ambassadors to Csesar, and promised to give 
 hostages. 5. W(,rd was brought to Ctesar that the hill was held 
 by the Roman soldiers. 6. To these envoys Caesar replied that 
 the Gauls had been coiKpiered by the Roman army. 7. The 
 general hears that tlie enemy arc hurling javelins at the soldiers. 
 8. The enemy, he answered, had been hurling javelins at Ctesitr's 
 cavalry. 9. He learned from the scouts that all the Belgians had 
 encamped on the other side of that river. 10. It is said that 
 Ccesar set out into Gaul, and defeated the Helvetii on the other 
 side of the river Rhone. 11. To that embassy he replied that he 
 would have come to the enemy's camp. 12. The Helvetii are 
 accustomed to receive, not give, hostages. 13. Some even reported 
 to Caesar that the soldiers would not advance (literally, bear on the 
 standards). 14. He said the Aedui wished to wage war with the 
 Germans, and to be the friends and allies of the Roman people. 
 15. The troops began to storm the town, and stones began to be 
 hurled from all sides against the wall. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 Final Clauses (Clauses of Purpose). 
 
 24. In Latin prose the infinitive Is never used in a final 
 sense, that is, to denote the purpose or end of the action. In 
 English the adverbial or gerundial infinitive (i.e., with to) is 
 regularly so used. 
 
 25. The commonest mode of expressing purpose in Latin is 
 by m (uti) with the subjunctive— in negative clauses, we— or 
 by the relative followed by the subjunctive, if the clause of 
 
 I 
 
124 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 purpose is closely connected with some one substantive in th^ 
 pnnapal clause. The qui clause is especially common afte^ 
 muttt and j>racmittd. 
 
 EXAMI'IES, -m *.(., „,it to attack tlu mm,, of thr nmnv ■ Pi-ofici, 
 
 4.;- r • ^ •' -^^ »^ '*'-' liOiil;' IHlrt i'ir<*lllll veil ■Jl.llt'iiK iiniti 
 
 tione.u fnciont. r..,,,,- thnujht he ouoht to take tC n^^^^^^^^ 
 
 rr*. ,..>•.<<, ,.Muud) the attack of the enemy: E\iuitatun S 
 8U8tliieret hostiuiu inipetuin imieiuLsit. ^^i^iiMum qui 
 
 inTi; .^^^'''" tho clauHo ,.f purpose contoiiLs an mljectivo or adverb 
 m the co.nimrative degree, it is usually introduced l.v Zo(~u 
 e«) which shoulc be closely foil, >wed by the coanparatfvJ as /h 
 
 «rravlu« honunes doloant. dl iuuuortules iLs hiterduui diiTtur 
 
 axai^iS^tn •- r 'n ''''/r-' !'""''^'* '"'^''^ «««% : Manipulos 
 laxaic jnssit quo faellluH gladils titi possent. 
 
 27. The subjunctive with ut or 7*6^ is used after verbs of 
 urgimj, wishimj, commanding, advising, asking, striving, etc 
 {hortor, opto, impero, suddeo, persuaded, rogo, contendo, etc ) 
 where the notion of puri)ose is often scarcely discernible! 
 buch a subordinate clause is really substantival, and forms the 
 object of the principal verb (or the subject, if the verb is 
 passive). * 
 
 .t^h!''l''^^^'~J^f P'^'T'^' ^"^'^^'^^' f'<> *'^^~'' the chief pow.r in his 
 m ,^r""^*»«J p^^^'^^> «t reguum in civitate sua oecuparet 
 He asked me not to do this: Me roffavit ne hoc facerem l); 
 
 TaX:'" "'" '^ ^'^""•' Elpersua^um est ut Ri;enum 
 
 allv 'ft'-rf^lf -^"ff ' '"'''"^ ^T^ "^^'' regularly, and ron<eMrfr> gener- 
 S'i^^ mlTsQ J^' ^*'"»Pl*^"^«J»tary infinitive. See sections 19 
 
 Z^,;:Z A .ft y? ^'^^''^ ""''' '"^^'' ^'*'^ '^" infinitive, once. They 
 Sims to burst tnrougn : Ferrumpere nituntur. 
 

 PABT H.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 125 
 
 28. With reg.ard to the sequence of tenses in fmal clauses 
 pn.n,ary or pnnci,«I sentences are followed by th ™ 
 
 ::;;;:::;::; '-'""'''' - '^^-^^ '— > ^^ •'- *«": 
 
 Tho Priiimry tonsoH aro :— 
 
 Present .„„«. //,,„,, Imnlovm,, I do love 
 
 Juciiio, uinabo; I nh all love. 
 Future Perfect, ,„„avercM /«AaM /,«.« loved. 
 The ►Secondary tenses are •— 
 
 teect7lortt'"^ i'r/'''f0.noved, I did love. 
 ™itct^A()rist), ainavl; I loved, I did I we 
 Pluperfect, amavora... , I had Led 
 
 teJst '^t^.:^^^^^^^^ f « rule for secondary 
 tur porHuadet. ^"uiiiuugi ut la-iia conare- 
 
 *l jihai nobody -^-neqnlH, " '^'^ 
 
 tliat nothin<j~ne quid, 
 that no '^ne qui (or quls). 
 that never =ne unquam. 
 
 suS^'n™i;;^:cS'"'i/e ^^T'r '°<f r'^^-^'- ^UOI per. 
 »e. c™» .1 ...^ P?„te.f Lit?t7,l ^S„ frjLoTt °"' 
 
 as, He urged the »id«™to W 1 m.W L" w' '" »«■;■"»«>■» i 
 is a ve?b of thinkinror IX •"?'"' ,'•' "i'^^ "' ""«' «">« be used 
 
 f^.ordTroiai:tt^\ s'tri^i'' *^=^* .-- '* *» 
 
 go. MUiti ne Iret CaeSar persuaslt. Ctesar mw 
 
126 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 permader thab tho ouomy woro near: Caosarl porsuuBum est 
 
 IlONtON ii ill HMO. 
 
 32. Cortjiiii vorbs UHU.iIly modal, Huch an cdndituo, Uikc an ut or 
 ne clauHo whon tho Hubjoct of tho .siibi.nliuato vorb is (lifforout 
 from that of tho vorb which governs such clause ; as, He Hetcr- 
 minoH that themi nhoidd leave thctowu: COntttltult ut hi opuldo 
 excetlunt. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1. Tlioy sont Cresar into Gaul to carry on war with tho Helvetii. 
 2. Tho Gauls had sent envoys to Gesar to ask for poaco. a. In 
 order to defeat tho enemy, and not to suffer them to cross the 
 river, Cfusar exhorted tho soldiers to tight valiantly. 4. Cavalry 
 were sent to tiko possession of tho enemy's camp, 5. He ordered 
 the cavalry not to pursue tho enemy, but to return at once to 
 tho camp. (j. Ho sent forward the cavalry and tho slingors 
 to attack tho enemy in tho rear. 7. Ho sent messengers to 
 announce to Ciesar that tho Roman cavalry had been routed by 
 the enemy and 'were fleeing into tho woods. 8. He replied that 
 Caisar had praised tho soldi rs of tho tenth legion in order that 
 they might tight tho more /aliantly. {). Ctesar ordered (impero) 
 his soldiers to press forward and not to hurl any weapon whatever 
 at the enemy, 10. They ordered tho bridge to be destroyed in 
 order that no one might be able to cn^ss the river. 11. The Gauls 
 sent a messenger to say that tho Roman troops had b- dt a bridge 
 over the river in order to pursue the enemy more easily. 12. Ho 
 persuaded the Helvetii to go forth from their territories with all 
 their forces. 13. He warned tho leader that the Gauls were at 
 hand, and directed the soldiers not tt) leave the camp. 14. He 
 persuaded the soldiers that ambassadors had been sent to Cwsar 
 concerning a surrender. 15. Cfesar determined that Labienus 
 should not be sent to storm the town. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 Consecutive Clauses (Clauses of Result)„ 
 
 33. Result or Consequence is denoted by ut (utl) with the 
 subjunctive ; in negative clauses by ut non ; as. 
 
oat 
 
 PABT II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 127 
 
 Be is m honcM that all men hdieve him: Th.u i.rol,uH out n* omnfiH 
 or^ciant. T/,.,, made «h attack .so suddndy\hTno<.^^^^^^ 
 
 It will 1,0 obsorvod thut juMfc m tho infiuitivo in EnirliHh is us..,l 
 t(. oxnresH purpose, so tho Knglish intinitivo ProcoS fv ,L X! 
 so and «,tc^, iH used to denote result. ^^^oucu riy rw attci 
 
 N.B--Acommonusoof thoconsecutivo cluuso is to form wifh 
 
 This is esi,ecially the case after verbs that want tho supine. 
 34. Closely connected with consecutive clauses are clauses of 
 characteristic introduced by the relative pronoun or by relative 
 adverbs. Such clauses describe the antecedent as being or 
 not being one of a class characterized by a certain quality. 
 
 Examples -iSTor am I the man to he fnghtened ( = Nm- air I mie 
 
 di^t.?'^''\'' ''^''"''^' "^ characteristic is found after nnm, solm 
 dHinus, rnd^cinus, taonem, and some other words; as, He is vZthv 
 to he loved : D,sr„„« est q„i »,netur. The Belqae are the 1170^ 
 u7.o W prc.eH erf the Teutons from enterilu, their terriior^: 
 Belgae soli sunt qui Teutonos intra fines suos ingredi «r, 
 
 q«^ mmatur ' " '"'^''^^' ^" *' ^' ''''^ '' ^-^^^ ld6neure;t 
 
 fivf; .?"?/" '^"\t^«") i« «ften used to express result after nega- 
 
 Toe^ZsZtrT^'^^^^ ^'^ ^f^o is there .L 
 
 does not see {or, but sees) ? Quia est quin videat ? There is no one 
 
 who aoes not see (or, but see,) : Nemo est quIn videat. No one l 
 
 so brave as not to be disturbed: N.mo est^am fortfs q„ln pe:;;!! 
 
 >37. Observe that in consecutive clauses, 
 that nobody = ut nemo. 
 
 that nnthi/nn^^i,*- .^«v.«! . 
 
 that no =ut nullus. 
 
 tliat never =ut nunquam. 
 
128 
 
 IMtlMAUY LATIN |!(»nK. 
 
 -Si 
 
 It 
 
 J.?M.p; liMiM.liiN linn Hiihittm nml m ikhiui n.NiHli.|i.|. ' H, m,„ ^„ 
 ftmiv th.ft h' fv„mf nothht'i: Turn U*v\U nmi ni nllili liiiini..f, 
 n> (.I ,1.. ,-,.»»^rr.//t/ ^/mi^ /if )(,.(rr ,-»i,/„„,.« ,» /„j///f. , Tiuu iiltliituN Mni 
 lit iiiiiii|iiiiiii pntoljiiiii (Miiiiinillat. 
 
 .'^H. Am n'K.'Uils the iisr ul Iciimi-h in cfMiMcniHvr rIniiNCR, Ihc 
 lui^lish will, in K«')H«nil, l»c n .millirinu gni.lr, iiotiii}/ tluit (hu 
 im|U'Hnt is gi'iUTiilly us»-«l lur oiii- piisl Icnsi'; ns, 
 
 7%»' .•»)••.»»»/ UtHfthr,f „uv tn>of>H with snrh tmoi flxif (hnf ,f» nt 
 ^Mff^|/ r/.fM- /.. /..M, /,„^//r. Tanliim fciiniPin iiMHttiM iniJiliJMiH liiiHtf 
 liiJiVOi'iiiU III luHJio iiiiii oiiiiiiiiill«>ii> |it'H«.|iiiiii inMi,.,iiii. 
 
 ail. Hiiwov.'i'. (iflorii liiNlnHcid Ii'mhp, iho poifiM-l Niil>|iiii(tMv<« in 
 rivmuMillv iih.mI. oiil„.|- (I) Im ,|,.|,„Io Him Hriioii m .'.no wli.ilo, 
 liollilIlK Ihmiik hIuIoiI (IH li. ilM •••nil Jliimiii>i> ; ..r, (2) f,,|' Ih.. mikn nf 
 
 KIVHi.M' Vivi.ilU'HH, HH if lIlO IVNIlll WOIU lUlWMlt l.> t||(. UlilMl of |||0 
 
 »|H'(iki'r; UN, 
 
 (1) Nm.A ,» jvomV i^kv,)„ll, fh,if Hot nutu ,ftff iM)« ff, «,*m,/,. ofhn' 
 t».r» f'Mr^.rn.,' /,. ,/fMV ^;»,. ,',i,mii out of thv rnmft, hut vmi llw kin,! 
 hunft,if jlnUn ih,' (Mvr .»»!./ nu> ,m/m>m.- ThiiIiih pHVnr MimiOH .hmmi 
 ivlvit iif, nnn iikmI,. i»liuH,piiH,,i„Mn vtm\Y\H p.>lloio liuHliMii <>AiianHiir 
 {iinwhu^i .•..H^MMrr.f.'fi or vvfwhtio,,) mul olitiiit ipmi i-Ox ad Hniiinii 
 tmv*^H<pu« |iiM>roN:«M>lt (.» ,-«»H(//f. ,ri7). 
 
 (2) Swh i»>r.i //if f,i7.ir,-t,x»,.M ,,/• Am /Irfc //i,»/ /,r iinwu/iv/ //ir 
 fi;);if,»n»M.v f.y'M ../oMf if/iM l„wili,ul.- h]o full, habita oriH ul lUloiiliH 
 otiiiin Hpi'oioiu |M'iu>lMU>rlt. 
 
 KxRIU'tHW a. 
 
 1. Tho lomlor whh of hucIi a oIkuhcNt IIihI nil ih,. Hnl,li,.rM l.ivcd 
 Inm. 2. Tlio wa w,w hm olonoly l>or,|,.|v.| l.y (Ih, Ihal, fn,,,, Mio 
 hiKhorplmM'H h luiNNil,. ooiiM h,. (hrown In Hi,. wulor'H ,.,|go. a. ||o 
 mu\ Hirtt H.. «ro;it Kum i\w valor ,.f Hi,. Hol,li,.rH ||;-.| ||u,y ,i*,i,.,„i 
 ovon to croMH Hi,> rivor. 4. Ho givnt u p.uiir him/auI our HoMi»,rH 
 llirtt wo aiil iiol ,|,ii-o Uy join ImtHo willi Iho oiioiiiy. ft. Tlum) 
 i« noono hut. knowH timl hravo soMiot's rtrotUwrtys pr»MH,i,l l.y Hu, 
 Koiu'ral. n. TluMo ivw (Hioh,.) wIio Huy Hint (^irNHr \va« <U,foalo,l hv 
 th^ oavalry of Ih,. (5,„ls. 7. Ho roplii,,l Wmi th,. ooinnwuiilor whh 
 not worthy to ho lo.o.l by tho Kohliors. H. Thorn followod Hiu'h 
 .uorms as oontimni our troops to Hio camp and kopt. tho onomy 
 from tightiug. 9. Ho was tho only man wh,) had not, boen 
 indiiethi^tu Uikii the vmth ,u' to give His children (as) hoRtagea. 
 
I'AIIT n.-HVNTAX AND COMI'JIHITION. 
 
 1S9 
 
 10. .S,M.|, WHH Mm, v«lnr of Mm, hoMIm... i)mi „„», « „,«„ wiMnlrow 
 .MM, Mm. ..H.npnrt. 1 1. (.„,„,, „,(,, ,„.,, f,,MM Mm,«„ Hr...,M«UlH,«« 
 
 It. llHll llH|l|M.tM*^ MlHf, MM.y ruHIM...! <ll....||. |,.MH wMl„|y ij; v>„ 
 
 IlliV.. ImU.,, HU U.ml.f, |,y our HMrPMlMlM M.Hl WM urn H<.;.,.Ml0MM'.e| ♦,,. 
 
 n'«'.nvo, ,M.f, fo «iv., hMHtauPH, |M. TIm. khmthI I,h,I j,m|j^,„| m,|, 
 •yHlrv ...nn H HMilal.ln ,,..,«,.„ h, h..,mI f,o (W»r ♦., rmk ««HiHUM.«. 
 
 '*• " "*'".V« """••' 'UiHWpriM (•„.««,' Mmf, M... l.ri.lKn Im.l Imnii 
 
 HO l.mvoly ,|..f,,Ml...l l.y M ,M.,.,y M.nt, Mm, Hr.ny ImmI |„,.,„ u.mMo 
 
 ♦•M-rn«H If,. Ho mnai, waH (h.. (mror of Jhn wI.oIm unny Mmt, no 
 Nol.lM.r ,|a,o.l to loHvu Mm, Hfan.lur.lH or to l...rl w„h|,omh „t Mi« 
 onoiiiy. 
 
 ICXKKCISIC IV, 
 
 QtrKHTrONH, DlHMT ANII iNlJlKKfT. 
 
 40. A direct .incHtioM is ;• princip.,! rhum- infrcdiirrvl by nn 
 intmoK;itiv.- pr.,n.,iii, or ndvcrl,. .,r l,y „im; cf H,,, irit(;rrf,gative 
 pJirticli'N, nonnfi, num. or wo; ns, 
 
 r/;. /MM <A... //mW jmi, f,o,. ffrit,/ /;/,/ HO/, //,. /,oj/ ,,;^, <„ 
 f/if <»0//' No . o piM-r (1(1 iirlMtiii vfiiiit. / 
 
 41. TIh, folluwir.K HoiiinrMum will hIiovv how Mm t„irticlo« -rw 
 nnm and nnnm dill'nr fr.,in o,m. unoMMW in .nnuMiiiK. ' ^' 
 
 (1) /W., wvitiHiif Hcrlhif.no/ {AshHfori,ifnn,mU„n.) 
 
 (2) /A- V/i iw,7/,M, ;. Ar »,o/7 (or. /« /*« not mitimi) i NOnne 
 
 H( 
 
 Nam HOI 
 
 111,11, ( {h.i'fwilH iirfinfivi' nnHiirr.) 
 
 Nr (wlncl, iH «onM.M,iMm ouiill.ul) in uii .,nclif.ir, M./it; Ih, an tinom- 
 l,l.at,c pHrMch, Hpp,M„I.M| t,o t.lM, inl,ro,1.„.t,ory w..nl of Mm, Hm.t.onoi,. 
 
 otimr nitiirroj^utivo word. 
 
 42. /Vitynmt.iyo or diHJ,ni(,Mvn (pntHtionn nn, oxproHMod by ntmm 
 nr-uv i„Mhn) ... Mk, tirnfc c1u„ho, h.hI <,. (or) in Mm, hccumiT a^ 
 
 ZuZT^m "'""'" 7 ^''"'"^'^'^ ^ «'♦:••"'" ^'''-vl (or Horvino) UHtii 
 »u iThorT f ^ (/^ntm and -;«,« aro HoniotnnoH oniiMod.) 
 
 For diroot, (juoHM.,nM, whnt.hor winglo .r altornafcivo, Mio indica- 
 Mvo iH t,ho proper mood «xot,pt, in Mio caHo of d.d,it,/it,iv.. or 
 rtiBConcfti quoMtu,nn (of which monti 
 
 
 
 Hoction 151, c). 
 
r 
 
 130 
 
 PBIMAIiy LATIN BOOK. 
 
 43. A subordm.ito rl.nuse introduced l.y .any of the iaterroR- 
 «t.ve words ,„e,uione,l ..hove is oiled a dependent or indirect 
 question, .md .ilways Ims its verb in the sul>junclive ; as, 
 
 Or mt, i„ H,„ direct ..uostion, is „„„,-„, , i„ „,„ i,„,i„^, „^^_^__ 
 
 45. In Knglish we do not usually consider the clause .as a 
 
 dependent ,,uest,o,, .n.less the principal sen.once contains a 
 
 erl of asktng or ,n,,uirinK, l-ut in Latin the princip..l verb 
 
 need not be of an interrogative natMrc, but may be a verb 
 
 meann,g learn JinU out, *,,«,,, «,«, p„,-„, „„,_ ,,, „^ ^^,^.^_, . _^_^_ 
 
 7/(! fold me irhat he ims doinn ■ o.,i-i #■ ^ i • 
 
 cannot hear what you err 'Z/» "^.^, * '-*''^'*''* ""^" •«'-^"- ^ 
 ;/off an saynuj . Aiidlre lion i)()s>sum quid cllcas 
 
 46. The use of the tenses in dependent questions in Latin 
 IS, as a rule, the same as in English, except that after a primary 
 ensethe perfc-.t subjunctive is generally used instead of the 
 imperfect. I he future is represented by the subjunctive of the 
 active periphrastic conjugation. (Part III., 69, a.) 
 Examples.— 
 
 (a) I see what ym are doing: Q,„id facla« video. 
 (b)Isee what youUve done (or did): Q„,d fecerln video. 
 (c) I saw what you mre doing : Q„id faeere« vidl. 
 id) I saw what you had done (or did) : Q„td fecI««eH vldl. 
 (e) //.<n-« seen what you are doing: Quid f„ela« vldl. 
 (/ / see what you uM do : q„,c, fact«r«« si« vldo6 
 (.7) I saw what you M^nld do : Q„,d facturus chsoh vldl. 
 47. English abstract nouns, such as dze «i/^/,^.. ; 
 
 ^ -vi. wi,ii,._. ana jMTiiiaaus as ijuanitis, qiwt, 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 131 
 
 lh^!':,T'i '1'';]f^'\f'^^^^^ lo'-^l etc. ; as, He was unuhh to ham 
 non n„t,omt. He. eannnt dinrnver tlw pimiiion of the enemy (Idlalh, 
 
 ruui neu) . Cur rodlurlt uuhciu. *^ 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 1. Ho hhIcm who is lemling fcho uriny inf., the city. 2 Ho t.)ld 
 tho gonoml who hud j.ors.uulo.l tho sohliers to loavo tho camp 
 . . Ho WHS unuhlo to Hscortuin whut hurh..rs woro convoniont for 
 the WHr-gHlloys. 4. (h^nnr hml sont horsotnon in mlvunco to 
 obsorvo in whut dirocti<,n tho onon.y woro n.urching. 5 Ho s^iid 
 Ca,sHr hud in.,,nrod why tlio ofKcors had not lod tho troops against 
 tho onon.y to provont thoni crossing (litrrally, to rm.s) tho rivor 
 «. IhogoiioralaskodwhothorthoRonum po<,plo had mado peace 
 w.tJ. the Holvo „ or n<,t. 7. Di<l y,.., not know that CaJ had 
 asked ,f(.,,7.M.,)tl.o Ronmn people woro likely to n.ako peace 
 mth the onen.y ? H. I shall ask the date of his return to the city. 
 5>. He found out what villages the (Ja.ds ha<l beyon<l tho Rhone 
 and tho.r size 10. He couhl not learn h<,w the So.p.ani had led 
 the.r forces through tho territories of the Aodui, an.l why thev 
 were layuig waste their Itnds. 11. Gosar in<iuired hy whom the 
 inland part of Britain was inhabited and tho number of tho t..wns 
 1-. Are you a Roman s(,ldier or not ? What is the roas.m of your 
 coming :nto our territories ? I'.i. Ho sent spies in order that he 
 nnght bo able to kn<,w with wlu.m tho loa.ler of the Gauls hold 
 coiumunication 14. They wished to loam what sort of man the 
 leader was, an<l the position of the enemy's forces. 15 He sent 
 scouts across the river to ascertain what was going on in the camp 
 of the enemy, and when they were going to make an attack upon 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 The Ablative Absolute and its Commonest Equivalents. 
 
 48. A construction which (owing to the want of a perfect 
 participle active) is exceedingly common in Latin, is th^ 
 
182 
 
 I'UIMAUY LATIN H()(»K. 
 
 nhlativo nhsolnic, whj,.| 
 
 <'<»mimni nominalivc absolut 
 
 1 .somrwhal rcscmblf.s tlio rjiiicli I 
 
 liuu> (H- atloinlant ciivumslaiKvs ol 
 
 *' in I'aiMlish, in its di'l 
 
 Css 
 
 mil 
 
 »l)S()lut 
 
 e IS iisiiai 
 
 IK I lie 
 •'" -I'-lioM. The. ahlalivf 
 
 » «oml)iiia(it)n oC ;, •-ubsiimt 
 
 Piii-ticiplc MV'U'ially the pcilccl iiailidpl 
 
 (ioin t 
 I 
 
 lu> pivst'iit activiv 
 
 I VI' and a 
 
 ic iiassivc, more scl- 
 
 •IxAMn.Ks. <h, Iwaviiuj thh {Uhr„n,,, (hi,/, 
 
 hf li^'ftfuh'ti : III 
 
 Mihl 
 
 put It 
 
 H niulKiN. filtiil. H'liU,' th 
 
 iti'iiuj Iwcii hviivil), 
 
 '"» '•" -' hovs,'^: IIIN |M,«n„,iniMi«. i'llii 
 
 VHO iroiv fiiihtlnif, nur nf 
 
 \uu\a\n ox HiliN intiiliJ,. Aft 
 
 liiirinii h,>,<ii I 
 
 >ii III (<(|niitii 
 
 f.Vil. irinl,' ih 
 
 •''I'i'liYtl), ho m,uii 
 
 tl Hil 
 
 f 
 
 //•/ 
 
 "' »'»»•»/( 1/ MV';v iissiviliitui III 
 
 I' >v,','iri,„, hoMhujrs {lilnalhi, hosi 
 /"'"•'''•■, <H»nI«IIImim tu |>tlM. |)ft,.i'in 
 
 mii'H 
 
 OoOnint. 
 
 liONniMIN CUNfru OpI 
 
 mimiwiiiMImin, t'llipliulU'lll IH.Htll 
 
 •<'•>. As tilt' I'jiglisI 
 
 seldom iisal, it isgoiKMallv lu-st 
 
 1 noininalivc ahsolulc i 
 
 S CO 
 
 translating the aldativo alisol 
 
 <<> a\()i(| that consttiKi 
 
 injiarativcly 
 
 ion 111 
 
 iito, and to usr, instead, a d 
 
 cpc-n- 
 
 ont rlauscMntiodu.vd by surh wonls as n/frr, ,rlnh^ A.a 
 
 ♦yj iilthoiufh^ h 
 
 >i'raus,>: or, one of the pivpositiot 
 
 without, otc, lolIoNwd !)y thi> 
 parti(-ipial phrase wiii, havi,i,j 
 
 IS ini^ afh't', 
 
 gi^nind: <»r. the I'aiglish active 
 l»resent paitiei[)lc 
 
 or even tli 
 
 vSiieh 
 
 xpressions (N.nse<|uentlv (('specially if short) are to be 
 
 'v means of the ablative absolute. 
 
 translated into Latin I 
 
 KXAMI'LK8. ~ 
 
 ('0 Afti'v this haiih 
 proolio fnoto, oxeiritnin tiTuhlrit 
 
 f'Vf.v fowihf, he led th 
 
 '• itvm\i (rcro.s.s ; 11 
 
 6o 
 
 Ills 
 
 ih 
 
 ((•) 77i('i/ jr>7/ not /»,- ,r/»/,- /,> ,^»f,.Mf^ 
 
 mv iirm» arc aunciKfcrt'd : Ab 1 
 
 thnost'Ji'i-s fi'inii th>si' men if 
 
 non potoniiit 
 
 ('0 Althomjh thr (Jcfciul 
 toirn htf storm. : Oppidu 
 potuit 
 
 lis HO (lol'oiuloro, ti'iulH 
 
 In nnnlN, 
 
 Vr.-J ircrc few, h> 
 
 111. iuiuoIn (lofVlKloiltll 
 
 mis not (il,h> to f„h',> th, 
 
 (»•) At the rcmwf of the Rnui (or. I 
 ■*"•}/ obtanmf thfir safdi, 
 
 serv 
 
 >ri'inisi> 
 
 t»UN. oxpugiiruo noil 
 
 Hk' ryrmi nsb'd if)^ fh, 
 
 Sroiifm- inipotmnt 
 
 i/.- I'ctoMtUms llOiulN, hustOs ut 
 
 con- 
 
J'AUT II.- 
 
 ucli less 
 niM|.r the 
 iil)l.'itiv(j 
 ' iiiid a 
 loru sci- 
 
 I Iti'itril), 
 f/, iniv of 
 I (M|niitii 
 
 I iioNtrl 
 
 nilivcly 
 lion ill 
 (lopcii- 
 
 after, 
 
 iU"five 
 
 llicii)lc 
 
 • to be 
 
 ' I loo 
 
 h II IH 
 
 rnvn if 
 iniilN, 
 
 '/.v iht; 
 to noil 
 
 7), Ih', 
 "j coii- 
 
 -HYNTAX AND HOMfOSITlON. 
 
 v,\:\ 
 
 :""', Urn,', ranm'. rnn,ritinn ' '"''^''^^'''f «'>.„„ drHcriiN 
 
 ^'"■«"'.' fHo.,M.o c..M.,u,o. a L ' '";'7"' "^ ''"' '•"H«.a//, ./• 
 vIHlM... fortiior ropngnavon.;,^. ' ''-'-^-''^'"■^'.' ^<>Htrj, i„to«..i« 
 
 .4'; Jil;;;:S^r:i;L:i;i;;;^i- ^^;^^';vo a,.o,... i, in „.,,,,„ 
 
 '!•'"""•• '••"Iii^. /Ar'vm ";;,,, 7' ;';;r^ ^"'; --PtlvlM ,^„oti«), 
 
 in^^;r;:£S:!iS/:s^^^ i« pa.ivo 
 
 M.o^;:;:;r\:'!Ti^'7 P-I'^'PI^' refors t<. ho„u, o.,... ..,., .._. 
 
 , ■ .1 ''f «'!> uct of tilH vj>rl« ♦I.-. Ill- .' "-^m tiiail 
 
1:3 1 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ih4! dry land, their lend hehuj followed by nil their cfmrrnks, thev 
 mnde an nUmk upon the enemy: Nostrl siniul in urido con.stitOrun^ 
 sulH ointilbuN coiiHeviitlN, in liostCs iiupetuin fecGrunt. 
 
 (.;) Tho absoluto con.struotion is not gonomlly usod when the 
 noun or pronoun nioditiud hy tho participlo is tho Huhjoct or ohioct 
 of tho i,nncipal vorb ; hh, While L wusjteeiny he wn J concealed hu 
 the vumt^: Fufflenn (not 1116 fufflente) Hilvls tectus ost. Ilavina 
 led out their troops Jrom the camp, they drew them up in battle 
 HtSruiT'' *'"***^* "^ ^*^*^*^"** ^**««*a« ('">< «"!>"« eductls) in- 
 
 In Cuvsur, liowovor, thoro are fro.piont exceptions to this rule • 
 UH AJter .siwimoniny the leadiny men he reconciled them to Cin- 
 iietorix : PrlnvlpiiniN oonvocatls, U6» Cingotorigl conciliavit. • 
 
 53 From an observation of tho proeoding examples, it will be 
 seen that the absolute phrase is usually placed at or near the 
 boginmng of the sentence. 
 
 54 Instead of the ablative absolute wo find, for the perfect par- 
 ticiple cum yith tho pb.porfoct subjunctive, <,r vin, ot i>odqmm, 
 with the perfect indicative, and for tho present participle, r^m with 
 the imperfect subjunctive, or dnm with the present indicative ; as, 
 nhcn he had saultlns, he departed: fun, haec dlxl«set. abiit, or 
 po8t.|„a... (or uhl) haec dixit, abiit. After receiving hostages he 
 made peace: €uiu obsides ueceplssot iMlcem fecit. When the 
 enemy were assanltiny the camp, onr troops made a sally: Cum 
 iiostos castra oppupmarent eruptiOuem uostri fecerunt. 
 
 In aesar, the abhitive absolute is tho almost invariable rule with 
 short expressions, that is, in tho case of verbs capable of having 
 that construction. When the expression is somewhat long, the 
 found'' '^"^ '''' gonorally used, „bi and post,ptam being seldom 
 
 ,» ^- ^^•--^^■''"P^"^ .-vhlHtives absolute, with equivalent expressions, 
 may bo found m Cjosar, Boll. Gall. II. 25 ; Til. 1 ; IV. 23 ; V. 16. 
 
 Tho ablative absolute may ba connected (although tho connec- 
 tive is very often \,mitted) by a conjunction (e.g., et, .que) with 
 another ablative absolute, but not witli any other (^veA an equT^ 
 lent) torm of expression. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 1. After settling those matters, the commander returned to the 
 city with hi.s army. 2. After encouraging the soldiers, and giving 
 the signal, ho ordered tho lieutenant to make a sudden attack upon 
 t lie enemy. 3. Ho set out for the city against the will of the com- 
 mander, after promising to return nhortlv A i„ 4-i ™„.-i^k-_ 
 
ndes, they 
 stitOrunt, 
 
 •vhen t!ie 
 or ohjoct 
 CQulnd hij 
 Haviiuj 
 in battle 
 lotis) in- 
 
 hia rule ; 
 to Gin- 
 vit. 
 
 t will be 
 near the 
 
 Feet par- 
 idtpiam, 
 '^m with 
 ive ; as, 
 ahiit, or 
 stages he 
 lien the 
 /: Cum 
 
 Lile with 
 having 
 
 'iig, tile 
 seldom 
 
 essions, 
 1 V. 16. 
 
 eonnec- 
 e) with 
 equiva- 
 
 to the 
 
 giving 
 
 k upon 
 
 le com- 
 
 suisiiip 
 
 PART n.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. I85 
 
 tho logi„„ i„ „,.f„t„ i„t , ;. "*"."" """'"y prevented (him), he led 
 
 m«do an at..„u .^:'^::j^:\:;^' tt^ '"-'-rr • 
 
 tonce hear,l the prisoner and diLn ,0 hini « T' *'"' '''''"=- 
 "11 the prisoners, ho ordered tirT, . 1 ""'"« I»--<l<«.ed 
 
 l". After this battle «.a»o, It M ''" \ """"" *" ""^ «""P- 
 
 h the bravery of ur Tn ^ ' "'"""^' ''"""« l«'™ impressed 
 l.™ee. 1 Xnl, T'"; "" "•"''""«''™ '" C»»r to seek 
 L unab e t^ Z^ hi 1', l"" ""i 'j""™ '■■""' "" '*"-'-. he 
 ™J, after ,li„n,i's' t !„ " ,"'','" "" '"'"'"'• l''' This 
 ""fety. 13 A erL'T ''■•''• ''" ■'"""■'"'<' '" "'e city in 
 1"M Ltelhc eld T Z!^^ ''^f"™ "«' *-". having 
 
 villages, Osar .trfed Znp " r1:f tr'f"""" "^^ "" ''"^ 
 
 resistance (,n tlio virt of ^ /, ^'"^ ^^'^''^ '^^ ** ^"^^^^t 
 
 safety. "^ "^ """' ""''"'«ht. ""<1 reached the camp i„ 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 Verbs with the Dative. 
 
 ancf't.r"^!'*'^""''' '" '^"S"* "^o considered transitive 
 
 ^ot::d^;tl;;^s:rrs1:e^L""-^- 
 
 pleimd the nu,i,ml„. »;"'_.'■_ ''°""'" n«<l"e feran parclt. It 
 C»e«.rl parebat. ' ' ""'"" *""■" «"»«""- -^^ <*eyed ikmir: 
 
 i 
 
136 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 In like manner, such expressions as fidem Imhere, to trust, to 
 have conhdence m, take a dative ; as, He reposed the greatest confi- 
 dence m Procdlm : ProcUld summam fldeiu habebut. 
 
 56. The dative is found with many (but not with the ma- 
 jority of) verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, 
 con, de, in, inter, oh, post, prae, sub and super ; as, 
 
 This one thing Coisar lacked: Hoc iinum Caesarl defult. Labie- 
 nm comrrumded the caralnr Labienus oqultatui praoerat. Nv,ht 
 put an end to the contest : Nox eerta.nlnl Intervenlt. He came to 
 the aid of the state: Clvltatl subvenlt. 
 
 The verb when compounded really takes a new meaning, which 
 requires a dative case. Many of these compounds take an accusa- 
 tive of the direct, along with the dative of the indirect object (see 
 section 69). •* ^ 
 
 57. Verbs which in Latin take the dative must be used 
 impersonally in the passive, the dative being retained in that 
 voice; as, \ 
 
 Ccesar is obeyed by the Gavls: Caesarl a Gallis paretur. This 
 man can be pardoned: Huio homim igndscl potest. I am 
 believed : Mihl creditur. 
 
 This is a special case of the general rule that all intransitive 
 verbs, that is, verbs that do not govern tlie accusative case in the 
 active, it used m the passive, must be used impersonally ; as. The 
 battle raged fiercely: Acriter pugnatum ost. A general run is 
 made to arms : Ad arma concurritur. 
 
 58. The verbs, laedo, delecto, oblectd, juvo and offendo, take the 
 accusative, though from their meaning we should expect them to 
 govern the dative ; as, TJiis life delights me: Haec vita me delec 
 tat. He violated Us pledge : Fldem laoslt. He assisted them with 
 /oorf; Eos cibo Ju^lt. Jnbeo takes a complementary infinitive 
 with the accusative ; as, He orders the troops to return: Mllltes 
 redlrejubet. 
 
 59. Several verbs, especially cdnsxdo, impero, caved, timeo, metno, 
 tempero, moderor, prOspicio and provided, take a dative or an accul 
 sative, according to their signification; as, I ask Ccesar' s advice; 
 Caesarem cdnsulo. I consult Ciesar's interests: Caesarl consulo. 
 He did not restrain (^put a check upon) himself: Non slbl tem- 
 peravlt. He was unable to govern the states: CIvltates temper- 
 are non poterat. He makes a demand for cavalry: Equltes 
 imperat. He aives orders to the rnvMr^, • ur^J^ •«.«»,. • 
 
 I.IVIB.3 XllXj 
 
 
This 
 I am 
 
 PART II— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 187 
 
 m u taking measures against Ccesar; l„ C«e.arem conHuUt! 
 
 60. The force of the dative can often be readily observed bv 
 paying strict attention to the exact meaning of tlfe vS> tus^ 
 
 ma:!:^ll-^7Sr'''7/,''V^ "i^^^-^*- ^"'"^- imperat. S 
 
 61. In Latin prose, never use the dative to express to after 
 a verb of motion ; as, 
 
 He came to the city : Venit ad urbem (not urbl). 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 3. Caesar is angry with the soldiers who have returned to the 
 camp. 2. Caesar gave the soldiers orders not to harm the pris- 
 oners. 3. The soldiers were ordered by Caesar to obey their 
 ofhcers and storm the town. 4. The soldier replied that the 
 general had participated in many battles. 5. He says that the 
 Crauls were pardoned by the senate, and ordered to leave the city 
 b. rhe general cannot be harmed by the soldiers, nor will the 
 soldiers be pardoned by the Roman people. 7. He ordered the 
 soldier to ask who was at the head of the army. 8. Casticus was 
 persuaded by Orgetorix to seize the supreme power in his state. 
 ». Ihey neither come to the assemblies, nor do they obey Ca3sar'8 
 command. 10. He said the Belgians had spared neither women 
 nor infants. 11. After dismissing the ambassadors, he asked if 
 the general had provided for supplies of corn. 12. He consulted 
 for the welfare of the soldiers whom Labienus commanded 13 
 He answered that the soldiers were always opposing C-esar's plans 
 and resisting the lieutenants. 14. After promising to obey the 
 consul he came to the camp to consult Ca^sar on these matters 
 15. The legions that had displeased the lieutenants apologized to 
 Caesar, and said they were wHling to take part in the battle. 
 
 f" 
 
nm 
 
 IMUMAMV t.AHN lUMitf. 
 
 if 
 
 KXKkCfSK VII. 
 
 'MHIIM Wrill I UK (iKNlllVlr. \ 
 
 'f^'^. \'v\\)H (»( /»»Vy( 
 
 I'HiiM wiifi nil,; Aiu.Arfvnr,. 
 
 m*,»f'>y,.r, ♦>»,.m»»M, »•,.,„/»♦»«,•„,• r7>/ 
 
 m/, r,'m,>mf>,'n„„ ,m.l f\mjrltuut, siirli 
 
 as 
 
 ««'inii\v; as. 
 
 ', oOfwrn'or, atv lullowcd l.y the 
 
 TVif. 
 
 ^'J.i fh, 
 
 jfOt„fhf ^.i.,y,, ,m; m,„,,., 
 
 ;»ll.v/ 
 
 \( 
 
 J'WtM ^. .rix'^i/ //),. ,^^Jf 
 
 iHimiM inriiikiiK |M'ii«<((>i<lt 
 
 •MlMMM^I'f tlolMMll. Tlu> .H,>„f 
 
 ii'nti'fii 
 
 •U'MiH. fl,' ,n,f,ut til 
 
 Mloinim oli||vU(>iM>(Mit 
 
 tlMMIIIIIIHMll 
 
 III 
 
 '""•';•;.• <'ollnH,l||,„ ,.H( A...I1IUH ul 
 
 li 
 
 »• » 
 
 I'lMninlnfKi,,. 
 
 im>mhnH(hv ohi (/)>,»«/,.,... ^ 
 
 11 ■ 
 
 iIInnO 
 otoi'lti 
 
 No. (I piu'MMo Will, ii,„ v(ih r 
 
 «OinHv,.; MM. II, foiyof (hv ,,ff 
 
 '•Ity nC |||,«H(. vnil 
 
 / 
 
 »>v.»//iv/ //,„/ ,/„;, 
 
 '" III tlllllvllMI 
 
 »H limy liiko a 
 
 ViMiir iiiiiii i„ ii„,„(„,„ I 
 
 •Mil llCtfllfll »0|||t. 
 
 '♦•'». riU' imiHMS.MIill (01 l.llhrr 
 
 and nyMV (^> »>,^'fy.y/ 
 
 llllln (IIOI. 
 
 <ii)i|M'is()nal) v(mIis, inff^vf^H 
 
 Kvnuiv«> oiih,. prison (0 \v| 
 
 ♦.V f)/ fm/».t»7,»M,"', ,v„„v>'».«), ijiI^j, ,1 
 
 U' 
 
 ♦»f»rl, fu,i, noxhsi^ ♦v.v^nl, mikI 
 
 "»m II IS ol" iin|tiiri,-tn( 
 
 «'. ex 
 
 <H"pl lllill 
 
 K^Mnlivr »Mso of {\\v 
 *t»f>orf,ffh^f> is t'vpivssrd I 
 Mihjirl iUvus.Kiw), i» lUMihMi 
 
 •'""' iuv iisrd inslcii.l ol || 
 
 '" "^» «i msTCiUi of iho 
 
 'V ;iM iiilmiiivo (will, ,,r will 
 
 ioii« 
 
 ;nul llu^ f/f^/rff? ,./' imi>orfaih'r> I 
 
 advtMJi 
 
 "'•"'XIII. or a Mil.siimlivccliiusi' 
 
 '»>■ IIh> genii ive of pii,v or n 
 
 11 
 
 M\ 
 
 lilt 
 
 ««i 
 
 AMn.K.s. // 
 
 «'«» turt of oiiiitliiiii ivt'lo 
 
 IS lAUM' 
 
 to tlh ."</,»/,- //,,r/ //, 
 
 ''y''';^':""' ''"^ '"''•';'.^/ .j^'"/' /" rA, n\,ht 
 
 I'lU'lM'O 
 
 // 
 
 liHoi.,,.» l^oM^^«,^lMlllOrl. /7»»,v 
 
 '- • »»f'mi/,y/,„M/,/ 6,. /,y,,/ „^„„Y / l>| 
 
 >■'< <;/ f/»v„/ iittfuntan 
 
 I'V 
 
 iVtflll IM>l|Mll»||(.iM 
 
 lU^foit llllt\||||,\. // 
 
 roihrnis tiK' rrnj ntiirh ,- || 
 
 /Mv««,»»7. llrtHni fnf 
 
 '••^ •!' ;/iv.»/ »»)iy.,.,/„»i(V ^/),»^ /) 
 
 OI» I II (Ml 
 
 'M. /»Vv,.»«,/, 
 
 «M'o»t Opis aiirloiHrtt 
 
 •'III tiih^n*. 
 
 ix 'fiitlnniti/nlhoiU 
 
 '•»'. fiif'miM?, /,! .'„// / 
 
 usod wifh (1,0 „,„„o of 
 
 '•> iiimm/, ^. r.V(»//,v/. 
 
 ^> /hkvm/. Inko (I 
 
 ••► povNon, hikI miwiv?!^ / 
 
 <'^|u'('ifdly wli(>n 
 
 10 JUVUMJlllVo; ON. //, 
 
 />f«- f 
 
 r»i.v.^,.Mmf.' ron,m„„o« lH>llt 
 
 f'< 
 
 I//.W / 
 
 »> ''.t7»»rxv /»//7 (or 
 
 " HHM(/ Mfi <•(»»»» HI 
 
 viiKum i'(><>onli\i)Atiif. / 
 
 
 «»M 
 
 irini'in- 
 
 <'«„„„„„,» poilouluiH iiiUoiabn 
 
 <^^ The loiiowing vrrhs tak 
 
 ittiii 
 
 '(«/ //le I'ommon 
 
 pntjfor (and (heir 
 
 r( 
 
 o tlu' alilativo: ftfor, /nior, 
 
 >mpounds), ;),)/»,),.. ^^.y, 
 
 fir. ft/nfi 
 
 or 
 
 and 
 
PAUT ll.—HVNTAX AND ('OMPOHfTfCIN. 
 
 ISO 
 
 M,Arf\*r;. 
 
 NiH'h as 
 I l»y tin- 
 
 '/ rfiiii'tii. 
 
 VtWlMlN 
 
 V liiltp u 
 I VOlllt. 
 
 iki' llic 
 'pt Ih.tl 
 
 '<"// '// 
 vilhou* 
 
 •liUlSl? i 
 
 or ail 
 I'utht .' 
 
 l»ll<>|IO 
 >V IIMM\ 
 
 ni tnon 
 
 hior, 
 and 
 
 vc'rh« nr ,,|,.,„y n,„| u,,„|, s,,,!, a.M .^.,1, mr./), a/mm/o, ,tc ; 
 flho, tijyor aiHl r,v,{/'i,A7, i„ the M-iim. (,r /o -,Vy ,m. 
 
 - ' " |. """'" 'f''" '« 'V ' (hlllllhltn III VI /I, (•niiiliinilta 
 
 ?."':; '":":";■ t/"'"'' '^^ " "'"'".• 7-^ h.,, ,ii„!fM ; v ' , 
 
 v.i,.o ,.i,ii».„,„„h". " • ' ''"'" '""""" •^"'' /'/"''-'Ml/.' 
 
 KXIOIICIHO 7. 
 
 IT" Mmm nniLnHMy M,,. I{H,„n,i LvmI.t r.-pji,.,! M.hI, ho rciiM for- 
 KH, Mio nl.l iiiM.ill. iM.l, nut, t,l,n ,•,.,...,.(, wnM.gH. iJ. ||o .nyn lio 
 '""" *'!V''r ^"'" ■ ^'^''"'"^ "'" ""'^''<"' •<• l'"MHMl tl.lM 
 
 :-"<-"H....l l...(|. .vol, „|„l tl.n M.UIO. 4. Ilo H«k0,| WI,V it, WHH M.o 
 —M of all l„ ol.V MiO IHWM. n. It i„ .y.„.,. i„t„,,, ,„, ,,.„ 
 "XlMVMl, u .ynii,. |,m.,„|m io fonl ,u|,.y for i,h. (J. Tl.nM, r.Hu.i.roH |,„ 
 .H t.Mii.K f..r(-.,0.ny.l.H|,ni,.|ion. 7. Mn t,1ii„l<H Mm, lldvoMi can 
 
 gaiM tliP Mov-roiK.. pnw..r of nil (Jmil. H. ih jnt,,,! out, how 
 
 KroaMy il, .onn.nMMl hoM, Mm n.,M,:,:i. and M.o .:oin,noM nnf.iy for 
 
 .0 foirOM of tlH, „ i.y to ho kopt, H|,H,i. J». WonI WHM hn.iiKht, to 
 
 .oHu,. MiHt, Mu, ..iKiuiiH woro hoHMtin^ inHnltiiiKly of M.oir vio.,o,-y. 
 
 '^'- '''•y-voraho,ii,,hMl in |m,i«o flHh, hut, fJ.o ononiy wus without, 
 ^"•ni. II. I ho i.K.HHoiiKof t.(.||H (IK (sn- mrlinn IIU), N.ll) fhuf 
 Hu'Ho tnh,.H ,.Ht, oon, .uul ILhI,. !l'. IIo fuiMifnlly .Vm-\u.vy^.A his 
 «l''lh'N, una now onjoyM woll imuihMl woulM. himI honor. i;{ (>„ 
 
 u'lmlf of M.oHo nion M.oy ro,,noHtu,l V,v.Hnv (,o .xoidno Ihh UMual 
 {mm) rlMi.om.y nn.l forluvu-nnoo. 14. Inntoad of n.onoy t.hoy 
 inako uNc, of h,on/.o, o,- Iwuh of iron n.a.lo of {liU.alh,, ,rn<,hed to) a 
 ooH,H,n woiKl.f,. in. UHinK Mu. hrid^o which ho luul huilt over the 
 nvor, (.r.,Har n.a.lo ,i Huddon afct^vck upon M.o onon.v and hona.n. 
 
 uwiMtor of thoir oani 
 
 V 
 
 M 
 
140 
 
 I'UIMAUY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 l3ii 
 
 If 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 Veri.s wfTH Two Cases. 
 
 (a) Accuaative and Genitive. 
 
 ti!!',.^"!!' "■" '■'""""'"'^' «'■•"'»'•«.'/. cnulemnhu) and ac^uU- 
 "// take the a.-,.u,s.„vc. „r the pcrso,-,, a„,| ,he Keni.ivc of ti.e 
 thing called t„ „„„d, or of the fault or crime charged ; a!, 
 
 ««n.uiuo lnJ<,„,tatlH oo.hUm,; nave' ,„„<■. ' '"^"^^'<''. E6« 
 
 navorunfc v6t7!. ^^ ' ^'''"^ '"-' '^'*'^ ^"""^'^ •' Euin daui- 
 
 tlJtffM^::?' U^'";;!;;;:^ i;.HH3 passive, tl. .ccusative ..eeonnn, 
 
 that causing tho foe hi. ir r^ ^ '"' f '*"' '■"'*^ ^''" «='^'»i^ive of 
 
 i>//i//-r </,.,« .. Koru.u uJ. Uh re r " n^,/., ) " ''''T/ -^l'" ^''^'^ 
 E6« vltao tacMlet. "^ "' *' '^^^H^^ted with life : 
 
 tive of a neuter r n -^^Z iT, t'r "','^";'l^' ^'^' ^'^^ ^^-"^'^- 
 v5« taeclet. / .,L ..,.„ J .^^^ " rXl^.n^piJ:;: ^ "" ^*"'^" 
 (h) Acaimtim and Dative. 
 69. Ve.bs of »;«„^ and <«i.-„j, „,„y, ..,|,„ • 
 »"--•, and many transitive verbs compounded Tith ceTrtn 
 prepos,.,ons, such as, W, an.,, ,„, ijr,ob,,ost, praeT 
 take the accusative and dative (.see section 56) • as ' 
 
PAilT II.-SYNTAX AND CriMPOSlTION. ' HJ 
 
 (c) 7'w;o Accusatives. 
 
 One of ,hc..,c. „..<,,„„,,, is , 'd • V > "'^' ;""'" '" """«• 
 forms an essential n,r( „f I •"•■''' ""•■ """■^' "hich 
 
 'ion wi., .,.e en.:!::; v::: r:y-; ■-"oconnec. 
 
 railed an aceusative L.,\; ^ ""•'"" "^ ""■• ^'-•'•''. and may be 
 adjee„ve re„resenting such ol-jeot or Quality """" " 
 
 runt. //„ '^mM,,r,-d ki,„^j TiLJ,r:;!r" ';••""""•■" ••■•"»>'«< 
 
 <fcma«dW««/,,,,„„y«,,, «/V« 7j »■-•« l.en«Bcl„,„ r„g6. >,■ 
 
 vlctos qiicKjue docot. •" "/ ««/ . * ortuna buUl artom 
 
 ^^CZi^^irZ ;K^:?« ^r- ^'-.eH sul>ject, 
 ^mr: Belli artem edoctu^tlt. ''''*' ^""^^'^^ ^^^^ «»•* of 
 
 other by d,e prtsil^Tar^ '°"™^' '^ '''^ ^^^^ -<^ '^^ 
 
ua 
 
 riJi 
 
 IMIIMAUV LATIN IIOOK. 
 
 in... pHKM.vo, llu. ol,j„dof Mu,vorl ..u„u.H Kul.j." \vh in" .,; 
 
 ;;»...,• .uvuKnt.vo ,H .vlHf.uMl ; HM. 77,,. onnu '"'M /./ aol J )/,/;; 
 
 trnn , ^.HOMur l«| aiilnmin ml vorllt. 
 
 (d) /Icf'ti^fr/Mf ffm^ Ahlativt^. 
 
 'X .;•, 7 :'' ;:''r'"f''""'' •""••^- '*•"•"- -avo. o-mm.,.,,. 
 
 / .yn/V"'/ /."». ;-/^|n/u.,r ,um« ; On...... .....nl- .,„,t. ' w/ , 
 
 Httii hon (D.lHhvoHii.l a,vuH,d v... or (2) ncniNafivo hm,| al.lrtivp 
 
 rnuMlA ,u IKO- ,lonnf. //. ... r.nnM ih. rit,, m.7 ,';/•. 
 Mu..,..,, urbl .I,..„.,.,UmIII. 1»|„..o uHhm.. HM.u..„l,Mllt. 
 
 ' (o) r?//i^>r ComtrucfiouH. 
 
 75. Two (Imivvs iho ol.joct 1,) which (ihr .lativr of intorcsl) 
 niul tho uhjcrt or nul lor which (the ,L,tivc ol purpose or 
 •smuv) arc foii.,,! (1) with a lew ititra.isitivc or passive vcrhs 
 mm,fh\ vmi.l (2) with Irai.silivc verbs in connection with the 
 accusative : as, 
 
 or»nt. //r ^.^/ ^,v cohort.'* for tho th'fnivr of thv romn • Oiiliwiiin 
 »w ,i/,i;,/r \olT <laio lioo mlhl vlUd. 
 
 t .,ll ; ' < f . '•'^; 'Wvon.K wit!, tl.o InKcr'tn,! l,„inK hro„d 
 
 • iVh,"- I ?' " '"* "*•''*'"' »'""'*^- "'■ ^''''"''^ ''"• """.(<;..) <r 
 .r/ ' M<^ . llonUno «,„ic« utehatu... 7/« iMC(i ^/.csc mm (oh) u^'h ■ 
 
 thiil;'!«"'1?- ^'"'T \'^!^^'^'*\'>f ;»'« PPrs„n aiMl aii al.laiivo of tho 
 tluig, JiH, vln*.n.s^H,s iUand the liomonH fr-m oil ihiul ■ Ari." 
 
 ''***m*. 
 
I'AUT II.-HVNTAX ANI, OOMPOHITION. 
 
 148 
 
 KXRIU'IMM 8. 
 
 'I"" liHM.,,,,,,,^ I ,iii„,| II,,,,,,,;- **^'.;';'' »",« '"■•"«M. I- (!,.«.. 
 
 "f "■-"■«. 7. Tl,„ «„l,, •,..'""•" "" ' ■■ i"'' ""'1 tU.< ..,.„„k, 
 
 ' """ '>"'y -."I ::,,::;::;'■;■•■";', :•■ '- -" >- 
 
 '"'""'"' «'. .■hi.iK, „„, ,J, L ; . """""""ii>'-.,H wi .1 
 
 «H" ".„, ,.l,l„ , ,.„„n„| ,,','" '«• <'''*''«l .«ul. I», , 
 
 "•"'' 'i,„ .™.,,i ,;,",';:"" ;••";•■'"'■-• •". h.. .■„pii,, 
 
 ;';■", ',';■"■■-"'"" ' -.-..f 1 ::,;:'■ "I';";?-' '■""' -)'"' 
 
 "" "'" """"'.y ««n, l,„„li„„ ||,„i, '*'• *"•"'"■ »■'"■ i'if"i-.i...,l 
 
 ' *'"" "f> ""■""'•'"'■il' "pu.. Hub „„„. . 
 
 i:X(CR(.I,«|.; IX. 
 
 CoNDITlONAf, SuNTIiNCKs. 
 
 78. Conflitional clau.sus (ihii i^ , i i ■ , 
 
 «»-.hing i., ,,ssu„u.,i fo. . 1 ; "''"'r' :'""*^ '■" "'-h 
 
 and ooc,,si.„„„, ,y ,„,, ,_ _; ,:;;';,: /j~. '- /. 
 not nhsnU it wonidU ./w L "•'"""' ""'"'* '^«t. //Ar were 
 
144 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 one to me : Colloquio diem constitue, aufc, si Id minus vis, aliquem 
 ad me mitte. Unless some assistance is found in Ccesar, I shall seek 
 another abode : Nisi si quid in Caosare erlt auxllll, aliud domi- 
 cilium petam. 
 
 79. The conditional sentence, as a whole, is made up of two 
 parts, the subordinate clause containing the condition — t^e Pro- 
 tasis—and the principal clause, containing the coxiclusion — the 
 Apodosis. 
 
 80. The most obvious distinction of conditions is that of (1) 
 present or past, in which the question of fulfilment has already 
 been decided, and (2) future, in which there is always at least 
 a possibility of fulfilment. 
 
 81." In present conditions, if we wish to represent the sup- 
 posed case as contrary to fact, we use the imperfect subjunctive 
 in both clauses ; as, 
 
 If he had dnything (implying that he has not anything) he would 
 aivp. it : SI quid haberet daret. 
 
 If nothing is implied as to the fulfilment of the condition, the 
 present- indicative (or the perfect *or completed action) is used ; 
 as, If he has awjintny K gi^rs' »» quid habct dat. If he has 
 done that he has made a mistake : Quod sl fecit orravit. 
 
 82. In past conditions, if we wish to represent something as 
 contrary to the fact, to imply that the condition was not ful- 
 filled, we use the pluperfect subjunctive in both clauses ; as, 
 
 If he had had anything (implying that he ha<i nothing) he woidd 
 have given it : SI quid habuisset dedlsset. 
 
 If nothing is implied as to the fulfilment of the condition, a past 
 tense of the indicative is found nn both clauses ; as. If it was not 
 laiofnl it was not necessary: ai non licebat non nocesse erat, 
 
 83. With regard to future conditions, we may state theni; in 
 either of two ways : 
 
 (1) In the more vivid form, by means of the future or future 
 perfect indicative ; as, If he has (or shall have) anything he will give 
 it : Si quid Iiabeblt dablt. If he returns I shall send him to you i 
 Si redierlt euni ad te mlttam. 
 
 (2) In the less vivid form, by means of the present subjunctive 
 in botii clauses ; as. If he should have (or liad or were to Jmve) any- 
 thing he xoould give it : SI quit* Iip«beat det. 
 
PABT II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 145 
 
 apodoms has ,00, il (or ,h„M, in thL fa^elon) '°' """^ ""^ 
 
 85. Occasionally we find a tense, or even a mood, in the 
 apodosis different from that in the protasis, according as one 
 notion or another is prominent ; as, 
 
 venet. locus ipse crat praesidio barbaris. Nor, if he shmlddo 
 oWtme luu he any U'Uhority amongst h4s vassjjf ^^ 
 81 faciat. u lam mter suos habet auctoritateni. In the ai odoSs 
 .the uuperative may be used instead o{ tlie indicat ve as S"'" 
 yonrpomt if yon so wish it: Vlnclte «i itu vultls ' ' *^ 
 
 coSu^a■^<^^^]{^"' r' f ^'''- ^^'''''^^^' ''^^^^ ^'^^' ^'^th periphrastic 
 fn.inf f 1^ *^hf ."^^^"^.'^tive IS regularly used, in the apodosis, 
 
 Zsseiil:LTJ'r"f^'''f/ ^f^^^^-v-^^^^^t out, h. Jad z 
 
 crossed {or would have been able to cross] the river: Caesar, si pro- 
 
 l^attle the soldiers should have engaged them: Si hostes sui 
 poes^tem fecissent, mllites proeliuni committere debuTrunt Z 
 mihtlbus proeham conuuittendum fult). "erunt [^or, 
 
 86. Alternative conditions are introduced by slve . . slve Cor 
 
 sen . sen) tvhether or, which follow the rules for si, with 
 
 regard to mood and tense ; as, Whether he wins the day or loses it, 
 he tmll not return ; siye vXcorlt slve vlctus orit non redlbit. The 
 verb IS frequently omitted ; as. Whether by chance m- by the will of 
 heaven, thatpart of the state was the first to pay the penalty : Slve 
 casu slve consilio deorum immortalium, ea pars clvitatis prinoepa 
 poenas persolvit. ^ '^ 
 
 87. In indirect narration, that is, after verbs of sayinff and 
 thinking, the conditional sentences assume the following 
 
 .forms; 
 
 10 
 
 .,if««*!-^ 
 
146 
 
 III; 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 SI quid lirtbeo do, r elicit »e. nl quid Imboat, dnro. 
 becotms • - .\dlxlt «^, «i quid haberot, dare. 
 
 SI quid IiubOlmiii [dlolt HIS Hi quid hubcrot. ^ 
 
 diibaiii, lm'om;s \dlxlt ho, hI quid iiaborot. /•^o'"'"'©. 
 
 SI quid habul d«dl 
 
 bvcomv.'i 
 
 I, r<Uclt Hl\ Hi quid hllbuorlt. dlMliHNO. 
 (.dixit HIS Hi quid hubuiHHCt, diMliHH«. 
 
 SI quid bubebofdlclt H.S Hi <,ul<l haboat. daturun. chho. 
 
 dabo. becomes (dixit h.s hI qui.l haberet. daturun. Z^.. 
 SI quid lial)uai 
 
 do in, hecomeH 
 
 81 
 
 iifdlolt HIS Hi quid habeat, datiirum chhc. 
 (dixit HIS Hi quid haPHM'ot. daturuni chho. 
 quid babiVen. rdlclt |his hI quid baberct, datui 
 
 ar,im, becomes Idlxit/ (or ohhc). 
 
 dare 
 
 I rum fulHH3 
 
 '^'.irn*""**/"'"''*^'" ('"'*' 1"^'' "' """^ IwibulsHct. daturum 
 dedlHHoni, /»<(()/H«,s\dlxltj fuiHHu. "»^urum 
 
 This section need not be considered until the exercise on 
 indirect narration is reached. See Exercise XXVI. 
 
 Exercise 0. 
 
 1. If C,«tic,u, should Hoi.o tho m,pro,„o power in l,i„ state, Cffl8«r 
 w„ul,l «■„«„ w,>r Hg,>,n,,t l,i,u. 2. If tho „rmy is i„ „.,„d ho,.lth 
 Ousar ,h«s„ot f„,„. t,h„ enemy. ;i. ,[ ,,ur t,.,,,,ps^„l tit 
 
 4. If the (,auls had l,een oo„,,„ere,l by Cesar tliey would have 
 .....od,Htely sent and«»sadors to hi„, „once„,i„s iLo. 1 The 
 Oenuaus would not now ho earrying ou war with the Gauls if* 
 Anovstus had boon defoato,! I,y the Ito,„a,. troops, a H 1 is 
 reported to Anovistus, he will inflict the severest punishment on 
 he hostages. 7. If the general hM not sent three cohorts t^ the 
 lieutenant s assistance, the enemy would have gained the vLrv 
 
 utZ:: ;:::•'"'';'"'' be in the greatest p'eril. 8. If™.t'r 
 had con, at that tnne, he gave ,t to the soldiers. 9. Tlie Helvetii 
 would return to their territories if the Roman people w re to ™t 
 elude a..«") pe,u..e with them. 10. Uulcs Cesar enro^ two 
 legions .n that place, he „il, not be able to carry on tl"" r sue 
 cossfully with the (};uils 1 1 Tf t i • 
 
 armv L, R ^'""'J^- H- If Labienus wore ut the head of the 
 
 army, the Romans would easily defeat the enemy. 12 If the 
 enemy had set fire to aii their towns and villages and burnt up all 
 
PAKT 11.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. I47 
 
 after .uidn.Vht 14 if ,.. , 7''"^/' " ^'^ vvo.gl, anchor a little 
 
 KXERCISE X. 
 
 Clauses of Concession. 
 
 88. Closely connected with conditional clauses in which . 
 -m--l case is assun,ed, are clauses of conces b "r^e^ 
 the supposition is conceded or admitted Sur-h H 
 intro^'uced by : lummcu. buch clauses are 
 
 would he wHhont <lannn ZfV/./T f^^'/'f, ''^ •^^"" //'« W/ie 
 
 lion iMttaimt. viutbut, t.imuu comimttendum 
 
 . (J>) Qmmqnam, which UHually assumnM ,. f..,.f i 
 
 iiia.cntivo ; as, AUho,u,h the., ir^^X, l^-^l "'"'"^'"^ *^« 
 
 monitCs volo. *'""'»'1«»'» H«"t ho.stu.s, ooh ctiaiii atiiue etiam 
 
 [i«V Uave klL appoint 2/ "''^^ " f^"'^^ ^^'^ --^?/ --V 
 
 ^^o>u,i turn o./s:^ £ St;::.,sr';/ • ^''''''' ''' ^^-^^ 
 
 in^;i:nLl^\jr^^^^ «ingle words 
 
 understood. The w,>rds Mlotil fi ■'"'^'•^*^"»'^t« clause being 
 Hame case as the worL t wlil ^^J^nctions are in thf 
 
 //'"// an; therj dare ^ « ^v, 7 "^^.^ ll^n' '' '/ '''^ J^^^'^^^r few 
 quemvis numeruni ennih ' , '''''-^ ''''"''"'r of ravrdry : Ad 
 
 audent. //«c/,J]l."!;;^^•^.:^;;^'r.*^'--J (-'/#.'/ Hlnt)-adlre 
 venit. He says he wUl^cot^H n tiZ T "^ ''• f**^* '''*»^*"'' ""^ 
 nm viotaren/, reditarum.' (Clf ^ct rT S^r ^^^^^ '' 
 
148 
 
 PiUMAHY LATIN HUOK. 
 EXEHCIHB 10. 
 
 1. Although tho onemy liHvo a groat iiuiiihor of cavahy, CjoHar 
 can oaHily dv.fvat tlwui. 2. Evou though lus nhouhl havo mot witli 
 favoral.Io woathor hu would not havo HaiUul for liritaiu. li. If 
 Cassar oonu's up with tho i-uoniy ho will oa.sily dofoat tlioni, liow- 
 ovor bravo and nuu.orou.s (t-hoy may h,,.) 4. AUJiough Ca'sar haH 
 Konfc two k^giouM to f ho aNHi.stanco of tlio lioutonant, tho onoiuy havo 
 not yot boon (U^foatod. 5. Kvon if (V-nar woro in couuuan.l of tho 
 aruiy ho wouM not bo ablo to th>foat tlio onouiy. (;. Tho Holvotii 
 niado an atton.pt fo oro.s.s tho Khono, alth.-ugh tho Koiuans had 
 oonchidod a poaoo with tlioni. 7. Kvon though ho ,sh..,dd think 
 that ho c.uhl (h. IhiM without daugor, ho wouhl n..t nond troopH to 
 tako tho city by Ntonu. 8. Although fow (in nuud.or.s), thoy Haid 
 thoy wouKl novor return to Iho city unless victorious. \). I^lvon if 
 tho onoiuy had taken up their position on tho higher ground, thoy 
 could not hayo withstood tho attacks of our men. JO. Though you 
 can persuade those luen to send and)assa(h.rs, you catniot^'make 
 Ihem our frien.ls. M. Although Ciesar .saw that tho logi.ms wore 
 being hard pressed, he was unwilling lo order tho sohliors to 
 retreat. 12. Even if Ctvmr had l)oen informed that tho ononiy 
 wore close at hand, ho would not havo ordered tho troops to 
 advance. i:i. If Oa>sar had seen that tho tenth legion was being 
 hard pressed by tho etuuny, ho would havo sent four cohorts to the 
 lieutenant's assistance. 14. Though ho wore present now, ho 
 couhl do nothing. 15. Even if the Holvotii should r(iturn to their 
 torritorios, Gmsur would not ctmcludo a peace with them. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 Uses of tiik Accusative. 
 
 90. (a) The direct object of ati active transitive verb, or of 
 a transitive (lei)onent, is put in the accusative ; as, 
 
 IIv proi'ies ihe sohlicr: Mllltem laudat. Casar follourd the 
 memy: Caesar Iio8ti>8 socutus est. 
 
 (6) The accusative is used with prepositions, chiefly the 
 
 '^itSHaU., 
 
ho 
 
 PAUT ir.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 149 
 
 foIJmving : ad, ante, apud, in (generally with the idea of 
 -> :<>n towards), inter, per, ,.., ,.,,,,,,^ ,,, ^^l. Me' o 
 "><>t>on or approach), trans and ultra ; as 
 
 /^is ;r;nor't^^^^^^^^ ...e.. ...uit: //. ., ., .^,, ,,, 
 
 . t/"«u>t/.m{/. Sub voHporuin d.,nium purvOnit. 
 uvt, section ].U) IS j)ut in the accusative; as 
 
 J)2 I>urafon of time (time hor, lony) and extent of space 
 and measuren^ent are expressed by the accusative ; as 
 
 is two/rH toil,: iH i„s ?- ''r"'" ^'^ '^'^""'- '^'/'« -"''wci 
 
 93. Place <o w/rich (limit of motion) is generally denoted by 
 the accusative with ad or in ; as, "t^noica Dy 
 
 in'I:.:^;:.:;;l:/';:i^ii.^-r- ;7i^^ //^ f <>ntM Brum. . 
 
 irruUmm^: |>«„,„,„ iit. U vtt.nrTJ^^]^^^^^ country); ^s, //e 
 ii^^ <voH. /. Uonw .. U6UUUU vJiat. ^ ' ^'"^ '''"''^''^' «"" ''»'»<^- 
 
 -Wl;:!);':„rr.ll:;;7;;: - «-l -^/-a ^ denote ^n7o the 
 into de%,^f:ZT:^ Z::^''t^f - <- «^y as, //« came 
 
 T^^^i ?!:x;;;i;:f:i,;:Ve':!^lL^ -- ^^> ^^« --. «. 
 
 i.'o..., while their eq.dv ^nt;^' l^''^ ^Y^^^f^. rmKlifying 
 Hre both treated u,s HclverlKsmodSyh;'"'^ ""'""'" ""^ *« """"-. 
 
150 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Sim-are {tn hope, fiyr), toko un nccusativo in Latin while in Fnc.H,h 
 
 95. Intransitive verbs of motion, and some others, when 
 compounded with ad, circum, in, ex, trans, ob, per, prar 
 and praeter, frequently become transitive, and take an accusa- 
 tive; as, 
 
 tteW«r'"'rif.f'f "•/•"•"■•"»«'«» ..«Bro«u, o,t. m began to cross 
 fheu surpass all the (4nnN A - J! Urbem expugnavlt. 
 
 96. ^ome intransitive verbs take wh-if ia r...ii«i 
 Maxlninm partem lacte at<uie necoro vTvnnf ^ ^^-^'^'t./'/^ ^«r"e .• 
 pounded with <nms and ad, see Exercise VIII. 
 
 EXUBCISE 11. 
 
 of the^™;.'''' ""T"" "'", ""'^ "'"^ '" "'"""»"<» 'he attacks 
 enc,,.. , ^. Fur several buccossvc days C',™ar drow up his 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 151 
 
 line of buttle, and ga\ n the enemy an opportunity of fighting. 
 . 3. After dismiHHing the umhuHHudors and encouraging the lieu- 
 tenant, CiBmr returned to the army at Rome. 4. Having become 
 apprised of their design iie led his arm, to the river Thames in 
 the territory of the enemy, and afterwards returned home. 
 5. The Gauls had already led three-fourths of their troops across 
 that river. (\. Cu...sar led his army into the vicinity of Bibracte, 
 and remained there fifteen days. 7. The soldiers pursued their 
 march for five miles through marshes and forests. 8. He asked 
 the general how many miles the soldiers had marched, but he was 
 silent on that point. 9. The Gauls shuddered at the cruelty of 
 Ariuvistu.s J veil in his absence (literally, absent). 10. He said that 
 the Gauls lived for the most part ou milk and flesh. 11. He came 
 from Geneva to Rome, and afterwards set out for the country. 
 12. The river, he replied, was sixty feet wide and about five feet 
 deep. 13. He crossetl the river, and, having attacked the enemy, 
 he began to fitorm the city. 14. Caesar led his army across the 
 bridge and followed the enemy four days through forests and 
 marshes for fifty miles. 15. It is dangerous for the Germans to 
 be accustomed to cross the Rhine. 
 
 EXERCISE XIL 
 
 Uses of the Dative. 
 
 100. The indirect object (that to or for which anything is or 
 is done) is put in the dative, 
 
 (a) With intransitive and passive verbs; as, He yields to the 
 time : Temporl cedit. A book was given me : Liber mihl datus 
 est. 
 
 (6) With transitive verbs in connection with the accusative : as, 
 He gave me a book : Mlhl libruin dedit. (See section 69.) 
 
 N.B.— In Latin the dative is found after such words mpolUceor, 
 promitto, do, died, etc., where in English to is often omitted after 
 the corresponding verb; as, All this I promise yon : Id omne tibl 
 
 i -v-i. -t-tc iOlu. mc live itcuiviuiui lUid come: i^egatuiu veiu»ue 
 
 mihi dixit. 
 
iri2 
 
 IMMMAIIY LATIN IIOUK. 
 
 101, Thr i.ulnrrl ohjrri i„r|,„|,..; |!„. ,|;iliv,. „f i,,f.r^,t 
 {vomu^o^n .t, mrom,no,hl .m,I (In .|,„.vr ..I s.rri,,, m.L or 
 /'»/»•;», )w (siv s.rlioh 7 A), mm, , 
 
 t%'[f ''o»s„lf lh,i, o„„ ,„t,,rHts: Nll.l .-niiMlilmil // , I. 
 
 lO'J TluMlMlivr nl .nlnvsl is nsr.l will, n.lirrliv.vs lo i.uli 
 '«;';' «'"' P'^fMM. n, ilnng .n-,vir,l l,v lh.< .p.i.li.v whiH, llu- 
 a^ljorluv cl.noics, iluu tmv.mis wh,,:,, ilu- .|ii<ility is di.xrU.d- 
 
 ; ". 17, 'V'""!"""" '"'I- »«...,,.. „„„„.„. ,„„.,„. 
 
 vn'hl,!:„';i:'';i,,l''L';::';'',,r ;";;,',;:/';-';;•;;'" »■ .i ,.,1 1,, .,i,„ 
 
 in.I;i.i "f':;;:!nl!'';',';'ir;;,:,'''''''''";'' ,"?'■"• i- ■'•"i". 
 
 .■../.'■';,:,'::„;;:, ;!;:.:;;;;;'';r:r,,:';,,:;i";:;,,,;;i;' '• - -'» ., ''- 
 
 Afutunun. ^SooLvHourS!) "'''"'■"'"" '"••""" l"M'"lr KonnlnT 
 H).\ Tho ,hliNv is ,vmu1;mIv „s,.I will, the KvniM,liv(» to 
 
PAItT n.~HVNTAX AND noMI'OHITH.N. 
 
 15,') 
 
 Tl»i« «laMvn In roiuul hIm 
 
 I" Willi III,, 
 
 II 
 
 ••' "Mllll IMoliniiiM, «>M 
 
 'W'lli'Mi; HM, Y'/m^ a 
 
 •'••lll|MMIIIl| It-IIMOM of M 
 
 UllH lll'l 
 
 w 
 
 <i'<'il ii>if <ti>pnnuU, 
 
 II' M 
 
 M veil. «nvt«iiiM llip iJHli 
 
 "' ;'H<;.I i,,,,M.,.MnMH||v, H..,| II i,„„,, 
 
 lllidl 
 
 'vt' Willi ,1 III' „/, j 
 
 '»K<'iil ; (iM. 7V) 
 
 I 
 
 v.n.iMhkMvn, Mm Knniii.iivn i,ii,Mi 
 
 i«iiil.y in lilu.lv Im/iHm.., Mm 
 
 '' I'llllHllLl 
 
 M tiM.Ml iiiMloml i.f ll.n'.lal.iviM.ni 
 
 t 
 
 •niiMKiiiiii (.Ml (\ iiiiiKii 
 
 I'l'ixl l>rnh,„nl hj, l/,v ^,,1,1 
 
 illn. 
 
 W 
 
 nni.ll hil, 
 
 'I'l' uiu'nn 
 
 till 
 
 Nui 
 
 •'■•"iIhu: ..//,. ,„„,/,, ,„ , 
 
 "• 'i.N ill). mini,, „„| 
 
 HI n|i|ininiil, 
 '"/I f>l/fliv hum/, {line 
 
 II 
 
 ir ('(( 
 
 ),M 
 
 Hum <>fl( ft ,„j|,| 
 
 100. Th.. (I'll 
 WonI, liiti 
 
 itvi'i'ith nuiihl I,, I 
 
 iiHiiltnl hif „h: Nf,|,, 
 
 I'llllHII 
 
 Unl hy 
 
 IIH 
 
 m 
 
 *) crMiNiiinti. 
 
 C'OllMtlhwi- 
 
 IVC I 
 
 iM nfli-n loiiit,! (I,.|,„M(lii,,.. iH.i 
 
 "H llic ,-illiiv pirdiriil,., wl 
 
 on (I 
 
 H'u\y,U 
 
 l"»H.scs,siv(-;i,li,.,iJV(. orugcnii 
 
 Hint cnHc ; (iH, 
 
 III ,',nn>' in HUflif ,,('11, 
 Ihni triahnf /„ („■ hhiim/ 
 
 '"'I'l'-'iHi/cs IJu- |,t.fs„i, „r tj 
 
 H-n; we hIkhiM rxpcci n 
 •vc. This i.s ciill,;,! llu, flnfim ,/ 
 
 III 
 
 '' ''iinni/: IIomHImik in 
 
 ''••♦.M //) ^'ii.Hiir 
 
 vuloliniil,. Ilrlhrvwhiumifal. 
 
 H t 
 
 »g rciirt'Hcntcd hy 
 
 ••r.iiM|Mi()|,iim vruiil/, 
 
 |>»T»|r'ril 
 
 ('(rmtr'H/vii: i 
 
 j/i'^: rHOdiM-I pni'^fliT mm 
 
 'iioNiirl /III immIOn hO 
 
 'O". '•''"' H..,.u||n(|,y/,,VrfMnl,i\ 
 
 «:;^::;:ir:;i!i^/'":"-'i:^';i-"";-:irx; 
 
 "IN iiHn.1 I.MloMigiiHi,,, MmiM.rHmi 
 
 ('••• mrfr/i //(»(/) I, 
 
 I'niiir.H fit ),i, 
 
 'I'li'N <|,il,ivo iH HlwayH H IMU-Hoiinl 
 I OS. V 
 minor, mWr;, (•(,;.), «,.,. |,;^^ 
 
 .^ IN M;ii«l; HH, 
 
 ^' Mi»l v«)iiil, ail mn, /Ai 
 
 »"^avii,. 
 
 pt'OIHMIti, 
 
 -v;n-io.^vi.rl,swi.lMh.Ml;U^ 
 
 '-<•'«(• VI.; ;i,n| for verlis ll.al take 
 
 Iwo da lives, or ;i d^t 
 sec ICxcrci.sc VUl. 
 
 'vc ill cuimcitioii with Homr oil 
 
 u;r case. 
 
 1. ThnrmiiMMi limy nil 
 
 <■«'<'♦.. L'. lloHuill MlHl, 11 
 
 KxRiii'lrtK 12. 
 
 '" <<"i''H Mir„w MmiiiHMlvnH al, (•, 
 
 hy you. ;"{. \ 
 
 X'H.' in/.,M,„rH won, Ihm am^ (Ufn-nUy, 
 
 itwarH 
 
 it i'aiv), nml Mi„,|, M 
 
 iiiprv, 
 
 '" l"''»viM(!o miiHl) ho ilofoniloil 
 
 auHworoil Mwii, |,j 
 
 '•■; "'"■'^'' "-MMull |,Im, f^oimml'H in(,on,Hl, 
 
 hIkmiIiI h1 
 
 mlvuiitjigo of 
 
 ways oIk-v f,| 
 
 '" "Kill H llfMim WUH A 
 
 4. II, 
 
 jn I 
 
 ^'(.imivd, find i! 
 
 »''<>viHl,IIH. 5. TllO Holil 
 
 im-M 
 
 m'oryop^„.f,i„,ily. ({. To M.umo .imii tho 
 
 10 gOIHtlHJ Hhoilill tukO 
 
 rtllHWor WHS 
 
154 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 given time- tho gonorul I.ul left tw.. col.ortM uk h protection to tho 
 Hlups ,. IK, nnM «.,„,,, Ou,Km.nK.un,.,taa why ho wum cnunuu 
 into t a, ...r,,t.oru.H of tho (Jcnnans. h. H. shvv that (ho ..ver 
 wouhl 1,0 .xtron.oly dnu^.v.uH to the .Hvnhy. !». Ho sui<l that (ho 
 .!oi«wtur.. of tho HolgiunN whh liko u Hight. JO. VVonl whm 
 brou^,u ^ . ih. Uoutonant ut tho can.,, th.a, Cosur hu.l givon o,vlorH 
 to tho soi. horn not (o hurl 1,h.|< any woupon u hutovor at tho 
 cnnny 11 Ho uskod tlmt i^ might ho ponuittod hin, t„ ,1,, this 
 with UvmvH approval. 12. An otHcor wh. ha.l part.cipatoa u. 
 '"HPy ongagonumts whh in cnnnand (,f tho troopn. Vi Ho 
 answorod that Ca.snr had thr.alonod tho loa.Iors of tJ... onon.ywith 
 doatJK ,md had .rdc-rod tho.n to funuHh two hundred h<.st.tgoH. 
 14. llH,y thought thoy woro g,.ing to porHua.lo (ho Ronuum t<. 
 allow tho HoKotii to pass through tho torritorios of tho AUo- 
 lm.geH. 15. Tho Huldiors told Kahionus that O^h^u- had always 
 Hhown spocial indulgenco to tho tonth legion. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 Uses of the Genitive. 
 
 109. A noun limiting or defining another noun, and not 
 denotu^g the same thing, is put in the genitive; as, 
 
 ryrnv,'.s ora^/,,».s/ CleeronlH oratidnoH. Ca'sor\, lieutenanh : 
 CucKariH legati. T/w braeenj of the siMlers : Virtus nillltun,. 
 
 This detining gonitivo may be posscssim, subjectiiw, ohkctive, 
 
 110. The genitive is esptxnally used in connection with 
 another noun to point out th<i possessor of whatever that noun 
 signifies; as, 
 
 Cmar'sarmii: CaoMariH oxcrcitus. 
 
 111. If the noun which is qualified bv the genitive denotes 
 some action or quality such that, if it were expressed by a verb, 
 the noun in the genitive would be the subject of thai verb, the 
 case is called a subjective genitive ; as 
 
 The flight of Dumnorix .- niimnori<>'>o <^i 
 
 as. 
 
 •g" 
 
PART n.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 155 
 
 ^^Tn the vorb form tlik would be, Dumm^ix Jkd : D«.„„orU 
 
 112. The ohjectiv: genitive denotes that which is the object 
 of the feehng or action, that is, the genitive would be the 
 object of the acr-)n express^' by the modili- d noun in verb 
 form ; as, 
 
 n../.ar ./,/,./.., ,, ,tiH fhmv. As ftHontonco ,i might Htand, 
 *r (i Jmr death : ^\orfim tmmiim. 
 
 113. The fa.tiUve gcmtive is used to denote the whole of 
 which a part is taken. 
 
 This genitive is found in connection with nouns, pronouns 
 numen. adjectives (of all degrees), and occasionally with 
 aUserbs of quantity, tin^ and plare ; as, 
 
 Part of tfm MkvH: .Mrs „,iiit,,„„. Winch of yon? 0..,'« 
 
 111. With reference to the partitive genitive, 'he following 
 points shouid be noticed : ^ 
 
 'J"n^U •'' T^'^'"" "''^'^ "^'^^^ ""'' -Hljoctivo of tho third declension, 
 as. Nothing base: Nihil tu,- (1 ,., ,Mny mean =niliilHoI^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 (ft) It is not used to den<.tu the whole or any loc-il n«,.f ' 
 
 »flr.no„. At the begins,;.,, ./ spring: l4 Ve'ro u"'^ 
 
 oxpreHs.(,u8 the adjective iHually comas first ^^ 
 
 (<•) Wlien the adjective and the 8u}).stantive denote tho «« n^ 
 
 as' J/z'^V*'''""' "'■ ''""^'^' '^'^ ^I^P'-^ive constmct ' l^Zd 
 
 as, All of lis were nrr^mf • '^mnn- -■•- .,r / ^? usea, 
 
 few of w mrvived • nt .i«. ' " ««^-r;i.-n us. r. .: su. that vew 
 
 JK.W oj MS mrvtvea . Dixlnms nos perpauc<i« suparesse 
 
156 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 * 4 '■ 
 
 as, A few of our men full - I> , V .' ^ '^'"^ paititivu j,'t'mtivo; 
 
 >'<''>/ thin men: Phucom ..v „..# j- ,■ ,. ^""""t- ihetj l„d a 
 
 prmlm,;.: Vir ...a,|„, "t."lirM* J ,^' ".*!' ^ ™">^ "f "nKjmU 
 
 tHo... p«..„.„. ",*: " 7x .i,'/ ;'.'■''„' '■"/"' ''"■''■• *'•■»'" 
 
 ciburiu. -^ !/»™«a lum. Ti-ium ii.eu«um molita 
 
 See also ablative of c, inwteristic, section 124, b. 
 
 case of prober nnmes) ■ as Th,7il •f''™"-'"' (<i»l'ecially m tlio 
 
 .n i]!' f^^y/"^'""'""' ■•«l"i'-e ^ genitive (usually objective) 
 to complete their meaning : ' 
 
 J"H ofco,iA„-,: PIduoTae ,j".us. '""' """'••' ^''""'"'' ■"""• 
 
 deStiIri,i';:„f-' ;;L\ti'rttsfv'"p' V7' r ""j^*™'' 
 
 ........ .o„,d n;ea.^;:«4l:t o„^;sLr,^^^^^^^^ 
 
 118. The genitive is used in the jn-edicate to express pes- 
 session, duty, part, quality, price or characteristic ; as 
 
 a .«« ,LTiTo£ok tZ ul] : ''••"''^nt''"'- {« « «•« i^rf of 
 
PART 11.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITrON. 
 
 167 
 
 POS' 
 
 of ^th« n^rn^rrnTn.'r ;?F«««"tod by a pt Tsonal pronoun, the neuter 
 
 ?^i M«? T '\ J''\'-? '","""^' «•'*' ^^ ^ '^y duty to defend t}ie 
 city : Meuni est urbem defondore. 
 
 on!i!?; "* ''^ ^"'1 "" '^.y''''' *^''" genitive deperuls is frequently 
 onuttf. V ^ulary ho if ifc has been used proviouslv "the 
 ^.ntenco; ... At the te>npl. of Jupiter: Ad* .ovi XZoul). 
 
 ^ «. it • i/'''T''''''-^*^.''"'' '"^^' ''/'"'"''t.-c/« in that of Crass J: 
 Inex-rciti "dlae et postea in €rtt«Hl fuerat. 
 
 120. 'n.,1. words a8 perlndnm and a>mmoc/»m, in certiiin phrases 
 
 efuec't foS. "'"V" ^"«*H^ expression' would leacirto 
 
 Su uLZr^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ de perlculls ClcerOnlH leffl6nl«<,„o 
 
 cognoscitur. ,//e dtri thu vnth admntwie to the sf,de ■ Hoc 
 
 s^^:^.n:;r fut^rt.^"^^''^"' '"^^^^^^^^^^ "^^^"^ <^-" i-^- 
 
 N.B.-It may be suited generally that the objective genitive 
 
 with nouns represents not only the accnmtive as direct object of a 
 
 ransitive verb (section 112), and the dative completing the mcl 
 
 Si,.f/" "f ransitive verb (section 120), but also niny Engl sh 
 
 phrases niade up of the objective case and other prepositions 
 
 besides 0/ even where, if the verb were used in Ditin, aCeposT 
 
 tion with the accusative or ablative would take the placo of the 
 
 objective genitive; an Bcpntati^m for valor: Opin 6 virtutls 
 
 Fm- an jmpression on Ganl: Ad (.pliionem Galllae. WarV^lh 
 
 llrSlli^/'L^^'^^^'^-' ^^^"- Helv.ti0.u.n. ^.XJ^. 
 
 121. For verbs governing the genitive, see Exercise VIL, 
 and for verbs governing the genitive and accusative, see 
 Exercise VIII. 
 
 Exehcise 13. 
 
 1. The wrongs inflicted by the Gauls upon the Roman people 
 were so great that Csesar could not forget them. 2. Considius, 
 who had the greatest experience in military matters, was sent in 
 advance with the scouts. 3. He believed that the soMiers of 
 Ariovistus were wholly inexperienced in this mode of fighting. 
 4. He said that this circumstance had dispelled all doubt as" to the 
 arrival of the legions. 5. The general's hesitation on the previous 
 days prompted the Belgians to thif? measure. 6. He distributed 
 three months' provisions of ground corn amongst the soldiers. 
 
158 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I;ir at: ;Lro ::- rir ''T'^ '^ " 
 
 k a ■ 1 7 , ■ " "'"''"'' "f 'his course there 
 
 led ' / ' " "'""' **"""• '-■ "--•« lieutenant 
 
 ^»ked ■'"to how nmny of the eneray there were 13 ()„«?„ 
 
 hid'L "u" xhUvrr ^™', H*^ '"""^ '" ^"■-'■-p'Ho"; wh 
 
 naa fltt . 14. Uie soldier said that he had been both in the -urrw 
 
 taesdr that the enemy were full of eonfidence in themselves and 
 were setting out for the vicinity of Alexia. ^"^''^^^es, and 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 Uses of the Ablative. 
 
 122. Three or four different relations are expressed by the 
 Latin ablauve as ,t d.seharges the funetions of that number of 
 
 originally distinct cases. 
 
 ineludin?' """"" '"'"""' ''"'''''' ">« ''^^'^^ /™«. 
 
 ^,^ i-JC-j-'Se Z'rtir K«"«. t.- 
 
 meatus c„„,a moratur " ^"' "'" "'*' "^ "'W'"- Com- 
 
 jiuiii inc cuy. Ab urbo proficiscitur 
 
 O^mtt (or /r„» «L coX/^r'/C/ll^vV-/'^^^^^^ •^'™ 
 (or rare, or ("omoi Th,. ■,.,„, •!• '«»<'): vemt Coi-lntlio 
 
 '■ ^^'^ preposition is sometimes expressed 
 
 

 PABT 11.— SVNTAX AND COMPOSITION. I59 
 
 tt'Lro7olSU''htKL^'Stt f"^''"^ "f' """ f- 
 
 of motion. ^^^ ?^ ^'^^ *°wn marking the, limit 
 
 est. " "V^MH. Uelerius oiiml opinlono profectus 
 
 co™pr;a'iiveadS^^ ■=« '^f^ <>»ly "hen the 
 
 a verb of «ayinf or thiitaL anTf. '™'>r ""' "^"^tive after 
 and interrogatif eTentonoe* "^f'^f'^^'f^r^'f""^ '" '«'8''«''e 
 not used utless theTubstentive foS™ "1?''™"''"* «'" ablative is 
 sents the subject or d^re,+ nbllf f Ti''^ *■' comparative repre- 
 verb implied irtl°LX^ratti"dal*''^ ■"""" '^'"™-'''' "^ '"e 
 
 taS "rcTsi'^llir.?''''''''',^'''^ ""^ <"• P^^o™ following 
 
 quam Hii. Co^sr^r ««,/. thnt tTi T-. ^*^'^«««s erat expeditior 
 dicit HlbernlZ Soret etsi '' ^'« ^^^^'^ ^ni^.m/ Caesar 
 vixit. ^luuus m Italia quam in Gallia 
 
 reOTCy'userSh"^!, '''*•'' ^f^' '""!>""' «"'' ""'P'i™, are 
 
 than three /w.« Mn„s hfj,''. 7"^''''°'' '''^>'■''^™«'<'» »» '« 
 
 More th.n ei,Uy A^^'S ^e^L*: "'ImS^"™ "f^^^™"'- 
 erant vlt.ae. ^"ipiius octlngentae naves 
 
 after, as well as before Z«- 1 ^./™ '^ generally used 
 Fortior est quam >»plcnt*or. ™'^' *''"'' **«" "^ • 
 
 caLt'^x.i.^rnZjrsS*^^^^^^^ "■ Tn -""' "•-■" ■• 
 
 the eyes: Ocull, iadicarl nfin „ I V ^f ""'!?' ''" 'fc'e™""^ 6;/ 
 »..» r»„o„e est belium gerendum, IV^Z/oHo, J'S „,PS 
 
KJO 
 
 IMIIMAIIV LATIN IK)()K. 
 
 Nvrr/(>/(.s .• ruin oninili 
 
 UH <<tii'i'iN NocflfT mint. U, 
 
 n.S.:fM:,±J::;nt:^'\;i,;:l:r;;;:ir;r^:;i:;V;;-^ 
 
 ^^{/^OVM/ n,n,nrr: 1,1 nlla n.tlo.M. fadoua,,,,, osfc. 
 
 (2) 'nu>nl.lHlivcM.fdwirnot,oriNt.io(Iil<ot,l,r j;oniliv(. of ,n-ilifv^ ik 
 
 m»/ o,,i„,,nn„: ♦!„. ahlntivc ,h <I„. pronor cas. vl V f 
 aoscnpHons .UU.r .... n.y ,k ..sJ,' Jin. T^-J^^Jl^^^ 
 
 (<•) Dofmito ;>nVf .•ind ,v</m., with vorl.s ,.f l.uviim soiling/ mul 
 c^cl.u,g,ng, nro usually .xprosso.l l>y the, ablatlvof ;, ^ !' 
 
 nnt. //,. ,oldtl,e hnu^rjor hrn inlenU : l>u»I>„s ualutln .lonnln, 
 //' ^•.u'/uuiucd tfuuf,oot,j for wine: Pivicduui vlu« 
 
 init 
 
 voiulidit 
 
 nultjivit, 
 
 (</) Tho Hhlntivo (,f (hupre ofdiffhrnr.' is uno<1 with cnimmtivos 
 a wonls nnply.ug cn.paris.n ; as, ,fe n„ufr the s^^XaJZ 
 
 ^>^r,inun>,, ,rars hrf^.-e Cr.u- : Ant. (V-sar. , . uUh ,Z^ 
 
 '/'fj/.s a.//, / i»«„eiH ,M>st .IIohuH url.cui i-oor>j)if . //,■ rami' to him „ 
 few ,,w,dhs nfnr: Panel. .nensIhuN anto al cum vCnit 7, W 
 - .-o,..;,,../ „ half s.urller than Britain : Ilibonda rt^u.uo u -^^ 
 
PART II.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 161 
 
 indudinr^ Wi.. .|„aUvc expresses the relations at or ^, 
 tlu>ro in (,lu, san.o in f.. n ;ts I'T *' '" ^"'•'*' ''•''' ^'"-»' 
 
 «<... a.ul ;,..,, however, take t-he ablative after ^n. 
 
 1.1 mm ,II(. fecit. Occasionally , n ■ u-m f. / " ''' "•'''' '^"1^' 
 
 m reality aenotes tiu.e /., //.. .^> ; •.;';' X 1^^ '»"t. 
 
 /">,,r.s; iVignatnn, cstLoriH q„i„.,„o: ^ ' ^'"'J M'j'<t Jive 
 
 ('•) The (ildatiir (thso/nfc /'«,.,, i<'v, ...,.; ^r n 
 "Hlly i<lentical with that ex, Zi fw vJ''^ ^"" ^''^''"^^'^^^ ''^igi- 
 not,„n,s <,f ca.,,se, condition n o n-. t'V"' ^'""^'""'^ ''"^ the 
 
 bnen Nnp,.ra,Me,l to, and f.v e v h^,^^^^^ -'^^ve 
 
 original i(h,a. ' ^^ M'Juitly have entirely Hni,er,se«le<I, the 
 
 12('}. Tin; ablative i,s uHcd wifl. fj, . i . 
 
 ^!; und fr.e U, orlX^i;^^^ t^fe^ 1 "^ '''^r'"^ 
 
 local, jmd fln.f w.fi. Li: ._. / '""'nimentaJ, the ablative wifh irein'- 
 2V -».i«cw,«^ 01 mmt, one of separation. "'*^^ ' ^ 
 
162 
 
 PRFMARY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 m 
 
 127. For verbs with the ablative, see Exercise VII., and for 
 verbs with the ablative and accusative, see Exercise VIII. 
 
 128 With passive verbs tiie primary agc-nt is denoted by 
 tlie ablative, vv.th a or a(>, the secondary agent by par with the 
 accu.sative ; as, 
 
 7V.r Mh'r irns snU hy Crmr throwjh a dmv : Littomu A Ouogarc 
 IMii. A cuiHuIe U«.»a ex lt«iia vCuit. (8oo Hoction J)3, c!) 
 
 KXKHCISK 14. 
 
 1. llo H.ko<l Why tho Hniai.r hnd woi.n \,(1 tho houtcnant with 
 ;v slmg. 2. C,..s,u. was phsmIuk th. wi,.t,or n. (JhuI with tho troopH. 
 . . UosHHl t .Ht 1 .0 liolgian. h,ul strongthonod tho plaoo with ,„ wall 
 uul a tvonoh 4. A su.ldon nttaok was inado en our cavalry by 
 HuMMUMuy 5. And,as.saa.,rH had c<Mno fnun all tho.so districtn to 
 
 u v.U.y of tho I olgutus oxcol tho vo.st of tho Ga,ds in .poo.l. 7. 
 Thoy all .Stan, thouusolvos with woad, which produoos a htrk-hluo 
 color, and on tins account (/.v) thoy aro of „.<,.-. fnghtful 
 Hppearanco .n hattlo. 8. This victory has cost tho lifo of Holany 
 hravo men that wo now nod poaco. S) With such (A.) swiftness 
 and .>ho.nonco di<l tho sohlio.-s a<lvanco, that tho cnon.y c<.uM h 
 . hs a.ul tho onset of tho legions and tho cavah^. "lO. Csar 
 uth Ins arn.y wasMhstant fn.n. tho onon.y not nx.ro than ton 
 
 all tho slnps tw<» hundred ni nund.or. Ji>. On tho san.o day ho 
 ordm;o,l Ins houtonant to nu.vo forward tho can.p and t.ike up a 
 pos.t.on at tho foot of tho hill, six n.ilos fron. CW s can.p. 13 
 Tho letter wa.. sent hy tho general, through a n.ossengoI^ fron> 
 Mass.ha n, (iau! to the consul at Rou.o in Italy. J4 lie win a 
 man of the highest nu.ritan.l worthy of all praise; relyin./on tho 
 fnendslnp of the consul ho cau.o frou. Athens in tho nLn^f that 
 kn,g, and afterwards lived nuuiy years at Uon.o and Tarontun.. 
 
 IS? 
 
PART FI.-HYNTAX AND (X)MI'O.SITION. Hi;] 
 
 15. (Uoing) ft niftii of tho urouh.st .-niirn.,, / i\ i • 
 
 KXKKcisr: XV. 
 
 VkRIIA.. N0UNS-lNKrN,T,VK, G,:uv^u, SmMNK. 
 (.1) T/if! fvfinklve. 
 l-^O. Tlu. inHnitivo is a verbal noun nsrd ns llu- suhicrt or 
 olu-tofavcrl,,oras,,.sul,j.-toranotlu.in,u,i:iv:;r 
 
 iicuttT. '" ^''■'^' *''"^ '^"'J^'^^'^^ ......lilying 1,1.0 inlinifcivo \h 
 
 ™- In vivid narration, to dcscriho a scMics cf actions the 
 
 This is ealled the historical infinitive, and when so used it 
 
 :;:^:f;;;^'^''"!'''-^'-^'--lueofaverh,andtaJi 
 ■^uojLct m the noniuiative case; as 
 
 l.U. Al,h„„g|, th. indrmive is ■, n„„n, ii yet retains son.o <,r 
 the peculunlies of .l,e verl,, as ; f„r example 
 
 («) IfchftN t,ho(h",stiu(;ii(.ii of ic'iis..- i.« /a, / j 
 
 ('/) It h;iM u sMhj„ot, ill M„, uccusativo (vi.sr uftrr v,..-!.. f 
 think, nu i.<,.., ,„„i ,,i„,„ „^,.,, si.hi,Vr.f 'y''''^'"f •':'^"'^'' 
 
 and i;^l. ^ ■'' •'" '"■^^••"^'^1 inhii.Mvo. Hoc HoctionH \2 
 
164 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (b) The Gerund. 
 
 133. The gerund is a verbal noun (found only in the neu- 
 ter singular) of four cases, genitive, dative, accusative and 
 ablat^ve, w.th uses similar to those of other substantives, except 
 that ,t ,s never found in the accusative as object of a verb 
 Like the infinitive, it governs the same case as the verb from 
 which It IS derived. In use it corresponds pretty closely to the 
 English gerund (or infinitive in ing\ but it may frequently be 
 translated by the English gerundial infinitive with to. . 
 
 Para us fu t *fi^*'.**^"'"; ^^" '"«-^- ready to obey the command: 
 
 thp'lt'r.n?l'- ^""^ f"'"'' especially With prcnouns, the genitive of 
 
 Nciue ««i colllgrendl hostihus facultatem relinquunti. ''"''''* ''"^^ • 
 
 Or we may consider ml here as the objective genitive Dlural of 
 the reflexive pronoun = ^Ae recovering ofthLselvet ^ ""^ 
 
 (c) The Supine. 
 
 135. Another verbal noun is the supine, which is found 
 only m the accusative and ablative singular, with adverbial 
 force in both cases. 
 
 136. The accusative supine, or supine in um, is used 
 to denote purpose^.fter verbs of motion (and a few others, 
 aare, collocare, etc.); as, 
 
 They came to ask peace: Venerunt nSopm ,.«„«* rr 
 
PART 11.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 165 
 
 should 1,0 <)bHmved t mt Z *^""*T V* ^" *^'"^ ^'^«"'I « it 
 
 «pSJ!r!^^^K --P^-^ - "-^ - an abla.i.e of 
 to do : Hoc est faclTe facta Tlu^l ^^^^hpvdet; as, This is easy 
 
 Tins supine corresponds to the English infinitive with adjectives. 
 
 connectron^Ttr: Z^'Z^^SS^ ^ 'T.^ '"V« ^^"^ ^ 
 principal verb; as, i^Tw /o J f '""" *>^' «"^ '^^^^ ^^ ^he 
 Difficile est aicta «uTd rfn^ ^ ^^'"^ ^T''-^^^ ^''^ ^'«^^« «^« •• 
 (Mil possint, is notZverned L'*./''; "*K ,««r\*he clause, quid 
 i>^M?sadveWaranlSht'i^l!' ^^' " ^^^ «"^i-^ -^ -^. 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 1. After the assembly was dismissed, Csesar determined fn h 
 
 up a very large number of draught \.nimals:rrgj^^ 2^ 
 
 eveT a'd T '''' ^'^ "^^"^^""^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^I^emlTves f!; 
 ever and of avengmg themselves upon the Romans 3 Th! 
 
 ^ce.-u epiiea that he was ever ready to aid the wrotphprl 
 
 and to simre the vanquished fi R^, ( vu"f n ,. , ^^^tched 
 
 duties and obeying thrts ho b.^ "^ discharging hia 
 
 fellow-citixens 7 Th7 I ^'^^""'""^^ ^^^^ P«P"lar with his 
 
 «iiow cm/xns. 7. They sent ambassadors to Ctesar fn ^«t : i 
 
 a^l he sent three legion, to their ».sistanc . 8 H^tv t 
 
 pter 9 it?,: ™7 T7 """« '" ""• '" -'- 'heTu re»^ 
 power. 9. It i, very hard to s„y how many tliere are of m 10 
 
 .nen f„,.n' ^''"r * ' "'° ''"''' ""'"8 "> <1° ™^ *» cu. off our 
 men fr„ „ ^p ,„„, ^„j p„,^^^^ ^^^ ^^^.^ « our 
 
 He had learned from the scouts that the river was disJnt t J 
 camp not more than ten miles, and that on thrsidtf hat river 
 
 ' ° '"=°' ''"'■■*^'' attoiupted to cross the river and pursue 
 
166 
 
 MilMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 he onerny. 14 He learned fn.m the soldiers that the shins were 
 seless for sa.hn., nnd although he .vas ready t<, set .ut he 
 
 ZT: n "l"'*"'"^ ^^'^''"^^y^ ^^'-f <l»edionm,), Cesar found 
 
 out that the rest of the cavalry had been thrown h to a pani y 
 tJie flight of Duninorix and his liorsenien. ^ 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 Verbal Adjectives—Gerundive, Participles. 
 
 (a) The Gerundive. 
 
 140 The gerundive (or future participle passive) is an 
 adjeeMve of the first n.d .second declensions, .nd agrees with 
 
 translated lilce a gerund governing that noun ; as, 
 
 ^ey came to seek neace Hitor-ill^r /-.v. i • 7 
 
 sounhi)- Venornnf li V"tt^r,illy, for peace whreh was to be 
 
 nouX\\grfest?tfi"'"''™ '' '""^'' «'"' ''"'^ »<" '"'»™ ">e 
 HI Often in the oblique cases it is immaterial whether the 
 gerund or the gerundive is used, but it may be stated generally 
 that w,th mtransitive verbs the gerund is always found, and 
 with transitive verbs, especially after prepositions, the gerun- 
 dive IS preferred. "Indeed, it is seldom that the Latin uses the 
 gerund of a transitive verb tvith an object. 
 Examples.— //e u ready to help the m-Mml ■ Paratus ,->t ,rl 
 
 deceived L. ZtK ^^^/S.^Ltr .7=%^;,^ f 
 
 r-^^rllL^-Tz}. P«**'ndae causa venerunt. Ariovistiis lyrn- 
 
 a t ooX^rlThis''u1r'?.T "" --P"-— vTonuLC 
 \j «.; cuuccnait. (1 his use of the gerund IS very rare.) 
 
 I 
 
the 
 
 J»AllT II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 167 
 
 (a) Ifc will be observed that ad and cavH,!. with fhn fynr.„„^ i 
 
 (b) Note that the gerundive of deponents is passive ;ind fhnf ; 
 this construction (though nol- wJfV. „,.. pa««ive, and that in 
 
 gerundive of f.^or^Sr et^ Js us ^ Ts^Srlr^'T^' '^' 
 transitive ; as, V of t^hcin, tCZ^ /^fe^ ^ ' HosX: 
 spes potlundl oppldi discessit. . ""''-^-nmy. Hostibus 
 
 ^ 142. One of the commonest uses of the gerundive (but only 
 m the nominative and accusative) is to form as a predicate 
 adjective, in combination with sum, the so-called passive peri- 
 phrastic conjugation, denoting duty or necessity • as 
 
 est. These things ouqht to be used m« ^ ak '^ ? "**' Parendum 
 rmcst leap down : De«!llehdum et. "' "*""*""'" "«*• ^' 
 
 In such examples as the last three thp fnrm ;., ^ • -. 
 some, considered the nominative ofth^ gerund """^'^ ^'' ^^ 
 
 (b) The Participles. 
 
 144. The^r.m^i5 (or imperfect) participle is used to denote 
 the same txme as that of the principal verb ; as, 
 
168 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 « of cuur.so olliptiU SX \^TV^'- J^'"" ^^"^""- 
 
 either leave out th.'sn \i- i i " *'"'^ ^ntminn; uiid wo , 
 
 .n«ke the -n".:t:'r„pre%: .r;.c.r o'.''^. '""■"•^"""' - ■ 
 
 * ' " Pusrnut, or Cmn pugnaret. 
 
 used in tlie Latin '^''''^' "^^^^'^ ^ '-^""Ple appo.^ ive is 
 
 U5. The ;.a.^ (or ;>.^/,,,) p^^ticiple is used to denote an 
 actjon . completed at a W ,w to that of the rr^dpll 
 
 interfectus* est. /f a^ J^ aiZ/fL^' f' \ "^ """♦^''^""^ «»Pt"«. 
 response dato, diHcessit.^ ^ ''^^^' '"^ ^'^'^^ «^^"'.'/.- Hoc 
 
 rul^'X^!''^ ''^ P^^-^^^^ I-^-P'^^ <^^ a deponent verb is, as a 
 
 usell!;.:!::^^;!,!:^ -:^^ in EngUsh we often 
 
 takes pl^ce preWou. ly to tb'. tZ^^' ^" '^","'1^*^ Hon.ething that ' 
 In Latin a perfect mrHrn l.: ^^Pressed by the main verb. 
 
 PolllcItuH se brevi reditarum 1 L- 1 '^ '" ""^' '''' departnre : 
 Hoc aucllto, profectus c r ^; '""^'r^*^; If'^r^MI this he set out : 
 
 '^Ps rendu M saUiny "curJZZZ *^'\''"'^>'''^ ^'^' Mnd the 
 ad navigandum invenit. i»«rtu.u redlisset, naves paratas 
 
 147. The A/t.re participle denotes an action as ahonf f. 
 happen at a H.ne subsequent to that of the p ^^v rb I^ 
 ch.ef uses are to f.rm (with e^se) the future iZiive acti 
 
 He says Ccesar will tnke the city by storm • "DTpif r 
 H8. The commonest uses of the participle are : 
 
PART IL^SYNT. ' AND COMPOSITION. m 
 
 ^tL^%r^:t:l'T^^^^^^ ..'*^-^"^« construction (««. 
 
 ■subject orobcct of H erb^'HriT^^'''""' r^""'"K ^^^^ the- 
 
 urdiimf e clause dcHcr ng tTe , h'' ' /'"'i^^''^'^^ «' f»r a co- 
 the final action (see sec! g,n 49) 7 WhTH' > "5 f'« "^^ ^" 
 
 non. « c.icumvOnerunt ll'Jjf'^J^'jMuuj : Hostea nostros pCg. 
 
 nc enmj/ «/..> A.rrf llZdhl}^ oportebat ut Ign! creniaretur. 
 battle an-ay: Hostts item »n - . '''"''' '''^'^ '^'"'"'^ ^'"''^ "i> *m 
 
 erant. O^ir ."^ aL -W ZT.T'*'^' ^^ castris eductan InstVux- 
 
 derunt. "«P»r©88i nuguuiu eoruiu nunieruui occi- 
 
 prosecutus eat. I^y Zd^^^ Z^'" -^''^^'^'^ F„g,e„{e8 
 bant. -^ ^* ''^""'^ *'^^ /«^^en ; Jacontibus inaiste- 
 
 (o) Occasionally thev havp fh^ ,,«!., r • 
 tives; as, He /c^mcf; MortuL est "'rf'^P^' ^^'^^^^^'^ ^^J^^' 
 
 dare. ^ />reparerf «o yi,e /io«%es.- Parati sunt obsides 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 to retreat. 7. Savin? Ih.-., 1,„ fi, , """'"y- "" "'™ began 
 enemy and fell fiS' % V .'""'' "''"''''''""'»' "f 'he 
 
 caused two b dl "^he .' i "^T "''*' "'""'*'"''• '"> >>ad 
 
 the arrival of ofl the . T"' *''" "™''- »• ^'™"«'l by 
 
 of seeking P a^e 10 tI gI I Tt^'l'r,"'^ ^"^^ (»«^) 
 
 theeava4LorderL"-J£ ^^ti^ a","^! 1> -™""''^0 "^ 
 
 [ CO ucaui. ii. toeemg the enemy 
 
I n^f- 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 k 
 
 A 
 
 O 
 
 
 £^ 
 
 /. 
 
 w, 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 ^ 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 a 
 m 
 
 
 IL25 ill 1.4 
 
 2.5 
 2.2 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 rnoiDgiapmc 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 n WLST MAIN STREET 
 
 Wi^aSTER.N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4S03 
 
 .^ 
 
 ;« 
 
 iV 
 
 (v 
 
 \\ 
 
 "v 
 
 'i>\. ^^\^^ 
 
 

 
 
170 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 leaving the ship, he put spurs to his horse, and hastened to C^sar 
 at the camp. 12. They were asseiubling from all .ides to defend 
 those mto whose territories the RouHin army had been led. 13 
 Haynig encouraged his men, he gave the signal to them as they 
 desired it (literally, to them desirinrj). 14. He replies that Csesar 
 promismg to return immediately, has run down to exhort the 
 soldiers. 15. The two legions declare that they have always been 
 ready to carry on the war. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 Imperative, Independent Uses of the Subjunctive. 
 
 149. In the second person, the imperative mood (regularly 
 the presenO is used in Latin as in English to express com- 
 mands; as, 
 
 ^7/#er me to hreathe my last amidst this slaughter of mv soldiers ■ 
 present subjunctive (.i being usually omitted) ; as, WntetoV I 
 
 zm Z^^ aTmrrri;,at' "^^ -^^^^« -"-' -- ^^ -^ 
 
 imperatlv^e!""'"'"' *'^ ^''' "^'""'^ ^"'^ peremptory than the simple 
 
 150. The imperative is seldom used in prose to express a 
 prohibition or negative command. 
 
 For this purpose we use most frequently, {a) noli, nollte, 
 with the mfinitive ; (i) ne with the perfect subjunctive • (c) 
 cave (ne) or fac ne with the present subjunctive ; as, 
 
 Vo?^ Cot *'""'' ^^^^rf ^«^*« ^« ^'"X Take care'notto do this: 
 Noll hoc faccre. Ne hoc fecerls, Cave (or fac ne) hoc facias 
 
 ^.pomrr'' "-^ ^''"" '^'''^'''''' • ^«"*« hos vestro aux3fo 
 
 151. The subjunctive is used independently to express : 
 
to Caesar 
 to defend 
 led. 13. 
 I as they 
 it Csesar, 
 hort the 
 ays been 
 
 :tive. 
 
 egularly 
 3s com- 
 
 toldiers : 
 Consider 
 
 lich are 
 
 by the 
 
 'O me, I 
 
 sure to 
 
 ad me 
 
 simple 
 
 )ress a 
 
 nolite, 
 e; (c) 
 
 this: 
 radas. 
 
 auxilio 
 
 PART II.— SYNTAX ANl^ COMPOSITION. l7l 
 
 mi''colJ;t^^'-''''^''?^'^''^ ^' ea;/tortofion; as, Let us die for 
 mr country: Pro patria inorlan.ur. May he return in safety 
 
 This is known as the hortative or jussive subjunctive 
 by'^Xr^'Thf ,r "^JT f " «"^^J""<^tive is frequently preceded 
 
 nles as Sd in tL o! f^ *Tf' "' f^^"^"^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ Princi- 
 ples as now in the caso- of conditional clauses with s2 ■ as I lump 
 
 yonnuxy (or Mayy<ni) have siu^h men, ^Possibility) IJtimm taSs 
 ZT ^,^«^"«- f<^}^id that you had such men, {Gontra^tr^l 
 Mtat the present iime) : Utinam tales viros ha^ereUs wJdd 
 that you had had s^cch men, (Contrary to the faS^Tihe S 
 Utinam tales viros habulssetls. ^ ' ' 
 
 Tu}/" so/^ened assertion in a polite or hesitating manner- as 
 This I would venture to say.- Hoc dicere a««i a (see Part III sec- 
 ^oL \^ ^^ ^^^^^^^ f^^^^e thought them vanlmhed: CreierL 
 victos i^omeone may say this: Roc aixevlt aUqum. Icouldl^ve 
 imshed you had been lyresent : Vellem adf uisses. 
 
 This is called the ^oim^mZ subjunctive, and is really the case of 
 an apodosis with the protasis omitted (see section 79)! 
 
 (c) Doidit, perplexity (dubitative questions), or a virtual veaative 
 (rhetorical questions or questions of appeal) in iTerr^Hvp 
 clauses; as, m^at is he tl do? Quid JfatT mTuXto 
 .ay f Quid diceret ? Wl.o would heliere the messenger (nZ)^ Qu s 
 
 152. When the simple imperative or the subjunctive is used 
 to express negative commands, wishes and exhortations, ne is 
 the proper negative ; as, 
 
 urE' ^*'_*'*'!^-'' despexeris. Let us not attack the city Ne 
 urbem oppugnemus. Let him not dare to return ■ Ne audeat 
 redire. I ,vuh that he mey not return : Utinam ne redeat. 
 
 (a) To connect such clauses neu or neve is used (seldom -ve or 
 neciue); as, Do not do this nor that: Ne hoc feceris „Tv^ iJiud 
 ^et all attack the leader, and let no one wound anybody else • Omnes 
 ducem petant neu quis quern alium vulneret. £it}L ZovouZ 
 Aedm_ nor make war upon them nor their alisfl^^^te^s 
 lacessiveris neve his sociisve eorum bellum intuleris. 
 
 (b) For the negative of velim and vellem use nolim and nollem • 
 as, 1 tjh you may not return : NoUm redeas. J could have wished 
 you Jmd not been present : Nollem adf uisses. 
 
J 
 
 172 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 fHcerronortuit^ ^/ . ^JT l'"*' ^t' ^«^»«»«l""' f«lt. c>r Te hoc 
 JSi^*; N i)^- ^^ ^'^"^^ '^^'-^ ''^'^'^ ^'^-^ Potemt florl (nee 
 
 KXERCISE 17. 
 
 1. Do not assiHt the enemy with corn or with anything else. 2. 
 
 nor return o the c.ty unless victorious. 4. Leap down, fellow^ 
 
 W uld that aes,ir had sent two legions to the assistance of the 
 heutenant. (i. Let the Gauls send envoys to the Ron.an general 
 to seek peace. 7. Remember the former valor of the Helvetii 
 8. Labienu^, my lieutenant, have two bridges built over this river 
 
 that the Romans have been defeated by Ariovistus. 10. Do not 
 
 people. 13. Order the soldiers to advance by forced marches into 
 
 the enemy told Cjesar concerning this matter. 15 Who can 
 endure that this should be snatched away from them ? 
 
 , EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 Verbs of Fearing, Hindering, Doubting, Objecting. 
 
 154. After verbs of fearing (chiefly vereor in classical prose) 
 and such phrases as metus est, perlculum est, that and lest are 
 translated by ne and that not by ut, both words being fol- 
 lowed by the subjunctive ; as, 
 
 tl/T ff ^'^^^'fdo tJm (or lest lie do this) : Vereor „e hoc 
 foclat. I fear that hs wiV not do this.- Vereor ut h6c fLf, 
 Th.re u danger of his n.t doing this.- Perlculum est „Vh6c ZH 
 

 wo shou 
 tell evcry- 
 i better to 
 have done 
 or Te hoc 
 florl (Hoe 
 
 else. 2. 
 rents and 
 unierous, 
 1, follow - 
 eniy. 6, 
 CO of the 
 1 general 
 Helvotii. 
 his river 
 enemy 
 
 Do not 
 ny. 11. 
 of trees. 
 
 Roman 
 lies into 
 .ak what 
 i^ho can 
 
 TING. 
 
 prose) 
 lest are 
 ng fol- 
 
 ne hoc 
 faclat. 
 raolat. 
 
 PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 173 
 
 ndn'^;^!'^^''^ ""^ ""^^ "^ '*^'' ^ ''^^'' "«^*^' ^^g'^larfy «o after 
 ,, ^^.^- "^^F^" «f fearing may bo used as modal verbs, followed bv 
 
 156. Verbs and phrases of objecting to, jrreventing, doubting 
 ind hmdeiing are usually followed by quln or quominus (con- 
 secutive or final), and the subjunctive. When quln is used, 
 the preceding clause is always an actual or virtual negative,' 
 and this is also generally the case with quominus; as, 
 
 mjleet was prevented from returning into the harhm- : ClSssis 
 tenebatur qu6i..lnu8 in portum rocllrot. He could scarcely be 
 prevented from leavmg the city: vix inhiberl potuit quirXm 
 rellnqueret. / do not d<mbt that he has left the city : ]V6„ dubito 
 quln urbem reUquerlt. And a mspicion is not ivantinq that Z 
 
 cars. •' ^'^"' "^''' ^'"'^'''^^ ^"'" ^P«^ sibi 'mortem 
 
 i„nS' ^ST'" ^^ o^>«erved that quln ^i d ^nomtmw with the sub- 
 junctive often answer to the English gorund governed by a prepo- 
 sition; as, I do not object to your doing this : Ndn recuso quominus 
 noc facias. The Germans could not be restrained from hurling their 
 weapons at our men: Germani retinorl non poterant qua in 
 nostros tf^a conjlooront. ^ * 
 
 158. Common expressions with qnin are nemo est, there is no 
 one, non duntare, not to doubt; non est dubium, there is no doubt • 
 ^;^^nmabesse and hand medium abesse, to be vnthin a little] 
 nihil praetermittere, to leave nothing undone; facere non msse 
 cannot but, cannot help. y j^ i*^ non posse, 
 
 With quominus are found deterrere, impedlre, tenere, recHsare and 
 such phrases as per tS stetlt, it was owing to you. 
 
 159. Recuso I object, I refuse, and dubito, I scruple, I hesitate, 
 are used as modal verbs ; as, He hesitates to cross the river • Flumerl 
 translre dubltat. He does not refuse to speak.- Loqul non 
 recusat. liecusO is a so followed by quln, and deterred by ne or 
 qum, and the subjunctive. •' x ' "j nv ui 
 
 N.B.—Frohibeo usuaUy takes the accusative and the infinitive. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 1. I fear tlio soldiers will not be al)lo to take the city by storm. 
 2. There was the greatest danger of the enemy's crossing the river 
 and making an attack upon the camp. 3. The general feared that 
 
174 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Mings „, hk houto, 'n't '' \''^'"-"<' ">"' '«- should hurt the 
 brother that we did " „?.„ .T """^ '° >""' "°<> ^-r 
 
 There i, „,. Z' 2 Z ol^ trth?/" """l ^ ^^ 
 easily defeat the Gauls ft P , , ^"'"'*'' ^^^^^^^» cs'i 
 
 one,,, were mirn't^^ditlrrhr "h':" ^ T^'T '."f .""^ 
 ra,«, objections to being for ever unlr fi. They hes.tated to 
 10. He was within a very 1 Me If h , 7"^ "' "•" """"'y- 
 
 Ten vessels were prevent IM f' "* ''"'" ''^ ""^ ™'-'"'y- li- 
 the san,e port iTHe '^ted t "t' r'"/r "''"' "'"^ '" ^o"* 
 to er«.s the bridge J^^ I^ ^^^^2:"'^' "^ "r"' 
 was no doubt that the A^rlni , f"^"^^^ "^ "^e rear. 13. There 
 
 1. He left nornltlirtrLZe^ttrrr^'-^- 
 ^^/LuXgilgt r ::; f • - "-eti^^^^^ 
 
 fen. assisting „„/„o°o;s ,r"^y way '"™"^ ^"'"""'"^ ""■» 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 Duty, Necessity, Possibility, Permission. 
 
 4!°- ""'' "' "''"'""''"' '^ "^"""^ -Pressed in one of three 
 
 rf« ttM) ; Haec tibi faclcndl „...fj.. v "/?■■ ^"» «« '»«« to 
 Haec tibi ra<,len,l„ fujrunt. ""^''* '" '"""= *"•« ""s •• 
 
 »"«« r«„: Carrc„,l„,„ e,r„^bi 7 "f1 'mpersonally ; as, I 
 duel ,.a..e„„„„. e,t."'(SeTseS„ m.) " '""*'■•• ^ »= 
 
 'i^^.-'^wJ :::,J^ rii' *" "» «- ("""•>.■ »« racers 
 
i that the 
 fear that 
 fie will not 
 1 hurt the 
 and your 
 ' day. 7. 
 •Idlers can 
 ! that the 
 ssitated to 
 le enemy. 
 'my. 11. 
 ) to reach 
 t be able 
 3. There 
 province. 
 > remain 
 ring the 
 €0) them 
 
 )f three 
 
 ligation 
 lec tibi 
 have to 
 te this : 
 
 etimes 
 A mc 
 
 acere 
 
 (eras) 
 imas. 
 
 PART II.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 175 
 
 oportet, oportebit, oportult. ™"™"™ ' "«. Hoc no. faeere 
 
 Compare abo the Engiiah'lSe LatTtoCer """' '^"-■ 
 ge^ndJnr ^"'"''"' "'' ''"^'^ '= -P--" "y 'he 
 
 Fou way do this • Tin hrm «■ 
 
 J'tt!?iff '' f ™'"^^ "' *"^ i" 'h^ following sentences 
 and the different modes of translating them into Latin • 
 
 vlnciri civem Bomanum. -^ ' ^«*cinus eej; 
 
HRHin 
 
 IPM 
 
 176 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (d) If I shmdd return to Rome, I should see ymi, (a softened 
 ^'xpresswn of condition and conclusion, less vivid and direct than '^If 
 J. return to Rrme, I shall see rjou") : Si liomam redean, te vldiam. 
 
 Similarly in the case of the potential subjunctive, where the 
 condition 18 not expressed : I sluridd scarcely make that assertimi: 
 Vix hoc affiriuaverlm. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 1. At that time Ctesar could easily have defeated the Gauls. 
 2. To these envoys the answer wati given that the soldiers ought 
 always to obey the general. 3. He said that it would have been 
 better to do this. 4. He had to die yesterday, we must die 
 to-day, all will have to die some day. 5. The Gauls may be 
 cowards if they wish, but the Ron.an soldiers must needs be 
 brave men. 6. So far as Ctesar was concerned, you had per- 
 mission to leave the camp. 7. They asked that they might be 
 allowed to dp this with his approval. 8. You should have replied 
 that you could not leave the city. 9. You ought to attempt to 
 take the city by storm to-morrow. 10. You ought to inform 
 CiBsar at once that the enemy are about to make an attack upon 
 our cavalry. 11. Qesar could have ordered that state to furnish 
 hostages. 12. He said the lieuteiiant ought to have won over the 
 alhes of the Germans to the Romans. 13. You may remain with 
 the allies three months, and afterwards you will have permission 
 to return to Rome. 14. He thinks the Belgians ought to fortify 
 the place with a wall and a trench. 15. Our fields ought not to 
 have been laid waste almost in sight of your army, our children 
 carried oflf into slavery, and our towns taken by storm. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 Uses of Quod, Quoniam and Cum. 
 
 165. (a) Quod (because) takes the indicative when it intro- 
 duces a statement positively on the writer's own authority or 
 containing the writer's belief; as, 
 
 Th^y surpass ths rest of the Gauls in bravery, because they are 
 en^a^ed m alnu>st d^Uy str^^gles vnth the (^'rmamT ReHquSs 
 
PART II.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. I77 
 
 (6) It takes the subjunctive when it introduces a statement 
 on the authority of another-virtual or informal indir cfn^ 
 tion (see section 216) ; as, 
 
 166 Cwomam (,i«e«) invariably takes the indicative (exceot 
 in indirect narration) ; as, ^ P 
 
 vostraeq„ide„s^iL";ro"';:joir;.l:"""" ""*"• "*'" •"""-"• 
 
 167 Cr.m, meaning ««e or although, that is, with a clearly 
 causal or oo«ce».».. force, is always followed by the subjunc- 
 
 live y nSy 
 
 i ^.ooe with Zmf cut h£cL «Tf P ^^ ''*''' ^^^'''^ ^'^^ 
 faciet. "^^° ^^^ **"*• Caesar cuui iis pacem 
 
 ^ 168. C.m takes the primary (see section 28) tenses of the 
 indicative to express when, whenever, used with the English 
 present, perfect or future (see sections 200, 202, 205) ; as, 
 
 J ./ /w,(,e recourse to the pnmshtnent of even the innnrpnt- 
 
 mm to Lamr. Ad castra p«m redlerlt, eum ad Caeirem mittam. 
 
178 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 inJhnlt^f J!?^ I'T'^'^ ^•''' .''f '"" expressed by the cum clause 
 W r«n 1 1 K^^'!!**"';.''^'?.^ Ht,iten,ont, and hucK a clause is often 
 best rendered by the English gerund i)receded by a preposition 
 aa, In saxjxng into the luirbar, I say into the city. ^ P^^P"^^'^^"" > 
 
 In rhetorical questions, cum (wfien) with a primary tense of the 
 subjunctive is sometimes used ; as, Shall I my that the sea hm been 
 closed against our allies, when your armies have never crossed m^r 
 from Br^mdisium, except in the depth of unnter? SociTs ego nostrls 
 
 z::r:tuz:rz^:'r^ ""- """•^"'^'" ^ "^"^^ '- ^^-« 
 
 169. Cwm takes the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive to 
 express wheri, used with the English past (including the past 
 progressive) and pluperfect tenses ; as, 
 
 When th^ magistrates were collecting men from the country 
 Orgetmnx died: Cum homines ex agrls magistratQs coirorent' 
 Orgetorix mortuus est. When this news wa/brought to clsaThe 
 
 mat^n^fhi^f-''^ ^^''- '".?^'^ examples, the cum clause, besides 
 princlpfl cbuse ^'^'' ''"'"'' ^^' ^''^'" '^P'""'"^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 But the accessory notion is sometimes scarcely perceptible, the 
 cvm clause merely marking an action which as a whole, or in iart 
 IB antecedent to that of the principal clause ; as, He died after his 
 return home : Cum domum redUsset vita excessit. 
 
 170. Even when these tenses (past or pluperfect) are used 
 in the English, cum (when) takes the indicative in the follow- 
 ing cases : 
 
 w^lT^ "^*^^/^o events strictly contemporaneous, tum (then) 
 
 ^T«^/i T^""*^^ "ill? '""^^^^ principal clause to define the time 
 more clearly ; as, When Ccesar came into Gaul, the Aedui were the 
 leaders of one party, the Sequani of the other: Cum Caesar in 
 S..!T ""^SS' ^li^'']'^^ /actionis principes erant Aedui, alterius 
 bequani. When the lieutenant wa^ in Gaul Ccesar vx i at Rome • 
 Cum l€^atus in GaUia erat. tum Caesar Rcmr «rf u Were the 
 old men doing nothing when they were defending t,^ date by their 
 
1 portum 
 
 m claime 
 ) is often 
 position ; 
 
 ie of the 
 has been 
 used mier 
 [^ noHtrls 
 si hiome 
 
 exists^ I 
 
 ictive to 
 he past 
 
 country, 
 gorent, 
 '(Bsar, he 
 n esget, 
 
 besides 
 
 [ by the 
 
 ble, the 
 in part, 
 ifter his 
 
 e used 
 follow- 
 
 1- (then) 
 le time 
 vere the 
 esar in 
 ilterius 
 Borne: 
 ^ere the 
 >y their 
 
 PART II.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. I79 
 
 i» used in the rS^hu^\J,''J'ZtT'T, "■" /''"r^«'« imlictive 
 
 he„„ „da.ct,„„„ „,„„,, ,,r,.„ru„';,X„t^J» " " '"'"" '""""•''• 
 pn*nlif«l • ■l""'S.lfZ' ^IT"""^ ""•"'rdinato, but really 
 
 found m the Entdish Henfpml ,,' u " ,'^^ '^"»"*' peculmrity s 
 
 WA .... anrf. ■ ^ """ • • • • '"»>, meaning 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 1. Since this is the case I sh»'! nrilo.. n,. .„ij- 
 enemy's camp. 2. The enen h!„ *^^"'''^'^'« '" ''o™ the 
 
 mountain, because it was n";' farT \"""' " '"'''"' *" ""^ 
 complained because th! 1." ? *''°"' """!'• 3- Qesar 
 
 of the allies ofZ'lT^ were laying waste the territories 
 
 from immiln ^nT'he thought tLt^^Vf ""'""^ ™^ "^^^ 
 slacken his pace 6. ^ -iente sh n" r'"'^ ""^ '"'^'" 
 
 island, and were seen from ^^ ^^ """■' ''""''"8 "^'«- ">» 
 
 that they couM^Tdirul^^^rth:" ^u^ TC "-- 
 our troops made a vigorous attack upon the "nemvthTu 
 
 eC: in r S^-,^e Z' T^t "'^ ^^^^^^ -t 
 
 siALhrtLyie^^ t„"rrtor„?7 ;^it^^^ 
 
 become bent, they could neither draw it out „"r tb T 
 
 -:Xou^:l 2::^:7r-^T '^ ~ 
 
 ™ddenly attacked them n Te Ir f AUh " .'v ''''"'" 
 -, Caesar determined to P^rfo^t/t" L^ Zc^t 
 
180 
 
 I'KlMAilY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 AK-iiiiMt Mir minmy. 12. At Hni Hww wlu<n tho onoiny worw pro- 
 \m'u\^i fo Ntitnn our ciimii. ('ii-siir whh IrmliiiK flu. moMii^rN /utunii 
 Mio luhlKt'. i:». Ill m'.t'pliiiK Hu< Niinrii.lrr of {\w H»>lMi(.MH, Cvhixv 
 w»iH oxoniHiu^ Ium uhuhI xriiHi'iu'HH jintl Imm.inity. M. Wlutn ..lU' 
 in«ii HHW timt. tho camp whm Iu'Imk tillo.l with groit iiiiinhitrH of 
 tho oiioiiiy, thoy iiiinuMliiitoIy took to MJKht. 15. VVh«m Vwmi^ 
 rMtiiniH t»i tho oamp. our iiion will niuko iiii utUick upon the 
 yiioniy. ' 
 
 ICXI'RCISE XXl. 
 
 Uses of Ppm, Ponkc, Qvo\\\ Antf.qiiam, PknTSQiTAM. 
 
 171. /hun, usal in a ('oniiitionai clausi', with ihv force oft/, 
 or proriiird that, i.s alway.s Ibllowi'il by tho suhjuiutive ; as, 
 
 VnmiU^l tl„it (or .so htuj m) th> fuvh rnnain, IH fhnn fanhhn 
 tnmls wnnffiiKj to thnrfancn.- Duin rOs nmii.Muit vorb.i "tinifimt 
 siio urhitrAta. 
 
 Tho propor nogativo in Huch a cliiuso xh nS. 
 
 172. Ihnn, ddncc and quoad, whiU, na long as, mcrt'ly 
 temporal, are followe'i hy tho indirative ; as, 
 
 Tln'ivfoir <i>'iunt irhi!,' i/.u/ lutir fhr opporf^inifif : Proindo uhlto 
 (lull) c«t fjuMiltriN. //(• irsi.sfni irifh thv vfmod hrarvn/, ua lonn an 
 he iras ahic : (Jnoiul potulf. forfisNiino rontitit. 
 
 17.'?. Wlu'ii (turn {)Hilh') introilucoH a ohiuso marking a longer 
 jtoriod within whioh somothing v.\w has takiMi plaoo, it in followed 
 hy tho present iudieative, even when an historieal tense is found in 
 the prineipal elause; as, JVhIlr Cvsar in,s (lehviimi In thv.sr ri",l()ti,% 
 »"»ir(>j/.s ,'ana' tof^im.: Duj.i in his locis Caesar' moratur, legatl ad 
 euni voneriint. 
 
 174. Dnvi, donee and qno((d, meaning until, take the indica- 
 tive to express mere time, and the subjunetive to express the 
 further notion of pnrpose, expectation, or end in view ; as, 
 
 1 muted until he ret n rued : KxspeeffivT donee redllt. He deter- 
 mined that he ouijht not to imit until, the Hel ret ii should reach, the 
 t^)Titorieiiof the Santoni : Ndn exspectjindum sibi stMuit dum in 
 San tonus Helvftii pervenli-ont. /le determined to delay in Gmd 
 vntd he learned that the wit^ter eamp hnd been feyrtified: Quoad 
 mnnltrt hiberna cojarnovlsHot, in Galha nionlrl constituit. 
 
 P^^. 
 
 / 1 
 
woro pro- 
 NVIntn Miir 
 
 lllllllutt'N of 
 
 ll"M (Vwi' 
 upon thu 
 
 ITSQTJAM. 
 
 orcc of if\ 
 ve ; as, 
 
 I'm fiiMhion 
 'b:i Uiigiiiit 
 
 w, mcit'ly 
 iiulo Hl)Tto 
 
 <(H loiilj <in 
 
 ( Ji longer 
 in foUowod 
 H found in 
 •sr )'<'•, ioun, 
 , legatl H(l 
 
 he indica- 
 
 prcss the 
 
 ^; as, 
 
 He dettr- 
 
 rcarh the 
 
 t duin in 
 
 1/ in vtaul 
 
 I : Quoad 
 
 I'AllT II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOHinoW. 1H1 
 
 m AM^uam ...„,l ;«■„«,„„„. (U.f„„), ,„ ,l,.n.,.e «..« 
 r,«W/ ,,r..m.^.,/, ,|,.y „rc. I„n„«..,| |,y ,|,, s, .L- • „, 
 
 N.!';::' ;?H::'f;;;::;/t:,-,'[r:;';,',,!"^'"'' ""■" ;■■■■:■'""' "t "'"■ '''"'"■•• 
 
 cillni, ,lnxil,. "■.■IIM.....,,,, ,„ n„o„ H„„„„i,-„,u,M .,xu.-- 
 
 ExiMIC'IHE 21. 
 
 .at,,,,.,.,,.,,. . -n,., „a„ls ,I.d,,.,„ u.:y..„,H „„t U. w, t 
 m.t.i „«,„■ ,„a,.i„„l tUo ,iv.,... ;i, Ak l.„,g a„ ,,„., .„„»„1 liv,.l l.u 
 
 what, tl,mr,„„„ I,™ „„,.,, „. VVl,ilo (;,.H.rwa.s .lolayi,,^ i„ «,;« 
 
 :,:;;"":'"■•" v '■";■• •;• i* -« «- L-ght^ .ft .i,,.: :f : 
 
 ,., tJ,„ .avalry „l,„,,l,, ,.„t„„,. 7. Uof„r„ ».,„„„ who ,lwdt l,„. 
 
 !' J! M f '". , '""''" "'" '"■'■'""'"' '■" "'"'■^ "'" "<"">"■""' with 
 La.,o.,,,„ ,„„|,k t,, 1„,.,1 t|,„ ir„„,,« ,..,,„„ t|„ |,ri,,,„, ,„„ „h„„ 
 dofu,vt the ,,„„,„y w.thout dilliclty. 1„. Whilo t!,e«„ things wore 
 ^o,„s ,,„ th„ o„„,„y „|,o wo,.„ i„ tho 0,™,. t„„k thoir a.XtZ 
 
 tl,;t 0,',!!.°"'' Tl r'" *''"'"« ""-•»'"l»'™«'y. it was „,p„rted 
 th,it, the cai,,,. I,.,d b«on atfaK^ked by the u.-,en>v. 12. Before I 
 
 reached the city ,„y friend had »et out for h„,ne. 13. As loras 
 he was ,„ the city I re.nainod at h,„„e. 14. C« has deterS 
 
182 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 to attack the camp before the enemy are informed of his arrival. 
 15. Provided the enemy do not learn our numbers and position,* 
 we shall make an attack upon them to-morrow. 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives.* 
 
 176. As the pronom'nal subject is really contained in the 
 ending of the verb, the personal pronouns {ego, nos, tu, vos, is, 
 el) are seldom expressed except for emphasis or contrast; as, 
 
 I shall mme to-morrow: Cras venla.n. Yon will reach tJie city 
 before night : Ante noctem ad urbem pervenles. He attached the 
 e^temy .• Hostes agrgrressus est. It is thundering : Tonat. I at 
 a,ny rate have moved myself a brave man : Fgo certe me fortem 
 praestlti. / have injured the Gauls, yon your fellow-citizens : Ego 
 Lrallis nocu^, tu civibus. 
 
 177. IIlc is called the demonstrative pronoun of the first 
 person, and is used to denote something near (in time or 
 place) or belonging to the speaker, or something just men- 
 tioned or about to be mentioned; as. 
 
 This present war: Hoc helium. This place where we are: Hie 
 
 hxll. This loas surrounded by a marsh: Collis non longe aberat 
 Huno palus cnigebat. The character of the ground rns Ss follows • 
 ^ZyluZy '*''**'• ^'''^''''' language, hlc often means, 
 
 We occasionally find Mc used in a sort of condensed or pree- 
 nant sense m grammatical agreement with a word expressed 
 when logically It belongs to sclme word like res understood ; as! 
 Through fear of this circumstance : Hoc metu ( = Hu j us rei metu) 
 Grief over this matter : HIc dolor ( = Dolor liQ j us rel). 
 
 178. Iste is the demonstrative of the second person, and is used 
 
 a^ TwYT'*^'"^ "T «%belonging to the'^persok addressed; 
 as, Tfiat hook near you (or of yours) : ute liber. As a law term 
 It means, ^^ my opponent," - the defendant," and it also occasionally 
 nnphes contempt. «oiwxiaiijr 
 
 nouns. " " ' '*"" «"jc^"''c3 wiicn iney raooiry 
 
lis arrival, 
 position, 
 
 d in the 
 
 ^, vos, is, 
 ''St; as, 
 
 i tJie city 
 ached the, 
 Elf;. I at 
 le fortem 
 ms: Ego 
 
 the first 
 time or 
 ist men- 
 
 ire: HIo 
 
 re was a 
 
 aberat. 
 
 follows : 
 i means, 
 
 or preg- 
 pressed, 
 )od ; as, 
 i iiietu). 
 
 is used 
 Iressed ; 
 iw term 
 sionally 
 
 erciae are 
 ly modify 
 
 PART il.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 183 
 
 179. lUe is the pronoun of the third person, and is used to 
 denote something remote (from both the speaker and the 
 person addressed), in time or place or thought • as 
 
 o«S;f:lS^rQuof-3^^^ 
 
 is tlrSated hl^Zi H '""'' ""Zf^ ''^''^^' *^' >^^' while hlc 
 Z^tteLlt^^^^ ^«- remain d at /^. 
 
 £nar.^sJI. Ve:' MlJ^w,^^^^^^^ 
 
 Rehqui, qui domi manserunt, se atque illos alunt m rarsiT^' 
 
 vicem anno post in armis sunt, ill, domI remanent ""' 
 
 r.^'^'~^^}^ frequently used (generally in the plural) referring f-. 
 persons just mentioned, who are not the subiect of the LTslt 
 tence. and then it may often be well rendered by an emphatic £ 
 or th^y, or by th^ others, the enemy, the latter. emphatic he 
 
 (b) nie is used pointing forward to an appositive or a relative 
 
 taZ :^P^/T^"^ .'^ demonstrative ; as, tL mS he pr^M 
 
 PoUidt^^^^^^^^ ^'"VY"^ ? '^-^^ ^^^*^^^^ *^^^^^ ^^' territoriTsTmnk 
 ^^■?t\ *^ *"*"'" "«^ P^*- "^e« «»i68 daturuir That nnrt 
 MI have menti^d ah^e: lUa pars .|ua.« .^^^ e^2l1 
 
 Ille often means that famous or wdl-knmtm. 
 
 180. Is is an unemphatic pronoun of mere reference. Un- 
 like hic, iste and ille, it has no special force of its own It is 
 used to translate he, she, him, her, it, they, them, referring to 
 some person or thing already mentioned. Besides this pro- 
 n'-minal use, it is also found with the value of a demonstrative 
 adjective, this or that. 
 
 IMl'iiT^^Hr?''^'*7''' T' ^^ •^''' *^ y^ealthi^st man amongst the 
 Helvetii He formed a league of the nobility: Apud HelvetiSs 
 longe ditissimus fuit Orgetorix. is conjurationem noCitftis ffdt 
 He acted m th^s way for the reason that he did not thinkTmcMto 
 engage with the enemy : w ea de causa faciebat, quod cum hostibus 
 dimicandum non existimabat. ^ nosuous 
 
 mO^^J^ThlT^^n^^f^r'J'''''''^^^ *^^ antecedent of the relative 
 qui, as, I he day tliat he had agreed upon came ■ Fa diPH «„ 
 
 co^nstituerat, venit. Those wh. lad croZd thTrivfrtoSoTh:^ 
 :l|l^l^T!5i 'K^-' frumentandl causa ierant tra^SLt: 
 sum ;ri te^er;"' ' *" '"^^ *'" ""^ '^ '^ fn^hten^d: Neque i; 
 
184 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 .xercita oml ,„r.j„ri^ '"• *^"™"'"' •""'-"l«». U'dlorum 
 
 expect tlirnu t,ri,« ,,.„"„ .,^ ml™, ,•;■"■"" "■'""■"■ "■" "l'""l'l 
 cognovit. '^ rmmr. Earn case ruiuolum modo 
 
 JT;J^'' ^''^' "'"-'^ '' •■"■ '-•"'l''""i- I'^noun which may be 
 used ,„ apposition with noun, or with any of the persona! 
 pronouns; as, personal 
 
 (a) Tho gonitivo of ,W with or witl.„„t fl,„ • ,. 
 
 tives limy 1)0 used -ii tli.. „....:., .'''™""' "lo possessive adjec- 
 
 ii«6r„... liiigua'ceitiiia^idi;;;;;;,;:" •'™ "'^•"' <•« "«'-'' tw«»- hi 
 jeS'l*L<s:r:xtri/'i:;t'r^^^^ -'-"?« to the sub. 
 
 «s, Or,,c.te.« *;„ /m».|/-MTrgel'iS :i il:Sr ■™' "'"' "'""' 
 
 «v%^Ir/l'Mr'tfai:. "'''■■■"•'';!• "'" ^""" equivalents for 
 i»likoly,^ara*'';Setr\:rifS'l^:S.i-'- 
 
 oth^^i; !}:i .°-;„,v. \t 'tf^rrt;""" ■■]■ r •• -- • ■ • • 
 
 alferi; as, T/je , ,,e wfr,^.^/^/ '^ ^vV ' • *^'^« "tlier party, alterl 
 
 th. other he /r.-./;. "rf oZSL^s A.r ^'^' ''" T'" "^ ^'^ ^'^^ ^'""^«' 
 concessit, altern,. cohor ^^s .^ ' 
 
 to the. sanw place, others nlTt^^^^^^^^ ^TJi ''''' '^«^*"^^ ^«'^^ 
 
 i^laU: Aliae ^o^ ^£Z^' ^^f^^re cUthe lov;er part of the 
 
 -_ . . ..K. o/ one d.t;u.7o*i y?e(Z to tfie mountain, 
 
PART II.— 8VNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 185 
 
 those r^ the other to the ba^me: Alton sG in montom"rec5p5runt 
 ulterl ad iiiiiuHllmoiito ho contulGruiit. i«i-operunc, 
 
 niU.Zt~1r' ''"'■' ''*''"?''/ V' '"^« 'lirertion and norm in another 
 (htovnUyothrr, were earned in another direetion) : AIII In ulluTn 
 
 18(|. others is oxpruHsod by aW. 1\, d(3iK)to ^/u- o(!/,,.r.s Ui^ 
 Sn ^t/-^ "---•'^'"-<>r-//7"i^ an, (Hhrr.lce^ZrU^ 
 
 J mr/« Huh ics cetei.l faoiohunfc. Thn/ could do nnthimi untlurid 
 the other leyn.ns: Nihil sine rei„.„iH legi>,nil,us omcere potSnt 
 
 . ^?7' ^"J"'':\ "'>Hh iu>me one, any one, as oprMmed to none no nr„. 
 iH alojms (adjoctivo <di,,ul): us, /;. //.4 ^/.en/...,^ s^n wt^X fn 
 
 m.no est sino »li,,ua spo. It xh no fault of yours if some lu^ve 
 feared yon: No.i c,st tim ulla culpa si tG ull.,«i t huuGrunt 
 
 erauLulKft'r'f JT'^^" "'/'Pl'l^tic, is often oxprossed hy sunt qui, 
 enmt </>u otc., followed by the subjunctive (see section 34) • as 
 iimne mid this : Emnt .|ui hoc dicerent. ^ ' ' 
 
 {h) Some, s(me few, is frecjuently expressed by nrmnfMl' as 
 From some sUdes envoys had been sent to the Gerla^ iZm^. 
 nonaulllH civitatibus ad (Jerniands niissi erant. ^ 
 
 (c) ^ome oH« «„me 07ie or other, may also be expressed bv nescio 
 
 wanrtm// nm? . Nesolo quern prope adstantein vidi. It is used in 
 
 nsignincant , m W>. had raised some trifiinn rumor (some rumor 
 or other) : Ranioris nosdo quid afflaverat. ^ 
 
 189. ^ny on. or an^/ (substantive) is qu^sq^tam, and any 
 (adjective) is m^/w« when all are excluded. This happens in 
 sentences actually or virtually negative, such as rhetorical 
 questions, comparative clauses, or clauses containing such 
 words as sme, vix and aegre ; as, 
 
 leaver Umn any of the lid,,,,.: F„r.I„r emt qi„.m BeWarumU ^. 
 N.B. -Instead of .pimpmm the indefinite jtm (,„?) i, generaUy 
 
1 m 
 
 nnMAUV LATIN HOOK. 
 
 mi An)(s\\\ M«o alllniuHiv.. «,.«!«.>, wluMt all .mo itiuhi.!...! Ih 
 
 ailnv |»oih'»iluin o|»«»ih.(,. '«#u.mhhht. 
 
 MM. Smr, mm' ,».,., ,v,y,»M». ,r ,v,Y.fM. .mm-. Ih ./(,>,/,„)», uffon not; 
 
 SlZ'^n'r'"'" '' '"'*'''"■ '"'"'" ••^""•••^ "•""•• ^"i^'»'" 
 
 i;Mw. M Ai,7. (,,r ♦MO... //„,„ hn.) iM ,,mm; o7m.7, (of* /..l.f h M^.'. 
 Nvi!l/I;rMnr ""' «»'''««^»"«*^'>'> «iM, ,. pilmuuu ,umI ,ulj«div«ly 
 
 l*:xAMn.K«. /iWn/ <„„„ ♦,v,, .^.,7M,!f/».r hmi^ifihv fvm»mf i»/,i,.r 
 
 J^M-tloWMM^iO^f th' IMV, //„•}/ /•„,/ ••,//,.,/,.; A.I Ui....U.nM. Hl.,i..l 
 
 vnma ,|«,>,,uo ton.poHh ^W»f/ ht^th mnn . IH»olimi« ,mi«q«©, ' 
 
 1. 1 tvniHitUMi ft(, n^m^o for Mnw yo>\m, ImK, y.Mi rHunuMl ftt-, 
 omv 1o (Jaul. y. 1'ho Nonii hh.I tho A.liuUuoi wiut> \VHKit>K wftr 
 !HrfMHM« Hoiuo: - fonuor Im.l tnkon up Hu»ir p..Niti,in ..n Mm* oMht 
 Niiloof thoriviM' HfthiM, Mu> l(Mh>u\\^Mv f,.Hifyi„jj (|„.i,. „vvu «..wfi. 
 a. Souio Hfvi.l (IkU ('<m>r hJnm.'lf wouM iiul ,iim> t... l.wl ih,. aniiy 
 HciNvsM that vivor. 4. TUi^ in n imisIuui of tho (I.miIh, (Iih(, llu.y 
 oompol tmvolloi>s ovon »nf*<i»Ht MuMr will lo Ht,.p, luul (hoy in.pijro 
 wimt ovoryono of thoni hn.s ho.nil o.MU'oruing o.-ioh uwillor. 5. If 
 .•ui>' of fho (J-uiIh iM oupfmv.l. ho will ho put, fo aoufh l»y fho 
 Kon»H« 0,-ivalry. «. If «ho .lofoat rt.nl Hight ,)f (ho (Junk HlnniiM 
 Jiivvofuv. hoortu hv>ni thai AriovisfUN .lofoato.l «1umh l.y NfmUKom 
 m<hor than l>y valor. 7. Hofotv ho shouhl nrnko any attotnpt, ho 
 
 k;>r(i(iivMl Oivit 
 
 iTxV-isn \\,; 
 
 ttv HiUiirsUsiU'si SKjfori, 
 
 mm. 8. I^nmi fcho 
 
p^\n rr. htntax and vmvmivw. 
 
 187 
 
 mM.« nm,l„ M,.M,,,|y .,.,(, nf mhI<, I,,. l,,,,. nny (h „„(, nf) vioNuM'e 
 
 «•;; »'"n.'liM«. in. TlK,y MmM.«I,( ||M.y y„,i„ ,,,,„ ,,,,„, 
 
 W HM.f M-.M,,/) WUU.Ml. (I. r,.,, .„ f ,„ „„ ,„ „„^, ,,^^.^ 
 
 will. ,u, Hi„,y, I .|,„,|| „M(, Pn.Mn i„ {nuy) nlU.f .nuMMor. Ili. 
 H..anu.|y ,„,>.„,,„ whm fu,,.,.! In Mu.y f I.hI. il.iM «oMi„r whm fur l.mvM,' 
 
 ;'•"<'« i"t.«. 14. TiMMmoMMl .,,,1, IM (!m,h,u. in Nm,,!. Mm, of,!,.,,. Uu\ 
 
 .i« rm.iy iiifn wii.l,,.,. ,,nnH,M,« uf. II,,,,,,.. 15. TImm,, whh nn ,lo„l.i 
 
 l"i» It" wilJ. hJH „wi. I,u,„| {~hun,rlf) had in(lid,Hl .iMutl. ....oi, 
 liimM»>|f, ' 
 
 KXICKCISK XMli. 
 Tmr, Kci.ahvii; I'kcinokn. 
 
 10.1. Th,. irhitivn im.jKMiM ik.i cnly n-n-rw to soma noim or 
 l'""i«Hin its niil(r<'(l(-Mi ImiI uIho iiilKHliMcH n Hc\nm\Ui <lmmo 
 winch ii j„iiiM mljcciivcly K, ||„. niKccTulcnt l,y wny of limltu- 
 litui or «l('HcH|)lit»ii ; um, 
 
 7Vm. /.r,W„r.. whirl, ,„,, ,a (h'„rM, /,r „r,h'n In In- flrdroy,;!: 
 
 l<'i'l«M(N M,n rdalivu Ih oflot. ohII.hI M,,, ro„j„m7/rr. pr.lno.n.. 
 
 1U4. The usr.M of y,t,- j,, (,i,nl mid coiisrciiiivf rJauscf. have 
 Imrri nircntly noticed. (Sec wrlions 25 ajirl .'H.) 
 
 M)f>.()n uccoiiiil o( the rofidnc.sH oC the Liififi mUrrn far 
 tndicftynKn visiiiil c-oniuciu,., hciwccn wh.it foJIow.s and what 
 gocH l.cr„rr. we (ind ,fu, (|»r.,n.Min or adjective) iiHcd instead of 
 ii demonstrative at the I.eMinninK of a sentence, with or wifhotit 
 a conjunction (see section N, N.M.); as, 
 
 iHHM.u. onnHorvav.t, U hn, <L.n- ..mlnlnnl Ihin, hr onhrJ it 
 i'ovo.l,oru..t„r ...llil |,„M Uu,u ,i,vit,. A'o,' this rn,xnn l,L /hMH 
 
I.SS 
 
 PUIMAItV LATIN IHMIK. 
 
 I 
 
 n»0. Tl»r tPhiivr h niso uh.mIim iniio.hirn flau.ie« of nrm- 
 »r»lti)>», i'rtn,y/f^»,)»» ,11)1 1 .'f»M.tf» Of fvrf^MM . nit 
 //.MM/,.,,.. ..;,„„/,^ ^,„, ^,,„^ ,„ ,,„, ,„„,, ,,^, ^^.^,^^^^, 
 
 nPB uniHPM in .'mmIHh oouniinlMNi.i, Mnplinid din hiiUkiiii. ...Ii..,.|nr 
 
 .^ ♦ ;/ ..M ..NH'. «MM.. ^/„.,/ „,. „M,. ^, r..r,..,n,/ ...y/, .,,.7, .,,,,'; 
 
 '•»t./M„.. .(f HO ,„,„f ,r A..,y,r. N.ii. |{..n,n,„ Mil,., .,,,0 ,livi,n ; , 
 
 \n Mu>Ho tiMOM ,^»f) fnlu'M Mu> Hul,jtiM,'liv,«. 
 
 I5>r. riu' rolluwing prruliiuiiioM ..r llu; ivh.livr Hh.Mil.l Uv 
 tM»S('i\V(l : 
 
 (»») In IwHii. n.,. .M««ootMl,>n( m fi,Mp„Millv ,..,.i(l..,l. nr imH,,.,. 
 .Mr ,.W.,v,r. „„„„ j„„„, „,„„, f,,i„„, ,,^, H..M/,. ;, , / 
 
 (M Uv.«Mioiu.ll.v H„. Mnl,Ml,mn> of ||„. pvovionM .„. ||,„ fnlluwlnir 
 ;iu jHloonn M,,n,,li,.a,io .hvolu ,>«, „ ,.,„. J ,.;, r,,, 
 
 ::::'::j;!;±;:. ■■ '" "'^' ••'• - "-' '''^'•* 
 
 V) <>i««>M «,. lin,) (l|,.,.nl,',',Ml,vhl ivp,>,il,Ml ill Ml,. n.|,i,|iv,M>l,iii«,.' 
 u • ooii OM linst) an.l o,„i((o.l ii, ||„. oil,,,-. |„.i„^ i,.pi-..H..|,(.M i„ 
 
 Hdj^Sfc '''""'"' '"'' *^'' l"'''^'-li"K (-), MHMoIalivo Iihm an 
 
 UtHMall> fr/M,7»K / «,MV y,M./, >.rm //,.. //,„■,/ fuui ofijoul huv6 
 >.,».,/ „/.„,;„„ ,,,j,M Nouuy HolKHo, „„„„, I.Mlian, .Ih ia L 
 ~ 'tV }>o,MUhhi Ivuuianuiii o<niinmv,'<rimt;. 
 
PAMT n. HYNTAX ANII OOMI'OMITION. 
 
 ihi) 
 
 OI.H..IV,. Mhil ill MiIm IiihI Mniif.Mirtt ilin imIhUvm «-I.u(m»i Im t,n^u 
 'MMi-Mlr.l (iHlli,. nlijirl, of IImmi-iIm/z./mimw. wlilln III Ilin (<;iiuliHli 
 I hnv,' Hjint Im Miimmi, in |,HiHi(,linM(,H||^ wIMii.iil, nlfyi'lUiu Uiu 
 H.viiinx of MiM,i.|j.M.|lvnh.|(mMo. ''^""K i"" 
 
 (7) J« (it'liilivt. iiiMiMiiiti, imIJ4ioMvo or lulvcili) nhvr Iho mimr 
 niK'h, Hnijiraf, .M i/»n,/. ,„ „„nni, „^ mmm, n|,..,, |h ii.|,i..Hiuif.M| |ii 
 
 liHlill I.V llP n.|Hliv..H 7.*^ yM,//M, ,,,0,„/,,«, ,f„nl, H,,!., nflof ^/.m, 
 
 fhiif! Mo.. ,.Mi i.|..iii , ,1 ill,,.!. 77.,,/ ,nr nwh ( ../* th- mim 
 
 vhiiiiU'lv,) „H (I,,,, l„u-v vvvr Iwn,'. 'IVllf'M hiimI, ,,„fH(^n n'...-.,m|' fiin- 
 rniil. Ihv ,nm,i w„a „nl m, umit .»« / ho,l hrfmr ni'i'n Hi Tnu\m 
 
 llOll 'Idl .•K.MfittlH (|llflti(||||| luiina Vlf|»»l(im. ' 
 
 hfvni iiKiy Im* r.tlli.w.Ml l.y .,/,,.... ,,|' ./.•, liiMlitmt ..f hy <inr. 
 
 ill) III llM*('Mf;..,,r l,VV..HIIl'.l(lMHiV(. lt,|)lMvi1 rlflllMKH lll<».lif V lhU I llM 
 
 mm.M.,iil.......l..|,l, IliM i,.|..(iv« i.m.y I..M.i,iili.M| in (I,,, h.....,im( ,Lih.. 
 
 (II Ihn U\u h.l/iMvPM woiil.l I.., ill Mm, hhi.i.i ..ih.,, .„• wIm.im (Jim 
 h<m...ii.| h.liiliv,., ir rx|.c..MH...I, w<.iili| Im, it, ||,„ unwiwdivi^ or 
 M,.M.||H.iliv.O. ..HI i„M,v Imi (•..|Mw.,(...|. .,r ilH |.|.,r<. in (Jim m.u.„i,.| .-Ihiiho 
 iiKi.V Im. r,ili..|i I..V (Ml.-iiM.iiHlrMJJvM ; m,h, //.■ nix,, pirviiih fiimii Ihim- 
 iwrht\ whnlivht ihr rl,i,/ niillnnilii >i,itl imh wry /iiif„ilnr wilh Ihn 
 »'».»;, iiM.M /...,.,,/.., |(„,„ |)M,„„nii^I ,,„! |,Hi„.ij,n,(,lllii ..l.lihf.l.Hl, n,o (i,v 
 n«' (|ul) innxiiiin plrl.i iumh^iiIhm ».ml, immmk.i.I.,!,. //.. h„H Mnil n man 
 ii'hum nr nvithnfmr mrohry.' Iloiniinmi, i,,hmii n«)i|iio MiiinitiitH 
 iUM(iui «a pHiniiiiiH, iiiiHil., 
 
 (/») VVImmi ill III.. |*;n^liM|i Mi.||(,(,h<!n iJin HiilDiiiidMrif Im tiMKlJIIod liy 
 n Mii|M.||(.|ivM, ..r l.y nti (.i,i|,|i/t,|,i,. n.|j...-(,iv.. ..f iiiiiiilM.r nr niiM.iiiit,, 
 Ilin l.(Uiii i..(iiiv(il..|il, I't.r Mii.Ji Hii|MMlHl,ivn or ..(Jm,.- imIj... iiv«. Ih 
 JIHiiHlly |,|„,,....| in III,. r.'l.iliv.M'liMiHi. ; M,H, Thri/hivr Iml iL h,nwd 
 h,i,h, Ihnihoil; Ihwmu qiK^m li/il.r.|„iiil f,M'll«»i{iMMMi n,i.iTHf-riuit„ 
 H> »,'„l till' _/.((' Mnhl,,'rH hv hitil iiulh him It, mir uminhiiur : Mllil,f.« 
 qiion imiK'OM Hfi.iiiiii lifiJiiiit, ii.-.l.lN (uixili.-. iniHil,. ' 
 
 (/) l^'iimlly ill hnJii, (iiiili|<M iJ,,, V\u^\\^h iiwik..) |Ji„ idlaUvM in 
 >:lw/i,yH ..xpr..HH...I ; m, I miin fhv m>hlivr hv hud nnU : M]\\U^u\ am^ttt 
 llllHrrdi, vl.ll. //.■ mtw Ihr hn,i I fi„rr Ihr hnnk In: I'minilii vidit, 
 
 Mil lilii'uiii .{(.({..riiiii. 
 
 I. Tlio MJiitiH whldi )in Imil liiiijl, jti Mif, provioim Hiimmor, ho 
 ni'.l(.i'...l I,.. HHHiMiililo III. oii.io. '2. AimI no onn wuh Mvor found who 
 w..ul(l n.fiiM, I,., (lit, for liiH nalivi. Inn. I. ;j, I laving /irranK*"! 
 •.V(.ryfliin«|'..r Mioir (;..p(i,iiiir«), (hoy (ixr.l u d.iy on whioh all wtiro 
 
 f/O /IHHt.lllllIn III, (liM Itiiiil^u ..r 111"' ••!••■-!• * >' . -:.i ii I 
 
 roiitMH by which fhoy woiikl !», ahlo (,(, y^i, „i,(, from (,heir home. 
 
 ..wuaff ' 
 
190 
 
 PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 6. This man since he { = pCi) had been elected through the agency 
 of the pneste, Caesar ordered to hold the uoo-er „ ^"""'^ 
 jJthough for three days he had ponnit J ItTv ^^ a crf;r„l' 
 Wer to ,^ beyond the works, on the fourth d«;rnt tw^ w'„s 
 to make an attack upon the enemy. 7. The s J.dard Zl^Z 
 
 sto I Z ""'T''"'^ "' "" '™"' ''*''™ "'-- himself oToft^ 
 ah p and began to carry the eagle against the enemy. 8. Ves^nUo 
 wluch .s the hrgest town of the Se,,ua„i, was about ten mileTdis' 
 tant from Cesar's camp. 9. Cmsar saw that the same th^gwouW 
 happen as had happened on the previous days. 10. He senTu o 
 bravest horsemen he had with him to the assistance "f 1 1 
 
 'ess'f Tv '"'• !'■ ^l"^^ **" ""' ^'"- -"> '»" -".-age 
 uess as they are accustomed to exhibit in battles on land 12 H 
 
 *e had no precedent for this course of action, I shouu'iudt It 
 
 mos glonous thing (for one) to be estabished and 'handed 
 
 oldie;: t^Tr "' "■'/°'"' "• ^^ «»* - "-j™"- ^^ 
 
 sold ers Ciesar had promised to give the com to. 16. C»sar is 
 not the man U, send scouts to learn where the enemy are. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 Tenses of the Indicative. 
 
 198. The present tense is used of what is going on now at 
 the present moment ; as, * 
 
 C^arnenrMng twolegicns: Caesar duSs legiSnes o6n«,„b... 
 4 but*°alttat;:r*' ''^"^'^'^^ "-" onlyi, «.„„. 
 
 («) The present is frequently used in descriptions of past 
 events, m ammated narrative (the historical present) ■ as 
 
 r^^ZtTZ^ltoi^iJ^' '" *pa*./.„« t,e c*,.. Caesar 
 
 re^i'd,' ortrbS ^tirrtate^T'^^'S' "' " ,"<'»'^™'»' 
 P^-. ...rt mm to be browiM „ ; vinum importsn n8n sinanl 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 m 
 
 . ^f ^ y^*^ J«»^f^^?^^«»», jamdin, and jamprldem, the present is used 
 instead of the perfect to denote what has been (and still is) 
 going on ; as, He luxs long been coUectiny forces / Jamdia copifts 
 «)oinparat. ^ 
 
 199. The imperfect tense is used to denote what was going 
 on in past time , and corresponds in general to the English past 
 of a continuous or progressive action ; as 
 
 He was tvintering (or witdered, or did vniiter) in Gavl • In 
 Gallia hlemabat. 
 
 (a) The imperfect is also used to denote a repeated or habitual 
 course of action (translated by used to, wmild, etc.) ; as, He iised to 
 have the greatest confidence in this legion : Huic legionl cdnndebat 
 maxime. They woxdd retreat into the camp : In castra se reciole^ 
 bant. *^ 
 
 (6) It is also used to denote an attempted or an incipient action • 
 as, 1 he enemy began to hurl their weapons : Ilostes tela conjlde- 
 bant. They attempted to prevent our march : Nos itinere prohibe- 
 bant. 
 
 (c) It is used in the description of a locality where something 
 took place ; as, Before that town stretched a plain about three miles 
 m length : Ante id oppidum planities circiter millia passuum tria 
 m longitudmem patebat. 
 
 . (^^ In describing battles and military manoeuvres, the imperfect 
 18 essentially the tense of description, as opposed to the mer*^ nar- 
 rative. It IS used to express the actions, circumstances or feelings 
 antecedent to or accompanying the main action which is indicated 
 
 Belf GaT Il^r*"" '' ^ ^"""^ ^""^"^^^^ ""^ '"''^ "'^' '^^ ^*«*^' 
 
 ^^] ^ith jamrfm, jamdudum and jampridem, the imperfect is 
 used with the force of a pluperfect ; as. He Jiad long been carryinq 
 on war : Jampridem bellum gerebat. "^ 
 
 200. The future tense is used to denote what is going to take 
 place at some time after the present : that is, after the time at 
 which the statement is made ; as, 
 
 Ccesar will take the city by storr.i : Caesar urbem expuynablt. 
 
 In English we often use the present (especially with if and 
 when) in a loose way for the future. In Latin the future "is the 
 proper tense when the actions are contemporaneous ; as, I shall 
 see htm wh^n he xs at home : Cum domi erlt. eum videbo. 
 
 201. The Latin perfect does duty for two English tenses: 
 
192 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (1) It is used to denote an action romnlHfn/i o*. t-u 
 
 essedls desiliAnt et pedibus proelSur '««»"uave.«^t. ex 
 
 thf?L!;f*^)" ^^'^ «''"l^*h">g al"i'^«t equivalent to a perfect tense in 
 
 nuntios compertum habeo. ^ messewgrers. Hoo per 
 
 ..fer^^?^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ '^^"^ ^ '-- ^^^ ^^^^- -^-^^-^ to J ^a.e 
 
 fl,?;^'~^?"'® perfects, such as memmi, novl and consimii havA 
 the force of presents, / remember,'! know I am orc?/s 2^7 Tvf.? 
 pluperfects have the value of imperfects m^n T n-'"" 
 
 suesco = / become accustorr^ed. ""P^"^^^"^"' ^°«^« = ^ l'<^rn ; Con- 
 
 204. The pluperfect tense is used to mark the act as com- 
 pleted at some slated time in the past ; as, 
 
 They had already reached the territories of fho ^^/7,»-. t • 
 Aeduorum fines pervenerant. ^ '*''^"* ' "^^"^ "^ 
 
 («) The pluperfect is used in subordinate clauses to Hpn^f. 
 
 Xh If ,.tr ? r'-*""^' p-edi„g_th.t?fTe tire X 
 
 - n IS u..ual., ,n .h» ..aperiecc ; as, iyiitnewr any cohort Uft the 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 193 
 
 atque impetus r.eerat. llif:7l^Z^tZu7,^^^^^ ^'^'"*"*'* 
 
 to a pluperfect (Hee secS 9ni t \*^"''''' "^'*^^/ equivalent 
 turn habelmt (nearly enZ'l .^,^""«*»'» f^ omnI provincia coao- 
 (Hterally, they LlT^rZL'^ tZ^^^^^^^^^ ^--^<' 
 
 attempting to annex that didrict Z th. -^^ 
 
 when the letCTsVeceTved a^V^P^'"^^^^^ *« ^^e time 
 
 ^t'e /^earrf nothing new tndi haT T^^'"'^ *"" ^'^^- ^^^ ^ 
 ?e«m.. Nihil habfbrr'quod sfrlb^^em n/ "^^^"'^^ "^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 timLTertTe'lpS^^^ ^'.'^"^^"« «^ ^^e reader) some- 
 
 mentioned, wher^^wfsTour^^^^^ lu '^"^!p^"^* «^ ««*i«« ^^^e^dy 
 
 formed a league agaiZuhe fcf ^Ln'f ^Vt''"^ ^«^* «/ ^«^» 
 esse Galliae P^rteZaLTrl^Zirf^ ' ^.^^^^^'^''^^ ^rtiam 
 jQraverunt. «»xeramu8 contra populum Romanum con- 
 
 205. The future perfect is used to denote that the act will 
 be completed at some stated time in the future ; as, 
 
 Tpien Ccesar shall have returned (rehirr><,\ /« *h^ 
 make an attack upon the emmZ CurnrT ^ a ^'^^ ^«^/'» ""^ shall 
 hostes impetum fac^em^s. ^ ' ^""^ ^^^^" *^ «-«*ra redlerlt. in 
 
 thi'^ierfectTlf aT^^^^^ ^^^ P--nt (occasionally 
 
 clauses introduced bv ^y Sl a ^"^"''1 P^^^^*' especially iJ 
 the future perfect islhf W"pe?tetr^^^^ ^.^aW etc/ln lltin 
 ordinate ve?b, though futCfis Antecedent to tl 7^^'"' '^-^ '^\ 
 
 sp^^d^ttl^a^^^^^^^^^^ P-Pt or 
 
 /kive: as. i at nnti vnt^ „l,^ii u "^ i"', "7"' ^"* "^"'"v' ^'^ jowui to 
 
 ^■: Ego <^t^z::!:r^,r!!JL"'^,!:jr:::^.zf^y ^ '^« 
 
 JLo 
 
 
194 
 
 PHIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 EXERCIHE '?!. 
 
 1. To .hia legion C!«»wr Imd Hhown oHpeciul iiidulgpnce, and he 
 placod th« groHtoHt roliunco (on it) on account of itn bravery. 2. 
 On the following day they move their camp from that place.* 
 Cflowir dooH the wime, and Hondn all the cavalry in a«lvanco. 3. 
 Now the BritonH call (it) a town whenever they Hccure the impjwH- 
 ahlo forcHtH with a ram{)art and a trench. 4. Whenev r our cavalry 
 rushed out into the fieldH, the JJritish leader wc.uld engage with 
 them, to the great i)eril ..f our lu.rHe. 5. If y,,,, aHsiHt them with 
 corn or with anything else, ^ Hhall regard you in the tmm light as 
 the Helvetii. fi. If Cje^ar in at the head of the Roman army, ho 
 wdl easily defeat the Gauls. 7. Before midnight the enemy will 
 have laid aside their arms. 8. For many years he had »ill the 
 revenues of the Aedui leased at a small price. J). He marched 
 through the forest of Ardennes, which was the largest of all Gaul, 
 and extended from the banks of the Rhino to the Nervii. 10.' 
 When they Aaw that the tower was approaching the walls, they sent 
 ambassjidors to Cwsar concerning peace. 11. For the reasons I 
 have mentioned, Ciesar had determined to cross the Rhine. 12. 
 Within ten days after (literally, tMhin which) the material had 
 begun to be brought together, the whole work was finished, and 
 the army led across. 13. The enemy had already readied the ter- 
 ntones of .the Aedui, and were laying waste their lands. 14. 
 CjBsar in person proceeds by forced marches into Italy, and there 
 levies two legions. 16. His brother, who had already left the 
 field, perceiving this at a distance, threw himself iu front of the 
 enemy and was killed. 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 Different Forms of the Noun Clause. 
 
 206. A noun (or substantive) clause is one that takes the 
 place and discharges the functions of a substantive, as subject 
 or object of a verb (including the infinitive), or as an appoaitive 
 to some other \. :v'l in the sentence. 
 
 Most of th i(i>;eS of l-bic rlaiicp hi"- ^ -1---J- J- u 
 
 • ^ ...•••j':; iuiw vccn aiicauy ucait 
 

 I 
 
 PART If.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 196 
 
 With, l,ut it is considered worth while, for convenience of 
 reference, to treat of them to^'ethcr 
 
 ion";.;ettr/lT "' ''""" ^""'""^"' ^^^'^ ''' without thu 
 
 207. The commonest way of expressing in Latin an Knghsh 
 noun clause is b- means of an infinitive with its subject 
 accusative. ■' 
 
 This JH mpociully tho cnm with voHw „f Hnyin<j and H,inkinn an,! 
 wi h oxprnsHions c.„„poHe(l of tJu, third pms.'/n '.gulaiX^ 
 to be and nn adjectivo. (Soo Huctioii 12.) 
 
 EXAMl'LKH. — 
 
 (a) Hnbjevt.-n han hrrn said that the Gauls hold thin part • «««« 
 purtmn OhI1«„ obtlnore dictum est. It wa dannem^^^^ 
 Uer^nsto era., the Mine : «er.na„.. Bh.„2 tri^:^: (Zl^ 
 
 (c) AiypoHitive.--Thh re^p^^^^^^^ was hro,u,ht to C<vmr, that thev were 
 ««m;,^.>,, to rrmrch through our pro.iL : Caosur na Sum 
 est, eo8 per provluclH.n noHtiu.n Iter f«co.o conail. ""'''""' 
 
 208. Instead of the accusative and infinitive, a clause with 
 ut, ne, quln or quommus, is found where the noun clause 
 mvolves a notion of purpose or result. Such clauses in 
 origin adverbial, hav. come to be looked upon as possessing 
 a substantive force, the final or consecutive notion being in 
 many cases almost imperceptible. (See sections 27 33 154 
 156, 157 and 158.) 
 
 Examples. — 
 I. Purpose. 
 
 uus impeiatum t\st ut hostes aipgrcderentur. 
 Observe the gender of noun phrases and clauses. 
 (6) Object.~He prevented their Ip.amna the ciU-- VWn-^i'- - 
 
196 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 aetermiued on, namely, to leave their territories: id quod eOnati 
 tuerant facere conantur, ut e nnlb«« exeant. ^ 
 
 ^ntichi^Jir'^^^''^^'' ^""^ *''^ ""^j^^*^ ''^ ^ substantive clause . 
 anticipated by a noun or pronoun standing as the direct ohiZt 
 
 tne oependent clause thus becoming a restrictive aoDosifcivfi tn fha 
 direct object; as, They had fears about the corn saJ^M 
 not be conveniently trrov,,ht in: Rem fru„.enfira„rut Z 
 commode supportarl posset timent. 
 II. Result. ' • > 
 
 eslet plS^i^na/'"'^^'''''^ ^^"^^ ^''"'' '^''' ^-^"^ '^^'^'^ ' ^^^^^^^^^ «* 
 hostlum nuiherus vulneraretur. ""dximus 
 
 209. If the sentence contains the notion of cause, or if the 
 fact IS to be especially emphasised, we may have a clause 
 mtroduced by quod. (See section 165, 6.) 
 Examples. — 
 
 (a) Subject-There was added that they grieved that their children 
 
 In this example it will be observed that the noun clause shadp^ 
 mto an adverbial one, the object and cause beingTdentical 
 
 morrow oj that day the Germans came into the camp: Opportunis- 
 
 N.B -Clauses with (/wo(^ are sometimes found at the beffinninc, 
 o r^Wrto^hertV'^ Bubstanceof something altadTsS 
 
 Z or as to the Ti. Af f '^'""'^ i^'Y ^^*'" ^" ^^•'^t translated by «. 
 iO or as^o «/ie /ac^ ^Aa^; as. As to your boadinq so 'insultinoli of 
 
 Zlenter^',-^"Tf '>.^ '''''' '■'"'^•' Q-^ vitra vStiif 
 
 msoienter srlorlamlnl. Rnrlpm norfinof /«.. ^,. ,. Ji . -, . 
 
 vm not Uisre^^a tl.u^.'or ^/^Ic*;,! "^^eXro^iSS 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 197 
 
 pemicie contend^ "«gl«"=t">>ni, nSu.o raScuni sine mi 
 
 accusative of reference.! equivalent to a phrasal adverbial 
 
 :10. If the subordinate clause is introduced by an interro^a 
 
 ^z^^ ^^ ^'^"T '""'ii ;'^ ^^"^ ^' ^ ^^p-^- or !:Zt 
 
 question. (See section 43.) 
 Examples. — 
 
 211. Some verbs have more than one construction, the dif- 
 Examples. — 
 
 ^•^ **"""«• (*5ee also section 209, a.) 
 (c) T/iey determine that these should leave th^ /,.,.,» n- .-. 
 ut hi oppldo excedant. They determined It, T '' P«"«<^i<^""nfc 
 man to return to his home : cLst tu^runt ot ' ''"' ^''^ "^^^ '''"^ 
 8uam quemque reverti. "«"f^uerunt optimum esse domum 
 
 Compare the origin of theTnglish^KnctKAaf'^ ""^'"^^^ '" ^'^^ nomi^S:! 
 
198 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ((•) Ihordn-sthc KoUiers to attach the camp: MllitibuH iinperat 
 ut, euHtru oppuHrnaroiit. l[> o/vAt.s these luiht <iaUe>(n to be built ' 
 Hu« iictuai-laN imporat fieri. (With impero, "fclio Hccusutivo und 
 iiihmtivo IS found, as n rule, only when tlio intinitivo is pudsivo.) 
 
 {/) They do not safer the red to make a stand: UellquoB 
 oonNlHtd'o ndn p.itiuntur. (This is flio 'usnul construction with 
 IHttior). Jhe eustom, of the Unman people did not allow him to 
 abandon the allies : Non poi)uli Kdnifinl consuotfido patiobatur utl 
 HoctuN (leNerurut. 
 
 ((j) II- n-as ordered not to leave the eamp: Nnntiatum est el ne 
 ouNtru rclliuiiiorct. (Seo also noction 207, c) 
 
 ,.^-P"~T*^^ ^i'l ''^' ohsorvod that vorhs uf dotennining, saying, 
 an-octnjg, otc, tiiko tho Hcousutivo and infinitive, wlion tho ori<rinal 
 words of the speaker w.)uld he in the indicative expressing a stato- 
 nient, and tlie subjunctive with at (so)netiiu»>.s omitted) or ne 
 when the (jngnial words would express a couinmnd in tho inipem- 
 tive )r subjunctive. See section 214, a, (1). 
 
 ' Exercise 25. 
 
 1. He felt that it would result in great danger to the pr-.vnice to 
 (nt) Imvo enemies of the Roman people (as) neighbors. 2. In the 
 meantime he sent (messengers) to the cavalry otilce's w announce 
 that they were not to provoke the enemy to ba'.tlo. X As to your 
 stjvtement that tho soldiers will not -advance, I am not at all dis- 
 turbed by that circumstance. 4. By niw.ii8 of messengers he 
 informs Cjosar what he thinks ought to hn done. 5. There was 
 added to this that ho had already said i.i the assembly that the 
 chief power of the state was being confetred upon him by Ctesar. 
 (). It happened that some of the soldiejv-? wore intercepted by the 
 sudden u])proach of tho cavalry.^ 7. It was reported that Osesar 
 had given orders toYhe soldiers to storm tho camj) of tho enemy. 
 8. The result was that he was unable to learn what tribes 
 inhabited the island. 9. They made the complaint that tho 
 enemy wore laying waste their territories. 10. This had boon 
 reported to C«3sar, that the enemy had made an attempt to cross 
 the river. 11. Ho was of the opinion that it v.'ouid be very 
 dangerous to tho province that the enemy sliould become accus- 
 tomed to cross the Rhine. 12. Ho ansv^cred that he did not 
 know why the soldiers had reooivod order!* io athick tho town. 
 13. There is no doubt that the Helvetii uve tho most powerful of 
 

 PART IL—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 109 
 
 all Gaul. 14. Thoy do not doubt that he will inflict the most 
 severe punishment upon the prisoners. 15. The enemy were 
 trying to prevent our men from crossing the bridge. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 
 Indirect Narration— Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 212. Direct discourse {oratio recta) is that form of speech 
 which gives the exact words of the original speaker or writer • 
 as, ' 
 
 urbeiu :Si./'"^"" ^""^ ^^ ^'^^ ^^^^"•- "^*«'" -q-^> "««t 
 
 213. Indirect discourse {oratio ohllqua) gives the substance 
 of the thought or words of some other person, or even of the 
 speaker or writer under other circumstances; as, 
 
 Hynid he would come U> the city: Dixit se ad urbem ewe 
 venturun,. The latter i. the usual construction in Latin with all 
 verba sentiendl et declarandl except inqnit. 
 
 214. The following are the principal rules for changing 
 oratio recta into oratio ohllqua : 
 
 (a) With regard to verbs : 
 
 . , ^^\ ^i^ Principal clauses, statements and denials are expressed by 
 the mjimtwe so also such rhetorical questions as in the direct 
 torm would have the indicative mood in the first or third person • 
 other quewtions, also wishes, commands and prohibitions, by the 
 
 (2) In subordinate clauses the subjunctive is the proper mood 
 As a general rule the historical tenses are used. 
 
 N.B.-If for any reason the subjunctive is used in the direct 
 narration, that mood is, of course, retained in the indirect, chang- 
 ing. It necessary, the tense and person. 
 
 (3) With regard to tenses in subordinate clauses after secondary 
 tenses, the present, imperfect and future of direct narrative are 
 represented by the imperfect subjunctive, and the perfect, plu- 
 perfect and future perfect, by the pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 V>) TTiLh regard to pronouns. Since the exact words of the 
 speaker are not given, it follows that only pronouns of the third 
 
200 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 person will be found (unless the matter quoted refers to thfi n«r«..« 
 • reporting or the person to whom it is reported) ^ 
 
 to tJ?;.£.r.;^::^t^f ^ ^^^"^^^^"^^^ ^>' ^«^^ ^--^ -^^^^ 
 
 (3) ir«; and iste will become t'ZZe or is. 
 to *A« place Im be changSt Zse dro^ing'^fj^^ "*™"8 
 
 abov! mtes "'^'"'"'""^"^ ^"'^ ""^^ °' ^PP='f«°' exceptions to the 
 
 • FlnniPn oil., ^t'y'^renz agent , as, iyg^ us cross the river, said thev • 
 i? lumen slbl transeundum esse dixpmnf Tl,«,^. i^ ^' 
 
 would be, Flumen transeamus '^"'^'^"^*^- T^^"" ^^^^^ words 
 
 *he words are from the SrS a foreigte™" '"°''''' ''™" *''^» 
 
 pronoun are^u'sed invJ^LtZ tl° dT""^ '''™" "■' ""^ «""« 
 clause, generally where' n"l\t ;?; S:!!"' P"""^ ™ *^ ^^^ 
 
 (e) An apparent exception is found in the usp of fli« ir,^- ^• 
 m subc.rdinate clauses introduced parenthetSlv ^^^/^^^^^^^^^ 
 explanation, giving the thought of thrwr?ter ^j f ni^ • ^ "^^^ ""^ 
 
 SfTbl fc?r..Tf''*- ^-A i-nexTirnatoTctr 
 -^ »^ L-ie „r..^x, oxia it ionns no part of the report. 
 
 
 o 
 fl 
 
 oj 
 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 201 
 
 (g)ln quam clauses after a comparative (including clauses intro 
 duced by antequmn and priusqulm), the verb and ItHXlct are 
 
 ceaing clause. Ihe verb after quam is frequently omittpd if« 
 subject remaining, expressed in the accusative^case ' 
 
 216. In informal or virtual oratio oblioua rthaf ia v^h^r.^ t-u 
 yevhsentienai or declarand, is not found Se tattLtw^eret 
 
 It^tlTZ' \"PP^-"^.^ «-h notion as, a. /.'e .1 S" 
 t/ioi^/ie, etc.) the subjunctive is usually found in the subordinaS 
 
 fe/iJ. Omnes libros quos pater suus reliqulsset mihi donivit tZ 
 
 trfsuchitrar.f ." ^^si'trsf'^^^ '^"^^ 
 
 indirect question. ^^m/mreitt m the last example, as an 
 
 ^.^^"^ ^\^ indicative is used in the subordinate clause of such a 
 sentence, the writer makes the statement on his own responsSy 
 
 217. Oratio obliqua may take the form of (a) an indirect 
 statement, (6) an indirect command, (c) an indirect question 
 m each of which the subjunctive will be found in the subordi- 
 nate clauses ; as, 
 
 Jnl.^^ s«^'f^^«« the cavalry would make an attack on the enemy 
 
 flumen essent, impetum facerent. ' ^ ^^"^ 
 
 (c) He asked the numbers of the enemy who ivere on the other side 
 of the rxver : Quot essent hostes qui trans flumen essont rogtvit 
 
 218. Frequently the verb of saying, ordering or n«k,n. ,-. «.. 
 cxpressea, Dut is implied from the context ; as, HemidTanam 
 bassador to Casar {saying), that unless aid is sent ohl^ZZhZ 
 
r 
 
 202 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 oxdnolmmvr : Nantium ad Caosarem mittit : nisi subsidium sibl 
 
 219 The following examples (which should be carefully 
 studied) illustrate most of the above rules and exceptions not 
 already exemplified : 
 
 (1) I>imj^^-I know these reports (Ego) hcIo huoc esse vera, nee 
 
 are true, and no one feels qulsqua.n ex hoc plus 
 
 ^""^t^ew-fSf """'^ ^"^'^^ ^^'""^^ ^«'^« «« «»« esse 
 knew those reports were vera, nee quen.quam 
 
 true, and that no one felt ex o6 plus (jian/ sTS™ 
 
 more deeply pained on that loris capere! 
 
 account than he did. 
 
 (2) Direct. — Do not, O soldiers, 
 
 shall 
 
 NoIIto, milites, urbem re- 
 
 liiKluere, ego vestrL* 
 auilcis non deero. 
 
 abandon the city, I 
 not fail your friends 
 
 M/m-^.X.(He ordered the sol- (Mllitibus imperavit) ne ur- 
 diers)not to leave the city, bem rel „„lerent Te 
 
 thatje would not fail their anilcis niorun! no"n d" 
 
 futuruni. 
 Observe how the vocative may be turned in the indirect speech. 
 (3) Direct-As to youniiornier de- Quod antea de colloquio po- 
 and for a conference, that stulavistl, hoc per me 
 
 1 cm uo without diijiger. posse oiUtlmo. . 
 
 voys to UcBhar L'^f*'yuigJ ) ; as 
 
 to his former demand fo» a 
 conference, that might be 
 carried out with his con- 
 sent, since he had drawn 
 nearer, and he thought he 
 could do it witliout danger. 
 
 fore the Roman people did. quam populus nJm^l 
 
 Never before this time has „„«. Nunquam ante ha^ 
 
 the Roman army passed be- tempus exLcItuTpopuU 
 
 yond the boundaries of the RmianT G^llTl VS 
 
 provuice of Gaul. What ciae fines igresaus lit.' 
 
 em mittit) (piod antea 
 de colloquio postu las- 
 set. Id per se lierl llcere, 
 quoniam propius acces- 
 Nlsset, 8e(|ue Id sine 
 perlculo facere posse ex- 
 Istliiiare. 
 
PART II. —SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 203 
 
 
 do you mean ? Why do you 
 come into my possessions ? 
 This part of Gaul is mine 
 just as tliat part yonder bo- 
 longs to the Roman people 
 {or to you). 
 
 Indirect. — (Ariovistus answered) 
 that he had come into Gaul 
 before the Roman people 
 had, that never before that 
 time had the Roman army 
 passed beyond the boun- 
 daries of the province of 
 Gaid, What did he mean ? 
 Why did he come into his 
 possessions ? That part of 
 Gaul (where they then were) 
 was his, just as that part 
 (off in the distance) belong- 
 ed to the Roman people. 
 
 (5) Direct. — As to your threat 
 
 against me, O Caesar, that 
 you will not overlook the 
 wrongs done the Aedui, no 
 one has ever contended 
 with me without destruc- 
 tion to himself. Come on 
 whenever you please. 
 
 L\direct. — {To this Ariovistus 
 replied), that as to the 
 threat Cjesar was making 
 against him, to the effect 
 that he would not overlook 
 the wrongs done to the 
 Aedui, no one had ever 
 contended with him (Ario- 
 vistus) without destruction 
 to himself ; let him come 
 on whenever he pleased. 
 
 (6) i>tVeci.— There are some whose 
 
 influence with the common 
 people is very great, who, 
 in their private capacity, 
 have more weight than the 
 magistrates themselves. 
 
 Quid tibl vis? Car 
 in inoas possessiones 
 vonlH ? Provlnoltt mea 
 hnoo est Gulliii, sicut 
 Ilia popull BomanI {(yr 
 vostru). 
 
 (Ariovistus respondit) se 
 prius in Galliam venlsse 
 quam popiilu.n Bdiiia- 
 nuiii. Num^uam ante 
 hoc tempus exercitum 
 populi Romani Galliae 
 provinciae fines egres- 
 HUin (esse). Quid slbl 
 vellet ? Cur in suas 
 possessiones venlret ? 
 Provlnclain suaiii hano 
 esse GuUiain Sicut lUam 
 nostrain. 
 
 Quod tnihi, Caesar, denun- 
 tias te Aeduorum in- 
 juries non neglecturum, 
 nemo mecum sine sua 
 pernicie oontendit. 
 Cum voles, cou^rredere. 
 
 (Ad haec Ariovistus respon- 
 dit), quod slbl Caesar 
 denuntlaret se Aeduo- 
 rum injilrias non neg- 
 lecturum, uemlnein se- 
 cum sine sua pernicie 
 contendlsse. Cum vel- 
 let, eougrederetur. 
 
 Sunt nonnulli quorum auc- 
 toritas apud plebem plu- 
 rimum valet, qui priva- 
 
 rim TllTlfl -nrkaoiin4> riiiOTr» 
 
 ipsi magistratus. 
 
204 
 
 PRIM/HY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 l7idirecL^(Ile declares) that 
 there are some whose in- 
 fluence with the connnon 
 people is very great, who, 
 in their private capacity, 
 have more weight than the 
 magistrates themselves. 
 (7) Direct. —Less hesitation is caused 
 me on this account, because 
 I remember those matters 
 which you have mentioned, 
 and I fee' the more indig- 
 nant in proportion as they 
 happened without the de- 
 sert of the Roman people ; 
 but if I am willing to for- 
 get the former insult, can 
 I blot out the memory of 
 recent wrongs as well ? As 
 fco your boasting so insult- 
 ingly< about your victory, 
 and your wondering that 
 you have so long escaped 
 punishment for your mis- 
 deeds, they amount to the 
 same thing ; for, in order 
 that men may grieve the 
 more heavily from a change 
 of circumstances, the im- 
 mortal gods are accustomed 
 to grant greater prosperity 
 sometimes, and a longer im- 
 punity, to those whom they 
 wish to punish for their 
 sins. 
 
 Indirect. —(Csesat replied) thkfc 
 less hesitation was caused 
 him on this account, because 
 he remembered those mat- 
 ters which they had men- 
 tioned, and that he felt the 
 more indignant in propor- 
 tion as they had happened 
 without the desert of the 
 Roman people, but if he 
 were willing to forget the 
 former insult, could he (he 
 
 (Proponit) eflfle nonnullos 
 
 quorum auctoritas apud 
 plebem plurimum va- 
 leat, (juI i)rlvatim piils 
 po88lnt quani ipsi magis- 
 tratfls. 
 
 Hoc mlhi minus dubitationis 
 dutur quod eas res quas 
 coniinoinoravlstls me- 
 moria toned, atque hoc 
 gravius fero quo minus 
 merito populi Romani 
 acclderunt. Quod sJ 
 veteris contumeliae ob- 
 IlviscI volo, num etiam 
 recentium injuriarum 
 memoriam deponere 
 possum ? Quod vestra 
 Victoria tarn insolenter 
 grlorlamlnl quodque 
 tarn diu vds impune 
 injurias tulisse aclmlra- 
 mini, eodem pertinct ; 
 consueverunt enim tli 
 Immortales quo gravius 
 homines ex commuta- 
 tione rerum doleant, 
 quos pro scelere eorum 
 ulciscJ volunt, his se- 
 cundiores interdum res 
 et diuturniorem impuni- 
 tatem concedere. 
 
 Caesar respondit) eo slbl 
 minus dubitationis dari, 
 quod eas res quas im 
 conimeniorasscnt me- 
 moria teneret atque ed 
 gravius ferre, quo minus 
 merito populi Romani 
 accidlssent. Quod si 
 veteris contumeliae oblr- 
 visci veUet, num etiam 
 — -■••'"" iu J uiiurum 
 memoriam deponere 
 
PART II.~SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 205 
 
 asked) blot out the memory 
 of recent wrongs as well? 
 As to their boasting so in- 
 sultingly of their victory, 
 and wondering that they 
 had so long escaped puT?i8h- 
 ment for their niisde.jds, 
 these matters amounted Ut 
 the same thing ; for (said 
 he), in order that men may 
 grieve the more heavily 
 from a change of circum- 
 stances, the inmiortal gods, 
 are accustomed to grant 
 greater [irosperity some- 
 times, and a longer im- 
 punity, to those whom they 
 wish to punish for their 
 sins. 
 
 poRse ? Quod 8a& vic- 
 toria tam Insolenter )?lo- 
 rlarentur quodque tam 
 dia He impune injurias 
 tulisse iKlinlrarontui', 
 eodem portlnero; con- 
 suesse enim deoa Im- 
 inortaleH, quo gravius 
 homines ex connnuta- 
 tione rerum doloant, 
 quos pro scelere eorum 
 ulciscl vellnt, his se- 
 cundiores interdum res 
 et diuturnidrem impuni- 
 tatem concedere. 
 
 fo.^;?;"^'"'" c^^ ^?^^^ assumed in indirect narration by the dif- 
 ferent kinds of conditional sentence, see section 87, page 145. 
 
 220. We frequently find a subjunctive in clauses dependent 
 upon a clause containing another subjunctive or an infinitive, 
 and occasionally in clauses not so dependent. 
 
 ^^J^.^^^'l ?^ ^"^^ ''^^^'' *''^ subjunctive is due to the fact 
 l.nii^r!%la I ^*'"*'^"*^^ ^« "^^^w"^ or inf<yrmal oratio obllqua (see 
 section 216 above), or at any rate is felt to be such. In other 
 
 mood forms «^^^«c^w>'^ that is, to the tendency to assimilate 
 
 (a) They attempted to lead part of their troops across, intendinq, if 
 t}p were able to storm the fort which Q. Titurius was in comr^myi 
 of and to destroy the bridge ; and, if they were unable to do this, 
 then, Jo lay xvaste the fields of the Remi: Partem suarum copiarum 
 
 n?i!rrn''i"f ' •'""* ^'' '=^"'^^^^' "*' «^ Po«sent. castellum, cui 
 p-aeeratt^. liturius, expugnarent pontemque Intersclnderent ; 
 si minus potuissent, agros Remorum popularentur. 
 
 Their exact words or thoughts would be. We shall (or, Let us) 
 If we can storm the fort and destroy the brvige ; if tve cannot do this, 
 we shall (or, let us) lay waste the fields oftlie Bemi : Si poterlmus! 
 castellum expugrnablnms (or, expugnemus) pontemque Inter- 
 selndemus (w, Interscindamus) ; 8l minus potuerliuus, agros 
 Kemorum populablmur (or, populemur.) 
 
 .v,"t" ^^^^^^ Pr^^^rat Q. Titurius is thrown in by Caesar for 
 the benefit of th© reader. 
 
*k 
 
 2(m 
 
 PHIMAUY LATIN IKIOK. 
 
 (^) On tHiW.)!*.* i^Yhwti, v>huh 
 
 fhfir ,hf>,nh,ty, iht'u i»4v,/ 
 
 th 
 
 f'M .*•♦•/ UV 
 
 (»• ♦"•♦^♦.•M ^) ,;,) „„>,, 
 
 ♦V ♦'»>^»^ ♦V,»* 
 
 Alt 
 
 •HJ» ^If 
 
 'IM H. frtiiNA 
 
 l').\».;nri»r.; lNJ. 
 I. IN. .1,.>„. ,.,„lv,„„l,.„ .•..„„. ,„,,1„.,1, .. , „,j| ,„„ „„„. ,f 
 
 ,UK" \ l' ;""*"•;""""•• ••'''"""(••■"■.Hi th.M.i,i,„„„, ,,„„,„ 
 
 iiM-v i.„i ,v,Mv..,v.i r,^„„ ,i„.i, |v,„i,, r, ., ,,„,,, .,,.'' ," ■ 
 
 lluMu not to fo,>f,M Mu> for,uo,« v,vlor of tho UK " ' 
 
PAHT II. - NVNTAX AND CnMhlHll |(iN. 
 
 807 
 
 ho ImiiI I...PII ii*>ul«»>liMt Ity llin MMtinml immI )I«<m«>iI).)I l.y I In. 
 
 noUUvi'H i\>. AlitlVlMlllH Imtl in |,h IM.||NlllH||i|. (MHl.l III.)* Mi 
 
 ••HH"ll.V '•mhhIiI (Iip rH*<iH|Mlii|. „r {(..mm.. Why mImmiI.I ,mv niM« 
 ImtiMino Hull lui (AHnvlMiHM) wmiM mu nwllly fuiH/ilu. hiM hIIm 
 
 MIhii.«». / l.'l. tin mU\ tliitl, tho K m| huil piitHiMol IiIm nuurlt 
 
 r<»i' iiwuiy iiiili'N lliiiMiuh I III* MiiirMliPH iiml fuii-MlM ihnl wi.io Im«Iwim<m 
 llio I'lii'itiy mill llii. KuiiiMii Miiiiy. 14. lliM.ri|i.||.|| llm H..|ilii.r („ 
 mU wliM liiiil MKiMi IliK iimii Willi liMil Immmi mi-iu. \>y Km i.in.iiiy In 
 Cm'nmi'm niiiip. in. On.* lliiliM llii.y ,imI,..i| hiiiI ir-v.,.! f,,!-, (,|,h|, |f, 
 
 in iMr.iiil.iiKM. Willi liiM irilnl iliM|M.Mili..ii, whi.li Ilii.y I Im.imm..|vi*n 
 
 wi«i'o(«'"hMlaiill.v)lii.,iiiiiMnr finuMiiliMiH. III. mIm.iiIiI ilMt.<niiiiin Mm* 
 nt.l«i»uiH wnin III Ik* hiivimI, Iim nlimilil iint. iIliuIvm Mmuii ..f (Imir 
 aniiH. 
 
 MXI'-KCISI', WVII. 
 
 'rilli, KmMAN Mdhji, n|< kl( kMNiNd 'I'lMI.;, 
 
 '2'2\. Allri ilir irrmiii (il ||ii< nilrniliir hy |iiliiiM ( 'irwir, in 
 lie'. 40, Iho Koiiiiin yisir ntimJMlcd ul .'Kin i|,ivh (in Irnp ynir, 
 .M(W!), ilic inoitlliN ('^Mtllitlin^ llic miiiic niiinhci <,{ «!ny« n-Hpcr 
 lively IIS Ihc Miii'lisli iikmiiIim. 
 
 MUVJ. Tlin il/iy nl" Ilii< mniilli WH« i<ii.Ii'iiIhIim| in I ho fullMwinK 
 iiuiiiiii'i-: Tliion |MiitilM «i.|M jnlu'it in Iim niunlli, Mm (InU'inU 
 
 (/\.l/.')((/.lr). till. jili.M ( /«///«), (iml Urn Nnlii'M (Nniinr), wllli'll Mm 
 
 iwukkm' i.r . ,. nii.iitliH minlini'il (MljiMlivnly, mikI rrmii llmMn |,|it«,u 
 jMiinlM i'i.H|iiM'ljvuly Ml'. iIhIi< wum i<ii,I(<iiIhIi.iI lidrlaiuinl. 
 
 i}'2.M. Till. ('nirmlH I'lII in nvi.ry mMo nil Mmi fl»'«f, i.f Mm iimnMi ; 
 »lio liJi'M in Miurli. M(iy, .Inly mill O.lnl.nr, worn on Mm (il'li.i-nMi 
 
 mill Mil. NnimHi.n Mm huvi'iiMi ; in II Mmr riMnMiM, tJm hlim runm 
 
 on Mm MiiHi.i.iiMi, luiil Mm N.itmH on Mil lllll,. Any <l/iy hnlwrniip 
 Mli; ( (ilntiilH Mini Mm Nohph whm tKiluumil miii'Ii nw\ hIuIi h ilny 
 lu>roi'o Mm Nt.in'H; nny iliiy hnlwi-rii Mm Noiikm himI Mm IiIi.h Mimli 
 mill Niii-li u liny hrluru Mm IiIi.h, iumI nny iliiy ulli.r Mm lUm muih 
 miii Huoli «i iluy liuforii Mm (l/ilmidH of Mm following inoiiMi. 
 
 iJJ'l. Finiii Mii.Hii Miivn il/iii.N Mm oMmr ilayw worn n-rltoimil 
 inoIuHivoly, Mmt. ih, ImMi UayM woro vnnntiMl in,' unil eonMinjimnMy 
 
 0,1 iSlirJi M!*i*r^i'''7' •^""""•■'y«. '■'j'"""<'iV". Mmiiu., A|.,iii«. MnUm. .fiit,|ii,i, »Jul„Mim, 
 {01 JtiliUB), HoxUli» (or AiiKiwIiiN), Hi.|it«.nilM'^, VvMwr, Novi-iiii.i.r und l»«,( |.|jii«,f. 
 
208 
 
 IMilMAIlY l\m liooR. 
 
 '»''Kiv«»M ,l(iy fnihi Hip <i 
 
 H.v "ti wl.ioli Mm NoiitiM 
 
 ."■;..:;i.;;rv::x;L:;;;:,;;;;:::^/!r-!^;:":!-^iii-^^^^^ 
 
 •«> Mil' \i\H\ I lay of <| 
 
 i«> iiioiiil) (in<| (I 
 
 (yvviUiU .Int,., wi. iiiuHi H.lil < 
 
 (Ui>.) 
 
 i?2tV TIh. K.mumH 1„»,| 
 
 i»'n Ntililmcl 
 
 ho 
 
 K'nliuii,} 
 
 pOIUfS. Tl,,, ,jny |„,f 
 
 '■'"•'•; w«N rall,..l ,mM»V A-,r/,.„,/,,,, 
 
 .X;rn;;.T^j';^'',^;;;;-'.:-:'::,^'- t,,,.^,,,;,,,,^;:^; 
 
 tlay l»»>| 
 
 "'•'S I'fiiig III,, .H,, ,.Mf/ M,.,.ni'ili 
 
 M,v, nth 
 
 llPO 
 
 (or 
 
 i>»H HUM 
 
 22tr Th.. ^••;;;;«in« .'.a.npl.H Will i„,..„,,, ,,,.„ .ulcuIntionH. 
 
 ;L>H)2ir„ XV. i4.li. M,„.t. 
 ;m I .») Ill ^„„. .,„„ 
 
 (IM 114) |.,.i,ii,^ 1,1. M,„. 
 
 ilHlMlH N(>|tt«>|||lM'lhnN. 
 
 227. Tho lioDifui i|,><»>,s irivi'ii mi d... .i 
 
 ' « " i'"i ^'^ -■''' -n.lr:fl»:'r::,:;\J!,i;,;:r;;"' ''• 
 
 ."^.'lui.lnn™ «.. linil it in 111,. f,„.|„„,( r; ii ii .. 
 
 im-iH»>i|i„„ ,„„| i,„ „|,, ', ;',",.' ■'■'.''• "'mm l«.|w,...i, M,„ 
 "■■"m,,. .s,„.|, ..xp, ,„, ,„ 1 i 'i'"' """ "'" «'■'■'">•><>»• ,li.m 
 
 may iH. «„v..„,.„i I yV.M::;! :, :;^L ?, .'^i :•":;,:': ;"«;-' "■yi" ■ 
 
 /..;;_ M.. „« ,,■ .;,„„.. r.:.Jti,,„..n;'v:'::.,;.''v;A',.;''7.;;:':.;;',i;;r 
 
 w.ni>,. .r„„. ?,.,(,, ,,v . '. virt,", .;ii";,,y '-''■ ' '■■'"'■'" "■•'■•■'"'•■'' ""■ 
 
IMIIT II.— HVNTAX ANII (Jimi'KHITION. 
 
 200 
 
 iHi.', "•;"^;;""'^'"" • '•"""•f """'i». -i i.-m., ,., .i,„„„^ 
 
 UV J ,'";«:""":'";•'■""""". H , .1,., i!4.h „f M,.,i, 
 
 L .;; ;■" : ' '*■ , ••■ '*"«""""' ""» - «"i"^ ■ 
 
 ''""'•"' ';'"•, ;"■■': '^; "' «" "' "-"I, «i, ( ,„„.," .„;„;;;;; 
 
 lA.-r.). r,. ( |,,„.|.« I,. 1,1,,^ „, |,;„^|,„„|^ ^„„ 1^^,^ 
 
 " '^"""''.V. MM .. ,,. •(■ .,„„„| , I „ ,„„ „,,„.„,„ ^2 
 
 "', "'"■';"• ':"'■ '■ "" >■'"' •"!• M.».|,. I.e. .■If, t „ 
 
 H«k,«n,i„. |„,|„: „!,„,, f„ „ |,.,„|„ 1,,,,^ ,|^_^ ^^ 
 
 K,,„„.i, „„ f,,„«i,.,.,„ ti,„ iH,i, „r .,,„„, ,„ir, ,,. .,,„„,i„ 
 
 ","' "'„''': '' ■" ( '" ""■ ' '"r n,l,i„, ,J,i.,, U,„ ,„„i| 
 
 '":"' "';!'' «••';"■ '""■■' M 'I fM,Kl„, „„ H,„ 2 „.,„f 
 
 '•; ';•', ;'^;- , ^^^ "--^ <j f «,.,„., .,.„„ „,.„„„,„, ,„ ,,,,; 
 
 •mK„ ,.f l,l,ml,„U,, „„ ||,„ HU, ,.t K.,l„„,.,y, |f,H7. I.'i. TIm, olw- 
 i...i« nf t MK |„,,vi„„„ „„, ii„„i f„, ,,|,„ ^,,,1, „f ,,,,^^^^ 1^,^, 1^' 
 
 M,^ (5. n„„ ,,„„, i,,„.„„ ,,„„ f, „ „,„„, ,,,,„ ,,„,,„„/,„ ; 
 
 flth ,l,.y „f .I,,,,,., IW.I, Mu, l,.tt„r .„, tl,„ ini, of April i„ tl,„ f„ll„„. 
 
 14 
 
210 
 
 PRIMAEY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES FOR 
 
 CONTINUOUS TRANSLATION 
 
 INTO LATIN. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVin. 
 
 T ?^^•o^^^^ not sufficient for the student to know the rules of 
 
 tut'"n^/fr'r? '" ^' ^'"^^^^"^ ^^^^ '^' P«"^^« where n the st?uc 
 ture of the Latin sentence differs from that of the English 
 
 although such knowledge is absolutely necessary before an^ 
 
 progress in composition can be expected/ There are other thinis 
 
 to be considered, and, chief of these, perhaps, the use of %ura^^^^^ 
 
 T f."^^, figures (though occasionally found) nre much rarer in 
 Latin than in English, and consequently mo«t of the fiSirative 
 expressions found in our own tongue must be changed fof the 
 direct and simple statement in Latin. Even when figures are 
 used m the latter (as in oratory), the simile is preferrfd to the 
 metaphor, or the metaphor is quite different from the Engfish one 
 
 1 /L.^"''^ ^?^ "'"^-^^"^ ^y "'^"^^ «"«h expression as „t alunt . 
 A, they say, As the saying is; or by ta„qua,„. quidam. etc 
 
 «n^f*'''i?'''^^'i'^^^'' ^^fV"^ ^'^^ metaphors, and the conventional 
 and technical phrases of the various arts, sciences and occupat ons 
 
 of theEndistinS^ '"^ translate the ff^ 
 
 or tne JliUglish into Latin, and not the exact words. 
 
 .Jn^W"^ following examples will illustrate some of the differ- 
 ences between the English and the Latin mode of expression : 
 
 (a) He came off victor : viclt. 
 
 (6) He lost the day : VIctu8 e^t. 
 
 (c) I left no stone unturned tojtnish the business : Nihil praeter- 
 misi quin negdtium conflcerem. praeter- 
 
 (d) The general's voice ic rs drowned in the shouts of the en-mv - 
 Vox ImperatorlB prae ela.nore ho«tIun, audlrl non poTuIt: ^' 
 
OR 
 
 rules of 
 he struc- 
 English, 
 'ore any 
 ir things 
 igurative 
 ivigation 
 
 , yet the 
 
 scarcely 
 
 it is not 
 
 rarer in 
 gurative 
 for the 
 ires are 
 I to the 
 ish one, 
 ' alunt t 
 
 sntional 
 pations, 
 thought 
 
 ! differ- 
 •n : 
 
 faeter- 
 
 enemy , 
 It. 
 
 PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 211 
 
 (e) The enemy were wthin range of fire: Hostes non in««i 
 aberant quam quo telum adjld poJef *''***'*" 
 
 dabin?"' '^^' '"'"'' ^"•^'^' *^' '"^''^^ ^««*'«« »^^6« vents /fe 
 
 Niqlfllt^T.r T' '^''^^'^'' ^''^ ""P''^''^' Of yox^r position : 
 l^eque enlm spectaculum modo illud, sed quaedam velnfl 
 Imago vestrae condlclonls erat. q«a©ttam velutl 
 
 Qi) He ascended the throne : Regnnm exceplt. 
 
 (t) He flung his life away : Mortem ultro oppetllt. 
 
 ^^0^^ He overcame the armies of Rome : Exercltus Romanes super- 
 
 233. Each language has its own favorite turns of exDression 
 (^m.*-idioms we might call them), or its own mode o vlewWan 
 
 l^nguV^o^nt^r^^^^^^^^ '^ '^'^''^' - ^--^^^-^ f-^o^e 
 
 (a) For example, in English we frequently use the verb to he for 
 the purpose of introducing a sentence in^such a manner as to 
 
 1?!^''/'^"'" r'^ ^'- ^'^'^ i" th^ predicate. In Latin e.^ 
 18 not used, emphasis being secured bv no^ifinn • o. n ^'*^^"'/**^ 
 
 suggestion that h\ retun.ed I rZ^: "^^TZi nkl'^^rrtiS^ 
 
 It^^not toUhout divine assistance that the Romans c2ryonwar- 
 
 Non Romani sine ope divlna bellum gerunt. He was the ^.ii^ 
 
 to reax^h the camp : Primus ad castra pervenlt. "^ ^ 
 
 (6) In Latin there is often a tendency to look upon an action «= 
 procredmg /rom a certain locality, while in EndisH^ is oon^S? ^ 
 
 pugnabat. The enemy attack our troops on both flanks : Hostls 
 ZToUoZ TT" 'Tr «^^-^*««t-- ^harpined a ifttlTat 
 tLlTp JoTa^rta^^ifa!^^^^^^^ ^'' '-'^'^ -- ^«^^^ «^ 
 
 f.&^n^"''^7f''P/^^^'°''^ ^^' ^'^^ ^^'^« Socrates, Your excellent 
 father. Our gallant commander, Ths abandoned Ca^tilineSot^aiTn 
 tee? ^^l^-l^-^Pl?osiriye construction with the^u^e^f^^^^^^ 
 degree of the adjective is generally used ; as, Socrates vir 
 sapient ssmus; Pater tuus. vlr optlmus No ter Lperatlr 
 VU. fortlsslmus; CatlUna. homo perdltlsslmus ; Tu. virfortlsl 
 
 tivt1l^^.^&?/L^^^Z._*^r^^^^^^ n-y.te used intransi- 
 
 ,. „ ,„ ^,, ijatiii, m sucn a case, the reflexive nro 
 
 Tbrorht ikto t' "'v '' P"' ^" '''' P^'^«^^^' «^ .ome oTe? S 
 
 Ltr3ivef-«/^"''-''""' ^' '^''' (transitive) = movere. mm^e 
 
 ^intransitive)-se movere or moverl; sell (transitive) = vendere. 
 
 .4.SH 
 1^ 
 
212 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 sell (intranHitivo) = v6nIre{ increase {tmniiitiv(})-ang6re, increase 
 (intransitive)) =or^iMJoro or aufirerl. 
 
 234. There is a tendency in English to make the noun the 
 Higniticant word, while in Latin the chief weight of the sentence 
 falls on the verb. Such verbs as malu', /kmv, take, hold, be, etc., 
 frequently do little more than make the statements— that is, are 
 mere symbols (>f predication -the meaning being contained in the 
 noun, whereas in Ditin the verb is the significant word, containhig 
 within itself the subject or object, which, when expressed in the 
 form of a neuter jjronoun or adjective, has the force rather of an 
 adverbial adjunct than that of a real subject or direct object. 
 Compare the following sentences in Knglish and in Latin : 
 
 (a) He had great hope.s ; Manila NpiM'abat. 
 
 (h) Mention has been made of him : Do 1116 aiotum est. 
 
 (c) All held their peace : Coiitlcuero omnus. 
 
 (d) I ordered him to take his departure; Euiu abire Jussl. 
 
 (e) Ilc^took my advice : Mlhl paruit. 
 
 (/) lie </«''« ntterance to many falsehoods : Multa mentltus est. 
 {g) He made reply to me : Mlhl reNponrtlt. 
 
 (h) He makes haste to take his departure from, the city : Maturo* 
 ab urbo profl<>lNcI. 
 
 (t) You are at liberty to make this attempt: Haeo oonarl tlbl 
 Hoot. 
 
 N.B.— This incorporation of the noun material into the verb is 
 especially noticeable m the impersonal use of the passive voice of 
 intransitive verbs; as, There was ^figh ting {or Fiyhting took place): 
 PuKiiatuin est. Obedience mmt be shown: Parendum est. Use 
 must be made of these things: His ri5bus utenduiii est. Tliere 
 0]ujM to be no hesdation: x\6n dubltaudum est. 
 
 I. 
 
 So the Latin adjective or participle freiiuently has the value of a 
 noun; as, hlo = </m man, lmec = these matters, magna = (treat 
 thmgs, fusrlentes = the retreating force, saplentes = tvise 'men, 
 philosophers, no8trl = our men, omnia Hua = all tJieir property. 
 
 235. Owing to the scarcity of abstract nouns in Latin and to an 
 aversion to their general use when found therein, we frequently 
 find the niain idea contained in the participle instead of in the 
 substantive as m English; as, He lived before the foundation of the 
 cdy : Ante urbem condltan. vixit. He took part in the outrage on 
 
 J. • ■■• •-"-sa'.'.a v!ui»iiuiN iiiioriuH;. The hews of the 
 
 disaster : Nuntiata clades. In the same way English abstract 
 nopns are freiiuently represented in L;itin by adjectives and 
 
•e, increase 
 
 noun the 
 3 sentence 
 d, he, etc., 
 hut is, are 
 nod in the 
 containing 
 Hod in the 
 thor of an 
 ict object. 
 
 BSl. 
 
 Itu8 est. 
 
 Maturat 
 
 narl tlbl 
 
 lie verb is 
 e voice of 
 )k place): 
 est. Use 
 it. Tliere 
 
 lvalue of a 
 la = great 
 nse men, 
 rty. 
 
 md to an 
 'eqnently 
 >f in the 
 ion of the 
 utrage on 
 vs of tfie 
 abstract 
 ives and 
 
 PART II.-— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 213 
 
 adverbs / do not know the. man's character: Nescid aualls sit 
 
 e(iuivalent. lor example, take the word "country" TnTi!! 
 sontonce, He left the city 'for the co.meAAtho Z^^.asfa nSe 
 
 sentence must be known before a correct translaU n cin be^Jven 
 as 0..s«r pursues {^follows ^,,p) the enem,y : Car^r ItOs soauirur ' 
 Lalnenus pursues (^makes or 'co. W«/ /..^..^j'tabil^mfS 
 
 m^t S^SiSl^Hh^ """"^ Hignifications of many other words 
 
 La^tfn ' ifwni \t '*^"^''"*^ "T"' f" ^""" '"^ continuous passage into 
 i.atin, It will be necessary for him to observe a verv imuort-mt 
 
 rufrS of tr \\ ' •" 'l"^'"'^ '^"^ ^''^' r^'-^^"^- Inl^^S H a 
 whdeTsiM infV '"'^'^^' "P *^he thought as a 
 
 tirn.« lo *^^ • • '^/!»*^«nce by itself, tliese sentences being some- 
 times loosely joined together by such words as or, but "rS X 
 and some „nes succeeding each other without any c'onnJcti;!' ^" 
 in J.atu> on the other hand, some one idea is seized as a 
 central point and expressed in the main sentence while Seothor 
 
 ^^ilf^-^-ff£jtw^^ 
 
 However, variety is an excellent thing, and accordindv where 
 
 son'thW irlr;/''"^^ T, Propterea'or eO coS^:^tl 
 sonietnmg is still to conie, the clause of reason or purnose mav 
 
 pHtU'rSL^L"- '"- "'»- "f -"•' roguIarf/XwVZ 
 Degins a sentence, or even a new paragraph or chapter, with the 
 
214 
 
 PIllMARY LATIN UOOK. 
 
 lylHtivo, whom in KiigliHl, a iUnunmimtivk^, with or witlioufc a ooil 
 jimotioii, wouhl bo UHo.l. (Soo HPotion 8. N. IJ.) 
 
 NVhoro in lOiiKliHh a Honfonco hogins with Huch oxproHHtons an 
 fiM</ MO^, .rm/, ,„>o,M', »»,.(i Hr.y,-, oto., Lalin uh.^h m',,„r (or ncc)=- 
 nor, nee qu i,Hq,mm - »»(.f (r„ ,/ o„v, ner nnquam -- nor ever, ofco. 
 
 A few oxoroiHos for coiitiiiu,,,,^ pn.No trutiNhifcioii aro now mven 
 oxproHHod, to Hon.o oxtont, in ligimitivu lauguago, and involving 
 tho pnnciploH above monti. nod. "vuivmg 
 
 EXEUCIHE 28.* 
 
 After ft couHUs had boon taken, it wan f.)nnd that the total popu- 
 hitionof oitr [.rovinoe wan al.out lifly thoimand, men, wonum and 
 chddren. Of this number there were eapablo (»f bearing ariuH 
 not nu.ro than five thousand men, very few of whom were reguhir 
 ti-oopH. Vet HUch waH the spirit of her houh (cm-.s) that they did 
 not hoNitafe to t^ike the fiehl at a nuMuent's notice, ready to lay 
 down tlieir liven for their native lan.l. Within one month after 
 the declai^ation of war, the enemy, to the tmud.er of six thtuiHand 
 were massed in the neighboriioo,! of the river that forms the 
 boundary bne between our territories and theirs. At daybreak 
 on the 12th of ()et..ber, the advance guar.l of this force ellected a 
 landnig o.i the left bank of the river in the face of a heroic defence 
 on the part of our men. Long an<l fiercely the battle raged on 
 b,)th sides, when night put an end to the contest. On the folU.w- 
 ing morning there was a spirited renewal ,.f the engagement. 
 Wlum the battle had lasted three hours, our tn.ops, nfter seizing 
 the baggage of the enemy and slaying more than two thousand (»f 
 their number, drove the rest headlong into the river. Thus 
 victory peix'hed on our banners, and the enemy, diHujipuiuted in 
 thoir hope, gftve^up this undertaking. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 After being informed of the /vrrival of tho enemy, tho general 
 nimle haste to t,ake his departure from (he city, a.id by forced 
 nmrchos pushed forward against (Jallus, who had taken poHHOHsion 
 of tho heights, and, with all his trooi.s drawn up in battle array 
 was awai tnig the advance of ou r gallant leader. While the latter 
 
PAllT 1 1.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 215 
 
 luut a oon- 
 
 'OHHlons AN 
 
 («»r neo) = 
 
 bu. 
 
 low given, 
 involving 
 
 ^tfii popu- 
 >nu!n and 
 ing Ht'titN 
 I'o roguljir 
 thoy did 
 ,«ly to Ifty 
 ivtli ftffcor 
 hoiiHund, 
 orniH t/h«) 
 diiybrortk 
 ullbctod a 
 c dofonoe 
 ragoil on 
 10 folluw- 
 iigonionfc. 
 ir Hoizing 
 •U8Hnd of 
 '. ThuH 
 )inted in 
 
 general 
 y forced 
 
 )HHOHHion 
 
 o array, 
 10 latter 
 
 for ordtio 
 
 with three haitalionH of the tenth niginient was making a fierce 
 attack upon the centre of the eiieiiiy'H line, lie received a mortal 
 wound and wm carried to the rmr hy two faithfid Hohlierw. The 
 general tricid to exhort \(\h tro(»pH not to hme heart, nor to allow 
 their colors to fall into the liandH of the enemy, but hin dying 
 wordH were tlrowned in the HhoutH (.f the cond)atantH. Maddened 
 by the fall of their heroic (iommander, oin- men twice attempted to 
 force the enemy from the IiiMghtH. Twice they were driven back, 
 and finally were compelled to retire upon the nearcHt town and 
 there to wait for reinforcementH, Setting out about midnight with 
 the Heventh regiment, which had been Hent to their aHHintance, «.ur 
 troopH again att^acked the enemy, who, after the h.Hs of more than 
 a thouHand men, were compelled to Hurrender at diHcretion. And 
 so viotory (jnco more re«tod ujjon the BritiHli arms. 
 
 Wliilo the general waM making thoso preparations for his 
 defMvrture, the rejiort wan brought that four battaliouH of the tenth 
 regiment had been (!ut off to a man by the enemy's cavalry. The 
 newH of this (71/7) disaHter threw the camp into a state of conster- 
 nati(m, and struck terror into the hearts of those who had never 
 been under fire. Many of the men who a little before had been 
 boasting (»f their bravery, threw themselves at the conunandor's 
 feet, and in tears besought him to allow them to take their 
 dei)artin'e. He told them that they were at liberty to go, ho far as 
 he was c<mcerne(l, but they should remember the valor of their 
 ancestors who had ever been ready to lay down their lives for their 
 native land sooner than permit anyone to cast the reproach of 
 cowardice in their teeth. Even old campaigners, who wished to 
 bo considere<l less fearfid, could scarcely [mt on a brave face or 
 restrain their tears, and, shutting themselves up in their Umtn, 
 they set to signing their wills and boniouning the common danger. 
 
 » 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 At first the commander determined to defer a general engage- 
 
 ment. still, nviu'v <l!ii/ in oiitrnl»..f ui,;«..,;„i,,... i._ 1 x. i .• .« 
 
 _ • • ---v- —.7 7 ^'-vUj ors.iiiinouc,-j, iiu iwupt tcHCing tne 
 
 military prowess of the enemy and the daring of our men, until he 
 
\ 
 
 216 
 
 PMMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 forces. Botwoon our army and the country of the ono.nv flowed a 
 
 mraTthrf't' l"'1 n T"' "' '"" '^"'"■- "' "'-" " 
 m.lc, at the foot of a lull, the general gnve or,Ier» t., fortify the 
 
 Z! "^^ »;'-;»''« '«'™/"ot high and a trench eightte^fe 
 
 wide From each end of the hill h„ throw out a cLs trencli 
 
 a .out three hundrcl yard>, in length, and at the extTemitt rf 
 
 H,ee trencher he erected redoubts where ho „I,«ed hi„ I U Ir^ 
 
 so that after he had fonned his line of battle, the eno-„y mi-'- ,» 
 
 outHank him durin? the cnmiffoment < ■ . " 7 f" 
 
 two regiments-hif latest 1 v"f„ t. "o "'" f""' '*""'"* 
 
 forth li„„,,_,,_^J-^^^^ 
 
 w.th the greatest difliculty across a n.ar»h of no areat extent Zt 
 
 .y between our position and the river, where Thr nem;! few 
 
 day^prevously had effected a crossing by means of aTrid;e „" 
 
 ' Exercise ,32. 
 
 Caractacus took up a position of his own choosing where the 
 means both of approach and retreat were most c,,„Z nTfoh m 
 self and unfavorable to the enemy It was defended 1,°!" bv 
 steep aM lofty ,. ..ivity ; in part by stones rudely tl own C ther 
 a stream with no frequented t.vd flowed before it, ?„d ' ol' 
 
 front of Its defences. To the .spirit and eloquence of the chief 
 the Bntons responded with shouts of enthusiasm ; and each bl 
 bom^ .tseif „y the ,»ths it held most sacred, to sUnd it^gr nd 
 
 amazed at the ardor of men whom he supposed to be beaten 
 cowed and dnven hopelessly to bay. He las even d.'c„'cert d 
 
 def Id -r It "r ''"" "™'"""' »^ "'« ™a„n.s Xh 
 aetended it. It was the eagerness of the soldiers, rather th-m bis 
 
 ..i^r wap -——tit:::^^^ 
 
 — Merivcde. 
 
 r 
 I 
 c 
 
 
 
 a 
 t 
 h 
 1 
 
PART II.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 217 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 But they defended their rampart obstinately with poJes and 
 javelins, and from behind it dealt wounds and death upon the 
 a««ail»ntH, tdl the Romans could form the tortoise, approach to the 
 toot of the wall, tear down its uncemented materials, and, bursting 
 m, challenge them to combat, hand to hand. Unequal to the 
 shock of the Roman army, the Britons retreated up the hill ; the 
 Romans, both the light and the heavy-armed, pressed gallantly 
 upon them, and, imperfectly as they were equipped, they could 
 withstand neither the sword and pilum of tK- legionary, nor the 
 lance and spear of the auxiliary. The victory, ouickly decided, 
 was bri liant and complete. The wife and daughter of Caractacus 
 were taken ; his brothers threw down their arms and surrendered. 
 Ihe brave chief himself escaped from the slaughter, evaded the 
 pursuit, and found an asylum for a time in the territory of the 
 Hrigantes, leaving all the south open to the invaders. He might 
 hope to remove the contest to the northern parts of the island a 
 and of streams and mountains like his own long-defended Siluria: 
 but Cartismandua, the female sovereign of this nation (for, though 
 married, she seems herself, rather than her husband Venutius, to 
 have been actual ruler of the Brigantes), was determined, by her 
 own fears and interests, to betray him to the Romans. The fame 
 of his nine years' struggle had penetrated beyond the British Isles 
 and th. .rauhsh provinces ; and when he was led captive through 
 the ^oreets of Rome, great was the curiosity of the citizens to 
 behold the hero who h..d rivaUed the renown of Arminius and 
 lacf annas. 
 
 — MerivcUe. 
 
218 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 PART III. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX AND 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 I. PARADIGMS OF INFLECTION. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 Vocative. 
 
 Ablative. 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 Vocative. 
 
 Ablative. 
 
 (A) THE NOUN.i 
 
 1. First Deolonslon. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 mens a, p. * 
 
 2. Second^ Declension. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 sei'vjus, M. 
 
 servf 
 
 servo 
 
 servum 
 
 servp 
 
 8erv5 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 mensae ^ 
 mens arum 
 mens is^ 
 mensjos 
 meng ae - 
 mens !a( 
 
 serviTs 
 
 i. Tne ^nitive dative, accusative and ablative are called the Oblique Cases. 
 
■ 
 
 PART III.— PARADIGMS. 
 8. Second Declension (continued). 
 
 219 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 iVbw. puer, m. 
 
 Oen. puen 
 puero 
 pueijum 
 puer 
 pueijo 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. puerjl 
 
 Oen. pueriorum 
 
 Dat. pueiJTs 
 
 Ace. pueijSs 
 
 Voc. pueijl 
 
 Abl. puei|Ia 
 
 ager, m. 
 
 agill 
 
 agi9 
 
 agi um 
 
 agtr 
 
 agip 
 
 agrff 
 
 agijorum 
 
 agrjis 
 
 agrios 
 
 agijr 
 
 agijrs 
 
 m, 5. 
 
 temp^ 
 
 templorum 
 
 templls 
 
 tempi 
 
 temp^ 
 
 templls 
 
 4. Third Declension— Masculine and Feminine Xonns. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 rex, M. 
 
 consul, M. 
 
 miles, M. 
 
 pater, m 
 
 Oen. 
 
 regis 
 
 consulis 
 
 mllitis 
 
 patris 
 
 Dat. 
 
 regi 
 
 consul! 
 
 mlliti 
 
 patri 
 
 Ace. 
 
 regem 
 
 consulom 
 
 militem 
 
 patrem 
 
 - Voc. 
 
 rex 
 
 consul 
 
 miles 
 
 pater 
 
 AU. 
 
 rege 
 
 consule 
 
 milite 
 
 patre 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 reges 
 
 consules 
 
 militSs 
 
 patres 
 
 Oen. 
 
 regum ^ 
 
 consulum 
 
 militum 
 
 patrum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 regibus 
 
 consulibus 
 
 militibus 
 
 patribus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 rOges 
 
 consules 
 
 milites 
 
 patres 
 
 Voc. 
 
 regea 
 
 consules 
 
 mjlites 
 
 patres 
 
 Abl. 
 
 regibus 
 
 consulibus 
 
 militibus 
 
 patribub 
 
w 
 
 r 
 
 220 
 
 8IN0ULAR. 
 
 N(m. hom5, m. 
 
 Oen. hoiiiiniH 
 
 J^at. homini 
 
 -^cc. homineni 
 
 y^oc. homo 
 
 Abl. homine 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nam. homines 
 Gen. hominum 
 Dat. Jiominibus 
 Ace. homines 
 ^oc. homines 
 Abl. hominibus 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 hiems, f, 
 
 hiemis 
 
 hiemi 
 
 hiemem 
 
 hiems 
 
 hieme 
 
 hiemes 
 
 hiemum 
 
 hiemibus 
 
 hiemes 
 
 hiemes 
 
 hioK\ibus 
 
 virtOfl, F. 
 
 virfcfltis 
 
 virtQtl 
 
 virtiltem 
 
 virtOs 
 
 vitiate . 
 
 virtutes 
 
 virtutum 
 
 virtfltibus 
 
 virtfltes 
 
 virtutes 
 
 vircQtibus 
 
 SINGULAR. *• '^''^"' Doolenslon-Nouter Nouns. 
 
 Nam. nomeri, n. corpus, n. opus, n. 
 
 corporis opei s 
 
 corpori opeii 
 
 corpus opus 
 
 corpus opus 
 
 corpore opera 
 
 regie, F. 
 
 regionis 
 
 regionl 
 
 regionem 
 
 regio 
 
 regione 
 
 regionSs 
 
 regionum 
 
 regionibus 
 
 regiones 
 
 regiones 
 
 regionibus 
 
 Oen. nominis 
 
 I^at. nomini 
 
 ^Acc. nomen 
 
 Voc. nomen 
 
 Abl. nomine 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. nomina 
 Gen. nominum 
 Dat. nominibus 
 Ace. nomina 
 Voc. nomina 
 
 iter, N. 
 
 itineris 
 
 itineri 
 
 iter 
 
 iter 
 
 itinere 
 
 corpora 
 
 corporum 
 
 corporibus 
 
 corpora 
 
 corpora 
 
 Abl. nominibus * corporibus 
 
 opera 
 
 operum 
 
 operibus 
 
 opera 
 
 opera 
 
 operibus 
 
 itinera 
 
 itinerum 
 
 itineribus 
 
 itinera 
 
 itinera 
 
 itineribus 
 
 J SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. urbs, f. 
 Gen. urbis 
 JMt. urbi 
 Ace. urbem 
 y^oc. urbs 
 
 Al.1 --.1 
 ■a-vt,. Ul'ue 
 
 e. Third Declension— I-stems. 
 
 ignis, M. 
 
 Ignis 
 
 ignl 
 
 ignem 
 
 Ignis 
 
 igni 
 
 nubes, p. 
 
 nflbis 
 
 nubi 
 
 ntibem 
 
 nubes 
 
 nube 
 
 n) re, n. 
 
 maris 
 
 marl 
 
 mare 
 
 mare 
 
 marl 
 
PART III.— PAUADIOMS. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 
 Norn 
 
 urbes 
 
 IgnSs 
 
 ntlbSs 
 
 maria 
 
 Oen. 
 
 urbium 
 
 Ignium 
 
 nflbium 
 
 marium 
 
 Dat. 
 
 urbibus 
 
 Ignibus 
 
 nflbibus 
 
 maribus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 urbes ' 
 
 Ignes' 
 
 ntlbgs' 
 
 maria 
 
 Voc. 
 
 urbcH 
 
 Igngs 
 
 nabes 
 
 maria 
 
 Abl. 
 
 urbibus 
 
 Ignibus 
 7. Fourth 
 
 ntlbibus 
 Declension. 
 
 maribus 
 
 • 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 frflctus, M. 
 
 fructus 
 
 cornu, N. 
 
 cornua 
 
 Gen. 
 
 frflctils 
 
 fractuum 
 
 cornils 
 
 comuum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 fructui • 
 
 fractibus 
 
 cornG 
 
 cornibus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 f rttctum 
 
 - fractOs 
 
 coma 
 
 cornua 
 
 Voc. 
 
 fructus 
 
 frflcttts 
 
 corn'T 
 
 cornua 
 
 Abl. 
 
 fructu 
 
 fructibus 
 8. Fifth 
 
 corna 
 Declension, 
 
 cornibus 
 
 
 SINGUT.AR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ifes, r. 
 
 res 
 
 dies, M. 
 
 dies 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 rerum 
 
 diei 
 
 dierum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 irei 
 
 rebus 
 
 digi 
 
 diebus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 rSs 
 
 diem 
 
 dies 
 
 Voc. 
 
 tes 
 
 res 
 
 digs 
 
 digs 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ^S , 
 
 rebus 
 
 Jig 
 
 diebus* 
 
 9. Nouns Irregular in Declension. 
 
 (The forms in parentheses should be avoided in writing Latin ; the 
 forms in italics are scarcely classical.) 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. vis, F. 
 (vis) 
 
 (a) 
 
 vim 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat, 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 vi 
 
 PURAL. 
 
 virea 
 
 vmuin 
 
 vJribus 
 
 virgs 
 
 vItCs 
 
 Ylribus 
 
 1. The accusative plural o( t-stems is also written urbU, nUbis. igntc. 
 
222 
 
 SINOITLAE. 
 
 Nam. deus, m. 
 Oen. def 
 Dat. de6 
 Ace. deum 
 Voc. deus 
 Abl. de6 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N(m,. dl (del, dil) 
 Oen. deorum, deflm 
 Dat. dis (dels, dils) 
 Ace. deos 
 Voc. di (del, dil) 
 Abl. dIs (dels, dils) 
 
 SINGULAR. , 
 
 Num. domus, p. 
 
 Gen. doniQs (locative domi) 
 
 Dat. domul (domo) 
 
 Ace. domum 
 
 Voc. domus 
 
 Abl. domo (domfl) 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 bfls, I. cmd F. 
 
 bovis 
 
 bovl 
 
 bovem 
 
 bos 
 
 bove 
 
 bovCs 
 
 bourn (bovum) 
 
 bilbus (bobus) 
 
 boves 
 
 bovgs 
 
 babus (bobus) 
 
 Jflppiter, M. 
 
 Jovis 
 
 Jovi 
 
 Jovem 
 
 Jflppiter 
 
 Jove 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. domfls 
 
 domorum (domuum) 
 domibus 
 domos (domfls) 
 domfis » 
 
 domibus 
 
 Oen. 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 in ar eemenT bofh Jf u'- f "^^^^^^g of a noun and an adjective 
 
 ?„3,.i_ ._ .''.P*"^',' .1>«*r an-l raaUr, declined. Onr«,i„„.ii. 
 geS;; sS^".""" '" "'" P'»™'- The form /amto ka„-„i;i 
 
PART III. — PARADIGMS. 
 
 223 
 
 (B) THE ADJECTIVE. 
 10. First and Second Declensions, 
 
 ndl, 
 bive 
 }en, 
 
 ter- 
 ave 
 i!v 
 
 old 
 
 SINOULAR. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Oen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Ahl. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Oen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Oen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 Ahl. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 4U. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 bonuu 
 
 boni 
 
 bond 
 
 bonum 
 
 bone 
 
 bono 
 
 bonr 
 
 bonorum 
 
 bonis 
 
 bonds 
 
 bonI 
 
 bonis 
 
 liber 
 
 libert 
 
 llbero 
 
 llberum 
 
 liber 
 
 llbero 
 
 llberl 
 
 llberdrum 
 
 llberis 
 
 llberos 
 
 liberi 
 
 libeMs 
 
 aeger 
 
 aegri 
 
 aegro 
 
 aegrum 
 
 aeger 
 
 aegrp 
 
 rEMININB. 
 
 bona 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonam 
 
 bona 
 
 bona 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonarum 
 
 bonis 
 
 bonas 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonis 
 
 libera 
 
 llberae 
 
 llberae 
 
 llberam 
 
 libera 
 
 libera 
 
 llberae 
 
 llberarum 
 
 llberls 
 
 liberas 
 
 llberae 
 
 llbeiis 
 
 aegra 
 
 aegrae 
 
 aegrae 
 
 aegram 
 
 aegra 
 
 aegra j 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 bonum 
 
 bonI 
 
 bond 
 
 bonum 
 
 bonum 
 
 bono 
 
 bona 
 
 bonorum 
 
 bonis 
 
 bona 
 
 bona 
 
 bonis 
 
 llberum 
 
 liberi 
 
 llbero 
 
 llberum 
 
 llberum 
 
 llbero 
 
 libera 
 
 llberdrum 
 
 liberls 
 
 libera 
 
 libera . 
 
 libeiis 
 
 aegrum 
 
 aegrI 
 
 aegrd 
 
 aegrum 
 
 aegrum 
 
 aegrO 
 
 I 
 
224 
 
 PRIMARY L^TIN BOOK. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom 
 
 aegrl 
 
 
 aegrae 
 
 aegra 
 
 Gen. 
 
 aegrp:um 
 
 aegrarum 
 
 aegroruia 
 
 Dat. 
 
 aegris 
 
 
 aegris 
 
 aegris 
 
 Ace. 
 
 aegros 
 
 
 aegras 
 
 aegra 
 
 Voo. 
 
 aegri 
 
 
 aegrae 
 
 aegra 
 
 Abl 
 
 aegris 
 
 
 aegris 
 
 aegris 
 
 
 
 11. Third Declension. 
 
 
 SINGULAK. MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 Nom 
 
 acer 
 
 
 acris 
 
 acre 
 
 Gen. 
 
 acris 
 
 
 acris 
 
 acris 
 
 Dat. 
 
 acri 
 
 
 acri 
 
 acri 
 
 Ace. 
 
 acrem 
 
 
 acrem 
 
 acre 
 
 Voc. 
 
 acer 
 
 
 acris 
 
 acre 
 
 Abl. 
 
 acri 
 1 
 
 
 acri 
 
 aeri 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 acres 
 
 
 acres 
 
 acria 
 
 Gen. 
 
 acrium 
 
 
 acrium 
 
 acrium 
 
 Dat. 
 
 acribus 
 
 
 acribus 
 
 acribus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 acres ^ 
 
 
 acres ^ 
 
 acria 
 
 Vac. 
 
 acres 
 
 
 acres 
 
 acria 
 
 Abl. 
 
 acribus 
 
 
 acribus 
 
 acribus 
 
 SING. 
 
 MAS. AND FBM. 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 MAS. AND FEM 
 
 NEUTER. , 
 
 Nom. 
 
 fortis 
 
 forte 
 
 felix 
 
 felix 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fortis 
 
 fortis 
 
 felicis 
 
 felicis 
 
 Dat. 
 
 forti 
 
 forti 
 
 felici 
 
 felici 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fortem 
 
 forte 
 
 felicem 
 
 felix 
 
 Voc. 
 
 fortis * 
 
 forte 
 
 felix 
 
 felix 
 
 Ml. 
 
 forti 
 
 forti 
 
 felici 
 
 felici 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 Nom. 
 
 fortes 
 
 fortia 
 
 felices 
 
 fellcia 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fortium 
 
 fortium 
 
 felicium 
 
 felicium 
 
 Dat. 
 
 fortibus 
 
 fortibus 
 
 felicibus 
 
 felicibus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fortes^ 
 
 fortia 
 
 felices^ 
 
 felicia 
 
 Voc. 
 
 fortes 
 
 fortia 
 
 felices 
 
 felicia 
 
 AM. 
 
 ■--at Jf^'tiU 
 
 * i-iX...^ 
 
 felicibus 
 
 
 
 iUiLIUJuS 
 
 felicibus 
 
 1. The accusative plural is also written acris, fortw, etc., (compa. section 6). 
 
 • "X 
 
PART III—PAKADiaMS. 225 
 
 ' 12. Dec.e„„.„ ., c.mp„™Hve. «„<, Sap,.r.«„,e.. 
 
 SINO. MAS. AND FEM. NEUTER. 
 
 Nom. fortior 
 Gen. fortioris 
 Dat. fortiori 
 Ace. fortiorem 
 Voc. fortior 
 Abl. fortiore 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Norn, fortiores 
 Gen. fortiorum 
 Bat. fortioribus 
 Ace. fortiores 
 Voc. fortiores 
 Abl. fortioribus 
 
 fortius 
 
 fortioris 
 
 fortiori 
 
 fortius 
 
 fortius 
 
 fortiore 
 
 fortiora 
 
 fortiorum 
 
 fortioribus 
 
 fortiora 
 
 fortiora 
 
 fortioribus 
 
 MAS. AND FEM. NEUTER. 
 
 plus 
 pluris 
 
 plus 
 
 (plure) 
 
 plures 
 
 plurium 
 
 pluribus 
 
 plures 
 
 plures 
 
 pluribus 
 
 pliira 
 
 plui'ium 
 
 pluribus 
 
 plura 
 
 pliira 
 
 pluribus 
 
 Complures, a compound of plures, is declined like it. 
 (se^Lrfo)':'''"^^ '"^ '" ^"' «' --' -d are declined like hon^ 
 
 13. Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 rimus. ^ ' ^'^'> ^^^' (icernmus; miser, miser- 
 
 to"L^;: '"^^.S^^^^^^r" ^y changing -Uis 
 
 paJilonTf" '°"°"'"^ *''J""'"'™ -« 1-'« i^gular in their com- 
 
 ■ ''I 
 
 1. See further, section 57. 
 
 15 
 
226 
 
 PfllMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 bonus 
 
 melior 
 
 
 optimus 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 dives 
 
 divitior, ditior 
 
 divitissimus, ditissimus 
 
 
 . magnus 
 
 ; ^ major 
 
 
 maximus 
 
 
 > 
 
 X parvus 
 
 '(' ?tminor 
 
 
 minimus 
 
 
 
 malus 
 
 pejor 
 
 
 pessimus 
 
 
 
 xmultus -, 
 
 , v.'/,plu8 (neut.) 
 
 
 plurimus 
 
 
 
 juvenis 
 
 junior 
 
 
 (minimus natfl) 
 
 
 senex 
 
 senior 
 
 
 (maximus 
 
 natu) 
 
 
 maturus 
 
 
 
 maturrimus 
 
 
 
 \ citerior 'y^:^jV~^V^ 
 
 citimus 
 
 
 
 
 deterior 
 
 
 deterrimua 
 
 
 
 
 interior 
 
 
 intimus 
 
 
 
 
 prior 
 
 
 primus 
 
 
 
 
 s propior 
 
 
 proximus 
 
 
 
 
 ulterior 
 
 
 ultimus 
 
 
 
 exterus 
 
 exterior 
 
 
 extremus, 
 
 extimus 
 
 
 infe^us 
 
 inferior 
 
 
 infimus, imus 
 
 
 posterus 
 
 posterior 
 
 
 postremus, 
 
 posturaus 
 
 
 superus 
 
 superior 
 
 
 supremus, 
 
 summus 
 
 
 
 14. IrrejETular Declension. 
 
 \ 
 
 SING. 
 
 MASC. 
 
 FBM. nIjUT. 
 
 MASC. 
 
 FBM. 
 
 NBUT. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 unus 
 
 una unum 
 
 neuter 
 
 neutra 
 
 neutrum 
 
 Gen. 
 
 unlus 
 
 unius unius 
 
 neutrius 
 
 neutrius 
 
 neutrius 
 
 Dat. 
 
 uni 
 
 tini uni 
 
 neutri 
 
 neutri 
 
 neutri 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ur.um 
 
 unam unum 
 
 neutrura 
 
 neutram 
 
 neutrum 
 
 Voc. 
 
 tine 
 
 una unum 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 uno 
 
 una uno "■ 
 
 neutro 
 
 neutrS, 
 
 neutrS 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. ani flnae ilna neutri neutrae neutra 
 
 Oen. unorum xinarum unorum neutrorum neutrarum neutrorum 
 
 Dat. unis 
 
 Ace. unos 
 
 Voc. uni 
 
 Ahl. anis 
 
 unis 
 Unas 
 unae 
 Qnis 
 
 unis 
 una 
 una 
 tinis 
 
 neutris 
 neutros 
 
 neutiis 
 neutras 
 
 neutris 
 neutra 
 
 neutris neutris neutris 
 The following adjectives of the first and second declensions have 
 
 
 1 
 
 Wii 
 
 1 
 
PART in.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 227 
 
 gender"™ ^"«"'« » •-•■ «■«• '"eir dative si„g„i„ i„ , i„ ^ 
 
 
 ^ter, tra, trum 
 
 15. List of Numerals. 
 
 CARDINALS. 
 
 OEDINALS. 
 
 1. unus, a, um, one 
 
 2. du-o, -ae, -o, two 
 
 3. tres, tria, three 
 
 4. quattuor, /owr 
 
 5. quinque, etc. 
 
 6. sex 
 
 7. septem 
 
 8. octo 
 
 9. novem 
 
 10. decern 
 
 11. undechn 
 
 12. duodecim 
 
 13. tredecim 
 
 14. quattuordecim 
 
 15. quTndecim 
 
 16. sedecim 
 
 17. septendecim 
 
 18. duodevlginti^ 
 
 19. iindevlginti^ 
 
 20. viginti 
 
 21. {^^^^ ^^ vigintl 
 '1 viginti Onus 
 
 28.'duodetrIginta2 
 29. undetrlginta^ 
 
 primus, Jirst 
 
 secundus, second (also alter) 
 
 tertius, third 
 
 quartus, fourth 
 
 quintus, etc. 
 
 sextus 
 
 Septimus 
 
 octavus 
 
 nonus .,a>e:': 
 
 decimus 
 
 undeeimus 
 
 duodecimus 
 
 tertius decimus 
 
 quartus decimus 
 
 quintus decimus 
 
 sextus decimus 
 
 Septimus decimus 
 
 duodevicesimus 
 
 iindevicesimus 
 
 vicesimus 
 
 primus et vicesimus 
 
 vicesimus primus 
 
 duodetrlcgsimus 
 
 undetrlcesimus 
 
 — 1\ In poetry the cfiniHiro ««*„„ ___., ! ~ 
 
228 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 101. 
 
 CARDINALS. 
 
 30. triginta 
 
 40. qud,draginta 
 
 50. quinquaginta 
 
 60. Hexaginta 
 
 70. septuaginta 
 
 80. octoginta 
 
 90. nonaginta 
 100. centum 
 
 /centum unus 
 ■ I centum et unus 
 200. ducenti, ae, a 
 300. trecenti, ae, a 
 400. quadringenti, ae, a 
 500. quingenti, ae, a 
 600. sescenti, ae, a 
 700. septingenti, ae, a 
 800. octingenti, ae, a 
 900. nongenti, ae, a 
 1000. mille 
 2000. duo millia (milia) 
 
 ORDINALS. 
 
 tricSsimus 
 
 quadragesimus 
 
 qulnquag§simu8 
 
 sexagesimus 
 
 septuagesinius 
 
 octogesimus 
 
 nonagesimus 
 
 centesimua 
 
 centesimus primus 
 
 centesimus et primus 
 
 ducentesimus 
 
 trecentesimus 
 
 quadringentesimus 
 
 qulngentesirous 
 
 Bescentesimus 
 
 septingentesimua 
 
 octingentesimua 
 
 nongentesimus 
 
 millesimus 
 
 bis milleaimus 
 
 16. Declension of Numerals. 
 
 
 MASC. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 M. AND F. 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 duo 
 
 duae 
 
 duo 
 
 tres 
 
 tria 
 
 millia 
 
 Gen. 
 
 duOrum 
 
 duarum 
 
 duorum 
 
 trium 
 
 trium 
 
 millium 
 
 Dat. 
 
 duobus 
 
 duabus 
 
 duobus 
 
 tribus 
 
 tribus 
 
 millibus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 duos, duo* 
 
 duas 
 
 duo 
 
 tres 
 
 tria 
 
 millia 
 
 Voc. 
 
 duo 
 
 duae 
 
 duo 
 
 tres 
 
 tria 
 
 millia 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 duobus 
 
 duabus 
 
 duobus 
 
 tribus 
 
 tribus 
 
 millibus 
 
 For the declension of unus, see section 14. 
 
 The hundreds, from ducenti to nongenti, are declined like the 
 plural of bonus, section 10. 
 
 All the other cardinal numerals are indeclinable. 
 
 The ordinal numerals are all declined like bonus, section 10. 
 
PART IIL— PARADIGMS. 
 (C) THE ADVERB. 
 
 229 
 
 17. Formation from Adjective,, „nd C.„,p„r..o„. 
 
 rJnn^fr'"^ "^ regularly formed from adjectives in the following 
 
 sing^lar%raVec?itVLl«fa^*^ ™/!r«, °' "•« «-'«™ 
 :^ectivea of L third^tl^^nt rtt'TleT ot? t1 
 
 of §,^e'"om;S7f1ro'ad1e^^^'h':?, "'T f^^"™ ^^ular 
 comparative of the adjective to !.« ' ^ "'"'"«'"« ■<* "^ ^e 
 
 adfelt!ve tt.T''*''™' "^^ "''^"Smg -,« of the superlative of the 
 
 For examples, see Lesson LIL, page 76. 
 
 Bin?; J" raraf aVvTrt; f"^ "™'^'' - ">» "Woave 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 multus 
 facilis 
 subitus 
 creber 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 multum 
 facile 
 subito 
 crebro 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 plurimua 
 primus 
 certus 
 unus 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 pliirimum 
 primum 
 certo 
 Ona 
 
 m. The following are irregular in formation or comparison : 
 
 melius ontimH 
 
 parum ^^^^ T™« 
 
 [magnopere] "^^ "^i^"^^ 
 
 din 7' maxime 
 
 ""^ dititissime 
 
 ''^' saepius saepissims 
 
 18. Firgt Person. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 2^om. ego 
 Oen. iriei 
 X>ai. mihi 
 ■^oc. mS 
 
 r tjv, 
 
 Ahl. me 
 
 (D) THE PRONOUN. 
 19, Second Pergon. 
 
 ttl 
 
 tui 
 
 tibi 
 
 te 
 
 ta 
 
 te 
 
 20. Third 
 Person Reflexive. 
 
 syl 
 sibi 
 se (sese) 
 
 se 
 
 (sesS) 
 
230 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. nos 
 
 
 vos 
 
 
 
 Gen. nostrflm, 
 
 nostri 
 
 vestrum, 
 
 vestri 
 
 sui 
 
 Dat. nobis 
 
 
 vobis 
 
 
 sibi 
 
 Ace. nos 
 
 
 vos 
 
 
 se (sese) 
 
 Voc. . 
 
 
 vos 
 
 
 \ / 
 
 Abl. nobis 
 
 
 vobis 
 
 
 se ^sfisR^ 
 
 21. Possessive Pronouns.' 
 
 meus, a, urn, my, mine noster, nostra, nostrum, our, ours 
 
 tuus, a, um, your, yours vester, vestra, vestrum, your, yours 
 
 suus, a, um, his, her, suus, a, um, their, theirs 
 hers, its 
 
 These are all declined like adjectives of the first and second 
 declensions, section 10, except that the vocative singular masculine 
 of m£us IS if,-t, rarely mem. 
 
 22. Third Personal, and Demonstrative Pronoun. 
 
 Is, he, she, it, etc. ; tlmt. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 is 
 
 ea 
 
 id 
 
 Oen. 
 
 ejus 
 
 ejus 
 
 ejus 
 ei 
 
 Bat. 
 
 61 
 
 ei 
 
 Ace. 
 
 eum 
 
 earn 
 
 id 
 
 Abl. 
 
 eo 
 
 ea 
 
 eo 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ei, ii 
 
 eae 
 
 ea 
 
 Gen. 
 
 eorum 
 
 earum 
 
 eorum 
 
 Bat. 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 ^ Ace. 
 
 eos 
 
 eas 
 
 ea 
 
 I Abl. 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 X 
 
PART III. — PARADIGMS. 
 
 231 
 
 rs 
 urs 
 
 econd 
 culine 
 
 23. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 «'«• ^^'^' Ille, that. 
 
 SING. MA8C. 
 
 Novn. hic 
 
 Gen. hujus 
 
 Dat. huic 
 
 Ace. hunc 
 
 Ahl. hoc 
 
 FBM. 
 
 haec 
 
 htijus 
 
 huic 
 
 haiic 
 
 hac 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 hoc 
 
 hujus 
 
 huic 
 
 hoc 
 
 hoc 
 
 MASC. 
 
 ille 
 
 illius 
 
 illi 
 
 ilium 
 
 illo 
 
 FEM. 
 
 ilia 
 
 illius 
 
 illi 
 
 illam 
 
 ilia 
 
 illae 
 
 illarura 
 
 ilh-8 
 
 illas 
 
 illis 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 illud 
 illius' 
 illi 
 illud 
 
 mo 
 
 PLUEAL. 
 
 Nom. hi hae haec illi 
 
 Gen. horum harum horum illorum 
 
 Dat. his his his illis 
 
 Ace. hos has haec illos 
 
 Ahl. his his his illis 
 
 JThe pronoun iste, a, vd, that of yours, is declined exactly like 
 
 ilia 
 
 illorum 
 
 illis 
 
 ilia 
 
 illte 
 
 Ipse, -self. 
 
 Idem, the same. 
 
 M 
 
 SING. MASC. 
 
 Nom. ipse 
 Gen. ipsius 
 Dat. ipsi 
 Ace. ipsum 
 Abl. ipso 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. ipsi 
 
 Gen. ipsorum 
 
 Dat. ipsis 
 
 Ace. ipsoa 
 
 AU. ipsis 
 
 FEM. 
 
 ipsa 
 
 ipsius 
 
 ipsi 
 
 ipsam 
 
 ipsa 
 
 NEUT. MASC 
 
 ipsum idem 
 
 ipsius 
 ipsi 
 ipsum 
 ipso 
 
 . F2:vl. NEUT. 
 
 eadem idem 
 
 ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem 
 
 eidem eidem eidem 
 
 eundem eandem idem 
 
 eodem eadem eodem 
 
 r eidem, 
 
 ipsae ipsa j-^j^^^ eaedem eadem 
 
 ipsarum ipsorum eorundem earundcin eorundem 
 
 feisdem, eisdem, eisdem, 
 
 liisdem^ iisdem^ 
 
 eosdeiu easdem 
 
 r eisdem, eisdem, 
 
 \iisdem^ iisdem^ 
 
 ipsis ipsis 
 ipsas ipsa 
 ipsis ipsis 
 
 iisdem^ 
 eadem 
 eisdem, 
 iisdem^ 
 
 1. For iitdem we often find Isdem. 
 
232 
 
 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 i^ 
 
 24. Relative Pronoun. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Oen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Ace. ^S^: quem 
 
 ■^W' quo 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 qui 
 
 cujus 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 qui 
 
 quorum 
 
 quibus 
 
 quos 
 
 quibus 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 quae 
 
 cfijus 
 
 cul 
 
 quam 
 
 qua 
 
 quae 
 
 quarum 
 
 quibus 
 
 quas 
 
 quibus 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 quod 
 cajus 
 cul 
 quod 
 quo . 
 
 quae 
 
 quorum 
 
 quibus 
 
 quae 
 
 quibus 
 
 25. Interrogratlve Pronoun. 
 
 26. Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER 
 
 aliquis, aliqui aliqua aliquid, aliquod 
 
 -qZe") "'"''' P^"'"^' "' ^^" "'^ '^' ^^"^"""^ lingular, has -qna for 
 
 quis, qui * qua ^ quid, quod 
 
 qul^y ""'"''' ^^"''^' "' """^^ '' '^' ^'"^^"^"^ ^^"g"^^^' ^^« ^^*« for 
 
 QuisOuL '^"'''^"' ^"^'^"' "" ^"^^'l"^' ^^^^^"^ 
 
 ^'^'^*1"^"' quicquam or quidquam 
 
 (The plural and the feminine singular are not used.) 
 
 fn±-ni!?hl!5*J^^i':«.* ^««i has.both quis and <,ui. or bot.h 
 „„. ^„,, .^„„„ „j.^. generally used adjeutively, the others si 
 
 
 substantively. 
 
PART III.— PARADlGMa 
 
 233 
 
 MASCULINE. FFMTVTXTo 
 
 quisquis FEMININE neutee. 
 
 ro!-T^'''. '^"*'^*'" q»iddam. quoddam 
 «?n.rf«m changes m ton before -c/am) 
 
 quaevis quidvis, quodvis 
 
 q-epiam quidpi.^ or quippiam, quod- 
 
 « ,., Piam 
 
 «?*o quaelibet quidlibet, quodlibet 
 
 quivis 
 quispiam 
 
 quilibet 
 
 
 <WiWf![PS, 
 
234 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 A 
 
 27. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 First ConJKg. 
 
 1. amd 
 
 2. amai.^ 
 
 3. amat 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amamus 
 
 2. am&tis 
 
 3. amant 
 
 I 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. aniftbam 
 ^ 2. amabas 
 ' ^^^S. amabat 
 
 W A% PLURAL. 
 
 ^ ^V !• omabamua 
 ^ 'J 2. amabatis 
 '-^^^ 3. amabant 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amabo 
 
 2. aniabis 
 
 3. amabifc 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amlbimus 
 
 2. am&bitis 
 
 
 (E) THE VERB. 
 Indicative Mood, Active Voice. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ►♦ 
 
 Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjug. 
 
 moneo 
 mones 
 monet 
 
 monomus 
 
 monebis 
 
 monent 
 
 rego 
 regis 
 regit 
 
 regimus 
 
 regitis 
 
 regunt 
 
 IiiPEr^FECT Tense. 
 
 monebam 
 
 monebas 
 
 monebat 
 
 monebamua 
 
 mopebatis 
 
 monebant 
 
 regebam 
 
 regobas 
 
 regebat 
 
 regebamus 
 
 regebatis 
 
 regebant 
 
 audio 
 audls 
 audit 
 
 4 
 
 L 
 audlmus 
 
 auditis 
 
 audiunt 
 
 audiebam 
 
 audiebas 
 
 audiebat 
 
 audiebamus 
 
 audiebatis 
 
 audiebant 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 ,^£^ 
 
 monebo 
 monebis 
 monebiti 
 
 mongbimus 
 
 monebitis 
 
 monebunt 
 
 regam 
 
 reges 
 
 reget 
 
 regemus 
 
 regetis 
 
 regent 
 
 audiam 
 
 audies 
 
 audiet 
 
 audiSmus 
 
 audietis 
 
 audient 
 
 UMjJ^ife. .JS^SS' 
 
'VV. V 
 
 PABT III.— PAKADIGMa 
 
 235 
 
 f» 
 
 h Conjug. 
 
 us 
 it 
 
 am 
 
 as 
 
 at 
 
 amus 
 
 atis 
 
 ant 
 
 us 
 
 9 
 
 ■<.'! 
 
 (B) THE VERB, 
 as. Indicative Mood, PasHlve Voice. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 First Conhig. 
 
 1. amor 
 
 2. aiuaris* 
 
 3. amatur 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amamui' 
 
 2. amamini 
 
 3. amantur 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amabar 
 
 2. aniabaris' 
 
 3. amabatur 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amabamur 
 
 2. amabamini 
 
 3. amabantur 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amabor 
 
 2. amaberis^ 
 
 3. amabitur 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amabimu]' 
 
 2. amabimini 
 
 3. amabuntur 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Second Conjug. Third Con jx^. Fourth Conjug. 
 moneor rogor audior 
 
 mouens ' 
 monetur 
 
 rcgeris^ 
 regitur 
 
 audlris ^ 
 audltur 
 
 monemur 
 monemini 
 monentur 
 
 regimur 
 regimini 
 reguntur 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 monebar 
 
 monebaris^ 
 
 monebatur 
 
 monSbamur 
 mongbainini 
 monebantur 
 
 regebar 
 
 regebaris* 
 
 regebatur 
 
 regebamur 
 regebaniini 
 regebantur 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 monebor 
 
 moneberis^ 
 
 monebitur 
 
 mcinebimur 
 mcnebimini 
 monebuntur 
 
 regar 
 
 regeris^ 
 
 regetur 
 
 regemur 
 regemini 
 regentur 
 
 audimur 
 audfmini 
 audiuntur 
 
 audiebar 
 
 audiebaris^ 
 
 audiobatur 
 
 Rudiebamur 
 audiebaminl 
 audiebantur 
 
 audiar 
 
 audieris^ 
 
 audietur 
 
 audigmur 
 audiemini 
 
 andipnfnT. 
 
 1. For -m, -re also is found, especially in the 
 
 imperfect and future tenses. 
 
236 
 
 •INOtJLAR. 
 
 First Conjny, 
 
 1. amavl 
 
 2. amavisti 
 
 3. amftvit 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. arnavimus 
 
 2. amavistiH 
 
 3. amavGrunt^ 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 27. Indicative .Mood. Active Voice (continued). 
 Perfect Tenhb. 
 
 Second Conjng. Third Cov^ug Fourth Comug. 
 
 nionul roxl 
 
 nionuistl 
 
 monuit 
 
 rCxiHtl 
 rgxit 
 
 monuirnus 
 
 monuistis 
 
 monuerunt' 
 
 rSxim'us 
 rexistis 
 rexeru H^ 
 
 audlvl 
 
 dudlvisti 
 
 audlvit 
 
 audlvimus 
 
 audlvistis 
 
 audlverunt^ 
 
 t fc- 
 
 V 
 
 ^filINGULAR. 
 
 |j 1. amaVeram 
 \ ft/ 2. amaveras 
 ^^ 3. aniaverat 
 
 nAJ^ plural. 
 ^ 1. amaverumus 
 
 2. amaveratis 
 
 3. aniaverant 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 monueram 
 
 monueras 
 
 monuorat 
 
 monueramus 
 
 monuerafcis 
 
 monuorant 
 
 rSxeram 
 
 rexeras 
 
 rexerat 
 
 rexeramus 
 
 rexeratis 
 
 rexerant 
 
 audlvei'am 
 
 audlveras 
 
 audiverat 
 
 audiveramus 
 
 audivjeratis 
 
 audlverant 
 
 H SINGULAR. 
 
 , 1. amavero 
 
 ^ \r 2. amaveris 
 
 <<J^ .3. amaverit 
 
 ■ ' s 
 
 > {> 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 \j 1. amaverimus 
 >. 2. amaveritis 
 
 3. amaverint 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 
 monuerS^ 
 monueris 
 monuerit 
 
 monuerimufl 
 
 monueritis 
 
 monuerint 
 
 rSxerS 
 rexeris 
 r"xerit 
 
 rexeiimus 
 
 rexeritis 
 
 rexerint 
 
 1. For -I 
 
 audlvero 
 
 audiveris 
 
 audiverit 
 
 audlverimus 
 
 audlveritis 
 
 audiverint 
 
 Srunt, .ere also is found, eapecLMJy in poetiy. 
 
TART III.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 28. Indicative Mood, Pa.,ive Voice (continued). 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 237 
 
 SINOULAR. 
 
 First Conjug, 
 
 1. i4matu8' sum 
 
 o 
 
 II es 
 
 3' II est 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. aniCtl' sumus 
 
 2. M estis 
 
 3. ir sunt 
 
 l^ron', Ckmjng. Tlnrd Omj.u,. Fourth Conjua. 
 
 nionitus 1 sum rSctus ' sum auditus i sum 
 
 *"* " 68 fl 68 1 
 
 est „ est „ est 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 inouiti' 8umu8 
 II estiH 
 8unt 
 
 recti* sumus 
 
 M 
 
 II 
 
 estis 
 sunt 
 
 auditli sumus 
 M estis 
 sunt 
 
 It 
 
 Pluperfect Tense, 
 singular. 
 
 1. amatus^oram monitust eram rectus * eram auditus * eram 
 
 3 " ''': " -- '. eras „ eras 
 
 ^' " ''^^ " «rat „ erat „ erat 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amatii erSmus monitl* eram«e recti* erSmus 
 
 II eratis „ eratis 
 
 II erant „ erant 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 M 
 II 
 
 eratis 
 erant 
 
 ///^ 
 
 
 ijtoU^ 
 
 audltl* erftmua 
 eratis 
 erant 
 
 II 
 
 BINGUijjLR. 
 
 1. amatus* ero 
 
 2. II eria 
 
 3. M erifc 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 
 monitus* ero 
 
 ii 
 II 
 
 eris 
 erit 
 
 rectus* ero 
 II eris 
 II erit 
 
 auditus* er6 
 'I eris 
 M erit 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amatt.erimus monitr. erimus «ctT. erimu. .udM-erimu, 
 3. „ erunt „ enmt „ erunt „ erunb 
 
 _ J^-. Instead of amatMix and awiii. am^ttL «,. « >,-# 
 
 ttrrKiras or dWtaia in the plural, if the Buhio«f "ir''#-,lf-" •"^" ^'^ ''°" oiuK"'«"" and 
 masculine. So in all conju^tiong. ^ ' feminine or neuter iBstead of 
 
238 
 
 SINGtJLAR. 
 
 First Conjug. 
 
 1. amem 
 
 2. ames 
 
 3. amet V 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amemus 
 
 2. ametis 
 
 3. amen'; 
 
 Jl SINGULAR. 
 
 S/' 'il. amarem 
 JiAJX.2. amares 
 i:,^'^. 3. amaret 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 29. Sabjanotlve Mood, Active Voloe. 
 
 Present Tense. ^ /'■ l^^iAyj 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amaremus 
 
 2. amaretis 
 
 3. amarent 
 
 Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjxu,. 
 
 moneam regam audiam 
 
 moneas regSs audias 
 
 ^moneat regat audiat 
 
 moneamus regamus 
 
 moneatis regatis 
 
 moneant regant 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 audiamus 
 
 audiatis 
 
 audiant 
 
 n<^iA.- 
 
 mongrem 
 
 moneres 
 
 mcmeret 
 
 moneremus 
 
 moneretis 
 
 monerent 
 
 regerem 
 
 regeres 
 
 regoret 
 
 . regeremus 
 regeretis 
 regerenfc 
 
 audirem 
 
 audlroii 
 
 audiret 
 
 audlremus 
 
 audiretis 
 
 audirent 
 
 \.>^'^ 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amaverim 
 
 2. amaveriH 
 
 3. amaverifc 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amaverijnus 
 
 2. amaveritfis 
 
 3. amaverint 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 monuerim rexerim 
 
 monueris^ rexeris 
 
 monuerit rexer't 
 
 monuenmus 
 
 monueritis. 
 
 monuerint 
 
 rexerimus 
 
 rexeritis 
 
 rexerint 
 
 audiverim 
 
 audiveris 
 
 audlverit 
 
 audiveriraus 
 
 audlveritis 
 
 audiverint 
 
 3. 
 
80. 
 
 SDfGULAR. 
 
 First Conjug. 
 
 1. amer 
 
 2. ameris^ 
 
 3. amStur 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amemur 
 
 2. amemini 
 
 3. amentur 
 
 PART III.— PARADICMS. 239 
 
 Sabjnnotlve Mood, Passive Voice. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjmj 
 
 monear regar audiar 
 
 monearisi regaris^ audiarisi 
 
 moneatur regatur audiatur 
 
 moneamur 
 moneamini 
 moneantur 
 
 regamur 
 regamini 
 regantur 
 
 audiamur 
 audiamini 
 audiantur 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amarer 
 
 2. amareris^ 
 
 3. amaretur 
 
 Impelpect Tense. 
 
 X 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amaremur 
 
 2. amaremini 
 
 3. amarentur 
 
 lAA-'' 
 
 monerer 
 monereris ^ 
 . moneretur 
 
 i 
 
 moneremur 
 moneremini 
 monerentur 
 
 regerer 
 
 regereris^ 
 
 regeretur 
 
 regeremur 
 regereminl 
 regerentur 
 
 audlrer 
 
 audireris* 
 
 audiretur 
 
 audiremur 
 audireminl 
 audirentur 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. amatus^sim 
 
 2. II , sis 
 
 3. II sit 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amatl^slmus 
 
 2. II sitis 
 
 3. II sint 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 monitus^sim 
 ir sis 
 
 II sit 
 
 monitl^ simus 
 II sit is 
 II sint 
 
 rectus'' sim 
 
 I' SIS 
 
 II sit 
 
 recti'slmus 
 II sitis 
 It sint 
 
 audltus^ sim 
 II sis 
 II sit 
 
 audltl2 simus 
 11 sitis 
 II sint 
 
 1. For -rig, -re lUso is found. 
 
 •»• '.-vT twtuuic i, page 237. 
 
240 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 20. Subjunctive Mood, Active Voice (continued). 
 Pluperfect Tense. , 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 First Conjiu,. Second Conjvg. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjug. 
 
 monuissem rexissem audlvissem 
 
 monuisses rexisses audlvisses 
 
 monuisset. rexisset audlvisset 
 
 1. amavissem 
 
 2. amavisses 
 
 3. amavisset 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. amavissemus 
 
 2. amavissetis 
 
 3. amavissent 
 
 monuisaemus 
 
 monuissetis 
 
 monuissent 
 
 rexissemus 
 
 rexissetis 
 
 rexissent 
 
 audivissgmus 
 
 audivissetis 
 
 audivissent 
 
 y 
 
 31. Infinitive Mood, Active Voice. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 amare 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 amavisse 
 
 monere 
 
 monuisse 
 
 regfere 
 
 rexisse 
 
 audire 
 audivisse 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 amaturus esse^ moniturus esse^ recturus esse^ auditurus esse* 
 
 33. Participle, Active Voice. 
 
 regens 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 amans 
 
 monens 
 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 amattirus 
 
 moniturus 
 
 
 rgcttirus 
 
 1. See footnote 2, page 81. 
 
 audigns —- 
 audlttirus 
 
y 
 
 PABT HI.— PAKADIGMS. 241 
 80. Subjunctive Mood, Passive Voice (continued). 
 SINGULAK. Pi'UPBKFECT TknSE. 
 
 First Conj.^. Second Conjng. Third Conj,^. FouHh Conhtg. 
 
 1. amatusi essen. monitus^ essem rectus ^ easem auditus^ essem 
 
 i' " ®^^®^ " esses „ esses „ esses 
 
 ^- " esse<^ -- esset „ esset „ esset 
 
 rLUBAL. 
 
 1. amatii essemus monitii essemus recti^ essgmus audlti^ essSmus 
 
 ^. .. essetis „ essetis „ essetis „ essetis 
 
 "*• " ^""^^*^ " essent „ essent „ essent 
 
 inon3ii 
 
 32. Infinitive Mood, Passive Voice. 
 
 regi audM / ^ ^^ ^ 
 
 amatus esse^ monitus esse^ rectus esse^ auditus esse" j^..a.WA 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 amatumiri ^ monitum Iri rectum iri audltum M 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 amari 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 34. Participles, Passive Voice. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 am3,tus 
 
 ;> '^ 
 
 monitus 
 
 rSctus 
 
 GERUNDIVE 
 
 amandua 
 
 _ ^ ^laL P /-X^^i-fi-^^iu 
 
 monendus 
 
 regendus 
 
 auditus 
 
 audiendus 
 
 1. See footnote 1, page 237. 
 
 If 
 
242 
 
 ^ 1^ Gen. amanjii 
 
 c^^ly^y'^-t Dab. amarjdo 
 
 oJXkPJ oxh^^^' amanidum 
 
 hj ^ /Ahl. amando 
 
 Ace. 
 Ahl. 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 35. Gernnd, Active Voice. 
 
 Second Conj. Third Conj. 
 
 monendl regendi 
 
 monendo regendo 
 
 monendum regendum 
 
 monendo regendo 
 
 36. Supine. Active Voice. 
 
 I 
 
 >m3,tum 
 imatu 
 
 monitum 
 monitu 
 
 rectum 
 rectu 
 
 Fourth Conj, 
 
 audiendi 
 
 audiendo 
 
 audiendura 
 
 audiendo 
 
 auditum 
 audita 
 
 37. Imperative Mood, Active Voice. 
 
 Sing. 2. ama 
 Plur. 2. amate 
 
 Sing. 2. amatd 
 3. amato 
 
 Plur. 2. amatote 
 3. amanto 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 monS 
 monete 
 
 rege 
 regite 
 
 FuTUEE Tense. 
 
 moneto 
 moneto 
 moneto te 
 monento 
 
 regito 
 regito 
 regitote 
 regunto 
 
 audi 
 
 J 
 
 auditei 
 
 audrto 
 audlto 
 auditote 
 audlunto 
 
 >S 
 
 Si 
 
 Fl 
 
 38. Imperative Mood, Passive Voice. 
 
 » Present "^ Tense. 
 
 Sing. 2. amare 
 Flur.2. amamini 
 
 Sing. 2. amator 
 3. amator 
 Plur. 3. amantor 
 
 monere 
 moneminl 
 
 regere 
 regimini 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 resritor 
 
 monetor 
 monetor 
 monentor 
 
 regitor 
 reguntor 
 
 audire 
 audXminI 
 
 auditor 
 auditor 
 audiuntor 
 
 Sii 
 
 Sir 
 
 Sii\ 
 
 z 
 conj 
 
 ^' 
 
\ 
 
 PART III.— Paradigms. 
 
 243 
 
 39. Verb8 In id of Third Conjugation.^ 
 
 Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. ■ 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Active Voice. 
 Sing. 1. capio 
 
 2. capis 
 
 3. capit 
 Plur. 1. capimus 
 
 2. capitis 
 
 3. capiunt 
 
 Sing. 1. capiebam 
 
 2. capiebas 
 
 3. capiebat 
 Plur.l. capiebamus 
 
 2. capiebatis 
 
 3. capiebant 
 
 Sing. 1. capiam 
 
 2. capies 
 
 3. capiet 
 Flur. 1. capiemus 
 
 2. capietis 
 
 3. client 
 
 Sing. 1. cepi 
 Sing. 1. ceperam 
 Sing. 1. c§pero 
 
 jrassive voic 
 
 e. Active Voic 
 
 e. Passive Voice. 
 
 capior 
 
 capiam 
 
 capiar 
 
 caperis 
 
 capias 
 
 capiaris 
 
 capitur 
 
 capiat 
 
 capiatur 
 
 capiniur 
 
 capiamus 
 
 capiamur 
 
 capimini 
 
 capiatis 
 
 capiamini 
 
 capiuntur 
 
 capiant 
 
 capiantur 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 
 capiebar 
 
 caperem 
 
 caperer 
 
 capiebaris 
 
 caperes 
 
 capereris 
 
 capiebatur 
 
 caperet 
 
 caperetur 
 
 capiebam ur 
 
 caperemus 
 
 caperemur 
 
 capiebaminl 
 
 caperetis 
 
 caperemini 
 
 capiebantur 
 
 caperenfc 
 
 capexentur 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 
 capiar 
 
 
 
 capieris 
 
 
 
 capietiir 
 
 
 
 capiemur 
 
 
 
 capiemini 
 
 
 
 capientur 
 
 
 
 Perfect Tbnse.^ 
 ^rtptus sum ceperim 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 2 
 captus eram cepissem 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. 2 
 captus ero 
 
 captus sim 
 captus essem 
 
 1. For a list of the verbs belonging to this clasg, see ssi;t.ir-, ?." 
 
 co^uStiS^'"''* ''"'''■ ""^^^^^ ^"«^«*^ ^acilylike tti;;;^ Of the four regular 
 
241 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 
 . Active Voice. Passive Voice. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 capere 
 
 capi 
 
 Perf. 
 
 cepisse 
 
 captus esse 
 
 Fut. 
 
 capturus ecse 
 
 captum iri 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 capiens 
 
 Perf. captus 
 
 Fut. 
 
 capturus 
 
 Gerun. capiendus 
 Gerund. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 capiendi 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 capiendo 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 capiendum 
 
 ' 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 capiencio 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 captum 
 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 captu 
 
 
 Sing. 2. cape 
 Plur. 2. capita 
 
 Sing. 2. capito 
 3. capito 
 
 Plur. 2. capitote 
 3. capiunto 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 capere 
 
 capimin 
 
 ruTUEE Ttsnse. 
 
 capito? 
 
 capitor 
 
 capiuntor 
 
PART III.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 245 
 
 40. Synopslg of Deponent Verbs. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pves. 
 Impf. 
 Fut. 
 Perf. 
 
 Plxip. 
 
 First Con. 
 
 hortor 
 
 hortabar 
 
 hortabor 
 
 hortatus 
 
 sum 
 hortatus 
 
 erain 
 Fut. P. hortatus 
 
 ero 
 
 Pres. horter 
 Impf. hortarer 
 Perf. hortatus 
 
 sim 
 Plup. hortatus 
 
 esseiu 
 
 Second Con. 
 
 vereor 
 
 verebar 
 
 verebor 
 
 veritus 
 
 sum 
 veritus 
 
 eraii. 
 veritus 
 
 ero 
 
 Third Con. 
 
 loquor 
 
 loquebar 
 
 loquar 
 
 locutus 
 
 sum 
 locutus 
 
 eraui 
 locutus 
 
 ero 
 
 feUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 verear 
 
 vererer 
 
 veritus 
 
 sim 
 veritus 
 
 essem 
 
 loquar 
 
 loquerer 
 
 locutus 
 
 sim 
 looiitus 
 
 essem 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 hortari vererl 
 
 hortatus veritus 
 
 esse esse esse 
 
 hortaturus veriturus locuturus 
 
 esse esse esse 
 
 loqui 
 locutus 
 
 Pres. 
 Fut. 
 Perf 
 Oer. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 hortans verens 
 hortaturus veriturus 
 
 F' Hrth Con. Verbs in id. 
 potior patior 
 
 pctiebar patiebar 
 
 potiar patiar 
 
 potitus passus 
 
 sum sum 
 
 potitus passus 
 
 eram eram 
 
 potitus passus 
 
 ero ero 
 
 potiar 
 
 potirer 
 
 potitus 
 
 sim 
 potitus 
 
 essem 
 
 patiar 
 
 paterer 
 
 passus 
 
 sim 
 passus 
 
 essem 
 
 potiri pati 
 
 potitus passus 
 
 esse esse 
 
 potiturus passOrus 
 
 esse esse 
 
 loquens potiens 
 
 locuturus potiturus 
 
 hoitatus veritus locutus potitus 
 
 hortandus verendus loquendus potiendus 
 
 patiens 
 passOrus 
 passus 
 patiendus 
 
 Gen. hortand! 
 
 Gerund. 
 verendl loquendl 
 
 I 
 
 potiend! patiendi 
 
 ...(Wf'"''^ 
 
246 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Prea. 
 Fut. 
 
 SUPINB. 
 
 First Con. Second Con. Third Con. Fourth Con. Verbs in iO, 
 
 potltum . passum 
 
 Ace. hortatuiii veritum locutum 
 
 hortare 
 hortator 
 
 verere 
 veretor 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 loquere 
 loquitor 
 
 potire 
 potltor 
 
 patere 
 patitor 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 41. Sum, esse, ful, to be. 
 
 42. Possum, posse, put ul, 
 
 to be able, can. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Sing. 1. sum 
 
 2. es 
 
 3. est 
 Plur. 1. sumua 
 
 2. estis 
 
 3. sunt 
 
 Sing. 1. eram 
 
 2. eras 
 
 3. erat 
 Plur. 1. eramus 
 
 2. eratis 
 
 3. erant 
 
 \ 
 
 ") 
 
 J' 
 
 .^P 
 
 ^ 
 
 Sing. 1. ero 
 
 2. eria 
 
 3. erifc 
 Plur. 1. erimus 
 
 2. eritis 
 
 3. erunt 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sim 
 
 sis 
 
 sit 
 
 simus 
 
 sitis 
 
 sint 
 
 possum 
 
 potes 
 
 potest 
 
 possurnus 
 
 potestis 
 
 possunt 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 essem 
 esses 
 esset 
 essemus 
 »essetis 
 essent 
 
 poteram 
 
 poteras 
 
 poterat 
 
 poteramus 
 
 poteratis 
 
 potera.:') 
 
 Future. 
 
 potero 
 
 poteria "'^ 
 
 poterit 
 
 poterimua 
 
 poteritis 
 
 poterunt 
 
 possim 
 
 possis 
 
 possit 
 
 possimuj? 
 
 possitis 
 
 possint 
 
 ; 
 
 possem 
 
 posses 
 
 posset 
 
 possemua 
 
 possetis 
 
 possent 
 
erhs in id. 
 kssum 
 
 tere 
 titor 
 
 pi;>» alt 
 
 >fCTIVE. 
 
 n 
 > 
 
 I 
 
 is 
 it 
 
 n 
 
 nua 
 
 ;is 
 It 
 
 PART III—PARADIGIMS. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. Indicative. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Sitig. 1. fill 
 
 2. fuisti 
 
 3. fuit 
 Plv/r. 1. fuimus 
 
 2, 
 3. 
 
 fuistis 
 fu^runt 
 
 Sing. 1. fueram 
 
 2. fueras 
 
 3. fuerat 
 Plur. 1. fueraniua 
 
 2. fueratis 
 
 3. fuerant 
 
 Sing. 1. fuero 
 
 2. fueris 
 
 3. fuerit 
 Plur. 1. fuerimuB 
 
 2. fueritis 
 
 3. fuerint 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf. 
 Put. 
 
 Pees. 
 Put. 
 
 Pres. Sing. 2. es 
 
 Plur. 2. este 
 Put. Sing. 2. esto 
 3. esto 
 Plur. 2. estote 
 3. sunto 
 
 fuerim 
 
 fueris 
 
 fuerit 
 
 fuerimus 
 
 fueritia 
 
 fuerint 
 
 Plupbrpe 
 
 potui N^^''^ 
 
 potuisti 
 
 potuit 
 
 potuimus 
 
 potuistis 
 
 potuerunt 
 
 fuissem 
 
 fuisses 
 
 fuisset 
 
 fuissemus 
 
 fuissetis 
 
 fuissent 
 
 esse 
 fuisse 
 
 futurus esse or 
 fore 
 
 futurus 
 
 potueram 
 pctueras 
 potuerat 
 potueramus 
 potueratis 
 potuerant 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 potuero 
 potueris 
 potuerit 
 potuerimus 
 potueritis ""-5 
 potuerint 
 Infinitive. 
 
 posse 
 potuisse 
 
 Participle. 
 
 potena 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 247 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 potuerim 
 
 potueris 
 
 potuerit 
 
 potuerimus 
 
 potueritis 
 
 potuerint v 
 
 V 
 
 potuissem >^ 
 
 potuisses 
 
 potuisset 
 
 potuissemus 
 
 potuiasetia 
 
 potuissent 
 
 f 
 
 
248 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 43. Void, Nolo, Malo.i 
 
 Vol 6, vei e, volal, 
 Nolo, nolle, nolalt 
 Malo, inalle, malm. 
 
 be imlling^ voUl, tvish. 
 he ummllingy loill not. 
 be more willing, prefer. 
 
 1 - 
 
 Frt$. 
 
 voluero 
 
 Pres. 
 
 v^ 
 
 t' 
 
 velim 
 velis 
 velit 
 velimus 
 velltis 
 velint 
 Impf. vellem 
 velles 
 vellet 
 vellenma 
 velletis 
 vellenfc 
 Perf. voluerim 
 PZwj?. voluissem 
 
 FreA. velle 
 Fetf, voluisse 
 
 Indicative. y^UVt^lA^ l/-(nA) fi^CtiJio 
 
 non vis 
 
 non vult 
 
 nolumus 
 
 non vultis 
 
 nolunfc 
 
 nolebam 
 
 nolam 
 
 nolui 
 
 noluaram 
 
 noluero 
 
 S JBJUNCTIVB. 
 
 nolim 
 nolis 
 nolit 
 nolimus 
 nolltis 
 nolint 
 noUem 
 noUes 
 nollet 
 \ noUemus ' 
 nolletis 
 noUent 
 noluerim 
 noluissem 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 nolle 
 
 noluisse 
 
 mavis 
 
 mavnlt 
 
 maluinus 
 
 mavultis 
 
 malunt 
 
 malebam 
 
 malam 
 
 malui 
 
 malueram 
 
 maluero 
 
 malim 
 
 malls 
 
 malit 
 
 malimus 
 
 malltis 
 
 malint 
 
 mallem 
 
 malles 
 
 mallet 
 
 mallemus 
 
 malletis 
 
 mallent 
 
 maluerim 
 
 maluissem 
 
 malle 
 maluisse 
 
 1. See footnote 3, puge M. 
 
PART III.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 249 
 
 htti. 
 
 la 
 
 iVe*. volSna 
 
 Prej. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Participlb. 
 ndl6ns 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 noli 
 
 aollte 
 
 nolifcS 
 
 nollto 
 
 nolltote 
 nolunto 
 
 44. Fero.* / 
 
 Fero, ferrt , tall, lafuRi. hf ir, catry, "ndiire. 
 Indicative. 
 
 Acti 
 Pres. ^ fero 
 
 fei-s 
 
 fert 
 Impf. ferfibam 
 Fut. feram 
 Pcrf. tuli 
 Plup. tulerMoi 
 Fut. P. tulero 
 
 Pres. feram 
 
 Impf, ferrem 
 
 Per/ tulerim 
 
 Phip. tuliasem 
 
 Pres. ferre 
 Per/. tulisse 
 Put. laturus esse 
 
 Pres. ferens 
 Fut. lattirus 
 
 ferimu.^ 
 fe fis 
 ferunt 
 
 Pas'-lve. 
 
 feror 
 ferris 
 f jrtur 
 ferebar 
 ferar 
 latus sum 
 latus erara 
 latus ero 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 ferar 
 ferrer 
 latus sim 
 latus essem 
 
 iNPINITIVi!,. 
 
 ferri 
 
 Iptus esse 
 latum M 
 
 Participle. 
 Peif. latus 
 Oer. ferendus 
 
 ffrimur 
 ferimini 
 feruntur 
 
 ■ 
 
 1. See footnote 1, page 97. For Oie compounds fero, see section 71, b. 
 
M^: 
 
 «0U PRIMAIIY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 Gekuno. 
 
 (hn, ferondl 
 
 . 
 
 Dai. ferendS 
 
 V 
 
 AcAi. ferondum 
 
 \ 
 
 A\A, ferendd 
 
 
 
 Supine- 
 
 Ate. latum 
 
 « 
 
 Ahi. lata 
 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Paadve. 
 
 Pr>s. Sing. 2. fer 
 
 ferro 
 
 Flur. 2. ffcrte 
 
 ferimini 
 
 Fut. Sing. 2. ferto 
 
 fertor 
 
 3. ferto 
 
 fertor 
 
 Phir. 2. fertoto 
 
 • 
 
 3. ferui^to 
 
 feruntor 
 
 45. E5.' 
 
 46. FI6.1 
 
 E6, ire, 11, (ivl), i 
 
 [turn, go, PI6, fieri, factus sum, he mode^ 
 
 
 become, happen. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pres. eo 
 
 Imus fio flmus 
 
 Is 
 
 itis fis fitis 
 
 it 
 
 eunt fit fiunfc 
 
 Impf. ibam 
 
 fiebam 
 
 Fut. ibo 
 
 flam 
 
 Ferf. ii 
 
 factus sum 
 
 Plup. ieram 
 
 factus eram 
 
 Fut. P. iero 
 
 factus ero 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Pres. earn, eSs, etc. 
 
 fiam 
 
 Lapf. irem 
 
 fierem 
 
 Pei;/, ieriiu 
 
 factus sim 
 
 Plup. iissem 
 
 factus essem 
 
 
PAKT III. — PARADIGMa 
 
 Ul 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Pres. Ire 
 Per/, iisse 
 Put. itarus esso 
 
 Pres. iSns, Oen. euntis 
 Put. itflnis 
 
 Oen. eundl 
 
 Dat. eundd 
 
 Ace. eundura 
 
 Abl. eundo 
 
 Ace. itum 
 Abl. ita 
 
 Pres. Sing. 2. I 
 
 Phir. 2. ite 
 .F'lt*. iSfingf. 2. ito 
 3. Ito 
 PZwr, 2. itote 
 3. eunto 
 
 fieri 
 
 fHCtUH OHHe 
 
 factum Irl 
 
 1 
 
 PLE. 
 
 factus 
 faciendus 
 
 Ui.KUND. , 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. i^ng. 2. fl 
 Plwr. 2. fite 
 
 I 
 
252 
 
 PRIMARY LATia BOOK. 
 
 II. SYNOPSIS OF ACCIDENCE. 
 
 47. Nouns of the First Dec/cnslon. (See also section 1.) 
 
 (a) The Stem ends in a, and is like the nominative singular. 
 
 (6) Gender. — Nouns ending in a or e are feminine, those end- 
 ing in as or es masculine. ^ Exceptions : Masculine in a, some 
 nouns indicating males, e.g., nmita, agricola, pOeta ; Belgae, Celtae 
 (names of tribes) ; Cotta, Galba (a man's name) ; so, also, Hadria. 
 
 (c) Irregular Case Endings.— Genitive singular in -al (archaic, 
 in poetry) ; genitive singular in -as (in the word fmnUias in com- 
 position, see section 9) ; genitive plural in uni, especially in words 
 of Greek origin and (in poetry) in patrcmymics and compounds of 
 -cola and -gena ; dalive and ablative plural in -abus (in dea and 
 filia, to distinguish them from the corresponding forms of deiis 
 and fUius).'^ 
 
 (d) Declension of Greek Nouns.— These in the singular have 
 the following endings, but those borrowed from the Greek are, 
 however, often replaced by the regular Latin end'ngs : 
 
 Nom. e, Gen. es, Dat. ao, Ace. en, Yoc. e, Abl. e, 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 as, 
 
 es. 
 
 (I ae, 
 ft ae. 
 
 H 
 
 ae, 
 ae. 
 
 an, II a, a, n a, 
 
 en, M e, a, a, n e, a. 
 
 In the plural, the regular Lacin endings are used throughout. 
 
 48. Nouns of the Second Declension. (See aiso sections 
 2 and 3.) 
 
 (a) The Stem ends in o, and except in quantity is like the dative 
 singular. Most of the nouns whose stems end in -ro droj,- o in 
 forming the nominati /e, inserting also e before the final r, if, as is 
 more often the case, r is not preceded by e. 
 
 (h) Gender. — Nouns ending in us, er, Ir or os are masculine, 
 those ending in um or on are neuter.'^ Exceptions : Feminine in 
 us, many names of towns, plants, gems or ships ; also, humus, 
 alvus, colus, carbasus, and vannus, and some Greek nouns ; neuter 
 in us, vvlgus, pelagus, virus. 
 
 1. Nouns ending in e, as, es are borrowed from the Greek. 
 
 2. Duo and umbo also have the feminine plural dative and ablative in -abus. 
 
 3. Nouns endinar in os. on. are borf^wrH frnm r.hc ni-^ov 
 
PAllT III.— ACCIDENCE. 
 
 253 
 
 (c) Irregular Case Endings. -Genitive singular of nouns in 
 -tus or -mm m -i, contracted for -Hi (without affectinR the accentV 
 
 Su'ral ?n ? ' '% (^^^^out affecting the accentf; genitiv^ 
 
 plural in -um (especially m words denoting coins, we ^hts and 
 measures, and m some other words, chiefly in poetryl ''For the 
 declension of deus, see section 9. ^ ^^ 
 
 ^h^f] I>^CLEN8iON OF Greek NouNs.-Tliese in the singular have 
 the following endings, but those borrowed from the Greek are 
 however, often replaced by the regular Latin endings : ' 
 
 Nom. OS, Gen. I, Dat. 6, Ace. on, Voce, Abl. o, 
 
 '^^' ^ o I, M 6, „ on, o „ OS, n 6, 
 
 eus,2 eI,eos, „ ei, „ ea, „ eu, „ eo, 
 
 II 
 
 on, 
 
 II o. 
 
 on. 
 
 on. 
 
 6. 
 
 In the plural, the regular Latin endings are used throughout. 
 49. Nouns of the Third Declension. (See also sections 4-6.) 
 
 (a) The Stem ends in either a consonant (the genitive plural 
 having -um) or the vowel -i (the genitive plural having -iZy 
 
 (6) GENDER.-Nouns ending in 6, or. 68, er, es. or in es 
 (increasing m the genitive), are masculine ; nouns ending in as or 
 so;.^nf ^""""^«^"f ^^.*h« genitive), is. y«, « (preceded by a con- 
 sonant) us or X. are fominme ; nouns ending in men, us. a, e, I. v 
 c, 1, t, ar, ar, ur or ur, are neuter. 
 
 Exc-SPTIONS.— The most important are as follows : 
 
 Masculine not Feminine : Many nouns in -is (not increasing in 
 the genitive), e.g. amms, elms, collis, ensis, finis, funis, hostis 
 
 Qmris, bamms, which increase in the genitive ; dux,grex, remex, 
 rex, conjunx, senex, ^uA most nouns in -ex, genitive -tcti • S 
 fons mom, pons, and most nouns in -ps (except daps, cm stirvs-) ' 
 ms (genitive, vodis) ; mtes; mils. ^ ^ ' ^ ' ^'^ ' 
 
 and%M"r'"^ ''*'"°"' °' ^'"" ""^"'"^ ■'' '' '•^**'"^^ ^''^^Pt in Proper names in -ius 
 
 2. Nouns in -eus are declined in Latin sometir'es aoporHino- f/^ *>.„ „ j 
 sometimes according to the third declension. EectionSd^^^^ *^' '"^"""^ ^'-^ 
 
 :?. Except in neuter nouns, and nouns whose stem pnrfs in ■> Ur,„iA // „ v xi_ 
 nonnnatiye is formed by adding' s to the stem jt^Cl consonants of' th^'J^' *-^ 
 combinat on with s often undergo euphonic changes! Sth^voSls often Hnhn/h 
 consonant and vowel strms) changed to e. Neuter nouns and rm, 11 Itf "!" ^'" ^°,^^ 
 have the no.xiinative like the stem (sometimS SifleThoweve^^by voS 
 by the loss of final letters). No rule can be given for the deSinatlon of thp ^t^,^ 
 tlen'?h™*'^^"y:?HPv.^°'?'«."'^""^^«^ndtheconfusion^^ 
 tween the copsouant and the t- declensions : in a ni.iHnMf,r ^^^^^^ u^4-.„5 
 be obtained by dropping .um from the genitive plurair"" ' Siovcrcr, u may 
 
2Fi 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Masculine, not Neuter : jUl/men : cfhisid, exstd, sdly s6l / Idr } 
 avgur, fur ; also names of animals, e.g., lepus, vultur. 
 
 Feminine, not Masculine : nouns in -do (except ordO and cardd), 
 -go, and abstract or collective nouns in -id; card; soror, uxor, 
 arbor; mviier, mater, linter ; seges, Ceres, merces, abies, quies. 
 
 Feminine, not Neuter: Venus, peeus (genitive, pecudis); also, 
 Urns, fraus. 
 
 Neuter, not Masculine : cor, aequor, marmor ; os (genitive, oi*is), 
 also OS (genitive, ossis) ; vEr, iter, uber, verher ; aes. 
 
 Neuter, not Feminine : ra.t (genitive, vdsis) ; nouns in -us (geni- 
 tive, -uris), e.g., jus, riis, tus, crus (except tellus). 
 
 (c) Irregular Case Endings. — No exceptional endings occur, 
 but in several cases a variation of ending is found. ^ The genitive 
 plural is found both in -um and in -luni. The latter occurs 
 chiefly in t-stems, i.e., the following cases :'^ nouns ending in -is or 
 -es, with dissyllabic nominative and genitive ; monosyllables end- 
 ing in -s or -x preceded by a consonant ; nouns ending ii^ -ns or 
 -rs; neuter nouns fending in -e, -al or -ar ; national names in -as or 
 -Is; also imher, linter, vis, nox, nix, fftr, Idr, mas, os (ossih), caro, 
 the plural nouns pendtes, optimdtes and/(.ie<*«. 
 
 The accusative plural in masculine or feminine nouns of t-storae 
 has -Is as well as -es. 
 
 The accusative singular has -im for -em in the following cases : 
 ms, sitis, and names of rivers in -is (also Arar) ; generally febris, 
 securis; rarely ndvis. 
 
 The ablative singular has -I for -e in the following cases : vls^ 
 sitis, securis, names of rivers in -is (also Arar), neuter nouns in -e, 
 -al, -ar (genitive, -dris); generally Ignis, ndvis, continens, pvppis, 
 avis; also, turris, imher, trldens, familiaris. For the declension 
 of vis, bos and Juppiter, see section 9. 
 
 (d) Declension of Greek Nouns. — These in the singular often 
 have the genitive in -os and the accusative in -a ; in the plural, the 
 nominative and vocative \n -es and the' accusative in -as.^ 
 
 The other chief irregularities are as follows : Nom. is. Ace. in ; 
 Nom. ys. Ace. yn; Nom. o, Gen. us, Dat., Ace, Voc, and Abl., 6; 
 Nom. es. Gen. is (i), Dat. i, Ace. em, ea (en), Voc. es, es (e), Abl. 
 6 ; Nom. eus. Gen. eos (el, i), Dat. ei, i (eo). Ace. ea (eum), Voc. 
 eu, Abl. (eo). 
 
 1. This variation is due chiefly to a confusion between the consonant and the i- 
 steins. The tendency is for nouns to take the endings of the consonant stems and 
 for adjectives to take those of the i- stems. 
 
 2. Exceptions are : juvenis, cams, vates, ambages, anu often mensis, volucris, apis, 
 ?; opit! ; pawens. 
 
 3. In Csesar the names of Gallic tribes have often es in the nominative and as in the 
 
 CiiSatiVc, the ucClcnsioii of Gfcctt nOulis bcl 
 
 a :^->: 
 
 :ig" 
 
PART III.— ACCIDENCE. 
 
 255 
 
 50. Nouns of the Fourth Declension. (See also section 7.) 
 
 (6) Gender.— Nouns ending in us are masculine those PnrUnt, 
 m u are neuter Exceptions: Feminine in '^ names of Pla2 
 and trees, also ckmMs, manm, iribus, Idm (plural onl^)! 
 
 (c) Irregular Case Endings. -Dative singular in -u contracted 
 
 Jenetiry ^^.t tf^r '^^o^t Y^^^^^^ -^ 
 
 section 9. The names of plants or t^eesteTongL^^^^^^^ 
 
 51. Nouns of the Fifth Declension. (See also section 8.) 
 (a) The Stem ends in e, and is like the ablative singular. 
 (6) Gender.— All nouns end in es and are regularlv feminini. 
 Exceptions: Masculine, dils,^ with its compouiSSl 
 
 Tn^fl ^ «^fi?'?''T ^^^^ ENDiNGS.-Genitive singular l or e for el 
 
 5^t « .ii-, '/^'-'''^°^•^^^^■^"^ "^^ "-''^'^ <i«^iined throughout 
 Jci^H effigies faces, glacis, series, species and spSs, have in the 
 
 K'.ingL^t^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^'-^^-^ ofherrds^fu? 
 
 52. General Rules for Gender. 
 
 arilS^;'' ""*'"' ""* °* ""'"• ™"^' ""™«*^ ™'J «"<*«'«, 
 anJSr^l^ir'f^ie*?!^*" "^"' *'"'^- ^'-«'' «-' 
 
 f Jnl?k'""' TT' »"<•/'"»'' wen of the classes (a) and (b) above 
 63. General Rules of Declension. 
 
 lar, which ia differSntlor Lfh kTcktC "' "' "" *^'"™ ""8"" 
 
 ^.■ViS'o'";S'"°"''""'"'"' '" "" ""^"'■■. chie«yi„the™«o.,*,„^sjfe 
 
256 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Synopsis of Case Endings, 
 
 SINGULAB. 
 
 1st Decl. 
 
 Nom. a 
 
 Gen. ae 
 
 Dot. ao 
 
 Ace. am 
 
 Voc. a 
 
 Abl. a 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Nom. ao 
 
 4fJi Decl. 6ih Decl. 
 
 18 
 
 i 
 
 em 
 
 IS 
 
 I 
 
 e (I) e (i) 
 
 a (ia) 
 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 cs 
 
 vis 
 
 lis 
 
 ei 
 
 ui 
 
 Q 
 
 ei 
 
 um 
 
 u 
 
 em 
 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 es 
 
 u 
 
 Q 
 
 e 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Voe. 
 Abl. 
 
 arum 
 is 
 as 
 ae 
 
 is 
 
 2^id Decl. 3rd Decl. 
 
 U8( — )um — 
 
 i i 
 
 5 6 
 
 um um 
 
 e( — ) um 
 
 5 6 
 
 T a 6s 
 
 Oram orum um (lum) um (ium) uum uum erum 
 
 Is is ibus ibus ibus ibus ebus 
 
 Os a es (is) a (ia) us ua es 
 
 i a Os a (ia) Qs ua es 
 
 ia is ibus ibus ibus ibus ebus 
 
 Qs ua Ss 
 
 The following general statements should be noticed : 
 
 Neuter nouns have the nominative, accusative and vocative, in 
 each number, alike, and in the plural these cases always end in a 
 (m). 
 
 All nouns of the third, fourth and fifth declensions have the 
 nominative, accusative, and vocative plural alike. 
 
 All nouns have the nominative and vocative plural alike, and 
 (except in nouns in -iw of the second declension) these cases are 
 always alike in the singular also. 
 
 In masculine or feminine nouns, the accusative singular always 
 ends in m, preceded by a short vowel ; the accusative plural in s, 
 preceded by a long vowel. 
 
 The dative and ablative plural are always alike. 
 
 The genitive plural always ends in jim. 
 
 54. Nouns Irregular In Declension or Peculiar in Usage. 
 
 (a) Defective Nouns. — The sing}dar only of the following is 
 ordinarily found : ^ Proper names of places or persons, single 
 natural objects, names of things weighed or measured (not 
 counted), collective nouns, names of jibstract qualities ; e.g., Roma, 
 Juppiter; telliis, humus; aurum, aes, equitdtu^, mlgus ; Zra, sie- 
 citds. 
 
 The plural only of the following is ordinarily found : Names of 
 
 ;pr 
 
 1. These are occasionally found in the plural also, wifh special meaninffs (see »eo« 
 tion 54. e). Some names of' cities (jcfur in the plural only, e.g., Ath»nae, Delphi. 
 
 

 PART III.— ACCIDENCE. 257 
 
 amhay,,, anqmtia^., arma, armlZntaLr^i following words : 
 
 ^^rf rr ^^^^^-■-' -^«' -^^^^«; s;^, .^^^i;;::' ^'^^--' 
 
 The following word, are rf./.c^.-., ,, ,,,,,,^ ^^^^^ . 
 -Pound m but one case- Mnn^ « *- • 
 
 Found in but two cases • For<! fn^-t^ . o^ ^^ 
 ^ Found in but thveo ol^J %{^o \ ;i-''-'^ 
 Ine; grates (nom. and hcc), vnllS' '''^""' ^^^rrnnem; lues, luem, 
 
 ^!^(^^:JSeZ^rfr:^^^^ (- section 9); 
 
 51, c). "^ ^^e mtii declension (see section 
 
 ™r"nrgil\tr:S&""i!?"™'; ^"^'^ ("om. and dat. 
 plural lacking) ; 4//'„o,n "nd'dl " " ^""f' "'"S- «ml all the 
 
 gender) : ^^^^ ^'^'^'^ ^^^^ same stem, but of varying 
 
 JPlur. Carhasa, arum, n. 
 Epidae, drum, p. 
 i^r^m, oriim, m., and (poetical)/r«-na, 
 
 ^oa*, o-nm,^N., also iocf, onm, m. 
 
 ^""f"' '>ntm, N., also loci, ovum, u. 
 
 (generally m transferred sense). 
 
 ^a^tri, orum, m., also rostra, oi-um, 
 
 , ' ' " Tartara, orum, n. 
 
 seoond declenrionfK Wr ^; ,X"' /r™' '''r""^ "^ "'« 
 «nd nom. and ace. plur.) « ch' ';'urth °'''™' ""* "'''• "'"S- 
 
 (See Sor/r' "' '"'"' """ ''^'""' ^-^ *" '"^^^ <l^'ensio„. 
 J^^^^«^ha«als<Kabl^-, of the fifth declension. 
 
 . 1. Under Heteroolit,«B a- "■- u~ TTT ■ — 
 
 nave ai.o a^orm of themi.'.i%Z-(g:^^^^^ «"* ^^^^^^n-'on which 
 
 Sing, Carbasus, i, p., 
 - Epnlum, l, N.,' 
 Frenum, I, n., 
 
 Jocns, I, M., 
 Locus, I, M., 
 
 Basfrum, I, n., 
 
 Tartarus, I, u., 
 
 It 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 
258 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Femur ^ gen. femoris, or feminis. 
 
 Jecur, gen. jecoris, jerinoi'is, or jocinoris. 
 
 Jftgerum, l, has, in the plural, generally jngera, um, of the third 
 declension. 
 
 Pecus, pecoris, n., or pecitdis, f., also, in the plural, ^ecua, of the 
 fourth declension. 
 
 Plebs, plebis, and plehes, plehis, or plehel. 
 
 Praesaepe, is, n., and praesaepes, is, f., al&o praenaepium, I. 
 
 Pubes, pubis, or puberis. 
 
 Reqtiies, reqiiietis, has also reqxiiem and reqtiie of the fifth, 
 declension. 
 
 Vas, vdsis, has, in the plural, vdsa, drum, of the second 
 declension. 
 
 Vesper, vesperis, or vesperl. 
 
 (d) Indeclinable Nouns. — (Most of these are used in the 
 nominative and accusative only). Fas, nefas, Instar, mane (in 
 poetry), necesse, nihil .. onus, secus. 
 
 (e) Nouns with a Special Mkaning in the Plural.— Many 
 nouns found ordint rily iii the singular only (section 54, a) are used 
 in a special sense in the plural. Names of persons are used to 
 denote the family or individuals of the same character, e.g., Luculll; 
 names of materials to denote objects made of them, e.g., aera, 
 bronze vessels ; names of single natural objects in a transferred 
 sense, e.g., soles, days; abstract nouns to denote various manifesta- 
 tions of the quality, e.g., Irae, bursts of passion; siccitates, droughts 
 (in difFerenc places).^ 
 
 The following also have a diflferent meaning in the singular and 
 plural: aedes, S. temple, Pl. house, palace; auxilium, S. aid, Pl. 
 auxiliaries; bonum, S. a blessing, advantage, Pl. property; cas- 
 trum, S. (rare, except as proper name), fort. Pi., camp ; career, S. 
 prison, Pl. barriers (of a race-course) ; comitium, S. voting-place, 
 Pl. election ; copia, S. abundance, Pl. troops, stores ; finis, S. 
 end, Pl. territory; fortuna, S. lot, fortune, Pl. possessions; 
 impedlmentum, S. hindrance, Pl. baggage ; littera, S. letter (of 
 alphabet), Pl. letter (despatch, document, literature); mos, S. 
 custom, Pl. character; rostrum, S. beak of ship, Pl. a speaker's 
 platform at Rome. 
 
 55. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions. (See 
 also section 10.) 
 
 Most adjectives of this declension are declined like bonus; of 
 those ending in -er, the majority are declined like aeger, the 
 
 1. Sometimes the singular of a concrete noun is used as a collective, i.e., as 
 equivalent to the plura', e..'/., miles, the mldierji. A?ain, the poets often use the 
 plural ioi' the diu^uiar as though to heighten the effect. 
 
 
PART III— ACCIDENCE. 259 
 
 diSlceo/r^er'""'"' " ^"'"^"^ '"'^ '*-. «-o«P» for the 
 
 sec!L'it°"™ '''"' ''^ S*"'"™ '" ■•- »'J "adve in -l, «ee 
 
 dolhitouTs." "'""''' ""' '=™'^«' *e genitive and vocative a, 
 
 tion UO*"""'""' "' "" ■"""' »«<"e»»«on. (See ako sec- 
 (a) These are commonly divided into adipr.fiNr«« ^e j. 
 
 SthiTtrrgerdrkrnr™^^^^^ 
 
 abSivt sin^^it' -£irt^r;'':Jitr^,-Yir» ■'•'" .r 
 
 .en^e M.T. ttsHiihtrlrsi^fint Cin^V"' 
 those with genitives in -eris, -oris, -urL ^' ' "" "''^*' 
 
 With neut. plur. in -a : vetus, uher. 
 
 56a. Defective and Indeclinable Adjectives. 
 
 Paxea and (generally) plerlgue are used in the plural only 
 sin?ut?m£S.e:^^^^^-"' ''"'''-^^ ''''^^^ ^^^ ^^^ nZinative 
 
 ^onhs and semmecw lack the nominative singular 
 the^^eL^f p ital "[ T 'j^^'^'''^^ ^ '^^ ^^ -d declension lack 
 
 Frugl and negmm are indeclinable, and so often jpo^w. 
 
 .._-^- '^'''^!' has wmen^Mw for wm«n<m«j. Kr«Hr.» *^^ *u_^ ,. „ .... 
 
 u;.cu us suDstanuve8 (section 8«, o> have the Md^ngs"eand wm. "^"^"""'""^^y aajectives 
 
260 
 
 PUIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 57. CoinpurlHon of Adjectives. (Soo also sections 12, 13, 
 5(5, 6.) 
 
 In addition to the instances of irregular comparison given in 
 section 13, the following iiregularities occur : 
 
 Compounds in -dicus, -ficm and -volus, and also prOvidus, change 
 -tw to -odior, -entiiisimu^. 
 
 egenus 
 
 frngl 
 
 nequam 
 
 dexter 
 
 pofis 
 
 senex 
 
 jiivenis 
 
 egentior 
 
 fr/l<j<llior 
 
 neqiiior 
 
 dexterior 
 
 potior 
 
 egi'nfi.Hiiimiis 
 frfnialinsimua 
 impiiaiiimHS 
 dcxtimiia 
 potiKsimiia 
 
 senior {major nOtfiY mdximus natfl^ 
 jflnior {minor ndtfiy minimus nCitfi^ 
 odor dcinsimua 
 
 deterior 
 
 detfrrimua 
 
 The comparative is lacking in: dlversus, feds, is, fldits (and its 
 compounds), inclntuSf invictns^ imntns, nomis, sacer, vet us. 
 
 The superlative is lacking in: ahicer, caeens, difUtirnns, ingens, 
 lomfinqiins, oplmns, prodtvis, prophupiiis, sixlfddris, sPg)iis; also in 
 most verbals in -His (except anulbUis, fertilis, mObiiis, nObiiis, iltilis). 
 
 Many adjectives are incapable of comparison, especially those 
 whose meaning does not admit of degrees ; also most adjectives in 
 -us preceded by a vowel (except those in -quns and -gnus), coiu- 
 l)ound adjectives, and nlbu^, daudus, ferns, lassus, mJrus. If in 
 these cases comparis(m is to be expressed, the adverbs iiuigis 
 {more) and maxiine {most) are used with the positive. 
 
 Many present and perfect participles, used as adjectives, are 
 compared. 
 
 58. Numerals. (See also sections 15, 16.) 
 
 (a) Unus in the plural is used in the sense of alone, or with 
 nouns plural in form but singular in meaning in the sense of one, 
 e.g., uni Siiebl, una castra. The singular also may mean alo7ic. 
 
 {h) In combining numerals up to 100, either the ten without et, 
 or the unit with et, precedes.'^ But the forms expressing subtrac- 
 tion, e.g., duodevlgintl, nnd^trlgintd, are more common than those 
 expressing union. In combining numerals above 100, the order 
 
 1. Natu (literally hy birth) is often oniiv.ed. 
 
 2. Compare English twenty-om, or one and twenty, but notice that the latter is 
 unut>«tii in oruiiiai^ jjiostj E.i/ii«^ while unus cl tiyinit is good pruse Latin. 
 
12, 13, 
 
 [iven in 
 
 change 
 
 (iiud its 
 
 , ingens, 
 
 also in 
 
 3, iltilis). 
 
 ly those 
 itives in 
 is), coni- 
 s. If in 
 9 mugls 
 
 ives, are 
 
 , or with 
 e of one, 
 ilone. 
 
 ithovit et, 
 
 subtrac- 
 
 lan those 
 
 ,he order 
 
 he latter is 
 n. 
 
 PART III.— ACCIDENCE. £61 
 
 (c) The distributive niuneralH are : 1. Hlnirull 2 M„f T * . ' 
 
 only, in U>^oo :^^:^i:^}:^,:^'*^'r}^ ""^J /n t>.. plural 
 poetry often C Z cariiL* ^ *" ""'"•"'"' 1»'™ "' "W.=ct«, (5) in 
 
 the .lion.in I Xt'lie'clrdhSZ^^^^ "u.uerator is „„„ le» than 
 
 and n,oasuU. ^^^rit^tTill^tnlllli^lJi- Sf ^ -'«»'» 
 .lafv. „r aco«..tive) a neuter noun, folii^ia l"'ih!fgeiit!ve """■ 
 
 ferSiueir%VLr^^'^"™^^^ 
 
 noun prece W he co uWn i ri"'"^M°'' """•"'• """'"«■■ ■"■'"''«^ " 
 lowinithe con^biLritrr ^.l^tte^'^SLl'^'" " """" '"'■ 
 59. Adverbs. (See also section 17) 
 
 
262 
 
 PRIMAIIY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Accusative Case — (Nouns) partim, diil, fUrtiviy (Pronouns) tum^ 
 tarn, (pinm, qnam, tunc^ nunc; (Adjectives) alida, non^ siiignUlHm. 
 
 Ablative Case— (Nouns) vuUjO; (Pronouns) qua,, hoc, qui; (Adjec- 
 tives) /rwsfm, intra, contra. 
 
 Locative Case— (Nouns) hodie, lierl ; (Pronouns) ibi, uhi, hlc, 
 hitic, inde, utl, iit, s'lc, olim, utrinuine. 
 
 Dative Case — (Pronouns) qm, hoe, eo, adeo ; (Adjectives) ultra. 
 
 Fossilized Phrases — qiulre, cur, qnamobrem, quotannls, pi'optereu, 
 anted, posted, extemplO, obviam, interdum, admodum. 
 
 Miscellaneous — Adverbs in -tus, e.g., antiquitus, intiis, penitiis, 
 funditus, dlvlnitHs ; qnidem, quondam, quandO, jam, etiam, dum, 
 ita. 
 
 60. Personal, Possessive and Reflexive Prouuuns. (See also 
 sections 18-21.) 
 
 (a) In the first and second persons, the personal pronouns serve 
 also as the reflexiv^ pronouns. 
 
 (6) In the partitive sense, the genitives nostrum and vestrurn 
 are used ; in the objective sense, the genitives met, tul, sul, 
 nostrl and vestrl ; in the possessive and subjective senses, the 
 adjectives meus, tuus, suus, noster and vester. 
 
 (c) For mihi, the contracted form ml also occurs. These pro- 
 nouns are emphasized by the addition of certain particles, 
 especially -mei (added to all forms of ego, til and snl,, except tu and 
 the genitive plural) and -pte (added to the ablative singular of the 
 possessives). Reduplicated forms of the accusative singular of the 
 personal and reflexive pronouns also occur, especially sese, which, 
 in usage, is interchangeable with se. 
 
 (d) With ego, til, sul, the preposition cum is always suffixed to 
 the ablative it governs, the accent being on the syllable preceding 
 -cum. ^ I 
 
 (e) The reflexive pronouns with inter are equivalent to the 
 reciprocal each other or one another (including often the English 
 preposition governing these words), e.g., inter se amant, inter nos 
 colloquimur. 
 
 61. Demonstrative Pronouns. (See also sections 22, 23.) 
 
 Hie is often emphasized by the addition of -ce to the cases 
 ending in -s (and sometimes in -m, which is then changed to -n).^ 
 
 1. The -c of hie, hunc, hoc, haec, is a remnant of this same suffix -ce. In the same 
 way ille and iste have (in colloquial use) more en>phatic forms, in the nominative, 
 accusative and ablative ending in -c, in the other cases (except the genitive plural) in 
 -ce. 
 
ART f.— \CCIDi5Ni;4;. 
 
 263 
 
 also 
 
 I litive singular of UJp and iste^ the iK)ets often use Ulius 
 not illlua and latiuit. 
 
 For tha fetniuine plural nomiuative hae, haeo also occurs. 
 
 For the i e singular of iiie, olH is found (from an archaic 
 oUhs). 
 
 In tf 
 and isti 
 
 Of th vltcmative foi lh g! -n f' e nominative, dative and 
 abl ^ive plura! of is and l(i' ' . n are the rarer. Those 
 
 in t. are often written I (and pi jabiy with greater correctness). 
 
 62. Relative. In^ rogutive and Indefinite Pronouns. (See 
 alst sections 2^-26. 
 
 (a) An ablative singular form qui occurs, chiefly with cum. It 
 is also used as an adverb meaning hoiv. Quia occurs for the dative 
 and ablative plural. 
 
 In the interrogative and indefinite pronouns, the distinction 
 between adjective and substan* > forms (sections 25 and 26) is 
 less carefully observed in the ma.» uline than in the neuter. 
 
 Quia indefinite has sometimes quae in feminine singular and 
 neuter plural. 
 
 The two parts of qulcumque are sometimes divided by another 
 word. 
 
 (6) With the relative and interrogative pronouns, the preposition 
 cum IS (except very rarely) suffixed to the ablative it governs, the 
 accent being on the syllable preceding -cum. Occasionally other 
 prepositions (especially contra) follow the relative, without, how- 
 ever, forming one word with it. 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 / 
 
 1/ 
 
 9 
 
 % 
 
 ^ 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 
 2.5 
 
 [ 22 
 
 1.8 
 
 il IIIIIM 
 
 ^ 
 
 «9 
 
 ^ 
 
 .'^^ 
 
 
 % 
 
 c*^ c>^' .^- 
 
 ? 
 
 
 p 
 
 </*.''F 
 
 ss^. 
 
 'W 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 

 
 
 ^^ 
 
 5> 
 
 i 
 
 ^ O 
 
 .^ 
 
f 
 
 264 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 00 
 
 ee 
 
 49 
 
 o 
 
 -(J 
 
 C7^ cr 3 
 
 lO 
 
 3 
 c3 
 
 t< 
 
 1^ 
 00 C 
 
 <5 -^ "Is 
 
 «8 2 
 
 ^ ^ -S 
 
 cS cS 3 
 
 3 fl "O leS 
 3 p 3 S- 
 
 3. 
 
 3 3 3^-32. 
 
 cri o o^ a* cr S* 
 3 es ;e ee cs 3 
 
 3 
 
 00 
 
 3 3 3 g. 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 •S ^ O ie3 S 
 fO d 3 3 2 
 
 3 3 o^ CT* « 
 
 00 
 
 10) 
 
 !3 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 c8 
 
 3 
 
 -(-1 
 
 3 
 
 cr* 
 
 3 
 
 C* 
 
 ON 
 
 03 
 
 O 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 H 
 N 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 CC 4J 
 
 ~ o 
 
 
 a> 
 
 3 
 
 o o 
 i3 leS 
 
 
 s 
 
 0) 
 
 2 
 
 (-1 
 
 •O ic8 
 
 -S lin ;£ fl lO irt 
 3 03 ^ -S 0) <D 
 
 3 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 ics ce o g 
 
 3 3 3-2 
 cr' o^ O^ 3 
 
 
 5 r«* 
 
 -M -i-i -iS 
 lO 
 
 •-:3 s a 
 
 O lO c3 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 o- CT' a* 
 
 3 a> 
 3 TS 
 
 ^cs.. a.. 
 
 O 
 
 Tl 
 and 
 priiK 
 
 Th 
 supii 
 
 Th 
 are f 
 irregi 
 prese 
 prese 
 priiic 
 
 3. 1 
 (in the 
 
PART III.— ACCIDENCE. 
 
 266 
 64. Verb Inflection. 
 
 to a axed system ' '^^ "' " '«'''' ""■« Conned according 
 
 Fh>» the Pr.«< ««» (i„ .,, „, „.^, ^^^^^_^^_ ^^ ^^ 
 
 tt pre^t i fT*°' ^''i"-'-. ^"ve and passive : 
 tne present and future imperative, active and passive ■ 
 the present mflnitive, active and passive ; '^ ' 
 the ^esant participle active, the gerundive and the 
 
 Prom the perfect indicative aetive (in -i) are formed • 
 
 the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive active • 
 the peifect infinitive active 
 F«>m the »«p>« (in „.) „, „;«, a „„^„^^ 
 
 "-dicative (m -w ««) are formed : "^^ ' 
 
 the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive passive • 
 
 he perfect and future infinitive passive; 
 the perfect participle passive ; 
 
 thefu^ture^participleand future infinitive active, and the 
 
 J"- Jfr tlTrer^r^St™:^ ^/ertTl^J "'"''«"«. ^ '' 
 principal parts. I i"wve, pertect and supme in the 
 
 sui!itltets""' "'' "'"'^'" '-P-tively, the present, perfect and 
 
 irregular verbs), the fonSn n( ",?"''"■' "Rations and also in 
 present stem differs with e^i !^„ ■ !■ P""^' '*''■"«<' from the 
 present infinitiveTct.Ve or denoS'^lfr' ''"' "?'"'" ■•'*'^™ «•' 
 P^lllfP^^PartsVin^^ '"'I-ied among the 
 
266 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 (b) The Personal Endings in Latin are as follows : 
 1. Indicative and Subjunctivo. Acti^'e. Passive. 
 
 
 [N.B.— TTie active endings m (or b) 
 
 or 
 
 J. 
 
 
 arc used in the perfect or a 
 
 rig {or re) |/oit. 
 
 
 compound tenses of the t 
 
 tnr 
 
 lie, shCf it. 
 
 
 passive.^ mus 
 
 mur 
 
 tve. 
 
 
 tis 
 
 mini 
 
 you. 
 
 
 nt 
 
 ntur 
 
 tliey. 
 
 2. 
 
 Perfect Indicative Active. 1, isti, it, 
 
 imus. 
 
 Istls, ernnt. 
 
 3. 
 
 Imperative. Active. 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 
 Prea. Sing. 2. (the present stem] 
 
 1 re 
 
 
 Plur. 2. te 
 
 
 mini 
 
 
 Fut. Sing. 2. to 
 
 
 tor 
 
 
 3. td 
 
 
 tor 
 
 
 Plur. 2. tdte 
 
 1 
 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 
 ' 3. nto 
 
 
 ntor 
 
 (c] 
 
 ' The various tenses and moods have the following formation : 
 
 1. 
 
 Indicative. — The present has no sign 
 
 , but 
 
 is the present 
 
 stem -^ the personal endings. The imperfy^ct has always ba, 
 preceded by a long vowel. The future has, in the first and second 
 ct)n j ugations, bi (6, '*") be), in the third and fourth conjugations, e 
 (a). The perfect active is made up of the perfect stem + the 
 personal endings of the perfect active. The pluperfect has always 
 eru. The future perfect has eri (er, eru). The perfect, pluperfect 
 and future perfect passive are composed of the perfect participle 
 passive with the present, imperfect and future indicative respec- 
 tively of the verb sum. 
 
 2. Subjunctive. — The present may be formed by changing o of 
 the present indicative i\i the first conjugation to e, in the second, 
 tliird and fourth to a, and adding the personal endings. The 
 imperfect has always re, and may be formed by adding the personal 
 endings to the present infinite active. The perfect active has 
 always eri. The pluperfect active has always isse. The perfect 
 and pluperfect passive are composed of the perfect participle passive 
 with the present and imperfect subjunctive respectively of the 
 verb sum. 
 
 3. Infinitive, — The present active is the present stem + re. 
 The perfect active is the perfect stem + isse. The future active 
 is the future participle with esse. The present passive is the 
 present stem + ri, except in the third co:>jugation, where it is 
 formed by changing e of the present stem to I, The perfect passive 
 
PART III.— ACCIDENCE. 
 
 267 
 
 the «up?nf wth^? w'/f^' passive with e^se. The future pas^ve is 
 cne supine with Iri (the present infinitive passive of co, I go). 
 
 rin^ihelonX''^"-"^?-^ ^'*'^^ '''^^'' ^« t^« present'stem + ns 
 item 1 conjugation en8). The fnture active is the supine 
 
 stem + uru8 1 The perfect passive is the supine stem + uh Th« 
 g^erund^ve is tne present stem + „d«s (in tL Wh ctn^Jgati^n: 
 
 fourth^c'oTuga'^o';!,^ '' *^^ ^'^-^^^"^ «^^- + »« (in the 
 
 65. Forinatlan of the Tense Stems. 
 ,wl!;' P"™^ Stem in the first, second and fourth coniusations i, 
 
 , (n^^.), «„^ («„■,). (Thi, i, praoticaSir'a'IVKt'uttSlt^a: 
 
 In the third conjugation a short vowel (e, l) is added to thp v^rh 
 stem, which may remain unchanged, e.g), reqe (TeaO) or tjlt 
 changed or extended in one of thi following ways •^^' "'^^ ^" 
 
 LengtMnmg the vowel, e.g., di^ce- (riSc^) ; 
 
 (mncltr' ''" *'''''^'''^ '^ ^"'"^ ("♦ '"> ^-g-' ^^^^«- (<^^«^), vince- 
 ^<^ing t, e.g., /jZecie- (plecto); 
 
 Beduphcation, e.g., sis^e- (sis^o). 
 
 The Perfect Stem is formed from verb stems • 
 
 T^TfcnfinT^''" ^^^'^^^ ^«^^'- i^^-^-Ca^^^'^d^t 
 K^rpsi). But if a single consonant be preceded by a short vowel 
 ZT " ^^"^*^^"^^^' -^ ^ - -^ -dSed, e.g., /g. (^O from ^^ 
 (a^O^"" "" ^"'^ '^'''' '^^'^y after liquids by adding «. e.g., «?r,- 
 frim^ Jn^^r^r ''^^^'''^''-9 '^^ -^rb stem, e.g., pej^a- (pep^U^), 
 
 2. Verbs in -io do not retain i before all endings. (See section 67.) 
 
2G8 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 The SuriNE Stem is formed by adding t to the verb stem, but if 
 this ends in d, t, I, or r, t is rcgukrly changed to 8$ e.g., anuit- 
 (anmtum), vent- {ventitm), pnls- (pnUvm). In the second conjuga- 
 tion those verbs which have ul in the perfect have 1, not e, 
 before t. 
 
 The following Euphonic Changes occur in adding s of the per- 
 fect and ^ or s of the supine to consonant verb stems : 
 
 c, g, qu with 8, become x ; 
 
 g, qu, before t, become c ; 
 
 b, before 8 or t, becomes p ; 
 
 t, d, before 8, are dropped, or become a. 
 
 66. Irregular Forms In the Conjugation of the Regular 
 Verb. 
 
 Perfects in -avl, -evi, and also movl and novi (from moved and 
 nosed) often, before a or r, drop v and contract the two vowels 
 thus brought together to a, e, 6 respectively. 
 
 Perfects in -ivi'may drop v in any of their forms, ^ but the 
 vowels thus brought together are contracted (to l) only before s. 
 
 For -erunt of the perfect indicative -ere is found, chiefly in 
 poetry. 
 
 For -ris of the second singular passive -re is found, but rarely in 
 the present indicative. 
 
 The gerund and gerundive of the third and fourth conjugations 
 have sonictimes, especially after i, -undl and -untlus for -endl 
 and endus. 
 
 The archaic -ler for -I of the present infinitive paseive is used by 
 the poets. 
 
 Sometimes in poetry is, iss, or sis, is dropped in forms from 
 perfects in -sJ or -xl . ^ 
 
 The imperative, second singular present active, of died, duco, 
 facto, fero, is die, due, fac, fer. These forms are retained in com- 
 pounds, except in those compounds of facio, which change to -Jicio. 
 
 An archaic future perfect indicative in -85 and perfect subjunc- 
 tive in -slm are found in poetry. {Faxo is for facso.) 
 
 In the compound tenses of the regular verb, esse is very often 
 omitted, especially in the future infinitive active ; so also est and 
 sunt, but chiefly in poetry. 
 
 I 
 
 1. Except In the compounds of eo, in peto and desino, perfects in -m do not drop o 
 except before s or r. 
 
I 
 
 PART III.— ACCIDENCE. 
 67. Verbs in -Id of the Third ConJa«atIon. 
 
 269 
 
 ..ffT!?T "^"""S *, ^f *"'''^ *' ^ "^ «»•• ^"^^ otherwise are formed preciselv 
 after the model of rego, replacing reg- by ca;,^■-, /oci., fngi^^^^^ 
 
 The verbs so conjugated are : oaplo. onplo. facio, fodlo fnirlo 
 
 68. Deponent Verbs, 
 
 A synopsis of the conjugation of deponent verbs (which mav bn 
 defined as verbs which n„ longer retain the active forms bTuse 
 the passive forms with an active meaning), is given in section 40. 
 
 fhll T^.vf^''''''';^'' ^^^''^ ^^ deponents necessarily differ from 
 those of the regular active verb. The nrPSPnf \r^A\tIl- ^ 
 
 infinitive are given in the passive fornls,'the^rerno w" Ua'ctrv^l 
 
 fom^rZ;? ' "'" ^''^^ "^"^ ^"'" (^"'^ compoundsf ; ^oTe", ZZ 
 
 Flo, fieri /actus sum (section 46) is practically a semi-denonpnt 
 and several verbs otherwise active are Lponent^in tL perfLt nai- 
 ticiple, e.g ceno, cerultus; prandeo, prans^^s; SlT(soZUl7) 
 jurahis; su^sco suetus; adnlesco, Jultus. Certain also of S 
 impersonal verbs have in the perfect both active and deponent 
 forms, e.g., placet h^splacuU and placitum est; so libetlnduZ 
 
 (c) The forms of the ordinary deponent are not all passive nor 
 
 is ^eS ^^^t:^^' -^^- -^- -^ ^^^ ^-S 
 
 pa Jr. T: t^err at vTry t^^l^L tS Tol^ ^ °^^ 
 deponent forms were in ImlZ^l IZ^te^^t^nZn:') 
 and mereoimereor); aho populo (pop^dor), fabrico (fabrieor)aZuro 
 (augura,-). In a larger number of verbs the perfect parSpleXne 
 IS passive m meaning, e.g., partior, dlmetiar, paci^co^rTS 
 
 69. The Periphrastic Conjugations. 
 
 AH compound forms of the verb might strictly be called nfiri 
 phrastic, but the term is usuaUy limited to two sets of forms :^ 
 
270 
 
 rniMAUY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 !i; 
 
 (a) Tho nHire puriphnwHc conjugation, vi^!., the nitnro par- 
 t.icii)lo Hctivo, \u -iipiiH, with tho vurions jmutm of tlio vorh nuin. 
 
 (h) Tho iHn^she pori^liraHtio conjugation, viz., tho gorumlivo, in 
 •mi UN, with tho various parts of tho vorh nuiii. 
 
 For tho UHOH of thoHo compound furniN, hoc, rospoctivoly, soctions 
 102, 0, and 104, a. * ^ . 
 
 70. Tho Verb HUM nnd Itn CompoundB, (SoG Jilao Hoctions 41 
 and 42.) 
 
 For tho imporfcct Hubjtinctivo, r.wm, etc., there occur also the 
 toruiH foroni, for^ii, forct and forcnt.' 
 
 Sum is con»|)oun»U>d with many of tho jiropositions, in trmst 
 ttisos with no irrogidarity : ,f/w,(,H (porf. aful) I am ahsoiit, <listaiit- 
 ad,vun, I am prosont; dr'Mum., I am wanting; Jmmn, I am in • 
 iHtvi-snm, I am hotwoon, ditfor, am prosont at {iufvirHt, imporsonal' 
 It concerns) ;()/).sMm, lam against; pnuwnn, I aiin)vor; jnoHum, l 
 am for, bonoht; mhmm, lam under, near, {nojH-rf.); supcrmm I 
 am over, survive. \ ^ ^ » 
 
 P«.«Hum is a compound of p'jfh, able, and sum, t of ViM boinir 
 changed to .s before anotlior s. 
 
 A present participle occurs in the comi)ounds abmnii and prae- 
 sum (ubHeiiH. pnicNeiiH). J'imiim has poteiis used adjoctively. 
 
 ProHuiu has prod, not pro, before all forms of sum bcnnniiic 
 with e. o tt 
 
 71. ((») The Verb Eo uiul Its Coiiii)ouiuls.2 (See also section 
 40.) 
 
 Some of the compounds of cd are transitive («'.r/., advd, circumcti 
 hu'o, trdiiKcn, pyaeti'vcd) and have passive forins, formed in tho 
 usual way from the active endings, <-.//., the present indicative of 
 f?rf«'f> is adcor, (idJris, odUiti; adlmiir, adhnini, adrnntin: Mo also 
 has patisivo forms in the third i)ersoii us*ed intransitively, e.g., Itur, 
 
 In the perfect tenses ll is couiinoner than M, and in the com- 
 pounds is the usual form. 
 
 (h) The Verb FBRo and lt« CoinpoundN. (See also section 44.) 
 
 The prepositions with which fero is compounded often undergo 
 clianges to harmonize their final sound with the letters/, t and* 
 of the throe stems of fero. ' 
 
 are mS.v founT^^"* subjunctive /./«i«. fva,>,fuat,fmnt, and »u-7«, sies, sM, sient, 
 2. Queo and nequco are conjugated like eo. 
 
 \k 
 
PART III. — ACCIDENCE. 
 
 271 
 
 ali-IAtam 
 Ml -latum 
 <'ol-lHtaiit 
 <II-latiim 
 e- latum 
 il-latum 
 ol>>lAtum 
 Hul>> latum.' 
 
 •b an-rer~>, an-forre abd-tnll 
 
 »d nf-feio, uf-rorre at-tull 
 
 con v6n-rc>rf> tM»ii.f«rr» oon-tnll 
 
 dl* <iir-ror6 (fir.ferrw tllH-tulI 
 
 •X ef-forii of-forro <«x-tull 
 
 In In-roro In.forre In-tull 
 
 Ol> of-forn of-forre oli-tull 
 
 nub Kuf-foro Nuf-ferro nuH-tnll 
 
 (c) The Verb Fid ami It.. (Jompoun.U. (Soo uIho socticn 40.) 
 
 rJJl.^r ""Tr'f"'^ .""'t'' ^•^''■'»''l «ton,H or with Hclv.rl.H, ..,,., 
 r^ieMl(pafvJaao)' mti.'iJiWl (mtufario) -, very mrcly with pre.,;, 
 
 with propoH.tu.nH .« formed regularly from tho active, c.j/., 4<cr- 
 
 72. Dof<>ctlvo and Impoi'Hoiial Verbs. 
 
 ni?.l.P7'.'''' ^ ^'T'"' j^r"'^ i" *^^'*^ I'^'^'f^^^' I'l"P«rfect an.l future 
 perfect tonHes only (The other tenses are supplied by incimo) 
 A passive forn,, r,.y,,.s ,nm. is used with the same force as .vC 
 wheji a passive infinitive follows. ' ' 
 
 (/>) MkminT I remember, and 6r)i, I hate, are used in the perfect 
 p uper ect and future perfect tenses only, 'with the mcanini of the 
 present imperfect an.l future, resi,ectively. Mvminl has the 
 imperative second singular mnnmio, i.lural mvmndote. Odl has a 
 perfect participle Onm, and a future participle o.^ra-ns. 
 . (c) Aid, I say, is scarcely found excei)t in the forms, present 
 indicative, mo, ms, ait, dinnt; imperfect indicative r7.V^/mm, etc 
 
 (d) Tnquam, I say is scarcely found except in the forms, first 
 person tw/mm, third person iW/»aY. i»i«, mm 
 
 (e) Fari, to speak, a dejionent of the first coniumition has in 
 nso the present ind cative /r./,.r, the future iiulicatve %/"[,: the 
 perfect and pluperfect indicative and subjunctive, the infi it'vo 
 fc the imperative /are the gerund /ar^ etc., the partiJhile« 
 fntva, /and us and (/dim) fantis. ^ ^ 
 
 aJ/K^^I^^""' ^ ^^^' '^ "''^*^ ^"^ ^^^ fi^»<^ person singular miaeso 
 and plural qnaesumus. ^ q< wi.su, 
 
 (if) Many verba having no definite subject, and hence called 
 Impersonal, are found in the third personal'singulai only Of 
 the se, some refer to the weather (e.g. , pluit, it rains), an/ some 
 
272 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 express the existence of certain feelings (e ;;., misc^tit, paenitet 
 piidet, piyet, taedtt). ' ' 
 
 Qi) The passive of many intransitive verbs is used in the third 
 singular im})eri«inaUij, the subject being contained in the verb 
 itself; e.g., puynatur, there is Jiyhting (joiruj on; nm dubitandum 
 est, there must not be hesitation. (II. 234, N.B.) 
 
 VO Many r)ther verbs are said tt) be used impersonally in the 
 third singular when a clause furnishes a subject, e.g., licet haec 
 facere, it is permissible to do this. So licet, oportet, necesse est, 
 accidit (and other verbs of happening), constat, prnestat, restat, 
 snperest, interest, refert, juvat, and phrases like eertum est. 
 
 N.B. —In all compound tenses of impersonal verbs and all 
 phrases used impersonally, a participle or adjective in the predi- 
 cate will be in the neuter singular, e.g., pngnatum est, nOn dubium 
 eat. 
 
 >( 73. Prepositions. (See more fully Rection 87.) 
 
 The following are always used with the Accusative : 
 
 Ad; adversns (adversnm) ; ante; apud ; circa; oirolter> 
 clrcum; ols, citra ; contra; ergra ; extra; Infra; inter; intr^; 
 Juxta; Ob; penes; per; pone; post; praeter; prope ; prop- 
 ter ; secundum ; trans ; ultra ; versus. 
 
 The following are always used with the Ablative : 
 
 A, ab (abs) ; absque ; c5ram ; cum ; de ; e, ex ; prae ; pro j 
 sine ; tonus. 
 
 The following are used with both the AccrsAirvE and Ablative: 
 In ; sub ; subter ; super. 
 
 74. Conjunctions. 
 
 I. Co- ORDINATE, connectmg sentences or phrases of equal gram- 
 matical value. 
 
 (a) Copidative particles : et, -que, atque (ac), and; etlam, 
 quoque, also ; neque (nee), nor, and not. 
 
 (6) Adversative particles : auteni, sed, verum, vero, bid ; at, 
 atqui, but yet; tamen. still; ceterum, as for the rest, but. 
 
 (c) Disjunctive particles ; aut, vel, -ve, slve, or. 
 
 (d) Illative particles : itaqne, Igritur, ergo, ideo, idolroo, 
 prolnde, therefore. 
 
 (e) Causal particles : nam, enlm, namque, etenim, /or. 
 
PAltT III.— ACCIDENCE. 
 
 273 
 
 n SraoH,™*™, i,.t,,Kluci„g .I„p„„.,o„t cl»„se». 
 
 (fO tonsecutire particleH • ut ^nfi^ «.. /; * 
 (c) Tnnjm-id pHi-ticlcs : oiui. ' ,,7,.-., • * 
 t^/^n; IH»«tq„a.n(,u,Htoa«,m.n\' 'Z .' /'*' ''"' "'»*' aniindo, 
 
 .^^;t;:;>s;t" ^"'"' "--•• ^— /<i«on,..n. ,„,„,,. 
 
 81, as if. * "' ''''"'' t"nq««,„. quasi, utsi, ac si, velut 
 
 '^J^r:t:,^st:: "- »"• "'™- -*«-.• —. 
 
 75. Derivative Sufflvos. 
 
 I- Sufflxes used in Noun formation 
 
 """itt'l."*'"'^' •'™'"'"« ">" "i/"". -efly from verb 
 "'"'' 2ma."" ^"""'^^ " ""'" "-• ™*''"'. chiefly from verb 
 
 ■"^^ts,TLlre\teratt,;t't;^^^^^^^^^ -- 
 
 "'"'propermm.wiG.Uk')'''' "™'' ""••" ^»''-'«!^'«». from 
 
 18 
 
 1. Cum is often, but len crrecU,, «ritte„ ,„«». 
 
i 
 
 274 PllIMAUY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 II. SufhxoH UHod in ArwECTiVE Fonnution. 
 
 -ail'j, -arln, -IIIh, -arluN, denoting bdotigiug or pertaining 
 to, from noun MtuiuH. 
 
 -ftniiH, -inuM, -Ah, -{^mhIr, -Icuii, (lon')ting Momflnrf or per- 
 tuitiintj to, from noun hUhuh, uHpuciHlly froni i)roi)or 
 nanioH of porMons, pliicos or countr't-H. 
 
 -OHUH, -(o)liMi>i, -(o)leiituH. -MuH. -Itus. denoting full of, 
 tuippiinl ivitli, from noun Htems. 
 
 -Ax, denoting indincd to; -iiih, -muh, donoHng m/xMe of; 
 -UlxMH, -biiiuiuN, -cuuduH, denoting cluimcterized by\ 
 from verb stems. ^ 
 
 III. SufHxes uHod in Verb Formation. 
 
 -u, -(■•. -I, forming (Ivnommntires of the first, second and 
 fourth eonjugiitions,-' denoting the doinq, hein,/ or mak- 
 tnij of Honiething, from noun or adjective stems. 
 
 •SCO, forming)imv7»^/ms or Inchoidiirs (n{ the tliird conjuga 
 tion) denoting tlie l,v,jinmnii of an action, from the 
 present stems oi verbs, and used only in the present 
 stem. 
 
 -to, -Itci, fonning frequcntntires, iteratives or intenmres (of 
 the hrst conjugation), denoting repcttted or vmormis 
 action, generally from the suiano stemn of verbs. 
 
 -urlo, forming desiderativcH (of the fourth conjugation) 
 denotnig a desire to do sometliing, from verb stems. 
 
 -1116, forming diminntues (of the first conjugation), dejiotinr/ 
 iifeehleov petty action. " 
 
 76. Composition of Words. 
 
 Compound Nouns consist of two parts, of which the first in 
 most cases, modifies the second. The second part is a noun or 
 from a noun stem not actually occurring in Latin, but connected 
 with some verb stem. The first part is usually the stem (some 
 times an inflected form) of a noun or adjective. 
 
 Compound Adjectives have the same formation as nouns. 
 
 fl,f rf ""^i?'''''''^ ^""^^ ^ "^^^^ "*^^ f^^ *he second part, and for 
 the first usually a preposition, rarely a substantive, adverb or verb 
 (the latter only with /acio). ' uv«iu or vero 
 
 2. Thoso ending in -eo are commonly intrans'ilve. 
 
PART III.— ACCIDENCE. £75 
 
 joi^iwinrn!r;;.;:.;j;;rrulLr'' '".^TT'^-^-n »mvo the 
 
 fonuH: ** ' ^"'* "**""*^'*^ ^"^ 'i««mu]utiou) the f..lIowiug 
 
 7«, HU.n, sup, «,„. «us, «r'' :^';/;7^^'. '''^>''^h; .S..I.. sucluf 
 ^A'ouyA; tiaiiH, trail, tra. * *^' '''''^' ^"l"''^"- tran«. acro^t, 
 
 "Hod only in CO. VoHillo , ^C^Z llorr"'''."""^, "^^^ J'^^-'^^^^ 
 propoHifcions : ' » ""^"^ ''"^" <lev^'lupod into aopurate 
 
 f »bi. around; nmb um nn •. . , 
 
 f'; ""-; in, i,„, 1, i", , ;„;">,«■"•/''"'* ■; •'"'• '"• '"f. <«■•■ in 
 
 te<A, „y„i„,. re, :.jd. ' ,». ,';«;4;t' /«:""'■'''■ '""■■ ''"'• I""*- '•• 
 
276 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 i: 
 
 I 
 
 III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 
 77. Apposition. 
 
 A word placed in apposition with another agrees with it ir 
 case, and as far as it can in gender and number. (II. 9, a, c.) 
 
 i. The appoHitive word may agree with the unexpressed subiect 
 or a verb, •' 
 
 ii. ^possessive pronoun takes an appositive in the genitive 
 case, (II. 184, o.) 
 
 iii, A common noun (e.g,, nrhs, oppidnm, Insula) in apposition 
 with the name of a place without a prepositicm, in the locative 
 (11. 1J5 a, 1), accusative of motion towards (II, 93, a), or ablative 
 of motion from (II, 123, h\ generally has the preposition ex- 
 pressed, always so J. it precedes, 
 
 IV. In place of a partitive genitive depending on a noun, the 
 nouns are sometimes placed in apposition {partitive, or distributive 
 apposition. 
 
 V. An appositive sbmetimes is used in a predicate or adverbial 
 sense (11. 144); for adjectives so used, see section 88, d. 
 
 VI. In apposition with a whole clause, a word is used in the 
 
 accusative (and, if an adjective or pronoun, in the neuter singular). 
 
 vii. A deHning genitive is rarely used in place of a noun in 
 apposition. (II, 116.) 
 
 yiii. The dative is common instead of a noun in apposition 
 With phrases like nomen est. (II. 103.) 
 
 78. Attributive Words. 
 
 An adjective (including numerals), pronoun or participle 
 agrees in gender, number and case with the word to which it 
 refers. If it refers to more than one word it regularly agrees 
 with the nearest. (II. 9, c, 1,) 
 
 7f . Tlie Predicate. 
 
 t» The verb agrees with its subject in number and person. 
 Where compound forms of the verb are used, the participle 
 follows the rules for predicate adjectives (b). 
 
 i. Collective nouns (chiefly those of multitude, not organized 
 uorfies) often take a plural verb, (11.11.) 
 
 ii. Where there is more than one subject, the verb may be 
 
 P " . ^'^^^^''^*! "^'^^ ^^^ ^^^^'^^^ ("• '^' ')' ^liere the subjects 
 are of difteron. persons, the first person takes precedence, then 
 
 second. (I 
 
 ) 
 
PAKT ni.-COMPENDItIM OF SVNTAX. 277 
 
 poetry, and .„„..,„,.». ^o/ctp^^'^'.^lr ;::^:. """"'''1 ^' 
 
 (*) A predicate adjective agrees with ti,« u- 
 in gender, number and case '"^J'"' ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 the sameTuntr 1: ^ ^eXeT^ Ti'^'rh ''t ^'f ^^^^ -" ^e of 
 agree in gender with tlie neare^f !nV • 1 ^^^''''^' '^ «i"gulHr, it will 
 gender if the subiectr-ir^nf !) •'^^^' ^^ Plural, it willaffrern 
 
 « ^'- — - a^' ^?« :- s: SliF 
 
 (9 A predicate noun agrees in n^.^ vu , ' 
 it is predicated. ^ ''^'^ ^^'^ ^^^ ^^O'-d of which 
 
 1. Predicate nouns are used x^Uh *- 
 jeemiiwy, becoming, ma/aW, M/»K *"f,7erb 57tm and verbs of 
 thep^dicateno.;;inat:^r^;a«li;:^> ^'mnnting, et^^ f^ 
 
 ": For the dati, a of puroosP l.f '^'' '"^'^ ^^^l^^' «ee II 70 
 section 82, c. P"^P°«^ replacing a predicate noun, see 
 
 80. Th« Nominative. 
 
 The nominative is used hq fi.« . u- 
 ("., indicative, subjunctive 1^^'"''^''='.°^ "'^ """« "-"o* 
 'he subject o the hltorL^ f r'""'"'> "^ '"'= ^^'b, as 
 apposition with a noti ^ " f :;r.h^""'°" '"'' ">' '" 
 ject of a finite verb (section 77^ ""expressed sub- 
 
 (section 79). ' °" "^' "^ ''^ " P'-^d'cate nominative 
 
 81. The Genitive. 
 
 Ihe genitive case is used fm- fK« 
 
 --"-as.husa„adj:c:-,tr7s^-lStt 
 
278 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOIC. 
 
 '* 
 
 limit certain adjectives and to fix the application of certain 
 verbs in a more essential way than the accusative (see section 
 83, below). The genitive may regularly be translated by the 
 English possessive case, by means of the preposition of, or by 
 means of the phrase as regards, or some equivalent preposi- 
 tion. The various uses are : 
 
 (a) Possessive, denoting the owner, the person to whom some- 
 tlnng belongs. Occasionally the noun which the genitive limits is 
 omitted (II. 119). 
 
 i. The possessive genitive may be in the predicate, chiefly with 
 sum, denoting the person whose property, business or custom the 
 subj ect IS. The subj ect is most frequently an infinitive or a clause. 
 
 (11. llo.) 
 
 n. This predicative genitive of possession is regularly used in 
 place of an adjective of the third declension in the predicate nomi- 
 native (or accusativef) with sum. 
 
 (b) Partitive, denoting the whole to which a specified part 
 belongs. (II. 113, 114.) 
 
 i. The partitive genitive often depends on neuter adjectives or 
 pronouns (in the nominative, or accusative without a preposition), 
 used substantively; e.g., iiihil, tantnm, quantum, plus, minus, satis, 
 quid quod, id hoc. The genitive may itself be a neuter adjective 
 ot the second (not the third) declension used substantively (II. 
 
 ii. The partitive genitive is regularly used with millia, some- 
 times with mille. unus, and other numerals (section 58, /", and II. 
 114, d). '' 
 
 iii. The partitive genitive is used with some adverbs of quantitv, 
 place, extent. *" 
 
 iv. The partitive genitiVe is sometimes used Avith nouns of 
 weight or measure. 
 
 ^ (c) Subjective, with nouns of a'^tion, feeling, existence, denot- 
 ing the person who acts, feels, exists. (II. 111.) 
 
 {d) Objective, with nouns of action or feeling, denoting that to 
 which the act or feeling is directed. (II. 112.) 
 
 i. The objective genitive is more frequently than any other to 
 be translated not by of, but by as regards, or some equivalent 
 expression. ^ 
 
 ii. The verb with which the noun of action or feeling is, in 
 sense, connected may be ouu which governs some otiier than 'the 
 accusative case. (II. 120, N.B.) 
 
PART III.—COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 270 
 
 (f) Characteristic,! denoting some omlifv «r. «i, .. • .• 
 chiedy essential. (II. 124 b 'i Th"t ? ? characteristic 
 adjective or its equivalent', (li. 115.) '' "'"'^ ^' ^^""^« modifying 
 
 the b^pSos^VStr^ltS '"'v^^ 'f^r-^^^' ^--^^^ 
 a pronoun or w^th ^^r .^W, , J; ^/'"'^^'''"^ "^ characteristic with 
 li T>,« „i V"^. "i'^^ st?mus, dissimihs, aeqims, as modifier 
 
 (IIlS) "'"'"' ^' characteristic may be'used as a predicate. 
 
 (/) With Special Adjectives and Verbs ih^ r,.«-f- 
 regularly an extension of the otj.o^.-.e^enitive ' ^""^^''^^ '^ 
 
 r7lrl^mp?< ?' ^"'^'''''^ '"'*"''' "• 67), the verbs interett and 
 :S(iL-6b? Ft^r" nTtt If 't (including .^r ^LI 
 etc., see (g) below ^ ^ '''^^' '^^""^^ ^^ e.<^ma^^,*J/, 6„,pn^, 
 
 iv In poetry the genitive, as in Greek, may denote separation. 
 teit '^> ^^^«ti"g «^e value, but only in general, not definite, 
 
 w4l^tt?.t^l'' '^'"^'^^^ ^'^ ^--^--^ "-J -ith nouns of 
 ;)rSl-^^'' ^''"^^^" '' '''''^ ''''^' ^«"^'^^' ^^«^^•'^ '^nstar, po^trldie and 
 
 82. The Dative. 
 
 The dative case is used to express the indirect or remote 
 connection of a person or thing with the action or feeling 
 'J^P!^!!^^hy^yer^^ From a fusion with the loca 
 
 of chaSlterisUc'; SSn Si ^/'"'^^'^^^^^"^^^^^^^^ 
 
 as an "^S^^e^lHye'^'^^^^^/T^ ''■'' ^'""'^f' "^ ''^"'"tion, with ,ratia 
 probably "U partitive ' *'"'^ ^' possessive, and with pridie and posMdie 
 
280 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 f 
 
 tive, it also serves to indicate a purpose or (in poetry) a place 
 attained, l^he dative may generally be translated by means of 
 the prepositions /o or for. The various uses arc : 
 
 00 iNWKEOT OijjECT, denoting the person (or thing) indirectly 
 affected by the action of the verb. The verb nuty be eitheJ 
 
 • h ^i" .^'^^ •'?"''*'^ ^^^"^ '^"^'''''' "^ iiulirect object is extended to 
 ind-ude the idea of motion towards (IT. (51), n/id is also iS vvith 
 veins ot nearness, iniion, scpamtmn and contention. 
 
 {h) Interest, denoting the persons (or things) concerned "in 
 (.., benefited or injured by) some act or condition of things (II 
 lUl, 102). This is really one variety of the indirect object. 
 
 r.';i^'fi '^^'"'''^ ''^ f"('"''' «'""■"' ^'^^ ^^'^*i^'« «f interest is to be 
 rendered by means of the preposition //v)m. (II. 09.) 
 
 - ntt-liir^'lM ""' ^!f 'T'^' clenoting the purpose served or the end 
 attamed It is ugi larly in the predicate with such verbs as sum, 
 fio, nutto muo, renupio, df,, haheo, and is a semi-abstract noun 
 
 oiz-pr;;; sS-,. <"■ ''■> '''-- '» "»-"^ »-"- <>= 
 
 1. This IS the regular way of expressing the agent with the 
 gerundu'e, unless there would be danger of Ttmbiguity. (Tl 105 ) 
 
 no f\nf ''"^ ''\*^""^" expresses (inferentially) the agent with 
 
 peect, passives, and in poetry almost any part of the passive. 
 111. yideor, I seem, regularly has the dative of agent. 
 
 (e) With Spe( xl Verbs or Adjectives. This is reallv one 
 variety of the dative of the indu cct object or of interest (ft. 55- 
 
 ill. Intransitive verbs taking a dative cannot be used in the 
 V. M.jst at jectives denoting lil„„-M, Jitney, ueamtss. frmidli. 
 
PART III—COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 
 
 really 
 
 to.ex,,r„«stheiK;i„t,,rvtT'' '^ "^-T conunon with participles, 
 
 (i/) Possessor, deiiohnty fj,« 
 ""' "" ">« !'««» "f tt pot^:? 7i7 ™ ^he fact of p^^,^^ 
 83. The Accusative. 
 
 'He action or a vl i3 L^r ^^e" Se'° "^^'^ 
 oAlX?^.°J^-^-'-tin, the exter.., object of the action 
 -es Jeter """■"'- °' J^-P-"-™ «ove™ the accusative case ; 
 
 with veibs of .r«/m^, ^A^n^tm^, etc. (II 910 ''''""'' '*'"""''" "'^ " 
 
 (f) Duration op Time an,7 ttx^^ 
 ""^A"-/.... (11. 92 )"" '^'^ ^"^™ » Spacb, stating Ao,. fo,^ 
 
 the adjective. fo„,„,, X^'d^JP^-"'' - ".ed with verbs and with 
 (d) Cognate Acctt<?attvp 
 
^82 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 n:i 
 
 i. This adverbifil construction is commonly limited to certain 
 ueuter proiumiiif or idjcctivcs iuid a few pJuasea. (II. 97.) 
 
 ii. In poetry it in extended to denote the pnrt utTected; this is 
 sometimes culled the Greek accusative. 
 
 (/) With Sfe<jial Words, in all cases mere varieties of the 
 uses already given. 
 
 i. For the d()u))le accusative with verbs of asJdng, teaching, and 
 concenlhuj, see II. 71; with verbs of mahhuu choosituj, callimj, 
 etc., see II. 70; with comi)ounds of trans, see II. 72. 
 
 ii. The verbs induor, exuor and citujor, being really reflexives, 
 take an accusative ; so other verbs are used in j)oetry. 
 
 iii. Certain adverl)s (jmtpivs, proxime, ^)ridt(^, 2x>strldie) and 
 certain adjectives (pmpior, jmhrimus) are found taking the accusa- 
 tive on the analogy of prepositions. 
 
 (</) Limit of Motion, with names of towns and islands. (II. 
 93, a.) In poetry the preposition is omitted more freely. 
 
 (/i) Exclamations, with or without an interjection, are often in 
 the accusative. (II. 98.) 
 
 84. The Vocative. 
 
 The vocative case denotes the person directly addressed. 
 It is often preceded by to heighten the effect of an appeal. 
 
 85. The Ablative. 
 
 The ablative case is an adverbial case, and is used to deter- 
 mine more accurately the circumstances attending upon some 
 action expressed by the predicate. It is in most cases to be 
 rendered by means of some English preposition, especially 
 with, by, from, in. « * 
 
 The Latin ablative represents three main ideas : the true 
 ablative, =from (see /, /*, /, m, jiages 284, 285) ; the instrumental 
 (or comitative), =with (see a, c, d, e, q, i, pages 282, 28.'J, 284) ; 
 the locative, =m or at (see />, k, o, pages 283, 284, 285). These 
 shade into one another so closely that it is uncertain to which of 
 the three we ought to assign some of the various uses of the 
 ablative, but in most cases there is general agreement. Thf 
 various uses are : 
 
 (a) Means or Instrument, telling that by means of which some- 
 thing is effected. (II. 124, a.) 
 
 i. Occasionally persons arc regarded as tlie means by which, 
 rather than the agents by or through whom, something is done. 
 
to cert.ain 
 :(l ; this is 
 
 ies of the 
 
 "Mng, n,nd 
 /, eaUinij, 
 
 reflexives, 
 
 vrfw") and 
 le accusa- 
 
 nds. (II. 
 
 often in 
 
 ddressed. 
 appeal. 
 
 to deter- 
 ion some 
 es to be 
 especially 
 
 the true 
 :runiental 
 :8.'J, 284) ; 
 ). These 
 which of 
 3S of the 
 nt. The 
 
 ich some- 
 
 y which, 
 done. 
 
 
 
 PART III.— -COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 28^ 
 
 »i^«".- fo) und with veri«„f o;,j(i:;trit:;';wzr*'' """ 
 
 whiiI:rethh,«Sif ''(^ri^f - » -«>'" <- "- ecrse of) 
 tm'nsS .;i;:'.'™-'' ""-' ""''"^ °f *h° time within which is 
 
 ch[:Jly''«rr"S;t',':f(;c?Z" ""rl;'^ "- characteristic, 
 
 The Sre*? :h;isir:i.ir ^'f f™'> ?- "^"- ■">>»*!.'. 
 
 with esse. ""^ "^'^y '^^^^ '^e u^ed in the predicate 
 
 tJsszi^^s. Tif 'f24^.'r""' "^'"'"' " ""''-™' - 
 
 (II": m, (!,tpi,m,'f, like"'™ "'"" rl"''"'^ (■•■) "'° "Wative supine 
 
 manl!!?t,!™cht.fhrr..™''r' «'««»«-A.cJ, telling the 
 done, (II. I2li ) ""'' '" accrdance with which, soniethTng is 
 
 with't™' T:"S'tJ:S:'tfr^''^'' .^ "« "f"-^«™ 
 especially th,«e telling the tJ ,,m.^ , "i^l f"','" ""'"^'■'y l*™scs, 
 
 ^W«al™y.san.ear4=gt"XS»!:t '^ ■-"- 
 
 1- The ablative witii fvtinm' Bur>i„M * i " ^ " ' 
 
 , 2. The ablative in s„d, phra.os a, ^^ !, "'"*' "" »» separative. ^ 
 
 be taken a. iooative, the ..ffirwISr' We'eVS'eSs^fiir, ""» "">'"• »''^ «>"> 
 
 -^^i^^^M^Z'mV'Zr'"''' '■■ «W". but »„,e ..esaM it a, the 
 =. The ablative with .,;,„„. i„ b, »„e, explained a. .he ablative „, price. 
 
 m 
 
284 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 u. Manner is often denoted by the ablative with cum, alwavH ho 
 when there ih no modifying word. An apparent exception is in 
 the case of some nouns whose abktive cases have come to be used 
 virtually as adverbs, e.g., mudo, vl, pedibus. 
 
 (lFl23°c V^^^°^' *^^^^"^ ^^^^ "^^^^ ^^^^^ something is compared. 
 
 i. It is commonly restricted to cases where the word it is com- 
 pared with is in the nominative or accusative. It is rarer in prose 
 after adverbs than after adjectives. 
 
 ii For the adverbial use of plus, minus, amplius and longius, 
 with numerals, see II. 123, c, 2. 
 
 iii. A special idiom is the ablative of abstract words, such as 
 opinio and spes, in the ablative of comparison after adverbs, where 
 J^nghsh would use a verbal clause. 
 
 (g) Measure OF Difference, telling the extent to which two 
 things compared differ. (II. 124, d.) 
 
 i. The ablativ^ of the measure of difference is used (a) with 
 comparatives or with words implying comparison, e.g., post and 
 ante (b) with words implying distance, e.g., absum, distO (where 
 also the accusative may be used). • 
 
 ii. To this usage belong quo . . eo (or quanta . . tanto), 
 with comparatives; quo and qrwomm us with the final subiuactive 
 and eo or hoc with a compara*^^ive anticipating a quod clause, i 
 
 (h) Separation, telling the place u^ience (literally or meta- 
 phorically) something is removed or excluded. (II. 123, a.) 
 
 _ i. Separation is most frequently expressed by the ablative with 
 a{ab), exorde The use of the ablative without a preposition is 
 chiefly with (rt) names of cities and islands, domus and rhs, (b) with 
 verbs of relieving, depriving, wanting and removing, (c) adiectives 
 oi freedom and want. •' 
 
 ii. But with classes 6 and c the preposition is frequently found, 
 regularly so with the names of persons. Many verbs admit either 
 construction. 
 
 124 ^ ^^^^^' ^^^^^^ ^'le definite price or value of something. (II. 
 
 i. ^niis ablative is sometimes used to state the penalty 
 11. The ablative with mfito states either that given or that taken 
 m exchange. For the genitive of price, see section 81, g. 
 
 ai^nh^T) ^*^*^"^ ^^^ ^^**^^ '^^^^^ something is or happens. 
 
 ti^^ f^sT„i'^'7h^rl''^"iP'Jli"f^ -hen .here is no compara- 
 
 ariseh from the use withTompsi^E^iives. ^-^.^vcux uiuse, ;;nougn itiuaylmve 
 
, always ho 
 sption is in 
 to 1be u«ed 
 
 compared. 
 
 it is com- 
 er in prose 
 
 id longitis, 
 
 Is, such as 
 rbs, where 
 
 tvhich two 
 
 I (a) with 
 , post and 
 do (where 
 
 . tanto), 
 bju active, 
 se.^ 
 
 or meta- 
 a.) 
 
 ative with 
 )osition is 
 s, (b) with 
 adjectives 
 
 bly found, 
 iiit either 
 
 ing. (II. 
 
 hat taken 
 happens. 
 
 10 compara- 
 it Uiay have 
 
 PART III.-COMPENDIUM OP SYNTAX. 286 
 
 ablative SXin^^Vep^^^^^ expressed by the 
 
 possess a locative (section 86) The Ih^""' '^•' ""^ ^"^^s which 
 used m poetiy. ^^- ^^® abUitive alone is more freely 
 
 ^^W^SOUKOB. teUing that fr„„ which something i. aorived. (U. 
 *,.,or a («J) k used. ® ' "• ^" o*'"- «»»<»' the proposition™* 
 
 of'UK''irh';;t'Ltdrbt ta"""™ "^r*-^ ">» ™'e™i 
 
 "•only joined with L ' ""* '" P""'^ «», ablative is com- 
 
 r^iSl Strus?So„tlCf »(fn23 ''1 «>- -' P--ds, or 
 The ^o'v'inf t'-™ L^ ^ellVvtxo''"'' ;V "-»«"« -otion 
 
 ro^^S, «nd^erLp;?hr4tSL":(tte'"'-'*' ^'■"'^' ■''«»»*• 
 
 (n) With Special Verrs avt. a 
 other classes already given '(11 m'mT' ''""^ '"''""^'"S '° 
 
 veJbs'S'Xtvsre':), t7:;sti jr-^^^ ">• ^'^ c- »> 
 
 n. With /rl,„, cmOentm ZfliT )' "'^T' •'^'<'<' ("«» *)• 
 (-<.XadjeotiveUf/:j:f:e^itti-§;^te^^ 
 
 ataVcesoLtrtr tlTSS S"T '"^ ''«»°''™' -o„„. 
 
 i. inis consists reeularlv nf <-, 
 quasi-predicate. The former is « n!? P^""^^' ^ 'i^'^isuhject and a 
 clause), the latter most ZqueX a w^T ""^ ^^^^ a 
 
 quently a present participle?or fnonrf n '^* Pf.^^^^P^^, less fre- 
 tively (without the verb of preJicafion h! '"'^•'""^'^^ "««^ P'^dica- 
 ,.11. The ablative absolute rU,?«o^'"^^^P^^«sed).2 
 
 kinds of subordinate clause^^"^^^^^^ '^^^ idea as many 
 
 -gim 6«-„^. ^^-^ "^- .«- na. no present participle equivaJentTthe 
 
286 
 
 PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I 
 
 [■I 
 
 iii. For tho rostrictionH to the uso of the ablative absolute, see 
 
 n. 62, c. ,., ,w 
 
 iv. Many phraseH which a[i|M;ar like ablativos of accompanying 
 circuniHtancoH are bettor oxi)Iainod m ablatives absolute, e.g., 
 
 lUnl vcntfi. , . . ,. , , 1 J u 
 
 V. With a ncgativo the ablative is often to be rendered by 
 
 ^mtiiout. (II. 49, /.) 
 
 86. Tho Locatlvo. 
 
 The locative was at one time a separate case, denoting the 
 place where, from which was developed the idea of the tiyne 
 when. Its forms became merged into other cases,' being in the 
 singular of the first and second declensions the same as the 
 genitive, elsewhere the same as the ablative.^ 
 
 i. The few surviving forms to be classed as locatives include, 
 dnml, hnml, m'ditlue, belli, run, and forms like Carthfujinl, RO- 
 mae, (hrinthh 'Many adverbs are strictly locative in origin. 
 
 ii. The locative animl is usod with verbs of feeliiu). 
 
 iii. For the ablative denoting the place where, see section 85, k. 
 
 87. Tho Propositions. 
 
 The following are the commonest uses of tho prepositions : 
 
 A, AB, ABS (a before consonants, ah before vowels or consonants, 
 cibs rarely found before q and t) ; from ; at a distance of; at, 
 on, 171, with words denoting the point of view ; hy of the 
 personal agent. 
 
 Absque ; without. 
 
 Ad ; to, towards ; up to, of time and numbers ; with a view to, 
 
 for, for the purpose of; near; according to. 
 Adversus (adversvm) ; towards^ against. 
 Ante ; before, tn front of (generally of time rather than place, 
 
 rarely of preference). 
 Apud; at, near; among, with; (more often of persons than 
 
 places). 
 Circa ; circum ; circiter ; circa, around, round about, about, 
 
 nrith regard to; circum, around, round about, of place only ; 
 
 circiter, about, rare as a preposition in phrases of time. 
 Cis, ciTRA ; on this side of. 
 Contra ; against, in opposition to ; over against, opposite. 
 
 1. There are some reasons for regarding the dative rather than the ablative or 
 genitive as the form which finally replaced the locative. 
 
 Vx 
 
lute, see 
 
 ipanying 
 te, o.g., 
 
 lerod by 
 
 ting the 
 he titne 
 ig in the 
 e as the 
 
 include, 
 'jinJ, RO- 
 in. 
 
 ion 85, k. 
 
 ns : 
 
 [isonants, 
 ce of; at, 
 by of the 
 
 I view to, 
 
 an place, 
 
 ons than 
 
 d, about, 
 ace only ; 
 time. 
 
 )e. 
 
 ! ablative or 
 
 PART III.— C.'dl'fiNDlUM OF SYNTAX. 287 
 
 Coram ; in the presence of. 
 CuM^^u^^/, alony vnth, of accompaniment, union or simulUneoun 
 
 ^'^'i^Sutr^''"' ^'/.^^-"--i-rof material; a6o..^ 
 ^ '^sLl^^'Zf'f^f''' consonants, .. before vowels or con- 
 
 conseqne>u^e offafter. ' *" accordance vnth, in 
 
 Eroa ; tmmrda (of direction or attitude) 
 Extra ; without, beyond, except (of pbce or transferred). 
 
 ' r.S lu f ^'^"^'^tive, into, to ; iujaimt ; tvith a view to fnr 
 with the ablative, in, on ; amojj ; in the Ze If; in Ziojf 
 Infra ; below (rare, of place and transferred) ^' 
 
 Inter ; between ; nnthin ; among (local or reciprocal) 
 Intra ; vnthin (of pbce, more rarely of time and transferred). 
 J UXTA ; near (very rare as prepositi(m). 
 Ob ; before (of place, and rare) ; on account of 
 
 poUT).^''' ^'^''' '^ ^"^ the possession not the gaining of 
 
 Per ; thromth ; by means of, by. 
 
 Pone j behind. 
 
 Post ; «/i?er, Wnrf (generally of time rather than place) 
 
 L' ::^ t^: ''' --^«-- -^'^ >• ^— o/ (chiefly 
 Praeter ; beyond, besides. 
 
 Prope ; near (of place, very rarely of time) 
 Propter ; near (rare) ; on account of. 
 Secundum; along; after; next to; according *o. 
 feiNE ; without. 
 
 ^''^' rifh f^ ^JrT*^^^^' «^^«^; ^ot^arc's; close to, 
 witn the ablative, under; near. 
 
 SuBTER, with the accusative or ablative, beneath, under. 
 ►Super, with the accusative, above; over; beyond. 
 
 with the ablative, upon; except : about, 
 Tenus; as far as. 
 Trans ; across ; beyond. 
 Ultra ; on the other side of; beyond. 
 
 V TPijaTTo 
 
r 
 
 If 
 
 288 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 li. 
 
 
 88. The Adjective. 
 
 (a) The adjoc^ivo in often used as a subfltantivo, in the masculine 
 and feminine referrini? to porHonw, and in the neuter to things. 
 The neuter ph -al in often used where the English would ufao the 
 singular, e.g., mnlta, much, 
 
 i. The neuter is used .is a substantive chiefly in the nominative 
 and accusative eases ; in the other cases ren is conunonly found. 
 
 ii. Adjectives of the third declension are not useif as neuter 
 substantives in the pivrtitive genitive. (ISee section 81, 6, i.) 
 
 (h) The superlative degree does not necessarily imply com[)arison 
 with others, l)ut mav indicate a high degree of the (juality referred 
 to (t<) be translated by very or exceedinylijj or often by the English 
 positive). The superlative with qunm or with </iu>m pottd (potnit, 
 etc.), is used to mean as (many, lanje., etc.), as jxmihle. 
 
 The comparative degree has often the standard of comparison 
 omitted, where the context will suggest it. The omission is com- 
 monly of the ideas, than is natural, than is jtrnper, than that just 
 mentioned or implied. The first two of these may be represented 
 by unusually or too with the positive degree. 
 
 (c) In many phrases an adjective denoting the part or order, is 
 used in agreement with a noun, but in a partitive sense. (See 
 II. 114, 6.) 
 
 (d) In many phrases the adjective is used in Luxtin where an 
 adver\) or adverbial clause wo ild be found in English. Such cases 
 are primus, prior, medvus, fdtimus, invltns, imprfidms, totus, etc. 
 In all these cases the condition of what is expressed by the noun, 
 not the manner of the action expressed by the verb, is looked to. 
 
 (e) For the .igreement, etc., of adjectives used attributively or 
 predicatively, see sections 78 and 7S. 
 
 80. The Personal Pronouns. 
 
 i. The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative, except 
 for special emphasis, the personal ending of the verb being a 
 sufficient indication. (II. 17(3.) 
 
 ii. Is, which is strictly a demonstrative, serves as the third 
 personal pronoun, but where emphasis is desired, ille is preferred. 
 Often the relative pronoun qui replaces is. 
 
 iii. For the difference between nostrum and nostrl, vestriim and 
 vestrt, see section 60, b. 
 
 iv. Tu and vos both meai> yon, the former when addressing one 
 person, the latter more toa'' ri\ . Tfi also corresponds to the 
 English thou. 
 
 V. In the first person the !;>\a-ai nos is often used for ego, chiefly 
 in dignified language. 
 
PART III.— COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 289 
 
 00. The I»o««o»i«ive Pronounn. 
 
 with whi.h'T '" ^'•'"''"' "'""'^" ••'"'' ''"'' ^'* ">« "»"" 
 » h wh,cl they are grainmalically connected, not with the 
 
 word denoting the possessor. 
 
 they , .„ ':;,r,:;, ^^r^'i:t'z:T:,:i!'^'i Th"" 
 
 wh:..:' r';: At;) '•■' "■- ™ ™-"" (- «>^;™ ".» >. -kr 
 i»o«Itt,;"8nrti """'"""" "■■" f'™ ""'^^ ™'.„ta , ;:/, (o„m. 
 
 gon:iiv^:™!;;"rr77™i!''''''''"'' """ " "''"'" "p"™"™ '-■ «■« 
 
 VI. .4ii«,»« „e/VM as a l).,»»e„»iv„ of alius. mmiye. 
 
 01. The lloflcxivo Prononiia, 
 
 These refer back to the subject of the verb and are trans- 
 lated either by the English personal pronouns or by the 
 compounds ,„ *//; .,rf„,,. They n,u.t be carefully dis- 
 t.ngu,shed („) rom the use of .«// -sehes, purely for em- 
 Phas,s' sake, and (6) from the personal pronouns referring To 
 others than the subject of the sentence 
 ^.. Jor the reflexives „f the first ,.„.l «„cond pemons, see section 
 
 f ;"mvl : " """' '"■' *" "''"'""'' "< « "'V bo stated generally as 
 
 suhjeo, eadPere-l^reiSe^brrS"' " '^'""•«<' <" 
 / ^''wir'i™' sentence tlie n,:e is twofold: 
 (n; vyitli tho accusative and infinitive conatnirfin., fK„ 
 
 plementary infinitive 8uhst,mfiv..r , construction, the com- 
 
 19 
 
290 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 m 
 
 clause 
 
 [b) In other cases {e.g., in ordinary relative or quod clauses, or 
 clauses of result) se refera to the subject of Lhe verb in its own 
 
 iii. And generally it may be said that in clauses expressing a 
 thought, statement or wish, .« refers t<, the per8<.n who thinks 
 states or wishes. Exceptions occur chiefly in stereotyped reflexive 
 formulae (eg se rectpere, inter se), or wliere in the cases given in 
 a) above the verb upon which the infinitive or subjunctive 
 depends has not for its subject someone of the third person, or 
 where m indirect discourse a number of pronouns occur closely 
 together, in which case s3 tends to refer to the same person. 
 
 92. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 (a) Hie this refers to what is near the speaker in place, time 
 or thought. Hence it is used of something just mentioned or of 
 something just to be mentioned ( = a. follows). In contrast with 
 lUe, it means the latter (rarely the former). (II. 177.) 
 
 1. Hlc, like other demonstrative proncmns, is often attracted to 
 tne case of a precjjcato noun to whicJi it refers. (II. 183, N.B.) 
 
 (6) IsTE, that of yours, that near you, refers to something near 
 or oe ongmg to the person spoken to. It has also at times a con- 
 temptuous force. (II. 178.) 
 
 (c) Ille, that, refers to something remote from the speaker in 
 place time or thought In contrast with Me, it means the former 
 (mvelythe latter). It is often used to indicate clearly a chang^of 
 
 wen known! ^1%^^'"' "''' '' ^''''''" '' '^'"''""^ noteworthy or 
 i. Ille is also used as an emphatic third personal pronoun. 
 
 (rf) Is, that is less emphatic than ille, and is preferred to ille as 
 an antecedent for a relative pronoun. (II. 180-182.) 
 
 i. Is is used as the ordinary third perscmal pronoun. As such it 
 IS otten omitted before a relative pronoun, chiefly where it would 
 hav e the same case as the relative, orVould be in the nominative 
 
 fru\J 'V\f "^ '"^ ^^^ "'^""'^^ ''^. ""'^ *^'''* ^^'^ ; '''<l'^ *■«' «'^^ that 
 too not. In thi,M case is agrees with the word which is emphasized. 
 
 (o) Idem, the same. 
 ticle ie ^^^^^ '^^*^ ^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^*^ relative pronoun ^uZ, or the par- 
 ii. Idem added for emphasis' sake has often the force of also, yet. 
 
 if) Ipse, -st7/ is used to emi)hasize, not as a reflexive pronoun. 
 It is used with all three persoixS. (II. 184.) 
 
 i. When used to emphasize a reflexive pronoun, it is generallv 
 in the nominative rather than in agreement with the reflexive. " 
 
clauses, or 
 in its own 
 
 [)re8sing a 
 ho thinks, 
 i reflexive 
 IS given in 
 ibjunctive 
 jerson, or 
 ur closely 
 on. 
 
 lace, time 
 ned or of 
 rast with 
 
 tracted to 
 N.B.) 
 
 ling near 
 les a con- 
 
 peaker in 
 'le former 
 change of 
 irorthy or 
 
 n. 
 
 to ille as 
 
 -s such it 
 it would 
 ainative. 
 and that 
 )hasized. 
 
 the par- 
 
 nlso, yet. 
 •ronoun. 
 
 enerallv 
 ive. 
 
 PART HI.— COMPENmuM OP SYNTAX. 291 
 
 goniti^'(ir!^4'"„;'"P'«'^™ P'''''''^'™ P"-™"-™ it is in the 
 
 93. The Relatlv . Pronoun. 
 
 JX'ZTu T-T :i" ."■' ""'^^^dent in ,ender and num. 
 
 ci^'l^YCer" '«'""""' '^ P™<"-" "-■' in it. own 
 
 where English Z°M ™ a drn'n^". ,*" "'"'^ "" """^ n»™tio„, 
 sometimes with a co oS/?ti ^ " • '''J"* "'■ I'orsonal pronoun 
 co^dinati,uj relative °7i'J"f9"gY J""""™' ^'"'^ '» ""^^"'^ th^ 
 
 co"secutivet£:s fn"?^'; S c'lauretLf^,V"'™"^^ <"■ ''^' 
 cause (II. 196) with the subjunctive " <'™'l't.on, conce«.ion or 
 
 omWei!' («i"i'-^™t^Merring to persons or things) is often 
 
 >^^ir^::^t::t^:^^^^^f^ -'^tive, ehie<,, <„ 
 
 clause fn Ulchlldet^, "and"c™t ""'¥''' »'^°' P^-"- the 
 is the antecedent ^STenirthi T"*"™- ""* "™» '>''"'=h logically 
 clause by is or hi. (II 197 d) " represented in the main 
 
 tive ciau^J'"(7ri9'r/r '"'"'^'''^ predicatively in the rela- 
 II.'WT^/ "" ''^'"'^"^Promnn (and other relative words) =a,. see 
 
 tw:;„';tsi:;':^rdt„"°5i,Sr:ht!ve'r""^ '^f '" '"" '^ °f 
 
 M. The antecedent of the relative mav hJLr.li„i ■ ' ' •>■> ■ 
 pronoun; so also in the subsU,'ce oVfiause ('}rl9r6)^^^^^^^^ 
 94. The Interrogative Pronoun. 
 
 4i"coCSd°,;itt :;'';;iK:' s i^rnf ^ r "'""" '^ • 
 
 verb, and is even foiinfl .vJfiV" ^ i- • i ^}^^,^ ""i-« foriu of the 
 
 ii/occasion;si;tTL£„xri;':rjL;''ts^^^^^^ 
 
292 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 i 
 
 95* The Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 i. Aliquis, some one or other, some, is indefinite. It may be 
 used after si for emphasis, = if some rather than if any. (II. 187.) 
 
 ii. QuisPiAM, som^i one, has the force of aliipds, but is rarer. 
 
 iii. QuiDAM, a certain one, one, is unspecified, though not neces- 
 sarily indefinite to the speaker. (II. 191.) 
 
 iv. Nescio quis, some one, is unknown to the speaker. It often, 
 through an affectation of ignorance, imphes contempt. (II. 188, c.) 
 
 V. NoNNULLus, some, nonnemo, some one, pre definite, but un- 
 specified. They suggest the idea some but not many. (II. 188, b.) 
 
 vi. Quis, a^iy one, any, is used chiefly after st and ne ; also after 
 nisi, quo, num, cum, quantO, and in relative sentences. (II. 189, 
 N.B.) 
 
 vii. QuiSQUAM, any one (substantival), ullus, any (adjectival), 
 mean any, even one, suggesting the idea of no one or none. They 
 are used in negative, or practically negative sentences. Their 
 negative correlatives are nemo, nihil and nfillus, but Latin prefers 
 neqne (nee) with quisquam, iillus, to et (ati/ut.) with ndmo, nfilhis. 
 (II. 189.) _ ^ 
 
 viii. Quivis, QUiLiBET, any one, any, mean any at all, any you 
 please, suggesting the idea of every one, all. (II. 190.) 
 
 ix. QuiSQUE, each, of a larger number than two. With superla- 
 tives and ordinal numerals, it is equivalent to every. It is often 
 used with the reflexive, being regularly placed after it. (II. 192.) 
 
 X. Uterque, each (of two), and hence, both, but }>oth regarded 
 separately, not together, which is ambo. (II. 192.) 
 
 xi. The indefinite relatives (qiiisquis, quzcunupie, etc.) take the 
 indicative mood, not the subjunctive, except in indirect narration. 
 
 96. Tlie Active and Passive Voices. 
 
 (a) For Deponent Verbs, see section 68. They arise out of the 
 reflexive use of the passive voice. 
 
 (b) Intransitive verb^ (i.e., verbs which do not take a direct 
 object in the accusative) are often found in Latin in the passive 
 voice, used impersonally. This impersonal passive construction 
 is used in the indicative, subjunctive or infinitive, the verb being 
 always third singular and (if gender is expressed) neuter. Such 
 verbs merely express or refer to the taking place of the action 
 described by the verb, and may often be translated by the English 
 introductory adverb there, by tlie introductory it, or most fre- 
 quently by the active voice, the subject being understood from the 
 context. 
 
 i. Occasionally a fjuasi-subject is found, either a neuter adjective 
 or proiu)un used substantively. This correspuuds closely Lu the 
 cognate or adverbial accusative. 
 
 I 
 
t may be 
 (II. 187.) 
 •arer. 
 lot neces- 
 
 It often, 
 I. 188, c.) 
 , but un- 
 r. 188, b.) 
 also after 
 
 (II. 189, 
 
 Ijectival), 
 le. They 
 s. Their 
 n prefers 
 y, nfill'is. 
 
 , any you 
 
 1 superla- 
 
 t is often 
 
 (II. 192.) 
 
 regarded 
 
 take the 
 larration. 
 
 )ut of the 
 
 a direct 
 e passive 
 Lstruction 
 irb being 
 )r. Such 
 he action 
 i English 
 most fre- 
 froni the 
 
 adjective 
 i^ Lo the 
 
 PART III. — COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 293 
 
 97. The Indicative In Principal Clauses. 
 
 indicative. The various tenses are used as follows : 
 
 (o) The PuESENT tense is used i for th^ w i- t. 
 
 pe»s.ve (II. 198), ii. a» a u„ veLf Z'ent aT t ^/f ■"' P™" 
 
 paat into theVrntcWe;, '^iS^lT^Tl^X''"""' '™" *^ 
 • ^^^??^ Imperfect tense is used i for fh^ TTr^rri; u 
 sive II. 199), ii. to express ^n.n^i, H ^^^^f^ ?»«<= progres- 
 pasttinie(ll 199 ) fc5S ^h.T f- ^"^"H^ted or intended in 
 repeated oV l^Jt^ZS:\^:S:'S^a^'^t'^\ "' '." ^^P^^«« 
 actions continued from a prior t me into tt t l t^' '''' *'' ?^P^^«« 
 chiefly with jam (II. 199 Tv to rW -l ^1 ^"'^ ^poken of, 
 compared wit^h tli perfect til; 'J! bH'S^: (T/ lH^.f "^"^' ^ 
 
 (c^) The Perfect tense has two main uses • 
 
 p.etd'j;rtiPrert,;e '^!e.%izr\^^- »>-" t- 
 fc^:ir ^'^i^S iifS-- Y r -^ 
 
 present in certain verbs%^en 203 'nB) "' "'" ^"^lish 
 
 use^ tItStha'itpttef ^^^^^^^^^^^^ r rt™t' 
 
 regubr tense for nari^tion as opposed to SJaeriptt (se^^t! 
 
 in'pll*: ?f Te'';;?upS'rur,:Sr''^ r" '-,-"dness' sake 
 conditional sentences ™''J""<-t've in the apodosis of unreal 
 
 i^^^ls^^^^:^,::^'^^ - oo»- 
 
tH 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN ROOK. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 (y) The following peculiarities occur : 
 
 i. A sort of perfect in fornied by haheO with the perfect partj- 
 
 m *>/I^ "'^ T*^"\^*'''^^^^^'''^ *^'*'' continuance of the result of a past act 
 Jll. j{),i). In tlie same way habebam and the perfect participle are 
 like the pluperfect (II. 204, b). f f i' 
 
 ii. For the epistolary use of the imperfect and pluperfect, see II. 
 204, c. X J- J 
 
 iii. Amf(h,s ful generally differs from the far commoner amatm 
 sum in implynig that tlie condition spoken of has ceased to exist. 
 Ihis difterence d(^es not seem to hold in the case of amdtns fmram 
 ami fiiero, as contrasted with amCitus eram and ero. 
 ^ iv. With indefinite relatives tlie indicative is used, not the sub- 
 junctive. So with other expressions (see II. 153 and 85), espe- 
 cially with the modal verbs possum and debed (II. 85, N.B.). 
 
 08. The Subjunctive In Principal Clauses. 
 
 (a) Hortatory and Optative (expressing a command or a wish). 
 The negative is ne. (II. 151, a.) ' 
 
 1. The subjunctive is used in the first and third persons to urge 
 something upon a person. In the second person, the subjunctive 
 IS used to express a command (chiefly negative) in the perfect 
 tense, or if addressed to no definite person, in the present tense. 
 
 2. The subjunctive is used in the present, imperfect and pluper- 
 fect tenses to express a wish or desire, often in combination with 
 iihnam. The present tense is used of wishes that may be fulfilled • 
 the imperfect and pluperfect, of a longing for impossibilities (II! 
 151, a). rVith the present, velim and nolim are found ; with the 
 imperfect and pluperfect, vellem and nollem (see c below). 
 
 (6) Deliberative or Rhetoptcal Questions. Questions ex- 
 pressing doubt (to which the an«wer would be an imperative), and 
 (juestions which are practically equivalent to a statement in the 
 subjunctive (see c below), are expressed by the subjunctive. 
 (11. 151, c.) t ' 
 
 (c) Softened Assertions, put forward as mere ideas or views 
 are m the subjunctive. This is often called the potential sub- 
 junctive. (II. 151, b.) To this usage belong velim, vellem, etc., 
 with the s-ibjunctive expressing a wish, and also the so-called 
 ideal second person. 
 
 99. The Indicative and Subjunctive In Dependent Clauses. 
 
 (a) Final Clauses. 
 
 Clauses expressing purpose are in the subjunctive ; the present 
 tense being used after primary tenses, the imperfect after second- 
 ary. (II. 25-32.) ^ 
 
iresent 
 econd- 
 
 Part hi —compendium op syntax. 295 
 
 «/;.? luTt'TA'"'"- "' P'"!""-; '« »»<"' in ■•"Iverbial clauses after 
 
 ^rLtlt' lltlml^T''""' '^"""""""""^ "'"«""' ™»'junctive 
 junctitete™S."'(ltS)"' "■" '" ^"« """> """ "'^ A-' «""- 
 nffLL'"' ™H™<!«™ Of purpose is used in substantival clauses 
 
 ;f«,;i/:^'e'£ ''th:77:£"r"'' '*"■"• "«""""'> '«'~^»" 
 
 found witL;Tt«i"/th:tLTetr"^^^^^ '"^^ ^*^™""^'' '^ 
 (b) Consecutive Clauses. 
 
 and^rSr^Cn^ ^^'^f ,r« i" *'^e subjunctive with nt (11. 33 
 ana J7-Jy). For the use of the various tenses, see II 38 39 
 
 re^ulffrrfound' (ifte-lg^r^ "'" "' '''^ '"'^"^^'^^^ ^' 
 wilh .^fT^P*" ""'^n ^^^"^^^^ happenimf, the subjunctive of result 
 
 i^n as a suw"h,t f ^^^"''^^ \^« used with >-e ..^ (>.i,z,um esse 
 nt) as a substitute for the future infinitive (esneoiallv in the 
 passive) ; and with futurnm fuisse nt to represent Fn inject nar- 
 ration the pluperfect subjunctive of the apodosis. (lI 33 N bT 
 tions. '°"'"^"^^^^ ^^^'^^^ i« «ften used elliptically 'in exclama- 
 
 (c) Relative Clause op Characteristic. 
 
 rl J^'x^'^n"^''"*.'''^ subjunctive is used in relative clauses which 
 describe the antecedent as belonging to a class ^ (II. 34 36) The 
 tenses are used as in ordinary consecutive clauses. (IL 38, 39.) 
 
 (d) Indirect Questions. 
 
 All dependent clauses beginning with an interrogative pronoun 
 vLh« '/^ T" ^^"^ "^ ^^"^ subjunctive, whether they depend on 
 verbs of asking or on verbs of leamino, Jindhu, olt, knZiZ 
 
 (e) Relative Clauses. 
 
 Ordinary attributive relative clauses are in the indicative but 
 they are put in the subjunctive if they are dependen oi a'verb 
 or phrase of sayinc,, tfvinHng, hiominr,, etc, il, where Sie roh 
 
 ^::!^ 'c^^iX ^xr ''^^^'^^ ^^^^-^^ ^^'^^ ^ 
 

 296 
 
 PRIMAUY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 1. In many cases the subjunctive is used where, without 
 expressly saying su, the writer is practically giving the words or 
 thoughts of Houie other person. This is called mrlual indirect 
 narration. (II. 2i(i.) ► 
 
 ^,"-. A clause introduced hy the co-ordinating relative maybe in 
 the mhnitive m nidirect narration. (H. 215, /.) 
 
 iii. Relative clauses of comparison, after' ni, inH(m, follow the 
 rules for ordmary relative clauses. 
 
 • !^'\ ma''^^'''' clauses may be ytH<r/ (00, a, i), amseentivc (character- 
 istic) (00, c), eanxal (00, j/, m), coneemre (00, /, iv). 
 
 V. For the use of the perfect and pluperfect indicative in fre- 
 qjvantative chiuses, see II. 202, 204, a. 
 
 (J) Temporal Clauses. 
 
 i. Pmtqfmm, nbi, mnul atqne (ac), ut, nt ^wlmnm, cm prlmnm, 
 take the indicative except when f.u-ming a part of indirect nar- 
 ration, when the subjunctive is used. 
 
 II. Dnm, donee, quamdiil, quoad, meaning so long an, while, take 
 the indicative, except when forming a part of indirect narration, 
 when the subjunctive is used. (II. 172.) 
 
 iii. l>Mm, done^, quoad, meaning vntil, take the indicative of the 
 actual lapse of time, the subjunctive where the purpose or end in 
 view 18 indicated (II. 174), or in indirect narration. 
 . ^,Y- ^^^t^'<rj<tm, pruoiquam (often written as two words), take the 
 indicative of the actual lapse of time, the subjunctive where the 
 ?TT f^Il'''^ (something to be achieved or prevented) is indicated 
 (11. 175), or in indirect narration. 
 
 V. Cum, with primary tenses, or with secondary tenses when 
 used as a mere relative adverb, and in frecpientative clauses, takes 
 the mdicative (except in indirect narration) ; in other cases with 
 seconchiry tenses the subjunctive i« used. (II. 1()8, KJO 170) . 
 i^^Q^" ^^ *^^? present indicative o. pa-.t time with dnm, .see II. 
 l/.J. lor the perfect and pluperfect indicative in fre(iuenta- 
 tive clause, see II. 108, 170, h. For the future perfect, where 
 Hiiighsh less exactly uses the present {dx perfect), see II. 205, h. 
 
 (g) Causal Clauses. 
 
 1. Quod, quia, qnoniam take the indicative except when express- 
 mg (actually or virtually) a reason given by some other than the 
 TeS 166 ) ^"c^"^^« (/"^^ t;lauses after verbs of emotion. (II. 
 
 ii. Gum, meaning since, takes the subjunctive. (II. 167 ) 
 
 111. Relative clauses with the subjunctive are often used to 
 
 express a reason. (II. 10().) 
 
 iv. An imaginary reason which is mentioned only to be reiected 
 
 IS m the subjunctive. (II. 165, />. N.B,) "' 
 
PART III.— COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 297 
 
 (h) Conditional Claitses. 
 
 iwi, ^ 7 ' ^1 ' ' A- ^^"^ '^ »■"!« tho HHiiio iiKxKl iH found in 
 buthjfj,W.a«^am a/W,W.s. (F..r oxcoi>ti„nH, see II. 85.) 
 u. Ihe uhuhI (hv.'sion of conditional clauHos is as folh.ws :» 
 
 Present or 
 Past time. 
 
 Future 
 time. 
 
 ^* ^([["s'm"*^'^'""''' "^"''*' *^''"''''' "^ subjunctive. 
 
 2. Where nutliing is said of the reality or unreality. 
 Indicative. (II. 81.) "^ 
 
 r3. More vivid. Indicative. (TI. 83, 1, and 8i ) 
 t4. Lush vivid. Present subjunctive. (II. 8.'}, 2.) 
 , iii. In indirect narration, all conditional clauses are in the sub- 
 junctive, the apodosis being in the infinitive. (II 87 ) 
 _ ly. Ccmditional clauses of comparison are used after vt sJ whit 
 ^tan^pmm «^ ,^mm, followed l>y the subjunctive. The .ese,^^ 
 
 e Sr 7yT] /I'"' ^7'""^ ^""^''' ^''« i-Porfecl afte 
 99' " ili^)" ■'"'''" <^''»»iP^"son, see section 
 
 juncti^r^^Ilirif *''''^'''^'' "leaning provided that, t«ke the sub- 
 
 (t) CoNCBsaivE Clauses. 
 
 i. Qnamqnam regularly takes the indicative (IT. 88, />) mmmvts 
 amU.o.i the snbiunctive (II. 88, .), Hsl, and other cont oSH 
 88 a"!) '" '" ""^J""^*^i^" («" the same principles as si) {U. 
 
 juncti^e. 7lI.t8.T[ "'*^''"^"'=^ concessive clauses with the sub- 
 
 iii. 0M7M = f/Mo«(y/(,, tjikes the subjunctive. (II 88 <• 167) 
 196^) ^' '"^ ^""""^ "^'^^^ *^'''' Hubjunctive in a concessive sense. (II. 
 
 {k) Subjunctive by Attraction. 
 
 When dependent on a clause in the subjunctive or infinitive 
 clauses which ordinarily would have the indicative (especially rda- 
 tive clauses), are put in the subjunctive, if the two clauses are 
 closely connected in sense, and the dependent clause is necessary 
 totheclauseinthesubjunctiveor infinitive. =^ (II. 220.) " 
 
 100. Tho Iinporntlve. 
 
 (a) The present imperative, used in the second person only is 
 
 'J^^^^t^s^^f^ &s:^^, „ 
 
 Demg m a chiusc of virtual iii.lheoL narration. "" ^'^ 
 
208 
 
 IMUMAIIY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 (/>) Tlw futui 
 
 ,, . , ■*' iin|n!nitivo, unocI in tho Nocond and luiulv tho 
 
 Inid |K.r,s,m cxiu'oHsos ratJu-r h n.id in^ront, c.Muni.uul tl.u.i ono to 
 I.O mnniMl,Htt,Iy ,.lu,yc.,l. Il^nco it is coniiuou in laws untl procuptH 
 and HI diHlinct rofoivnco to nouio futuro tinio. 
 
 i. »SY7« und ww»tf,u rcgulmly me tho future imporativu for the 
 present. * 
 
 101. The Inflnltlvo. 
 
 (ff) CoMPLKMUNTAUv Tnftntttte. TIio prosoiit infniitive (active 
 or passive) is use, 1„ nm,pl..te the lueaiiin- ,.f many verbs whose 
 reference would <.therwise he incniph.!.., o.-, i>oss,n„, }„hro, n,r,,7, 
 
 t^fr'"(iT!ti; 2ir'Sio'" ' ''^'' ''"''"' ^"■"^''^"■'' '"^ ""'"^'^^ 
 
 i. This c,,n,.sponds ch.sely to the use of the infinitive with to 
 Pi.j!d1lh ('lll'lii, 27.V''''^''' '" '"'"'' ""'■'^'•"^"^^ "' '^'^t'" than in 
 
 inHnifl;"!"^'] ';^ '"'/">'•'/ Hiid prom/.s/n./ rarely take the present 
 mtuutivo, but do so regularly in the case of posse and velL (II. 
 
 iii. This use of the infinitive is greatly extended in poetry (and 
 in certain prose writers), appr<.aching more nearly Knglish usage • 
 rj/., the inhnitive is used to express purpose, to define the appli- 
 cation of adjectives and nouns, and with verbs which are not 
 usually followed by the inhnitive, to complete their meaning. 
 
 (6) Accusative and Infinitive. After verbs sentiendi et dedar- 
 a>uh (/.('., of saiinuf, thinkhuu pnreiHwi, etc.), the infinitive with 
 
 1^1% Znil '!^ "'^"^-^ *^"«^'^'^ ^-^ ^^ "-" ^^-- int- 
 
 un;ieI!;id'£\hor;St " ^^"^^^ ^""^^^^ ^^'^^^" -^-^^ 
 
 is I!;TvJfl/'!;f '''''^' i •"•l^'-'' "^*'-'. '•' "^^^'^^ I'-'^'^-'^i^''-^ ^^'^ i»fi»itive 
 ni.^lfn .; '""^ f"^ 'i'"*^ accusative. (II. 14.) In such a case a 
 
 piedicate noun or adjective is in the nominative. 
 
 111. The accusative with the future infinitive is usual after verbs 
 of Iiopniij, pntmisiiui, ate. (II. i;{ ) 
 
 iv. Verbs of MvWi/,,j, often take the accusative and infinitive con- 
 (IL 22.)"' ''*^'^'"''"'^^ '•' '^ t''*^ t^'*» ^»^'i-^'« ^'^f^'r to different subjects. 
 fiJ'fl" ^"^""l of the future infinitive passive (and occasionally of 
 is used."' ai S^'n bI''^"'^' •^"'■' "* '''^^' ^ consecutive subjunctive 
 
 vi. ^se is often omitted in compound or periphrastic infinitives. 
 s.n^l:Jr!^ accusative and infinitive is used in exclamations, after 
 some suppressed idea of thinkmy. (The idea of-, to think that- ) 
 
(II. 
 
 1»AUT UI.—COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 290 
 
 inlinitive I.oIcuks * ""^ ^" ^'"^'' ^^'^«« '^ i«uticulur 
 
 HH^fL!frs;t:i.:;:;;r^:;!iri„ ];''7>7-t infinitive is .n.u ,..1 
 
 the suLjocfc in i/."h^no.;;;^a;iv;, ' o'/; 'J;^^;'!'^--- '» ^1- usHKo 
 
 '%• thofnt.uoi.Vr F .HnVf- '-^''r, I'^-'fcct in /Mind mrely 
 
 U.I inclicutivo), Heo 11 i^^ "'^"^^^'^ c.u.structiun (i.e., to represent 
 102. TlH, Partlolplos. 
 
 (a) TIK- Pk,.;sknt PART.cPi.n AcTrvr. expresses oyntinuance 
 auhe .,mc of the verb of ihe elause to which it belongs. (II. 
 
 oxpvit 'r:.to,;,T,t"''''"' '""^ "■" ■"•'--"' -"-t-c „ooasio„,.iiy 
 
 48;'4!U48!'',I ■'"'■"'"" ■'"'''=''1''" '" "'" "''!»«v« absolute, „oo II. 
 iv. F,,.- tho participles of deponent verbs, see section fl8 ,■ 
 (4) The FuTURr. 1'aht,c,p,,k Activk is generally used with 
 
 the verb s,m to mdieate i,Ue„tio„, liidi/wod or imminence. 
 
 (0) The Pr.R„-EcT Participle Passive expresses completion 
 perfect 
 
 see II. 236. 
 
 irtieipie „sod to suggest an abstract idea. 
 
 I 
 
300 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ! I 
 
 Us'a^"'^*^^ P*''^^^* participle in the ahlHtivo ubsolute, aee II. 4J), 
 
 r.oL'i;7a\^"iS;^/!,^7'''P^" '' ^^^*^" "''^^^ ''« «" adjective or a« a 
 
 li ^^\^h Pf ^^'^'I'*^'« '^f deponent verbn, see secti..n «8, c. 
 wiH/fho'^ Vr ??! '^"'P"»""t ^^''•^'.^ the perfect participle is found 
 
 103. The Ooruncl. 
 
 The gerund is used as a verbal noun, in the genitive, dative 
 accusative and al)lative cases of the singular. It is gener- 
 ally either an intransitive verb or a transitive without its 
 accusative object expressed (see section 104, h). (II. 133.) 
 
 withir^.^""'^''^'' '" "'""^ '^"'^^ ^" '''' ^^J""*^^^ g^"iti^«' ^nd 
 
 i. For the gerund with mei, snl, etc., oee II. 134. 
 
 1 (^'\7^^J^''^'''^ i« "«ed chiefly with adjectives (rarely nounsN 
 denotuig^^nm or capacity, and in a few othcial phrases. ' 
 
 (c) The acnusative is used with ad, inter, and rarely other prepo- 
 sitions. The commonest use is with ad to express imrpim. ^ 
 
 (rf) The ablative is used as an ablative of means or cause, and 
 with xn, ab, de, ex, and rarely other prepositions. 
 
 104. The Gerundive. 
 
 ^ The gerundive (sometimes called the future participle pas- 
 sive) is always passive, and expresses that which is d^ie or 
 
 («) With the verb snm, the geruiidh-e is used to express dK^i/, 
 ob^i^^twn or necessity. The form of expression is always passive 
 
 i. The agent is generally in the dative. 
 
 u. The neuter nominative is used with the third singular of sum, 
 impersonally, m the case of intransitive verbs. 
 
 (b) The gerundive construction is used in place of the gerund 
 
 fTinl ;V iTa t\T^ i'' S^ accusative, regularly so with preposi- 
 tions (II. 140, 141). In the genitive both modes of expression are 
 common, and sometimes occur in the same sentence. By this con- 
 strucmon, instead of some case of the gerund governing an object 
 in the accusative, the gerundive is used in agreement with the 
 
PAUr III. — COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 
 
 301 
 
 object, but both words are in the case the gerund would have 
 boon m. 
 
 i. The variouH caHCH are used in the same way as the cases of the 
 gerund (see section lO.'J). 
 
 ii. As a rule, tlio gerundive construction is possible only with 
 transitive verbs, but /dor, fnior, fiuujtn; potior, and vesarr, are 
 exceptions. (II. 141, />.) 
 
 iii. The genitive is used predicatively with verbs, especially Hum 
 to express purpose. 
 
 ix. For the so called gerundive in -i with mel, si«, etc., see II. 
 
 X04t 
 
 (c) The gerundive is used in agreement with the object of 
 certain verbs, e.g., do, curd (or with the passive in the predicative 
 noimnative) to express purpose. (11.143.) 
 
 105. Tfce Supine. 
 
 (a) The supine i.s -um in used after verb;? of motion to 
 express purpose. An object is rarely found with the accusative 
 supine. (II. 136, 137.) 
 
 (b) The supine in -u is used with certain adjectives and a 
 few nouns, e.g., fas, ne/ds, to specify in what respect a state- 
 ment is to be applied.' An object is never found with the 
 ablative supine. (11.138,139.) 
 
 106. Gonoral Rules of Indirect Narration (Or^tlo Obllqua). 
 
 (See more fully II. 212-219.) 
 (a) Mood of Verb. 
 
 INDIRECT NARRATION. 
 
 13 
 
 
 DIRECT NARRAT ON. 
 
 'Statements ) 
 
 Rhetorical Questions/^^^ P"*^ ^" ^^^ Infinitive. 
 
 .3 03 
 
 Commands 
 Entreaties 
 ^Questions 
 
 Subordinate Clauses (whether^ 
 
 in the Indicative or the In „ 
 Subjunctive) J 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 tracted for t«) rather' thali "an abIati;e1?1jSilSn.'° "" ' ^"*''' "' ^"^^"^ ^■"°''°- 
 
.S02 
 
 I'UIMAUY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 r 
 
 (M Tknhk of Vrub. 
 
 Cl.ujst>H put ill Mil, iiiHiiitivo liuvo, 
 
 riw iniyNoiit iiiliiiiiivo fur Mmo oontonipommunm with th* 
 
 Hpiwikcr. 
 " l'«"*'"«*'' •> - .. prior fuMmtofMiuMpoiikor. 
 
 " f"'"'" I' II M Nul)m«(piriit to timt of tho 
 
 Hp«'iik»«r. 
 OlmiMOMput ill tlu- s.il.j.MK.tivo fullMv llir n.loH for the HiMiutmco 
 
 of tl'IINOM (wo Hl'OtlOII 1(>7). |"t'"tO 
 
 (<•) Cask or Noins oh PimvorNH. The .snhjrcl, ..f u duuHo 
 n/miiruJi'vo! " *""' '" "" ''"'"'^''" '" '" •''" HccusHtivo. lu.t tho 
 
 0/) PuoNoi-NM ANi. Ai.vKi.HH. T'roiinuiiH of th.' first or Hocond 
 lu.rsoM mo ohHiiK.Ml to pro,i,.uns of tho thinl poison, Konomllv 
 «<• niul <//«• loHptH'tivoly. ' 8«^u«jimiy 
 
 All .K.nioiislmtivo pn.iiouiis. u.lvorl.s or H.ljootivos whioh urn 
 Hutivo to tho tm.o of tho Hi,cakor, uru us h rulo aduptod to tho 
 tniu) oi tho rop')i'tor. * 
 
 107. Moi|iioii((o of ToiiNCN. 
 
 (o) In most (li-|u-iuK'nt <I;m.sts in tlic siihjunrtivc (t.f/., 
 clause of Purpose, Intliiirt giicsiions, Sul. ordinate clauses put 
 111 Indirect Narration), tho ndc is that alter the |)riinary tenses' 
 the l>resent and l»erleet Sul.junetives are used, after seeondary 
 tenses the Iinpi-rfeet and nuperlect. 
 
 Tho prosont nu«l imporfoot roprosont continuous iictious ; tho 
 porfoot Hiul plupo' toot ooiiiplotod Hotions. 
 
 futuro porfoot uy tho poifool nnd plu|iorfoct. 
 
 thU'S^^r !'•' '■'' ':^^'^''^^ ^*'^'' <J'^' priuuiry so.pionco (tho tonsos of 
 
 !.f tirn .^^^^^^^^^ '" ^ ^'"^ Nooondary sociuonco ^tho tonsos 
 
 iii. Aftt>r tho hist,.ricid prosont, oithor priniury or Hoconilttry 
 sotpionoo nmy ho usod. i j ^^ ni..aiy 
 
 iv. Ofton thoro is found a shiftinjr from tho sooondary to tho 
 prnuHry soipionoo, ospooially in lon^r pHssafre.H. 
 
 V. l\.nstvutivo oluusos nro not idlooti'd hv th 
 on whioh thoy tlopond. 
 
 ho tonso of tho vorh 
 
 
I'AUT HI. COMI'ENDIUM OF HYNTAX. 
 
 3oa 
 
 vriih t h^ 
 
 M|M*(ikor. 
 it «if thu 
 
 HlMjUOUCO 
 
 H uluiiNo 
 not (III) 
 
 r Hocoiid 
 {uiiuriilly 
 
 liich urn 
 I to tho 
 
 ises put 
 
 tenses' 
 
 'oiulury 
 
 118 ; thu 
 ot ; tho 
 
 lllNOH of 
 ) toilHOH 
 
 ioiultiry 
 
 to tho 
 
 10 vorb 
 
 idicativ*, 
 feut iiul 
 
 yi. VVhon tho Ni.l.juuctivo olu„s., d. 
 
 mniiitivo, itM U'.UHv. in <|„t 
 
 iiiiiiuMl \,y t,ho load 
 
 pmMJM (.n H p/irticiplo or 
 
 i« vm'b of th 
 
 l>IIM<'.f"l> Ml 111. A 
 
 l>IRK(;r NAIIKATION. 
 
 INcsciii Indio. 
 
 Illlptufllt't II 
 
 Kutiifo II 
 iVufoct ,1 
 IMiiporfot-t,, 
 Futmo Poifoct Indie. 
 
 boeoiiiuM 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 II 
 
 M 
 
 II 
 
 INI)rilK(!T NAUIIATION. 
 I'nwnr,, S,;,„rnr,>. S.-,;,mfnr„ Sri/urnn: 
 
 I'nwi.Mt S.d.j. Iii.purfoct Nuhj. 
 I.* purftiut II 
 
 IVltNUIlt I, 
 
 Porfturt I, 
 I'liiporfcctii 
 I'orfcot II 
 
 " II 
 
 " »» 
 
 IMuporfoct II 
 
 •' ft 
 
 lOH. Tho A<lviMl>. 
 
 advt'ir'"' "' "' ''■"""''■' """'''"^ ^"''•^' "''J"-'!^'^^- »"d "the- 
 
 100. The Conjunrtlo,,. (Soo hJho Hocfum 74) 
 
 '"ouniMK; r,/./,,,. adds Zi h^, . f "^ l'' '"'''^' '""^ oon.plotoH its 
 l>of;>ro vowois. ''''^^""'" '■'' '""^ '»''/''''. and is novor u«od 
 
 ^iZ\ ; ; :::'th.:r.;iS::-,;.^r' "^r- • • ^'^^^ 
 
304 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 sion is called asyndeton. The use of needless connectives, to give 
 more force to an enumeration by dwelling on it, is called polv- 
 syndeton. 
 
 if) Ut is used as a final (section 99, Yt), consecutive (99, h\ 
 temporal (99, /) or concessive (99, i) conjunction. Ne is used as 
 a hnal (99, a) or concessive (99, i) conjunction. Both ut ana ne 
 may introduce either adverbial or substantival clauses. 
 
 {(j) Cum is used as a temporal (section 99, /), causal (99, a) or 
 concessive (99, i) conjunction. 
 
 {h) DuM is used as a temporal (section 99, /) or conditional 
 (99, h) conjunction. 
 
 (^■) Quod is used as a causal conjunction (section 99, (f). It may 
 introduce either adverbial clauses or (in the sense of inasmuch as, 
 or as for the fact that) substantival clauses. . Quod is often to be 
 translated that or the fact that rather than because. 
 
 (k) Quand5 is used as a temporal (section 99, /) or causal (99, g) 
 conjunction. ^ 
 
 HO. The Order of Words. 
 
 In addition to the more general treatment in Part II. 1-8, 238, 
 239, the following details should be noted. 
 
 (a) The order of words or of clauses commonly follows Pie 
 natural .order in which the ideas would present themselves, being 
 changed chiefly for the expressi(m of emotion. But though the 
 ideas may be presented in the same order as in Englisli, the 
 syntactical relation of the various parts may be totally different. 
 
 (6) An adjective or other modifier generally follows its noun 
 unless it is to be emphasized. Numerals, adjectives of size and 
 quantity, and demonstrative pronouns commonly precede, being 
 generally emphatic. Additional emphasis is often given by separ- 
 ating two worr's in agreement. ' 
 
 (c) Personal pronouns are apt to be placed in emphatic posi- 
 tions, and where two personal or possessive pronouns occur in the 
 same clause they are generally placed close together. 
 
 {d) Relative and interrogative pronouns are pLiced as near as 
 possible to the beginning of the clause they introduce. 
 
 (e) Adverbs precede the v/ords they modify, though sometimes 
 for emphasis' sake they may follow a verb. 
 
 (/) Prepositions (except tcnns, versus, in certain cases cum, and 
 occasionally other rirepositions) precede th word governed . ,An 
 adjective or genitive modifying a noun governed by a preposition 
 
PART III.~-COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 305 
 
 (h) The verb is regularly at the end of its sentence. 
 
 «i.ed by Ling pWd:{; t^e cteTth:«tte7„:' """^ "" '"P""- 
 reversing it (cLl,*! (^~i'A<«-«) or, more frequenUy, by 
 
 jp^pr.^t:&, :t;;^ter;e?;irsi '™« 
 
 cadence of a verse was particularly avoided °n prose ' "'"""^ 
 
 a.f classes t»-st^^-n-S^S^^^^^^^^ 
 uS Jhan rEJSisr''^'^ *' ^'"^ ^*""="^ '« ™""»™» i" 
 
 20 
 
 li 
 II 
 
306 
 
 PRIMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 IV. METRE. 
 
 mi 
 
 ! 
 
 11^ 
 
 THE DACTYLIC HEXAMETER. 
 
 111. As in English, so in Latin, poetry is written in lines or 
 verses, and the verses are divided into feet. The main distinction 
 between the two languages is, that in English poetry the verse 
 consists of a regular succession and combination of accented and 
 unaccented (or rather more stronghj and less strongly accented) 
 syllables, while in Latin it consists of the regular succession and 
 combination of long'^ and short syllables. 
 
 112. The smallest combination within which such long and 
 short, or accented and unaccented syllables, occur, is called a foot. 
 
 In each foot there is a certaiif syllable on which there falls a 
 special stress of voice called the ictu^ (or stroke), while on the other 
 syllable or syllables no such stress is placed. The part of the foot 
 on which the ictus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of the 
 foot is called the thesis. 
 
 In English poetry the ictus coincides with the ordinary accent of 
 the word, while in Latin it does not at all depend upon the word- 
 accent, though frequently coincident therewith. 
 
 113. The dactylic hexameter (or heroic verse of the Latins) con- 
 sists of six feet, of which the sixth is invariably a spondee 
 
 (or what may here be counted as such, — w ), the fifth nearly 
 always a dactyl — .^ w . Each of th§ first four may be a dactyl 
 or a si)ondee, generally jI judicious combinati(m of the two being 
 preferred, except where the poet for certain reastms uses a pre- 
 ponderance of one or the other. The ictus falls on the first 
 syllable of these feet. 
 
 1. For the purposes of metre, a syllable is considered long, not only when the 
 vowel is long by nature, but generally also when (even though naturally short) it 
 comes before two consonants, when it is said to be long by position. However, at 
 least one of the consonants must belong to the same word as the vowel in (juestion. 
 With a vowel naturally long, the syllable is long by nature as well a« by position. The 
 letters j, x and z have the same effect as two consonants. The letter h in combi- 
 nation with a consonant does not lengthen a preceding syllable, and a word or syllable 
 beginning with that letter is considered, metrically, as beginning with a vow-el. A 
 
 .. .„ ,„., ,^.., ,(.,,!,, tj.fs^ inai- 1.-7, rumcLniic-. luiig juiix suiiicumcs siiofL, :i its 
 
 \ov. i;l, when short by nature, is followed by a mute (b, g, p, t, etc.) and a liquid (I or r). 
 
PART III. — METRE. 
 
 307 
 
 lines or 
 stinction 
 ihe verse 
 nted and 
 iccented) 
 sion and 
 
 ong and 
 a foot. 
 
 e falls a 
 he other 
 the foot 
 
 it of the 
 
 accent of 
 le word- 
 
 ins) con- 
 Be 
 
 I nearly 
 a dactyl 
 vo heing 
 (S a pre- 
 ;he first 
 
 when the 
 r short) it 
 )wever, at 
 
 (juestion. 
 tion. The 
 in coinbi- 
 or syllable 
 vowel. A 
 toft, ii its 
 lid (I or r). 
 
 The metrical scale may be represented thus, the acute accent 
 marking the syllable on which the ictus falls ; 
 
 / 
 
 1 w 
 
 1 w 
 
 1 >. w 1 - 
 
 - U _ ] 
 
 114. In all poetiy, especially where (as in Latin) there is no 
 rhyme, a great deal of the beauty and melody of the rhythm 
 depends upon the caesura,^ or pause, in the verse, occurring where 
 a word ends within a foot, and usually, but not always, accom- 
 panied by a corresponding pause in the sense. 
 
 The favorite caesura^ pause in the dactylic hexameter is after the 
 arsis or in the thesis of the third foot. From occurring after the 
 j^th halfioot of the verse, it is termed the penthemimeral caesura 
 However, the position of the pause varies, and sometimes more 
 than one caesura are found in the same line. 
 
 j-*5^^ "^ ^^^ ^^^^®^ ^^ *^® ^neid are here scanned (that is 
 divided into their appropriate measures) according to the rules 
 above given, double lines being used to mark the position of the 
 principal caesura in eacli verse : ^ 
 
 (a) Arma vl [ rtimquS ca | n6 || Tro | jag qui | primtis ab | 6rls 
 (6) Vi stSp6 I rum sae | va§ || m6m6 | rgm Ju | nOnls 5b | irSm 
 
 (c) infer 1 re'tqug d6 | o's LatI | 5, || ggnOa | Cmd6 La | tintira 
 
 (d) Quidvg d6 I l6ns, || re | g!na d6 | iim tot | v6lv6r6 | cisus 
 
 1. Whenever a word ends within a 'oot, a caesura is produced. Accordinglv a verse 
 SirrnVfir^'^' ^'*'^'''^' ^t genially only one of them- the chief caesura. °^the 
 w^4i.H ?* '^^ verse-is marked by any perceptible pause in the sense. Occa^ioLjlv 
 Ti^^^t ^^-^ "^k" "^^^""^^ caesural pauses in the same line, one in the fourthTot and 
 
 «^ir>n^tf '" ^^t '-f •°"''- ^^^" ^^^ P^"«« «^*^"^ '^t th^ end of a foot (which very 
 seldom happens), it is sometimes called diaeresis; as, ^ 
 
 His lacri | mis vi | tam damus || — et mise | rescimus | ultro. 
 The pupil may note the prosaic character of such verses as the following, in which 
 there is no caesura or pause of any description :— luuowuig, m wnicn 
 
 Romae | moenia | terruit I impiger | Hannibal | armis. 
 Sparsis I hastis | longis | campus | splendet et | horret. 
 
 2. Tlie mark of the long quantity used in the scansion of the verses in this and the 
 following sections indicates that the syllable is long metrically, not necessari"v that 
 the vowel over which it is placed is long by nature, although in some caTesX "vllable 
 18 long metrically (that is by position) and at th^ same time the vowel is naturaJh 
 long. For example, in (d) Quidre has the first syllable long bv position, thoS tie 
 vowel I in 9Mt^ IS naturally short; the last syJlahle of rfoter^isl^g by foS and 
 
 ?nof.^r„if"t. *VV- l^^'^f '«"f ^y "'**"••«: »« with the last svllible oHe" m- S 
 (naturally short) is here long by position only, and if it were ff^ilnw^d hv™--! "- 
 
 C.ii^°"*° ^ '*'*"''; ^''u "'^tufaliy and metrically. So the first syllable "of volv^eis 
 long by position only, the vowel o in this word being short by nature. 
 
308 
 
 PllIMAllY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 ' ' f V # t 
 
 (r) Si (lua | fatit nI | nflnt, || jilin | tilm ten | dittifto frt | vOtqtte 
 
 (/) Mx('!(lO I rfint. ftiil I mo ; || mitnC't | filta | inriitt^ if' | pu.stnm 
 
 (f/) Lilstra | Idint cdu | vrxit, || \\iS \ IQm dnni | shlCrJl j paHct-b 
 
 Tho pfiuso comiiifj; l»ot\vtHMi tlui two Hlittrl >yIlal)los of tlie foot, 
 as ill tho last cxauiplt), is oalkul tho irochoic, wvnk or fnniiiine 
 caesura, (hat after the irsis, as in tho other examples, being 
 tormed sijllithii-, sfroiKj or maacnUna. 
 
 With these lines may ho compared tho f(»llo\ving English hexa- 
 moters from Longfellow : 
 
 This is the forest primeval. || Tho murmuring [)ines and tho hom- 
 
 loeks, 
 lieardod with moss, || and in garments green, || indistinct in tho 
 
 twilight, 
 Stivnd like Druids of eld, || with Vi)iees sa<l and propluitic, 
 •Stnnd like har'persihoar, || with heanls that rest on their bosoms. 
 Loud from its roeky caverns, || the deep-voiced neighbouring ocean 
 Speaks, || and in accents disconsolate answers the wail of the forest. 
 
 110. (*?) Thero is an *V/.s-/()*( ' (.sj/Mff/«»(7)/'<0 <>i' slurring of the last 
 syllable of a \v<)rd ending with a vowel, diphthong, or letter m 
 jn'ocoded by a vowel, when the following word begins with a 
 vowol, diphthong, or tho letter h. The elision of 7*1, with tho 
 preceding vowel is sometimes tormed (rtldipsifi. 
 
 Examples :— 
 
 Litfirjt I mult(M»j) il | 1(<) et tor | ris || jac | tattls Ct | alto. 
 
 Nocd(ir»») ett I am eilu | s(or) Irii | rum |1 siie | vlqu6 d5 j lores. 
 
 II I ^ I II 
 
 CorrlpI j unt, || ^nO | rJlnt»i(Hr) ail | ro: || dux | fC'mlna | facti. 
 
 — Ill 
 
 Und((') h5ml | nilm ggntls, | et pCcti ] des ; || fin | d((') imbCr 
 
 6t I ign?a 
 Compare : — 
 
 Impreas'd th(f ) effulgence of his glor(j/) abides. 
 May I express th(cf) unblamed, since God is light? 
 T(o) inveigle and invite th(e) unwary sense. 
 
 1. Certain monosyll'vhles auoh as do, dem, spe, speni, situ, etc., do not suffer elision. 
 
"V- 
 
 PART III.— METRE. 
 
 309 
 
 
 ImbCr 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 (/>) A hinlxH (/.('., Uio rotisntion of tho final vowol in HcunHion 
 beforo a word htiginning with a vowul, a dipht/hong or an A), in 
 rai'iily found, UHiially in tin) caHo of proper nanioH, inUirjoctionH 
 and long vowoIh or tliphtliongs, tsHpucially in tho arsis (»f tho foot. 
 In tho thosis, a h»ng vowol is Honiotiiuos shortonod instead of Ijoing 
 
 Exami'LKh: — 
 
 IMsthitbl I ta cc'dri | Isho H& \ nio. || I lie | illiris | unnllii 
 
 / -it II I 
 
 Tun((') II I 1(c) Aeno | as, || (jueni | Dard.lnl | o An | eliTsao 
 
 (This last verso is an oxainplo of those raro [.sp»H(^//c] lines, 
 whieh have a spondee in the fifth foot.) 
 
 / / / / J I 
 
 Victor ft, I pud r.'i[)T | diun || Stnio [ ont,t stlb | lllo | alto, 
 
 1 , , , L , 
 
 Et v5 I r(a) IncGs | sil pfttn | It dCll. |i Ill(r') tlbT | nifitrCm 
 
 Tho division in this verso is tho so-called Inicolk caesura, whieh 
 Ih found after tho fourth foot when that is a <laetyl. 
 
 {(') When the elision occurs at the end of tho verso (which is 
 extroniely seldom), it is called m/ndphcni, tho line being road oi 
 scanned in close connection with tho one following, which, ol 
 course, must begin with a vowol or an /* ; as, 
 
 .Jacto I nitir, dOcO | as:||Tg | nrir(i) hrtnil | nuniqtlo 16 | corfmiqu(e) 
 
 J. I I I I I 
 
 Errii | nins, || ven | t(o) hue et | vastis | tiuctlbtls | acti: 
 
 117. (a) To denote a rapid or lively moveniont, a succession 
 t)f dactyls may bo used ; as, 
 
 / / / / / / 
 
 Radit I I tor \ii\\x\ \ dum || cClC | res n6qu6 | connnOvCt | alas 
 
 Compare with this. 
 
 Leaped like tho roe, when he hears in the woodland the voice 
 of the huntsman. 
 
 Myriads of rivulets hurrying through tho lawn. 
 
 It will be observed that the metre of tho last example is different 
 from that of the preceding one, but, as in tho hexameter, the 
 numerous unaccented syllables are used to denote rapidly repeated 
 action. 
 
 (6) On the other hand a succession of spondees may be used to 
 
 II 
 
310 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 represent a rilow or labored movement, or a stately or majestic gait 
 or appearance ; as, " j o 
 
 Appa I rent ra | rl || nan j t^s In | gilrgltg j viisto 
 Infe I llx sa I xls || In | prGcfir | re'ntlbtis | hae'sit 
 Cert(e) hinc | Roma | nds || o | llm vol | vfintlbtls | annis 
 Ast 6g5 j quae || dl | v(um) inee | dh re | glnS, J6 | vi !:,3- 
 With these verses compare the following : — 
 Stand like harpers hoar, with beards that rest on their bosoms. 
 
 Thousands of aching brains, where theirs no longer are busy, 
 Thousands of toiling hands, where theirs have ceased from their 
 labors. 
 
 118. Closely connected with the use of dactyls or spondees for 
 the purposes mentioned in the last section, is what may be called 
 the mutative harmony of language, that is, the arrangement in 
 proper rhythmical order, of words containing certain vowel or con- 
 sonantal sounds, to represent the sounds made by the animate or 
 inanimate objects described in tV erse ; as, 
 
 Quadrtipg | dantg ptl | trem||s5nl | til qtiatit | ungtiia | camptim 
 
 (of the galloping of horses) 
 
 Ill(i) in I dignan | tes |j mag | no cum | miirmtirg | mfmtis 
 
 (of the roaring of the pent-up winds) 
 
 Afrlctis, I et vas | tos || vol | vunt iid | litfira | fiilctua 
 
 (of »billows dashing upon the shore) 
 
 With these verses the following English examples may be com- 
 pared : 
 
 Loud from its rocky caverns, the deep-voiced neighbouring ocean 
 Speaks, and in accents disconsolate answers the wail of the forest. 
 
 By the long wash of Australasian seas. 
 
 The league-long roller thundering on the reef. 
 
 The moan of doves in immemorial elms, 
 
PART III. — METRE. 
 
 311 
 
 ic gait 
 
 ns. 
 
 their 
 
 ses for 
 called 
 ent in 
 ir con- 
 late or 
 
 mptim 
 
 com- 
 
 •cean 
 brest. 
 
 Now Hoft on the sivnd, now loud on the ledge, 
 Is heard the tramp of his steed as he rides. 
 
 Half a league, half a league, half a league onward. 
 
 I galloped, Dirck galloped, we galloped all three. 
 
 119. It may be stated in conclusion that the poets, owing to the 
 demands of metre, take frequent liberties with the quantities' of 
 the vowels and with the number of the syllables in the words. 
 For examjjle, the word deinde (usually of three syllables) is often 
 treated as if it were of two syllables, dmide. This is called 
 synaeresiSf or synizesis. 
 
 Again, two syllables usually contracted into one in prose often 
 remain distinct in poetry, as, Orpheiia (three syllables), for the 
 usual Orphens (two syllables). This is termed diaeresis. 
 
 Unnis, UUus, etc, are fretjuently found pronounced wmits, illiiia, 
 etc., and especially with proper names is the quantity of the 
 vowels varied to suit the requirements of the verse, as Sychaeiu< 
 and Sychaeus, Ldvlnia and Lavlnia, Sldonius and Sidonifis. 
 
 1. As the ictus falls naturally on a long syllable— on the first syllable of the dactyl 
 or its equivalent spondee — it sometimes happens that a syllable regularly short is 
 lengthened simply because it occupies the part of the foot on which the voice-stress 
 falls. For example, in the verse, 
 
 Litora jactetur, odiin Junonia iniquae, 
 
 the last syllable of jactetur, naturally short, is lengthened on account of its position 
 in the arsis of the foot. It is probable that in most cases where this happens, i'u la 
 merely the retention of an origmally long quantity. 
 
312 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 
 'kci 
 
 EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 \ 
 
 Hyphen^^are used to distiB,uiah the constant from the variable part of Latin 
 
 ■"'' vZh! r "ir^V" *'' '''"°"' "' ^^'•^^ "• '^"'^ "I- I" the Lati„.Engli«h 
 Vocabulary all references are to Part III. '^•susn 
 
 ""' tpfanluon""'"' '''" ''''' ^^^'^^''^"^"^ '^re common, and do not need 
 
 The quantity of all vowels long by nature has been marked. Vowels not marked 
 are to oe considered short by nature. 
 
 .1^,. 
 
PART III.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 313 ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 y 
 
 Latin 
 ibered 
 English 
 
 need 
 arked 
 
 ^->V€--v4,. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 )5. C.2). 
 
 I. LATIN-ENGLISH. 
 
 I 
 
 a, ab, pie'p. w. abl., from, away from; 
 witk pasdves, by. 'J ""•" . 
 
 ''hide"' *"*' ■*^**'* ****""»• conceal, 
 
 "awiv*"' ^'^®' '*^*''' J*'**"*"' throw 
 absuin, abegse, aful, be distant. 
 
 *" drTv^nea^^' "'^^^'' •"^'*^«'"> ''°»^' 
 
 ac cido. ere, citll, happen. 
 
 ac clpld, ere, cepl, ceptum, re- 
 
 ceive. 
 
 ac-curro, ere, -curri or -cucurri 
 
 run up. ' 
 
 acles, el, f., Ijne of battle, line 
 acrlter, (aerlus, acerilme), ado., 
 
 fiercely, desperately. 
 ad, prep. iv. ace, to, towards; near, on 
 
 at, by ; with gerund and gerundive, 
 
 with a view to, for. 
 
 . bnng; mfluence, induce. 
 ademptus, from adimo. 
 
 *" visit' ''®' " ^■''''^' **""»' ^° *«' 
 
 adequlto, are, avi, atum, ride up. 
 
 »;;1!"*A T®' ^"*'' emptum, take 
 away, destroy. 
 
 "?o" **""' ****' *^'' ^*">"' 'ittend 
 
 ador lor, Irl, -tus sum, attack. 
 
 «Il^i»*l*"^"-' ■*'"**^' " . ayoungman. 
 adventus, us, m., approach, arrival 
 aavorsus, a, um, unsuccessful ; nroe- 
 
 humadversum, defeat, repulse 
 aedlflclum, I, n., building. 
 aedlflco, are, avI, atum, build. 
 
 the Aedm (a tribe in Gaitl). ' 
 
 '^l^l^^m^u^^^^-' aegerrlme), adv., 
 
 iStSiSSlt?: "^^^'•^'^'*"^«' -'^^ *he 
 aequus^ a, um, level, favorable-. 
 " gard.""' ^*'®' ^^'' ^*"™' '•^c'^o"' re- 
 a^stus, us, M., tide. 
 
 ''brlnJ.'c^u'Jf*'^' »"«".a"at«m. 
 
 af flleo, ere, flixl, -fllctum, shat- 
 ter, damage, wreck. 
 
 1. affer; agri, m., land, field, territory, 
 
 2. afir-ffer, -fferls, m., mound. ^ 
 
 *JS^.^„**^****' !• K»e88U8 sum, attack. 
 aff-men, -minrs, n., line of march, 
 army (on the inarch), column. 
 
 "cmifer.*"^' ^^'' ^*'*"'"' do; treat, 
 
 "^^•'^"Itura, ae, v., agriculture, farm- 
 
 ali-quls, -qua, -quid or -quod [261. 
 
 some, some one, something. 
 allus; a, ud [14J, other, another; re- 
 peated, m plur., some . . . others. 
 AUobrojsr-es, -um, m. j:>;Mr.,the A.o- 
 
 \>voges (a tribe in Gatil). 
 Alp-es -lum, M. plur., the Alps. 
 alter, ,«ra, erum [141, the other (of 
 two); n-peated, m sing., the one . . . Uie 
 other. 
 altitu-do, -dinls, f., height, depth, 
 altum, I, N., deep water. ^ 
 
 altus, a, um, high, deep. 
 amicltia, ae, f., friendship. 
 1- amicus, a, um, friendly. 
 2. amicus, I, M., friend. 
 
 a«I«M"' ®''f ' "™'^«^' -mlssum, lose. 
 ampllus, adv., more, further. 
 amplus, a, um, large. 
 ancora, ae, f., anchor. 
 
 '* trf "ted"'*' "' ""*' "''"°'^' ^'"*"' «<>"• 
 
 animadver-to, ere, -tl, -sum, no- 
 tice, observe. "wi", "u 
 
 animal, -alls, n., animal. 
 
 ^agf*"^' '' ^'' ^P'"*' '"'"^' h^*'"t> ^O"*"- 
 
 annus, I, m., year. 
 
 1. ante, ado., before, previously, 
 
 ^. ante, prep. iv. ace, before. 
 
 "?iS*'e*xc"l'. *''^' *'^'''' -^e*^""'. sur- 
 
 antlquus, a, um, old, ancient. 
 
 ?!•*.* ?^:..**' ?.n»' exposed, unprotected 
 (i-e., by the shield). 
 
 *E*"^' ®*'®' ■'^'' Itam. strive after, 
 
 or. 
 
 7?^.U 
 
 -to. i^^ 
 
 
 approplnquo, are, avI, come near *f 
 be near (wiiA dae.). «= i-cur, c 
 
314 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 I' 
 
 ■;yiA/v , 
 
 
 rv 
 
 03 
 
 /, 
 
 aquila, ae, v., eagle {the Htandard of 
 the Rinnan lejjion). 
 
 A<|uitaiiiu,au, k., A'|uitania((Ae .vuufA- 
 wente'n part of tiaui) 
 
 arbiter, tri, ^., arbitrator. 
 
 arbltror, iirl, atUH Hum, think, be- 
 liev«!. 
 (arduuH, n, uin, steep, dittioult. 
 
 arlduni, I, n., dry !uiul. 
 larnia, oruiii, n. pliir., arms. 
 
 arnio, are, iivl, atuiii, arm ; perf. 
 part. panH., annet!, in amiH. 
 
 lascendo, eri>, aHcondl, asceusaiii. 
 tnoutit, (Oinib, ascend. 
 
 aHceusuH, iia, m , aHoent. 
 
 aHp«r, era, crnin. ni>rged roujfh. 
 
 atque, and, and further. 
 
 at ttiiKo, ere, -tlffl, -tactuin, touch, 
 reach. 
 
 attrib-u6, ere, ul, -utuiii, assign. 
 
 auc-tor, -toriH, m., leader, adviser. 
 
 aactori-taH, -tatlH, v., influence, pres- 
 tige, weight. 
 
 autlaoter, adu., boldly. 
 
 aadeo, ere, ausuH sum 168, 6], ven- 
 ture, dare. 
 
 audio. Ire, Ivl, Ituii|t, hear. 
 
 auffeo, ere, auxl,auctuin, increase. 
 
 aat, or ; repeated, either ... or. 
 
 auteni, whereas, while ; moreover. 
 
 aiixiilum, I, n., aid; i«, j;*h«-., auxili- 
 aries, reinforcements. 
 
 Avarloum, I, n., Avaricuni (a town in 
 Gaul). 
 
 aver-to, ere, -tl, -sum, turn aside. 
 
 Axona, ae, f., the Axona {a river in 
 Gaul). 
 
 1. .^arbarus, 1, m., barbarian. 
 
 2. barbarus, a, um, uncivilizei}* 
 Bclgae, arniii, m., plur., the Bjelgae 
 
 {a nationin the north of Gaul). J 
 Belgium, 1, N., the country /6i the 
 
 Belgae. . _ _.^^ 
 
 Bellovaci, drum, m. plur., the Bello- 
 
 vaci (a tribe in Gaul). 
 bellnni, I, n., war. 
 Boil, oruni, m. plur., the Doii (name 
 
 of a tribe). 
 brevis, e, short; brevi, tt«ed as ady., 
 
 qtiiokly. 
 Britannia, ae, f., Britain. 
 Britannus, 1, m., a Briton. 
 caeruleus, a, uni, dark blue. 
 Caes-ar, -arls, m., Caesar. 
 
 Cantlnm, 1, n., Ilent. 
 
 caplo, ere, eepi, captum, take, take 
 
 up, select. 
 captlvu8, 1, M. , captive, prisonei. 
 card, carnis, f., meat. 
 car us, a, uni, dear. 
 
 castra, drum, n. plur. , camp. 
 
 cuufiH, ae, v., cauae, reogon ; in the ahl,, 
 
 ""ilh a ijen. jirecediiig, for the sake of, 
 
 for the piu'poMo of. 
 cedo, ore, c»mhI, eeHSUni, retreat. 
 «!eler, era, ei'uin, Hi)eedy. 
 wolerl-taM, -latitt, f., swiftness, rapid* 
 
 ity, activity. 
 centum |lti], a hundred. 
 centur-io, -ionlH, m., centurion (an 
 
 iijiUrr in the Roman arm ,. 
 certus, a, um, certain, fixed, specified. 
 ceterl, ae, a, adj. plur., the rest, the 
 
 others. 
 cfbuH, I, M., food. 
 Ctcer -6, -duis, m., Cicero (a Roman's 
 
 name). 
 cin^i), ere, cinxl, clnctum, sur- 
 round. 
 circiter, ado., about; aUo aa prep. w. 
 
 ace, about. 
 circum-do, -dare, -dedl, -datum, 
 
 surround. 
 circu«i-t;."-'j, ere, -duxl, -ductuni, 
 
 lea<I arrund. 
 circum-venio. Ire, -veni, ventum, 
 
 surround, outHank. 
 citer-ior, -ius, adj. compar., hither, 
 
 nearer (of the me of two provinces 
 
 which lay nearer to Rome). 
 cito (citluH, citi88ime), ado,, swiftly, 
 
 rapidly. 
 clv-ls, -la, M., citizen. 
 <*Ivi-taH, -tails, f., state. 
 ctani, «(/"., secretly. 
 clamor, oris, m., shout, shouting. 
 class-is, -is, f., fleet. 
 cllens, cllentis, m., vassal, retainer. 
 coepi [72], began. 
 coerceo, ere, ul, Itum, restrain, 
 
 check. 
 cogito, are, avl, atuin, consider. 
 c6gnat-io, -ionls, f. , relationship, con- 
 nections. 
 co-gno8c5, ere, -gnovl, -gnltum, 
 
 learn, find out. 
 cogd, ere, coegl, coactum, collect ; 
 
 compel. 
 cohortor, arl, atus sum, encourage. 
 cohbr-s, -tls, f., cohort, couipany (one- 
 
 tenth of a legion). 
 coll-is, -is, M., hill. 
 collocd, are, avl, atum, station, 
 
 place. 
 colo, ere, colul, cultum, till, culti- 
 vate. 
 col-or, -oris, m., color. 
 conimeatus, us, m. , supphes (i/ejierai??/ 
 
 u»cd in the sing.). 
 com-mitto, ere, -misl, -missum, 
 
 entrust; ivith proelium, join, begin. 
 Commlus, I, m., Commius (a Gaul's 
 
 name). 
 commoror, arl, atus sum, wait, 
 
 stay. 
 com-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum, 
 
 communio, ire^ Ivl, Itum, fortify. 
 
 
 I 
 
 1- 
 
 z::t:: 
 
PART III.— VOCABULAUY. 
 
 315 
 
 VonuiiuiiiH, e, eoiuiuon, general 
 coiiinuru, are, iivl, atuiii, make 
 
 ready, jirooure, raise, collect. 
 coiit pellu, ere, pull, imUuiii, 
 
 drive. 
 
 coin-pled, ere, -plevi, pletuiii, fill 
 u]), nil. 
 
 coinplures, ia, adj. vlur. [12], aeverul. 
 
 very iiiany. 
 coinpurtu, are, avi, atuui, brinir in. 
 coiiipre hendo, ere, heudl, -hen- 
 
 HUin, seize. 
 conntuin, I, :«., attempt. 
 con-ceUo, ere, ceNsl, -eeNHuin, grant. 
 con-cldo, ere, -cidl, -elsuin, cut 
 
 uown, kill. 
 
 concUlo, are, avI, atum, win over. 
 Kam. 
 
 concilium, I, n., meetinir, assemblv. 
 
 council. •' ' 
 
 con-curru, ere, -curri or -cucurrl. 
 
 ■cursuni, hurry, flock. 
 f^oncurHus, us, m., charge, attack. 
 condlo-lo, -lonls, k., terms, proposol. 
 condunu, are, avI, atuni, overlook. 
 confero, cunferre, contull, colla- 
 
 tuin, collect ; with se, betake. 
 con flolo, ere, feci, -fectuni, ac 
 
 conmhsh, finish ; exhaust. 
 oon-flcio, ere, -flHUH sum m, b], 
 
 trust, have confidence in {with dat.). 
 conflrino, are, avI, atuni, encour- 
 age, establish, arouse 
 con-fuglo, ere, -fugl, flee, flee for 
 
 refuge. 
 
 cor Jlclo, ere, -jecl, -Jectuin, hurl, 
 
 / .dt; H'lthmfwjam, put. 
 Conor, arl, atus sum, try, attempt. 
 con-scrlbo, ere, -scrlpsi, -scrln- 
 
 tuni, enlist. 
 consensus, us, m., consent. 
 con-sermor, I, -secutus sum, follow; 
 
 overtake. 
 
 con-sldo, ere, -sedl, -sessuni, en- 
 camp. 
 
 consilium, 1, y.., plan, design; pru- 
 dence 
 
 con-slsto, ere, -stltl, halt, take up 
 position. 
 
 conspectus, us, m., sight, view. 
 
 con-splclu, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 
 see, catch sight of, behold. 
 
 consplcor, arl, atus sum, see, ob- 
 serve. 
 
 constlt-uo, ere, -ul, -utum, decide; 
 determine, resolvej station. 
 
 consuetu-do, -dlnls, v., custom. 
 
 con-sumo, ere, -sumps!, -sump- 
 turn, spend. 
 
 con-temno, ere, -tempsi, -temp- 
 tuin, despise. 
 
 conten-do, ere, -dl, -tum, hasten; 
 contend. 
 
 c-oiitcstor, ari, atus sum, invoke, 
 call upon. 
 
 contln-ens, -entlii, f., continent, main- 
 land. ' 
 
 con tlneo. ere, tlnul, tentum, re 
 
 stram, keep, heiu in. 
 contlnuuN, u. uni, successive. 
 contra,/>/v^. w.acc, opijosite, 
 
 re<luce, contract. 
 con-venio, Ire, veni, ventum. 
 
 come together, assemble. 
 
 conver-to ere, tl. sum. change. 
 
 ConylctolltavlH. -Is, m.. Convictoli- 
 taviH {a Gaul It name). 
 
 convoc6, are, avl, atum, coll to 
 gether, summon. 
 
 co-orior, Irl, -ortus sum, arise. 
 
 coplu, ue, v., in tiliuj., supply, abun- 
 dance, [)lenty ; inplitr., forces, troops. 
 
 cornu, us, n., wing(o/n« army). i 
 
 corpus, -oris, n., bwly. ; 
 
 rotttt, lie, M., Cotta (n Jioman'H name). 
 
 1 otus, I, M. , Cotus (a GauC name). 
 
 creUer, br«, brum, numerous, fre- 
 •pient. 
 
 cremo, are, avl, atum, burn. 
 creo are, avl, atum, elect. 
 oruolatus, us, m., torture, cruelty. 
 cul-men, -minis, n., summit. 
 cultus, us, M., civilization. 
 ^•^l»'»- i^ty). w. ahl., with, together 
 
 2. cum, conj., when, after; as, since. 
 
 cunctor, arl, atus sum, hesitate. 
 
 cuplde, ado., eagerly. 
 
 cur, why. 
 
 currus, us, m., chariot. 
 
 cui^us, us, M., course. 
 
 U 
 
 de, prep. w. ahl, about, concernbg. of • 
 
 with causa, for. 
 decem [19], ten. 
 
 de-cerno. ere. -crevi, -cretmn, de- 
 cide. 
 
 dccimus, a, um. >enth. 
 
 decllvis, e, sloping. 
 
 de-curro, ere, -curri ol cucurri 
 -cursum, run down. 
 
 dedlt-16, -lonls, k., surrender. 
 
 de-do, ere, -dldl, -dltum, surrender, 
 give up. 
 
 de dueo, ere, duxl, ductum, lead 
 oft, withdraw. 
 
 de-fendo, ere, -fendl, -fensum, de- 
 fend. 
 
 de-fero, -ferre, -tull, -latum, report. 
 de-fetlscor, I, -fcssus sum, become 
 
 exhausted ; perf.part., exhausted. 
 de flclo, ere, -feci, -fectura, fail, 
 
 revolt. 
 delnde, adv., then. 
 de-jiolo, ere, -jecl, -jectum, carry 
 
 down, drive ashore. 
 de-U^o, ere, -legl, -lectum, choose. 
 demonstro, are, -av!, -atum. Doint 
 
 out. - r- -- 
 
 dunsus, a, um, thick, dense. 
 
 ^- MD. 
 
 
 
 un .li ' n M 
 
 f.^.H. 
 
316 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 kX/ 
 
 •u{ 
 
 
 Q)^ 
 
 de-ponu, ero, -poHiiI, -poHltiim, lay 
 
 do-Hlll6, Ir«, -hIIuI, -Hultiiiii, leup 
 
 down. 
 fleH|>er6, aro, Avl, atuin, di-Kpnir, 
 
 / jfive lip lu)|H'. 
 
 IdCNIIIII. <lt«l>RNf>. (Il'flll, lit' llickilljf. 
 
 diHrliiu'iitoHiiM, u, iiin, litirtfiil. 
 
 deterrt'o, i«rc, ul, Itaiii, dftcr, pre- 
 
 , vent. 
 
 de-tlneo, ero, -tinul, -tuutuin, <lc- 
 tain. 
 
 douti, I, M. [!)], Ood. 
 
 de-vonl«i, Ire, -venl, -vontnn., 
 come, (rtdiic down. 
 
 dexter, tni, truiii, rijfht. 
 
 dl.yrom <leuH. 
 
 ;dIco, ere, dixl, dii-tuiii, say. 
 
 {dies, el, M., dav. 
 
 dlfTero, difl'erre, dUtnll. dllii- 
 
 I tmn, differ, lie <lifferent. 
 
 dIHieillH. (vditflciilt. 
 , dItficul-taN, -tatlH, v., <liffleult.v. 
 ' dlliiureiitia, lie, k., eare, watelilfiilncHS. 
 
 dliiiieo, are, avl, iituin, fl^^lit. 
 j dl-niitto, ere, -iiiInI, -iiiInhuiii, uerid 
 I out ; diHinisH ; let sli)), joHe. 
 f dlH-ct'do, ere, -cesHi, -ceHHUin, de- 
 > part, witiidraw : dixri'dc re ab — leixvo. 
 
 dlNCi'HNUH, UH, M., departure. 
 
 dlM'o, ere, dldiel, learn. 
 |dl8-Jicl6, ere, -jecl, -jeetuin, break, 
 i scatter. 
 
 : dinper-ffo, ere, -si, -nuiii, scatter. 
 ' dU-tlneo, ere, -ttnul, -tentuin, keep 
 j apart, keep at a distance. 
 I dlu (dlutiuH, dlutiHHliiie), adv. , king, 
 j for a lonjf time. 
 
 dl-vido, ere, -visl, -visum, separate, 
 divide. 
 
 do, dare, dedl, datum, give, grant ; 
 with in fur/am, \nit. 
 
 doc-eo, ere, -ul, -turn, inform. 
 
 dolus, I, M., deceit, craft, cunning. 
 
 doml, ado., at home. 
 
 doinleiliuni, I, n., home. 
 
 dono, are, avl, atum, present. 
 
 Druldes, uni, m. plur., the Druids (the 
 prieats «/ the Oauls). . 
 
 dnbito, are, avl, atum, hesitate ; 
 have doubts. 
 
 ducentl, ae, a [19], two himdred. 
 
 duco, ere, duxl, ductum, lead. 
 
 d 11 111, con}., while. 
 
 Dilin lorlx, -igls, m., Dumnorix (a 
 GaiU'n name). 
 
 duo, j>e, o [IS], two. 
 
 duodeciai [li)], twelv ,. 
 
 du-plex, -pllcls, double. 
 
 E 
 
 S, see ex. 
 
 e-duco, ere, -duxl, 
 
 out. 
 ef-flcl6, ere, -feci, • 
 
 plish ; produce. 
 
 Co" lioj, i. 
 
 o){ 
 
 %Ki'~ 
 
 -ductum, lead 
 fectuui, accom- 
 
 ^•ffredlor, 1, -fcreHNUN Hum,goout; 
 
 liui'l, di>it inbark. 
 <''fi[ref(l»**< H, uiii, reniarkablo, 
 t'vllc'lo, ere, -,leel, -Jeetuiii. iHngout; 
 
 m' >'jifi'ri' niMli out. 
 eiiiiiitio, i'lre, avl, atiiiii, clisdoHe. 
 
 1. eo, Ire, il (IvI), Itiiiii II5J, t;o, 
 niai'ch. 
 
 2. eo, ndi\, to that place, there. 
 e(|ueN, e4|uitis, m., horse iioldier; in 
 
 /ilur., cavalrv. 
 e«|iieHt<M', trls, tre, of cavalry, cavalry. 
 e(|iiitatiiN, UM, M., cavalry. 
 eqiiUH, I, M., horse. 
 e-ruiiipo, ere, -riipl, -ruptum, 
 
 make a sally. 
 erupt-16, -ion Is, v., sally, sortie. 
 et, .md. 
 
 etiam, adn., also, even. 
 etsl, althoiitfh. 
 e-venir>. Ire, -veni, -ventum, turn 
 
 out, result, 
 evooo, are, avl, atum, chuUenge. 
 evol«">, are, avl, atum, rush out. 
 ox, prep. XV. aid., from, out of; with 
 
 n iitneralu, of, out of, from ; with para, 
 
 on. 
 exelt*), are, avl, atum, stimulate. 
 oxeiiiplum, 1, N., example, 
 ox-eo, -Ire, -II (-IvI), -itum [45], q-o 
 
 out; ex . . ^.W), leave. 
 exereltat-lo, -ionis, v., practice. 
 exereltus, us, .m., army. 
 exijcrui-tas, -tatls, f., shortnes-s. 
 exiNtliiio, are, avl, atum, think. 
 expedltus, a, uiii, ea^y. 
 ex-pell6, ere, -pull, -pulsum, driv3 
 
 out, banish. 
 explora-tor, -toris, m., scout. 
 exploro, are, avl, atum, examine, 
 
 reconnoitre. 
 ex-pono, ere, -posul, -posltum, 
 
 display, array ; di.sembafk, land. 
 expujE^no, aire, avl, atum, take by 
 
 storm 
 ex-secjuor, 1, -secutus sum, enforce. 
 exspeeto, are, avl, atum, await. 
 ex-struo, ere, -struxl, -structum, 
 
 rai«e, build. 
 extremus, a, um, tiuperl. adj. [13], 
 
 farthest, last. 
 ex-uro, ere, -ussi, -ustuiu, burn up. 
 
 F 
 
 faber, brl, m., workman. 
 
 facile, adv., easily. 
 
 faclUs, e, easy. 
 
 faclo, ere, feci, factum, do, make ; 
 
 proeltmn facio, fight a battle. 
 fact-16, -lonls, f., party. 
 facul-tas, -tatls, f., opportunity. 
 familia, ae, f., household, family. 
 faveo, ere, favl, fautum, favor 
 
 (with dat). 
 f ellclter, adv. , successfully, luckily. 
 
 i, 
 
PART JII. -VOCAUULARY. 
 
 817 
 
 fero. forpe, tull. latum r44l, hear. 
 
 rurr.v ; lniiiK ; finlur«. " 
 
 fvrtlllN, ©, firtilc. 
 fhh'llH, «, fuithful, lovftl. 
 tUU'H, vl, v., honor, word, n<l<lity. 
 Iitfiirii, 11*4, F., Htiapc 
 flllu, Uf, K., (liiUKhter. 
 
 niillM, 1, M., HOIl. 
 
 fin Ih, -Ih, M.,eml; in plur., tcnitorv. 
 
 territoneH, coiiiitry, hijul. 
 riiiltlinuH, «, uiii, iifiKhliorinir, wlja- 
 
 v.eut. "• 
 
 f 16, fieri, fuctuii nuiii fJOl, he inafli- 
 he done; in .ird m,,,,., \m\>iK'u, coiiio 
 ahoiit. 
 
 flriiio, are, avl, atuin, Htn■ll^fthon. 
 
 flrinuN, a, uiii, powerful, Htronif. 
 
 fleo, ere nOvl, fletiiin, wwp. 
 
 floreiiH, eiitlM. lloinishiiiK, influential. 
 
 tliictuN, iiH, M , wave. 
 
 flu-inon, -iiiiniH, n , river. 
 
 Iliio, ore, lluxl, flitxrit], flow. 
 
 fore, the, future infinitiue »/ sum. 
 
 fort Is, e, brave. 
 
 fortlter, adi'., bravely. 
 
 fort una, ae, v., fortune, lot. 
 
 fossa, ae, v., trench, moat. 
 
 tra-ter, trls, m., brother. 
 frlff-uH, -oris, N., cold, frost. 
 truinentarlus, a, uni, pertaining to 
 Kj-ain, of grain ; re.i /rfanentdria, pro- 
 visions. ^ 
 
 frunientor, arl, atus sum, foratre. 
 
 gret provisions. 
 frumentum, I, n., pra n, corn. 
 fuffa, ae, f., flight. 
 fusrlo,ere, fngl, fuffltum, flee. 
 "f ht ***'*'' ^ «■*«"». rout, put to 
 funda, ae, r., sling. 
 
 Hn>er»ila, ae, p., Ireland. 
 
 lie, luiee. hoe C/)). this, the followinir. 
 iilenio, are, avl, atum. j>a«. the win- 
 ter, winter. 
 tileiiiH, lilemlM, k., winter. 
 •join-o. III Is M., man; 'n plur., neonle. 
 [loni, ae, K.hour. ^ *^ 
 
 liorrliliis, a, uiii, terril)lo. 
 Host -Is, -Is, M. (yeneiaU,/ in the plur.), 
 
 eiieniv. ' 
 
 iMiiiiaiii-tas, -tatis, v., rennement. 
 luiinaiius, a, uiii. refined, civilize<l. 
 iHuiilHs.o, low, lowly. 
 
 
 G 
 
 Galba, ae, m., Galba {a Roman'n name). 
 
 firalea, ae, f., helmet. 
 
 Gallia, ae, f., Gaul. 
 
 Gallleus a, um, of Gaul, of the Gauls. 
 
 Gallus, I, M., a Gaul. 
 
 gener, eri, m., son-in-law. 
 
 gen-us, -erls, n„ race ; kind, style. 
 ei-manus, I, m., a German. 
 gero, ere, Kessl, gestum, carr on, 
 do ; utth bellum, wage ; vrith magUtrd. 
 tun, hold. . 
 
 grladlus, I, M., sword. 
 gratus, a, um, pleasing, acceptable. 
 gravis, e, heavy ; hard, bitter. 
 gubernator, -toilg, m., pilot. 
 
 H 
 
 Helvetil, orum, m. plur., the Helve- 
 tians_(a tribe in Gaul). 
 
 ^S*y^^*«s> a, «m, Helvetian, of the 
 Helvetians. 
 
 habeo, ere, ul, Itum, have; hold 
 
 regard ; with ordiid, deliver. 
 niberna orum, n., vlur..mnternntir. 
 
 leret, winter camp. 
 
 I hi, mil}., there. 
 
 l<ieiii, eadeiii. Idem f2.11, the same. 
 iditneus, a, um, suitable. 
 Ignis, -is, M., thv. 
 
 Ignoseo, ere, Ignovl, Ignotum, 
 foitfive, i)ar(l()n, (irit/i dnt.). 
 
 the *""' "*"** '"^'' ^*""'' *>«> "he, it, 
 lllustrls, e, distinguished. 
 imniortalls, e, imniorta). i 
 
 Impe.ilnientum, 1, N.hindre -e, ob-l 
 
 stacle ; in plur., baggage, baggage-train. 
 Iinj>edlo, Ire, UI, UunT, obstruct 
 
 hinder, buiiii)er. 
 Ini pello, ere, pull, pulsum, in- 
 
 cite, instigate. 
 
 Imperlum, I, n., command, order; rule. 
 .suj>romacy. ' 
 
 impero, are, avl, atnm, give orders, 
 order, command {with dat.); require, 
 
 linpetro, are, arl, atum, obtain 
 
 one s leijuest. 
 Impetus, us, m., attack ; fury. 
 Implqro. .ire, avl, atum, entreat. 
 improvlsus, a, um, unforeseen; d6 
 
 DtiprovlHi), unexpectedly. 
 
 1. In, irrep. w. arc, into, "to ; at, on. 
 
 2. in, prep. w. ahl., in; on. 
 Incendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, 
 
 burn, set on fire. 
 Inclto, are, avl, atum, arouse, stir 
 
 up. 
 Inoognltus, a, uni, unknown. 
 In-folo, ere, colul, dwell, inhabit. 
 Incolumls, e, safe, in safety. 
 lnours-l«», -tonls, p., raid, inroad. 
 Inoredlbllls, e, incredible. 
 Indul geo, ere, -si, -turn, favor (m«A 
 
 dat.). ^ 
 
 Ind-uo, ere, -ul, -utum. put on. 
 Infer-lor, -lus, compar. adj., lower. 
 '"/H^..**i Jnferre Intuli. II latum 
 
 {with bellum), make ; {^vith injuriam) 
 
 cause, do. 
 In^flcfo, ere, feci, feotuni, stain. 
 Intlnltus, a, um, boundless, vast. 
 Influo, ere, -fluxl, -fluxum. flow 
 
 [into]. 
 in-gens. -gentis, adj., huge. 
 ......... ,.„„j ""^'."*""'="^'y> nostiie. 
 
 inltlum, I, N., beginning ; edge. 
 
 
 n- n. 
 
 h 
 
 I 
 
318 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Injuria, ae, f., wrong-doing, injurv', 
 wrong. 
 
 inopla, ae, f., want, scarcit', tiearth, 
 lack. 
 
 In-8equor, I, -secutus sum, pursue. 
 Insldlae, ^ruin, t\ plur., ambush. 
 Instit-ud, ere, -ul, -utuiii, train; 
 levy. 
 
 In-sto, are, stltl, -statum, press for- 
 ward. 
 
 In-struo, ere, -struxl, -structam, 
 
 draw up. 
 
 Insula, ae, f., island. 
 
 ilnteerer, gra, grrum, fresh. 
 
 inteMego, ere, -lexl, -lectum, un- 
 derstand, be aware. 
 
 inter, pre.]), w. ace, among; between. 
 i inter-eludo, ere, -clusl, -clusum, 
 cut off. 
 
 Inter-flclo, ere, -feci, -fectuni, kill, 
 put to death. 
 
 I Interim, ado., meanwhile. 
 plnter-lor -lus, compar. adj., interior; 
 i mteriOres, those living in the interior. 
 
 Inter-mitto, ere, -misl, -mlssum, 
 ], interrupt, stop. 
 P Inter-pres, -pretls, m., interpreter. 
 
 II Ir^tra, prep. w. ace, within. 
 
 , Intro-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum. 
 ' lead [in]. ' 
 
 Inutllls, e, useless. 
 
 In-venlo, Ire, -veni, -ventum, find. 
 
 ipse, ipsa, ipsuni [23], -self ; he him- 
 self. 
 
 is, Cc, !d [22], that ; he, she, it, they. 
 
 Ita, adv. , so, in such a way. 
 
 Italia, ae, f., Italy. 
 
 -■:aque, adv., accordingly. 
 
 Item, adv., also. 
 
 iter, itlneris, n., march, road, route, 
 journey. 
 
 
 • , aeld, ere, j eel, j actum, cast. 
 , , am, adv., now, by this time. 
 ij , ubed, ere, jiissi, jfissum, order. 
 (/ij judico, are, avi, atr.ni, decide, judge, 
 ': _ consider. 
 
 f| jnmentum, I, n., beast of burden. 
 • U8,Jurl8, N., right. 
 uvo, are, j uvl, J utum, aid, assist 
 
 f 
 
 Lablenns, I, ji... Labienus {a Romar's 
 vnme). 
 
 labor, -oris, m , toil. 
 
 laboro, are, avI, atnm, be in diffi- 
 culty, be hard pressed 
 
 lac, lactis, n, , milk. 
 
 lacess-o, ere, -IvI, -Itum, harass, at- 
 tack. 
 
 lacrima, ae, f., tear. 
 
 lacus, lis, M., lake. 
 
 latltii-dd, -dlnls, f.. width, extent. 
 
 1. lac-US, -eris, n., side, llank 
 
 2. latus, a, um, broad, wide, late, 
 adv., widely. 
 
 leiiT^t-lo, -ionls, f., embassy. 
 
 iej^atuK, I, M., ambassador; lieutenant, 
 staff-officer. 
 
 Jeg-lo, -ionis, f., legion. 
 
 JLemannus, I, m., Lemannus (a lake 
 now called Geneva). 
 
 lenis, e, gentle, light. 
 
 lenl-tas, -tatis, f,, sluggishness, gentle- 
 ness. 
 
 lev is, e, slight, trifling. 
 
 lex, legls, F.,law. 
 
 1. liber, era, erum, free. 
 
 2. llberl, drum, m. plur.. children. 
 liitavlccus, I, M.,Litaviccu8(a Gaul's 
 
 name). 
 
 lltterae, arum, f. plur., letter, de- 
 spatch. 
 
 llt-us, -oris, N., shore. 
 
 1<K!U8, I, M. (plur. loca, orum, n.), 
 place, position, ground 
 
 lonjsre (longrlus, longrlsslme), far. 
 
 longrus, a, um, long. 
 
 loquor, I, locutns sum, speak, say. 
 
 luna, ae, f., moon. 
 
 Liutetla, ae, f., Lutetia (a town in 
 Gaul). 
 
 lux, luds, f., light; 2M*7ma lux, dawn, 
 daybreak. 
 
 mag'ls, compar. adv., more, rather, 
 maglstratus, us, m., magistrate, office. 
 magnltu-do, -dlnls, f., size, extent. 
 maenus, a, um, great, large. 
 maj-or, -us, compar. adj., greater, 
 
 larger. 
 maleflcinm, I, n., mischief, outrage. 
 malo, maile nialul [43], prefer, had 
 
 rather, be more willing. 
 maneo, ere, mansX, mansuin, re- 
 main, continue. 
 manns, us, f., hand; manil (with mu- 
 
 nitus), by art. 
 Marcus, I, m., Marcus (a Roman name). 
 mare, maris, n., sea. 
 marltlmus, a, um, maritime, of or 
 
 on the sea. 
 materia, ae, f., timber, materials. 
 maturus, i-., um, ripe ; early ; adv., 
 
 mature (nuperl. maturrlme), soon. 
 maxime, superl. adv., very greatly, 
 
 very much » most. 
 medlus, a, um, middle, midst. 
 inemoria, ae, f., memory. 
 mens-ls, -is, m., month. 
 merca-tor, -toris, m., trader. 
 .merldles, el, m., noon. 
 meus, a, um [^l],'my, mine. 
 mll-es, -Itis, m., soldier. 
 mllitarls, e, military. 
 mille [16], thousand. 
 nilnime, tiupcd. adv., least; by no 
 
 means. 
 min-or, -us, comp. adv., smaller, less. 
 inlror, arl, atus sum, wonder. 
 nilras, a, um, wonderful. 
 
H 
 (.1 
 
 PART III.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 319 
 
 ; lieutenant, 
 nus (a lake 
 iiess, gentle- 
 
 hildren. 
 us (a Gavl's 
 
 letter, de- 
 
 irum, N.), 
 me), far. 
 peak, say. 
 [a town in 
 lux, dawn, 
 
 •ather, 
 
 trate, office. 
 
 :e, extent. 
 
 :e. 
 
 i., greater, 
 
 outrage, 
 prefer, had 
 
 tisuin, re- 
 
 i {with mu- 
 
 laii name). 
 
 ime, of or 
 
 erials. 
 irly ; adv., 
 me), soon. 
 ■V greatly, 
 
 1st. 
 
 t; by no 
 
 Her, less, 
 der. 
 
 "pSie "*"' ®'""*' retched, unhappy, 
 
 IUa/Pi'.®''®' 1",'?'' mlssuin, send. 
 
 mobllls, e, fickle, capricious. 
 moderor, arl, atus sum, check, con- 
 trol. 
 
 moneo, ere, ul, Itum, warn, advise. 
 nions, montls, m , mountain. 
 mora, ao^ f., delay 
 
 1. morior, I, mortuus sum, die 
 z. moror, arl, atus sum, delay, lin- 
 
 ger. 
 mors, mortis, f., death. 
 mos, mqrls, m., custom. 
 motus, lis, M., movement, motion, up- 
 
 "*S^' f'"' *"^^'' »notum,move; 
 
 ■with cagtm, move, break up 
 
 *"JJl!?*""**;?' •*""*«' ^^ multitude, 
 great number. 
 
 mnltum, adv., much. 
 multus, a, um, much ; inplur., many 
 tec" ' *' '*''' """*' ^«f«fy7pro- 
 
 munlt-io, -lonls, f , fortification. 
 niurus, I, iL, wall. 
 
 N 
 
 ^' '^^r.?.* *?**J' '' na*^t«8(ornanotu8) 
 sum, find, get. 
 
 2. nascor^ I natus sum, be bom. 
 
 nat-lo, -ionis, f , nation, race 
 
 natura, ae, f., nature; character. 
 
 nauta, ae, m., sailor. 
 
 nautic'us, a, um, naval, pertaining to 
 
 the sea ; res nauticae, seamanship 
 na vleo, are, a vl, atum, sail. '- 
 
 nav-is, -Is, v., ship. 
 ne, lest, that not (p. 98); ne . . aui- 
 
 dem, not even. * 
 
 neo, see neque. 
 necessarlus, a, um, critical. 
 neco, are, avi, atum, kill. 
 
 "S!Seg!rT' ■'""'• ^^*'*"-' -^■ 
 
 "nft?fe^^''^*""^'^^">''-^'--- 
 
 nemo (5i, a], no one. 
 nequaquam, adv., by no means 
 neque (nee), and . . . not, nor; re- 
 mated, neither . . . nor. 
 
 f V"' .^""".V*' "• P^^^-' the Nervii (a 
 tnbe m Gaul). ^ 
 
 "f «ter, tra, truni [U], neither. 
 nimi, N., indeclinable, nothing; al,o 
 
 ffld«., not at all 
 nisi, unless, except. 
 nobllls, e, well-born, noble. 
 noceo, ere, ul, injure, harm (ufith dat.\ 
 nolo, nolle, ndlul[43], beunw;;iu.g, 
 
 not to wish. "' 
 
 nonus, a, um, ninth. 
 
 nos, plur. of ego [18], we. 
 
 noster, tra, trum, our; nogtri, our 
 
 men. ' 
 
 novem, nine. 
 novus, a, um, new. 
 nox, noctis, f., night. 
 niidus, a, um, unprotected, bare. 
 
 "^^/ *' /*'.?"*' "°' "0"e; «'«o. in gen. 
 oat. and ahl., no one. 
 
 numerus, I, w., number. 
 nunquam, ado., never. 
 nuntlo, are, avI, atum, announce. 
 news ' **■' ™^^^enger; message, 
 
 O 
 
 Ob, i^rep. w. ace, on account of, for. 
 
 "^VmpTom' ^'*' ^''^' **"*"' ^^^^''^^ 
 ob-ses, -sldls, m., hostage. 
 
 ^'tfi.tat.^'^' ■'^*"' ■«e««um,block- 
 
 ^^^tet'^t^o'-ct.Kv.?"'' ^*"-' «^>^' 
 
 Ob tlneo, ere, -tlnul, tentum, oc- 
 
 cupy, hold, possess. 
 occas-lo, -lonls, p., opportunity. 
 oceasus, us, m., settmg; aolis occdsus. 
 
 sunset. ' 
 
 1- g^n****"' ®**®' cldl, casum, fall, be 
 
 2. oc cldo, ere, -cidl, Kjisum, kill, 
 
 oeculto, are, avI, atum, onceal. 
 occupo, are, avI, atum, seize. 
 oc-eurro, ere, -currl, -cursum. 
 
 meet ; oppose, check ; (with dat. ). 
 Ocelum, I N Ocelum (a town in Ita'y 
 
 near the Alps). * ^ 
 
 oeto [16]. eight. 
 
 octodecim [16], eighteen. 
 
 octoginta [16], eighty. 
 
 ooulus, I, M., eye. 
 
 offlclum, I, N., duty, allegiance. 
 
 omms, e, all ; 8ometim''s inning., everv 
 
 «»;y5''.' '"''^1' ''■' ''"'•^en. weight. ^ 
 oppldum, I, N., town. 
 
 ** Uumte"""**' **' ""'' oPPO'^tune, for- 
 
 op-i>rImd, ere, -pressl, -pressum. 
 
 overwhelm ; bear down. ^»»"'". 
 
 oppugno, are, avI, atum, attack. 
 opeimus, a, um, st.perl. adi., best. 
 op-US, -erls, n., work ; fortification. 
 ora, ae, k., shore, coast ; ora mantima, 
 _ the sea coast. 
 
 ora tlo, -lonls, p., speech, address. 
 or-do, -dlnls, m., rank. 
 osten-do, ere, -dl, -turn, show, point 
 
 out ; disclose, unmask. 
 
 or. 
 
 mn^ 
 
 b 
 
 
 nondum', not yet. 
 
 "X""fl"' "** "*' '"^^' -P'^**-' ««"'«' 
 
 pa^H, I, M., district, canton, clan 
 
 pal-US, -ndls, f., marsh. 
 
 par, Paris, adj., equal, a match for. 
 
 .#!^lfip'" 
 
320 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 
 CK^j'-'i 
 
 tj 
 
 Oil 
 
 I 
 
 pared, ere, ul, Itnni, be obedient, 
 obey (with dat.). 
 
 paro, are, avi, atum, prepare, pro- 
 cure ; ;?cr/. part, pass., paratus, a, 
 nm, ready. 
 
 pars, partis, v., part. 
 
 pa88U8, 118, M., pace (about Jive feet; 
 1000 pac('x = one liovmn mile). 
 
 pate-facio, ere, -feci, -factum; pas- 
 sive, pate-f lo, -fieri, -factus sum 
 [46], open up, keep open. 
 
 pateo, ere, ul, extend. 
 
 pa-ter, -trls, m., father. 
 
 patlor, I, passns sum, suffer, allow ; 
 endure. 
 
 pauci, ae, a, plur. adj., few. 
 
 pauluiii, adv., a little. 
 
 pjix, pacts, K., peace. 
 
 peciinia. ae, v., money, sum of money. 
 
 ped-es, -Itis, m., foot soldier ; (in plur.) 
 infantry. 
 ^pedester, trls, tre, adj., of infantry ; 
 I c6piaepe.destrf'H,\x\i&r\iry. 
 
 peditatus, us, m., infantry. 
 
 pell-is, is, F., skin. 
 
 pello, ere, pepull, pulsum, defeat, 
 r rout, drive back. 
 
 per, prep. w. ace, throVigh bj- means of. 
 
 ' per-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductuni, 
 
 carry, carry alongr. bring ; lead safely. 
 
 perfaciiis, e, very easy. 
 
 per-fero. -ferre, -tull, -latum, en- 
 dure, submit to ; bring, report. 
 • per-ficio, ere, -feci, -fectuni, finish ; 
 
 carry out. 
 I perlculosus, a, um, dangerous. 
 
 perlculuni, I, n., danger. 
 
 per-maneo, ere, -mansi, -man- 
 sum, remain, persist, continue. 
 
 per-moved^ ere, -movl, -motum, 
 i alarm, dismay. 
 
 J permultl, ae, a. plur^ adj. , very many. 
 ^ per-runipu, ere, -rupl, -ruptum, 
 break through, force a passage. 
 
 per-spiclo, ere, -spexl, spectum, 
 see, find out. 
 
 per-suadeo, ere, -suasi, -sua sum, 
 persuade (with dat.). 
 
 perterreo, ere, ul, itum, terrify ; in 
 the passive, be pani --stricken. 
 
 pertineo. ere, ul. extend. 
 
 perturbo, are, avI, atum, throw 
 into confusion, disturb. 
 
 pervagor, arl, atus sum, roam, 
 range, scour the country. 
 
 per-venlo. Ire, -vehl, -ventum. 
 come ; pervenire with ad and ace. = reach. 
 
 pes*, pedis, m. . foot ; pedem refer re (to 
 bear hack the foot), retreat, fall back. 
 
 pet-6, ere, -IvI, -Itum, ask, seek, beg. 
 
 phal-anx, -angels, f., phalanx, solid 
 column. 
 
 pllum, I, N., javelin. 
 
 plenus, a, um, full. 
 
 pluriiiius, a, um, superl. adj., very 
 many, most; plurimum, adv., most, 
 very much. 
 
 plus, pluris [12], more. 
 
 polllceor, eri, Itus sum, promise. 
 
 pono, ere, posul, positum, place ; 
 (of camp), pitch ; lay down ; in passive, 
 be situat'jd. 
 
 pons, pontis, m., bridge. 
 
 populor, arl, atus sum, devastate. 
 
 populus, I, M., nation, people. 
 
 porta, ae, f., gate. 
 
 porto, are, avI, atum, carry. 
 
 portus, us, M., harbor. 
 
 posco, ere, poposcl, demand. 
 
 possum, posse, potui [42J, unth in- 
 Jinitive, be able, can ; vxith adverb, be 
 ]}owerful. 
 
 post, jrrep. w. ace, after. 
 
 postea. adv., afterwards. 
 
 posterus, a, um, next, following. 
 
 post(|uain, conj., after. 
 
 postuio, are, avI, atum, demand, 
 require. 
 
 pot-ens, -entls, powerful. 
 
 potentia, ae, f., power, influence. 
 
 potes-tas, -tatls, f., power. 
 
 prae-eeps, -cipitis, steep. 
 
 praecipue, adv., especially, particu- 
 larly. 
 
 praeda,ae, f., plunder. 
 
 praedico, are, avI, atum, proclaim, 
 state. 
 
 praedor, arl, atus sum, plunder, 
 raid. 
 
 prae-mitto, ere, -misl, -missum, 
 send in advance. """ "^ 
 
 praemium, I, n., reward. 
 
 praesidlum, I, n., garrison; protection. 
 
 prae-sto, are, -stiti, be superior, sur- 
 pass, excel (with dat.); in third sing., it 
 is better, preferable. 
 
 prae-sum, -esse, -f ul, be in command 
 of (with dat.). 
 
 premo, ere, pressi, pressum, press 
 hard ; passive, to be hard pres.sed. 
 
 pridie, adv., the day before. 
 
 primus, a, um, first; primum, adi)., 
 first ; quam prlmum, as soon as pos- 
 sible. 
 
 prin-ceps, -clpis, m., leading man, 
 chief man. 
 
 princlpatus, us, m., leadership, fore- 
 most place. 
 
 prlstinus, a, um, former, old-time. 
 
 privatus, a, um, private. 
 
 pro, prep. w. abl., in place of; before. 
 
 probo, are, avI, atum, favor; re- 
 cognize. 
 
 prd-cedo, ere, -cessi, cessum, ad- 
 vance. 
 
 pro-do, ere, -didl, ditum, betray. 
 
 pro-duco, ere, -duxl, duotum.'lead 
 forth. 
 
 proellum, I, n., battle. 
 
 pro-flciscor, I, -fectus sumi, set out. 
 
 pro-fugio. ere. -fuorl. -fufrltum- 
 Hee. • 
 
 pro-gredior, I, -gressns sum, ad- 
 vance, proceed. 
 
 -.i/li^Jj^.- J^ ^ji^^.lllf^; .^. 3 
 
PART III.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 '*ke?tf'**°' ^'^' '»*• ««™. restrain, 
 
 ^'tdi":^^' **•«' J^«'' Jectum. 
 
 Prope.adc, near, nearly. 
 
 SrnS?»,^' ^^'^' *^*' a*«m. hasten. 
 SrafeX*"*' "' ""»• "^^r. close. 
 
 propterea, adv., on this account for 
 
 '^Sj/fonrSe.-^''*'' -'--• - 
 '^yCifel^'/f^f' ''•jJ"-o^i"^e (in Caesar 
 
 ^ITS""' "• ""'' «'^«'-'- "'^i-. near. 
 
 pugna, ae, p., battle, flft-hting. 
 pugno, are, avi, atum, %ht. 
 
 321 
 
 qua, adv, where. 
 qaadragrlnta [16], forty. 
 
 turn, ask ; seek, look for ^i""®"" 
 
 qaattuor [16], four 
 
 7,"'!."<>»r'«eclni [16], lourtem, 
 
 ■*«?;, y-; ""?.<''' *" Imntlaled before 
 «e wort to "■*'«« '■' •■« "<i&in, -^ 
 
 2Sl S'' '• •J'>e«'»s sum, complain 
 
 nLrShVtS' "'■''™'- '^«. "V 
 
 quid, „,w. „/ q„,,, ^^ ^ ^^^^ 
 
 quisqne, qnaeqne, qulcane r>- 
 „ qwodqne [26], each. '*"**'^«e "^ 
 quod, co»y., because. 
 
 ramus, I, m., branch. 
 
 ^ainn.'o;**'*'*^' ''•' consideration, reason- 
 calculation, strategy ; manner. ' 
 
 21 
 
 'at^f . -is, F., raft. 
 
 rl^V^t«?re^Ur^-Tci1; 
 rrcte^' er« • *^'' »*«»". recover. 
 
 'iJiif **' *'*' -^e^'' actum, reduce, 
 '^^*H9'loni8,F.. return. 
 bS.*'**' *'"^' -^l"^' ductum, lead 
 
 'tad^''\l*rr*' *"'[' latum, bring 
 )^.';rS.'faK^^^^^ 
 re?r'ife rS' ■^^«'' -fe^tum. repair; 
 
 rfS?'i-»oj^i-rZVe 
 
 1>"?So.t2;*p^^«% --"-^. rest 
 
 'Ten!Sr *• ^'*' ■"»^«'' -mansum, 
 '£« ex, -Igrls, M., rower. 
 ba"k."**' ^'*' '*»'«'' ™lMnm, send 
 
 2. remus^ I, m., oar. 
 'trvrw^bS^--^.-otum.re- 
 ren&nfi^'*-' avl.atum, rentfw. 
 
 ''K^Kr^^feTt^P""' '^Pul^um, 
 reperlo, Ire, repperl, repertum, 
 repet 6, ere, -IvI. -itum, demand 
 'iereftf '' *^'"^' '^^'''^' '^Sair; in- 
 
 'tS"?o^wn,Sror'*'' -*— . 
 ''1f"«J.?"' **'*■ -^tltl. resist {with 
 
 re spondeo, ere, spondl -snon 
 
 sum, reply, answer. ''"""'• *P*>»- 
 respubllea, relpubllcae, f. [9] the 
 
 state ; public interests. ^ ^' ® 
 
 ""^d*^®^' .«fe. tlnul, -tentum. Dr«. 
 
 -• . 'c, iijiJuiLain ; aeuin. 
 
 retull, from refero 
 
 fA-n. 
 
 ^ 
 
322 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 oSi- i 
 
 2. re-vertop, I, -versus sum (gener- 
 ally in pre«., irnpf. and fut. tenses), re- 
 turn. 
 
 revoco, are, avi, atum, recall. 
 
 rex, regis, m., king, (;hieftain. 
 
 Rlienus, I, m., the Rhine. 
 
 Bhodanus, I, m., the Rhone. 
 
 rlpu, ae, v., bank. 
 
 roji^o, are, avI, atum, ask. 
 
 Ror.^anus, I, m., a Roman. 
 
 Roinanus, a, urn, Roman. 
 
 S 
 
 Sablnns, I, m., Sablnus (a Roman's 
 
 name). 
 saeitta, ae, p., arrow. 
 sal-US, -litis, v., safety. 
 satls-faclo, ere, -feci, -factum, 
 
 apologize ; make amends. 
 saxuni, *, N., stone. 
 scala, ae, F., ladder. 
 Maplia, ae, p., boat, yawl. 
 solentla, ae, f., knowledge. 
 aclndo, ere, scidi, sclssum, tear 
 
 down. 
 solo. Ire, IvI, Itnin, know. 
 I se, fnnn sul. 
 ' sed, conj., but. ! 
 
 sedecim [16], sixteen. 
 senatus, us, m., senate. 
 sententia, ae, f., opinion. 
 Septimus, a, um, seventh. 
 septuasrinta [16], seventy. 
 Sequam, drum, m. plur., the Sequani 
 
 (a tribe in Q/iul). 
 sequor, I, secutus sum, follow. 
 sero, ere, sevi, satnm, sow. 
 servlo, Ire, IvI, Itum, be a slave, be 
 
 subject. 
 servl-tus, -tutis, f., bondage, slavery, 
 
 subjection. 
 servo, are, avI, atum, keep. 
 servus, I, m., slave. 
 sescenti, ae, a, six hundred, 
 sese, /rorn. sul. 
 sex [Ki], six. 
 sexagrinta [10], sixty. 
 si, conj., if. 
 sibl,, ^rom sni. 
 sic, so. * 
 
 sIfirniflcat-15, -Idnis, f., intimation, 
 
 announcement, signal. 
 sigfnum, I, N., standard ; signal. 
 silva, ae, f., wood, forest. 
 silvestris, e, wooded. 
 simiiis, e, like, similar. 
 slmul, adv., at the same time ; slmul 
 
 atque, as soon as. 
 sine, prep, w, ahl., without. 
 sooer, eii, m., father-in-law. 
 socius, I, M.,ally. 
 sol, soils, H., sun. 
 soleo, ere, solitns sum [68, b], be 
 
 i*ccu6toned. 
 
 Bnlltnft.rt. 
 
 n^.lln-i i-yv f/\ 
 
 influence, tempt, bribe, try to win 
 over. 
 
 solus, a, um [14], alone;. solum, adv 
 
 only. 
 sol-vo, ere, -vl, -utum, loo&e; set 
 
 sail {ivith or without mlves as object). 
 spatiuin, I, K., space, distance. 
 spero, are, avI, atum, hope. 
 spes, spel, v., hope. 
 Btatlin, adv., at once. 
 stat-uo, ere, -ul, -utum, decide. 
 statura, ae, f., stature. 
 studeo, ere, ul, pay attention. 
 studium, I, N., zeal, eagerness. 
 
 1. sub, prep. w. abl., under; with montc, 
 at the foot of. 
 
 2. sub, prep. w. ace, close to, closs up to. 
 sub-eo, -Ire, -II, -Itum [45], undergo, 
 
 encounter. 
 subito, adv., suddenly. 
 sub-Jlcio, ere, -^ecl, -Jeotum, place 
 
 close to ; in passive, lie close by. 
 sublatus, frmn toll 5. 
 sub-mltto, ere, -misl, -mlssnm, 
 
 send to aid {w. ace. and dat.). 
 sub-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum, 
 
 drive off, dislodge. 
 subsldluin, I, n., assistance, reser/es, 
 
 reinforcements. 
 sub-venlo. Ire, -veni, -ventum, 
 
 come to aid, aid {with dat ). 
 suc-cedo, ere, -cessi, -cessum, ap- 
 proach, advance. 
 8uc-curr6, ere, -curri, -cursum, 
 
 run to aid, run to the rescue of (with 
 
 dat.). 
 sul, slbl, se, sese [20], of himself, 
 
 themselves ; him, them. 
 sum, esse, ful [41], be. 
 
 1. suiiima, ae, f., total. 
 
 2. suminus, a, um, superl. adj., great- 
 est, very great. 
 
 super-ior, -lus, cowj^ar. adj., higher; 
 former, previous, preceding. 
 
 supero, are, avI, atum, conquer, 
 prevail. 
 
 super-sum, -esse, -ful [41], survive. 
 
 supra, adv. and prep. w. ace, above. 
 
 sus-clplo, ere, -cepi, -ceptum, un- 
 dertake. 
 
 sns-tlneo, ere, -tluul, -teutum, 
 withstand, endure. 
 
 suus, a, um, his, his own ; their, their 
 own. 
 
 T 
 
 tarn, adv., so. 
 
 tamen, acZu, yet. 
 'tandem, adv., at last, at length. 
 
 tantulus, a, um, so small. 
 
 tantus, a, um, so great, such ; taii- 
 tum, adv., so much,.po far. 
 
 tei^o, ere, texl, tectum, cover, con- 
 ceal. 
 
 telum, I, N., weapon. 
 
 tempero, are, avI, atum, refrain; 
 
 tu8, a, um, mild. 
 tempes-tas, -tatis, p., storm, weather. 
 
 .liii. 
 
PART in.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 tertlus, a, uni, third. 
 
 hIIJ ^'i: *^?<^' »»' ^ear, be afraid. 
 tliii-or, -oris, M., fear. 
 
 away.*"*"*' ^"**»"' «wl»latum, take 
 totus, u, lain [14], whole. 
 *''Bnr'?e";der'*'' *'*^'' -^"«"'' ^ve up, 
 ^'atros"*"' *''*• **"*'' ductunMead 
 traHS, />rep w. ace., across, beyond. 
 trans duco, ere, duxl -duct^,,, 
 
 leafl across. ""».iuiii, 
 
 o^verXnfovfr'*' ^^'' ^*»"'> -"y 
 
 Jl!2»®P*/' *?®' »• •^^'•••^e hundred. 
 tres, tria [lO], three. 
 
 *V^"n"8. I. M., tribune (a militarv 
 officer among the. Jtomam). '""""'J' 
 trlglnta [W], thirty. 
 
 323 
 
 --j»«"wiioj, tiuriy. 
 
 ta Kyou." • **' "'"' *"'^"^''^''- 
 tuba, ae, v., trumpet. 
 turina, ae, f., squadron. 
 turpis, e, disgraceful. 
 turr-ls, -is, v., tower. 
 tuus, a, um, your. 
 
 V 
 
 »5!;"^^-' when ; where. 
 
 ulclseor, i, ultus sum, punish. 
 ullus a, uin (14J, any. * * 
 
 uiter-lor, -lus, cmnpar. arf/. , further • 
 ultenores, those more remote. ' 
 
 unde, adv., whence, from which. 
 
 "di.**"^' ' ^'■°"' ''" ''^^«' «n every 
 
 .^I?^.^' "\".'" t^^l- one ; alone. 
 urbs, urbis, k., city. 
 
 urged, ere, ursi, press hard • va8sir» 
 _ to be hard pressed. passite, 
 
 "u"*' "*' "•' experience; advantage, 
 
 ut, my., with indlc., as; w^itA subj. that 
 *;0 that, m order that. '' ' 
 
 «^£J!:,**'**' *r""» fl4]' which (o^^„,„) 
 utills, e, useful. 
 
 "^fie t-aJtel"' ^'^'' ^*"'"' ''^ ""occupied. 
 vacuus, a, uin, empty, 
 vaduin, 1, N.,ford. * 
 
 1. vall-es, -Is, K., valley. 
 
 v««?A "'"' '-• '*•.' ''''"• rampart. 
 vasto, are, a vl, atum, lay waste 
 vel, «>»;.. or; /y.^;mtoZ, either . o; 
 
 S";,S;"'*'-^^«'--t''«Veneti(a 
 venia, ae, k., pardon. 
 venHt.!'"^ ;I^"'V ^.«nt"»n. come. 
 
 ''SKjJJ^i^*^. «•. Verclnge. 
 vereor, erl, vorltus sum fear 
 
 vero.«d..,infact;but.Sover 
 yer-to, ere, -tl, sum, turn. 
 
 \ ester, tra, trum, your. 
 
 'not • ""'' """"'' '«'^'d, ordw 
 vetus, voterls, old. 
 
 vj».ae,K., road, way. 
 victoria, ae, k., victory, 
 victus, us, M., life, livinjr. 
 vicus, I, M., village. 
 video, ere, vidl, visum see n»r 
 ceive; in passive, be seen ;"eem ' ^^'' 
 vIellla,ae,F., watch. 
 vlfflnti 1161, twenty. j 
 
 2 v!«« **' ^••«'> Jnxl, vlnctum, bind 
 v.r",'^fr",'.rmlJ!'''^*«*«"'-"^"- 
 
 yltrum, I, N., woad (a plnnt) 
 
 vlx"^r*' ^'^'' ^»«tum?l Ve. 
 » IX, ffrti)., scarcely 
 
 v^a' ^T-av'. atum, call, summon 
 volo, velle, volul [43], wi'sh, bHlil- 
 
 volup.tas, -tatls, v., pleasure. 
 
 vos [19], you. 
 
 vuiu-us, -eris, n., woupd. 
 
 
324 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 II. ENGLISH-LATIN. 
 
 N.B.— Words in parentheses shonld not he used in tJie translation of 
 
 exercises in Part I. 
 
 3. ndvantagrc to any—, satis com- 
 niodo, adv. 
 
 advice, ask-of, coiisul-O, ere, -ul, 
 -tuin, w. ace. 
 
 abandon, pro-do, ere, -didi, -ditum 
 ability, ingenium, I, n. 
 
 i i — \ " ' ' "• -Luui, w. ace. 
 
 able, be-, possum, posse, potul. (III. Aedul, Aediil, orum, m. 
 
 42). 
 
 abound In, abundo, are, avi, atum, w. 
 ahl. 
 
 1. about { = concerning), do, prep. w. ahl. 
 
 2. about, with numerals, circiter, adv. 
 
 3. about, to be— to, use the fut. part, 
 active with sum. , 
 
 absent, absens, absentis. 
 jaccept, ac-cipio, ere, -cGpl, -ceptum. 
 acclivity, accllvi-tas, -tatis, f. 
 accoinpllsh, pro-flcio, ere, -fed, -fec- 
 tum. 
 
 aceompllsliments, hinnani-tns, -tatis, 
 K. (r« the sing.). 
 
 accordance. In— with, pro, prep. w. 
 ab'. 
 
 according to, in /., Ex. 58, use ahl. of 
 manner. 
 I account, on— of, propter, prej). w. ace 
 
 '' accustomed, be—, con " " " 
 (perfect tenses of consuesco). 
 
 2. accustomed, become-, c6n-sues- 
 c6, ere, -suevi. 
 
 acquainted, become — with, co- 
 gnosce), ere, -gnovl, -gnitum, w. ncc. 
 
 acquit, ab-so]v6, ere. -solvl, -solutum. 
 
 1. across, trans, prep. xv. aec. 
 
 2. across, lead—, trans-duco, ere, -diixl, 
 -ductuni. t 
 
 action, course of—, res, rel, f. 
 actual, use re vera, =infact 
 
 affair, res. rei, v. 
 
 1. after, prep., post, w. ace. 
 
 2. iifter, con)., postquani, cum ; or use 
 ]jer_tect participle in nam. or abl. ahsol. 
 
 atterwards, jiostea. 
 
 again, rursus. 
 
 against, in, prep. w. ace. ; with conten- 
 
 do, ad, to. ace.; ivith helium qerd, cum. 
 
 w. ahl. 
 
 agency, through the of, per, prev. 
 
 w. ace. 
 agree, con-sentio. Ire, -sens!, -sensum. 
 
 1. aid, vcrh, juvo, are, juvi, jiitum, w. 
 ace. ; [suc-curro, ere, -curri, -cursum, iv. 
 dat.]. 
 
 2. aid, itown., auxilium, i, n. ; [subsidium, 
 
 I, N.]. 
 
 3. aid, come to— of, auxilid venire, w. 
 dat. 
 
 1 
 
 ^1 -J-, r---t-— '. , i" fj'. «'. nil. u(H. 
 
 %. 1- ""'"sto'ned, be-, consuevi, isse 4. aid, go to -of, auxilio eo, Ire, il (IvI), 
 
 6. aid, send to— of, auxilio mitto, ere, 
 
 misi, missum, w. dat. and ace. 
 alarm, per-moveo, ere, -niovl, -motum ; 
 
 com-moveo, Cre, -movl, -motum. 
 alertness, diligentia, ae, f. 
 Alesla, Alesia, ae, f. 
 all, pninis, e. 
 
 allegiance, offlcium, I, n. 
 Allobroges, Allobrojjres, inn, m. 
 n,i,i«;i' «.^" V """'^i.-j'"."* .. . 1. allow, patior, 1, passus sum. 
 added to \iG-, third sing, active of 2.' allowed, be-, licet, licCre, licuit, 
 
 ac-oedo, ere, -cessi, -cessum. impersonal w. dat. 
 
 atUac^nt, Hmtunus, a, \m\. ally, socius, I, m. 
 
 Acluatuci, Aduatuci, orum, m. almost, ^mene. 
 
 1. advance, pro-cedo, ere, -cessI, -cGs- alone, solus, a, um ; unus, a. um. ail 
 8Uin;pro-gredior,I, -gressussum;[slgna 14.) "».'*, "ui. »,ni. 
 
 fero, ferre, tull, latum]. 
 
 2. advance, noun, adventus, us, m. 
 
 3. advance, send in-, prae-mitto, 
 ere, -misl, -missum. 
 
 4. advance guard, primum agmen 
 (agminis, n.). 
 
 1. advantage, usus, us, m. 
 
 2. iidvaniage, take -of, utor, I, Qsus 
 sum, w. ahl. 
 
 alread.y, jam, adv. 
 
 altliough, etsi ; [(Uiamquam, quamvis]. 
 
 always, senii)er. 
 
 amazed, be— at, admirer, arl, atus 
 
 sum, deponent, w. ace. 
 ambassador, logritus, T, m, 
 ambusli, Insidiae, arum, p., in plural 
 
 onbi. 
 among, inter, prep. w. aoc. 
 
PART III.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 "iicestors, majorcs, uni m 
 
 2 2nchni:':^/*«;*^-'=^^'*«''• 
 ana, et, -que, atmie, ac. 
 
 2. unotiier, one-, inter so ^• 
 
 ««"!'«^'' ^''^^ <"'■ "mke)- =«„. 
 1. any, pUus, a, urn (III. 14). raftpr «r 
 yul (quis), qua, quQ ij ; ~ J, l} amount 
 
 tSeifeinr^ :, ^"'^'l"?'" ! «"•</' « negative 
 26)! "^'"° = "" one; [ay^er si, quisj (Hi. 
 
 eie, gnovi, -gnituni, wi. ace. 
 
 325 
 
 wT > L-pprop.nqu6, are, av,.' atuiu.' 
 
 2. approach, >ioun, adventus fm m • 
 [ = vieansofapuronih n\\w,. -' ' "' ' 
 use ad-eo, -Irefii, SmJ '' "'' *'' ' "' 
 
 approval, consensus, ms, m imed nf 
 
 Arar, Arai-, Ararls, m. 
 Ardennes, Arduenna, ae 
 ardor, studium, i, N. " " 
 Arlovlstus, Ariovistus, i, ■ 
 ^Jf^®' «o-onor, iri, -ortus sun-. 
 arnied armatus, a, iini. 
 Arnilnlus, Anninius, i, m. 
 
 arlliranr''^ "•■"'"• ^^ "'^^'"•- only. 
 
 arrange, constit-uo, ere. -ui -nhim 
 arranirenient, res, reT f ' ' 
 
 arrival, adventim, f s « 
 «"'«w,sagitta.ae:F. ' 
 
 4. a8, i>-iff7i of ajjposition, wifrnvDynu^- 
 nse ai>po.ntive or dative ofpuZZ' 
 5- as soon as, siniul at.iue.^ ^ " 
 
 as'ertuC'cf • '''•-'^^'^<i^' ^seensum. 
 turn "' '="•«?"»«''«. ere, -gnovl, -gni- 
 
 f 'as'lll« **i ''^~' P;'"^*' ""i'^'-^ona;. 
 -jSufn./"*^-' ^^-P""". ere. -posui. 
 
 e.e.^quaesTvl, quae.sTtum; rogo. Sr^^l 
 
 ^'w.^cu-e.^'''' P'*^' "'"' PetlvLpetltum, 
 
 4. ask advice of, consul-o. ere »i 
 -tuni, w. ace. ' **• "*» 
 
 "yredioTi*' "'' ^'''"* participle of ag- 
 assembly, concilium i, n 
 
 rf. assistance, send to of anviim 
 .mtto, ere, misl, missum. ArS^^ 
 
 "1^'""V P"^Ȥ:ium. I, N. ; find an 
 
 1. at, '>J trine when, use abl. without wen 
 and ad."''''' "'^''-' "- ^ocatiJ,Tfn 
 
 3. at, »/(«./■ conjieio^kurl, in. w ace 
 
 4. at once, statim, adv. ' * 
 
 ^Swle"/'""'' '"'''" "'^'''V at- feet, 
 
 1. attack, w6, (of places) oppu-rno arP 
 avi, atum; (o/wen), ag-gredior J rVr^!' 
 sus sum; ad-orior, iri, -ortUs sum'^il 
 petum facere in, u' ace ' """ 
 
 August, Augustus, a, um. 
 
 ^."^"«t«s. Augustus, I, M. 
 
 auxll ary, auxiliar-is, -is, m • in TT 
 
 hx. M, use the plural. ' ^'' 
 
 2 Mv«III®' "''^i^^^or, I, ultussum. 
 ^. ay en fire oneself on (or uronk 
 
 u o:scor, i. ultus sum, ,.. „,'. "P**">' 
 
 awnl ' VT""^^' '^'■^' ^'-'^ '^tum. 
 latu^; *''''^ ^°"°' ^--e. sustull, sub- 
 
 with '^^^^'tx!^^^;:^^ '•^'' - ^'^^ -. wHh peto in th::^:;;:;;;:;^ 
 
326 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 back, ter^m, I, n. 
 
 basKuffe,, huggage animals, im- 
 
 pudiiiienta, orum, if.,plur, 
 bfintl, niatius, uu, f. 
 1><tnk, rlpa, ae, v. 
 liar, talea, ae, v. 
 biirbarian, barbarus, I, m. 
 battalion, cohor-s, -tis, k. 
 
 1. battle, proelium, T, n. ; pugna, ae, f. 
 
 2. battle array, line of battle, 
 aciCa, el, f. 
 
 bay, driven hopelessly to-, in 
 
 extrcma spe salutis. 
 be, sum, esse, ful ; to expresn distance, use 
 
 absuni, abesse, aful. 
 
 1. bear, fero, ferre, tub, latum. (III. 44.) 
 
 2. bear on, fero, ferre, tuli, latum. 
 beat a retreat, sC re-cipio, ere, -cepi, 
 
 -ceptum. 
 beaten, victus, a, um. 
 becjiuse, quod. 
 become, fl6, fieri, factus sum. (III. 46.) 
 
 1. before, prep, (of time), ante, w. ace; 
 (pj place) pro, w. abl; ( = near) apud, w. 
 ace. ; {with summon) ad, w. ace. 
 
 2. before, conj., antequan:, priusquam. 
 
 1. begin, Incipio, ere ; /or the perfect 
 tetisen, use coepi, isae, cOeptus sum. 
 
 2. begin battle, proelium com-mitto, 
 ere, -misi, -missum. 
 
 belialf, on — of, pro, prep. w. abl. 
 behead, securl ferio, Ire, Id, Ictum ( = 
 
 strike with an axe). 
 behind, from—, use ex, ?t». ahl. =from. 
 behold, video, ere, vidi, visum. 
 Belgians, Belgae, arum, m. plur. 
 belle ve, cre-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, w. dat. 
 bemoan, miseror, arl, atus sum. 
 bent, become—, se In-flect6,«re, -flgxl, 
 
 -ttexum. 
 beseech, oro, are, avi, atum ; imploro, 
 
 are, avI, atum. 
 beset, ob-sideo, ere, -scdl, -sessum. 
 
 1. best, optimus, a, um. 
 
 2. best armed, ornatissimus, a, um. 
 bestow upon, dono, are, avi, atum, w. 
 
 dat. ^ 
 
 1. betake, re-cipio, ere, -cepi, -ceptum. 
 
 2. betake oneself to flight, se fugae 
 mandare, (marido, are, avI, atuth). 
 
 1. better, mel-ior, -ius. 
 
 3. better, it Is—, praestat, are, imper- 
 sonal. 
 
 betray, pro-do, ere, -didi, -ditum. 
 
 1. between, mter, prep. w. ace. 
 
 &. between, be—, luicr-cedo, ere, -cessi, 
 
 ( -cessum, with inter and ace. 
 
 ibeyond, trans, prep. w. aec. 
 
 iBlbracte, Bibracte, is, n. 
 
 bind, vin-cio, ire, -xl, -<tum; [fir^ira- 
 tively, ob-stringo, ere, -strinxi, -stria- 
 tum]. 
 
 bitter, gravis, e. 
 
 boast of. glorior, arl, atus sum, w. abl. 
 
 boats, bridge of—, naves junctae. 
 
 Jioli, iJoii, oruiu, M. plur. 
 
 boldly, audactcr. 
 boldness, audacia, ae, f. 
 bondage, servi-tus, -tutis, f, 
 
 1. border, noun, initium, I, n. 
 
 2. border (~hem in), continoo, ere. 
 born, natus, a, um. 
 
 1. both . . . and, et , . . et. 
 
 2. both, uterque, utraque, utraimiue. 
 (III. 26.)=eoeA. ' 
 
 3. both, on— sides, utrimque. 
 bough, ramus, I, m. 
 
 boundary, form— line between, 
 
 = separate. 
 bow, arcus, iis, m. ; {abl. plur., arcubusj. 
 boy, puer, eri, m. 
 branch, ramus, I, m. 
 brave, fortis, e. 
 bravely, fortiter. 
 bravery, vir-tus, -tutis, f. ; [fortitu-do, 
 
 -dinis, f. ; or use clause quid virtute 
 
 possint, etc.). 
 
 1. break down, re-scindo, ere, -scidi, 
 -scissum. 
 
 2. break up camp, castra moved, ere, 
 movl, motum. 
 
 bridge, pons, pontis, m. 
 Brlgantes, Brigantes, um, u.plur. 
 brilliant, praeclarus, a, um. 
 
 1. bring, fero, ferre, tull, latum. 
 
 2. bring {followed by across), tra-duco, 
 ere, -duxi, -ductum. 
 
 3. bring back ( = iead back), re-duco, 
 ere, -duxl, -ductum ; (= carry back), re- 
 -fero, -ferre, -tull, -latum. 
 
 4. bring word, nuntio, are, avI, atum. 
 
 5. bring back word, renuntio, are, 
 avI, atum. 
 
 6. bring In (= collect), comporto, are, 
 avi, atum ; (=iinport) importo, are, avi, 
 atum. 
 
 7. bring up the rear, agmen claudo, 
 ere, clausi, clausum. 
 
 8. bring together, comporto, are, 
 avi, atum ; confero, conferre, contull, 
 collatum. 
 
 Britain, Britannia, ae, p. 
 
 1. British, =of the Britons. 
 
 2. British Isles, ^Britain. 
 Briton, Britannus, i, m. 
 brOcUl, latus, a, um. 
 bronze, aes, aeris, n. 
 brother, fra-ter, -tris, m. 
 Brutus, Brutus, I, m. 
 buffetting, contumelia, ae, F. 
 build, aedifico, are, avi, atum; [facio, 
 
 ere, feci, factum]. 
 building, aediflcium, I, n. 
 burden, onus, oneris, n. 
 
 1. burn, in-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum. 
 
 2. burn up, com-buro, ere, -bussi, -bus- 
 tum. 
 
 burst in, ir-rump6, ere, -rupl, -ruptum. 
 business, negotium, I, n.; res, rel, f. 
 
 1. but, sed. 
 
 2. but, =M'/io — not, quin. 
 
 buy up, co-emo, ere, -eml. -emptum. 
 by, a, ab, prep. w. abl. 
 
 f 
 
PART III.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 827 
 
 Cwsar, Oaes-ar, -aria, m 
 
 1. call (=mmmon), voco, are, ivl, atum; 
 { = name), appello, are, avi, atum; no- 
 mino, are, avi, atum. 
 
 2. call together, convoco, are. avi 
 atum. ' * 
 
 oanip, oastra, orum, n., inplur. only 
 oaiiipalgner, old, une the phrase mag- 
 num m castrls usum habere. 
 camp-follower, cal-6, onis, m. 
 can, possum, posse, potul. (III. 42). 
 ««P»»i«. be - of, possum, posse, 
 
 captive, captlvus, I, m. 
 capture, capio, ere, cepi, oaptum, 
 C aractacus, Caractacus, I, m. 
 care {=carejulmgn), diligentia, ae, f- 
 
 l{ = object of concern), cCira, ae, F.l. 
 carefully, dlligenter. 
 
 1. carry, fero, ferre, tull, latum (III. 44); 
 {of carrying a report), per-fero, -ferre, 
 -tull, -latum. 
 
 2. carry off, ab-duco, ere, -duxl, -due- 
 turn. ' 
 
 3. carry on, gero, ere, gessT, gestum. 
 
 4. carry out, c6n-flci6, ere, -feci, fec- 
 
 tUHl. ' 
 
 carry over, traiisporto, are, avi, atum. 
 Cartisniandua, Cartismaiidua, ae f 
 case, since (or althougli) this is 
 
 tne— , quae cum ita sint. 
 (^asslus, C'assius, I, m. 
 
 1. cast {= throw headlong), praecipito 
 are, avi, atum. ^ ' 
 
 2. cast reproach In one's teeth, ob- 
 Jicio, ere, -jecl, • litum, w. dat. and 
 ace, = impute to ). 
 
 Casticus, Casticus, I, m. 
 cattle, pec-us, -oris, n. 
 
 1. cause, noun, causa, ae, F. 
 
 2. cause, verb, euro, are, avi, atum, tvith 
 gerundive. ' 
 
 caution, with- caute; with the 
 greatest—, use mperl. 
 
 1. cavalry, noun, equitatus, us, m. (in 
 sing.); equites, um, m. (inplur.). 
 
 z. cavalry, adj., equester, tris, tre. 
 a. cavalry-man, equ-es, -itis, m. 
 census, census, us, m. ; take the-. 
 
 censum habeo, ere, ul, itum. 
 centre, une adj. medius, a, um. 
 centurion, centuri-6, -onis, m. 
 
 ^'nVitTl**" <=^''^'!^^y> quidam, quaedam, 
 quiddam or quoddam. (III. 26). 
 
 2. certain (=yixe(i), certus, a, um. 
 citain, vmculum, T, n.; [catena, ae, f.]. 
 cnaiienge, evoco, are, avi, atum. 
 
 1. change, commutat-io, -ionis, F. 
 
 2. Change, political -, novae res. f 
 p'ur. ' 
 
 Character, of such a—, talis, e, adj. 
 Charles, Carolus, i, m. ' > •> 
 
 1. chief, prin-ceps, -cipis, m.; regulus, 
 
 2. chief man, prlu-ceps, -cipis, m. 
 
 8. chief power, rdgnum, l, n.; imwr- 
 lum, I, N. ' » I —•»»»• 
 
 chiefly, maxims. 
 children, llberl, orum, ii. 
 choose, de-ligo, ere, -legl, -lectom. 
 
 c**"®"?"? o' Ws own-, twe the verb 
 
 deligo (choose). 
 
 chosen, delectus, a, um; 6l6ctua, a, um. 
 circumstance, res, rel, f. • • • 
 citizen, c.v-is. -Is, m. 
 citizenship, civi-tas, -tatis, p. 
 city, urbs, urbis, f 
 clemency, dementia, ae, p. 
 cIllT, mons, montis, m. 
 
 1. close, verb, claudo, ere, olausl. clau- 
 sum. ' 
 
 2. close, l>e-at hand, ad-gum. -esse, 
 -ful. ' ^^' 
 
 closely, anguste. 
 
 coast, ora, ae, f. 
 
 cohort, cohor-H, -tis, f. 
 
 collect (=get together), cogo, ere, coSgl. 
 coactum; [col-hgo. ere, -fegl, lectuinl- 
 (-summon together), convoco, are, avi, 
 atum; (== carry to ane place), confers, 
 conferre, contull, coUatum. ' 
 
 1. color (=hue), col-or, -oris, h. 
 
 2. colors {= standard), aquila, ae, f. ; sto- 
 num, I, N. 1 I I , -B 
 
 combat, w«e gerund o/pugno, are, 
 combatants, pugnant-Cs, -ium, m. 
 
 1. come, venio. Ire, vCnl, ventum. 
 
 2. come often, ventito, are, avi, atum. 
 A come together, con-venio, ire. -venl. 
 
 -ventum. ' 
 
 4. come up with, con-sequoi, I, -secu- 
 
 tus sum, w. ace. 
 1- command, verb, impero, are, avi, 
 
 atum, w. dat. of person, ace. of thing. 
 
 2. comniand (= military power), imtn. 
 impermm, I, n. ; (= order given), imper- 
 atum, I, N. i' /. t~ 
 
 3. conimand, have— of, be in-, b© 
 at head of—, prae-sum, -esse, -ful, w. 
 
 4. command, chief—, summa (ae, f.) 
 nnperii. ' ' 
 
 commander, impera-tor, -toris, m, 
 common, communis, e. 
 
 communication, hold-, col-loquor. 
 
 I, -locutus sum. 
 compare, compare, are, avi, fltum. 
 compel, cogo, ere, coegl, coactum. 
 complain, queror, I, questus sum. 
 complaint, make—, queror, i, questus 
 
 sum. 
 
 1. complete, verb, con-flcio, ere, -fgcl. 
 -fectum. ' 
 
 2. complete, adj., certissimus, a, um. 
 comra<le, their comrades, sul, 
 
 orum, M.,^^wr. 
 conceal, occulto, are, avi, atum ; [celo. 
 
 are, avi atum]. 
 1- concerns, it—, interest ; refert (II. 
 
 per, prep. w. ace. 
 
 I 
 
328 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 oonoernlnff, de, prep. w. abl. 
 
 "^tun. < = "««*«), facio, ere, ffici, fac 
 
 condition, condic-io, -ionis, v. 
 confer upon, de-fero, -ferre, -tuB. -Ift. 
 turn, M'. (tat. I « M, m 
 
 conference, colloquium, i, n. 
 
 confldenoe, flducia. ue, v. 
 
 confine, (;on-tineo, ere, -tiniil. -tentum. 
 
 1. confuHion, tumnltus, fm, m 
 
 2. c;oiifuHlon, throw Into-, pertur- 
 bo, are. avl, &tum. •i«'«i'ur 
 
 conquer, vinco, ere, vicl, victum: su- 
 
 pero, are, avi, atuiii. 
 consider, existimo, are, avi, atura. 
 CongldiuH, Considius, I, m. 
 conspire, conjuro, are, avi, atuni. 
 consternation, tlirow Into i^ate 
 
 of—, perturbo, are, avi, atuni. 
 consul, consul, consulis, m. 
 
 ""/^Jf !?//'**?**•,*," **»e-of, use consul in 
 the abl. absolute. 
 
 *' *c?"*"**' ^""^"'■"' *•■«' -""• -turn. w. 
 
 2. consult (or consult for) inter- 
 ests (welfare) of, consul-o, ere, -ui 
 -turn, w. dat. ' ' ' 
 
 contest {^battle), certa-men, -minis, n 
 pugna, ae f. ; { = war), bellum, I, n. '' 
 
 continent, contm-ens, -entis, f 
 
 continually, contineiiter. 
 
 convenient, idoneus, a, uni 
 conversation, serm-o, -onis, m 
 1. converse, loquor, I, loi^iitus sum. 
 ^.n^"^®'^®' l»old-. loquor, I, locutus 
 1. corn, frumentuni, i, n. 
 
 ^'tl"^/^^ fupplie.H of-, res frumen- 
 taria, f. (use thestng.). 
 
 cost, con-sto, are, -stitl, -statum, w. abl. 
 
 votta, Cotta, ae, m. 
 
 council, concilium, I, n. 
 
 country (-land), ag'-r, agr', m.; fln-es, 
 -mm. M phir.- (=g otmd), Jocus, I, m. 
 i = state), respublica, reTpublicae(III.9)- 
 {■^native country), patria, ae, V. : ( = 
 rural districts), rus, ruris, n. ^ 
 
 courage, vir-tus, -tutis, f. 
 
 1. course, cursus, us, m. 
 
 2. course of action, res, rel, f. 
 ^^^f^ctuir"*""^^"''^' ^«"-«c'«. e«e, -feci, 
 coward, Ignavus, I, m. 
 cowardice, Ignavia, ae, p. 
 cowed, perterritus, a, um. 
 
 1. cross, verb, trans-eo, -Ire, -ii (-ivl) 
 -itum. 
 
 2. cross, adj. {= oblique), transversus, a, 
 «^088ing, effect a-, trans-eo, -ire, -il 
 
 cruelty, crudcli-tas. -tatis, f, 
 -^rush frango, ere, fregi, fractimi. 
 :>urlo8ity, studium, i, n.; or use studeo, 
 GTe,n\{ = tobeeager). 
 
 custom, consugtu-dS, -dinls. f.: m5s 
 moriH, M. > » ' "• 
 
 cut off (^intercept or shut of), inter- 
 cliulo, ere, -cliisl, -olusum ; ( = *(/o, inter- 
 flcio, ere, -feci, -fectum. 
 
 D 
 danflrer. perlouhim, i, n. 
 dan8:erous, perfc;uir)8UH, a, um, 
 dare, audeo, Ore, ausuMsum. (ill. 68, b.) 
 (turlnfir, use phrase what they dure. 
 dark-blue, caeruleus, a, um. 
 dart, telum, I, n. 
 
 date, the -of, use clause with quaudo. 
 
 {-u'henK 
 dauf?hter, filia, ae, F. 
 day, dies, el, m. 
 daybreak, prima lux, lucis, f. 
 deal (o/ injlicting wounds), Inferfl, In- 
 
 terre, mtull, illatum ; {of causing death). 
 
 use iiiter-flcio, ere, -feci, -fectum, =slav. 
 dear, c«rus, a, um. 
 
 1. death, mors, mortis, f. 
 
 2. death, put to—, inter-flcio, ere. 
 -feci, -fectum. 
 
 decide (y'or/n a resolve), c6nstit-u6, ere, 
 -ul, -utum ; {=form. an opinion), Judico, 
 are. avi, atum ; { = of deciding a mctonj) 
 pano, parere, peperl, partum. 
 
 declaration of war ( = war declared) 
 
 declare (=assert\ conflrmo, are, avi, 
 atum ; ( = muke known), pronuntio, are, 
 avi, atum; (^of declaring war), in-dlc6i 
 
 . ere, -dixl, -dictum. 
 
 deed, factum, I, n. 
 
 deep, altus, a, um. 
 
 1. defeat, verb, repello, ere, reppull. re- 
 pulsum. 
 
 2. defeat, Jiomi, proelium adversum n.' 
 i^calami-tas, -tatis, f.]. ' 
 
 1. defence, munimentuin, I, n. 
 
 2. defence, In face of—, use verb re- 
 aisto, ere, restiti {-resist), or de-fendo, 
 ere, -fendl, -ttins\\m{= defend). 
 
 defend, de-fendo, ere, -fendl, -fensum. 
 defer, super-sedeo, ere, -sedl, -sessura, 
 
 w. abl. ' 
 
 dejection, tristitia, ae, p. 
 delay, moror, arl, atus sum. 
 dellfirhtful, jucundus, a, um. 
 demand, inipero, are, avi, atum ; posco, 
 
 ere, poposci. 
 dense, densus, a, um. 
 deny, nego, are, avi, atum. 
 
 1. depart, dis-cedo, ere, -cessi, -cJssum. 
 
 2. depi^rt this life = die. 
 
 1. departure, discessus, us, m.; fpro- 
 fect-i6, -ionis, K.]. 
 
 2. departure, take one's-, dis-cedo, 
 ere, -cussi, -cossum ; pro-flciscor, I, -fef- 
 tus sum. 
 
 deprive, despolio, are, avi, atum ; [of. 
 
 expressed by abl. ]. 
 deptli, altitu-do, -dinis, f. 
 desert, destit-u6, ere, -ul, -utum. 
 design, consilium, I, n. 
 
PART III.— VOCABULART. 
 
 3 #11 Si ".'**• With-, idx, ac// 
 dlreJl!'(*i!f,^' r!"'"Ht-. facile, arf.. 
 
 2" dl^f**}**"' P*""'^' partis, P. 
 
 o. airec'tlon. In what 
 tern. wiiat- , quani in par- 
 
 dI^sohurge.fungor,',niL«um... 
 
 dlsciSrf '"•''°' "••«' -d'. -turn. 
 aisconcert. com-moveo, ere. -i„6vl, -mo- 
 
 niittere ^^ °™"''' PotestatI per- 
 
 ^'SusTul^i)^^"^^^-^-^redior(l, 
 
 "jspiay, prae-sto, are, -stiti 
 
 t?a!?e^'*"**"' «»«r«lf«l-, clenien- 
 1. distance, spatium, r, n. 
 
 4 dlS^«^' ?* "-«<• ^ «' '^b, W-. abl 
 distant 1^1' ^'T' "- • ^'""»"«> ^dv 
 
 ■xtuml ' """' '*^°'"0' ^""e. avI, 
 
 dl8trl?<"t*' '?i«*':lb-u6, ere, -ul, utum. 
 aistrlet, reg-io, -lOnis, k. 
 
 32a 
 
 divide, dl-vido, ere, -vtsl -vTanm 
 
 do, facio, er.. ticl, tkctum -.TZrrv o,.. 
 
 double, duplex, (lunlicis. 
 
 1. doubt, v^rb, dublto, are, ftvl utum 
 
 «:3;:ii!;:"tK^'"i:'-ij;^-'o;;irr- 
 
 dr"fw ' f"/" *;"«••' J"»'^ntin, ,, ,. 
 Htn„^o,ere, -Htrinxl.-Btiictum ^' '*''• 
 
 '•-[^i!u;;:?i!xr\j;Trr{^-»^""' 
 
 -J. drIvB back, repello, ere rcmnii 
 repuisuni; re-licio erp iZ\ i .»''""'• 
 
 ^ss. »"■ •"^•"-' i'ir «v,, 
 
 durlnff, «.c acT. of time how ),L 
 duty, mun-us, -eris, n. ; do dut^ir offl 
 
 dying words, see II. 236. 
 
 E 
 
 each (0/ <M'o), uterque, utranue utnim 
 que; {ofvwretha,iUv,>), q Se nua^" 
 que, quidque o,- quodque fWr ' ^^^' 
 
 1. eager, alacer, oris, ere. 
 
 eagef r;: x?5r*-' ^*"^^'"'' -«> -'• 
 
 euilTaSa^'aT;*'^'-'^"'^'^- 
 
 early, matfirus, a, um 
 
 earnestly, iiiajfnopere. 
 
 easily, facile. 
 
 easy, facilis, e. 
 
 eat, vescor.i {xHth abl.). 
 
 '??fAoL'r ^**«''«-. "t-. -oris. K 
 eight, oeto. 
 
 eighth, oetavus, a, uin. 
 eighty, octoKinta. 
 elect, creo, aie, avI, atum. 
 elections, coniitia, oruui n 
 
 Lli/abeth, Elisabetha, ae, v 
 
 embark, naves c6n-scend6, ere, -scendl 
 -sceusuni. ' "^''""'i 
 
 embassy, Icgat-io, -ionis, p. 
 
 • there-sirouldbeneeyorknyfhTV'*^ " 
 
330 
 
 PHIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 encunif). coti-Bido, ere, -sikJi, sessum. 
 tMiifoiii'iiffe, colturtur, uri, utiM sum. 
 Dad, tiii-U, Ih, m. 
 endure ( tiiliTute), (lutior, 1, pawius 
 
 Miin ; ( = withdaiul), piir-leru, -fene, 
 
 •tull, -Iiitiiin. 
 oaeiiiy, ho8t-ii, in, u. (UMitalty in the 
 
 pliir.), 
 1. engrnffe, cumm'ttd, ere, -nilal, -niiti- 
 
 HUin. 
 
 In. <'f-raor, &r\, Atua sum, ic. 
 
 2. uiif(uffi' 
 
 ill (tnU tttil 
 ^. ouKUKv 
 
 *<Kaiiiii, /( 
 
 -flixi, 
 
 with, con-Hlgo, ere, 
 , (Uiiii anil ahl. 
 
 1. eUt^uKunient, prutlium, l. n. 
 
 2. enKUi,eiiieut, during the—, = 
 
 while Jifihthig, 
 unKlne, toriiuintuni, I, n. 
 EugliHh, Hritunnl, ormii. 
 orijoy, • \ior, I, fruetus suiii (w. ahl.). 
 uiiqulru, nuiujro, ere, quues.vi, (luuesl- 
 
 tuiii. 
 enrol, con-ocrlbS, ere, -scripBl, -scrlp- 
 
 tuiii. 
 onterprlHe, res, rel, k. 
 entliiiHliiHui, with Hhonts of en> 
 
 thiigluHni, une thephinneuiininix\iia) 
 entirely, u^e totuB, a, uiii, adj. 
 eiitruHC, citin-niitto, ere, -mini, -iiiissiiiu. 
 envoy, le),'atu8, 1, m. ; 
 
 1. equnl, verb, arlacquo, are, avi, atum. 
 
 2. euuul, adj., par, paris. 
 
 equip, anno, are, avt, atum ; orno, are, 
 
 avI, alum. 
 eHoiipe, e-labor, I, -lapsus sum; ef-fugio, 
 
 ere, tiigi, -fugituin. 
 escort, piaesidiuiii, I, n. 
 especlul, line pmecyime—especiallif. 
 establish, contirmo, are, avi, atuiu ; 
 
 [of etttaltiiBhing a precedent, Instit-uo, 
 
 ere, -ul, -utumj. 
 evade, vito, are, avT, atum. 
 even, etiam ; not even, no . . . qui- 
 
 dem ; even if, etiam si. 
 
 1. ever {-alivai/H), semper. 
 
 2. ever, for - , in pt rpetuum. 
 
 1. every, omnis, e ; [quisnue, quaeque, 
 quidque or quodque = ertp/iJ. 
 
 2. every one, omnes, plur., or quisque, 
 siii(f., =i'aeh. 
 
 everything, omnia; omnes res. 
 exutnpiiN exemplum, I, n. \ 
 excel, praicrdo, ere, -cessi, -cussum. 
 excellently, epregie. 
 execute, inter-ticio, ere, -feci, -tectum, 
 exercise (-*'/iOM;), utor, I, usussum. 
 exhibit, ator, I, usus sum. 
 exhort, hortor, art, atus sum. 
 expect, exspecto, are, avI, atum. 
 experience, usus, us, m. 
 extend, pertineo, ere, ul. 
 
 1. extent, magnitii-do, -dinis, f. 
 
 2. extent, of great — , magnus, a, um. 
 extremely, maxime (or use the auperl. 
 
 degree). 
 extremity of, use adj. extremus, a, 
 um. 
 
 1. face, in the -of, u»e the ahl ahuol. 
 
 2. luce, put u bra-, i.- on, vultuni 
 fliig", lie, Jliixl, flct'iin. 
 
 full, (lo-Hcio, iTf, -f cl, -fcctuni. 
 fulriiCul, fIdtliH, ' ; (fidiiH, a, uml. 
 faith fully, Hdf.iter ; suiiiinii fldS. 
 
 1. full, rerl), it do, ere, ctMidl, oasum ; 
 (coiicidd ei' , -tiidl, -cuhuiiiJ. 
 
 2. fall, I'liow to fall Into hands 
 of -io-do, ere, -dldi, -ditum (Mrof/). 
 
 ■'. fail, noun, mors, mortis, v. {^death); 
 
 (uUaiiii-taM, -tatls, v. 
 fame, fama, ae, k. 
 famous, praiH'larus, a, um. 
 far, long* ; too far, longius. 
 
 1. farther, adv., loiigiuH. 
 
 2. further, adj., filter lor, -iu8. 
 farthest, ultimiiH, a, um. 
 father, |)ater, patris, in. 
 futher-ln-law, soc-er, eri, M. 
 fatigued, dcfessuM, a, uin. 
 
 favor, prolxi, are, avI, atum ; faved, i \ 
 
 f:ivl, fiiutum ()»•, dat.). 
 favorable, idoiieus, a, um. 
 
 1. fear, verb, timeo, ere, ul ; [pertlm- 
 eHPo, ere, ul ; vereor, erI, veritus sum]. 
 
 2. fear, nmtn, t?m-or, -oris, m. , [inetus, 
 us, M.j. 
 
 fearful, timidus, n, um. 
 I'^ebruary, Februarius, a, um, adj. 
 feel, intt'1-lego, ere, -lexl, -lectum. 
 feelings, animus, I, m. (use sing.). 
 fellow-citizen, cIv-is, -is, M. 
 fertile, fertilis, e ; fer-ax, acis. 
 few, pauci, ae, a; nonnuUl, ae, a; very 
 few, perpaucl, ae, a. 
 
 1. field, ager, agrl^ m. 
 
 2. field {=j':eld oj battle), leave the 
 field, proelio ex-cedo, ere, -cessI, -ces- 
 suni. 
 
 3. field, take the—, arma sumo, ere, 
 sumpsi, Humptum ; ad bellum pro-flcis 
 cor, 1, -fectus sum. 
 
 fierce, tt>c tifZucrft, = fiercely. 
 fiercely, acriter. 
 fifteen, quTndecim. 
 fifth, quintus, a, um. 
 fiftj', qulnquaginta. 
 
 1. fight, iMijrno, are, avl, atum. 
 
 2. fight a battle, proelium facio, ere, 
 feci, factum. 
 
 U. fighting, piigna, ae, f.; or use gerund 
 
 of pCigni). 
 fill, fill up, com-pleo, ere, -plevi, -ple- 
 
 tuin. 
 finally, dcnkjiue. 
 
 1. find, leperio, ire, repperl, reper^'im ; 
 in-veniu, Ire, -veni, -ventuni. 
 
 2. find out, co-gnosto, ere, -gnovl, -gni- 
 tum ; com-perio, ire, -peri, -pertum. 
 
 fine, pulcher, chra, chrum. 
 finish, per-ficio, ere, -feci, -tectum. 
 
 1. fire, ign-la, -is, m. 
 
 2. fire, set — to, in-cendo, ere, -cendl, 
 -censum, w. ace. 
 
IHIIT III.— VOCABULAKV. 
 
 331 
 
 ^'tSttt' ***' ""<!««'-. toke jjart in 
 tlvHt, i.iiniuB u, urn ; at first, prlniO. 
 tlv<\ qmiitiue; Hve hundred, nuln- 
 
 *ix{~afp>oiat), Cdlcfi, ere, -dlxl, -dlctiiiu ; 
 
 (mth d,,., Au'o, ere, d.xl, dictum. 
 fluff, vexilluni, 1, N. 
 
 fleet, claHH-io, iH, k. 
 flesh, oa:o, (!uniin, f. 
 
 /miff !'*•*"•**' ***^~' "* '"Kae mandiire, 
 ("lando, are, avi, atuiii). 
 I. now, Clio, ere, fluxl, fluxuin. 
 
 I' S"li*"**'' «''<mor, T, HecfitiiH sum. 
 
 8unl *^ "P. I'tT-Bequor, I, -secfitus 
 8. following:. Of/;., posteruB, a, lun ; 
 
 follow er, cainiK-., cal 6, oriis, m. 
 r«fi^',.n'"^^"V"' "*• "• : l«t"ltitia, ue, r.] 
 
 lOOd, OlbjB, I, M. ' > J 
 
 2" frmf'lit%r'""''!I. = **P foot, pedibUB. 
 
 i. toot, ut the -of, sub, with (ihl. 
 
 oOee Vl'^lZ **"*^^'**"^ "* "»« ^««* 
 4. foot, to the-of, Hub, w. ace. 
 footHoldScp, pedes, -His, m. 
 /, ■5,.^""' '""t'on fowardt,), in, ad, «-. ncc; 
 {with reamn), de, «-. a/>/.; (of im,p(m), 
 ad anrf flrer«/t(Z or aerundim ; (o/'^fime 
 /.ow /ortflr), ace. imlii; {mth infinitive 
 clause) uritranslated ; {„/ arrangvmmta 
 
 iAjr6'.t'a/"' "•«"••••<=='''' ''^^«'^ 
 2. for, eov\, nam. 
 
 forbearance, mansuStu-do, -dinis, v 
 lorbld, veto, are, vetui, vetituiii. 
 a. force, verb, coin-pello, ere, -pull, -yul- 
 
 sum. ^ ' *^ 
 
 2. force, noun (= violence), vis, f. [9] • 
 
 iorce8(:=<m<2y«),(.o,,iae,arum, v.phir. 
 
 Llii**''®^ ^"^ f warcA), magnus, a, um. 
 lord, vaduni, I, n. 
 
 forest, Hilva, ae, f. 
 
 forever, in perpetuum. 
 
 forget, obllvisoor, I, -litus sum, w. qen. 
 
 9 i-^!!'"^7""^^''->' ^'^<^'"' ere, fed, factum. 
 -J. torni {=draw tij,), m-struo, ere, 
 
 •struxl, -striictum. > ^'^. 
 
 former, pristinus, a, um. 
 forsake, dis-cGdo, ere, -cessi, -cessum. 
 
 w. ab and ahl. oo^^uj, 
 
 fort, castellum, I, n. 
 
 fortification, munlt-io, -iOnis, p.: on- 
 us, -ens, N. > > ^f 
 
 fortify, nu-inio, Tre, ivl, ituta. 
 forty, quodrag'inta. 
 
 forward, send-, prae-mitto, ere, -mis!, 
 -missum. ' 
 
 four, nnnt+uor ; four hundred, quad- 
 r.;jgentl, ae. a. 
 
 fourth, quftrtiii. a, um ; three 
 
 fourths, -:.//„ye^^;.<>^ ' 
 1. free, rerh, libero, are, ftvl, 4tum. 
 ^. Tree, adj., ld)er, era, erum. 
 freed, llbt-ratus, a, um. 
 freely, Iibtr.;. 
 Freimh, (.aiij, „rum, m. 
 
 1. frei|u<>ift. "/j., crfiber, bra, brum. 
 
 2. freqn- Mt v^rb, with no fpe- 
 Uuvated ford, na,, whicb wa« not 
 wont to be croswed by a ford 
 
 fresh intcKcr, ^ra, tfrum. 
 irlend, aniKum, i. m.; (often expre»ml by 
 P<»<xe,^mvepnmuum, footnote 27patfetM) 
 fr endl V, amicus, o, uui, ' ^^•'"*^' 
 
 Ir eiidMhIp, amuitiu, ue, F. 
 irlKhttui, horriduH, a, um. 
 
 nf'inl^^^"^ which, undo: (Mi<A ,;er6« 
 0/ tnhmi air-r,,), use the dat. ; (with 
 (jerund tn -ing), (juin, quominus w. nth- 
 jhiictive. 
 
 f-Ir.?"!' ''**";• '*•'«""'. ttltesse, aful. 
 If,? '♦•'." -"f- P"', w.rtW.; ante, w. ace. 
 lull, plenuH, a, um. 
 
 furnlah, order •>-, iniporo, are, avi. 
 a iiiu (w. dat oj pemma ordevd, ace. 
 oj that to be furnished). 
 
 1. ffuln, i)otior, irl, itus sum, w. abl • 
 ad-ipiHcor, I, -eptus su?m, w. ace. 
 auin " " *'"^"<l»est, impetro, are, avi, 
 
 Cialba, Galba, ae, m. 
 
 f?allantly, ftcriter. 
 
 J^iJlf '^*' *^,^",',""S' a. "ni; or use GallCrum. 
 (xalluH, (Jallus, I, M. 
 
 ffi'rrlson, praesidium, I, n. 
 gate, porta, aa, k. 
 1. <iaul (the country), Gallia, ae, f. 
 #. ,."l^* '""'"."* '-'ff^atil), Gallus, I. m. 
 (mulish province, -prOvincia Gallia. 
 1 n appoKUic > . ' 
 
 1. general, impera-tor, -toris. m. 
 
 i. general engagement, proclium, 
 
 Geneva, Geiiava, ae, v. 
 gentleness, dementia, ae, F. 
 t^eorge, Oeorgius, i, m. 
 t»€^rman, (lermanus, I, m. ; or adj., 
 Gernianus, a, um. •' ' 
 
 1. get, nanciscor, I, nactus or nanctus 
 Hum. 
 
 2. get ready, expedio, Ire, Ivl, itum. 
 \ give, do, dare, dedl, datum. 
 •f- give orders, impero, are, avi, atum. 
 
 ?*.y®.."I* (=hand over), tra-do, ere. 
 -di; 1 .<iitum ; i^^abandon), de-sisto, ere, 
 -stitl, w. ahl. ' 
 
 glorious, pulcher, cbra, chrum. 
 
 1. go, eo, Ire, ilOvl), itum. 
 
 I' S^ *"o^th, f x-eo, -Ire, -il, -itum. 
 
 •=• go Out, ex-eo, -ire, -h, -itum. 
 
332 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 *. go outside, e-gredior, I, -gressussum, 
 w. extra and ace. 
 
 5. goins:, to be— on, flo, fieri, foetus 
 sum ; jjreror, i, j^estua sum, passim. 
 
 6. j^olng:, to be— to, ^ise jut. part, in 
 ■urus and sum. 
 
 eroverimient, respublica, relpublicae, 
 
 V. |!).J 
 
 ^runt, do, dare, dedl, datum. 
 
 great, niaj,'nus, a, um ; how fsrreat, 
 
 <iuaiitus, a, um ; so fSfreat, tantus, a, 
 
 um ; wry great, maxiums, a, um. 
 greatest, uiaximus, a, um ; or use adv., 
 
 niaxime. 
 greatly, maj^nopere, magno opere; 
 
 how greatly, quantopere ; quanto 
 
 opere. 
 
 1. ground {=po»ition), locus, i, m. 
 
 2. ground, stand one's—, cOn-sisto 
 ere, -stitl. 
 
 3. ground, provisions of — corn, 
 molita cilDiiria, drum, n. plur. 
 
 1. guard, verb, custodio, ire, ivi, Itum. 
 
 2. guard, mmn, praesidiuju, I, n. 
 guide, dux, duels, m. 
 
 guilty, find—, condemno, are, avi, 
 atum. 
 
 H 
 
 P' :■ ' *■ a mile =five huiidred paces. 
 halt, -lon-sisto, ere, -stitl. 
 
 1. i'lanJ., manus, us, f. 
 
 2. I rinti to hand, cominus, adv. 
 
 3. h tnc' down, pro-do, ere, -didi, di- 
 tur 
 
 4 ha h;. be at—, ad-sum, -esse, -fiil. 
 5. h, . over, tra-do, ere, -didi, -di- 
 tum. 
 
 hang out, prc-p6n6, ere, -posul, -posi- 
 tum. 
 
 happen, accid-6, ere, T; -fio, fieri, factus 
 
 sum. 
 harass, lacess-6, ere, -Tvl, -Itum. 
 harbor, portns, Os, m, 
 
 1. hard, diffidlis, e. 
 
 2. hard pressed, to be , premor, i, 
 pressus sum ; urg-eor, eri ; (pasnive). 
 
 harm, noceo, ere, ul, v. dat. ; laedo, 
 
 ere, laesT, laesum, «>. ace. 
 haste, jimlie— , maturo, are, avI, atum ; 
 
 conten-do, ere, -d', -turn. ^ 
 
 hasten, fonten-dc, ere, -dl, -turn. 
 
 1. imve, habeo, ere, v', itum ; {=cause), 
 euro, are, a.'T, atum. 
 
 2. liave to ( = nivst), use gerundive with 
 sum. 
 
 he, is ; se. 
 
 1. head, cap-ut, -itis, n. 
 
 2. head, be at the— of, prae-sum, 
 -esse, -f'lT, w. dat. 
 
 lieodlong> urac-eeps, -eipitis. 
 health, l)e in good—, valeo, ere, uI. 
 hear, hear of, audio. Ire, IvI, itum, w. 
 
 ace. 
 hearing, without a—, indicia eausa. 
 1. heart, animus. T, m. 
 
 2. heart, lose—, animum de-mitto, ere, 
 -misl, -missum. 
 
 1. heavy, gravis, e. 
 
 2. heavy armed, legionarius, a, um. 
 
 1. lielght {of vteasuremmt), altitu-do, 
 -dinis, V. 
 
 2. heigiit (=a high place), superior lo- 
 cus, 1, M. ; {in plur., n.). 
 
 3. Iielght of madness, =highest mad- 
 ness. 
 
 help, auxilium, I, n. 
 
 Helvetian, Helvetius, I, M.;adj., Hel- 
 
 vetius, a, uui. 
 Helvetli, Helvetil, orum, M., plur. 
 hem in, con tineo, ere, -tinul, tentum. 
 Henry, Henricus, i, m. 
 Iiero, vir, virl, m. 
 lieroie, fort:s, e, in either positive or 
 
 sujxniative. 
 liesitate, dubito, are, "vl, atum. 
 hesitation, cunetat-io, -ionis, F. ; (on = 
 
 W'».). 
 
 urn.). 
 high, i 
 
 lun. 
 
 altus, a, um ; =gr(>at, maguus, a, 
 
 higher (o/>a',v7(o/i), super-ior, -ius. 
 
 iiighest, sunimus, a, um. 
 
 hill, coUis, is, M.; up tlie hill, ad 
 
 verso colle. 
 himself, ipse, a, um ; so. 
 liinder, impedio, !re, ivi, Itum. 
 liitiier, adj., citei-ior, -ius. 
 
 1. hold, teneo, ere, tenui, tentum. 
 
 2. hold a levy, deluetum habeo, ere, 
 Ul, itum. 
 
 3. I) old out, sus-tineo, ere, -tinul, -ten- 
 tum. 
 
 4. \\o\d. {of iiolding power), ob-tineo, ere, 
 -tinui, -tentum. 
 
 5. hold { = regard), habeo, ere, uT, itum. 
 home, douuis, us, f. ; [domiciliuni, i, 
 
 N.] ; at liome, domi. 
 lionor, ornamentum, I, n. ; [hon-or, -oris, 
 
 M.] 
 
 1. hope, verb, spero, are, avI, atum ; [ex- 
 sijecto, iire, avi, atum]. 
 
 2. hope, vovn, spes, speT, v. 
 
 horse, equus, i, m. ; ( = tai'a?j'2/), equita- 
 
 tUS, us, M. 
 
 horseman, equ-es, -itis, m. 
 
 liostage, obs-es, -idis, m. 
 
 iiosWie, inimicus, a, um; [or = of the 
 enciny]. 
 
 hour, hora, ae, v. 
 
 Iiow {-in what manner), q\x6mo(\Q\ ( = 
 by irhat rovi.), qua,; how great, 
 how large, (luantus, a, uni ; liow 
 greatly, quantopere, quanto opere ; 
 Ijow many, qiiot (indeclinable). 
 
 howrever, quamvls. 
 
 humanity, humani-tas, -tatis, F. 
 
 hundred, centum. 
 
 1. hurl, con-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jectum. 
 
 2. hurl baek, re-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jjc- 
 tiun. 
 
 hu'-t, of-fendo, ere, -fen'^'T, -fensum. 
 
 Imaltsi ikI ii-injntila 7 >t 
 
 »...„, .....,.„!..,, ., .... 
 
PART III.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 If (=m caBe that), si . ,=whethef^^ ^*^ Island, insula, ae, v. ' '"'^^ 
 
 inmgrlne, puto, are, avj, atum. " "' 
 
 S33 
 
 Imiiiediately, statim. 
 
 liiiineiise, in-f,'ens, -gentis. 
 
 Inimlnent peril, obsid-io, -ionis, f. 
 
 In Pof ?•**!*.•*' ""Pedltus, a, um ' 
 Inii.ei-tectly. non plene. 
 
 *"il)ortant, summus, a, um 
 tum.***^' ^°"'-'"ove6, ere, -juovl, -mo- 
 
 |n, in, prep. w. abl. 
 
 Inclose, con-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum. 
 
 incredible, mcredibilis, e. 
 " a"^ ' '"^"'-S^eo, ere, -si, -turn, w. 
 
 iSi^'p*":^' ?^'*^tus, us, M.; pedestres 
 cupiae, F. jptor. 
 
 Inferior, infer-ior, -ius 
 
 Italy, itulia, ae, f. 
 
 1«i» V^":!".''"'"' ^' N-; telum, I, N. 
 ^tL!^Si«'„r^»-"---«"tta.er. 
 journey, iter, itineris, n. 
 
 judgment, consilium, I, n. 
 •Juiy, Qtilntllis, e, rrd;. 
 •June, Junius, a, uui, adj. 
 Jura, Jura, ae, m. 
 
 2.' keen an„*i.f^^'^-''t'-*^""^' ■t^n*"'". 
 
 3. keep JFroni, prohibeo, ere. ul ih,m 
 w. vnjin., or w. ab and abl ' ™' 
 
 "d6.'^'^:«^?'!^!:.i'^'. -tectum; [oc- 
 
 T inflw' '/*'*'' -'"'-.-IUS- «"*> inter-flc 6, ere, -fed -f 
 
 1. Inflict {of puimhment), sumo, ere « ido, ere, -cTdl -ois ,m i ' 
 
 • . "''I?* **?»**» «Pon oneself, mor- ^ingr, rex. rejris. m. ^ ' ® 
 
 \ln. - * **?***** "P«n oneself, mor- 
 dai. ''"""^'^^^'="' ^''e. -sclvl, -soltum, w. 
 
 1. Influence, wr6, ad-duco, ere, -duxl 
 -ductum ; per-moveo, ere, -movi, -mo: 
 turn ; nn-pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum 
 
 influential, l>e-, valeo, ere, ul. 
 flT'f"v'"''"*^'"r'"''L" (certiores) facio, ere, 
 
 in! .?i *' '""-°'"' ^'■^' ■'^"'"J' -cultum. 
 
 injury, injuria, ae, r. 
 
 Infand, inter-ior, -ius. 
 
 Inquire, quaero, ere, quaeslvl, quaesl- 
 
 turn ; roffo, are, avi, atum. ^ 
 
 inroad, mrurs-io, -ionis, f 
 Instead of, pro, w. abl. 
 insult, pontumelia, ae. f. 
 Insultinsrly, Inbolenter. 
 
 '"tmir^'*'' '"*^'"-^'P^^' ere, -cepi, -cep- 
 1. Interest, utili-tas, -tatis, f. 
 
 (fl 63^''*' ^^~''^' '"*'"'^'*' '■^^^•■*- 
 interpreter, inter-pres, -pretis, m 
 Into, m, w. ace. 
 
 int^^«' ]"-ff'"ed'or, I, -gressus sum, w. 
 Ultra and ace. 
 
 invaders, une hostes, ium, m.. vlur = 
 
 fmciti.y. 
 
 invite, arcess-o, ere, -IvT, -Hum. 
 I. iron, ferrum, i, n. 
 
 klngr, rex, regis, m. 
 know, scio, Tre, ivi, ituni. 
 
 tiabienus, Labienus, I, m, 
 
 lmld!!r^' ^~ '*^^""'"> d^'esse, deful. 
 laaaer, scala, ae, f. 
 
 ialte, lacus, us, m. 
 
 lance, lanciea, ae, f. 
 
 ^' it'^^J^^TT-^^' ^^^'••a&ri.M.; [fin- 
 ae, f! ^^ ' i'*PPo»ed to water), terra, 
 
 2. I And, native-, patria, ae, f. 
 landlni^** ««' I't'^e^ter, tris, tre, adj. 
 laiulingr, eflFect a-, ex navibuT ex- 
 
 Ponor, 1, -positus sum {pamve) 
 languaffe, lingua, ae, f. ' 
 large, uiagnus, a, um ; how larffe 
 
 larger, miij-or, -us. 
 largest, inaximus, a, um. 
 latter ille, a, ud. 
 
 1 last, verb, the battle lasts, pur- 
 natur, impersonal pamive. ^ ^- 
 
 A last, ado., proxime. 
 law, lex, legis, K. 
 
 ^'Uun. "^*^*'' •^^■P°""' ei'e. -Posul, -posi- 
 
 2. Jay down one's life = die 
 
 ^. lay waste, vasto, are, avI, atum- 
 
 [populor, an, atus sum]. ' 
 
 lead, duco, ere, duxl, ductum ; (=:in- 
 ^ flm-nce), ad-duco, ere, -diixi, -ductum. 
 -. .o.-M^ ac-yoss, trans-dfico, eie, -duxi, 
 
 -J'uctuni, ojten w. two accusatives. 
 
 tu **"*^' re-duco, ere, -duxl, -due- 
 
334 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 4. load out, 6-duc6, ere, diixl, -duo- 
 
 ttiiii. 
 leuilcr, (li)x, (luciH, m. 
 IviuicrNliip, i>iiMcii>aUiH, us, m. 
 
 1. I<Mi(liiifi( man, jiriiici'i>y, -cipiH, m. 
 
 2. li'iulliiK irluou. i>iliicii)u(,us, us, m. 
 ItMip down, di'-Hilio, ire, -silut, sultuni. 
 luiirii, .•(i-j?ii(>sc(), fi-i', -jfnovl, -ifiiituin. 
 liMiHV, ivd-imo, oil", -t'lul, -I'lnntum. 
 
 1. IcHVC (^Ifavi- hefiimi), rc-\mi]u6, arc, 
 •It(HiI, -licdun. 
 
 2. Ivuvc (-ifoaioni/ from), ah . . . dis- 
 
 (H'do, (>1»>, -I'l'HSl, -cOhsuiu. 
 
 J8. lvavv)(~(joi)iifo/),e\ . . . e-jrredior, 
 I T, -KfresHiiH H»nn. 
 leiivc open, did not attempt to keep 
 
 from itivadinif. 
 left, HiuisU'r, ti'ii, tniiii. 
 leffion, Itv-io, -ionis, k. 
 loKioniiry, lourirniariim, I, m. {in II., 
 
 tix. ,i'l, use the pill r.). 
 lend, UHc foro, fcrro, tull, latum ( =hn'n(]). 
 lonflrM), In , exprexx In) mini; (jfuithe 
 
 ofeliararterixtic, 
 John, uuiuks, adn. 
 U*Ht, m. 
 letter, littorae, finiin, F. jpiiu'.; cpistola, 
 
 lU', K. 
 
 let Nllp, do-initt.6, ere, i-iuTsl, -niiasuni. 
 I. levy, t)erl), coii-scrlbo, ere, -scrlpsi, 
 
 -Hcrtptuni. 
 '2. levy, noun, dolcetus, uh, m.; IntoHt 
 
 lovlew^: which had boon last levied. 
 llberullty, iTbenili-ta!*, -tatis, v. 
 
 1. liberty, llher-las, -tatis, v. 
 
 2. lIlM^rty, Ih» at—, lieet, w. dat., im- 
 personal. 
 
 11^ (~Ih' Kit itated), tine sum, ~be. 
 
 lieutenant, le^atus, T, m. 
 
 life, vita, ae, v.; {in phrane eoHt life. 
 
 Ml/ eotit death). 
 Ilfflit (-'•ntimation), use locus, I, m. 
 
 ( = plarr). 
 lifflit armed, use Icvis a. u.Xturae, -of 
 
 liffht armor. 
 like, siniilis, e, ic. dat. 
 likely, Iw - to, vxe fvtiire fKirticipie in 
 
 •urus with suju ; [or volo, vclle, vohn]. 
 
 1. line, line of iMkttle, aiMes, 01, k. 
 
 2. line of march, ap-nicii, -minis, n. 
 Ilnfft^r, moror, art, atus sum. * 
 
 1. little, a—, paulum; {w. ante), paulo, 
 adv. 
 
 2. little, Imj within a very — of, 
 minimum abcsse, w. quin and mbjunc- 
 tine. 
 
 live, vivo, ere, vixl, victum ; fon, =al)l.). 
 lofty, altus, a, um. 
 
 1. lonjRT, 0(/;., Ioiikus, a, um. 
 
 2. lon«r, adv., diCi ; lonf^er, diutius. 
 
 3. lon^r. ns— as, dum, ronj. 
 lonff-defended, express by a relative 
 
 elause. 
 
 lose, a-mitto, ere, -mlal, -missnm; ( = ?rf 
 sh'p), dl-mitto, ere, -misl, -missimi ; {of 
 
 •didi, -ditum. 
 
 \o»H, delrTmentum, T, N. 
 
 loHH { -disaster), calami-tas, -thtie, K. ; (^ 
 
 disadvantaae), «li'trlmeiitum, I, n. ; {of 
 
 loss in battle), use amitto = fo««, or inter- 
 
 f\v\o--sla!i. 
 lot, fortiuia, ae, K. 
 loud, mauiius, a, um. 
 love, dl-liK-o, ere, -luxl, -lectuni ; amo, 
 
 are, avi, atum. 
 low, humilis, p. 
 lower. Inferior, -ivis. 
 LiueluH, iiuuius, I, m. 
 
 M 
 
 madden, in-cendo, ere, -oendT, -censuui. 
 made, be—, flo, fieri, factus sum. 
 inudneHH, fur-or, -oris, m. 
 maKlNtrate, maj^istratus, us, m. 
 
 1. make, hw'xo, ere, fcc^I, fat^tiun. 
 
 2. make a inareh, iter {gen. itineris 
 N.), facio, ere, feci, fiu'tum. 
 
 ;j. make rea<ly, comparo, are, avl, 
 
 atiun. 
 4. make une of, utor, I, usus sum, «>. 
 
 aid. 
 T). make war on, bellum I'lferfi, Inferre, 
 
 intull, illatum, n\ dat. 
 
 1. man, vir, virl, m. ; homo, hominis, m. ; 
 {-soldn-r), mll-es, -itis, m., or often In/ 
 the possessive }>ronoun8 {footnote S, page 
 lift). 
 
 2. man, toa > a<l unum onuiOs. 
 manner, rat-io, -ionis. f. 
 
 many, multl, ae, a ; »/ followed by an- 
 other adjeetivi, supply et or -(lue, ^and; 
 how many, cpiot, indeclinable: ho 
 many, tot, indeelinable ; very 
 many, j>ernuiltl, ae, a. 
 
 1. inareh, wrb, iter facno, ere, feci, fac- 
 tum, ^=make a march ; fconten-do, ere, 
 -dl, -tiunl. 
 
 2. march, noun, iter, itiiierii, n. 
 
 :t. nuirch. line of -, ajr-men, -minis, n. 
 4. 31 arch {the month), Martius, a, um, 
 
 adj. 
 31arlU8, Marius, I, m. 
 marriage, Klve In-, nuptum («»pjju!) 
 
 do, dare, dedl, datum. 
 married, nfiptus, a, um. 
 maiish, i>al-us, -lulis, v. 
 Mary, Maria, ae, k. 
 ma8Hed, to lie—, con venio, Ire, -vSnT, 
 
 -venttuii {-assemble). 
 Massilla, Massilia, ae, r. 
 niaNter, l>ccome- of, potior, Irl, Itus 
 
 sum, w. abl. 
 material, materia, ae, 
 
 Mferis, M. 
 matter, res, rel, r. 
 may, licet, impersonal v. 
 mean, volo, velle, volul, 
 
 jle.rive pronoun. 
 
 1. meauH of approiich, aditus, fis, m. 
 
 2. meariH, by no , nwpiaquam, adv. 
 
 3. nietiiiM, by of, per, prep. w. ace, 
 
 nioa^ure, consilium, I, n. 
 
 F. ; agger, ag- 
 
 dat. 
 
 w. dat. of re- 
 
PART III. — VOCABULARY, 
 
 335 
 
 meet with, nanciscor, T, nactus or nano- 
 
 tuH Htirii, w. ae.e. 
 iiietiiory, luemoria, ae, r. 
 iCHintioii, (Kmiiiifiiion), are, iVvT, Atnin. 
 iiiervhunt, mercator, -toriH, m. 
 nicrtrlful (lfNi>oNltloti, oluiiiintia (ae, 
 
 V.) IK! niaimuetii-do (-diniH, v.). 
 merit, vir-tfis, -tutiH, k. 
 ni»rit<Hl, ineritiiH, a, urn. 
 in»NNii|ur«. nfiiitiuH, I, M. 
 iiieHNorifcvr, nfintins, I, m. 
 iiilddlu, vne iiifdiiiH, a, inn, adj. 
 1111(1 iilff lit, media riox (iioctiH, kA 
 iiildNt, HHi- inediuH, a, tun, adj. 
 inll«, --a th(ni Hand paces. 
 military, militariH, o. 
 milk, lao, liuitiH, N. 
 mlHvllicf, nialeaoiuni, , n. 
 miMHile, teluiii, i, n. 
 mod©, >rtui-UH, vr'\H, n. 
 Irionn, Mona, ae, v. 
 money, huiii of money, pccunia, 
 
 ao, K. ( ( = ro»«), tiuniinuH, I, m.]. 
 month, inens-iH, -iw, m. 
 more, nliiH, aiiipli"H. 
 Morlnl, Morini, oniin, m. 
 mornlnfir, on the followlnfrmorn- 
 
 Inif , jWHtildie ejus die) iiiaiie. 
 morrow, on the—, iwHt.iiditi, adv. 
 mortal {^-deadly), inortifcr, esa, eruin. 
 moHt, iiiaxnue, or usemiperlotive. 
 niountaln, moua, niontis, m. 
 1. move, iiioveo, ere, inovT, niotum. 
 i. move forward, pro-inoveo, ore. 
 ■inovl, -iiiotmn. ' 
 
 multitude, inultit,fi-do, -dinis, k. 
 
 1. mr.Ht, iiiteijenindliu'paiiKivewifhmim. 
 
 2. muHt necdN, neeesso est, w. dat. 
 my, nieu8, a, urn. 
 
 N 
 
 name, no-men, -minis, n. 
 nation, nat-io, -ionig, k. 
 native lttnd,-patria, ac, f. 
 nature, natura, ae, v. 
 naval battle, navalis pugna, ae, f. 
 nearer, i)ropiiis, adi). 
 nearest, proxinms, a, um. 
 
 1. need, verb, xtm opus est ( = tliere is 
 need), impersonal, w. af)f 
 
 2. need, nown, usus, uh, m. 
 
 nefir leet, nep-Ie^o, ere, -lexl, -Ieotu»n. 
 neighbor, flnitimuN, I, m. 
 
 nelKhborhoml, In the- of, prope. 
 yrep. w. are. ^ 
 
 nelffhlmrlnff, flnitimua, a, um. 
 1. neither, adj., neuter, tra, trum [14]. 
 z. neither . . nor, neqiie . . . neque, 
 Nervll, Nervil, ornin, m. plur. 
 news of diRaster, =dimnter an- 
 nounced. 
 
 "?*^'J'*'^**""' a. "m ; proximus, a, um. 
 nlKnt, nox, noctis, f. 
 nine, novem. 
 ninth, nonus, a, um. 
 *io, nuUus, a, um [14J. 
 
 no one, nCmft; gen., nfillTus; acr,., m6- 
 minem; abl,, nullo; that no ou©. 
 ne (|ms. ' 
 
 noble, ndliilis, o. 
 
 nolne, strepituM, fm, m. 
 
 Mola, Nola, ae, v. 
 
 none, nnllus, a, um [14]. 
 
 nor, rieipie. 
 
 northern parts of iHland, use ex- 
 treml fines, -remotcHt territories. 
 
 1. not, non {in final and imperative 
 clauses, ne); «,n<l not, neque (or in 
 final clauses, nove, neu). 
 
 2. not a man, -no one. 
 a. not yet, nonduni. 
 
 noted for, »,* //., Ex. 32, say could not 
 
 use to any aflvantage. 
 nothing, niliil, n., mdeeUnahle. 
 notlte, lit a moment's-, statim, adv. 
 Novemlier, November, bris, bre, adj. 
 now (- Ini this time), jam; ( = «« thit 
 
 present time, mmv). 
 
 1. numlHir, numerus, I, m. [or use clause 
 with i]\\ot = how many\. 
 
 2. numl>er, larffe - , multitu-do, -dinis. 
 K.; matcims innneruH, l, m. 
 
 3. numlMDr, ffreat numbers, =larqe 
 nunii>er {use sinx).). 
 
 4. nvinlH^r, to ihe-of, use ad w. aec. 
 numerous, c-reber, bra, brum : [multl. 
 
 ae, aj. . i. » 
 
 oak, rdb-ur, -oris, n. 
 
 1. oath, jiiHjurandum, Jfirisjurandl, n.[9]. 
 
 2. oath, take an—, juro, are, avi. 
 atum. ' 
 
 obedient, be—, pared, fire, ul. 
 
 obey, pared, ore, ul, w. dat.; obtemperd. 
 
 are, avI, atum, w. dat. 
 olvlectlons, raise—, recusd, are, avI 
 
 atum, w. (^udminus and subjunctive, 
 observe, video, ere, vidT, visum. 
 obstinately, summa pertinaoia. 
 obtain a request, impetro, are, av' 
 
 atum. ' 
 
 wcuny, ob-tined, ere, -tinul, -tentum. 
 Oetobor, October, bris, bre, adj. 
 of {^^. about), (la, w. abl. 
 
 1. ottlcer, loffjitus, i, m. 
 
 2. officer, cavalry-, praefectus (I, m.) 
 equitum. ' ' ' 
 
 ol«l, vet-UH, -eris. 
 
 on (o/ place where), in w. abl.; (of time 
 when), use abl. only ; (of makin(f attack 
 on), m w. ace; (of direetion), ab or ex 
 u>. al)L-, (^^ronrerning), de w. atd. 
 
 on account of, propter, w. ace. 
 
 1. once, at—, statim, adv. 
 
 2. once more, -^aqain. 
 
 1. one, fmus, a, uni [14]; oae hun- 
 dred, centiun ; no one, nemo. 
 
 2. one another, inter se. 
 
 8. one at a time, sinRularis, e, adj. 
 4. one, the oiio . . . tii© otlier, alter 
 
 • . . alter. 
 only, Qnus, a, um, ad^. 
 
336 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 OKHot, impetus, fis, - 
 
 1. o|H>i», j>iiit'-faci(), >, -fficT, -fnrtnni; 
 /*<f>wir iHUi'-fio, -ilvn, factiJM sum. 
 
 2. ofMMk. Ifiivo , III It., H.r. .u, '^did 
 iKit a tt fill /It t:> k-fi'i>/ri)in invadhnj. 
 
 1. opinion, sciii«'i\iia. nc, i-. 
 
 2. opinion. l»o ol"tlu« , i-xistinu"), Ore, 
 uvl, alum. 
 
 oppoi'tiinc, ojijwrtfmus, a, urn. 
 opportunely, opiiortfmO. 
 
 1. opiM)i't unity, ()C(Ms-io, -ionis, v.; 
 fiu'ul-tas, -talis, v.; |potes-tas, -tatis, 
 K.|. 
 
 2. opportunity, fflvo-, faouItTUin 
 (iaic, or )t()tcst,ltfm fiiccrc. 
 
 1. oppoMO { -irsiKt), lopiiKiio, aro, avT, 
 atnm, ir. dat. 
 
 2. op|io8c ( -.«.'('^ ill uppimtxoii), o\^■\■\^nw, 
 vn\ -po,sm, -iM)situm. 
 
 or, aut ; (hi iiiirstioiis), an ; or not (In 
 qvcufioiis) amiou (direct), iwvxw (in- 
 ihtrrt). ^ 
 
 1. order, juljco, i^rp, jfissT, jussum ; im- 
 pero, are, avi, atnm, w. dot. 
 
 2. orders, srive , imiiero, arc, avI, 
 atnm. 
 
 3. orderN, receive-, jubeor, eri, ji\s- 
 suH sum, ( r=^»' ordrird), 
 
 4. order, in that—, \ , n6. 
 
 r.. order, in - to, ut oausii, art. 
 Orjfetorix, Or^etor ix, -ijris, m. 
 Ostorlns, Ostorius, !, m. 
 1. otlier, iinotlier, alius, a. ud \\4]. 
 •2. other, the - , {of tiro), alter, era, 
 erum |14]; {~t/ic rcinainiiig), wliquuH, 
 a, uni. 
 3. others, the - , reliciul, ae, a ; eCterl, 
 
 ae, a. 
 oui(ht, line go-uiidivr pnmivc with sum, 
 
 |(U'be6. ere, ul ; ojiortet, ere, oporluit]. 
 our, nosier, tra, triuu. 
 out of, ex, e, ir. alil. 
 outer, exter-ior, -ius. 
 outflank, ah lateribus circum-venio, 
 
 tre, -veni, -ventum. 
 AutHtde, ffo of. e-^rredior, I, -«ressus 
 
 sum, «•. extr.'i and arc. 
 over U>/ bridjicf oirr rircrs), in, w. aid. 
 overwhelm, oi)-primo, ere, -pressT, 
 
 -pressum. 
 owlnfi:, Is —to, sto, stare, stetl, utatuui, 
 
 V*'. per and ace. 
 own, line pos.sciKi I'o 7)rono?NiA' ivifh 
 without ipslus, ii>si)run). 
 
 or 
 
 1. pace, passus. us, m. 
 
 2. |m«e, slaeken-, de oeleritate re- 
 mittor, I, -mis.sus sum, passive. 
 
 1. panic, tim-or, -oris, m. 
 
 2. lumlc, throw Into a—, perterreo, 
 ere. ul, itum. 
 
 1. pardon, verb, I-gn6sc6, ere, -(jcuovI, 
 w. dat. 
 
 9 Vkn «*#1«W1 'H/\'»ti-\ t'f\*-%in ry^ ■— 
 
 parent, par-ens, -entis, m. or k 
 
 niaxinrnm 
 
 1. r»»**. iwrs, partis, r. ; in IT., Ex. IS. 
 
 Ill, not tranxlatcd. 
 
 2. I'art, in , nartim. adi\ 
 
 3. I'art, on iiU , uut<'m, adv. 
 
 4. pnrt, on- of, »/( //., Kx. 28, vot 
 tiini.ilntcd. 
 
 f). part, for the most 
 partem. 
 
 «'«. I'art. talio - In, inlersuni, esse, -ful. 
 /'■. ilnt. 
 
 piirtiel|)ate in, inter sum, -usbe, ful. 
 
 (('. dat. 
 j)arty. factio, ionis, v. 
 1. |)aNN ( no), eo. ue, il (ivT). itum. 
 •2. Iiass iKW'ond, e jfredior, i, jfi't'SSUs 
 
 SIMM. ((•)//( extra and ace. 
 3. I ass tile winter, hieuio, are, ftvl, 
 
 alum. 
 peace, jiax, paeis, k. 
 penetrate {of report), =be carried. 
 people, populus, i, m. 
 iierceive, con spicio, ere, -sju'xl, -spec- 
 
 tum ; Intel U'Ko, ere, -IcxT, -lectum. 
 l>erch, victory on hanners, use 
 
 vinco or supero, conquer. 
 perhaps, fortasso. 
 peril, iierlcuhnu, I, n. ; to the—, cum 
 
 pcriculo. 
 permission, have—, licet, licOro, lic- 
 
 u'.t, impersonal, ir. dat. 
 
 1. licrinit. initior, I, i)assus sum. 
 
 2. permitted, bo—, licet, impersonal 
 ir. dat. 
 
 1. person (^^a man), tmtratislated. 
 
 2. person, in- , ipse, a, mu, -: himself. 
 persuade, persua-deo, ere, -si, ,suni, w. 
 
 dat. 
 
 pillage, i)raedor, arl, atussum. 
 
 |)iluni, iiiium, i. n. 
 
 pitch (of a camp), pono, ere, posul, 
 
 iiositum. 
 pity , feel -for, misercor, erI, itus sum, 
 
 /''. i/en. 
 1. i>lace. rerh, pono, ere, iiosul, jrasi- 
 
 tum ; <'olliici), arc, avI, atmn. 
 '-'. i>lace, noun, locus, I, m. sing. ;loca, 
 
 oruni, x. plnr. 
 •'!. |)lacc, Icadinji;'-, principatus, us, 
 
 4. place, in tliat , ibi, adv. 
 
 t>. |,lace, totliat , eo, ado. 
 
 plan, ciinsilium, 1, n. 
 
 pleasing, unltus, a, uin. 
 
 plent.v, copia, ae, v. 
 
 pluntter, praeda, ae, v. 
 
 1. froint out, <locco, ere, u\; os-tendo, 
 
 crc, -tcndl, -tcntum. 
 a. |>oint, l>e on the— of, vsefut. part. 
 
 in urns irith sum. 
 8. iioint, on that-, =aboul that. (II. 
 
 04.) 
 pole, sud-is, -is, f. 
 
 political chanfife, novae ree, f. plur. 
 impular. acceptue, a, um. 
 pop u lation,_ = those inhabiting. 
 
 pOi=t, jiuFtUS, fis, M. 
 
 portion, purs, partis, p. 
 
PART III.— VOCAHULARY. 
 
 pVur*'""'"""' *•'»««•-, Hua, r.nim, n. 
 pofiNlblllty, i)oteH-t(V., -tati», K. 
 
 337 
 
 po«t«rlty, |K)Ht»TT, nniin. m. ;,;«r. 
 
 1. imwt'r. royni , ihk'f- «„. 
 Prt'imi , rt'Kniiin, T, N. 
 
 2. power, ffiiiii tlie Hoverolirn- 
 
 of. potior in. itHH Hum, ;/-. ,«./». ^ 
 S. power, 111 onc'H , in 11. Kx ■"'', 
 
 2. powerful, Iw nioHt , pluriimim 
 posHUin, poHHc, potm. ' "■•"•urn 
 
 practice, cOnHiictu do, -diniH, f 
 
 ^. praiHe, jioi/m, latm, liuuliH, v. 
 ac^ f'Olwecor, an, utUH sum, w. 
 
 precedent, exemplum, I, n. 
 
 preoedluK, Huper-ior, -itiH. 
 
 prefer (with no„„H). arite-pflnrt, cro 
 
 prepare, parn, are, ftvl, atuni. 
 
 1. preNent, donO, are, avi, aUim. 
 
 2. present, be-, wlmm, -eHHe, -ful. 
 
 1. press forward, In-Hto, are, -Htitl. 
 
 ere, pressi, presHuni. ' ' 
 
 3. press upon them, ^vreKH forward 
 prevail, Htipem, are, aVi, atu.i, * 
 prevent, prohibeo, ere, vil, ituiu. 
 previous, super-ior, -ius. 
 previously, ante. 
 price, pretiuin, I, n. 
 priest, sacer-doB, ddtis, m. 
 
 ^IM' ^ '^" ^"' ^^' "°' ^''i^ trans- 
 prisoner, captivug, i, m. 
 private, privatus, a, urn. 
 
 pra-cedo ere, -cessl, ci^mm. 
 proceedings, ^tilings. 
 
 promise, polhceor, eri. itua gum. 
 
 prompt, hortor. an fi>iia«i^ . i^ n« 
 
 ere, -pull, -puJsum. ' ' ■■■■'•i^uu, 
 
 protect, munifi, ire, IvI, itum. 
 
 22 
 
 protootlon, praimidlum, I, n. 
 
 r«vid!;%rJ'''"'-'\r' •'<'"". ■^""tu'n. 
 provide for, pro-vldoO, Ore, -vldl -vt. 
 
 Htim, w. (itit. or arc. ' 
 
 prove, probo, are, avI. atum. 
 provided that, iluni. 
 i»rovliiee, provinc-in, ae, k. 
 
 "-•/;!:/"";."•• '•"""•""ituH. n«. H.(uMthe 
 
 prowess, vir-tfrn, .tfitlH, k. ; nillitarv 
 ■ puniH 1. iil,.iH(.,.r. I. ultimHuin. 
 I '.In r '?'^' ""I'PIWiun. i, n. 
 '• purpose, rOM, rcl, k. 
 
 '■<.?-!,!'«'!.?.»*'' >i'''''-««'l»or,'I, -Hecfitim Hiiin ; 
 pu rsiilt, ^/,„^^ pvrmn'mf. 
 
 ""^,'orJr";,T''ir.:!/'"'""^«"')'-"^"- 
 
 -Jectiiin, unth in am/ aw. *• ' 
 
 •R.n" '*''""'• '"^^''•■"^«". ere, -feci, 
 
 niitto, ere, -uiIhI, -nnHMuni. 
 
 Q 
 
 ^a?""'**'*'''' *■'■"'" "" • ""'"qae. 
 
 ^N.'^'w**'*'''' '*'"*«*•-' »"berna,oruni,^ 
 queen, retina, ae, v. 
 
 quickly, f-eleriter. 
 quickness, (^eleri-taB, -tatis, r. 
 
 R 
 
 m!.rpi.«;'s,n'r"' "•■ *"■ «•»"• 
 
 rank, or-do, -dinis, m, 
 rate, at any—, oertg. 
 1. rather, notius, maglH. 
 
 w?</i ad or in awZ a«Tf?. ' 
 
 readllv, (^without cauge), temerfi. 
 1- ready, pai-atua, a. urn : ItnrM-t^ _ 
 
 aa w. ace.]. ' ' ~" 
 
 ^'uZ^^' "»»''«-' comparft, are, ftvl, 
 
338 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 ore, 
 
 8. roftdy, Jlfot - (of amui), fxpedlA, ln>, 
 Ivl, ituin ; (()/ watclt), paro, iirt', uvl, 
 Atuiii. 
 
 mar, nnvisninuim aK-m«n (niiniH), n. ; 
 In the reur, A tc'rn;i>, or hvcinhs, a, 
 mil, ill (uire^iaetU ; to tlio roiir, ii.l 
 novisHiiMOH. 
 
 reuHoii, (uiuHa, ae, r. ; [or tue daiiM iriih 
 our or (|Uiuiii)hr(Mii|. 
 
 rtihtilltl, ri'Htit-u6, ere, -ul, -fitnin. 
 
 I'tHMill, n'viKH), lire, fivl, lUinii. 
 
 1. > ocelvo, a(!-()i|>i6, iTP, -ci'pT, coptuin. 
 
 2. rvovilvu ordei'N ~ fie oriU'rni. 
 roceiit, nw-i>iiH, -I'lilix. 
 
 rc<'i>vcr ( «^ win hark), rfoipero, ftrc, Avl, 
 lituiii; |( =»Y7/rt»/t couraije), h6 ro-cipiO, 
 ere, -fCnl, -(Hiptniii). 
 
 rodoiiht, oastellinii, 1, N. 
 
 refrain, teiniwro, are, ftvT, fttuin. 
 
 refuHo ( -ohjifi't), reouHo, are, avl, iituni. 
 
 reMTittn, wM'ipero, are, iVvI, atuni. 
 
 reffnrcl, haheO, Cre, uT, ituiii. 
 
 regiment, lenr-lo, -ioiUH, k. 
 
 refflon, rejr-io, -iftni8, k. 
 
 roffuliir (offrmps), ie(ri(^»arhi8, a, tim. 
 
 relyn. In the -or, uxe abl, abnolute oj 
 rCKiiaiis rulivff. ^ 
 
 rolnforceniontH, 8ui>8idiiiin, T, n. 
 
 rolatlonHlilp, oo^nat-io, -ionis, k. 
 
 -flHus mini, w. (Int. (III. 08, h.) 
 reluotMnce, with—, invUus, a, urn, 
 
 adj. in n^rmn.ent. 
 relylnsr on, frCtu8,'ft, um, w. abl. 
 remain, rc-niaiico, Ore, -milnsl, -nian- 
 
 8uin ; iiianeA ; periuaiied. 
 ronialnlnff, roli(imi8, a, un>. 
 renieniber, incinoriain re-tiiie6. Ore, 
 
 •tinul, -tcntuiii, w. gen.; (niemiiit, isse ; 
 
 iinjwrative, tnemen-td, -tote ; reniiuis- 
 
 cor, 11. 
 Konil, R6ml, 6rum, m. plur. 
 remind, commone-facie, ere, -ffici, -fac- 
 tum. 
 remove, re-moveft, ere, -mfivl, -mfitnm; 
 
 [of removing contest, &-niove6, Cre, 
 
 •mOvl, -motuin]. 
 renew, renovo, ftre, ftvl, iltuin. 
 renewal, vKf the verb reiiovo=re»wMi. 
 renown, fama, ae, F.; gWria, ae, v.; 
 
 Iuu8, laiidis, F. 
 rf'Pl.y, re-spondeS, fire, -sponMl, -spSn- 
 
 sum. 
 
 1. report, wrfc, nuntio, are, an, atum ; 
 renuntio, are, avl, atum. 
 
 2. report, noun, fima, ae, F. 
 
 3. report, brlnji?— , faniain per-ferft, 
 •ferre, -tull, -latum, or use nuntio, = 
 annou7^ee, 
 
 republic, rfispublica, relpublicae [9], f. 
 
 1. request, pet-6, ere, -IvI, -Itum, with 
 ab and abl. 
 
 2. request, ffain — , obtain — , im- 
 petro, ftre, avl, atum. 
 
 require, imperd, are, ivl, atum. 
 reserve, subsidium, I, n. 
 r^'Sist, ro sioto, ere, -st.iti, w. dat. 
 
 rcNUtanoe, valiant—, rue the phrase 
 
 ii'sistinfi mliantli;. 
 ri'NoIutlon, cOnMilium, 1, n. ; form n 
 
 reNolutlon, ooiiBilium in-eo, ire, -ii, 
 
 ■ittiiii. 
 rt'Moive, (M)imtit,-ii('>, ere, -n!, -utuui. 
 r.Hourcen, opOw, uni, k. plur. 
 r.'M|M«ct, In no , noii. 
 r.>M|)ond, re-»|)oiideo, ere, -Hpondl, -Hpoii- 
 
 Hiim. 
 
 1. rent, wrh, poiio, ere, powuT, pnsitum. 
 
 2. rest, victory restH upon, use 
 viiico, -^roniiiier. 
 
 ;{. rest, noun, iisr reliquuH, a, luii, adj. 
 
 rentore, red-do, ere, -(iidl, -ditum. 
 
 reHtraIn, coii-Uneo, ere, -tinul, -tentum; 
 proiiiboo, ore, ul, Itiun ; \(of restrainimj 
 ti'ars), teiieo, Cre, tenul, tentum). 
 
 1. result, l>e the — , flO, HerT, (luttus 
 Huin. 
 
 2. roHHlt In, 8um, esse, fill, with uum 
 a nd abl. {be attended ii>ith). 
 
 retainer, di-fins, -entiH, m. 
 
 retire, 86 re-cipio, ere, -efpl, ceptum ; 
 
 80 (M')n-ferA, -ferre, eontult, (^ollatum ; 
 
 (upon, --a«l, w. ace.]. 
 
 1. retreat, verb, pe<iem rc-fero (-ferre, 
 "(nil, -latum); sC re-cipio, ere, -cOpI, 
 -■v>;)tum. 
 
 2. I i 5 '.'ettt, noun, receptus, us, M.; fuga, 
 ae, K. 
 
 8. retreat, means of—, receptus, us, 
 
 M. 
 
 4. retreat, l>eat o— , se re-clpio, ere, 
 -oCp'. -ceptum. 
 
 1. return, verb, re-vertor, T, -versus 
 sum; Ired-ef), -Ire, -iT(.-Ivl), -itum]. 
 
 2. return, noun, use clause with verb. 
 revenue, vectlg-al, -alia, n. 
 revolt, dt5-flci6, ere, -fScT, -tectum. 
 reward, praemium, I, n. 
 
 Illilne, Khenus, T, m. 
 
 llhone, UhodanuB, T, m. 
 
 rUle up, adequito, are, avi, atum. 
 
 1. rliB^ht, noun, jus, jflris, n. 
 
 2. rifflit, adj., dexter, tra, trum. 
 ripe, niatilrns, a, um. 
 
 rival, adaeqvio, arc, av!, atum. 
 river, flu-men, -minis, n. 
 road, via, ac, v. ; iter, itineris, N. ^ 
 
 roiuii about, vagor. arT, atiis sum. 
 Roman, Romiinus, 1, m. ; (acij. )Rdmanu8, 
 a, uni. 
 
 1. Home (as a place), Rdma, ae, f. ; at 
 Rome, Romae. 
 
 2. Rome {as a natioti), potmlus (I, M.) 
 Romaiius = the Roman jieople. 
 
 3. Rome, of- ( = i{o»ian), Kdmanus, a, 
 um. 
 
 rout, fug6, are, avl, atum; funds, ere, 
 
 fudi, fusum. 
 route, iter, itineris, n. 
 
 royal power, regnum, I, N. 
 
 ruoblsu, agger, j^geris, m. 
 
 rude artluory, tn //., Ex. S3, omit in 
 
 translojiian. 
 rudely", iogligenter. 
 
PABT in.— VOCABULARY. 
 
 330 
 
 rnarn^ed, anpor, mi, criiin. 
 
 Pul«, iiiipt'riiiin, I, N. 
 
 riilwr. prlii-cepH, -oipiH. v. ; i,>- „s,' rotro. 
 
 erf, text, rt«t!tiiiii, nilr. 
 run down, .h'-cnm), eiv, cmii or en. 
 
 ciiril, (nirHiiiii. 
 
 1. riiMli toiiniiM, conciirro, cic, .iirrr 
 or (MKniirl, •(•urHtiin. 
 
 2. ruMli out, «0 OJi(U(., t-ro, -JOel, Jcctuiii. 
 
 S 
 
 8lll>iH, Hal)-iH, .JH, M. 
 
 Ha<'r<Ml, Hiict-r, cm, (thiu. 
 
 HutVvuunI, priu'Midiinii, l, n. 
 
 minify. Hiil-iiH, -uUs, K. ; ill Mafbtv, ?/«r 
 
 uicoluiiiiH, c, «(//,, H,,/;,. 
 null, iKiviKo, am, a\ I, aluin. 
 Nullor, imuttt, av, m. 
 Huko, for the ,,f, cuma, w. am. pre- 
 
 Ci'ni IKJ. ' 
 
 sally, erupt-io, ioniN, v. 
 Haiiuv idiim, «'iMltMii, idem. 
 
 MutUfactloii, Klv« , Hutiafacio, ere, 
 
 ft*<!l, -factum. 
 8«v«( mrM^'). e-ripio, ere, -ripiil, -n'p- 
 
 turn, unth ex ami ahl.; (.-w^w/r), con- 
 
 Hervo, ftro, uvl, fttiim. 
 say, dI(!o, ere, dixl, diottun ; if followod 
 
 oy iwgnhw, im neffo, are, ilvi, atuiii, 
 
 -deny 
 scareoly, vix. 
 Hcarclty, inopia, ae, f. 
 ScotH, 8(!<HI, ornm, m. phir. 
 scout, explorator. -toriH, m. 
 1 Hoa, nmre, inariw, n. 
 2. sea, on tlui , maritinnm, a, um, adi. 
 ■< st'aconHt, ora(ae, K.)maritiiiia. 
 
 1. second, Henmd\is,'a,'im.. 
 
 2. second, u - time, itenim, ado. 
 secure, mfiriio, Ire, Ivl, Uuin. 
 
 see, video, ere, vidl, vThuhi. 
 
 seek, pet-6, ere, -Ivi, -mim ; appet-O, ere. 
 
 ■IvI, -itnni. 
 seem, videor, eri, vIhuh suiii, paiisir,'. 
 »<.^l/.o(-.t.ake ponKesmonof), oocupO, are, 
 
 Hvl, atum ; {with impedimenta), potior, 
 
 Jrl, ItUM sum ; intake primmer), coini)re- 
 
 Jicndo, ere, -heiidl, -henmim. 
 select, de-li>j;o, ere, -letfl, loetuin. 
 senate, Heiiatus, Oh, m. 
 
 1. send, mitto, ere, ml«l, niissimi. 
 
 2. send forward, send In advance 
 praemitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum. 
 
 sepiirnte, dl-vido, ere, -vIhI, -vlHum. 
 NeptemlKir, September, bris, bre, adj. 
 »e<iuanl, S(i<pmnl, orum, m. plur. 
 seriously, ^raviter. 
 
 1. set Are to, in-cendo, ere, -cendl, -cCn- 
 sum, ?r. ace. 
 
 2. set out, pro-flciacor, I, -.ectuu sum 
 
 3- set sail, navCs solvO, ere, solvl, solfi- 
 
 tum, =tioom the tihipii. 
 4. set to, in If., Ex. .SO, render by imper- 
 
 *®*i]lf ^"'''^^^ "^ position), c6n-8ld6, cro, 
 -smi, sc-ssum; {(=_dcci.d6), constit-uO, 
 ere, -ul, -fitum]. 
 
 seven, Hopteiu. 
 
 seventli, Meptimua, ^, «ni. 
 
 seventy, septiiaKinta. 
 
 several, eompliir-oM, -luiu ; loliipiot, in- 
 
 ilee(.iimlile\. ' 
 
 severe. j^raviM, e. 
 sliiimefiil, tiin>iH, e. 
 shatter, af-fllKo, ere, -fliM fltctum. 
 ■ ■ Kliip, iiav-iH, -in, I 
 2. ship of war, iiaviHloiiKu. 
 siioclt, impetiiM, Qh, m. 
 shore, llt-im, miIh, n. 
 I. sliort, brcvJM, e. 
 
 '■i. slioit, (for) a short time, puulls- 
 per. ' 
 
 shortly, brevl. 
 Iiouf 
 
 Hiim. 
 
 si 
 
 -ought, use gerundive with 
 
 sh'»ut, elnm-or, -oriH. m. 
 sh. w, OHt< do, ere, -di, -tnm, 
 shudder at, borreo, ci.', ul, w. ace. 
 Siiiit u|^ ab-do, ere, -di<ii, -didnn. 
 1. si«le, ' I.-UH, criH, n.; parH, partin, r. 
 f. snie, ironiall Hides imdiipie, «//»). 
 ■*. siile, on liotli sides, utriimiiio, arfc 
 ■1. s» 'e, on tills . v\h o/-oilia prep 
 II'. nee. ' ■* 
 
 5. side, on the other ~ of, trans, 
 
 ?>rep. w. ace. 
 slyht, (•(id.speetiis, us, m. 
 sjifn, obHlKuo, are, avi, atum. 
 slfdial, HiKitum, I, N. 
 
 1. silent, lacritiiH, a, um. 
 
 2. silent, \m-, ta(!eo, ere, uL 
 Wliuria, .Siluria, ue, v. 
 similar, h liliH, e. 
 since, <nnii. 
 
 six. Hex ; six hundred, HesrontT, ac, a. 
 sixteenth, sextun (a, um) decbaus (a, 
 um). 
 
 sixty, Hcxajfinta. 
 
 sl/e, niiiKnitu-df), -diniH, v.; [or me clame 
 
 ii'ith (luantuH, i, um|. 
 sliirintsh, proeliuiu (T, n.) Icve or 
 
 l)ttrvuhun. * 
 
 siauKliter, oaed-Cs, -is, k. 
 slave, HervuH, I, m. 
 slavery, scrvi-tus, -tutis, f. 
 slay, ititer-Hcio, ere, -feci, -fcctum ; oc- 
 
 (!ldo, ere, -(!ldl, -cTsum. 
 slln», funda, ae, v. 
 sllnnfer, fuiidi-tor, -toris, M. 
 sloplnfiT. decllvis, e. 
 small, jtarvus, a, um. 
 smaller, inln-or, -us. 
 snatch away, e-ripio, ere, -ripul, -rep- 
 
 turn; Ifrom, usedat.]. 
 HO { = to Huch an extent), tam ; { = there- 
 fore), ita(|ue ; so great, tantus, a, uui. 
 soldier, mli-es, -itiH, m. 
 
 1. some (^Morne or other), aM-qnis, qua, 
 -quid or quod; [( = a few), nonnulll, 
 ae, a], 
 
 2. some . . . others, alii . . , alii. 
 
 3. some one, aliouia. 
 
 4. some day, ahquandfl. 
 son, fllius, 1, M. 
 
n4o 
 
 I'UIMAUY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 Noii III liiw, tt<<nor, i<ri, m. 
 NdiiiUMV nilht'i 
 
 NIHIII. IIH MM, Ninilll MlipHV 
 
 non-y. Im« . imicmIIi'I. imtM'nuuol. 
 
 I. MOI't.of Wllllt , i|llitllN, l>, III/), 
 
 it. HOI't, Ullllt NOrl) of IIIUII, i|llUtiN, «<, 
 
 i(^' »(7tiw citir 
 
 Hoiidi, M» //.. Hx. XI, Diiii (h<' hiirr i»ni 
 
 i\nhi< iHiiuiii. 
 
 I. hov«m*(>Ih:ii, r<>iiiiili« . iVnUia. iu«, !•'. 
 "i. nov«>i'oIh:ii. tfiiiii tlu« |io\V(>r<»r, 
 
 |ii»lliir, HI, Hum Minn, ir. ,i/i'»i, 
 N|Nl«>o, NpiMinin, I, N. 
 MJluro, pnicii, (>it>, iii<|ii>l1<t, w. itrtt, 
 M|i(>iili, iliKii, t'lv, illxi, tlii'liini. 
 NJiriir. IidmIi), (u<, k 
 M|HM<lti«><l. i'i'rln«. II, <nn. 
 N|MM>liil, mIiow iiMliilKunce •'»• 
 
 ihtfiir siKU'inUii. 
 N|UH*lilll,v. |>riii>cl|niO. 
 M|MM><<ll, orut l(>. iolliN. K. 
 n|mmmI. <'i>Ii'i1 (An, ti\(iN, K. 
 
 N|MMMlil,V, I'olt'llllT. 
 
 NJMMiil, con Muino, vvv, ■m'liupNl, srtniji- 
 
 Inin. 
 upli'lt. luiinnm, i, m, ;|vlr-tnt«. fOtiH. i'.|. 
 M|>lrlt(Ml, «Mf rtcrHor in a Npin'ti'tl 
 
 niiiiiih'r. 
 Np.v, MiKM'nli^ lor, loris, m, 
 Ni|tiiuli'oii, lui'inii, 110, v. 
 Ntnlii. In llolit, (Mc, feci, foctuin. 
 ntiiiHl tuio'H m^i'oiiikI, I'on-sistt"), viv, 
 
 -slid. 
 I. MiiiHliird, siunnni, 1, n, 
 a. Ntiiiuliinl hctiror, -^hfivhobotvOtf 
 
 stiUiiioriL 
 Ntiito. I'Ul las, talis, 
 
 pnlilioiio. V. ;i). I 
 NtutoilUMit, vox, voHm, I-. 
 
 .«iit/|. 
 Nt»tl<m, collooo, luv, rtvl, ivhnn. 
 Moo|», i>n>(' <H'|w. -I'Ipilis; iimlniis, 
 
 inn|. 
 
 Ntiiitiiliit(>, oxcilO. i\rt>, iivi. atuMi. 
 stir up. iucilo, lire, uvl, alnni. 
 Nt<H>li))(t<\ viilluin. 1, N. 
 I. Htonc {/or huiliihin), saxun\, I, n.; 
 
 {Jot' hiui<it;i), lupin, -iilis, M. 
 v!. ntoiuv Umivo no uiitiiriUMl, 
 
 nihil praotorniillOi. oiv, -uUsl, inissuin. 
 Htou. fon-sisto, on>. M\i\. 
 I. Ntoriii, ivr/i, i>xi>ujrno. i\iH', ilvl, Atiini. 
 'J. Ntoriii, nouit, li>in}H'«-li\s, -talis, k, 
 
 8. Ntoriii, tiikc by , utonn, {lYib). 
 
 HtrntuKoin. oonsihuin. T. n. 
 
 t. Htroani, nvns. l. m.; fln-nirn, -minis, n. 
 
 'J. Htroaiii. » liiiiil of NtriMiniH, 
 
 irhii'h /i(?.i itiiuiu sfrcaiiiK, or ivht'rr then' 
 
 arr inaiui sfiyvi »i»«, 
 stri'ct. via, i>..\ K. 
 Htr»»nwrtli, tl^nin^•t^^^. dinis, f. 
 Ntren^then. tlrmo. iUf. AvT, A(\nn; 
 
 Imaiiio, uv. Ul, \tuni] 
 stretch, jHTtinoo, t^iv, xi\. 
 Dtriko terror Into the hearts of, 
 
 timArom in-.Mcit\. crt\ -IdcT, -jectnni. »•. 
 
 rOsnuldlcu, ii'l 
 \or ««filI(-o 
 
 ti. 
 
 ■trlve, I'onlon <lrt, ptp. -ill, Mmi ; |nlt,or, 
 
 I, nwMM n\\m\, 
 NtroiiH', he , vRlt-n. oiP, ni. 
 I. Mi'iitfKlo, v<-rh, IhIuiiO, Aiv, ftvt, 
 
 iituni. 
 
 'I MiniWM'le, hoiin, rrrlA-niPH, -niliili«, 
 
 N,; lii'llnin. I, n, 
 MiilvleeMon, hv. 'ihn. inllH, r. 
 NuliiiiH, Ni'ivio, Uv, U'l, llnin. 
 ••ueeeiiMl'ull.v, Im'iii' ; |f(Mii'lli>r|. 
 MiioeeNMlve, oonllnnnN, a, nni. 
 I. mieh ( MO Ki'eiit), lanliiM, a, nin. 
 «. f»iieh, of a ehiM'iM'tei*, laliM, i- 
 
 !«. miwU HM, 1(1 //, /v>. .f, UHI< (Mil w. 
 
 Kiihitnu'lirfi. 
 I. Niiildeii, i«>|M<ii(InnN, n, nni. 
 '.!. Hiuhleii, Illlike u Niuldeii ntinek, 
 
 iisi' snltltii, «ri/r,, midili'iiln. 
 Niuhieiily, Nnliilo. 
 
 MIlfl'tM' ( li'i'i'll'f), 111' l'i|i|o, (<|«<, -oflpt. 
 
 rcitlnni; ( ir//iiir), pallor, 1, piiNMUN mini! 
 NUllicleiit, NiilHeleiif l,v, sat In. 
 NiiKtfeMtioii, lit the of, uw inn -tor, 
 
 lolls, M,, siiinirMtrr, in ahl. ahnof, 
 Miiltiible, iilotiiMis, a, nin. 
 Niiiiiiiioi', iu<N (Ah, IiIiIm, k. 
 NUiliiiioii {of nfiYrol i>,'ri<onH), coiivwio, 
 
 ftic, rtvl. ainin ; (•(/' nud ptmon), \m<{\ 
 
 i\ri<, AW, at\nn. 
 Miiperhtr, he . priM> HtA, ftn«, mUM. 
 I. NtippMeN. I'onnncatim, ns, m. 
 -. NiippUeN of eoi'ii, i'Om frnnu'ntftrltt. 
 NiippoNe, ailiilror, ilrl. iVtus sum; jndioO, 
 
 arc, a\l, alinn. 
 Niipreiiie |)o\ver, lOKmim, I. n. 
 Mure. Im« not t»>, cavo, n<. suhfinictitv. 
 NiirpiiNM, prat'-Mlo, arc, -hUII, w. ilnt.; 
 
 ante ccilo, ore, oOHst, -('Osmnn. 
 I. Niiri'eiulei', vrrh, Ininnitir,', dO-do, 
 
 I'll", iliil), iliiinn ; intr<uniiH)<i\ »0 di^do. 
 '.!. Miii'i-onder, rrrhiof „ii<in<nii> armn), 
 
 Ira ilo, cic, ilidi, dit\nn. 
 :t. Niirreiider, nonn, dodilio. iiiniH, k. 
 NUri'ouiHl, ciii'iim-vt'iiiii, ire, -vOnI, vcn- 
 
 (inn ; ( ( put ronnif), clirtnn ilo. -dare. 
 
 -di'di, datum; ( orrrwMm), cii;Miin- 
 
 fundo, iTc, fudl, -I'lisumj. 
 NWiiinp, pal-iis, -udis, k. 
 NwiirniN, nniltltii-do, dinin, k. 
 HWJiy. dio-i(\ -ionis, k. 
 NwiftneNM. rciori tils, -utU, r. 
 Nwhn. iu>, narc. 
 
 Nwlininer. Iwa— , ^eanswim, 
 Mword. Hflodius, \, m. 
 
 T 
 
 ruefarliuiH, Tiufariiiiv*. no, m. 
 THreiituin, Turcntum, i, n. 
 
 1. take, fiipio, ore, c(5pl, captuin ; ((\f 
 tak-in<) II ••''tigvs), liivbpo, Cre. iiT, it un». 
 
 2, tnke auwiy. tollOt, ore, mistull, mib- 
 latum. 
 
 S. take np(-=./i7/«j»). oontlneft. Cro, u!; 
 
 (oftiikimj up arms), i?apld, ere, c6pl, 
 
 oaptuui. 
 4. take np a position, pAn-8ld6, ore, 
 
PAIIT lU.— VOCAMIII.AHY. 
 
 iHl 
 
 nil). 
 
 {'»• tini,ihl hi,. Ii'iini tn„„.. 
 t<«ii<<liof, iiiinflM (it, (ri, M. 
 I««ur. Iiu'i'linii, H„, ^^, ■ |„ f,„n,.„ „,,,, 
 
 '"//. ' 
 
 ioiu- down, Mnln.ln, ore, n«IiIi, m(^Inm 
 
 '«'"' •"<"». »«••'. "IIM, <llr(,i „.. ,(„,, ,.,- 
 
 llflKOII, ' 
 
 t«>lll|ICMi, (.•-IIII.CMtftM, m.\H, K. 
 
 ten, ill Ill, 
 
 (out tiilii'i'iiiiniliiin, I, n. 
 
 tcill li, ilci liiiiiH, II, mil. 
 
 t<«niiM, n.iiilir In, |,,niH. k. {nur ami I 
 
 toiTl|-.v.t.-mM,, or,.. Ill, Itnii, ^''' 
 
 ton-or, I.Mr i,r. r.rlH, m. ; lin, „r, .r.riM, m. 
 li'Mf, prrli'lili.r, iirl, iiIiihhuiii. 
 I 'laiiu.M. Tmii.'M iM, .JH, M. ; (,i,r. /„, / 
 tiiini, i|niiiii. 
 
 1. Hint, iiniiiuiiii, In, rii, |,| ; rnuilniti,' 
 ilN', II, 11(1. ' ' 
 
 2. thai, rniij., wUh imin,. rhuinvH in,. 
 t>aml„t,;{- win, rl,niH,,<„/p„,n„m; ii(,. 
 ru>\ with r/aiiH,H<,/ riHiif/, t\t„ 
 
 r.lii>lr, NiiiiM, 11, mil ; „/■ I'uniiii 
 
 ilH«n ( iir.rl), ,|(.||„li>. 
 
 thyro ( ./, thai ,,/,„r\ \U\- ( .,„ ,,„„ 
 
 I'liiri) ..i. : («« iulriHhu'toriiadmrh), im- 
 
 IniiiHhtli'd. 
 
 f li<>i-oii|ion, (iiiii. 
 
 Hm».V. fl. <'IM', I'll. 
 
 tlilnjf, iVH, iTi, v.; or ill 7,0,11. a „,{ „,.,, 
 
 VM,< ii,;i(,;- ii/uilj. or i„oi,i,„„, 
 
 tlilnit, t-xlHtimi., lire, avi, uUin, : 
 
 (I'lir, arl, lUiiH Hiim. 
 third, (<.rtliiN, u, mn. 
 thli'ty, (Hifiiidi. 
 thiN, lilc hare, UCh\ 
 (houA(|i, allhmiqh. (II. H8.) 
 
 thoilNUIMl, illillo. 
 
 tliivutcil, miiiur. iirT, (iliHHtiiii „ 
 
 ol /wiHon anil mr. o/fhim/ 
 tlll;^M^ MiH, Mia; ihico liundicil. 
 
 Ill nil, i\{\ a. 
 
 thi-oniKh, |.rr. //•. ni'<\ 
 
 I. tlirow (»/ W,;,imilH),,u]]ir,\,,,.,, ,-,^, 
 
 lu'liuii; cimiici,,. ,.,•,., .j,,.|, |,...(i„ii. ' 
 
 f'V'T/'"'" '•/""■""). fMllicio, oiv 
 •,I''<'I, ■Jt'i'liiiii. ' • 
 
 .'«. thi'ow oiM'Ncli', HI-. ).ro.|i,.i„. ,.,,. 
 
 :J<'''I, ,|.'i'lmn; tlirow on<>H'<>inu(4»' 
 
 ir-nin,p„, ,,n., .nipi. -r.mlnin, »>. UMiml 
 
 «<'•.; throw oiM>N(>iriii front of 
 
 H.) ..ircro, forr.., ..I.l.iiji, ol.lalin.,. w ,l„t' 
 
 wZnn. "**'"'^'' "'*•"'■'"' '"'"• -J'''''- 
 '^^■■}.''l'm7" """■"• ''''••"•■''■'• ••'•^"' -J'^'''. 
 "■(m!'""^ ""*' "''""''"'"' <"''•' ■•'''^'. ■''"<'- 
 
 7. throw toffcthur, ooucc-rvo, arc. 
 iivl, alum. ' ' 
 
 thiiN, itm|iio. 
 
 1. time, tcmp-im, -oHh, n. 
 
 _. t,t=^», a .set-otici , iiciiini, mfiK 
 
 8. time, u short , paiiliHii -r, «,/«. 
 
 , Uitii, aUn. ; or UUr- 
 
 • oplao, arum, sf. 
 
 urhi- 
 
 iliit. 
 
 < MnM\ at thnt 
 
 olfi/. 
 
 [•. llnM<, lorn , allipiaimlln. 
 
 <i. tlnn.. on(« at a . HiiiKularlN, «, aili. 
 
 to, ml. //.. r»«v.;||,, „,, „,.,., ' ' ''* 
 
 to-ila.v. Iiiiilir.. ml,}. 
 to nnn'row, miM, ,i,l,i 
 to|», iinv MmiiimiM, a. mu, adl. 
 t»rt«»jMi., (.Hhiil,,. ijinlM. K. 
 
 Mail'''' *"'""""• ""' "■ • ^""""' ""'"*'" 
 tow«*r. hirrJH, In, k. ; {nrr. in i,,,.) 
 townnlM, ml, ,„. an: ' 
 
 town, iippidmii, i. n, 
 tnnhir. iiM.ri'a l,..r. liiri«, m. 
 I H-ai,M,,„rt, ;.«/7y, l,rarmp«,rt,rt, ftro, ftvT, 
 
 trjivollor, vlaior. .(,„riM, m. 
 
 tr(<n<'h4«r,v, prrddla. ac, k. 
 
 tn-at, iiK'... ,.n., ,^^i, rt,.|,m„. 
 
 »••••«', iirli-.ir, -oriH, k. 
 
 t r«>nrh, fimxa, ac, i'. 
 
 • •■jJM', imMii, ionlH. r. 
 
 trllauH*, iril.i.nu'.i. i, m, 
 
 HIllliiK^. hviM. ,, 
 
 '••||»Nv tri picx. -plicJM. 
 
 lroo|M>rM. lai'ohif. 
 
 [••no|)N. niillli.H, mil, m.; 
 
 tiMinlt. IrmiciiM, i, m. 
 
 triiNt, cnii ri,|„, ,,r,., -fiMiiMHiiin. 
 
 '• tr.v, rmior. an. alim hiiih ; or um^ fhc 
 
 '' try to inlliicnitf, try to whi 
 ovor. H..l||,,i|„, arc, avi, almii. 
 
 ■'• try to pri^vont, piolill.c.,, oro, in 
 /'/■'•«.. niipi'i-j:, or/at. t,-i,H,: 
 Miim''" "'^'''•'' '^-v'"''". !•!•!, -vertl, -vt-r- 
 
 l'W«<l V«', iliiiiilci'iiti. 
 
 twenty, viKiiKi; twenty nith vi 
 
 r..Hmms(a. mii) .|ii1iim,s („„"m,i). 
 
 *vi;u;.nu;a!!!'r''"''= *'*'"'' '*"*'•'«•*• 
 
 ij 
 
 nnnlilr, h(> . ncn pimv,,,,,, p,,^^,. p„^ . 
 nni...ini,nt««l niuterlalH aKKor. w- 
 
 nncortuin, iiK't-rtiiH, a, iitii. 
 nn<l<'r, hiiIi, /m'/>. v: ahl. 
 uiHl(>rtaiio, HiiM(^ipi„, <rt!, -oOpT, -(.ep. 
 
 nndi'rtakinv, ((uiatiiH. uh, m 
 
 "I'um ''***'""'• '"'''-'■'•'«"• I'l-f. -IGxT, -iCc. 
 
 un.'ouHl to, in //., I'Jx. 3.1^mice the,/ 
 
 rnn/il „(,t Iwiir. " 
 
 uncxhauHtiMl, n-rMiUH, .etit,i8. 
 
 unfa vorahio, alii.rmH, a, mn ; inlquus. 
 
 '•■ ; ImcoiimiodiiH, a, luiil 
 
 unfriendly, iniiiuuim, a, mn". 
 
 ■ ;-; 'n' "t <l. tliil. 
 
 nnl(>HN, MiHi. 
 
 unocciipUMl, iMJ -, voco, are, avI, atum. 
 
842 
 
 riUMAHY LATIN HOOK. 
 
 IlimiKMTHNriil, nilvpmiiN, a, iiiii. 
 
 1. iilttll, niiij., iliini, liiiiicc. 
 
 2. until, pirfK, ml, ir. oiv, 
 IiiiIiii'ihmI, Umiv«' no Mton«> . ni' 
 
 (iriiclrr initlii, i-i. , -ui\m, iiiisMiim. 
 niiu llllilK, m> . nolo, nolle, noliil. 
 II|»Im»I«I, coiiNn'^o, III')', i\\\, iilniii. 
 lijioii, ill, "'. (nr. 
 ti|»|)i>r, Hii|Mr lor, Iiih. 
 niM'lNlnff, iiKiliiN, im, M. 
 iU'Wo, linrior, ai'1, ul\:s xiim. 
 I. UM«», iv'(7(, iiior, I, iiNiiN N,,m, ir. nht. 
 '-*. iiM(>, nink<> of. KM', 
 
 .1. UN«' torOUMV Vl'lltito, Ult', fivl, UtUlll. 
 
 •1. iin«mI to, iiHi' fhf iitiitfi/irl tfiiMi'. 
 
 IINOi'llI, llliliH, < 
 
 UHoloNM. imitiliM, (• ; I for, lul w. rtco.J. 
 iiHiiul, IiIn , iisf HiiiiH, a mil. 
 
 UtniOHi, NIIIUIIUIH, It, 14111. 
 
 ValcrluM, ViilcHuH, t, m. 
 
 viiliiiiitly, foiiilcr. 
 
 V»IU>y< vall-('s, -Ih, k. 
 
 viilor, virtus, -tutis, v. 
 
 vulut>, of tfrcjit- , mriMriiT. 
 
 1. vuih|uInIi, vinco. ,.!•,., vicl, vlctuni ; 
 
 Miporo, lire, ivvt, aluiii. 
 '2. vuihiiiInIiimI, vi<'tiis, a, luii. 
 
 VOIU'lUt'lU'O, VlH, K. |i»|. 
 \'«MIUtlllH, Vcillllius, T, M. 
 
 venture, iuuImo, oi<>, uiih'iH hiiih. 
 
 VcHOIltIO, VfSOIlt.-io. -101118, K. 
 
 VONHt'l, iiilviw, Ah, k. 
 
 vicinity, t'jrtnrsn bi/ uniiuj ah or ad, with 
 iiaini'x of towns. 
 
 victor loiiH, victor, toriR, m: 
 
 victory, victoria, iic, k. 
 
 viKorouH, inalic u-uttiicic, inftifiio 
 iinpctrt a>j-Krcilior, i, -^{rcssimsnni ; acri- 
 lor impel liiii facio, ore, fooT, fu<jtuiii. 
 
 vljforoiiHly, acritcr. 
 
 villax*'< viciis, \, M. 
 
 violence, vis, K. |1»1. 
 
 v»>lcc, vox, vocin, K. 
 
 voluntarily, ultra. 
 
 W 
 
 waffo, jtero, ere, kcsssI, gostuni.* 
 
 watfon, can-US, !, m. 
 
 wait, wait for, oxspccto, are, tlvl, 
 
 alum, w. rtcc. 
 wall (of toirn), inurus, I, m,; {nf'cainp), 
 
 vallum, I, N. 
 
 1. want, inopia, ae, K. 
 
 2. wanting, 1h«— , ilosuni, decsse, doful. 
 
 1. war, helium, T, n. 
 
 2. w«»r f^alicy, war «hlp, uav-is 
 (is, F.) lop^'o. 
 
 warn, mouei), ore, uT, itum. 
 W'arriorH — sol(ti<r.i or foiros. 
 waste, lay , vast o, are, ilvl, atuin ; 
 
 [popuior, url, iitus sum). 
 watcli, vitfiliu, ae, k. 
 
 »j> 
 
 XSS CCtlJ 
 
 Ml.-. 
 
 !0. »50«<% 
 
 wealth, dulilae, (Vruiu, F. p/ur. 
 
 wciiitoii, li'limi, i, N 
 
 \vi>afller, li>iii|>eN Ii^m, UIIh, K. 
 
 I weep, fico, ( ic, (li'vl, flctiiiii. 
 
 -.'. wc<>|>tntf, III tuM, lis, M. 
 
 I. wt'lvli, <'\«ii>iiio, arc, avl, alum, 
 
 '2. wclu'h anchor, imixch hoIvu, ere, 
 
 Solvl, SMll'ltlllll, • loOMl' ttw HhiflM. 
 
 :<. welK't <loHn< oj priiiio, civ, prcMMi, 
 
 •pri'Ms^Mii. 
 welMht ( iuniii-iKV), luictori tftM, -tiUlM, 
 
 r. ; { lii'di'inrKu), onus, oncris, n. ; |(n/' 
 
 siwiijirit Wfiiht), poiidus, criH, N.|. 
 w«>lfar«>, conNuit of, consul o, cii>, 
 
 ■III, tiiin, ir. lint. 
 \V«>ll-nierlt(Mi, merit issuiius, a, iim. 
 were to , iit^ II., Kx. xlO, ouifht, 
 
 opiirti'l. 
 
 what, III*'"*' <|*>'^*'< <pii''- 
 
 whatever, omiimo, mlr. 
 
 ivhen (irliitiri'), ulii, cum; {interroga- 
 
 lh^>), (piniido. 
 wlienee, iiiidc 
 whenever, cum. 
 where, »'/» //., Kx, ;!/, iVdV/tio, and 
 
 tlirrr. 
 whetlier, num ; whether. . . or, 
 
 iitrum . . . an. 
 which (('/' two), uter, tra, truin; froin 
 
 whicli, imiic. 
 while, <lum ; or iisr prrx. partic, 
 wlio (n-liitirf), t\\\\, ipiiw, (|uod ; (inter* 
 
 rojiiiliiy), (piis, ipiae, <iuid, 
 who!i«, tot us, a, um 
 wlMtFly, omntno ; I ^litus. 
 why, our; (piarc. ' 
 
 wlile, latiis, a, uui. 
 widely, lute. 
 whith, latitii-do, dinis, V, 
 wife, con jimx, juKis, v.: ux or, -flris, V. 
 
 1. will, " mil, Icst.Xment nil, T, N. 
 
 2. will, axahiHt the , tine invUus, 
 a, um, mlj. ( iiniriilinii). 
 
 1. wlllInK:, Ik« . voloi vclle, volul. 
 
 2, wlllin|i(, l>e more - , iiialo, ui&IIc, 
 maluV. 
 
 1. win over, conoilio, are, iVvT, ntum. 
 
 2. win, try to — over, soUicito, are, 
 a\\, itum. 
 
 wiltK, cornii, us, n. 
 
 1. wuiter, rcrli, hieniu, are, ayl, lUuin. 
 
 2. winter, nomi, hicms, liicmis, v. 
 
 H. winter, pasH tiiu , liiuuu), are, 
 
 avi, atum. 
 winter quarterN, hlhernu, orum, N. 
 
 pliir. 
 wipe out, <lCl-eo, Ore, -ovl, etuia. 
 wise, sapi-Ons, -LMitis. 
 ). wIhIi, volo, voile, voluT. 
 2. wInIi, not to—, nolo, nolle, nulul. 
 with, cum, IV. nliL: or use nhl. alone. 
 
 1. witlidraw, withdraw oneself, 
 so re-cipio, ere, -copi, -oeptuui ; diH-oodo, 
 ere, -cossi, cossuni ; {if from a ram- 
 part), dC-oOdo, ere, -cSssI, -cfiHsuni. 
 
 2. withdraw {=ltad off), dg diico, ere, 
 
PAKT in.— VOC/iBULARY. 
 
 348 
 
 I' ^!!!'!" ('/''■''«*). M-^aA/. 
 
 a. withlii. |»e- to very iittlo, luiiil. 
 
 1. witlioutxinc, I abl. 
 
 2. witlioiii, ho . iireA. f'rc, iH, w. ahl. 
 
 WItllNtUIKl. MUHtllKO, flr«, lilMlI, -U-n- 
 
 jjmi ; (i\l «^.^«(#), f, n., imtv:, tull, la- 
 
 wiMtil, vltnini, I, N. 
 
 woiiiiiii, tmillrr, ct'.h, r. 
 
 wont, lM*-t<i, ««. fwrffft tfnwt of nt^n- 
 
 W(mnI, dilvii, a*-, V. 
 
 'aum!***' '*"*'■"* "' "^'"^"*' *'*''• " '• 
 
 are, ftvl, lUnin, ' 
 
 work, oyt-m, -itIh, n. 
 wurki nil, iaXwr, l»il, M. 
 worthy, «h«miH. a, inn, w. aJd , „r t». 
 
 qui «nd uubjunotujp. 
 
 would that, utinam, w. mhjvrn'Um 
 
 1. WoiiiKl, „^W;. viiliiurrt, dr. Uvl, fttuuu 
 
 i. woiiiKl noun, vnlnim, -.,rlii. j.. 
 
 wrrtohiMl, niimir, »,ra, i.nHn. 
 
 wroi,«r, Injuria, ««. r. ; jwioniriiilono 
 
 '".•• "y.-: • > "*' ohjfi-tino aiul uub. 
 Jfrtii^fl ,;pnifiw]. -'h. .w/ 
 
 wroiiir (ioliiNT, liijrirU, a«. r. 
 
 ynr«l, ^/i/ve hundrtdya -,tii tmhundrnt 
 
 par,-),, {imiiildii). 
 .Vciir, nil mm, I m. 
 y«i»tc nitty, luTl. 
 1. yt't, i(uii«ii. 
 a. y«'t. not , nflndum. 
 you. In, vim. 
 
 ymnif iiuin, luhilniki fim, pim|h, ^ 
 y< ar, t uuh, u, um ; voBtor, tra, truui. 
 
S44 
 
 PRIMABY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS. 
 
 {The refervncet are to the Section* of Parts II. and III., not to the pagee). 
 
 Ablative absolute, II., 48-64, 12S, (<?); HI., 
 85, (o); when not to be used, II., 52; 
 substitutes for, II., 54. 
 
 AblaMve case, various uses of, II. , 123-127 : 
 III., 85. 
 
 Accent, pa^ge 3. 
 
 Accompaniment, ablative of, 11., 124,(6); 
 III.,85(('). ' 
 
 Accusative and infinitive construction, 
 . III., 101, (b) ; in exclamations. III., 
 101, (b), vii. 
 
 Accusaiive case, various i uses of, II., 90- 
 1>9; III., 83; Greek accusative. III., 83, 
 («), ii. 
 
 Accu;4ng and acquitting, construction with 
 verbs of II., 67. 
 
 Adjectives of first and second declensions, 
 III., 10, 55; of third declension. III., 
 11, 56 ; declension of comparatives and 
 fiuperlatives. III., 12; comparison, ill., 
 13, 57; agreement with noun, II,, 9, 
 (c), III., 78, 79, (b); used as a sub- 
 itantive, III., 88, (a); comparative and 
 superlative sometimes only imjih com- 
 parison, I'l., 88, (6); often translated 
 by an adverb in English, III., 88, (rf); 
 used in a partitive sense in agieemenc 
 with nouns, to denote the part or order. 
 II., 114, (6); III., 88, (c). 
 
 Adverbial accusative, II., 97, III., 83, (c); 
 adverbial comparison, III., 57. 
 
 Adverbs, forme(l from adjectives, III., 17 ; 
 comparison, III., 17 ; formed from nouns 
 and pronouns, III.,59; fos.silize(lVhrases, 
 III.,. 59; uso of. III., 108; used as pre- 
 positions, III.,83, (/), iii. 
 Agent dative of, with gerundives, II., 105: 
 ill., 82, (d) ; the primary and secondary 
 agents, II., 128; dative of agent with 
 perfect passives and in poetry. III., 82, 
 («?), ii. 
 Agreement, forms of, II., 9; III., 77-79; 
 of verb. III., 79, (a); of prediiiate 
 adjective, III., 79, (6); of predicate 
 noun. III., 79, (c). 
 
 aid, conjugation oi. III., 72, (c). 
 Anaphora, III, 110, (*). 
 anlml, locative, ill., 86, ii. 
 Answer, yes or no, III., 108, iii. 
 
 Antecedent, peculiarities of, II., 197; III. 
 
 lit)* 
 
 Anticipation, accusative of, II. "^OS, N.B. 
 Apo<l()8is, II., 79-85 ; III., 99, {U \ 
 Apposition, II., 9. (a); III., 77. 
 Archaic case-endings. III., 47, (c), 48, (c); 
 
 verbal forms. III., m, < 
 
 Arrangement of words and clauses, II., 
 
 1-8, .W8; III., 110. 
 ArsiH and tfieniH, III., 112. 
 Asking, vcrl)H of, with double ace. , II., 71; 
 
 III., 83, (/), i.; with ut or ne, II., 27: 
 
 ut omitted. III., 99, (a), 2, i. 
 Asyndetmi, III, 109, (e). 
 Attraction of case in ante diem, IT., 227; 
 
 of relative, II., 197, (e); of maod, II., 
 
 220; III., 99, (*). 
 
 Believing, verbs of, II, 55. 
 
 belli, locative use of, II., 125, (a), (2); 
 
 III., 86, i. 
 bos, declension of, III., 9. 
 
 O 
 
 Caesura and caesural pause, III., 114. 
 Calendar, Roman, II., 221-229. 
 Calends, II., 222, 223. 
 capio, conjugation of, III., 39, 
 Cardinal numbers. III., 15; declension of, 
 
 III., 14 and 16. 
 Case-endings, synopsis of, III., 53; irregu- 
 lar, J 1 1., 47, (c), 48, (c), 49, (c), 50, (c), 
 
 51, (c). 
 Cases, uses of, see under Nominative, 
 
 Oenitive, etc. 
 causa, with genitive. III., 81, (0. 
 Causal clauses. If, 165, 166. 167; III., 
 
 99. (J/). 
 Causal conjunctions. III., 74, ii., (d). 
 Cause, ablative of, II., 123, (a); III., 85, 
 
 (111). 
 cav", in prohibitions, II., 150, 
 Characteristic, ablative of, II., 124 (b): 
 
 UL,S5,(<-). 
 Characteristic, genitive of, II., 115; III., 
 
 81, (e). 
 Characteristic, relative clause of, II., 34, 
 
 35- III., 99, (c). 
 
INDEX OP SUBJECTS AND WORDS. 
 
 Chia»mu». III., no, (*X 
 " Il"*74* ' '*°"*''^ construction with, 
 coopl conjugation of, III., 72, (a) 
 CoKnatf lucuHtttive, II., 96 • III 8.S (.Tl 
 
 ^'M'"7,Ill!!"^'.i*"'*"' "'> ^''th 'lative, II., 
 fifi . followwl by nt or «*', II., 27 ' 
 
 l"r.','98,(a);r ^''P'-*^*"*^- "-.149, 150; 
 Commoitl et 'imommodl, dative of, II., 
 Comparative conjunctiong, III., 74, ir., 
 
 Coiiiparatives, declension of. III., 12 • con- 
 8tn,nt,on witi, II., 123,'(c); Il7., 8^, 
 
 Compari8„n, ablative of, II., 123, (c); III., 
 00. U); of adjectives, III 13 57. of 
 urt^'S!-' '' ' r-V'tionui clauLeB of 
 
 346 
 
 ^WeT^ni "'in"?.!?",'; "^ ^-^: ''^ '"'Jec. 
 i«9«. #• '"-l^- "; of pronounH, III. 
 18-2« ; of numerals. III., lo. ' "•' 
 
 III ;7?' ''**'"»""■*'«"'. "»•. 67; verb*, 
 Definition, genitive of, III., 81. (A) 
 Demon»l,.„lv« pronouns, ' declension of, 
 
 III., 
 
 lines of. 1 1 
 Demons). >U 
 
 tab; , », . 11 
 Depei.d. ' , 
 (</); clause 
 tive, ai. ' 
 tion, ' • ■ 
 
 .'eculiar forms of. III.. 61 • 
 ' •-184; III., 92. • 
 
 ronoans and adverbs, 
 
 ^ »9. («), iii. 
 
 Complen.entary inflnit.e, /I., 19; m 
 
 iS: SiVcariii'^"' "^" «'■ "' ^ "r'.' 
 
 Complete action, tenses of, II., 201, 204, 
 
 Compound words. III., 76 
 Concessive clauses, II., 88: III 99 /A 
 Concessve conjunctions, III 74 u (}\ 
 Concords, II., 9 ; HI., 77.79 ' ' ' ^''•'• 
 Condeinninjf, verbs of, II., 67. 
 Conditional clauses, II., 78-87; III., 99, 
 
 Conditional conjunctions. III., 74, „. m 
 Conjujfation of verbs, III., 27-46 ^^ 
 
 Conjunctions, III., 74, 109. 
 Consecutive clauses. 11., 33 • m on /i,x 
 Consecutive conjunciions. III ,' ?4.^ n., 
 
 (■ongtructio praegtUim, II., 125 (a') Cis 
 consulo. with dative oraccusativefil.. 
 
 Co-ordinate conjunctions, III.. 74 , 
 Co-ordinatmg relative, 11., 195; 'll'l., 93, 
 
 Correlatives, table of. III., 63; rendered 
 by 1X8, II., 197, (/). «enuerea 
 
 Crime, genitive oi, 11., 07 
 
 167; when, whenever, II., I68 169 17() 
 cw'i. . . turn, II., 170, ( See Te. ' 
 porai. Causal, and Concessive elausJs 
 
 T ^r^^^^'A^n'''"^ t° pronouns. 
 ii-, 7 , with ablative of accompaniment 
 and manner, II.. 124, (6), (i); Ill."85^^;: 
 
 ons, II., 43-47; III., 99, 
 
 vith indicative or subjuno- 
 
 lauses in indirect narra- 
 
 jugation, HI., 40; gerundive of, II.. 
 1«, (h), peculiarities of, III., 68, (6), 
 
 Derivative suffixes. III., 75 
 
 Desidorative verbs. III., 75 n, 
 aeu«, declension of, III 9 ' 
 
 Diaeresis, division of verse III im- ,.§ 
 syllables, III., 119. ' '"•' ^^*' <>' 
 
 ^'s5,7,T' '*'''''"^'' "'• "•' ^^' ^^^' "^•' 
 dIffn'uN, with ablative, II.. 126- \\\ sk 
 g); with a clause of chaVaJ?erist";'lL: 
 
 Dijninutive noun suffixes. III. 75 , 
 
 verbs, HI., 76, in. ' ' '•• 
 
 Direct object, II., 90, («); m., 33 (a\ 
 Direct question, II., 40, 42. ' ^ '' 
 
 Disjunctive (juestions, II., 42 44 
 Distance, accusative of. II '92" iit aq 
 (c); ablative of, III., 8V,;;),T' "'- ^• 
 Distributive numerals, III. ,'58, (e) 
 doml. locative, II.. 125,'(ar/2); HI., 
 
 doinus, declension of, III 9 
 donee, construction with," II.'. 172 174 
 n.?>Tv-^''"'''« construction o II., 74 
 Dubitat,ve subjunctive, II., 151, (c); III., 
 
 dum, how used, li., 171-174 
 
 B 
 
 Dactyl and dactylic hexameter. III 113 
 Dates, how expressed, II., 229 
 
 iil!82:*''^^ "'^^ ''^ *^''' "•• 100-108; 
 
 **i6of (6).'^'"*'"°^ **"*y or obligation. II., 
 
 Ecthli^)8is. III., 116, fa). 
 hffecting, verbs of, II., 31. 
 Lhsion or slurring. III., no, («). 
 
 Enclitics, II., 7. 
 
 eo conjugation of. III., 45; passive of, 
 la) compounds of, III., 71, 
 
 Epistolary tenses, II., 204, (c). 
 
 Ethical dative, II., 107 ; iii\;82, (/). lij. 
 
346 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Euphonic changes in ver^ formation, III., 
 
 66. 
 Exchan§fing, verbs of, I!., 124, (c); III., 
 
 85 (t). 
 Exclamations, accusative in; II., 98; III., 
 
 83, (h); accusative and infinitive in, 
 
 III., 101, (b), vii. 
 exno, construction of, II., 73. 
 
 F 
 
 f arl, conjugation of, III. , 72, (e). 
 
 Favor, dative case after verbs meaning, 
 
 II., 65. 
 Fearing, verbs of, vnth ne {nun), ut, II., 
 
 154 ; as modal verbs, II. , 155. 
 Feelings, genitive with verbs of the, II., 
 
 tJ2; III., 81, (/), iii.; accusative with 
 
 veros of the, II., 94. 
 Feet, in verse, III., 112. 
 fero, conjugation of. III., 44; com- 
 pounds of, III., 71,(6). 
 Final clauses, II., 24-32 ; III., 99 (a). 
 Final conjunctions. III., 74, ii., (a), 
 flo, conjugation of, III., 46; compounds 
 
 of. III., 71, (c). 
 For, introductory, not translated into 
 
 Latin, II., 207, (a). 
 fore ut, periphrasis with, II., 23, N.B.; 
 
 lll.,101,(t), V. ' 
 
 Fonnaf in of words. III., 75, 76. 
 Fractions; how expressed. III., 58, (e) 
 F'-eedom, adjectives of, with ablative, IIL, 
 
 85, (h), i. * 
 
 Frequentative verbs. III., 75, iii.; tenses 
 
 in frequentative clauses, II., 202, 204, 
 
 (a). 
 fretus, with the ablative, II., 126; III., 
 
 85, (k), iii. 
 fruor and fun^or, with the ablative, 
 
 II., 65; III., 85, (a), ii. 
 ful, fuerain, fuero in compound 
 
 tenses. III., 97, (g), iii. 
 Future conditions, II., 83 ; III., 99, (A), ii. 
 Future infinitive, after verbs of hoping, 
 
 etc., II., 13; III., 101, (6), iii. 
 Future narticiple, II., 147 ; III., 102, (b). 
 Future perfect, use of, jll., 205; III., 97, 
 
 (/) ; changed to pluperfect subjunctive, 
 
 in indirect narration, after a secondary 
 
 tense, II., 214, (a), (3). 
 Future tense, use of, II., 200;*in., 97, 
 
 '-' 
 
 Gender, general rules for. III., 52; gender 
 endings and exceptions, in the five de- 
 clensions, III., 47, (6), 48, (b), 49, (b), 50, 
 (6), 51, (6) ; agreement of adjectives and 
 pronouns, II., 9, (a), (b), (c), (rf); III., 
 78, 79. 
 
 Genitive, uses of, II., 109-121; III., 81; 
 use with adjectives extended in poetry, 
 III., 81, (/), ii. 
 
 Gerund, forms of, II., 133; III., 35; uses 
 of, II., 133, 134; III., 103. 
 
 Gerundive, forms of, II., 140 ; III., 34 ; uses 
 of, II., 140-14S; III., 104. 
 
 jylorlor, ablative with, II., -fW. 
 grsLtla, genitive with. III., 81, (z). 
 Greek nouns. III., 47, (d), 48, (d), 49, (d). 
 
 habeo, with perfect participle, II., 203, 
 
 204.(6); III.. 97, (*/),!. 
 Heroic ^=n. III., 113. 
 
 Heteroc III., 54, (c). 
 
 Heterog uns. III., 54, (6), 
 
 Hexamei , III., 113. 
 
 Hiatus, " ij, (b). 
 lilo, dei icnsion of. III., 23; peculiar 
 
 fonns of. III., 61 ; uses of, II., 177, 179, 
 
 (a); III.,92,(rt). 
 Hinder'ng, verbs of, II., 156-159. 
 Historical infinitive, II., 131; III., 101, 
 
 (d). 
 Historical present, II., 198, (a), 2^; III., 
 
 97, (a); sequence of tenses with, HI., 
 
 107, iii. 
 Hoping, verbs of, II., 13; III., 101, (b), 
 
 iii. 
 Hortatory (or Hortative) subjunctive, II., 
 
 151, (a); III., 98, (a). 
 buml, locative use of, II., 125, (a), (2); 
 
 lu., 86, i. 
 
 i-stems, declension of nouns, HI., 6. 
 
 Ictus in metre. III., 112. 
 
 Idem, declension of. III., 23, 61 ; followed 
 by yul or dc, II., 197, (/) ; uses of, III., 
 92, (e). 
 
 Ides, II., 222, 223. 
 
 idoneus, vnth relative clause of charac- 
 teristic, II., 35. 
 
 ille, declension of. III., 23; peculiar 
 forms of. III., 61 ; uscoof. III., 92, (c). 
 
 Imperative mool, infection of. III., 37, 
 38; uses of, II., 149, 150; III., 100; in 
 indirect discourse, turned by subjunc- 
 tive, II., 214, (a), (1). 
 
 Imperfec*^ tense, u&es of, II., 199; III., 
 97, (b). 
 
 Impersonal verbs, purely impersonal, HI., 
 72, (g); intransitives used impersonally in 
 passive, III., 72, (h), 96, (b); impersonal 
 (or tather unipersona!^ verbs, with clause 
 or infinitive as subject III., 72 (i). 
 
 Inceptive or inchoative ^erbs, III., 75, in. 
 
 Incomplete action, tenses of, II., 198, 199, 
 200. 
 
 Indeclinable nouns, gender of, HI., 52, (c) ; 
 list of, HI., 54, (d); adjectives, IIL, 
 56a. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns, II., ia'v-192; III., 26, 
 62, 95. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns and adverbs, table of, 
 III., 63. 
 
 Indefinite relative pronouns and adverbs, 
 table of. III., 63. 
 
 Indicative mood, inflections of, III.j 27, 
 28, 64, (c), 1 ; in principal clauses, III., 
 97; in dependent clauses, II!., 99. 
 
 i 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS. 
 
 847 
 
 85. (d), vnth clause of characteristic 
 
 ■I X ♦ I OO. ' 
 
 Indirect discourse, II., 213-220- stite 
 2u"r«S'^n?*'T ""l^ commands in, 'll.,' 
 91 1' rtl' ^11 ' subordinate clauses in II. 
 ^1*. W,(2); pronouns in, II., 214 (b)- 
 adverbs in II., 214, (c) ; real or apmrent 
 exception to rules, II., 215 ; conditional 
 
 rrr/i/.^;;:- «^- ^-^^-^eneS 
 
 Indirect object, II., 100 ; III., 82, (a) 
 Indirect questions, II., 43-47; III., 99. 
 
 Infinitive, fonns of, III., 31. 30 64 M q- 
 uses of, II., 12-23, 130-^2 IIi:,i6r.Vx: 
 tended use of, in poetry. III.', loi.'^, 
 
 Infinitive clauses, II., 20f>, N.B., 207 211 
 inqaani (inqult) position of li • 
 llTf 7f (5f' -t«'4-. "• . 18 ; defectivW 
 Inseparable particles. III 76 
 Instrumental ablative. II., ^24; IIJ., 85. 
 
 Intensive v^erbs. III., 75, in. 
 interdleo, construction of, II 77 
 
 SI /fw'"''°"^*''"'^"«" o^. "-.'CS; III.. 
 °'-> (J), 111. 
 
 Inteml, dative of, II., 101, 102; in., 82, 
 
 '"Srir »8Ti°,?s 5f • '" -*- 
 
 Interrogative pronouns. III.. 25 62' 94- 
 uses of, ill. , 94, ' ' ' 
 Interropt^ve pronouns and adverbs, table 
 
 intransitive "verbs, II., 55; used imperson- 
 aJly in the passive, II., 57 140 o^ 
 N.B. ; IIL. 72': (^), 82, (.) iii ,'%!V ' 
 
 "*"9 ;TsiVf;'lIi?6r '=°"^"^^"°"' "^•' 
 
 ^^m'l'utlPiff' "^^ ^' "'^^°^' "•' 
 
 Irregrular nouns, declension of, III 9- 
 case-endings of nouns. III., 47 Ic) 48* 
 W>J?' W. 50,(0, 51, (e); case-endings 
 of adjectives of third declension. III . 
 56,(6); verbal endings. III., 66 
 
 ViKrvu"-' '''''' "^"°^' 
 
 **n8^'lTlT2''?6f ' "^^ '^^' "'^' ''^' "•' 
 It, no equivalent in Latin, when used as 
 
 j"ct,'Tr("xN':B."^"""^'^"^^ ^"^- 
 
 Itaque, position of, II., 6. 
 
 Iterative verbs. III, 75, iii. 
 
 "'nf ' ^J^c**^^s with genitive singular in, 
 
 Jupplter, declension of. III., 9 
 
 J u^urandum, declension of, III., 9 
 
 •* Tcau e Ilf R.^' /'W' <«) •^'>^'^^^^ 
 01 cause. 111., 85, (rw), u. 
 
 juvo, takes accusative, II.. 58. 
 K 
 
 Knowing, verb's of. with accusative and 
 
 anH-*Kf' "/•' 12: With interrogative 
 and subjunctive. II,, 45. 8«.i"vc 
 
 J^?*', V^^ present and imperfect. III.. 
 
 97, (a), (b). ^ ' 
 
 jubeo, construction with, II., 23. 
 
 laedo, accusative after, II., r,8 
 "?, V."^^** in third person singular. III.. 
 72, (I, ; used with an infinitfve. to de' 
 
 loweJtr'T?"' ^^' 16^ : sometimes fol- 
 lowed by subjunctive, II., 163, (b)- used 
 
 as concessive particle. III., 74; iI'.Ta 
 Likeness, "adjectives of, II.. 102 ; III., 82, 
 
 ^HL.S S)"*'"' '^''"^^"''^ °^' "•' 93; 
 Locative ablative, IL, 125; III 85 m 
 Locative, the, IL, 125, («), (2); III 86• 
 M 
 magls, comparison expressed by. III.. 
 "8lf(")'i'"*'' ^^""^^ °' estimating, IIL, 
 
 *^^'"7o'•7^^■/^y/*^ *^° accusatives, 
 malo, conjugation of. III., 43 ; with com- 
 plementary infinitive, IL 19 '''"'" ^°'"- 
 
 85,"(J)'. '''''''"^^ ''^' "•• 124, (&) ; IIL, 
 MastWy. adjectives of. with genitive, IL, 
 
 niaterfamllias, declension of, in 9 
 niaxlme, comparison expressed by, IIL, 
 
 ^^Sr* "^^^^'^^ °'' "•• 124. («); "I., 85, 
 
 "Sifive ^T"^^'^' in-' ^2. W: with 
 genitive, IL, 62; with accusative, II,. 
 
 IIL, 10o"(6)""^^"'"''^ ''^' ^"'" present. 
 Memory, verbs of, IL, 6", 64. 
 JI?ir«o« Virgil, IIL. 111-119. 
 Middle use of passive, IIL, 96, (c). 
 ""se, * ('"cati^e). "- 125, (a). (2); IIL, 
 
 nillle (inJllla), how used, IIL, 58. (/)• 
 declension of millia, III. ,16. ^' 
 
 misereor, construction with", II. , 62. 
 mlseret, construction with, IL, 68 
 JJo^ns. names of, II. , 222, footnote 1. 
 — Ov^s, see Indicative, Sufajuactive, etc. 
 
348 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Motion, hmit cf, II., 93; III., 83, (g); 
 motion from, II., 123, (6), 129; III., 86, 
 (/t). 
 
 Multiplication, distributives used to ex- 
 press, III., 5C, (c\ 
 
 N 
 
 Natural gender, rules of, III., 52. 
 
 natus, with ablative, II., 123, (a); III., 
 85, (0, '. 
 
 -ne (enclitic), II., 7 ; used in questions, 
 II., 40, 41. 
 
 ne, with negative purpose, II., 25, 27, 29 ; 
 with ditrii, II., 171 ; with imperative or 
 subjunctive, to express prohibitions, etc., 
 II., 152; omitted after cave, II., 150; 
 with clause of concession. III. , 99, (i), ii. 
 
 ne. . . quidem, II., G. 
 
 Nearness, adjectives of, with dative, III., 
 82, (e), v. 
 
 Necessity, how expressed, II., 161. 
 
 necne (or not), used in double indirect 
 questions, II., 44. 
 
 nefas, with ablative supine, II., 138. 
 
 nemo, defective in case, 'II., 54, (a). 
 
 Neuter adjectives used substantively. III., 
 88, (a). 
 
 nisi, in conditional clauses, II., 78; with 
 ablative absolute, II., 51; with single 
 words, II., 89. 
 
 noli (nollte), with infinitive, to express 
 prohibitions, II., 1.50. 
 
 nolo, conjugation of. III., 43; with in- 
 finitive, II , 19, 22. 
 
 noinen est, construction with, II., 103; 
 III., 77, viii. 
 
 Nominative case, III., 80. 
 
 non quo<l, non quo, with subjunc- 
 tive, II., le,"), (6), N.B. ; III., 1»9, (y), iv. 
 
 Nones, II., 222, 223. 
 
 noster, nostrl, nostrum, use of, 
 III., 60, (b). 
 
 Nouns, declension of, III., 1-9 ; derivative 
 suffixes used in forming, III., 75, i. 
 
 num, force of, II., 41 ; in dependent 
 questions, II., 43. 
 
 Number, agreement in, adjective, II., 9, 
 (c); pronoun, II., 9, (d); III., 93; verb, 
 II., 9, (e), 10, 11. 
 
 Numeral adverbs. III., 58, (d). » 
 
 Numerals, III., 15, 16, 58; method of com- 
 bining, III., 58, (b). 
 
 o 
 
 Oblect, direct, II., 90; III., 83, (a); in- 
 direct, II., 100; III., 82, (a) ; noun clauses 
 used as objects, II., 207-211. 
 
 Objective genitive, II., 112, 117, 120; III., 
 81, (rf); with adjectives. III., 81, (/). 
 
 Oblique cases, page 218, footnote. 
 
 Oblique narration, see Indirect discourse. 
 
 odl, conjugation of. III., 72, (6). 
 
 oportet, used in third person, III., 72, 
 (t); construction, II., 160, (c), 163, (b). 
 
 Optative use of subjunctive, III., 98, (a). 
 
 opus and usns, with ablative, III., 85, 
 _(a). 
 
 OrdtiO obliqua, see Indiicct discourse. 
 
 Order of words, II., 1-8; III., 110; of 
 clauses. III., 110, (m). 
 
 Ordinal Numerals, list of. III., If; declen- 
 sion of. III., 16. 
 
 paenltet, construction with, II., 68. 
 
 Participial phrases, value of, II., 148, (a). 
 
 Participles, II., 144-148, III., 64, (c), iv.; 
 102 ; with force of substantives, II., 148, 
 (6); of adjectives, II., 148, (c); case- 
 endings of present participle. III., 56, 
 
 Particles, III., 74-76. 
 
 Partitive apposition. III., 77, iv. 
 
 Partitive genitive, II., 113, 114; III., 81, 
 
 (6). 
 Passive voice, inflection of. III., 28, 30, 32, 
 
 34, 38 ; for impersonal use of, see In- 
 transitive Verbs. 
 paterfamilias, declension of. III., 9. 
 Patronymics, III., 75, i. 
 Penalty, genitive of, II., 67; ablative of, 
 
 III., 85, (0, i. 
 Perfect tense, uses of, II., 201, 202; III., 
 
 97, (d); perfect participle with habm, 
 
 II., 203, 204, (6); perlect participle with 
 
 Jul, fmram, fuero, III 97, {g), iii. 
 Periodic sentence, psmje j J 5, footnote 1 ; 
 
 II., 238; III., 110, (rt). 
 Periphrastic conjugations. III., 69, 102, 
 
 (/>), 104, (a); indicative of, in apodosis, 
 
 II., S!), N.B. 
 Permission, how expressed, II., 163. 
 Person, agreement of pronoun in, II., 9, 
 
 ((/); agreement of verb in, II., 9, (c), 
 
 10. 
 Personal construction of oerba sentiendl et 
 
 dcekhandl in passive, II., 14; III., 101, 
 
 (/>), ii. 
 Personal endings. III., 64, (ft). 
 Personal pronouns, declension of. III., 18, 
 
 19, 22; peculiar forms of. III., 60, (c); 
 
 syntax of, II., 176, 180; III.. 89. 
 Persuading, verbs of, with dative, II., 55; 
 
 with ut or ne clause, II., 27; III., 90, 
 
 (rf), 2 ; with accusative and infinitive, 
 
 II., 31. 
 Plnase, with value of a verb, II., 17, 55, 
 
 62; phrases, neuter. III., 52, (o). 
 Place, /mm which, II., 123, (ft); III., 85, 
 
 (h)\ in ivhich, II., 125, (a); 111., 85, (k)\ 
 
 to which, II., 93; III., 83, (;;). 
 Plenty, verbs of, II., 65, 73; III.,85, («); 
 
 a<ljectives of, II., 117, 126; III., 85, (a). 
 Pluperfect tense, uses of, II., 204; III., 
 
 97, (e). 
 Plural, nouns with special meaning in, 
 
 III., 54, (e). 
 plus, declension of, IIT., 12; comparison 
 
 of. III., 13; without quatn, II., 123, (c), 
 
 (2); III., 85, (A ii. 
 Polysyndeton, III., 109, (e). 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS. 
 
 PMse. used after spero, II., 13 ; m., 101, 
 
 Possession, dative of, II 10a • iii ao /«,\ 
 Possessive genitive, uCj (a) ' ®^■^^• 
 mir^\'''^T ^«^J?Stive8), III, 21. 
 ca^e IT i'«r^\''P,??^'"^^ '" genitive 
 iW thi"' ^^' ^"^' "^•' 77, ii.; contain- 
 wg Jhe antecedent of a relative, III , 
 
 '^d'af vert,', ^ir\r"°" °'' "^- ^2 ; a mo- 
 Potentjal subjunctive, II., 151, (ft); m., 
 
 Predicate noun, II„ 9, (6); m. 79 /.x. 
 
 t^'::e^:iY;;ftr--^^^^^^ 
 
 sle"£ir?7"""°"' "•• '2'' ^«>' <3)- 
 ^"inrra"'' "^^ ^^' ^^' '" composition, 
 Present tense, uses of, li., 193 ; m., 97^ 
 
 Pn„.arytenses,'lI.,l8^;;!;::?6/.\ot. 
 
 ^1?°Tn'fh'*"'t'' '" .**'« indicative, III., 
 97 ; in the subjunctive, III. 98 ' 
 
 Principal parts of tne verb, III., 64 (a) 
 Prohibitions, II., 150; III. 98, a) l ibo 
 Promising, verbs of, with future iifiniti^e. 
 
 Pronouns, der!enmon of, III., 18-26 60.f59- 
 uses of, II., m^ v.f:; ill 89.95 ' ' 
 
 Pronunciation of u**\n page l " 
 
 '^IhfffiveTll^f^ "" °^' "'•' ''■' *^«« 
 Protasis, II., 79; III., '^, (A), j. 
 
 *K-'lfreT! ¥ «"yu„ctive, II., 
 i^-di , III., 99, («) ; by supine after verb 
 of motion, II., 136; III.T 1(>5 (a)-hv 
 gerund and gerundive, f I 141 ' '(al 
 riL, 103, (c); 104, (6) u' ^^^ S-' 
 dative of, II., 75, 101 ; III., 8K /^ *^' ' 
 
 349 
 
 qui, see Relative Pronoun 
 
 quin, II 36; with verbs of dovbtitu, 
 
 qulsquam, n , 189; in.. 95 vii • rfp 
 clension of, III., 26 ' ' °®" 
 
 «nA^J'"'^"'''"x8^ "O"" clauses, II. To9^^' 
 
 ?aM, l"^' ' ^^^■^^^' ^^= "^•' ^' 
 quoque, position of, II., 6 
 quuni, see cum (conjunction). 
 
 R 
 
 ^^mA^."^ '■'^*"°"' ^""^ expressed. III., 
 
 Rfd.?^!^"?' '^*** accusative, II., 64. 
 Reduplication of tense stems, III fis 
 Reference, dative of. II.. I'oJ; 'la. 82, 
 
 refert, construction of, II., 63. 
 
 Relative clau.es,' III. ,'99,' (e •'^' ^''^• 
 Relative pionouns, declension of III 94 • 
 
 =s^;'f,^AL,T«^="^--«^=i-»- 
 
 ^fal'gs.'''"""''""' ^""^ "^^^'•^«> table of, 
 
 "ll'*}o?^M-"' P^'^"* tense denotes, 
 100 ,1' ^ ^ ' ""perfect tense denotes, II. 
 bv '/h2 S'T^il "' subordinate clauses 
 feet II ^lK^"•b^°^= ^y *be pluper- 
 
 «i»2:-i:;',^"^' W- See also III., 97 
 
 rS"**,"*'**' 'leclension of. III. 9. 
 
 Result, clauses of, II., 33-39; III., 99, (&). 
 
 S 
 
 Q 
 
 quaeso, conjugation of, III., 72, (/) 
 Qualities, two, compared, II., 123 (cVcs^ 
 Quahty genitive 0I, II.', li5 I'/s?®, 
 |l.^g); ablative of, II., 124,(6),' m.,' 
 
 Quantity of syllables in scansion, III m 
 footnote 1 ; I15, footnote 2 ' 
 
 quain, modifies superiative, III.. 88 (b\- 
 with comparatives, II 123.' (0), {^'iS;, 
 
 ?nUf{i.,T75,W' "'*' '^'^^^ ^^^ 
 quamqnam, with indicative in conces- 
 sive clause, II 88, {b) ; m., 99, (? ," ' 
 ^m M'?A'^*.'f'^l""^*'^'e. II. 88, (c); 
 II ,"89^' ' '■ ' ^° ^^^^ *''"^'e word. 
 Questions, direct and indirect, II, 40-47 • 
 m indirect discourse, II , 214, (a) nv 
 
 Saying, verbs of, construction, II. 12 
 used personally in the passive II 14 ' 
 Scanning, III., 115. i"««ve, n., 14. 
 
 se, uses and reference of. III., 91, ii iii 
 Secondary tenses, II., 2*8; III , 107,' foot- 
 
 Semi-deponents, in., 68, (6). 
 
 Sense construction,' II., H; m 70 /„v 
 
 !•; 79. (6), ii., iii.' ' '■'■' "^•' ^^'W, 
 
 Separation, ablative of, II., 123, (a); III., 
 
 85, (A); genitive of, in poetry, 81, (/), 
 
 Sequence of tenses, II., 28, m, 46; III., 
 
 8 -rvice, dr.tive of, II., 7,«;, 101 • m 82 {p\ 
 Serving, verbs of, with dkh 4, II 66 ' ^ ^' 
 
 frr^fSl /?(''*'"onal clauses, II., 78-87; 
 
 111., ijy, (ft). ' 
 
 Smell, vf-rbs of, with accusative It U 
 solug, declensien of, JJl,, 14 .' with fda- 
 
 tive clause of chara'tArlstir- if . 36 
 Sourca, ablative of, li 12;. («;; HI., 86, 
 
 R^'.ext*?* of, accusative of 11 . 9?- 
 
 III., 33, (Cy, 
 
350 
 
 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. 
 
 Sjparing, verbs of, with dative, II., 65. 
 
 Specifloation, accusative of, II., 97 ; III., 83, 
 (e) ; ablative of, II., 124Me) ; III., 86, (d). 
 
 Spondaic verse. III., 116, (t»). 
 
 Stems of the five declensions, III., 47, (a), 
 48, (a), 49, (a), 50, (a), 51, (a) ; present, 
 perfect and supine stems of verbs. III., 
 64, (a). 
 
 Subject, agreement of verb with, II., 9, 
 (e>, 10, 11 ; III., 79, (a) ; subject of infini- 
 tive, II., 12; of historical infinitive, II., 
 131. 
 
 Subjective genitive, 11., Ill ; III., 81, (c). 
 
 Subjunctive mood, inflection of. III., 29, 
 30, 64, (c), 2; in principal clauses, III., 
 98; in dependent clauses. III., 99; in 
 clauses of purpose, II., 24-32 ; of result, 
 II., 33-39; in dependent questions, II., 
 43-47 ; in conditional clauses, II., ^ 87 ; 
 in concessive clauses, l!-. 88; indt end- 
 ent uses of, 11., 150-152; with verbs of 
 fearing, hindering, etc.. If., 154-159; 
 with qtiod, II., 165, (b); with cum, II., 
 167, 169; with dum, donee, quoad, II., 
 171, 174; with antequam and jw ms- 
 quarn,, II., 175; with qtii, II., 194,196; 
 in indirect discourse, II., 214, (a) ; of 
 virtual indirect narration, II., 216, 220; 
 III., 99, (e), i.; by attraction, II., 220; 
 III., 99, (A;). For synopsis of uses, see 
 III., 98, 99. 
 
 Subordinate conjunctions, III., 74, ii. 
 
 Substantival use of infinitive, III., 101, 
 (c). 
 
 Substantive clauses, II., 208-211. 
 Suffixes, derivative, III., 1^. 
 sum, conjugation of, III., 41; peculiar 
 forms of. III., 70; ccmpounrts of, III., 
 
 sunt qui, with clause o* -aaractenstic, 
 
 II., 188, (a). 
 Supine, forms and uses of, II., 135-139; 
 
 III., 105. 
 Swearing, verbs of, II., 13. 
 Syllabication, page 2. 
 Synaeresis or synizesis. III., 119. 
 Synaloepha, III., 116, (a). 
 Syncopated verb forms. III., 66. 
 Synesis, II., 11. 
 
 T , 
 
 Teaching, verbs of, with two accusatives, 
 II., 71. 
 
 Telling, verbs of, v,-ith indirect question, 
 II. 45 ; III., 99, (d). ^ ^ 
 
 Tp "' clauses, II., 168-170, 172-175; 
 
 III., 99, (/). 
 
 Temporal conjunctions, III., 74, ii., (c). 
 
 Tense stnms, formation of present, per- 
 fect and supine, III., 65. 
 
 Tenses of the indicative, II., 198-205; III., 
 97; of the infinitive, II., 16, 132, (c); ot 
 participles, II., 144-147 ; of the subjunc- 
 tive in indirect questions, II., 46; 111, 
 106, (6); 107, (ft). 
 
 terra marlque, witlicat preposition, 
 II., 125, (o), (2). 
 
 The . . . the, quo ...««, II., 124, (d); III., 
 
 85, {(f), ii. . . ^ „ 
 
 Tliinkmg, verbs of, construction with, II., 
 12; III., 101, (ft). 
 
 Third declension, accusative in im, abla' 
 tive in i, genitive plural in iuin, III., 
 49, (c). 
 
 Threatening, verbs of, with future infini- 
 tive, II., 13; with dative, II., 69. 
 
 Time, duration of, II., 92; III., 83, (c); 
 time when and within which, II., 125, 
 (b); III., 85, (ft). 
 
 totu8. declension of. III., 14 ; nouns with, 
 in ablative withfut preposition. III., 85, 
 (k), ii. 
 
 Towns, limit of motion with names of, II., 
 93, (a) ; III., 83, {g) ; place where, with 
 names of, II., 125, (a), (1); III., 85, (*), 
 i. ; place from, which, with names of, 
 II., 123, (6); III., 85, W. 
 
 trans, compounds of, with accusative, 
 II., 95; compounds with two accusa- 
 tives, II., 72. 
 
 Transitive verbs, compounded with somo 
 prepositions, take dative and accusative, 
 II., 69. 
 
 U 
 
 ubl, with perfect indicative, II., 54. 
 
 ullus, declension of. III., 14; uses of, 
 II., 189. 
 
 unus, declension of. III., 14; plural of, 
 III., 68, (a); followed by a clause of 
 characteristic, II., 36. 
 
 Urging, verbs of, construction with, II., 
 27; III., 99, (a), 2. 
 
 U8U8 {need), with ablative. III., 85, (a), ii. 
 
 ut (uti), to denote concession, II., 88, 
 (c); III., 99, (i), ii. ; in final clauses, II., 
 25; III., 99, (a); in consecutive clauses, 
 II., 33; III., 99, (6) ; substantive clauses 
 introduced by, II., 208 ; a temporal con- 
 junction, III., 74, II., (c), 99, (/), i.; 
 omission after certain verbs, II., 149, 
 163, (ft); III., 99, (a), 2, i. 
 
 uterque, declension of. III., 26; use of, 
 II., 192. 
 
 utinam, with subjunctive, to express 
 wish, II., 151, (a) ; III., 98 (a), 2. 
 
 utor, with ablative, II., 65; with two 
 ablatives, II., 76; gerundive used im- 
 personally, II., 142. 
 
 utrum . . . an, II., 42, 44. 
 
 Value, genitive of, III., 81, (g); ablative 
 of, II.,124, (^); III., 85, (i). 
 
 Verba mntiena'. et deckira/ndl, construc- 
 tion of, II., 12; III., 101, (ft); personal 
 construction in passive, II., 14 ; 111., 101, 
 
 (ft), ii- 
 Verbal adjectives, with genitive, II., 117, 
 (ft); gerundive, II., 140-143; HI., 104; 
 participles, II., 144-148; III., 102. 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS. 
 
 ^51 
 
 o 
 
 Verbal nouns, infinitive, II., 130, 132; III., 
 191 ; gerund, II., 133, 134; III., 103 ; su 
 pine, II., 135-139; III, 105. ' 
 
 Verbs, conjugation of. III., 27-46 ; Princi- 
 pe parts of. III., 64, (a) ; deponent, III., 
 68; senii-deponent. III., 68, (6); defec- 
 tive and imi^rsonal. III., 72; irregular 
 orms Ill.,66; position of, 11., 2; III, 
 
 l^tl'lToir' "' ^"*' '*'' ^"^ 
 Verse, III., 111. '" 
 
 vescor, with the ablative, II.. 65 
 
 "n?f S), <^r*"' ^'^«*«'"-> -e Of. 
 
 vldeop, dative with. III., 82, {d), iii. 
 
 in o.J"^^''* "^••'•ation. II. 210, 220; 
 IH.,99, (e), 1. » 
 
 yl8, declension of. III., ft. 
 
 Vocative case. III., 84. ' 
 
 Voices, inflections of. III., 27-39; active 
 
 and passive, III., 96. ' 
 
 ^S 7"Jugation of, III., 43; a modal 
 verp, il., 19, with accusative and in- 
 151 S' ' ^^ ' "^'^^ subjunctive, n., 
 W 
 
 ^f9«'. n/^«^?^°.'' ^'^^ ablat've, II.. 
 Waybywhich, III.,85, (a),ii. 
 
 in.', 98,'IaKT^''^' "•' ^^^' <''^' ^^2 = 
 ^O'l'iMo'-mation of, III.. 75, 76 ; order of, 
 
 Year, months of, II., 222, footnote 1. 
 rou, expressed by til or vos, Hi.. 89, iv 
 r&wr. expressed by tuus or vcster. III.,